JP2024052328A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can further increase the interest in gaming compared to conventional machines by using new effects. [Solution] A gaming machine comprising a main frame and a gaming board attached to the main frame, a display device provided on the gaming board and capable of performing a predetermined display, and an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect using at least the display device, the effect execution means being capable of executing a special effect that displays a board image imitating the gaming board on the display device based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition, and when the board image is displayed during the special effect, a specific effect that narrows the visible area of the board image can be executed. [Selected Figure] Fig. 209

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

In conventional gaming machines, a display device is provided on the game board, and images of characters or the like that match the motif of the game board are displayed on the display device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2022-7733 A

However, conventional presentations only focus the player's attention on the display device, and have little effect on other parts of the game board, making it difficult to further increase interest in the game by simply using the same presentation as before.

The present invention was made in consideration of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase the interest in gaming compared to conventional machines through new presentations.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are shown below. The actions and other details will be explained as necessary. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and other details will be shown in the embodiments of the invention as appropriate, but are not intended to be limiting.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device comprising the steps of:
A gaming machine including a main body frame and a game board attached to the main body frame,
A display device provided on the game board and capable of performing a predetermined display;
A performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance using at least the display device;
Equipped with
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect of displaying a board image imitating the game board on the display device based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition,
When the board image is displayed during the special effect, a specific effect of narrowing the visible area of the board image can be executed.

In the above configuration, a special effect can be executed in which a board image resembling a game board is displayed on the display device based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. Therefore, when a special effect is executed, the player can compare the board image with the game board, and attention can be drawn to parts of the game board other than the display device, thereby enhancing interest in the game. In addition, when a board image is displayed during a special effect, a specific effect can be executed in which the visible area of the board image is narrowed. Therefore, when a special effect is executed, attention can be drawn to whether the visible area of the board image is narrowed (see, for example, paragraphs 3672-3786, figures 209-227, etc.).

In this way, the present invention can provide a gaming machine that can further increase gaming interest compared to conventional machines through new presentations.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine shown with the upper side tilted forward. This is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the door frame, main body frame, and outer frame that make up the pachinko machine, each rotated on hinges to open. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front, disassembled into its main components. This is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine, broken down into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame removed. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing the game board separated from the main body frame in FIG. 8 . This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame and game board removed. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10. 11 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 as seen obliquely from the front. This is an exploded oblique view seen from the front with the outer frame and main body frame disassembled. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and main body frame disassembled from each other, as seen from the rear. This is a plan cross-sectional view of the outer frame cut in the center in the vertical direction. A perspective view showing the lower part of the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame as seen from the front, disassembled into its main components. This is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 cut at the center from top to bottom. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in FIG. 19. FIG. 9 is a front view of the main part, showing the launch unit, the foul unit, etc. in cross section in the front view of FIG. 8 . This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame base unit in the main body frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view from behind of the main frame base unit of the main frame, disassembled into its main components. 1A is a front view of a main body frame base in a main body frame base unit, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing in an oblique view the state in which multiple main body frame bases are stacked. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launching unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launching unit in the main body frame seen from the back. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the ball launching unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the ball launching unit as seen from the rear. (a) is an oblique view of the launching unit cover of the ball launching unit viewed from the rear left, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the ball launching unit showing only the launching unit cover in cross section when viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is a front view of the ball launching unit showing the launch subtraction sensor and the launching hammer in dashed lines. 1A is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit with the foul shutter in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit with the foul shutter in an open state. 13A is a perspective view of a foul unit according to a second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 13B is a perspective view of the foul unit according to the second embodiment as seen from the rear. 13A is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit according to the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 13B is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit according to the second embodiment as seen from the rear. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter in an open state. 1A is a perspective view of the circulating ball path unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the circulating ball path unit in the main body frame seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the circulating ball path unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the circulating ball path unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a plan view showing only the ball serpentine member and ball removal shutter in the circulating ball path unit, and (b) is an oblique view from the front showing only the ball serpentine member and ball removal shutter in the circulating ball path unit. (a1) is an explanatory diagram showing the ball removal shutter and ball snaking member in the closed position together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross-section, (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing only the ball removal shutter portion in (a1) from the bottom, (b1) is an explanatory diagram showing the ball removal shutter and ball snaking member in the open position together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross-section, and (b2) is an explanatory diagram showing only the ball removal shutter portion in (b1) from the bottom. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a circulating ball path unit in cross section at the out ball sensor location, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a circulating ball path unit in cross section at the safe ball sensor location. (a) is an oblique view from the front showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the serpentine cover of the circulating ball path unit removed, and (b) is an oblique view from the back showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the serpentine cover of the circulating ball path unit removed. A plan view showing the ball serpentine member, serpentine cover, ball removal shutter, and gauge section in the circulating ball path unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the key parts of the rear cross section cut at the out ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism in the circulating ball path unit attached to the main frame closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the cover member in (a) is open. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the ball snaking member and ball removal tray with an iron ball magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the closed position, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the ball snaking member and ball removal tray with an iron ball magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the open position, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the ball snaking member and ball removal tray with the ball removal shutter slid from the position (b) to the closed position with an iron ball magnetically attached to the underside. (a) is an oblique view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front left, (b) is an oblique view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front right, and (c) is an oblique view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the rear. 1 is an exploded oblique view of the ball lifting unit, showing the state in which the ball grinding motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball grinding cassette is removed. FIG. (a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit without the ball polishing cassette installed, (b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit together with the ball polishing cassette with the ball polishing motor base and cassette pressing piece open, and (c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit with the ball polishing cassette installed. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the door frame being closed when the ball grinding cassette is not completely locked, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the door frame moves in the closing direction from the state in (a) and the protrusion of the door frame abuts the tip of the ball grinding motor base, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the door frame is closed from the state in (b) and the ball grinding cut is locked. This is an enlarged front view showing the main parts with the ball grinding cassette removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the main body frame. (a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball grinding mechanism and ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) is a plan view of the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism as seen from arrow A in (b). FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. 1A is an enlarged perspective view of the lifting inlet sensor and lifting outlet sensor areas, and shows the ball lifting unit from the rear left, and FIG. 1B is a plan cross-sectional view of the ball lifting unit cut at the lifting inlet sensor area. An explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the areas in front of and behind a ball sensor consisting of a photosensor in the ball passage. (a) is an oblique view of the ball polishing cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is an oblique view of the ball polishing cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) is a right side cross-sectional view of the ball polishing cassette cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the ball throwing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball throwing unit in the main body frame seen from the rear. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the ball throwing unit seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the ball throwing unit seen from the rear. This is a front cross-sectional view of the ball sending unit cut at the pre-launch sensor location. 13 is an oblique view showing the main body frame opened relative to the outer frame, and the rear cover and frame board unit opened. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of a portion of a frame substrate unit in the outer frame and the main body frame. FIG. This is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the main body frame with the frame substrate unit open. This is an explanatory diagram showing the various passages for game balls on the rear side of the main body frame from the rear. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the flow of game balls in the main body frame. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a launch permission process. 13 is a flowchart showing a ball possession subtraction process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for adding balls in possession using foul balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a launch control process. 4 is a time chart showing the operation of the launch solenoid and the ball delivery solenoid in the launch sequence. 67, and (b) is a flowchart showing the ball count subtraction process in the case of the launch control process of (a). A flowchart showing prize ball processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a lifting motor operation process. 11 is a table showing the relationship between the lift inlet sensor and the lift outlet sensor and the operation of the lift motor. 13 is a graph showing the relationship between the launching operation of a game ball and the operation of a ball lifting unit. 11 is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. 1A is a flowchart showing security processing, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing security processing of an embodiment different from that of FIG. 13 is a table showing the relationship between the low circulating ball sensor and the high circulating ball sensor and error notification. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range by a magnetic sensor on a game board, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body where magnetic lines from a magnet cannot be detected, (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body where magnetic lines from a magnet can be detected, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and holding part separated. This is a front view of the game board, with the transparent center gimmicks and other parts shown as opaque. FIG. 79 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 78 as seen from the front right. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 as seen from the front left. FIG. 79 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board, showing the inside of the game area where game balls circulate, by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. FIG. 1A is a front view of the lottery device in the center device, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the lottery device as seen from above in front. This is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery device in the center device, cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a lottery device in a state where the game ball cannot loop, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a lottery device in a state where the game ball can loop. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in a lottery device. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board in a normal state. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back-front rising decoration unit of the back-front performance unit has been dropped from the standby position to the performance position from the normal state. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear rising decoration of the rear performance unit being moved from the retracted position to the appearing position from the normal state. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which, from the normal state, the back front rising decoration unit of the back front performance unit has been dropped from the standby position to the performance position, and the back rear rising decoration of the back rear performance unit has been moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the center device of the first embodiment attached to a game panel, cut halfway in the vertical direction, together with the previous components. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body in the center piece disassembled into a front decorative part and a rear decorative part from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body consisting of a front decorative part and a rear decorative part from the front. This is an explanatory diagram showing the center frame of the center gimmick in Figure 94 placed on a stand with its rear end facing down. This is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross section of a center accessory having a center frame to which a decorative body different from that shown in Figure 94 is attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the main parts of the center role of the second embodiment from within the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the center role of (a) with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on a stand. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a gaming board having a center device of a third embodiment with the rear side of the gaming panel omitted. This is an exploded oblique view of the center gimmick and game panel in Figure 99, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the center part in Figure 99, viewed from the front. 13A to 13G are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center role piece of the third embodiment. 10A is a front view showing a main part of a game board on which a side unit of a second embodiment is provided, and FIG. 10B is a perspective view of FIG. 103, (a) is an exploded oblique view showing the side unit disassembled from the game panel on the game board of FIG. 103, (b) is an exploded oblique view showing the side unit of (a) disassembled from the front, (c) is an exploded oblique view of the side unit of (b) seen from the back, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in vertical cross section. An explanatory diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the relationship between the side unit and the game panel in Figure 104. An explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different configuration from that of the side unit in Figure 103 in vertical cross section together with a game panel. 105A is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different shape from the side unit shown in FIG. 105 in vertical cross section together with a game panel, and FIG. 105B is an explanatory diagram showing an oblique view of the main parts of the LED board and board cover of the side unit in FIG. 105A. An explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different configuration from the side unit shown in Figure 107 in vertical cross section together with a game panel. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit of a different type together with a game panel. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit of a different type together with a game panel. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a side unit of a further different type together with a game panel, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross-section of FIG. (a) is a front view showing the main parts of a game board on which a side unit of the third embodiment is provided, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the outlet area in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of (b). 112. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the outlet portion of a game board provided with a side unit having a finger hook portion of a different shape from that shown in FIG. 112, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in longitudinal section. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a panel plate of a game panel in which an opening to which a side unit is attached and an outlet are continuously connected. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided rearward of the LED board, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided rearward of the LED board in a form different from that of FIG. 1A, FIG. 1C is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to overlap the LED board, and FIG. 1D is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided around the entire circumference of the unit cover. An explanatory diagram showing a frame decoration member that can be attached and detached to a door frame. 13 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the door frame is opened and the frame decoration member is detached during normal business hours. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is open in reuse confirmation state A and then the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame is next opened. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is open in reuse confirmation state B and then the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame is next opened. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is detached while the door frame is open in reuse confirmation state A. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is detached while the door frame is open in reuse confirmation state B. 13 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at the judgment timing that the frame decoration member is not connected. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is open in an error state and reuse confirmation state A, and then the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame is next opened. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls dispensed calculated in accordance with the progress of the limit counter. This is a table showing the conditions for clearing the "amount of balls calculated before the stop state begins" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state." 13 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and play is restricted. 13 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when restrictions on play are lifted when the power is turned back on after being shut off. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the moment the game ball enters the big prize opening during a big win game. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters a general winning slot while a special pattern is being displayed in a changing state. This is the limit clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or during a stop-play state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a normal state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a play stop state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. This is a specific example of what happens when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or during a dead end state. This is a specific example of what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during a normal state or during a deadlock state. This is a specific example of what happens when a minor or major abnormality occurs during the end preparation state. 11 is a time chart showing a transition of advance notice display after advance notice display has started. 13 is a modified example of the restriction clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. 11 is a time chart showing the start of output of a special external signal before the start of a stop preparation state and a stop state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a stop-like state occurs after the stop-state is cleared when the power is turned on. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when an advance notice display or an indication that progress is impossible is displayed during standby mode. 13 is a time chart showing the operation of the movable body when the special pattern is not changed to a stop state during the changing display. This is a time chart showing the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. This is a time chart showing the case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during operation while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. This is a time chart showing a case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the varying display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated. This is a specific example of a presentation in which a state is reached where the movable body is stopped during its operation while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then moved. This is another example of a specific presentation in which a stop state is entered before the timing of the movable body's movement during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then moved. 11 is a table comparing the notification modes regarding light emission and sound in a normal standby state, an energy saving mode, and a stopped state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to an energy saving mode during a play stop state. 13 is a table for comparing notification modes related to light emission and sound when transitioning to notification mode C during a stalled state. 13 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when transitioning to notification mode C during a play stop state. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a first manager's operation or a second manager's operation is performed during an energy saving mode and the machine transitions to a stop-play state. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view showing the rear side of a side unit of still another different type. 157 is an enlarged side view showing the vicinity of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 156. 157 is an enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the ball sensor shown in FIG. 156. A schematic perspective view showing the back side of a starting port unit of a different type. This is an enlarged rear view showing the area near the second starting port sensor shown in Figure 159. FIG. 11 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of the main wiring. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. 11 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board A1 is detached when the power is cut off. FIG. This is a table showing the conditions for clearing the number of balls held. This is a time chart showing the establishment of the conditions for the occurrence of a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be calculated. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the counting button switch is operated. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to a ball removal state upon power-on. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to a ball removal state upon power-on. This is a diagram showing a magnetic sensor provided around the foul ball sensor. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor. 1 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on with no game board installed. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a portion of the first center gimmick and the third center gimmick. 1A to 1C are schematic front views showing a first center role and a second center role. 1A to 1C are schematic front views showing a first center role and a third center role. A front view showing another embodiment of the center feature. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game board from the front right. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game board from the rear right. 180(a) is an end view showing the AA' end face of FIG. 178, and (b) is an end view showing another aspect of the game board shown in FIG. 180(a). A schematic oblique view of the game panel from the front right. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game panel from the rear right. 182 is a cross-sectional view showing the AA' cross section of FIG. 181. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game board from the front right. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game board from the rear right. 185 is a schematic end view showing the AA' end surface of FIG. 184. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a portion of the game board viewed from the front right. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a portion of the game board viewed from the rear right. 1 is a schematic perspective view of the game board from the front right. 19 is a schematic end view showing the AA' end surface of FIG. 189. 1 is a front perspective view showing a portion of the game board. 1 is a rear perspective view showing a portion of the game board. FIG. 193 is an enlarged perspective view of a portion of the front component of FIG. 192; FIG. 13 is a side view showing a portion of the component placed on a flat surface. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the shape of a first positioning pin. 1 is a perspective view showing a portion of a gaming panel to which the component is attached; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view showing the game board. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view from the front showing the game board. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the lower right panel decorative portion. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the lower right panel decorative portion. 1 is an oblique view showing the opening/closing axis side of the game board. FIG. 1A is a front view showing the front surface of the side unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view showing the rear surface of the side unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded view showing the film member detached from the side unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing the structure of the film member of the present embodiment in detail, in which the film member is exploded into a plurality of film layers. A figure showing modified examples of the notation format of the winning slot and the winning slot in Figures 202 and 203. 10A is a front view showing the front surface of a side unit of another embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a rear view showing the rear surface of the side unit of another embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a game board having a front unit. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine having a game board with a front unit assembled thereto. This is a specific example of a production process to explain the outline of the spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a spot the difference production process. This is a specific example of a production to explain a variation in which the answer to the spot the difference production is not announced. This is a specific example of a presentation to explain a modified example in which the luminous decorative body has a different shape. This is a specific example of a presentation to explain a modified example in which the patterns on the game board are different. This is a specific example of a presentation to explain modified examples in which a specific component is present or absent. This is a specific example of a hint effect to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect (hint effect A) to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect (hint effect B) to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect (hint effect C) to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect (hint effect D) to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect to explain the hint effect. This is a specific example of a hint effect to explain the hint effect.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 7. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the upper side tilted forward. Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front, and Fig. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Fig. 5 is a perspective view of the door frame, main body frame, and outer frame that constitute the pachinko machine in an open state after being rotated on hinges. Fig. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is installed and used in an island facility in an amusement hall. This pachinko machine 1 is a so-called enclosed type gaming machine or managed gaming machine in which a large number of gaming balls B (for example, 40 to 60 balls) are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside, and the gaming balls B circulate internally so that the player does not come into contact with them. In this pachinko machine 1, the number of balls held by the player is converted into digital data and handled as held ball data.

The game ball B enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 only needs to have the same diameter (hereinafter also referred to as diameter D; diameter D = 11 mm) as the game ball used in conventional pachinko machines, and may be made of, for example, non-magnetic stainless steel such as SUS304, or may be a conventional iron ball (SB). Note that if game ball B is made of stainless steel, it will not rust like a conventional iron ball, even if it is enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 for a long period of time.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player's side through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots the game ball B.

[2. Outer Frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 8 to 16. Fig. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame removed. Fig. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the game board separated from the main body frame in Fig. 8. Fig. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame and game board removed, Fig. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in Fig. 10, and Fig. 12 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in Fig. 10, seen from the diagonal front. Fig. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame disassembled, seen from the front, and Fig. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame disassembled, seen from the rear. Fig. 15 is a plan sectional view of the outer frame cut at the center in the vertical direction. Fig. 16 is a perspective view showing the lower part of the outer frame.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall (not shown), and the main frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward and can be attached detachably. The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame body 10 formed as a vertically long frame overall, an outer frame assembly metal fitting 20 to which the outer frame body 10 is attached, an outer frame hinge mechanism 30 that supports the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, an outer frame lock metal fitting (not shown) for locking the main frame 4 in a closed state, a fascia board 45 attached to the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame body 10, and a sliding board 46 attached to the upper surface of the fascia board 45.

The outer frame body 10 of the outer frame 2 comprises a left frame body 11 and a right frame body 12 which extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides, an upper frame body 13 which connects the upper ends of the left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12, and a lower frame body 14 which connects the lower ends of the left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12. The left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12 are each formed from an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The upper frame body 13 and the lower frame body 14 are formed from wood. The left frame body 11, the right frame body 12, the upper frame body 13, and the lower frame body 14 have the same dimensions in the front-to-rear direction.

The outer frame assembly fittings 20 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left fitting that connects the left frame body 11 and the upper frame body 13, an upper right fitting that connects the right frame body 12 and the upper frame body 13, a lower left fitting that connects the left frame body 11 and the lower frame body 14, and a lower right fitting that connects the right frame body 12 and the lower frame body 14. The lower left fitting also serves as the outer frame lower hinge body 35.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 has an upper outer frame hinge body 31 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame main body 10, and a lower outer frame hinge body 35 provided at the lower left end of the outer frame main body 10.

The upper outer frame hinge body 31 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the upper left end surface of the upper frame body 13, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the outer frame main body 10. The upper outer frame hinge body 31 has a bearing groove 31a that penetrates vertically and is open on one side at the part that protrudes forward beyond the outer frame main body 10, and a locking member 32 that is provided on the underside of the part that protrudes forward beyond the outer frame main body 10 and can open and close the open part of the bearing groove 31a.

The bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 can support the main frame hinge shaft 511a by inserting the main frame hinge shaft 511a of the main frame upper hinge body 511 in the main frame 4 from the released portion. The locking member 32 of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 is normally in a locked position where the released portion of the bearing groove 31a is closed by the biasing force of an elastic piece (not shown). When the locking member 32 is moved to the released position against the biasing force of the elastic piece, the bearing groove 31a is opened to the side, and the main frame hinge shaft 511a can be inserted into the bearing groove 31a from the side, or the main frame hinge shaft 511a inserted in the bearing groove 31a can be removed from the bearing groove 31a.

The lower outer frame hinge body 35 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the upper left surface of the fascia board 45 at a portion (upper portion) that overlaps with the lower frame body 14, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the outer frame main body 10. The lower outer frame hinge body 35 has a hinge shaft 35a that protrudes upward at a portion that protrudes forward beyond the outer frame main body 10. The hinge shaft 35a of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 is inserted into the outer frame shaft hole (not shown) of the lower main frame hinge body 512 in the main frame 4, thereby rotatably supporting the lower main frame hinge body 512.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 supports the main frame hinge shaft 511a of the main frame upper hinge body 511 in the main frame 4 in the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31, and inserts the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 into the outer frame shaft hole of the main frame lower hinge body 512, thereby supporting the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Two outer frame locking fittings for the outer frame 2 are provided vertically spaced apart on the inner surface (left side surface) of the right frame body 12. The outer frame locking fittings are each engaged with the outer frame locking claws 784 of the lock unit 780 in the main frame 4, thereby locking the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 in a closed state so that it cannot be opened.

The fascia 45 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the lower frame body 14, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the lower frame body 14. The fascia 45 is made of synthetic resin. Two sliding plates 46 are provided on the upper surface of the fascia 45, spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The sliding plates 46 are against which the lower end surface of the main frame 4 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The sliding plates 46 are made of a low-friction material with low friction resistance, making the main frame 4 easier to slide and easier to open and close.

To describe the fascia 45 in more detail, the fascia 45 has a fascia main body 45a formed to cover the area of the upper end surface of the lower frame body 14 forward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction and the front end side of the lower frame body 14, a hinge body cover portion 45b provided near the left end of the upper surface of the fascia main body 45a, a rear wall portion 45c extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the hinge body cover portion 45b, and a guide display portion 45d provided on the upper surface of the fascia main body 45a.

The hinge body cover portion 45b of the curtain board 45 is provided to cover the underside and sides of the lower outer frame hinge body 35. This makes it possible for players, maintenance, transport, installation, etc., to be prevented from directly touching the lower outer frame hinge body 35 when they reach near the lower outer frame hinge body 35 by the hinge body cover portion 45b, and prevents injury from the edge of the lower outer frame hinge body 35.

In addition, the hinge body cover portion 45b covers the underside and sides of the outer frame lower hinge body 35, hiding the outer frame lower hinge body 35 from the player and enhancing the sense of unity with the curtain board 45 (curtain board main body 45a) for a better appearance.

The rear wall portion 45c of the fascia board 45 is arranged so that when the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the front surface of the rear wall portion 45c abuts against the rear surface of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 of the main body frame 4, which will be described later. As a result, when the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the main body frame lower hinge body 512 abuts against the rear wall portion 45c, thereby restricting the main body frame 4 from hinge-rotating further backward.

As shown in Figures 15 and 16, the guide display 45d of the fascia 45 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear edge of the top surface of the fascia main body 45a, and extends in the left-right direction from the rear part of the left sliding plate 46 to the rear part of the right sliding plate 46. This guide display 45d has an arrow pointing left near the left end and an arrow pointing right near the right end, and between the two arrows is displayed the words "!Do not allow fixing nails or fixing hardware to protrude into this area!" These arrows and words are engraved by the mold used to injection mold the fascia 45.

The guide display section 45d is provided so as not to come into contact with the main frame 4, which is provided so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 2. This guide display section 45d is provided to alert the worker when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment of the game hall. Specifically, when fixing the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame 2 to the island equipment with mounting screws (not shown), the guide display section 45d alerts the worker not to allow the head of the mounting screw to protrude above the guide display section 45d within the range displayed on the guide display section 45d. By fixing the outer frame 2 with the mounting screws in accordance with this alert, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the mounting screws will not come into contact with the main frame 4, and the mounting screws will not interfere with the main frame 4.

The guide display 45d makes it possible to prevent the mounting screws that secure the outer frame 2 from interfering with the main frame 4, thereby preventing the main frame 4 from being damaged by interference from the mounting screws. In addition, the guide display 45d serves as a guide for the amount of insertion of the mounting screws to secure the outer frame 2, eliminating the need to open and close the main frame 4 while inserting the mounting screws to prevent interference, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, since it has a guide display portion 45d, when checking the fixed state of the outer frame 2 to the island equipment, the guide display portion 45d can be used as a guide to easily visually check whether the condition of the mounting screws is good or not.

In addition, the guide display portion 45d, which indicates the fixing range of the mounting screws, is molded integrally with the fascia board main body 45a. Therefore, the guide display portion 45d can be provided on the outer frame 2 simply by attaching the fascia board main body 45a to the lower frame body 14 and assembling it to the outer frame 2, thereby reducing costs compared to providing the guide display portion 45d separately.

In the above embodiment, the guide display portion 45d protruding rearward from the rear end of the fascia board main body 45a is shown as extending continuously in the left-right direction from the arrow on the left end to the arrow on the right end, but this is not limited to this, and only the portions indicated by the left and right arrows may protrude rearward from the rear end of the fascia board main body 45a.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the guide display portion 45d is engraved during injection molding of the fascia board 45, but this is not limited to this, and the guide display portion 45d may be provided by attaching a sticker, printing, or painting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the guide display portion 45d is provided on the apron 45, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be provided on the lower frame 14, the sliding plate 46, etc. When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the lower frame 14, it may be, for example, by attaching a sticker, stamping with ink, or branding. When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the sliding plate 46, it may be, for example, by making a concave mark on the sliding plate 46.

3. Door Frame
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3 and Figures 5 to 7. The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a front view with approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 so as to be able to be opened and closed from the front side via the main frame 4. The door frame 3 is provided with a door frame main body 100 that is openable and closable with respect to the main frame 4 and has a game window 101 through which the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 faces forward when closed, a transparent glass 120 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame main body 100 and closes the game window 101, a ball number display unit 140 that displays the number of balls held by the player, a handle 160 that the player operates to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a cylindrical handle cover 170 that surrounds the outer periphery of the handle 160, and a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player.

The door frame 3 also includes a door frame panel 190 that extends from the bottom end of the front of the door frame body 100 across the entire width in the left-right direction at a certain height, a shelf unit 200 that protrudes forward at a location between the game window 101 and the door frame panel 190 on the front of the door frame body 100, and a performance operation unit 250 that is provided in the left-right center of the shelf unit 200 and can be operated by the player. The ball count display unit 140 and the count button switch 180 are provided on the top surface of the shelf unit 200 (top surface of the shelf portion 201).

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, a door frame left side unit 320 provided to the left of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and a door frame right side unit 340 provided to the right of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100.

The door frame body 100 has a door frame hinge mechanism 110 for mounting it to the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 has an upper door frame hinge body 111 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper left end of the door frame body 100, and a lower door frame hinge body 112 provided at the lower left end of the door frame body 100. The upper door frame hinge body 111 has an upper door frame hinge shaft 111a that protrudes upward. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the upper door frame hinge shaft 111a of the upper door frame hinge body 111 from below into the upper door frame shaft hole 511b of the upper main frame hinge body 511 described later, and inserting the lower door frame hinge shaft 112a of the lower door frame hinge body 112 from above into the lower door frame shaft hole 512b of the lower main frame hinge body 512 described later.

As shown in Figs. 5 and 7, the door frame body 100 has a protrusion 102 protruding backward from near the lower end on the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the protrusion 102 abuts against the support step 501q of the main frame base 501 in the main frame 4, which will be described later, and can lift the door frame 3 to a certain extent. According to the protrusion 102, the door frame 3 is lifted by closing the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, so that the load of the door frame 3 can be distributed to the protrusion 102 and the door frame lower hinge body 112. This makes it possible to avoid excessive load being continuously applied to the hinges (door frame lower hinge body 112 and outer frame lower hinge body 35) that enable the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, making the hinges less likely to be distorted, and even if the hinges are distorted, the door frame 3 can be lifted by the protrusion 102, so that the door frame 3 can be closed in the proper position against the main frame 4. Although not shown in the figure, the underside of the protrusion 102 has multiple ribs extending in the front-to-rear direction, which increase strength and rigidity.

The protrusion 102 has a guide surface 102a that is inclined so as to move leftward as it moves rearward. Details will be described later, but the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 is contacted by the front end of the motor base 686 when the motor base 686 of the ball lifting unit 650 is in a position other than the locked position and the door frame 3 is to be closed against the main frame 4, allowing the motor base 686 to move (rotate) to the locked position.

The ball count display 140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. The ball count display 140 is located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the shelf unit 200 and to the left of the count button switch 180.

The handle 160 is located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame body 100, that is, near the right end between the game window 101 and the door frame panel 190 on the front of the door frame body 100. The handle 160 is attached so that the player can rotate it with its axis of rotation facing forward and backward. The handle 160 is shaped like a steering wheel of an automobile, and has a central hub portion 160a, multiple spoke portions 160b (three in this case) extending outward from the hub portion 160a, and an annular ring portion 160c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 160b.

The ring portion 160c of the handle 160 is located slightly forward from the front end of the cylindrical handle cover 170, and is arranged so that the player cannot grip the ring portion 160c. Therefore, when the player rotates the handle 160, he or she will mainly do so while gripping the hub portion 160a with their fingers passing between the spoke portions 160b. In this state, the player's fingers are inserted into the cylindrical handle cover 170.

The handle 160 is equipped with a firing stop switch 161 that can be pressed by the player, a handle touch sensor 162 that detects changes in the electrostatic capacitance of the handle 160, and a handle rotation sensor 163 that detects the rotation angle of the handle 160 (see Figure 63).

When the player presses the launch stop switch 161, the frame control board 740 stops the operation of the launch solenoid 553. Therefore, if the player presses the launch stop switch 161 while rotating the handle 160, the launch of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 160. If the player then releases the pressing of the launch stop switch 161 while continuing to rotate the handle 160, the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a again with the impact strength before pressing the launch stop switch 161 (the impact strength corresponding to the rotation of the handle 160).

The handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity acting on the handle 160, and when the player touches the handle 160, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact (touch) with the handle 160. Then, when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact, if the handle 160 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the drive of the launch solenoid is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player tries to rotate the handle 160 in some way to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 553 is not driven and game ball B cannot be shot into the game area 5a. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing by rotating the handle 160 in a way that is different from the intended way, and reduces the burden (stress) placed on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The handle rotation sensor 163 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 160 is rotated, the detection axis rotates and the internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the detection axis. Therefore, when the handle 160 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation sensor 163, the driving force of the launch solenoid 553 in the ball launch unit 550 described later changes according to the internal resistance, and the game ball B can be shot into the game area 5a with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160.

The handle cover 170 extends rearward from the rear of the annular portion of the handle 160 so that its diameter widens, and is formed in a conical cylinder shape. Openings 171 that communicate with the interior are provided on the right and lower peripheral surfaces of the outer periphery of the handle cover 170. These openings 171 allow debris, liquid, etc. to be discharged downwards even if they get inside the handle cover 170.

The counting button switch 180 is located on the top surface of the shelf unit 200, to the right of the center in the left-right direction. The counting button switch 180, which will be described in detail later, can be pressed while there are balls in your possession to send the balls to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement.

The door frame fascia 190 extends left and right at a fixed height with a length equal to the left and right width of the door frame body 100, and is attached to the lower end of the front surface of the door frame body 100. The door frame fascia 190 penetrates from front to back at the center in the left and right direction, and has a duct grill 191 located in front of the bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4 described below. The duct grill 191 extends left and right in an elongated shape and is partitioned by multiple vertical lattices. This duct grill 191, which will be described in detail later, is intended to release air vibrations (wind) caused by the driving of the main body frame speaker 503 from the bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4 to the front.

The shelf unit 200 is provided in a portion between the game window 101 and the door frame panel 190 on the front side of the door frame main body 100. A spherical performance operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the left-right direction of the shelf unit 200. The shelf unit 200 has a shelf portion 201 that bulges forward from the upper end along the lower end of the game window 101 in a shelf-like shape, a speaker grill 203 that is provided below the shelf portion 201 and to the right of the performance operation unit 250, a setting adjustment button 204 that is provided on the upper surface of the shelf portion 201 and consists of four push buttons arranged in a front-rear and left-right direction, and a pair of protrusions 205 that are provided at a distance to the left and right. The setting adjustment button 204 allows the volume to be adjusted by operating the front and rear push buttons out of the four push buttons arranged in a front-rear and left-right direction, and allows the light amount to be adjusted by operating the left and right push buttons.

The top surface of the shelf section 201 is formed to be a smooth surface. On the top surface of the shelf section 201, to the right of the center in the left-right direction, a count button switch 180 is provided near the right end, and a ball count display section 140 is provided to the left of the count button switch 180. To the right of the center in the left-right direction, a setting adjustment button 204 is provided, and protrusions 205 are provided on both the left and right sides near the rear end of the setting adjustment button 204.

The pair of protrusions 205 protrude higher than the setting adjustment button 204 and have rounded upper ends. The pair of protrusions 205 are provided approximately parallel to the rear edge of the shelf portion 201. The pair of protrusions 205 can be used, for example, to prop up a smartphone on the top surface of the shelf portion 201, which is convenient.

The speaker grill 203 is located in front of the main frame speaker 503 in the main frame 4 (described later) and is made of punched metal with multiple through holes. The speaker grill 203 is symmetrical to and has the same size as the handle 160 across the center of the door frame 3, and is formed in a shape that bulges forward like the handle cover 170.

The performance operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction, with its front end protruding forward from the shelf unit 200 and its top end protruding upward from the shelf unit 200. The performance operation unit 250 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole. The performance operation unit 250 has a circular first performance button 251 provided near the center on the top surface, and an annular second performance button 252 provided to surround the first performance button 251. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first performance button 251 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second performance button 252 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 are provided on the same axis, and are inclined so that the axis moves forward as it goes upward.

The first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 are arranged so that they move upwards (pop up) in their entirety in response to the player participation type effect. The first effect button 251 can be pressed at all times, whereas the second effect button 252 can only be pressed when it pops up.

Although not shown in the figure, a vibrator (vibration device) is provided inside the first performance button 251.

The door frame top unit 300 is located above the play window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, with both left and right ends sandwiched between the upper end portions of the left side unit 320 and the right side unit 340. The door frame top unit 300 protrudes forward like a canopy. The door frame top unit 300 is equipped with a semi-tube-shaped door frame top decorative body 301 that extends left and right along the front edge and has translucency. The door frame top decorative body 301 is curved in the front-to-rear direction so that the center in the left-to-right direction is located furthest forward in a plan view.

Although not shown, the door frame top unit 300 has a door frame top decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the door frame top decorative body 301, a pair of door frame top speakers 303 spaced apart on the left and right and outputting sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 located on both the left and right outside of the pair of door frame top speakers 303. The pair of door frame top speakers 303 are full-range speakers (or mid-range speakers), and the pair of door frame top side speakers 304 are tweeters (high-frequency speakers).

The door frame left side unit 320 is installed on the front of the door frame main body 100 to the left of the game window 101, and extends vertically from near the upper end of the door frame main body 100 to near the speaker grill 203 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. The door frame left side unit 320 extends over its entire length in the vertical direction and is equipped with a semi-tubular door frame left side decorative body 321 that is translucent. The door frame left side decorative body 321 is curved to the right near its lower end.

Although not shown in the figure, the door frame left side unit 320 has a door frame left side decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 321.

The door frame right side unit 340 is located on the front of the door frame main body 100 to the right of the play window 101, and is vertically long from near the top end of the door frame main body 100 to the handle cover 170 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. The door frame right side unit 340 protrudes further forward than the door frame left side unit 320, and is formed in the shape of a vertically long partition.

The right door frame unit 340 includes a semi-tube-shaped right door frame decorative body 341 that extends vertically along the front end and has translucency, a left side decorative body (not shown) on the right side of the door frame that is provided behind the right side decorative body 341 and forms the left side, a right side decorative body (not shown) on the right side of the door frame that is translucent and forms the right side, and a right side decorative board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the right side decorative body 341, the left side decorative body on the right side of the door frame, and the right side decorative body on the right side of the door frame. The right side decorative body 341 is curved leftward near the bottom end.

The door frame right side unit 340 also has an opening 342 that penetrates from front to back near the bottom end and through which the keyhole 782 of the lock unit 780 faces forward.

[3-1. Counting button switch]
The counting button switch 180 is provided on the top surface of the shelf unit 200, to the right of the center in the left-right direction. When the counting button switch 180 is pressed when there are balls in hand (number of balls in hand > 0), the balls can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. The counting button switch 180, which will be described in detail later, can send balls one by one or a predetermined number (for example, 250 balls) depending on the time it is pressed. The number of balls sent to the game ball lending device 8 is sent to the management server 9 via the communication network, and an IC card storing the number of balls in hand is ejected from the game ball lending device 8.

The game ball lending device 8 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment of the game hall (also called a sand). Although not shown in detail, the game ball lending device 8 is provided with an insertion slot for inserting cash or prepaid cards, a card slot for inserting/removing IC cards, a ball lending button switch 8a, a return button switch, a display unit that displays the amount of money inserted and the number of balls counted, etc. When cash or the like is inserted into the insertion slot and the ball lending button switch 8a is pressed, the game ball lending device 8 lends out a predetermined number of game balls B within the amount inserted. In this embodiment, the number of lent game balls B is transmitted as digital data to the frame control board and also transmitted to the management server 9 via a communication network for management.

To go into more detail about the counting button switch 180, when the player has balls in hand and presses the counting button switch 180 for a short time (e.g., pressing the button once for less than 500 ms), one game ball B is counted from the balls in hand. When the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time (e.g., pressing the button once for more than 500 ms), 250 game balls B are counted at the count notification timing every predetermined time (e.g., 300 ms) until the number of balls in hand falls below 250. When the number of balls in hand falls below 250 during the long press, one game ball B is counted. In addition, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time (e.g., pressing the button once for more than 500 ms), the total number of balls in hand may be counted unconditionally even if the counting button switch 180 is not continuously pressed.

When counting is performed by pressing the counting button switch 180, the number of balls held displayed on the ball count display unit 140 is subtracted and displayed, and the counted number of balls is displayed on a display unit (not shown) of the game ball lending device 8.

[4. Main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 8 to 14, 17 to 21, etc. Figure 17 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 19 is a plan view of the pachinko machine of Figure 10 cut at the center from top to bottom. Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 19. Figure 21 is a front view of the main parts of the front view of Figure 8, showing the firing unit, foul unit, etc. in cross section.

The main body frame 4 is formed in a box-like shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is housed inside so that it can be attached and detached from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 is attached so that it can be opened and closed so that the open front side can be closed.

The main frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; a ball launching unit 550 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a foul unit 570 for collecting game balls B that were shot by the ball launching unit 550 but not shot into the game area 5a; a circulating ball path unit 600 for sending game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and game balls B collected by the foul unit 570 to the ball launching unit 550; a ball lifting unit 650 for moving game balls B upward from the downstream end of the circulating ball path unit 600; and a ball sending unit 700 for sending the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 one by one to the ball launching unit 550.

The main frame 4 also includes a ball receiving tray 720 for receiving game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600, a frame base unit 730 having a frame control board 740 that controls the ball launching unit 550 and the ball lifting unit 650, and a lock unit 780 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 24. Figure 22 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Figure 23 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit in the main body frame as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Figure 24(a) is a front view of the main body frame base in the main body frame base unit, and (b) is an explanatory perspective view showing a state in which multiple main body frame bases are stacked.

The main frame base unit 500 is supported on the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed forward, and is also capable of supporting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed forward. The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball sending unit 700, a ball receiving tray 720, a frame base unit 730, a lock unit 780, etc.

The main frame base unit 500 is equipped with a main frame base 501 which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle as a whole and has a game board insertion section 502 which penetrates from the front to the back and into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, and a base wall section 501b which is provided below the game board insertion section 502, and a side reinforcing plate 509 which reinforces the left side of the main frame base 501.

The main frame base unit 500 also includes a main frame speaker 503 attached to the rear side of the base wall 501b of the main frame base 501, a box-shaped main frame speaker box 504 attached to the base wall 501b so as to cover the main frame speaker 503 from the rear and open at the front, and a rear cover 505 that allows the game board insertion section 502 of the main frame base 501 to be opened and closed from the rear.

Furthermore, the main body frame base unit 500 includes a game board lock member 506 attached to the main body frame base 501, a door opening switch 507 and a frame opening switch 508 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame hinge mechanism 510 attached to the main body frame base 501.

The main body frame base 501 is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The main body frame base 501 is formed of a black opaque synthetic resin. The main body frame base 501 is provided with a frame-shaped frame body 501a that does not have a left side, a game board insertion part 502 that penetrates from the upper end of the frame body 501a downward in the front-rear direction within a range of about 2/3 of the total height, a base wall part 501b provided on the lower side of the game board insertion part 502, a game board regulation part 501c that protrudes upward (into the game board insertion part 502) near the center in the left-right direction on the upper end surface of the base wall part 501b, a main body frame speaker port 501d that penetrates from the front to the back near the left end of the base wall part 501b and through which the main body frame speaker 503 faces forward, and a bass reflex duct 501e that is long and penetrates from the front to the back near the lower end of the base wall part 501b in the center in the left-right direction.

The main frame base 501 also has a tray insertion recess 501f recessed from the front side to the rear above the bass reflex duct 501e in the base wall portion 501b into which the ball receiving tray 720 is inserted, and a ball storage passage insertion port 501g penetrating from front to back above the tray insertion recess 501f in the base wall portion 501b into which the ball serpentine member 613 and serpentine cover 614 of the circulating ball passage unit 600 are inserted.

The main frame base 501 also includes a foul unit mounting section 501h and a ball launching unit mounting section 501i, which are arranged side by side above the ball storage passage insertion port 501g on the front surface of the base wall section 501b, a ball lifting unit mounting section 501j, which is arranged to the right of the ball launching unit mounting section 501i on the base wall section 501b, a ball sending unit mounting section 501k, which is arranged at a position behind the ball launching unit mounting section 501i on the rear surface of the base wall section 501b, a circulating ball path unit mounting section 501l, which is arranged on the rear surface of the base wall section 501b, and a cylinder insertion port 501m, which penetrates from front to back near the upper right corner of the base wall section 501b and through which the lock cylinder 781 of the lock unit 780 is inserted.

Furthermore, the main frame base 501 has locking claws 501n that protrude from the left and right inner walls of the tray insertion recess 501f and lock the elastic claws 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f to restrict the forward movement of the ball receiving tray 720. The main frame base 501 also has a vertically long opening 501o that penetrates from front to back at the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j.

The main frame base 501 also includes a top cover 502a extending rearward from the top end of the game board insertion section 502, a rear cover 502b extending downward in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the top cover 502a, a left side cover 502c extending rearward from the left end of the game board insertion section 502 and having its upper end connected to the top cover 502a, a right side cover 502d extending rearward from the right end of the game board insertion section 502 and having its upper end connected to the top cover 502a, and a bottom cover 502e extending rearward from the bottom end of the game board insertion section 502.

The main body frame base 501 also has a number of ventilation holes 502f penetrating the rear cover 502b, a number of upper surface recesses 502g recessed downwardly provided in the upper cover 502a, a number of lower surface recesses 502h recessed downwardly provided in the lower cover 502e, and a number of reinforcing ribs 502i provided on the lower surface of the upper cover 502a and the upper surface of the lower cover 502e, respectively.

The main frame base 501 is further provided with a visor portion 501p that is provided above the ball launching unit mounting portion 501i and blocks light from entering the ball launching unit 550 from above. This visor portion 501p can block external light from reaching the launch subtraction sensor 554, which is a photosensor of the ball launching unit 550 attached to the ball launching unit mounting portion 501i, thereby preventing false detection by the launch subtraction sensor 554.

The main frame base 501 further includes a support step 501q provided between the tray insertion recess 501f and the opening 501o, slightly above the bottom surface of the tray insertion recess 501f, and a pair of support protrusions 501r provided near the right end of the rear surface of the base wall 501b and spaced apart vertically, protruding rearward. The support step 501q has an upwardly facing surface (upper surface). When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 abuts against the support step 501q so that it can lift the door frame 3 to a certain extent, and supports part of the load of the door frame 3. A locking hole is provided on the rear end surface of the support protrusion 501r to lock the Nylatch 774 of the frame base unit 730.

The game board 5 is removably inserted from the front into the game board insertion section 502 of the main body frame base 501. The area of the game board insertion section 502 behind the base wall section 501b is surrounded by a top cover 502a, a left side cover 502c, a right side cover 502d, and a bottom cover 502e.

The game board 5 is placed on the upper end surface of the base wall portion 501b. A door opening switch 507, a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, and a ball receiving tray 720 are attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b. In addition, a main frame speaker 503, a main frame speaker box 504, a frame opening switch 508, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, and a ball sending unit 700 are attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b.

The game board restricting portion 501c restricts the left-right and rearward movement of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion portion 502. The main body frame speaker port 501d is formed in a lattice shape as shown in the figure, and is provided so as to be located behind the speaker grill 203 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4. The main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d from the rear.

The bass reflex duct 501e is formed in a rectangular cylindrical shape that is long from side to side. The bass reflex duct 501e is connected to the enclosure 504a of the main frame speaker 503, which is composed of the base wall portion 501b and the main frame speaker box 504, and is used to invert the phase of the sound output from the main frame speaker 503 to the rear and emit it forward. In this embodiment, the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e resonates and amplifies the low-frequency range of the sound output from the main frame speaker 503, making it possible to produce a deeper bass sound. The bass reflex duct 501e is located behind the duct grill 191 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The tray insertion recess 501f can support the ball receiving tray 720 removably from the front. The bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end is lower (see FIG. 20). This allows game balls B to be ejected forward even if they spill into the tray insertion recess 501f when the ball receiving tray 720 is not inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. In addition, because the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end is lower, it is possible to easily slide the placed ball receiving tray 720 forward.

The ball storage passage insertion port 501g is provided so that the ball serpentine member 613 and the front portion of the serpentine cover 614 of the circulating ball passage unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b penetrate and protrude forward. The foul unit mounting portion 501h is provided near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, to the right of the main frame speaker port 501d. The ball launching unit mounting portion 501i is provided to the right of the foul unit mounting portion 501h. The ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j is provided in a location between near the upper end and near the lower end of the base wall portion 501b.

The ball-sending unit mounting section 501k is provided on the rear surface of the base wall section 501b so that the top surface of the ball-sending unit 700 faces upward (inside the game board insertion section 502) and is provided so that the ball-sending unit 700 can be attached and detached from above. When the ball-sending unit 700 is attached to the ball-sending unit mounting section 501k, the elastic claw 709b of the ball-sending unit 700 penetrates the locking hole of the base wall section 501b to the right of the ball launching unit 550 and faces forward. In this state, the elastic claw 709b is pressed backward to elastically deform it, and the knob section 709a provided on the top surface of the ball-sending unit 700 is pinched and pulled up, allowing the ball-sending unit 700 to be removed upward.

The circulating ball path unit mounting section 501l is provided in the center of the rear surface of the base wall section 501b in the left-right direction, above the box extension section 504c of the main frame speaker box 504 (described later). The cylinder insertion port 501m is provided to the right of the ball lifting unit mounting section 501j near the upper end of the base wall section 501b.

When the game board 5 is attached to the game board insertion section 502, the top cover 502a extends rearward beyond the game board 5. As shown in Figures 17 and 18, the top cover 502a has two top recesses 502g spaced apart from each other, and these top recesses 502g eliminate some of the reinforcing ribs from the top cover 502a. This configuration makes it possible to position the top cover 502a higher by the amount of the reinforcing ribs than when multiple reinforcing ribs are lined up in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top cover, thereby ensuring the internal volume of the game board insertion section 502. Furthermore, if multiple reinforcing ribs are provided on the top surface of the top cover, some will be left behind during cleaning, which will spoil the aesthetic appearance, but in this embodiment, the aesthetic appearance can be maintained by eliminating the reinforcing ribs from the top surface of the top cover 502a.

The top surface of the top cover 502a and the bottom surfaces of the two top recesses 502g are inclined at an angle of about 2 degrees from the horizontal plane, becoming lower as they move rearward. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is usually installed so that it is tilted backwards, and the angle is generally about 0.75 degrees, resulting in a total downward slope of about 2.75 degrees. The left and right widths of the two top recesses 502g also become wider as they move rearward.

By making this gentle slope, game balls B falling from above the pachinko machine 1 flow down the upper surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g and fall into a game ball B collection path in the island equipment provided below the pachinko machine 1, where they are collected. In addition, falling objects that are not spherical, such as metal powder or screws, will remain on the upper surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g. To achieve this effect, it is desirable for the top surface of the top cover 502a to be inclined at an angle of less than 15 degrees from the horizontal.

The top cover 502a is formed in a flat plate shape, so that the undersides (rear sides) of the two top recesses 502g that are recessed from above in the top cover 502a protrude downward from the underside of the top cover 502a (see FIG. 24(b)). In other words, the top recesses 502g are in the form of convex parts that protrude downward on the underside of the top cover 502a. The end points, i.e., the front walls, of the two top recesses 502g are behind the abutment surface 502j, which contacts the rear surface of the upper edge of the game board 5 for positioning.

In other words, the back side (lower side) of the top cover 502a has the back sides of two top recesses 502g. The tips (front ends) of the back sides of the two top recesses 502g form abutment surfaces 502j, which come into contact with the rear surface of the upper edge of the game board 5 to position the game board 5.

The back side (lower surface side) of the top cover 502a has four of the multiple reinforcing ribs 502i, which, together with the top surface recess 502g, reinforce the top cover 502a. By providing the reinforcing ribs 502i on the inner lower surface of the top cover 502a rather than on its upper surface, it is possible to maintain the aesthetic appearance of the top surface (outer surface) of the top cover 502a.

As shown in FIG. 23, multiple ribs 502k are provided at the front end of the top surface of the top cover 502a. The upper part of these ribs 502k is covered by the frame body 501a of the edge of the main frame base 501, and further covered by the outer frame 2, so that metal powder and the like does not fall from above and does not affect the aesthetic appearance.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, no gates are provided on the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g to feed molten resin during injection molding. This is to prevent unevenness caused by the gates from impeding the flow of the game balls B down the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g.

Similarly, consideration has been given to not leaving marks from ejector pins used to remove the injection-molded main frame base 501 from the mold on the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g. Normally, ejector pin marks are unlikely to impede the flow of game balls B if burrs are properly removed, but they can spoil the aesthetic appearance when cleaning the top surface of the top cover 502a or the top recess 502g where metal powder and the like have accumulated. For this reason, consideration has been given to not leaving marks from the ejector pins.

The rear cover 502b of the main body frame base 501 is connected at both the left and right ends to the left side cover 502c and the right side cover 502d, respectively. This rear cover 502b has multiple ventilation holes 502f, which are slit-shaped and long in the vertical direction, lined up in the left-right direction.

The left side cover 502c on the main body frame base 501 has the same depth in the front-to-rear direction as the top cover 502a. In a plan view, the left side cover 502c is inclined so that it moves to the right as it moves rearward. Two cover locking portions 502l for locking the rear cover 505 are provided at the rear end of the left side cover 502c, spaced apart vertically.

The right side cover 502d of the main body frame base 501 is inclined so as to move leftward as it moves rearward in plan view. The right side cover 502d has a portion below the rear cover 502b cut out from the rear end toward the front, and the rear end of this portion is located forward of the rear end of the top cover 502a. In other words, the right side cover 502d is formed with a shorter depth below the rear cover 502b. At the rear end of the right side cover 502d, below the rear cover 502b, multiple cover shaft supports 502m are provided at intervals in the vertical direction to support the rear cover 505 so that it can rotate on a hinge.

The bottom cover 502e of the main frame base 501 extends rearward from a position one step higher than the bottom end of the game board insertion section 502 (the top surface of the base wall section 501b). The bottom cover 502e is provided so as to exclude the area above the circulating ball path unit mounting section 501l, and in the area to the left of the circulating ball path unit mounting section 501l, it extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the left side cover 502c, and in the area to the right of the circulating ball path unit mounting section 501l, it extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the section of the right side cover 502d that is formed with a short depth. This bottom cover 502e is inclined so that it becomes higher as it approaches the rear.

The lower recess 502h of the main frame base 501 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the lower cover 502e. The lower recess 502h is open toward the front, and is formed so that the width from left to right narrows toward the rear. The bottom surface of the lower recess 502h is inclined so that it becomes higher toward the rear, similar to the lower cover 502e. Since the lower cover 502e is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surface (back surface) of the lower recess 502h, which is recessed from above in the lower cover 502e, protrudes downward from the lower surface of the lower cover 502e (see FIG. 24(b)). In other words, the lower recess 502h is in the form of a convex portion protruding downward on the lower surface of the lower cover 502e. A reinforcing rib 502i is provided inside the lower recess 502h.

The multiple reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the lower surface of the upper cover 502a and on the bottom surface of the lower recess 502h. Four reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the upper cover 502a, two of which extend forward from the two abutment surfaces 502j, and the remaining two are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the two upper recesses 502g. The reinforcing ribs 502i provided on both the left and right outer sides of the upper recess 502g have their rear ends connected to the rear cover 502b and extend forward shorter than the upper recess 502g.

Of the multiple reinforcing ribs 502i, two on both the left and right outer sides of the upper surface recess 502g in the upper cover 502a and two on each of the two lower surface recesses 502h are provided to function as the ribs. In detail, the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment is configured so that it can be placed horizontally without rattling when placed on a workbench or the like with the front end side facing down. In addition, the main body frame base 501 is formed so that it can be stored stacked, as shown in FIG. 24(b). At this time, the four reinforcing ribs 502i as ribs abut against each other, preventing the stacked main body frame bases 501 from interlocking with each other. This reduces the time required for removal due to the parts (main body frame bases 501) interlocking with each other, and improves the efficiency of assembly work. In addition, since the main body frame bases 501 can be stacked, it is possible to increase the number of packages and reduce the size of the packaging box.

According to the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment, the top cover 502a of the main body frame base 501, which protects the game board 5 stored in the main body frame 4 from above, has a gentle slope that slopes downward toward the rear, so game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. that fall from above the pachinko machine 1 can be properly handled. Specifically, spherical game balls B can be made to flow down the top surface of the top cover 502a and fall below the pachinko machine 1, so game balls B are collected as they are and do not cause any trouble. Furthermore, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be kept on the top cover 502a without flowing down, so they also do not cause any trouble.

In addition, there are no ventilation holes 502f on the top surface of this top cover 502a. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a, which is molded by an injection molding machine, does not have a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, no unevenness caused by the gate is created on the top surface of the top cover 502a, so the flow of the game ball B is not impeded.

Similarly, consideration has been given to not leaving any ejector pin marks when the injection-molded main frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Normally, ejector pin marks are unlikely to impede the flow of game balls B if the burrs are properly removed, but there is a possibility that ejector pin marks will remain when cleaning the top surface of the top cover 502a where metal powder or the like has accumulated, and this may mar the aesthetic appearance. For this reason, by not leaving any ejector pin marks, the aesthetic appearance can be easily restored by cleaning.

In addition, this top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. By molding it in this way, it is possible to reduce assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board housing frame).

The top cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 stored inside with its top surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) on the inside that contacts the game board 5 to position it. This fixes the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a, and fulfills the purpose of the game board storage frame (main frame 4) of protecting the game board 5.

As shown in FIG. 18, etc., no reinforcing ribs are provided on the top surface of the top cover 502a, so that ribs do not make cleaning difficult and maintenance is easier. Note that there are other members (e.g., frame 501a, outer frame 2, etc.) that cover the top surface of the top cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign objects will not fall.

The side reinforcing plate 509 is U-shaped in plan view, open to the right, and is attached to the main frame base 501 to replace the open left side of the frame body 501a. The side reinforcing plate 509 is made of an extruded metal such as an aluminum alloy. The side reinforcing plate 509 has two left positioning members 509a spaced apart vertically. The left positioning member 509a is used to position the left side of the game board 5.

The main frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear side of the base wall 501b so as to close the main frame speaker port 501d of the main frame base 501 from the rear. The main frame speaker 503 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low-pitched sounds.

The main frame speaker box 504 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front, and is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main frame speaker 503 from the rear. The main frame speaker box 504 forms an enclosure 504a for the main frame speaker 503 by attaching it to the base wall portion 501b.

The main frame speaker box 504 has a box main body 504b located behind the main frame speaker 503, a box extension 504c connected to the bottom end of the box main body 504b and extending to the right in a front view, and a frame board unit pivot support 504d provided on the rear surface of the box main body 504b. The box extension 504c of the main frame speaker box 504 extends to the right near the right end of the main frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the bass reflex duct 501e, and a portion of it extends further rearward than the box main body 504b.

The enclosure 504a is composed of a box main body 504b and a box extension 504c, and is connected to the outside through a bass reflex duct 501e. In other words, the bass reflex duct 501e, the main frame speaker 503, and the main frame speaker box 504 form a phase-inverting bass reflex speaker.

In more detail, a predetermined sound is output forward and backward from the main body frame speaker 503. The sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 503 is emitted forward of the pachinko machine 1 through the main body frame speaker port 501d and the speaker grill 203.

Meanwhile, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 503 vibrates the air inside the main frame speaker box 504 (enclosure 504a). This enclosure 504a is open to the front (outside) by the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e, so the sound is emitted forward from the bass reflex duct 501e. At this time, because the bass reflex duct 501e is formed into a cylindrical shape of a certain length, the low-frequency range is amplified inside it by resonance caused by the vibration of the air column, and the sound is emitted forward in an inverted phase.

As a result, the sound output from the main frame speaker 503 to the front and the sound output to the rear do not cancel each other out and attenuate, but rather resonate with each other and amplify, so that even though the diameter of the main frame speaker 503 is small, it can output a loud sound with deep bass, allowing the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

The box extension 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-back direction is longer than its height in the top-to-bottom direction, and its rear end is arranged to protrude slightly rearward beyond the rear end of the frame board unit 730 (see Figure 20). When assembled to the main body frame 4, the box extension 504c covers the bottom of the frame board unit 730 so that a gap is formed between it and the frame board unit 730 (unit base 770 and power board box 772). This makes it difficult for the various wiring connected to the frame board unit 730 to droop.

As shown in FIG. 20, the box extension section 504c is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear. This allows garbage, game balls B, etc. that fall from above to be guided rearward and discharged. The box extension section 504c is also inclined so that the lower surface becomes higher toward the rear. This means that when the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the box extension section 504c does not come into contact with the lower frame 14 of the main body frame 4.

As shown in FIG. 20, the box extension section 504c is inclined so that the bottom surface rises toward the rear. This allows the bottom surface of the box extension section 504c to guide the main body frame 4 into the outer frame 2 when closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, even if the main body frame 4 is inclined.

When assembled to the main body frame 4, the main body frame speaker box 504 supports the rear end side of the tray insertion recess 501f in the main body frame base 501 so that it is suspended. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the circulating ball path unit 600 are received in the ball receiving tray 720, and even if a load (the weight of multiple game balls B) acts from above on the tray insertion recess 501f via the ball receiving tray 720, the tray insertion recess 501f will not deform.

The main frame speaker box 504 is made of transparent synthetic resin, so the main frame speaker 503 can be seen from the outside.

The back cover 505 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The back cover 505 is formed in an L-shape in a plan view, as if the right side of the back cover is bent forward as a flat plate. The back cover 505 has two locking claws 505a spaced apart vertically at the left end, and a plurality of shafts 505b arranged vertically at the right end. The locking claws 505a are detachably locked to the cover locking portion 502l in the main frame base 501. The shafts 505b are axially supported by the cover shaft support portion 502m in the main frame base 501. This allows the back cover 505 to be opened and closed with respect to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4. The back cover 505 has a plurality of ventilation holes, allowing heat from the game board 5 to escape to the outside. The back cover 505 is made of a transparent synthetic resin.

The rear cover 505 is formed so that if an attempt is made to close the main body frame unit 500 (main body frame base 501) after first closing the frame substrate unit 730 described below to the main body frame unit 500, it will interfere (abut) with the closed frame substrate unit 730 and be prevented from being closed. In addition, the rear cover 505 is formed so that if an attempt is made to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 while the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 and the rear cover 505 is open to the main body frame base 501, it will interfere (abut) with the outer frame 2 and be prevented from being closed.

The game board locking member 506 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 501 (base wall portion 501b) so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board locking member 506 can prevent the bottom end of the game board 5 from moving forward by rotating it to the lock position with the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion portion 502.

The door opening switch 507 is for detecting the opening and closing of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4. The door opening switch 507 is attached below the cylinder insertion opening 501m in the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The frame opening switch 508 is for detecting the opening and closing of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. The frame opening switch 508 is attached below the door opening switch 507 on the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501.

The main body frame hinge mechanism 510 has a main body frame upper hinge body 511 attached to the upper end of the left side of the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame lower hinge body 512 attached to the lower end of the left side of the main body frame base 501.

The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame includes a main frame hinge shaft 511a that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the bearing groove 31a of the upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame 2, and a door frame upper shaft hole 511b that is provided adjacent to the main frame hinge shaft 511a and into which the upper hinge shaft 111a of the upper hinge body 111 of the door frame 3 is inserted from below. The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame has a flat plate-like portion that extends horizontally and a portion that extends downward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. The horizontally extending portion of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame includes the hinge shaft 511a of the main frame and the upper shaft hole 511b for the door frame. The portion of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame that extends downward is attached to the main frame base 501.

The lower hinge body 512 has an outer frame shaft hole (not shown) into which the hinge shaft 35a of the lower hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 is inserted from below, and a lower shaft hole 512b into which the lower hinge shaft 112a of the lower hinge body 112 in the door frame 3 is inserted from above. The lower hinge body 512 has a flat horizontally extending portion and a portion extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. The horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge body 512 has an outer frame shaft hole and a lower shaft hole 512b for the door frame. The lower hinge body 512 has a downwardly extending portion attached to the base 501. In addition, the portion of the lower hinge body 512 that extends downward comes into contact with the rear wall portion 45c of the apron 45 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. This prevents the main frame 4 from hinge-rotating further backward.

The main frame hinge mechanism 510 supports the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 by inserting the main frame hinge shaft 511a of the main frame upper hinge body 511 into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 in the outer frame 2 and inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 into the outer frame shaft hole of the main frame lower hinge body 512.

The main frame hinge mechanism 510 supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the upper door frame hinge shaft 111a of the upper door frame hinge body 111 in the door frame 3 from below into the upper door frame shaft hole 511b of the upper main frame hinge body 511, and inserting the lower door frame hinge shaft 112a of the lower door frame hinge body 112 in the door frame 3 from above into the lower door frame shaft hole 512b of the lower main frame hinge body 512.

[4-2. Ball launch unit]
The ball launching unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 25 to 28. Figure 25(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching unit in the main body frame seen from the back. Figure 26(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball launching unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball launching unit seen from the back. Figure 27(a) is a perspective view of the launching unit cover of the ball launching unit seen from the left rear, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the ball launching unit showing only the launching unit cover in a cross section when viewed from the front. Figure 28 is a front view of the ball launching unit showing the launch subtraction sensor and the launching hammer in dashed lines.

The ball launching unit 550 is for launching the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and has a ball entrance 550a for receiving the game ball B sent from the ball sending unit 700, a ball launching port 550b for releasing the launched game ball B to the outside, and a ball discharge port 550c for discharging the game ball B. The ball launching unit 550 can shoot the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. The ball launching unit 550 is attached to the ball launching unit mounting portion 501i, which is provided on the upper front of the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501, to the right of the center in the left-right direction and below the opaque eaves portion 501p.

The ball inlet 550a of the ball launching unit 550 is provided on the rear surface and is a square opening large enough for one game ball B to pass through. When assembled to the main body frame 4, this ball inlet 550a is located in front of the ball outlet 702 of the ball sending unit 700 and communicates with the ball outlet 702. The ball launching port 550b opens at an angle at the left end of the top surface, with the left end side lower. When assembled to the main body frame 4, this ball launching port 550b communicates with the upper part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570. The ball discharge port 550c opens on the left side. When assembled to the main body frame 4, this ball discharge port 550c communicates with the lower part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570.

The ball launching unit 550 comprises a flat unit base 551, a launching unit cover 552 attached to cover the front side of the unit base 551, a launch solenoid 553 attached to the rear side of the unit base 551 so that the rotation shaft 553a protrudes forward from the unit base 551, a launch subtraction sensor 554 capable of detecting whether or not a game ball B has been launched, a launching hammer 555 attached to the rotation shaft 553a of the launching solenoid 553, a nut 556 attaching the launching hammer 555 to the rotation shaft 553a of the launching solenoid 553, a circular spacer 557 inserted into the rotation shaft 553a of the launching solenoid 553, and two rubber members 558 capable of contacting the launching hammer 555.

The unit base 551 of the ball launching unit 550 is formed from a metal plate such as an iron plate. The unit base 551 is provided with a ball inlet 550a, which penetrates in a square shape from the center to the upper part when viewed from the front.

The launch unit cover 552 is formed by injection molding using a transparent synthetic resin. The launch unit cover 552 is equipped with a flat front plate 552a that is spaced forward from the unit base 551, a ball launch pad 552b that is provided behind the front plate 552a and directly below the ball inlet 550a of the unit base 551 and is inclined so that the left end is higher, and a detection port 552c that passes vertically through the ball launch pad 552b.

The launch unit cover 552 also includes a launch pad upper wall portion 552d behind the front plate 552a, which is located at the upper right of the ball launch pad 552b when viewed from the front, forming a gap between the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall portion 552d through which the game ball B cannot pass, and a sensor lower mounting portion 552e and a sensor upper mounting portion 552f which are arranged to sandwich the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall portion 552d behind the front plate 552a.

The launch unit cover 552 further includes a barrier portion 552g that is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b and whose upper end forms the lower end of the ball launch port 550b, an ejection guide wall portion 552h that extends downward from the left end of the ball launch pad 552b at the rear of the front plate 552a and then extends lower toward the left, a window portion 552i that penetrates from the front to the back at the portion above the sensor lower mounting portion 552e and to the right of the sensor lower mounting portion 552e, a wiring groove 552j that is recessed in the front surface of the front plate 552a and extends from the lower left to the upper right, and a plurality of wiring engagement portions 552k that protrude from the front end of the wiring groove 552j parallel to the bottom surface of the wiring groove 552j.

The ball launch pad 552b is where the game ball B supplied through the ball inlet 550a is placed. The top surface of the ball launch pad 552b is inclined so that the left end is higher when viewed from the front. The ball launch pad 552b is recessed into a constant cross-sectional shape (trapezoidal) so that it narrows downward along the direction in which the top surface is inclined. The length of the ball launch pad 552b in the inclined direction (launching direction) is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B, and it is formed so that only one game ball B can be placed on it so that it is in contact with the two inclined surfaces of the trapezoidal recess. In this embodiment, the ball launch pad 552b is inclined at an angle of approximately 27 degrees to the horizontal.

The detection port 552c is provided at the bottom of the trapezoidally recessed portion of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided above the inclined lower end side of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided so as to form a gap between the ball launch pad 552b and the ball launch pad 552b through which the game ball B cannot pass, but through which the tip of the launch hammer 555 can pass. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the ball launch pad 552b is placed on the ball launch pad 552b in a state in which it abuts against the left end of the launch pad upper wall portion 552d and its movement downstream (to the right in this case) in the inclination direction of the ball launch pad 552b is restricted.

When a game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the center of the game ball B is located slightly to the right of the center of the ball entrance 550a. The length of the ball launch pad 552b is set to a length that allows only one game ball B to be placed on it. As a result, even if a game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b and the launched game ball B returns or is sent from the ball sending unit 700, and another game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, it will be bounced off by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and will be discharged to the discharge guide wall portion 552h side (foul unit 570 side) without landing on the ball launch pad 552b, and will be detected by the foul ball sensor 607. Therefore, even if a game ball B is placed on the ball launcher 552b and the launched game ball B returns or is supplied from the ball sending unit 700, the game ball B is sent to the foul unit 570 and added to the balls held as a foul ball, eliminating any error with the actual number of launched game balls B.

The light-emitting unit 554a and the light-receiving unit 554b that constitute the emission subtraction sensor 554 are attached to the sensor lower attachment portion 552e and the sensor upper attachment portion 552f, respectively. Since the emission subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light-emitting unit 554a) is attached facing upwards on the sensor lower attachment portion 552e, there is a risk of false detection if dirt or dust adheres to the upper surface of the light-emitting unit 554a, but since the light-emitting unit 554a is attached at an angle, dirt and the like are less likely to accumulate.

The barrier section 552g is located at a position longer than the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the ball launch pad 552b, and lower than the trajectory of the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b. The barrier section 552g is designed to allow game balls B with a weak impact strength to come into contact with it, and the game ball B that comes into contact with it passes between the barrier section 552g and the ball launch pad 552b and flows down onto the discharge guide wall section 552h below, and does not return to the ball launch pad 552b. In addition, since the barrier section 552g extends vertically, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering from the foul unit 570 side.

The discharge guide wall portion 552h forms a ball discharge port 550c between the barrier portion 552g. The discharge guide wall portion 552h is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and can guide the game ball B that flows down between the ball launch pad 552b and the barrier portion 552g to the left and discharge it from the ball discharge port 550c at the left end to the foul unit 570 side. As a result, the game ball B that was struck by the launching hammer 555 at the ball launch pad 552b but was not launched from the ball discharge port 550b is guided by the discharge guide wall portion 552h and discharged from the ball discharge port 550c to the foul unit 570.

The window 552i is provided in the area between the ball launch pad 552b and the sensor lower mounting part 552e, and in the area in front of the tip of the launch hammer 555 in the retracted position away from the striking position. Since the launch subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light-emitting part 554a) is attached facing upwards on the sensor lower mounting part 552e, dirt and dust are likely to accumulate on the upper surface of the light-emitting part 554a, and there is a risk of false detection if dirt or the like adheres to the upper surface. However, by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window 552i in the area between the ball launch pad 552b and the sensor lower mounting part 552e, the upper surface of the light-emitting part 554a can be easily cleaned.

In addition, since the tip of the launching hammer 555 comes into contact with the game ball B, if dirt or the like is attached to the tip of the launching hammer 555, there is a risk that the game ball B will not be launched properly. However, as shown in FIG. 28, a window 552i is provided in front of the tip of the launching hammer 555 in the standby position, so that the tip of the launching hammer 555 can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window 552i.

The firing solenoid 553 is composed of a rotary solenoid having a rotating shaft 553a extending forward and backward. As will be described in detail later, the firing solenoid 553 performs a series of operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in hardware in association with the ball delivery solenoid 706, which will be described later.

The launch subtraction sensor 554 can detect the presence or absence of a game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. The launch subtraction sensor 554 is composed of a light emitting unit 554a that irradiates detection light and a light receiving unit 554b that receives the detection light, and is attached to the sensor lower mounting unit 552e and the sensor upper mounting unit 552f of the launch unit cover 552, respectively. The detection light emitted from the light emitting unit 554a is received by the light receiving unit 554b through a detection port 552c provided at the bottom of the ball launch pad 552b. At this time, if a game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the detection light is blocked by the game ball B and the detection light is not received by the light receiving unit 554b. This makes it possible to detect the presence or absence of a game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b.

The launch subtraction sensor 554, which will be described in detail later, detects when game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b and subtracts one ball from the number of balls the player has.

In this embodiment, the number of balls held is subtracted when the launch subtraction sensor 554 is judged to be OFF, but since the number of balls held by the player changes depending on the operation of the launch subtraction sensor 554, one-to-one reliability is required for the launch of game ball B. Meanwhile, in a normal pass judgment for game ball B, the light from the light-emitting part in the light-receiving part is judged by switching from OFF to ON (from no game ball B to present) (so-called "011"), with respect to the light from the light-emitting part at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interrupt period of 4 ms), but there is a concern that the ball may go wild when the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b (launch rail), and that the tip of the launch hammer 555 may erroneously detect something other than the launched ball after launch.

In contrast, in this embodiment, focusing on the fact that game ball B is parked on ball launch pad 552b, first it is determined whether game ball B is present on ball launch pad 552b, and when game ball B is no longer present, it is determined that the ball has been launched. In other words, it is determined that the ball is ON (game ball present) before it is OFF (no game ball = launched). Specifically, a threshold value is set to recognize ON and OFF (for example, the ON threshold is 80 ms, and the OFF threshold is 80 ms), and only when the ON threshold is exceeded is it determined that "game ball present", and when the OFF threshold is exceeded, it is determined that game ball B has been launched ("no game ball") and the number of balls held is subtracted. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions due to game ball chattering or noise. Note that the above threshold value is preferably an integer multiple of the interrupt period (for example, 4 ms).

The launching hammer 555 is used to strike and launch the game ball B. The launching hammer 555 is attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the launching solenoid 553, and rotates (pivots) together with the rotating shaft 553a. The tip of the launching hammer 555 passes between the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall portion 552d, and is arranged so that it can abut against the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b.

In mass production of the ball launching unit 550, in order to ensure the launching accuracy of the game ball B, the insertion angle of the tip of the launching hammer 555, the mounting angle of the ball launching platform 552b (launching rail), the adjustment of the tip position of the launching hammer 555 after assembly to the ball launching unit 550, etc. all required strict adjustments, making mass production difficult. Therefore, in this embodiment, the method of determining the launching accuracy has been changed from the conventional method of ensuring the accuracy by the way the game ball B hits the launching rail and the shape of the launching rail to ensuring only the contact between the launching hammer 555 and the game ball B. In this change, the accuracy of the tip of the launching hammer 555 alone becomes more important for the launching accuracy, so the tip of the launching hammer 555 is formed by sheet metal insert molding, and the contact area of the tip of the launching hammer 555 with the game ball B is made larger than before. This ensures the stability of the launching accuracy, allows some assembly errors to be tolerated, and allows the ball launching unit 550 to be mass-produced.

Nut 556 is screwed onto rotating shaft 553a of firing solenoid 553. Spacer 557 is inserted into rotating shaft 553a of firing solenoid 553. Rotating shaft 553a of firing solenoid 553 is inserted from the rear through spacer 557 and then firing hammer 555, and nut 556 is screwed onto the tip protruding forward from firing hammer 555 and tightened, thereby attaching firing hammer 555.

The rubber 558 is attached to the unit base 551 so as to restrict the rotation range (pivot range) of the firing hammer 555.

According to the ball launching unit 550 of this embodiment, only one game ball B is placed on the ball launching pad 552b, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launching pad 552b, so that the launch of the game balls B can be reliably detected one by one.

In addition, according to the ball launching unit 550, the launching unit cover 552 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the ball launching unit 550 can be seen from the front by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4. Since the launching unit cover 552 is transparent, there is a risk that light will enter the inside and cause a false detection in the launch subtraction sensor 554, which is a photosensor. However, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the light from the front is blocked by the door frame 3, the light from the rear is blocked by the unit base 551, which is made of a metal plate, and further, the light from above is blocked by the eaves portion 501p of the black opaque main body frame base 501. Therefore, no light enters the inside, and false detection due to light in the launch subtraction sensor 554 is prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 (recirculating game machine) disclosed in this embodiment is designed to subtract the number of balls held only after the ball has been fired. Therefore, compared to the method used in conventional recirculating game machines in which the number of balls held is subtracted using the ball feed as a trigger before firing, when settling a game, game ball B (with the number of balls subtracted) that was not fired and remains on the firing rail is automatically fired blank to make it a foul ball in order to return it to the player, eliminating the need to add up the number of balls held to make the total add up, and allowing for a quick settlement process.

Furthermore, according to the ball launch unit 550, the launch subtraction sensor 554 is installed at an angle, which makes it difficult for dirt and dust to accumulate on the detection surface of the launch subtraction sensor 554. Even if dirt or dust does adhere to the launch subtraction sensor 554, a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab can be inserted through the window 552i of the launch unit cover 552 to easily clean the detection surface, making it easy to eliminate false detections (malfunctions) caused by the adhesion of dirt or dust.

In addition, according to the ball launching unit 550, the window portion 552i is also provided in a portion where the tip of the launching hammer 555 can be cleaned, so that the tip of the launching hammer 555 can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool through the window portion 552i in that portion, thereby eliminating inconsistencies in the launch of the game ball B due to the adhesion of dirt, etc.

[4-3. Foul Unit]
The foul unit 570 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 to 31. Figure 29(a) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit in the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 30(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. Figure 31(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of the foul unit with the foul shutter in a closed state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of the foul unit with the foul shutter in an open state.

The foul unit 570 is for collecting game balls B that were launched by the ball launching unit 550 and hit between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but did not hit the game area 5a, and game balls B that were launched by the ball launching unit 550 but did not reach the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) because the launch strength was too weak. The foul unit 570 has a foul upper opening 570a that opens on the top surface, a foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side surface, and a foul ball outlet 570c that communicates with the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b and opens toward the rear at the bottom end.

The foul unit 570 is attached to the foul unit mounting portion 501h provided in the center of the upper front part of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the foul unit 570 has an upper end at approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the foul right opening 570b is closed by the ball launching port 550b and ball discharge port 550c of the ball launching unit 550. In other words, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b is connected to the ball launching port 550b and ball discharge port 550c. The foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are formed by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 described later, and the ball discharge port 550c is formed in the unit base 572.

The foul unit 570 comprises a foul shutter 571 that can be opened and closed to prevent the game ball B from passing through the foul upper opening 570a, a unit base 572 that is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, a front cover 573 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 572, a rear cover 574 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear of the foul shutter 571, and a spring 575 that biases the foul shutter 571 forward.

The fall shutter 571 is supported so that it can slide in the front-rear direction by cooperation between the unit base 572 and the front cover 573. The fall shutter 571 has a strip-shaped shutter section 571a that is long from side to side, two forward protruding sections 571b that protrude forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter section 571a, and a flat rear wall section 571c that extends downward from the rear end edge of the shutter section 571a.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that their front ends protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that they can abut against the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3. The front end of the spring 575 abuts against the rear surface of the rear wall part 571c.

The unit base 572 is long from side to side and has an L-shape with a portion extending downward near the right end. The unit base 572 has a shutter housing portion 572a that extends from side to side along the upper edge and is recessed toward the rear, a ball guide portion 572b that extends from side to side below the shutter housing portion 572a and has a right end that extends downward and is recessed toward the rear, a tube portion 572c that extends rearward in a square tube shape from the lower end of the ball guide portion 572b, and a receiving portion 572d that extends forward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the ball guide portion 572b.

The shutter housing section 572a of the unit base 572 houses the foul shutter 571 and spring 575 from the front. The part of the ball guide section 572b in the unit base 572 that extends to the left and right is inclined so that it is lower to the right. The tube section 572c of the unit base 572 is inclined so that it is lower to the rear, and the opening at the rear end is the foul ball outlet 570c.

The receiving portion 572d of the unit base 572 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The right edge of this receiving portion 572d forms the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the receiving portion 572d forms the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the lower part including the lower end of the foul right opening 570b is connected to the ball discharge port 550c in the ball launching unit 550. Therefore, the game ball B that falls from the ball launching pad 552b, is discharged from the ball discharge port 550c, and passes through the foul right opening 570b, flows down onto the receiving portion 572d, is guided backward by the receiving portion 572d, passes through the tube portion 572c, and is discharged backward from the foul ball outlet 570c. When the foul shutter 571 is closed, the game ball B that is launched from the ball launching unit 550 and passes through the foul right opening 570b and hits the back surface (lower surface) of the foul shutter 571 is sent to the rear ball guide section 572b by the lower wall section 573c of the front cover 573, passes behind the receiving section 572d, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c via the tube section 572c.

The unit base 572 also has a notch 572e recessed from the front near the right end of the bottom wall of the portion of the ball guiding section 572b that extends left and right. This notch 572e is formed to a size that does not impede the flow of the game ball B, and allows debris that has entered the ball guiding section 572b to be discharged downward from the upper foul opening 570a.

The front cover 573 is equipped with a flat, L-shaped front plate 573a that is long from side to side and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a, a lower wall portion 573c that extends rightward from the bottom end of the left wall portion 573b along the bottom edge of the front plate 573a and also extends rearward, a hanging wall portion 573d that extends downward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c along the left edge of the portion of the front plate 573a that extends downward and also extends rearward, and a right wall portion 573f that extends rearward from the top right end of the front plate 573a.

The upper and right edges of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall 573b forms the left edge of the foul upper opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall 573f forms the right edge of the foul upper opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall 573f forms the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573 is located below the foul upper opening 570a. The lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573 is gently inclined so as to be lower to the left, and also inclined so as to be lower to the rear. This prevents the front cover 573 from directly receiving the impact of the game ball B that falls from above as a foul ball, and allows the game ball B to be handed over to the ball guiding portion 572b of the unit base 572 located at the rear while dissipating the impact. The game ball B handed over to the ball guiding portion 572b then passes from the lower end of the right end of the ball guiding portion 572b through the tube portion 572c and is discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

Two springs 575 are provided, spaced apart on the left and right, and are disposed inside the box-shaped shutter housing section 572a in the unit base 572. The front end of the spring 575 abuts against the rear surface of the rear wall section 571c of the fall shutter 571, and the rear end abuts against the front surface of the rear wall of the shutter housing section 572a. The spring 575 biases the fall shutter 571 forward.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the foul unit 570 is attached to the foul unit attachment section 501h, which is provided at the top near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall section 501b of the main body frame 4. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is attached adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 21, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570 is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and is located on the axis of the launch direction of the game ball B in the ball launching unit 550. In other words, the foul upper opening 570a is provided in the area between the opening at the lower end between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launching unit 550.

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 is connected at its upper part to the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550, and at its lower part to the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550. Therefore, the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are provided in the area between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b, and then enters between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the foul upper opening 570a.

When the door frame 3 of the foul unit 570 of this embodiment is opened forward relative to the main body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 slides forward due to the biasing force of the spring 575, as shown in FIG. 34(a), and the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573, closing the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the stepped portion at the rear end of the forward protruding portion 571b of the foul shutter 571 abuts against the front cover 573, and it will not slide forward any further.

When the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position and a game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the launched game ball B enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b, abuts against the underside of the shutter part 571a of the foul shutter 571, and flows down inside the foul unit 570 without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B that flows down inside the foul unit 570 is guided by the lower wall part 573c, the ball guide part 572b, the tube part 572c, etc., and is supplied to the circulation ball path unit 600 from the rear foul ball outlet 570c. As a result, even if the game ball B is launched when the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak out from the foul unit 570 to the outside.

When the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the door opening switch 507 is turned OFF, and turning the door opening switch 507 OFF may stop the launch of the game ball B from the ball launching unit 550. Alternatively, rather than stopping the launch of the game ball B when the door frame 3 is opened, the main control board 1310 may temporarily suspend play, and when the door frame 3 is closed, play may be resumed.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (the frame open switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak to the outside, so the launch of the game ball B from the ball launch unit 550 may not be stopped. Alternatively, when the main frame 4 is opened, the same processing as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front ends of the two forward protrusions 571b of the foul shutter 571, causing the foul shutter 571 to slide rearward against the biasing force of the spring 575 (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located rearward of the front surface of the unit base 572, and the foul upper opening 570a is open so that the game ball B can pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the foul shutter 571 is in the open position and a game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the launched game ball B enters the foul unit 570 from the foul right opening 570b, and is then launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) through the foul upper opening 570a. The launched game ball B then passes over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the top end of the inner rail 1002, and is launched into the game area 5a.

In addition, game balls B that are launched from the ball launching unit 550 but do not pass over the backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (game balls B that are not shot into the game area) flow down between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, enter through the foul upper opening 570a as a foul ball, and are collected by the foul unit 570. Game balls B that are collected through the foul upper opening 570a are guided by the lower wall portion 573c, ball guide portion 572b, tube portion 572c, etc., and are discharged (supplied) to the circulating ball path unit 600 from the rear foul ball outlet 570c.

The foul unit 570 receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launching unit 550 at the bottom of the foul right opening 570b. The game ball B that enters the foul unit 570 from the bottom of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the receiving portion 572d, is guided backward by the inclination of the receiving portion 572d, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit 600.

In this way, the foul unit 570 can collect game balls B that were launched from the ball launching unit 550 but did not land in the game area 5a of the game board 5 without leaking out and supply them to the circulating ball path unit 600. As will be described in detail later, the circulating ball path unit 600 detects the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c by the foul ball sensor 607. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B, one ball is added to the player's possession.

In addition, the foul unit 570 has a unit base 572, front cover 573, etc., which are made of transparent synthetic resin, so the inside can be seen from the outside, making it easy to find balls stuck inside.

[4-3a. Foul unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570A of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 32 to 34. Figure 32(a) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. Figure 33(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. Figure 34(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter in a closed state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross-section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter in an open state.

The foul unit 570A is for collecting game balls B that were launched by the ball launching unit 550 and hit between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but did not hit the game area 5a, and game balls B that were launched by the ball launching unit 550 but did not reach the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) because the launch strength was too weak. The foul unit 570A has a foul upper opening 570a that opens on the top surface, a foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side surface, and a foul ball outlet 570c that communicates with the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b and opens toward the rear at the bottom end.

The foul unit 570A is attached to the foul unit mounting portion 501h provided in the center of the upper front part of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the foul unit 570A has an upper end at approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the foul right opening 570b is closed by the ball launching port 550b and ball discharge port 550c of the ball launching unit 550. In other words, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b is connected to the ball launching port 550b and ball discharge port 550c. The foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are formed by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 described later, and the ball discharge port 550c is formed in the unit base 572.

The foul unit 570A comprises a foul shutter 571 that can be opened and closed to prevent the game ball B from passing through the foul upper opening 570a, a unit base 572 that is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501, a front cover 573 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 572, a rear cover 574 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear of the foul shutter 571, a spring 575 that biases the foul shutter 571 forward, and a foul ball earth metal plate 576 that is provided between the unit base 572 and the front cover 573.

The fall shutter 571 is supported so that it can slide in the front-rear direction by cooperation between the unit base 572 and the front cover 573. The fall shutter 571 has a strip-shaped shutter section 571a that is long from side to side, two forward protruding sections 571b that protrude forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter section 571a, and a flat rear wall section 571c that extends downward from the rear end edge of the shutter section 571a.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that their front ends protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that they can abut against the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3. The front end of the spring 575 abuts against the rear surface of the rear wall part 571c.

The unit base 572 has a main body 572f that is flat and T-shaped with a portion that is long from side to side and extends downward near the right end, a shutter insertion opening 572g that penetrates from front to back near the upper end of the main body 572f and extends left and right, and a number of rear support openings 572h that are provided along the lower edge to the left of the portion that extends downward in the main body 572f and penetrate from front to back.

The unit base 572 is provided with a foul ball outlet 570c that penetrates from front to back and extends rearward in a rectangular cylindrical shape near the bottom end of the portion of the main body 572f that extends downward. The cylindrical foul ball outlet 570c is inclined so that it is lower toward the rear.

The lower edge of the left side of the main body 572f is inclined so that it is lower to the right than the part that extends downward. The shutter insertion opening 572g is large enough to allow the shutter part 571a and the forward protrusion 571b of the foul shutter 571 to pass through. The multiple rear support openings 572h are long on the left and right so that each is lower to the right, and are lined up along the inclined lower edge of the main body 572f. The rear support openings 572h are designed so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball earth metal plate 576 can be inserted with a gap.

The front cover 573 is provided with a flat, partial T-shaped front plate 573a that is long from side to side and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a, a lower wall portion 573c that extends rightward and rearward from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b along the lower edge of the front plate 573a, a hanging wall portion 573d that extends downward and rearward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c along the left edge of the portion of the front plate 573a that extends downward, a bottom wall portion 573e that extends rightward and rearward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 573d along the lower edge of the portion of the front plate 573a that extends downward, and a right wall portion 573f that extends rearward from the upper right end of the front plate 573a.

The upper and right edges of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall 573b forms the left edge of the upper foul opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall 573f forms the right edge of the upper foul opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall 573f forms the upper edge of the right foul opening 570b, and the right edge of the bottom wall 573e forms the lower edge of the right foul opening 570b.

The lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573 is located below the upper foul opening 570a, and the game ball B that flows down through the upper foul opening 570a can be guided to the right and then flow down onto the bottom wall portion 573e along the hanging wall portion 573d. This bottom wall portion 573e is inclined so that the part in front of the foul ball outlet 570c is lower toward the rear, and the part to the right of this part is inclined so that it is higher toward the right. Therefore, the game ball B that flows down to the bottom wall portion 573e is guided backward and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, since the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e forms the lower edge of the right foul opening 570b, the game ball B that enters from the right foul opening 570b flows down onto the bottom wall portion 573e, is guided by the bottom wall portion 573e, and is discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

The front cover 573 has a front plate 573a with multiple front support openings 573g that are aligned left and right along the lower wall portion 573c and penetrate from front to back. The multiple front support openings 573g are provided to face the rear support openings 572h of the unit base 572. The front support openings 573g are also provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball earth metal plate 576 can be inserted with a gap.

The rear cover 574 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The rear part of the fall shutter 571 is inserted inside the rear cover 574, and a spring 575 is also placed inside the rear cover 574. The rear end of the spring 575 abuts against the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574.

Two springs 575 are provided, spaced apart on the left and right, and are disposed inside the box-shaped rear cover 574. The front end of the spring 575 abuts against the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c of the fall shutter 571, and the rear end abuts against the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574. The springs 575 urge the fall shutter 571 forward.

The foul ball earth metal plate 576 is made of a metal plate such as an iron plate, and is ultimately connected to the ground of the game hall via an earth wire (not shown). The foul ball earth metal plate 576 is formed in the shape of a long strip from side to side, with multiple support pieces 576a extending outward from the front and rear long sides. The foul ball earth metal plate 576 is placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573, and the multiple support pieces 576a are inserted with some play into the rear support opening 572h of the unit base 572 and the front support opening 573g of the front cover 573.

As a result, the game ball B that has flowed down through the upper foul opening 570a toward the lower wall portion 573c comes into contact with the foul ball earth metal plate 576, and the static electricity that has been charged thereto is removed, and the ball is guided to the right. At this time, since the support piece 576a is loosely fitted into the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g, the contact of the game ball B causes the foul ball earth metal plate 576 to vibrate, and the vibration causes dust and dirt on the foul ball earth metal plate 576 to be discharged to the outside through the gap between the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g, into which the game ball B is loosely fitted. The foul ball earth metal plate 576 also serves as reinforcement against the falling game ball B.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, this foul unit 570A is attached to the foul unit attachment section 501h, which is provided at the top near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall section 501b of the main body frame 4. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is attached adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570A.

And, like the foul unit 570 of the first embodiment, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570A is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and is located on the axis of the launch direction of the game ball B in the ball launching unit 550. In other words, the foul upper opening 570a is provided in the area between the opening at the lower end between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launching unit 550.

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570A is connected at its upper part to the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550, and at its lower part to the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550. Therefore, the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b are provided in the area between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b, and then enters between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the foul upper opening 570a.

When the door frame 3 of the foul unit 570A of this embodiment is opened forward relative to the main body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 slides forward due to the biasing force of the spring 575, as shown in FIG. 34(a), and the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573, closing the foul upper opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 abuts against the rear surface of the main body portion 572f of the unit base 572, and it will not slide forward any further.

When the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position and a game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the launched game ball B enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b, abuts against the underside of the shutter part 571a of the foul shutter 571, and flows down inside the foul unit 570A without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B that flows down inside the foul unit 570A is guided by the lower wall part 573c (foul ball earth metal plate 576), the hanging wall part 573d, the bottom wall part 573e, etc., and is supplied to the circulation ball path unit 600 from the rear foul ball outlet 570c. As a result, even if the game ball B is launched when the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak out from the foul unit 570A to the outside.

When the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the door opening switch 507 is turned OFF, and turning the door opening switch 507 OFF may stop the launch of the game ball B from the ball launching unit 550. Alternatively, rather than stopping the launch of the game ball B when the door frame 3 is opened, the main control board 1310 may temporarily suspend play, and when the door frame 3 is closed, play may be resumed.

In addition, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (the frame open switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak to the outside, so the launch of the game ball B from the ball launch unit 550 may not be stopped. Alternatively, when the main frame 4 is opened, the same processing as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front ends of the two forward protrusions 571b of the foul shutter 571, causing the foul shutter 571 to slide rearward against the biasing force of the spring 575 (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located rearward of the front surface of the unit base 572, and the foul upper opening 570a is open so that the game ball B can pass through. In other words, the foul shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the foul shutter 571 is in the open position and game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the launched game ball B enters the foul unit 570A from the foul right opening 570b, and is then launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) through the foul upper opening 570a. The launched game ball B then passes over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the top end of the inner rail 1002, and is launched into the game area 5a.

The game ball B that was launched from the ball launching unit 550 but did not pass the backflow prevention member 1007 at the top end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not shot into the game area) flows down between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, enters the foul upper opening 570a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570A. The game ball B that was collected through the foul upper opening 570a flows down onto the foul ball earth metal plate 576 placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c, and static electricity is removed by the foul ball earth metal plate 576. At this time, since the foul ball earth metal plate 576 is loosely fitted, it vibrates when the game ball B comes into contact with it, and the vibration causes dust and dirt on the foul ball earth metal plate 576 to be discharged from the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g to the outside of the foul unit 570A.

The game ball B that flows down onto the foul ball earth metal plate 576 (lower wall portion 573c) is guided to the right by its inclination, flows down along the hanging wall portion 573d onto the bottom wall portion 573e, and is guided backward by the inclination of the bottom wall portion 573e and discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c into the circulating ball path unit 600.

The foul unit 570A receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launching unit 550 at the bottom of the foul right opening 570b. The game ball B that enters the foul unit 570A from the bottom of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the bottom wall 573e, is guided backward by the inclination of the bottom wall 573e, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit 600.

In this way, the foul unit 570A can collect game balls B that were launched from the ball launching unit 550 but did not land in the game area 5a of the game board 5 without leaking out and supply them to the circulating ball path unit 600. As will be described in detail later, the circulating ball path unit 600 detects the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c by the foul ball sensor 607. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects the game ball B, one ball is added to the player's possession.

In addition, in the foul unit 570A, the unit base 572, front cover 573, rear cover 574, etc. are made of transparent synthetic resin, so the inside can be seen from the outside, making it easy to find balls stuck inside.

[4-3b. Foul unit of the third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the foul unit 570 will be described. The foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is different only in the opening and closing mechanism of the foul shutter 571, and other configurations are the same as the above foul unit 570. The foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is provided with an electric actuator such as a motor or a solenoid for opening and closing the foul shutter 571, although not shown.

In this embodiment, when the door opening switch 507 is turned OFF by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 slides to the closed position by the electric actuator. As a result, even if the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 with the door frame 3 open, the game ball B will not fly out from the foul upper opening 570a.

When the door frame 3 is closed and the door open switch 507 is turned ON, the electric actuator slides the foul shutter 571 to the open position, allowing the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550 to be shot into the game board 5 through the foul upper opening 570a.

In addition, even when the frame opening switch 508 is turned OFF by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the fall shutter 571 may be slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. In this case, if the opening and closing process of the fall shutter 571 by the frame opening switch 508 is made the same as the opening and closing process by the door opening switch 507 described above, the software configuration can be simplified.

In addition, an opening switch (not shown) can be provided that can detect the opening of both the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and the fall shutter 571 can be opened and closed by an electric actuator, simplifying the mechanism for opening and closing.

[4-4. Circulation ball path unit]
The circulating ball path unit 600 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 35 to 42. Figure 35(a) is a perspective view of the circulating ball path unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the circulating ball path unit in the main body frame as seen from the back. Figure 36 is an exploded perspective view of the circulating ball path unit as seen from the front, and Figure 37 is an exploded perspective view of the circulating ball path unit as seen from the back. Figure 38(a) is a plan view showing only the ball meandering member and ball removal shutter in the circulating ball path unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the circulating ball path unit as seen from the front. Figure 39 (a1) is an explanatory diagram showing the ball removal shutter and ball snaking member in the closed position together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross-section, (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing only the ball removal shutter portion in (a1) from the bottom, (b1) is an explanatory diagram showing the ball removal shutter and ball snaking member in the open position together with the ball receiving tray in a side cross-section, and (b2) is an explanatory diagram showing only the ball removal shutter portion in (b1) from the bottom.

Figure 40 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the circulating ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor location in a front cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the circulating ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor location in a front cross section. Figure 41 (a) is an oblique view from the front showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the circulating ball path unit's serpentine cover removed, and (b) is an oblique view from the rear showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the circulating ball path unit's serpentine cover removed. Figure 42 is a plan view showing the ball serpentine member, serpentine cover, ball removal shutter, and gauge section in the circulating ball path unit.

The circulating ball path unit 600 is for storing multiple game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and game balls B collected by the foul unit 570, and for sending the stored game balls B to the ball launching unit 550 via the ball lifting unit 650. The circulating ball path unit 600 is attached to the circulating ball path unit mounting portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501.

The circulating ball path unit 600 has an out ball receiving port 600a that is long on the left and right and opens upward, a safe ball receiving port 600b that is located behind the out ball receiving port 600a and is long on the left and right and opens upward, a foul ball receiving port 600c that opens at the front, and a ball discharge port 600d that opens to the right near the bottom end. The out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b are formed with a depth in the front-to-back direction that is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and are formed in the left-to-right direction to allow multiple game balls B to pass through. The foul ball receiving port 600c and the ball discharge port 600d are formed to be large enough to allow one game ball B to pass through each.

The out ball receiving port 600a receives the game ball B (out ball) received in the out port of the game board 5. The safe ball receiving port 600b receives the game ball B (safe ball) received in the winning port of the game board 5, such as the general winning port, the starting port, the big winning port, etc. The foul ball receiving port 600c receives the game ball B (foul ball) discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c of the foul unit 570. The ball discharge port 600d discharges the game ball B received in the out ball receiving port 600a, the safe ball receiving port 600b, and the foul ball receiving port 600c and stored therein, and passes it to the ball lifting unit 650.

The circulating ball path unit 600 also has an out ball passage 601 through which game ball B received in the out ball receiving port 600a flows, a safe ball passage 602 through which game ball B received in the safe ball receiving port 600b flows, a foul ball passage 603 through which game ball B received in the foul ball receiving port 600c flows, and a ball storage passage 604 that is connected to the downstream ends of the out ball passage 601, the safe ball passage 602, and the foul ball passage 603 and whose downstream end is the ball release port 600d.

Furthermore, the circulating ball path unit 600 has an out ball sensor 605 that detects each game ball B (out ball) circulating through the out ball path 601, a safe ball sensor 606 that detects each game ball B (safe ball) circulating through the safe ball path 602, and a foul ball sensor 607 that detects each game ball B (foul ball) circulating through the foul ball path 603. The safe ball sensor 606 is equivalent to a total winning port sensor in conventional pachinko machines, and can be used to determine illegal winning by comparing it with the total number of winning balls in all winning ports.

The circulating ball path unit 600 comprises a flat ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front plate 610, and a ball receiving rear member 612 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front member 611. A ball storage passage 604 is provided below the ball receiving front plate 610, the ball receiving front member 611, and the ball receiving rear member 612.

The circulating ball path unit 600 also includes a ball snaking member 613 that is provided below the ball receiving front plate 610, the ball receiving front member 611, and the ball receiving rear member 612 and is open upward, a snaking cover 614 that covers the top of the ball snaking member 613, a ball removal shutter 615 for discharging game ball B from the ball snaking member 613, a magnet 616 attached to the ball removal shutter 615, a circulating ball path relay board 617 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front member 611, and a gauge section 620 provided on the snaking cover 614.

The ball receiving front plate 610 extends to the left and right, and has a foul ball receiving opening 600c that penetrates from front to back near the bottom center in the left-right direction.

The ball receiving front member 611 cooperates with the ball receiving front plate 610 to form the out ball receiving port 600a on the upper surface. The ball receiving front member 611 is formed with the out ball passage 601 and the foul ball passage 603 open to the front, and the front side of these is closed by attaching the ball receiving front plate 610. The downstream end of the out ball passage 601 opens downward at the lower left end of the ball receiving front member 611. The opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of the opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602. The downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 opens downward at a position on the ball receiving front member 611 lower right than the downstream end of the out ball passage 601.

The ball receiving front member 611 has an upper out-ball receiving plate portion 611a that slopes downward toward the right from the middle of the vertical wall that forms the left edge of the out-ball receiving port 600a to near the center in the left-right direction, a lower out-ball receiving plate portion 611b that slopes downward toward the left from a portion of the vertical wall that forms the right edge of the out-ball receiving port 600a below the upper out-ball receiving plate portion 611a to near the bottom of the left edge of the out-ball receiving port 600a, and a crank portion 611c that extends in a crank shape toward the lower left from the left end of the lower out-ball receiving plate portion 611b with a width that allows game balls B to pass in a single file.

The height between the right end of the upper out ball receiving plate 611a and the lower out ball receiving plate 611b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, so that the height of the lower out ball receiving plate 611b on the left side is lower as it moves to the left. This allows the game balls B received in the out ball receiving port 600a to be aligned in a single row.

The out ball sensor 605 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 611c, directly below the downstream end of the out ball receiving plate portion 611b.

In the front ball receiving member 611, the out ball passage 601 is formed by the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, the crank portion 611c, etc. Therefore, the out ball passage 601 is formed wide on the upstream side so that it can receive many game balls B, and the received game balls B are aligned in a row and handed over to the downstream ball storage passage 604 (ball snaking member 613).

In the ball receiving front member 611, the foul ball passage 603 is located below the upper out ball receiving plate 611a and below the lower out ball receiving plate 611b, and slopes downward from the rear of the foul ball receiving opening 600c to a portion to the right of the left end of the lower out ball receiving plate 611b, and then extends downward for a short distance. In the ball receiving front member 611, a foul ball sensor 607 is attached to the portion of the foul ball passage 603 that extends to the left. This foul ball passage 603 is formed so that game balls b flow in a single file, and game ball B that flows through the foul ball passage 603 is handed over to a portion of the ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613) downstream of the portion where it is handed over from the out ball passage 601.

The front ball receiving member 611 has recesses 611d at the front edge of the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, the front edge of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, and the front edge of the bottom wall extending to the left and right to form the foul ball passage 603, which are recessed to a size that does not impede the flow of the game ball B. These recesses 611d allow dust, debris, etc. inside the out ball passage 601 and the foul ball passage 603 to be discharged to the outside.

In addition, a circulating ball path relay board 617 is attached to the rear of the ball receiving front member 611, behind the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface.

The upper surface of the rear ball receiving member 612 cooperates with the front ball receiving member 611 to form the safe ball receiving port 600b. The rear ball receiving member 612 is formed with the safe ball passage 602 open to the front, and the front side of the safe ball passage 602 is closed when the front ball receiving member 611 is attached. The downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 opens downward at the lower left end of the rear ball receiving member 612. The opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 is located behind the opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601. In other words, the opening at the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 and the opening at the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 are lined up front to back.

The ball receiving rear member 612 has an upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a that slopes downward toward the right from the middle of the vertical wall that forms the left edge of the safe ball receiving opening 600b to near the center in the left-right direction, a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b that slopes downward toward the left from a portion of the vertical wall that forms the right edge of the safe ball receiving opening 600b below the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a to near the bottom of the left edge of the safe ball receiving opening 600b, and a crank portion 612c that extends in a crank shape toward the lower left from the left end of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b with a width that allows game balls B to pass in a single file.

The height between the right end of the upper safe ball receiving plate 612a and the lower safe ball receiving plate 612b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, so that the height of the lower safe ball receiving plate 612b on the left side is lower as it moves to the left. This allows the game balls B received in the safe ball receiving port 600b to be aligned in a single row.

The safe ball sensor 606 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 612c directly below the downstream end of the safe ball receiving plate portion 612b.

In the post-ball receiving member 612, the safe ball passage 602 is formed by the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a, the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, the crank portion 612c, etc. Therefore, the safe ball passage 602 is formed wide on the upstream side so that it can receive many game balls B, and the received game balls B are aligned in a row and handed over to the most upstream portion of the downstream ball storage passage 604 (ball snaking member 613).

The rear ball receiving member 612 has recesses 612d at the front edge of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the front edge of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, which are recessed to a size that does not impede the flow of the game ball B. These recesses 612d allow dust, debris, etc. within the safe ball passage 602 to be discharged to the outside.

The ball meandering member 613 extends left and right while meandering back and forth so that the right end is lower, forming a ball storage passage 604 capable of storing a large number of game balls B. As shown in FIG. 38 etc., the ball meandering member 613 is made up of a first straight portion 613a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the front, with the rear portion being the upstream end, a first turn-back portion 613b that turns rightward from the downstream end (front end) of the first straight portion 613a and then turns lower toward the rear, a second straight portion 613c that extends from the downstream end (rear end) of the first turn-back portion 613b to a position near the rear end of the first straight portion 613a so as to become lower toward the rear, and a second straight portion 613c that turns rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the second straight portion 613c and then turns lower toward the rear. a second folded portion 613d bent so as to become lower toward the front, a third straight portion 613e extending from a downstream end (front end) of the second folded portion 613d to a position equal to the front end of the second straight portion 613c so as to become lower toward the front, a third folded portion 613f bent from the downstream end (front end) of the third straight portion 613e to the right and then bent so as to become lower toward the rear, and a fourth straight portion 613g extending from the downstream end (rear end) of the third folded portion 613f to a position equal to the rear end of the third straight portion 613e so as to become lower toward the rear. a fourth folded portion 613h that is folded rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the fourth straight portion 613g and then folded forward and lower; a fifth straight portion 613i that extends from the downstream end (front end) of the fourth folded portion 613h to the same position as the front end of the fourth straight portion 613g so as to bend forward and lower; a first folded portion 613j that is folded rightward from the downstream end (front end) of the fifth straight portion 613i; and a first lateral portion 613k that extends rightward and lower from the downstream end (right end) of the first folded portion 613j. The ball discharge port 600d includes a second bent portion 613l that is bent from the downstream end (right end) of the first horizontal portion 613k so as to bend downward toward the rear, a sixth straight portion 613m that extends from the downstream end (rear end) of the second bent portion 613l to a position near the downstream end of the fifth straight portion 613i so as to bend downward toward the rear, a third bent portion 613n that is bent from the downstream end (rear end) of the sixth straight portion 613m so as to bend downward toward the right, and a second horizontal portion 613o that extends from the downstream end (right end) of the third bent portion 613n so as to bend downward toward the right. The opening at the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 613o forms a ball discharge port 600d that opens to the right.

In the ball snaking member 613 (ball storage passage 604), the opening of the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 is located above the rear end of the first straight section 613a, and the opening of the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of that. In addition, the opening of the downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 is located above the rear end of the second straight section 613c.

The ball snaking member 613 also includes a ball outlet 613p that penetrates vertically in the first horizontal section 613k, a pair of rail sections 613q that extend forward and backward along both left and right edges of the ball outlet 613p on the underside of the first horizontal section 613k and protrude downward, support pieces 613r that protrude toward each other from the lower ends of each of the pair of rail sections 613q, locking sections 613s that are provided on the side surfaces of the pair of rail sections 613q that face each other, and a number of slits 613t that are provided through the rolling surface (bottom surface) on which the game ball B rolls.

The ball removal opening 613p of the ball snaking member 613 is closed by the ball removal shutter 615 so that it can be opened and closed, as will be described in detail later. The pair of rail portions 613q extend rearward from the ball removal opening 613p. The pair of rail portions 613q support the ball removal shutter 615 so that it can slide back and forth. The two support pieces 613r prevent the ball removal shutter 615 from falling. In addition, the two support pieces 613r protrude from each of the rail portions 613q at the ball removal opening 613p. This allows the ball removal shutter 615 to be fully supported and prevents the ball removal shutter 615 from falling off even if the load of the game ball B acts on the ball removal shutter 615 through the ball removal opening 613p. The locking portion 613s can hold the ball removal shutter 615 in the open position by locking the locking protrusion 615f of the ball removal shutter 615.

The slits 613t of the ball meandering member 613 penetrate downwards to a size that does not impede the flow of the game balls B, and can discharge debris and dust from within the ball storage passage 604. The slits 613t provided at the turning and bending sections are provided on the outside of the curve.

The ball meandering member 613 is equipped with a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and a circulating ball excess sensor 622 that can detect the game balls B in circulation, as will be described in detail later.

This ball meandering member 613 can form a ball storage passage 604 that meanders back and forth and extends left and right so as to become lower to the right. In addition, the ball meandering member 613 has multiple turn-back portions (first turn-back portion 613b, second turn-back portion 613d, third turn-back portion 613f, fourth turn-back portion 613h) and multiple bends (first bend portion 613j, second bend portion 613l, third bend portion 613n), so that the flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed at those portions, and the impact on the inlet side of the ball lifting unit 650 can be mitigated.

The serpentine cover 614 is attached to the ball serpentine member 613 so as to cover the open upper end of the ball serpentine member 613. By attaching the serpentine cover 614 to the ball serpentine member 613, it is possible to prevent game balls B from leaking from the ball serpentine member 613 (ball storage passage 604) to the outside, or to prevent game balls B that are not compatible with the ball storage passage 604 or illegal game balls B from being inserted from the outside.

The length of the portion of the serpentine cover 614 that extends forward and backward at the left end is shorter toward the rear than the first straight portion 613a of the ball serpentine member 613. As a result, when the serpentine cover 614 is attached to the ball serpentine member 613, the rear portion of the first straight portion 613a of the ball serpentine member 613 is opened upward, and communication with the out ball passage 601 and the safe ball passage 602 is possible through this portion.

The serpentine cover 614 also has an opening 614a that penetrates vertically at a location above the rear end of the second straight section 613c of the ball serpentine member 613. Through this opening 614a, the foul ball passage 603 can communicate with the ball storage passage 604.

The ball removal shutter 615 is used to remove (discharge) game ball B (circulating game ball) from the circulating ball path unit 600, etc., and is attached to the underside of the ball serpentine member 613 so as to be slidable in the forward and backward directions. The ball removal shutter 615 has a flat door section 615a capable of closing the ball removal opening 613p, a knob section 615b extending up, down, left and right from the front edge of the door section 615a, a pair of rod sections 615c each extending rearward from the rear ends of both the left and right ends of the door section 615a, a connecting section 615e that connects the pair of rod sections 615c at the rear of the door section 615a to form an opening 615d that penetrates vertically, a locking protrusion 615f that bulges from the outer surface of each of the pair of rod sections 615c between the connecting section 615e and the rear end, a hook section 615g that extends outward from the rear ends of the pair of rod sections 615c, and a magnet support section 615h that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom surface of the door section 615a.

The magnet support portion 615h of the ball removal shutter 615 can support the cylindrical magnet 616 by inserting the magnet 616 into the cylinder. The magnet support portion 615h is provided upstream of the opening 615d. This magnet support portion 615h has a portion at its bottom end that protrudes into the cylinder and is open to the rear. By inserting the magnet 616 from the rear, the portion of the magnet 616 that protrudes downward is positioned, so that the magnet 616 will not fall off the magnet support portion 615h.

When the ball shutter 615 is attached to the ball snaking member 613, a pair of rail portions 613q of the ball snaking member 613 are located on the left and right outer sides of the door portion 615a and the pair of rod portions 615c, and the lower surface of the first horizontal portion 613k and the upper surfaces of the pair of support pieces 613r are located on both the top and bottom sides of the door portion 615a and the pair of rod portions 615c. This allows the ball shutter 615 to slide in the front-to-back direction between a closed position and an open position, which will be described later.

In the normal state, as shown in Figures 39 (a1) and (a2), the ball removal shutter 615 is in a closed position where the door portion 615a prevents the game ball B from passing through the ball removal opening 613p. In this state, the rear surface of the knob portion 615b abuts against the front surface of the first horizontal portion 613k, and the pair of locking protrusions 615f abut against the respective rear end surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q. This restricts the ball removal shutter 615 from moving forward and backward and holds it in the closed position. Therefore, when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the game ball B is not discharged from the ball removal opening 613p into the ball receiving tray 720 below (see Figure 20).

When the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the magnet support portion 615h (magnet 616) is located below near the upstream end of the ball removal opening 613p. As will be described in detail later, when an iron ball SB (see FIG. 44) flows through the ball storage passage 604, the iron ball SB is magnetically attracted to the door portion 615a by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, causing a ball blockage, making it possible to detect the intrusion of the iron ball SB.

When the knob 615b of the ball removal shutter 615 is pinched and pulled forward in the closed position, the locking protrusion 615f on the rod 615c strongly abuts against the rear end surface of the rail 613q. At this time, the force applied to the locking protrusion 615f causes the rod 615c to elastically deform inward, and the locking protrusion 615f moves toward the inner surface of the rail 613q, causing the ball removal shutter 615 to slide forward from the closed position. When the locking protrusion 615f reaches the locking portion 613s, the elastic force of the rod 615c locks the locking protrusion 615f to the locking portion 613s, and the hook 615g on the rear end of the rod 615c approaches the rear end surface of the rail 613q. This restricts the ball removal shutter 615 from sliding forward any further.

In this state, as shown in Figures 39 (b1) and (b2), the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 coincides with the ball removal port 613p, allowing the game ball B to pass through the ball removal port 613p. In other words, the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position. When the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position, the game ball B upstream of the ball removal port 613p in the ball storage passage 604 is discharged through the ball removal port 613p and the opening 615d into the ball receiving tray 720 below. This makes it possible to remove the circulating game ball B to the outside.

When game balls B accumulate in the ball receiving tray 720 and it becomes heavy, the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f, which is inclined so that the front end is lower, and the inclination of the bottom wall causes the ball receiving tray 720 to slide forward, but the locking claws 501n lock it in place and prevent it from sliding forward. In this state, when the locking claws 501n are released, the weight of the stored game balls B causes the ball receiving tray 720 to automatically slide forward, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be easily removed from the tray insertion recess 501f.

When the ball removal shutter 615 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is close to the front surface of the knob portion 615b, and even if the ball removal shutter 615 tries to slide forward for some reason, the knob portion 615b abuts against the door frame 3 and prevents it from sliding to the open position. This prevents the circulating game balls B from accidentally falling out and being lost, and prevents illegal game balls B from being mixed in through the ball removal opening 613p.

The magnet 616 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the magnet support portion 615h of the ball removal shutter 615. This magnet 616 is for attracting the iron ball SB. The magnet 616 is made of a material with strong magnetic force, such as a neodymium magnet.

However, if the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment coexists with conventional pachinko machines in which players can touch game balls (iron balls SB) in an amusement hall or the like, there is a risk that the iron balls SB will become mixed in when the game balls B are replenished or replaced during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 1, if an iron ball SB gets mixed in, the ball shutter 615 is provided with a magnet 616, so when the iron ball SB flows through the ball storage passage 604, the iron ball SB is magnetically attracted to the upper surface of the door section 615a of the ball shutter 615 in the closed position by the magnetic force of the magnet 616 and stops. At this time, because a magnet 616 with strong magnetic force is used, even if a large number of game balls B accumulate upstream of the magnetically attracted iron ball SB and a force acts to press it downstream, the iron ball SB will not move from the upper surface of the door section 615a.

When the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a (magnet 616) of the ball ejection shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604, and the game ball B continues to be released from the ball launching unit 550, the game balls B downstream of the magnetically attached iron ball SB are sequentially consumed, and the consumed (released) game balls B are sequentially supplied upstream of the iron ball SB. Therefore, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the lifting entrance sensor 653, which are located downstream of the ball ejection shutter 615, turn off the detection of the game ball B, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, and the like, which are located upstream of the ball ejection shutter 615, turn on the detection of the game ball B. This makes it possible to detect and report the occurrence of ball clogging between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, etc. and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, etc. In other words, it is possible to detect that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a.

When the ball shutter 615 is slid from the closed position to the forward open position while the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, the front end of the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a abuts against the front wall of the first horizontal portion 613k, and only the iron ball SB is prevented from moving forward. Then, when the magnet 616 moves forward of the front wall of the first horizontal portion 613k, the magnetic force acting on the iron ball SB weakens and the iron ball SB starts to roll downstream. At this time, the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 coincides with the ball removal opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball removal opening 613p, so the iron ball SB can be discharged from the ball removal opening 613p to the ball receiving tray 720 below and can be removed from the ball storage passage 604.

The circulating ball path relay board 617 is attached to the rear of the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface of the front ball receiving member 611, below the out ball receiving plate portion 611b of the rear ball receiving member 612. The circulating ball path relay board 617 is used to relay the connections between the out ball sensor 605, safe ball sensor 606, foul ball sensor 607, low circulating ball sensor 621, and high circulating ball sensor 622 and the frame control board 740, which will be described later.

The gauge section 620 indicates an appropriate amount area of a predetermined length in the flow direction of the ball storage passage 604 in the ball meandering member 613. Here, the appropriate amount is defined as the state in which the rear end of the row of game balls B stored in a line is hanging on the gauge section 620. The gauge section 620 allows the appropriate amount of game balls B (circulating balls) to be visually confirmed, and is formed of a transparent seal with a colored portion. This gauge section 620 is attached to the upper surface of the meandering cover 614. More specifically, it is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the meandering cover 614 upstream of the first horizontal section 613k of the ball meandering member 613. As shown in FIG. 42, this gauge section 620 has letters and symbols (arrows) indicating the appropriate range (appropriate amount area) of the storage amount of game balls B.

The gauge section 620 is composed of three seals: an upper gauge seal 620a attached to the upper portion of the third straight section 613e and the third folded section 613f of the spherical serpentine member 613; a middle gauge seal 620b attached to the upper portion of the fourth straight section 613g; and a lower gauge seal 620c attached to the upper portion of the fifth straight section 613i and the first bent section 613j.

The upper gauge seal 620a is marked (displayed) with a line extending left and right near the center of the front-to-rear direction of the third straight section 613e, an arrow with a rod portion extending along the passage to the downstream end of the third turning section 613f on the downstream side (front side) of the line, with the tip of the arrow portion pointing toward the line, and the words "Up to here" written (displayed) on the right side downstream of the arrow portion of the arrow.

The middle gauge seal 620b has a rod-shaped portion that extends rearward (downstream) to continue from the rod portion of the arrow on the upper gauge seal 620a, and the words "suitable range" are written near the upstream end of the rod-shaped portion.

The lower gauge seal 620c has a line extending back and forth at the downstream end of the first bend 613j, an arrow with a rod portion extending along the passage to the upstream end of the fifth straight section 613i with the tip of the arrow pointing toward the line on the upstream side of the line, and the words "From here" written (displayed) to the right of the arrow upstream of the arrow.

When the gauge section 620 is viewed during maintenance, etc., if no game balls B can be seen in the area of the gauge section 620 (appropriate amount area), that is, the area ranging from the line of the upper gauge seal 620a to the line of the lower gauge section 620c, it is clear that there are fewer game balls B than the appropriate amount. To replenish game balls B, insert game balls B into the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or into the out ball receiving port 600a or safe ball receiving port 600b until the appropriate amount is reached.

On the other hand, when looking at the gauge section 620, if game balls B can be seen in all parts of the gauge section 620, that is, if the rear end of the row of game balls B is upstream of the "up to here" part (the line of the upper gauge seal 620a), it is determined that there are an excess of game balls B, more than the appropriate amount. If there are too many game balls B, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward and slid to the open position, thereby discharging the game balls B in the ball storage passage 604 from the ball removal opening 613p to bring the amount to the appropriate level.

In this way, the gauge section 620 of this embodiment makes it possible to determine at a glance whether the amount of stored game balls B is appropriate (the right amount), and also makes it easier to keep the amount of stored game balls B at an appropriate level.

In the above embodiment, the gauge section 620 is formed by attaching a sticker to the serpentine cover 614, but the appropriate amount area may be colored a different color from the other areas, the gauge section 620 may be molded in a different color, or the gauge section 620 may have colored lines drawn on the downstream and upstream ends of the appropriate amount area.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gauge section 620 is shown to be located upstream of the ball removal shutter 615, but this is not limited to this. As shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 62, the downstream end of the gauge section 620 may be located downstream of the ball removal shutter 615 and upstream of the low circulating ball sensor 621.

In this embodiment, the ball circulation path unit 600 has a ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611, a ball receiving rear member 612, a ball serpentine member 613, and a serpentine cover 614, which are made of transparent synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to visually check the internal condition from the outside.

The circulating ball path unit 600 is installed with the out ball sensor 605 and the foul ball sensor 607 sandwiched between the ball receiving front plate 610 and the ball receiving front member 611, and the safe ball sensor 606 sandwiched between the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving rear member 612. The out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 are arranged side by side, front to back.

The out ball sensor 605, safe ball sensor 606, foul ball sensor 607, insufficient circulating ball sensor 621, and excessive circulating ball sensor 622 detect game ball B in a non-contact manner, for example, by detecting changes in induced current.

The circulating ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the circulating ball path unit 600 is attached so that the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b are at the same height as the top surface of the base wall portion 501b and in contact with the rear edge of the top surface of the base wall portion 501b.

In addition, when assembled to the main body frame 4, the circulating ball path unit 600 is attached so that the ball sending unit 700 is positioned between it and the base wall portion 501b.

Furthermore, when the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the portions of the ball serpentine member 613 and the serpentine cover 614 forward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction protrude forward through the ball storage path insertion port 501g provided in the base wall portion 501b from the rear. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, the game ball B in the ball serpentine member 613 (ball storage path 604) can be seen from the front (outside).

When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the frame base unit 730 is opened to the rear, the interiors of the out ball path 601, the safe ball path 602, the foul ball path 603, and the areas of the ball storage path 604 rearward of the base wall portion 501b can be seen from the rear. As a result, when a ball jam occurs, the inside of the out ball path 601, etc. can be checked by opening the frame base unit 730, making it easy to identify the location of the jam.

When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the second horizontal section 613o of the ball snaking member 613 is located behind the base wall section 501b and below the ball launching unit 550. In other words, the circulating ball path unit 600 has a ball discharge port 600d that opens to the right behind the base wall section 501b and at a lower position than the ball launching unit 550. This ball discharge port 600d is connected to the ball lifting inlet passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650, which will be described later.

The circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment has a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 for detecting when there are too few stored game balls B (circulating balls), and an excess circulating ball sensor 622 for detecting when there are too many stored game balls B (circulating balls) (see FIG. 62).

The low circulating ball sensor 621 is located downstream of the gauge section 620 in the ball storage passage 604. The low circulating ball sensor 621 may also be located upstream of the ball removal shutter 615. The excess circulating ball sensor 622 is located near the upstream end of the gauge section 620 in the ball storage passage 604. The low circulating ball sensor 621 and the excess circulating ball sensor 622 are connected to the frame control board 740 via the circulating ball path relay board 617.

Details will be described later, but when there is an appropriate amount of game balls B, the under-circulating ball sensor 621 detects game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more, and the excess circulating ball sensor 622 does not detect game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more. When there are too few game balls B, neither the under-circulating ball sensor 621 nor the excess circulating ball sensor 622 detects game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more. On the other hand, when there is too many game balls B, both the under-circulating ball sensor 621 and the excess circulating ball sensor 622 detect game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more. In addition, if the low circulating ball sensor 621 does not detect game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more, and the excess circulating ball sensor 622 detects game ball B for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more, a ball jam including the inclusion of iron ball SB has occurred between the low circulating ball sensor 621 and the excess circulating ball sensor 622.

Here, the reason for the predetermined time k80 ms as a threshold for detecting the presence or absence of game ball B will be explained. For example, on the circulation path R, the positions where sensors such as the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the lifting inlet sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, and the launch front sensor 704 are placed are placed at the stopping position of game ball B when the ball lifting unit 650 and the ball sending unit 700 are stopped. This position is the position where the next game ball B is located every time one game ball B is sent. Therefore, the detection method here is whether or not the game ball B is detected for 80 ms or more. This is because the time it takes to detect game ball B rolling on a slope with an inclination of about 5 degrees is about 50 ms, so a margin is added to detect the presence of game ball B at that position with certainty, and it is detected at 80 ms. In other words, this value of 80 ms is a practical value obtained by experiment.

In this way, by combining the detection states of game balls B by the low circulating ball sensor 621 and the high circulating ball sensor 622, the frame control board 740 can automatically determine and report the amount of game balls B, ball clogging, etc.

In the above embodiment, a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and an excess circulating ball sensor 622 are provided, but the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 may be replaced with a lifting inlet sensor described below, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 may be replaced with an out ball sensor 605, a safe ball sensor 606, or a foul ball sensor 607.

[4-4a. Ball jamming elimination mechanism]
Next, in the circulating ball path unit 600, a ball jamming elimination mechanism 630 may be provided to facilitate the elimination of ball jams in the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606, as shown in Figure 43. Figure 43(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the essential parts of the rear cross section cut at the out ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism in the circulating ball path unit attached to the main body frame closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cover member in (a) in the open state.

The ball jamming elimination mechanism 630 is configured by forming an openable and closable lid member 631 on the wall portion above the out ball sensor 605 and safe ball sensor 606 in the front ball receiving member 611 and rear ball receiving member 612 of the circulating ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG. 43(a), the lid member 631 is closed in the normal state. The lid member 631 is held in the closed state by a locking claw (not shown).

This ball jamming clearing mechanism 630 is used to clear jams that occur in the out ball passage 601 or the safe ball passage 602, or when a fraudulent ball B' with a larger diameter than the game ball B is inserted as a fraudulent act, blocking the out ball sensor 605, etc.

For example, if an illegal ball B' with a larger diameter than the game ball B is inserted from the outlet 1008 of the game board 5 and the out ball sensor 605 is blocked, the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600 will appear when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the frame base unit 730 is opened. In this embodiment, a gap into which a finger can be inserted is formed between the part of the circulating ball path unit 600 where the ball jamming elimination mechanism 630 is provided and the box main body part 504b of the main frame speaker box 504, so that the locking claw of the cover member 631 can be released through the gap and the cover member 631 can be opened by rotating it so that the lower end of the cover member 631 moves upward (see FIG. 43(b)).

By opening the cover member 631, a finger can be inserted into the upper portion of the out ball sensor 605 in the out ball passage 601, making it possible to easily remove the illegal ball B' that is blocking the out ball sensor 605. In this way, the illegal ball B' can be easily removed without having to remove the circulating ball passage unit 600, which is screwed in place using a screwdriver.

In addition, even if the safe ball sensor 606 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the illegal ball B' can be removed by following the same procedure as above.

In the above, the ball jamming elimination mechanism 630 is shown to have an openable and closable lid member 631, but for example, elastic claws may be provided on the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611, and the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 may be made detachable rearward by engaging the elastic claws. In this case, under normal conditions, the frame base unit 730 is located behind the circulating ball path unit 600, and even if the elastic claws become loose, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 will not come off rearward. If the out ball sensor 605 is blocked by an illegal ball B', the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the frame base unit 730 is then opened, revealing the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600. By releasing the elastic claws that attach the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 can be easily removed, and the illegal ball B' blocking the out ball sensor 605 can be easily removed.

Alternatively, the ball jamming elimination mechanism 630 may be configured so that the upper part of the out ball sensor 605 of the ball receiving front member 611, which is sandwiched between the ball receiving front plate 610 and the ball receiving rear member 612, can be slid upward and removed. In this case, under normal conditions, the game board 5 is located above the circulating ball path unit 600, and the sliding part of the ball receiving front member 611 does not come off upward due to the action of gravity. If the out ball sensor 605 is blocked by an illegal ball B', the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, and the upper part of the circulating ball path unit 600 appears. The sliding part of the ball receiving front member 611 can be slid upward and removed to easily remove the illegal ball B' blocking the out ball sensor 605.

[4-4b. Ball-pulling shutter of the second embodiment]
Next, in the circulating ball path unit 600, as shown in Fig. 44, the magnet 616 may be attached to the front part of the opening 615d in the ball removal shutter 615. Fig. 44(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the closed position, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter in the open position, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a side cross section of the ball meandering member and the ball removal tray in a state where the ball removal shutter is slid from the state of (b) to the closed position and the iron ball is magnetically attached to the lower surface. This ball removal shutter 615 is designed so that the rear end side of the outer circumferential surface of the magnet 616 supported by the magnet support part 615h coincides with the inner circumferential surface on the front side of the opening 615d.

According to the ball removal shutter 615 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44(a), when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid from the closed position to the forward open position in a state where the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, the front end of the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a abuts against the front wall of the first horizontal portion 613k, and only the iron ball SB is prevented from moving forward. Then, when the ball removal shutter 615 slides further forward, the door portion 615a that was supporting the lower end of the iron ball SB disappears, and the iron ball SB moves downward into the opening 615d due to gravity. At this time, the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 coincides with the inner surface of the front side of the opening 615d, so that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 (see FIG. 44(b)).

The iron ball SB tries to move from the outer periphery of the magnet 616 to the pole with the stronger magnetic force (here, the bottom end face), but when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position, the top end face of the ball receiving tray 720 is located below the magnet 616, so the iron ball SB does not move below the magnet 616. Therefore, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid to the open position, the iron ball B is located at a position overlapping with the opening 615d, and the game ball B upstream of the iron ball SB is not discharged downward through the opening 615d, i.e., the ball removal port 613p.

After sliding the ball removal shutter 615 to the open position, the ball removal shutter 615 is then slid rearward to the closed position, and the door portion 615a prevents the game ball B upstream of the iron ball SB from passing through the ball removal opening 613p, while the iron ball SB that was magnetized on the outer periphery of the magnet 616 moves to the underside of the magnet 616, and the iron ball SB becomes magnetically attached to the underside of the magnet 616 (see FIG. 44(c)). After that, the ball receiving tray 720 is pulled out and removed from the tray insertion recess 501f, and the iron ball SB that is magnetically attached to the underside of the magnet 616 is removed.

In this way, when the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnet 616, by sliding the ball removal shutter 615 back and forth, only the magnetically attached iron ball SB can be removed from the ball storage passage 604 to the outside.

[4-5. Ball lifting unit]
The ball lifting unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 45 to 54. Figure 45(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame seen from the rear. Figure 46 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit with the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened to remove the ball polishing cassette. Figure 47(a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown without the ball polishing cassette attached, (b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown together with the ball polishing cassette with the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened, and (c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown with the ball polishing cassette attached.

Figure 48 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the door frame is closed when the ball grinding cassette is not completely locked, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the door frame moves in the closing direction from the state in (a) and the protrusion of the door frame abuts the tip of the ball grinding motor base, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the door frame is closed from the state in (b) and the ball grinding cut is locked. Figure 49 is an enlarged front view showing the main parts with the ball grinding cassette removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the main frame. Figure 50 (a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball grinding mechanism and ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) is a plan view of the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism as seen from arrow A in (b).

Furthermore, Figure 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. Figure 52 (a) shows an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and lifting outlet sensor, and is an oblique view of the ball lifting unit seen from the rear left, and (b) is a plan sectional view of the ball lifting unit cut at the lifting inlet sensor. Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram showing the front and rear parts of the ball sensor consisting of a photosensor in the ball passage. Figure 54 (a) is an oblique view of the ball polishing cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is an oblique view of the ball polishing cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) is a right side sectional view of the ball polishing cassette cut in the center in the left-right direction.

The ball lifting unit 650 is for sending the game ball B, which is discharged from the game board 5 or the foul unit 570 and circulates through the circulating ball path unit 600, to the ball launching unit 550 via the ball sending unit 700. The ball lifting unit 650 is attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501.

The ball lifting unit 650 is equipped with a ball lifting mechanism 660 for lifting game balls B, a ball lifting inlet passage 651 that supplies game balls B sent from the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting mechanism 660, a ball lifting outlet passage 652 that supplies game balls B lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 to the ball sending unit 700, a lifting inlet sensor 653 provided in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 for detecting game balls B in circulation, and a lifting outlet sensor 654 provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 for detecting game balls B in circulation.

The ball lifting unit 650 also includes a ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 that is arranged so as to be in contact with the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651, a ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 that is arranged so as to be in contact with the game ball B in the ball lifting outlet passage 652, a ball lifting relay board 657 that relays the connection with the frame control board 740, and a ball polishing mechanism 680 for polishing the game ball B lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660.

First, the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 includes a lifting spiral shaft 661 that extends vertically and has a helical lifting groove 661a on its outer circumferential surface, a shaft gear 662 attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, a motor gear 663 that meshes with the shaft gear 662 and can rotate around an axis perpendicular to the axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661, a lifting motor 664 with the motor gear 663 attached to its rotating shaft for rotating the lifting spiral shaft 661, a lifting motor index 665 that has a detection portion 665a that is notched out in a portion of the circumference extending from the lower end of the shaft gear 662 in a flange-like shape, and a lifting motor index sensor 666 that can detect the detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665.

The ball lifting mechanism 660 also includes a motor base metal plate 667 to which the lifting motor 664 is attached and which rotatably supports the motor gear 663, and a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 which are attached to the motor base metal plate 667 and which rotatably support the lifting spiral shaft 661 and are attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 has a spiral lifting groove 661a on its outer periphery, the depth of which is sufficient to accommodate the game balls B in a row. The lifting groove 661a is formed so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 can lift the game balls B by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from above in the axial direction (see FIG. 50(c)). The spiral pitch of the lifting groove 661a is longer near the upper and lower ends than between them. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotatably supported by the lifting mechanism base 668 and the lifting mechanism cover 669. The rotation axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is inclined relative to the vertical so that the upper end is located to the right of the lower end when viewed from the front. This allows the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to be moved away from the ball sending unit to the right, making it possible to relatively lengthen the length of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and increase the amount of game balls B that can be stored. In this embodiment, the axis of rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees to the vertical.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 51, this lifting spiral shaft 661 has a small diameter section 661b, whose bottom diameter (bottom diameter) in the lifting groove 661a is bottom diameter D1, and a large diameter section 661c, whose bottom diameter D2 is larger than the small diameter section 661b, and the large diameter section 661c is provided in the axial middle section overlapping with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is configured so that the diameter gradually changes between the small diameter section 661b and the large diameter section 661c.

In addition, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a smaller spiral pitch P2 at the large diameter portion 661c than the spiral pitch P1 at the small diameter portion 661b. The smaller the spiral pitch, the slower the lifting speed of the game ball B.

This lifting spiral shaft 661 is positioned so that a gap S1 smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B is formed between the large diameter portion 661c and the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the ball polishing cassette 681.

Incidentally, in the lifting spiral shaft 661, if the diameter of the bottom of the lifting groove 661a is configured to be the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b over the entire length, the bottom diameter D1 is smaller than the bottom diameter D2 of the large diameter portion 661c, and therefore the gap between the bottom of the lifting groove 661a and the polishing cloth 682 becomes large. Therefore, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated to polish the game ball B lifted by the lifting groove 661a with the polishing cloth 682, the larger gap with the polishing cloth 682 causes the game ball B to escape to the bottom side of the lifting groove 661a, and the contact area of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 becomes smaller, resulting in a decrease in polishing efficiency.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the bottom diameter D2 of the lifting groove 661a is set to the large diameter portion 661c, which is larger than the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b, at the portion overlapping with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the axial middle portion of the lifting spiral shaft 661, so that the gap from the bottom of the lifting groove 661a to the surface of the polishing cloth 682 at the large diameter portion 661c can be made smaller than the gap at the portion of the small diameter portion 661b. Also, in this embodiment, the gap S1 from the large diameter portion 661c to the polishing cloth 682 is made smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B. For these reasons, at the portion of the large diameter portion 661c, the game ball B cannot escape to the bottom side of the lifting groove 661a, and the bottom of the lifting groove 661a can press the game ball B against the polishing cloth 682, and the polishing cloth 682 can be dented together with the ball polishing sponge 683 provided on the back side of the polishing cloth 682. This allows the contact area of the polishing cloth 682 with the game ball B to be increased, improving the polishing efficiency of the game ball B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a smaller spiral pitch P2 in the large diameter portion 661c that overlaps with the polishing cloth 682 than the spiral pitch P1 in the small diameter portion 661b, so that the lifting speed of the game ball B in the large diameter portion 661c can be slowed. This allows the contact time of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 to be longer, so that the game ball B can be polished more thoroughly.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is designed so that its diameter gradually changes between the small diameter portion 661b and the large diameter portion 661c, making it possible to avoid a sudden change in the load applied when lifting the game ball B, thereby reducing the load during the lifting operation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees from the vertical, so that it intersects the polishing cloth 682 diagonally. This allows the entire width of the polishing cloth 682 to be used to polish the game ball B, and the polishing cloth 682 can be used efficiently for polishing.

In the above description, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a large diameter section 661c in the middle in the axial direction, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a small diameter section 661b only on the lower end side, and a large diameter section 661c up to the upper end.

The shaft gear 662 is a spur gear (worm wheel gear). The motor gear 663 is a worm gear. As a result, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the load acting on it caused by the large number of game balls B contained in the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the rotation can be prevented by the motor gear 663 consisting of a worm gear meshed with the shaft gear 662. In addition, since the motor gear 663 is a worm gear, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the inertia when the drive of the lifting motor 664 stops, the rotation can be immediately stopped, and overshooting of the game balls B can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the shaft gear 662 is made of POM (polyacetal resin), and the motor gear 663 is made of fiber-reinforced plastic containing polyamide carbon fiber. This makes the motor gear 663, which is a worm gear, less likely to chip. The motor gear 663 may also be made of metal.

The lifting motor 664 is a DC motor. The lifting motor index 665 is molded integrally with the shaft gear 662 in a flange shape. The detection section 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is provided so that a 45 degree angle range is cut out from the entire circumference. The lifting motor index sensor 666 is a photosensor. The lifting motor index sensor 666 is in a light receiving state at the detection section 665a of the lifting motor index 665, and is in a light blocking state at the other sections than the detection section 665a. This makes it possible to detect the rotational position of the lifting spiral shaft 661 via the lifting motor index 665.

Although the details will be described later, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates once when the rotating shaft of the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. Then, when the lifting motor 664 rotates 28 times after the lifting motor index sensor 666 is located at a position other than the detection unit 665a and enters a non-light receiving state, it reaches the detection unit 665a and enters a light receiving state, and when the lifting motor 664 rotates another four times after entering the light receiving state, it moves away from the detection unit 665a and enters a non-light receiving state. In this embodiment, the position where the lifting motor 664 rotates two times after reaching the detection unit 665a and entering the light receiving state is set as the origin. In other words, the center of the detection unit 665a is set as the origin of rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661.

The motor base metal plate 667 has the lifting motor 664 attached to its left end when viewed from the front, and rotatably supports the right end of the motor gear 663 at its right end. The motor base metal plate 667 has its upper end attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 and its lower end attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting mechanism base 668 cooperates with the lifting mechanism cover 669 to house the lifting spiral shaft 661 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661. The lifting mechanism base 668 has a ball polishing port 668a that penetrates from front to back so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 faces forward and is large enough that the game ball B cannot pass through, and a cassette mounting recess 668b that is recessed rearward from the front and has the ball polishing port 668a opening on the bottom surface and can house the rear end side of the ball polishing cassette 681. The ball polishing port 668a extends vertically with a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball B. This ball polishing mouth 668a is provided so that a portion of the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 protrudes forward, and the game ball B is polished when the portion of the game ball B that protrudes forward beyond the ball polishing mouth 668a comes into contact with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the ball polishing mechanism 680 attached (mounted) to the cassette mounting recess 668b.

The lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with a downstream portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 at a position near the lower end and to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 when viewed from the front. The portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 opens at the upstream end toward the rear and is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the left. In addition, a lifting inlet sensor 653 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at a position near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 when viewed from the front.

The lifting mechanism base 668 also has an upstream portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 near its upper end. The portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 slopes downward from the front of the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left when viewed from the front, then slopes downward toward the rear, with the downstream end opening toward the rear. The ball lifting exit passage 652 slopes downward from the portion of the lifting mechanism base 668 that opens toward the rear to the left, then slopes downward toward the front, and opens toward the front at its front end. This portion of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is formed by the cooperation of the lifting mechanism base 668 and the lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting mechanism base 668 also has a grinding motor base 686, to which the grinding motor 688 of the grinding mechanism 680 is attached, which is rotatable about an axis extending vertically.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 cooperates with the lifting mechanism base 668 to house the lifting spiral shaft 661 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661. It is attached from the rear to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. The ball lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear surface of the lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 has a portion upstream of the portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 that is provided on the lifting mechanism base 668. The downstream end of the portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 that is provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 opens forward at a location on the right side of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 when viewed from the front, extends rearward, bends leftward, passes behind the lifting spiral shaft 661, extends diagonally forward, and the upstream end opens to the left. A ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 is attached to this lifting mechanism cover 669 behind the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting inlet passage 651.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 also has a portion downstream of the portion provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 in the ball lifting exit passage 652. The portion provided on the lifting mechanism cover 669 in the ball lifting exit passage 652 has an upstream end that opens rearward, bends leftward when viewed from the front, extends leftward to the left end, then bends forward, and the downstream end opens forward at the front end of the lifting mechanism cover 669.

A lifting outlet sensor 654 is attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 near the left end of the portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 that extends to the left when viewed from the front. A ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 is attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 upstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654 in the portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 that extends to the left.

Furthermore, the lifting mechanism cover 669 has a support protrusion 669a that protrudes forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 from a position toward the lower center in the vertical direction at the right end, and a locking hole 669b that penetrates the front surface of the support protrusion 669a and locks the Nylatch 694. When the ball lifting unit 650 is attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the main body frame 4 from the rear, the support protrusion 669a protrudes toward the front surface of the base wall portion 501b through an opening 501o that penetrates the base wall portion 501b.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650 has an opening (inlet) at the upstream end that opens to the left near the lower part of the left side surface of the ball lifting unit 650. This opening is provided so as to face the ball discharge port 600d of the circulating ball path unit 600 when assembled to the main body frame 4. The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is inclined so as to become lower toward the right from the left end inlet, and after extending to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to bypass the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it turns back to the front side and extends to the left near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. Then, it bends in a crank shape so as to go around to the front side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 near the lifting spiral shaft 661, and communicates with the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the front side near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is arranged so that the opening at the upstream end faces the ball discharge port 600d, which forms the opening at the downstream end of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulating ball path unit 600, and game balls B that have circulated through the ball storage passage 604 are handed over and circulated.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is provided with a lifting inlet sensor 653 on the right side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and a ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 is attached to the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661.

The ball lifting outlet passage 652 is connected to the lifting groove 661a at the front near the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 near the upper end of the ball lifting unit 650 at its upstream end, extends to the left of the lifting spiral shaft 661, then bends backward, extends to the same position as the rear end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and then bends to the left. From there, it extends to the left near the left end of the ball lifting unit 650 and bends forward, and its downstream end opens forward at the front of the ball lifting unit 650 (lifting mechanism cover 669).

The ball lifting outlet passage 652 is arranged so that the opening at the downstream end faces the ball supply port of the ball sending unit described below, and can supply game balls B to the ball sending unit 700.

The ball lifting exit passage 652 has a lifting exit sensor 654 near the left end of the section that extends leftward near the rear end of the ball lifting unit 650, and a ball lifting exit earth metal plate 656 is attached upstream (to the right) of that. The bottom wall of the section of the ball lifting exit passage 652 where the ball lifting exit earth metal plate 656 is located has an opening that is large enough not to interfere with the flow of the game ball B, and dust, debris, etc. can be discharged to the outside through the opening.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 detects the presence or absence of a game ball B to be lifted when the lifting motor 664 is driven to rotate the lifting spiral shaft 661 to lift the game ball B. Details will be described later, but when the lifting entrance sensor 653 does not detect a game ball B, the lifting motor 664 is not driven.

The lifting exit sensor 654 detects the presence or absence of game balls B being supplied to the ball sending unit. Details will be described later, but when the lifting entrance sensor 653 detects game balls B and the lifting exit sensor 654 does not detect game balls B, and a predetermined condition is met (here, the launch subtraction sensor 554 subtracts a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B), the lifting motor 664 is driven to rotate the lifting spiral shaft 661, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lifted.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 are photosensors with a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element, and detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in a non-contact manner by blocking the light from the light-emitting element by the game ball B.

Here, the relationship between the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 and the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 will be described. Here, the relationship between the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the lifting inlet sensor 653 will be described, and the relationship between the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 will be omitted because it is the same. As shown in Figures 52 and 53, the part of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 where the lifting inlet sensor 653 is provided is a V-shaped passage section 651a with a V-shaped cross section (an inverted trapezoidal shape narrowing downward). The part of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 other than the V-shaped passage section 651a is a U-shaped passage section 651b with a U-shaped cross section that is open upward.

The same is true for the ball lifting outlet passage 652, where the lifting outlet sensor 654 is a V-shaped passage section 652a with a V-shaped cross section (an inverted trapezoidal shape narrowing downward), and the other section is a U-shaped passage section 652b with a U-shaped cross section that opens upward.

In other words, the V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a each have a pair of inclined surfaces that the game ball B comes into contact with and that are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they go upward. In addition, the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b have a flat bottom surface that the game ball B comes into contact with and that is wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and a pair of side wall surfaces that stand upright from both ends of the width of the bottom surface. In addition, the ball sending passage 703 of the ball sending unit 700, which is downstream of the ball lifting upper exit passage 652, is also formed in the same shape as the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b.

However, if the cross section of the passage at the location of the lifting entrance sensor 653, which is made of a photosensor, is made into a U-shaped cross section that opens upward, the game balls B passing through will come into contact with the side walls, and scratches and dirt that occur on the side walls of the passage due to the contact of the game balls B will hinder the light reception and emission of the photosensor, which may result in a false detection. Also, in a U-shaped cross section passage, the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the passage is not constant and stable, so the detection position by the sensor will vary, and there is a risk of a false detection.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lift inlet sensor 653 (lift outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a) with a V-shaped cross section, so that the game ball B is held at two points by the diagonal parts on both sides of the V, restricting movement in the width direction of the passage, and the position of the game ball B can be kept constant and stable in the width direction of the passage. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the side wall of the passage at the lift inlet sensor 653 (lift outlet sensor 654), preventing scratches and dirt caused by contact by the game ball B, eliminating false detections, and ensuring that the game ball is detected reliably.

In the above, the V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a) with a V-shaped (inverted trapezoidal) cross section is shown as the shape of the passage that keeps the position of the game ball B constant and stable relative to the sensor, but it may also be a pair of protrusions that are spaced apart at a distance narrower than the diameter of the game ball B and extend in the direction in which the game ball B flows.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 has a lifting spiral shaft 661 at its downstream end. Therefore, in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 upstream of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the game balls B are picked up one by one by the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, so that they move intermittently, and the game balls B stop in the ball lifting inlet passage 651. On the other hand, the ball lifting outlet passage 652 has a ball sending unit 700, which will be described later, at its downstream end. Therefore, in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 upstream of the ball sending unit 700, the game balls B move intermittently one by one by the ball sending operation of the ball sending unit 700, and the game balls B stop in the ball lifting outlet passage 652.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 (ball lifting outlet passage 652), only the area of the lifting inlet sensor 653 (lifting outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a) with a V-shaped cross section, and the other areas are U-shaped passage sections 651b (U-shaped passage sections 652b) with a U-shaped cross section, so that even if multiple game balls B are placed in the passage and stopped, the ball pressure caused by the multiple game balls B on the downstream side can be reduced.

In more detail, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 53, in the V-shaped passage section 651a (V-shaped passage section 652a), the game balls B are arranged in a straight line (in a line on the axis of the passage), but in the U-shaped passage section 651b (U-shaped passage section 652b), the game balls B are pushed downstream and arranged in a staggered pattern so as to alternately contact the side walls on both sides, so that the ball pressure can be dispersed to the side walls, and the ball pressure due to the game balls B on the downstream side can be reduced. Therefore, the parts (e.g., the lifting spiral shaft 661, the ball sending movable member 705 of the ball sending unit 700, etc.) provided on the downstream side of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 (ball lifting outlet passage 652) will not be damaged by the ball pressure of the game balls B that are stopped (stored), and there is no need to excessively reinforce the parts against the ball pressure, which reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Incidentally, detection of game ball B at a winning port or the like is performed by checking the output from the ball sensor at a predetermined interrupt period (e.g., 4 ms), and when the output becomes not detected, detected, detected (in other words, "011"), it is determined that game ball B has been detected (ON). In other words, when the output from the ball sensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, in a ball sensor (here, lifting inlet sensor 653 and lifting outlet sensor 654) installed in a ball passage where multiple game balls B are parked, such as ball lifting inlet passage 651 and ball lifting outlet passage 652, if the presence or absence of game ball B is determined using the above-mentioned determination method, the ball sensor will only generate OFF when there are no game balls B in the ball passage, will generate many short-interval ONs when game balls B are being supplied to the ball passage, and will generate many short-interval OFFs when the game balls B stored in the ball passage are moving one by one (game balls B are moving at the launch interval). Therefore, the above-mentioned determination method could not accurately determine that there are no game balls B in the ball passage.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a threshold value (for example, an ON threshold of 200 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms) is set for each ON and OFF judgment, and an ON or OFF judgment is made only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. In other words, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is judged as ON, and when it is "10000...", it is judged as OFF. This makes it possible to reliably detect (judge) the presence or absence of a game ball B in a ball passage where multiple game balls B are stationary.

The threshold for determining ON or OFF may be different depending on the type of ball passage, the number of game balls B parked, etc., or the ON threshold and the OFF threshold may be different. In this embodiment, the lifting inlet sensor 653 of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 has, for example, an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms. Also, the lifting outlet sensor 654 of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 has, for example, an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms. Also, the launching sensor 704 of the ball sending unit 700 described later has, for example, an ON threshold of 12 ms and an OFF threshold of 12 ms. Also, as described above, the launching subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launching unit 550 has, for example, an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms.

If these thresholds are too small, even a slight vibration will cause a false detection, resulting in noise in the control. Also, if the threshold is larger than necessary, the state of the game ball B will not be captured. Therefore, the appropriate threshold value varies depending on the location of the ball sensor, but it is desirable to set it to a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 300 ms. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple (e.g., 3 to 60 times) of the interruption period (e.g., 4 ms), the software control only counts the number of interrupts, so the burden on the software can be reduced. Basically, the threshold value is short for the launch front sensor 704, where the game ball B is reliably retained in a fixed position, but for those where the game ball B is retained in an almost fixed position but there is a certain degree of variation in the retention position (e.g., the lift outlet sensor 654), the threshold value is made longer to provide some leeway. At the launch subtraction sensor 554, the game ball B is retained (stopped) in a fixed position, but the threshold value is made longer to prevent false detection due to artificial vibration.

The ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 removes static electricity from the game ball B supplied to the ball lifting inlet passage 651 from the circulating ball path unit 600. The ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 is provided upstream of the lifting inlet sensor 653. This allows the static electricity of the game ball B passing through the lifting inlet sensor 653 to be removed in advance, preventing false detection by the lifting inlet sensor 653 or failure of the frame control board 740 due to static electricity from the game ball B.

The ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 removes static electricity from the game ball B that has been lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 and polished by the ball polishing mechanism 680. The ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 is located upstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654. This allows the static electricity from the game ball B that passes through the lifting outlet sensor 654 to be removed in advance, preventing false detection by the lifting outlet sensor 654 and failure of the frame control board 740 due to static electricity from the game ball B.

The ball lift relay board 657 is used to relay the connections between the lift inlet sensor 653, the lift outlet sensor 654, the lift motor 664, the lift motor index sensor 666, the ball motor 688, etc. and the frame control board 740. The ball lift relay board 657 is attached to the rear side of the lift mechanism cover 669.

The ball polishing mechanism 680 is attached to the front side of the ball lifting mechanism 660. The ball polishing mechanism 680 includes a ball polishing cassette 681 in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular box, an endless belt-like polishing cloth 682 partially exposed to the outside at the rear of the ball polishing cassette 681, a sheet-like ball polishing sponge 683 provided between the exposed part of the polishing cloth 682 and the rear of the ball polishing cassette 681, a ball polishing feed gear 684 supported rotatably around a left-right axis at the bottom of the ball polishing cassette 681, and a ball polishing driven gear 685 that meshes with the ball polishing feed gear 684 across the polishing cloth 682 and is supported rotatably around a left-right axis.

The ball grinding mechanism 680 is made up of a flat ball grinding motor base 686 that extends vertically to the left of the ball grinding cassette 681 with a constant depth from front to back and its rear end edge rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668, a gear cover 687 attached to the left side of the ball grinding motor base 686, a ball grinding motor 688 that is attached to the left side of the gear cover 687 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the gear cover 687 and the ball grinding motor base 686, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 689 attached to the rotating shaft of the ball grinding motor 688, and a gear meshing with the motor gear 689. The transmission gear 690 has a large diameter spur gear-shaped gear portion 690a that is engaged with the large diameter gear portion 690a, and a small diameter spur gear-shaped gear portion 690b that is small diameter and rotates integrally with the large diameter gear portion 690a, and is rotatably supported between the motor base 686 and the gear cover 687; a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 691 that is engaged with the small diameter gear portion 690b of the transmission gear 690 and is rotatably supported between the motor base 686 and the gear cover 687; and a rotary connecting portion 692 that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 691, penetrates the motor base 686, and protrudes to the right.

The grinding mechanism 680 further includes a flat cassette pressing piece 693 that abuts against the front surface of the grinding cassette 681, has its left end engaged with the front end of the grinding motor base 686, and its right end attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main frame base 501, a nylac 694 that detachably attaches the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 to the front surface (locking hole 669b) of the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669, and a spring 695 that biases the cassette pressing piece 693 backward (towards the grinding cassette 681) relative to the grinding motor base 686.

As shown in FIG. 54, the ball polishing cassette 681 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 is formed in a hollow box shape, and has slits 681a at both the upper and lower edges of the rear surface through which the polishing cloth 682 can pass. The ball polishing cassette 681 is detachably attached from the front to the lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 so as to close the ball polishing opening 668a.

The ball grinding cassette 681 also has a connection hole 681b provided at the bottom of the left side surface, and a positioning hole 681c provided in front of the connection hole. The rotary connection part 692 protruding to the right from the ball grinding motor base 686 is inserted into the connection hole 681b, and the tip of the rotary connection part 692 inserted into the connection hole 681b is connected to the ball grinding feed gear 684. The positioning hole 681c is for inserting a positioning pin 686b (described later) of the ball grinding motor base 686. By inserting the positioning pin 686b, the ball grinding cassette 681 is positioned relative to the ball lifting mechanism 660, and the ball grinding cassette 681 is restricted (locked) from moving forward relative to the ball lifting mechanism 660.

The ball polishing cassette 681 further includes a number of rollers 681d around which the polishing cloth 682 is wound, and a flat tension spring 681e that presses the polishing cloth 682 against the rollers 681d that are provided adjacent to the upper slit 681a. The tension spring 681e presses the polishing cloth 682 against the rollers 681d, thereby applying tension to the portion of the polishing cloth 682 that is exposed to the outside from the ball polishing cassette 681, and prevents the polishing cloth 682 from bending on the outside of the rear surface.

The polishing cloth 682 is formed in the shape of an endless loop belt with a constant width on both sides. As shown in Figures 50(a) and 54(c), the polishing cloth 682 is stored in the ball polishing cassette 681 in a state where it snakes back and forth, and a portion of it is exposed behind the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681 through the upper and lower slits of the ball polishing cassette 681.

The ball polishing sponge 683 is provided between the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681 and the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the rear, and is attached to the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681. The inner surface of the polishing cloth 682 is in contact with the rear surface of the ball polishing sponge 683. When assembled to the ball lifting unit 650, the ball polishing sponge 683 elastically presses the polishing cloth 682 against the game ball B exposed forward from the ball polishing port 668a of the ball lifting mechanism 660, so that the polishing cloth 682 comes into contact with a wider area of the spherical surface of the game ball B. The ball polishing sponge 683 is attached to the ball polishing cassette 681 so that it can be replaced.

When the ball grinding cassette 681 is attached, the ball grinding feed gear 684 is arranged so that its axis coincides with the axis of the transmission gear 691 (rotational coupling part 692), and the left end of the rotating shaft is coupled to the rotational coupling part 692 and rotates integrally with the transmission gear 691.

The ball-polished driven gear 685 is engaged with the ball-polished feed gear 684 so that there is a gap between them that allows the polishing cloth 682 to fit in. When the ball-polished feed gear 684 rotates, it rotates in the opposite direction and can feed the polishing cloth 682 that is sandwiched between the ball-polished feed gear 684 and the ball-polished driven gear 685.

The ball grinding motor base 686 extends vertically along the left side surface of the ball grinding cassette 681, and its rear end edge is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. This allows the ball grinding motor base 686 to be rotated between a locked position parallel to the left side surface of the ball grinding cassette 681 and a released position in which the front end side is moved away from the ball grinding cassette 681 to the left. The ball grinding motor base 686 has a locking hole 686a that penetrates from left to right at a position above the vertical center on the front end edge. A locking hook portion 693a provided at the left end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is inserted and locked into this locking hole 686a.

As shown in FIG. 46, the rotary connector 692 of the ball milling motor base 686 protrudes to the right from a rearward position near the lower end of the right side surface. The ball milling motor base 686 also has a positioning pin 686b that protrudes to the right in a cylindrical shape from a central position in the front-to-rear direction near the lower end of the right side surface. The tip (right end) of the positioning pin 686b is formed in a cone shape. The positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball milling cassette 681 to position the ball milling cassette 681 and restrict forward movement.

In more detail, when the ball polishing motor base 686 is rotated to the release position with its front end moved leftward in the front-to-rear direction and the ball polishing cassette 681 is attached to the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668, if the ball polishing motor base 686 is rotated so that its tip moves rightward to the locked position, the positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball polishing cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-to-rear direction, positioning the ball polishing cassette 681 and preventing the ball polishing cassette 681 from moving forward from the cassette mounting recess 668b.

This ball-shaped motor base 686 is arranged so that its tip abuts against the protrusion 102 (guide surface 102a) of the door frame 3. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the door frame 3 is attempted to be closed against the main frame 4 with the ball-shaped motor base 686 in a position other than the locked position, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 comes into contact with the front end of the ball-shaped motor base 686, causing the ball-shaped motor base 686 to rotate to the locked position, preventing forgetting to lock and preventing the cassette pressing piece 693 and the like from being pinched between the door frame 3 and being damaged.

The ball polishing motor 688 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, and is controlled so that the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1,000 game balls B are shot.

The cassette pressing piece 693 extends to the left and right, and has a hook-shaped locking hook portion 693a at its left end that is inserted into and locked in the locking hole 686a of the ball grinding motor base 686. The cassette pressing piece 693 is biased by a spring 695 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a plan view. In other words, it is biased so as to press the ball grinding cassette 681 attached to the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668 backward. The right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 extends to the right of the ball grinding cassette 681, and its rear surface is configured to be able to abut against the front surface of the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669. A Nylatch 694 is provided near the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693.

When the operating part 694a of the Nylatch 694 is pressed with the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 in contact with the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669, the tip expands in diameter and is locked in the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, locking the cassette pressing piece 693 so that it cannot move, and when the operating part 694a is pulled toward the user, the lock can be released. In more detail, the Nylatch 694 is equipped with an operating part 694a consisting of a disk-shaped disk part and a rod-shaped part protruding from the center of the disk part, a cylindrical part into which the rod-shaped part of the operating part 694a is slidably inserted, a flange part extending outward from the base end of the cylindrical part close to the disk part, and a cylindrical member (grommet) having a notch from the tip part of the cylindrical part opposite the flange part toward the flange part and multiple slits provided in the circumferential direction. When the operating part 694a of this Nylatch 694 is pressed toward the support protrusion 669a with the tubular member inserted into the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, the rod-shaped part slides toward the tip inside the tubular part, expanding the diameter so that the tip of the tubular part, which is divided by multiple slits, opens. This prevents the tubular member from slipping out of the locking hole 669b, and allows it to be locked.

The ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment is attached to the rear side of the base wall 501b of the main body frame base 501 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. When this ball lifting unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, it is attached to the ball lifting unit mounting part 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall 501b in a state where the ball grinding cassette 681 of the ball grinding mechanism 680 is removed from the ball lifting mechanism 660 (see FIG. 47(a)). At this time, the ball grinding motor base 686 and the support protrusion 669a protruding forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 are caused to protrude forward at their front ends to the front of the base wall 501b through the opening 501o that penetrates the ball lifting unit mounting part 501j from front to rear.

In this state, the ball polishing port 668a of the lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 is located in the opening 501o that penetrates the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the game ball B being lifted up to the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be seen from the front of the base wall portion 501b (main body frame 4) through the opening 501o and the ball polishing port 668a (see FIG. 49). Since the width of the ball polishing port 668a is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B will not spill out even if the ball polishing cassette 681 is removed. This allows the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the game ball B being lifted up to the lifting spiral shaft 661 to be checked from the front by opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 and removing the ball polishing cassette 681.

Once the ball lifting mechanism 660 side of the ball lifting unit 650 has been attached to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b, the operating portion 694a of the Nylatch 694 protruding forward from the base wall portion 501b is pulled to release the lock, and the cassette pressing piece 693 is rotated so as to open forward and to the left against the biasing force of the spring 695, while the ball grinding motor base 686 is rotated to the release position so that its tip side moves away from the ball grinding cassette 681, so that the cassette pressing piece 693 and ball grinding motor base 686 do not overlap the front of the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668. Then, from the front of the base wall portion 501b, with the surface on which the polishing cloth 682 is exposed facing rearward, the ball polishing cassette 681 is placed in front of the cassette mounting recess 668b in the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to close the ball polishing opening 668a from the front (see Figures 46 and 47 (b)).

In this state, the polishing cassette 681 is moved rearward and its rear end is inserted into the cassette mounting recess 668b. After that, the polishing motor base 686 is rotated to the lock position so that it is parallel to the left side of the polishing cassette 681, and the rotary coupling part 692 and positioning pin 686b protruding from the right side of the polishing motor base 686 are inserted into the coupling hole 681b and positioning hole 681c of the polishing cassette 681, respectively. As a result, the rotary coupling part 692 and positioning pin 686b are inserted into the polishing cassette 681 from a direction that intersects with the front-to-rear direction, so that the forward movement of the polishing cassette 681 can be restricted.

When the ball-forming motor base 686 is moved to the locked position, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the ball-forming motor base 686 presses the ball-forming cassette 681 backwards due to the biasing force of the spring 695, and the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 comes into contact with the support protrusion 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669. In this state, when the operating part 694a of the Nylatch 694 is pressed to engage with the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, the cassette pressing piece 693 is locked so that it cannot rotate, and the installation of the ball-forming cassette 681 is completed.

To remove the ball grinding cassette 681, the operating portion 694a of the Nylatch 694 is pulled toward you to release the lock, and then the above steps are reversed to remove the ball grinding cassette 681.

However, if the ball grinding cassette 681 is installed in an incomplete state, for example by forgetting to lock it using the ball grinding motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the ball grinding cassette 681 may come off during play, causing the game to be interrupted and reducing the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball-cutting cassette 681 is configured not to come off even if the ball-cutting motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693 is forgotten to be locked. In more detail, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), when the ball-cutting motor base 686 is not in the locked position and the cassette pressing piece 693 is not pressing the ball-cutting cassette 681 backward, when an attempt is made to close the door frame 3 against the main frame 4, the inclined guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 on the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 abuts against the front end of the ball-cutting motor base 686 (see FIG. 48(b)).

At this time, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the ball grinding motor base 686 does not remain protruding forward as shown in FIG. 46, but is moved by the force of the spring 695 to approach the rear ball grinding cassette 681 as shown in FIG. 48(a). Therefore, the cassette pressing piece 693 does not come into contact with the door frame 3 and rotate in the opposite direction to the ball grinding cassette 681, and the cassette pressing piece 693 or the door frame 3 are not damaged.

When the door frame 3 moves further in the closing direction, the tip of the ball grinding motor base 686 is pushed by the guide surface 102a and rotates to the right toward the locked position. As a result, the rotary connection part 692 protruding from the right side of the ball grinding motor base 686 is inserted into the connection hole 681b of the ball grinding cassette 681, and the positioning pin 686b of the ball grinding motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball grinding cassette 681, restricting (locking) the forward movement of the ball grinding cassette 681. In addition, the cassette pressing piece 693 is pressing the ball grinding cassette 681 backward by the biasing force of the spring 695 (see FIG. 48(c)). As a result, the ball grinding cassette 681 is locked and will not come off forward.

Although not shown in the figure, a protrusion that can push the operating portion 694a of the Nylatch 694 backward may be provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3. This makes it possible to lock the cassette pressing piece 693 even if the Nylatch 694 is forgotten to be locked, and reliably prevents the ball cassette 681 from falling off.

In the above embodiment, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 is used to move the ball motor base 686 to the lock position to lock the ball cassette 681 so that it cannot be removed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the ball launching unit 550 and the foul unit 570 may be provided as detachable units, and a locking means may be provided to lock the ball launching unit 550, etc. so that it cannot be removed. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4 with the locking means incomplete, the protrusion 102 may come into contact with the locking means to lock the ball launching unit 550, etc. so that it cannot be removed.

In this embodiment, when the ball lifting unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the opening at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 faces the ball discharge port 600d of the circulating ball path unit 600, and the game ball B that has flowed through the serpentine ball storage passage 604 is supplied. The game ball B supplied to the ball lifting inlet passage 651 comes into contact with the ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 to remove static electricity, and is then detected by the lifting inlet sensor 653 and supplied to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. At this time, the game ball B is inserted into the ball polishing port 668a, the front end of which penetrates forward, and the front end of the game ball B comes into contact with the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680, and the vertically long ball polishing port 668a restricts movement in the left and right directions.

In this state, when the lifting motor 664 rotates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in a direction to lift the game ball B, the game ball B is pushed from below by the lifting groove 661a and moves upward along the ball polishing mouth 668a. At this time, the game ball B moves upward while rotating while contacting the part that extends up and down on the inner periphery of the ball polishing mouth 668a and the lifting groove 661a. As a result, the part of the game ball B that contacts the polishing cloth 682 on the front end side changes as the game ball B rises (rotates), making it possible to polish the entire surface of the game ball B evenly.

When the game ball B reaches the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it enters the ball lifting exit passage 652, comes into contact with the ball lifting exit earth metal plate 656, is detected by the lifting exit sensor 654, and is sent to the ball sending unit from the downstream end of the ball lifting exit passage 652. At this time, even if the game ball B is lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 and polished by the polishing cloth 682, causing it to become statically charged, the static electricity is removed by contact with the ball lifting exit earth metal plate 656 located upstream of the lifting exit sensor 654, and no malfunctions due to static electricity from the ball polishing will occur in the lifting exit sensor 654, the frame control board 740, etc.

On the other hand, in the polishing mechanism 680, when the polishing motor 688 rotates the polishing feed gear 684 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the right side with the polishing cassette 681 attached, the part of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside from the rear surface of the polishing cassette 681 passes through the slit on the bottom of the polishing cassette 681 and is accommodated in the polishing cassette 681. At this time, the part of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside is pulled downward, so that the part of the polishing cloth 682 accommodated in the polishing cassette 681 is pulled out from the outside through the slit on the top of the polishing cassette 681.

The polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 moves intermittently at a slow speed. In this embodiment, the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1,000 game balls B are shot.

In this way, the ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment can polish the game ball B while supplying the game ball B discharged from the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball sending unit 700.

[4-6. Ball throwing unit]
The ball throwing unit 700 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 55 to 57. Figure 55(a) is a perspective view of the ball throwing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball throwing unit in the main body frame as seen from the back. Figure 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball throwing unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball throwing unit as seen from the back. Figure 57 is a front cross-sectional view of the ball throwing unit cut at the location of the pre-launch sensor.

The ball sending unit 700 is for supplying the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 one by one to the ball launching unit 550. The ball sending unit 700 is attached to the ball sending unit mounting portion 501k provided on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b in the main body frame base 501. The ball sending unit 700 faces upward from the upper surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to be sandwiched between the base wall portion 501b and the circulating ball path unit 600, and is attached removably upward.

The ball sending unit 700 is provided with a ball supply port 701 that opens at the rear and through which the game ball B supplied from the ball lifting unit 650 can enter, a ball sending port 702 that opens at the front and sends the game ball B to the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550, a ball sending passage 703 that connects the ball supply port 701 and the ball sending port 702 and through which the game ball B can flow, a launching sensor 704 that can detect the game ball B flowing through the ball sending passage 703, a ball sending movable member 705 that releases the game balls B detected by the launching sensor 704 one by one from the ball sending port 702, a ball sending solenoid 706 that moves the ball sending movable member 705 to send the game ball B to the ball launching unit 550, and a ball sending relay board 707 that relays the connection between the ball sending solenoid 706, the launching sensor 704, and the frame control board 740.

The ball-sending unit 700 also includes a transmission member 708 that transmits the movement of the plunger in the ball-sending solenoid 706 to move the ball-sending movable member 705, a box-shaped unit base 709 that is open to the rear and has a launch sensor 704 and a ball-sending solenoid 706 inside, and a flat unit cover 710 that is attached to close the opening at the rear end of the unit base 709.

The ball supply port 701 of the ball sending unit 700 is provided by penetrating the unit cover 710 that constitutes the rear of the ball sending unit 700, and is provided in the area from the center to the upper right when viewed from the front. The ball supply port 701 is formed in a size that allows game balls B to pass through one at a time.

The ball sending outlet 702 penetrates the unit base 709, which constitutes the front side of the ball sending unit 700, from front to back, and is located in a position lower than the center when viewed from the front. The ball sending outlet 702 is formed to a size that allows game balls B to pass through one at a time.

The ball sending passage 703 connects the ball supply port 701 and the ball sending outlet 702, and extends lower to the left from the ball supply port 701 to the upper part of the ball sending outlet 702, and then extends downward to the ball sending outlet 702. A pre-launch sensor 704 is provided near the left end of the part of the ball sending passage 703 that extends to the left. In addition, the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball sending movable member 705 is located in the part of the ball sending passage 703 that extends up and down behind the ball sending outlet 702.

The pre-launch sensor 704 is located near the left end of the ball-transporting passage 703, where it extends lower to the left. In other words, the pre-launch sensor 704 is located immediately upstream of the ball-receiving portion 705a of the ball-transporting movable member 705. This pre-launch sensor 704 detects the game ball B in a non-contact manner, for example, by detecting a change in induced current.

The ball sending passage 703 in which the pre-launch sensor 704 is installed, like the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652, is where the flow of the game ball B stops. For this reason, like the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654, the pre-launch sensor 704 is provided with a threshold value for ON and OFF judgments, and is only judged as ON or OFF when non-detection or detection continues beyond that threshold, so that the presence or absence of the game ball B can be reliably judged (detected). In the pre-launch sensor 704 of this embodiment, for example, the ON threshold is set to 12 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 12 ms.

The ball-transporting movable member 705 is movable by the drive of the ball-transporting solenoid 706, and is used to release the game balls B in the ball-transporting passage 703 one by one from the ball-transporting opening 702 and supply them to the ball launching unit 550. The ball-transporting movable member 705 has a ball receiving portion 705a that is U-shaped and open to the right and front and rear, with the bottom wall inclined toward the front and capable of accommodating only one game ball B, a shaft portion 705b that extends leftward from the left end of the ball receiving portion 705a, a bearing portion 705c that penetrates front and rear at the left end of the shaft portion 705b and into which the first shaft pin 710a of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft portion 705b, a movable gear portion 705d that is fan-shaped to the right on the same axis as the bearing portion 705c, and a ball stop portion 705e that forms the upper portion of the U-shaped ball receiving portion 705a.

The ball sending solenoid 706 is for moving the ball sending movable member 705 to supply the game balls B in the ball sending passage 703 one by one from the ball sending outlet 702 to the ball launching unit 550. The ball sending solenoid 706 is located in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710, with the magnetic pole part that generates magnetic force when current is applied facing downward. Details will be described later, but the ball sending solenoid 706, in association with the launching solenoid 553, performs a series of hardware operations based on a predetermined launch sequence.

The ball sending relay board 707 is used to relay the connection between the launch front sensor 704 and the ball sending solenoid 706 and the frame control board 740. The ball sending relay board 707 is located to the right of the launch front sensor 704, between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710.

The transmission member 708 transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the ball-transporting solenoid 706 so that the ball-transporting movable member 705 can move. The transmission member 708 has a sheet metal holding portion 708b to which a magnetically attachable sheet metal 708a is attached to the magnetic pole portion of the ball-transporting solenoid 706, a rod portion 708c extending to the right from the sheet metal holding portion 708b, a bearing portion 708d that penetrates the right end of the rod portion 708c from front to back and into which the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be capable of relative rotation, and a drive gear portion 708e that is fan-shaped to the left on the same axis as the bearing portion 708d and engages with the movable gear portion 705d of the ball-transporting movable member 705.

The unit base 709 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a ball delivery port 702 that penetrates from front to back at a central lower part of the front side. The unit base 709 cooperates with the unit cover 710 to form the ball delivery passage 703, and also holds the launch front sensor 704, the ball delivery movable member 705, the ball delivery solenoid 706, the ball delivery relay board 707, and the transmission member 708.

The unit base 709 has knobs 709a on the top surface that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and recessed downward, and an elastic claw 709b on the lower right corner of the front surface. The knobs 709a are formed so that an operator can grasp them from above, and are used when removing the ball-sending unit 700 upward from the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. The knobs 709a have dovetail grooves on their adjacent sides that are inclined to get closer as they go downward. The side of the knobs 709a has multiple protrusions that extend forward and backward, lined up vertically. The elastic claws 709b are designed to engage with the locking holes of the ball-sending unit mounting part 501k when the ball-sending unit 700 is attached to the ball-sending unit mounting part 501k of the main body frame base 501, so that it cannot be removed upward.

When removing the ball-sending unit 700 from the main frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b, which passes through the locking hole in the base wall portion 501b and faces forward, is pressed backward to cause elastic deformation, and the knob portion 709a on the top surface is grasped and pulled up, allowing the ball-sending unit to be removed upward from the ball-sending unit mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501.

The unit cover 710 has a ball supply port 701 penetrating from the center to the upper right when viewed from the front. The unit cover 710 cooperates with the unit base 709 to form a ball sending passage 703, and holds the launch front sensor 704, the ball sending movable member 705, the ball sending solenoid 706, the ball sending relay board 707, and the transmission member 708. The unit cover 710 has a first shaft pin 710a and a second shaft pin 710b that protrude forward in a cylindrical shape near the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The first shaft pin 710a can support the ball sending movable member 705 rotatably (pivotally) by inserting it into the bearing portion 705c of the ball sending movable member 705. The second shaft pin 710b can support the transmission member 708 rotatably (pivotally) by inserting it into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708.

In the assembled state of the ball-sending unit 700 of this embodiment, the first shaft pin 710a is inserted into the bearing portion 705c of the ball-sending movable member 705, and the second shaft pin 710b is inserted into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708, and the movable gear portion 705d of the ball-sending movable member 705 and the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 are meshed with each other. In this state, the ball receiving portion 705a at the right end of the ball-sending movable member 705 is located in a portion extending vertically behind the ball-sending opening 702 in the ball-sending passage 703, and when the ball-sending movable member 705 rotates around the bearing portion 705c, the ball receiving portion 705a moves vertically in the portion extending vertically in the ball-sending passage 703.

In the normal state of the ball sending unit 700, the ball sending solenoid 706 is not energized (OFF). Therefore, the metal plate 708a of the transmission member 708 is in a state where it is separated downward from the magnetic pole part of the ball sending solenoid 706 by gravity. In this state, the lower surface of the ball receiving part 705a of the ball sending movable member 705 abuts against the bottom wall of the downstream end of the ball sending passage 703, the front end opening of the ball receiving part 705a coincides with the ball sending outlet 702, and the right end opening of the ball receiving part 705a does not coincide with the ball sending passage 703. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed from upstream toward the ball receiving part 705a abuts against the ball stop part 705e at the upper part of the U-shaped ball receiving part 705a and is not received by the ball receiving part 705a. Meanwhile, the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall of the ball receiving portion 705a and is released forward from the ball discharge port 702.

When the ball stopping portion 705e of the ball-transporting movable member 705 is in a state where a game ball B has come into contact with it to stop the ball transport, as shown in FIG. 57, it is located on the axis connecting the center of rotation of the ball-transporting movable member 705 and the center of the game ball B that it is in contact with. This allows the ball pressure from the game ball B acting on the ball stopping portion 705e to be received by the first shaft pin 710a, preventing the ball-transporting movable member 705 from rotating and falling toward the ball launching unit 550 due to the ball pressure of multiple game balls B stored up to the ball-transporting unit 700.

In addition, since the ball stopping portion 705e is positioned on the axis connecting the center of the first shaft pin 710a and the center of the stopped game ball B under normal conditions, even if the game ball B abutting against the ball stopping portion 705e vibrates up and down due to thuds or vibrations from the surroundings, the ball sending movable member 705 can be rotated around the first shaft pin 710a so that the ball stopping portion 705e follows the vibration of the game ball B, preventing the ball stopping by the ball stopping portion 705e from being released. This prevents the game ball B that has been released from the ball stopping portion 705e due to thuds or the like from being discharged to the foul unit 570 via the ball launching unit 550 and being added to the number of balls held as a foul ball.

In this normal state, when the ball-transmitting solenoid 706 is energized (ON), the magnetic force generated in the magnetic pole of the ball-transmitting solenoid 706 attracts the metal plate 708a of the transmission member 708 to the upper magnetic pole, causing the transmission member 708 to rotate in a clockwise direction around its bearing portion 708d. When the transmission member 708 rotates in a clockwise direction, the ball-transmitting movable member 705 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around its bearing portion 705c due to the movable gear portion 705d of the ball-transmitting movable member 705, which is engaged with the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708, causing the ball-transmitting movable member 705 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction around its bearing portion 705c, causing the ball receiving portion 705a to move upward.

When the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball-transporting movable member 705 moves upward, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not coincide with the ball-transporting port 702, and the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a coincides with the ball-transporting passage 703, and the game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a from the ball-transporting passage 703. In this state, since the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not coincide with the ball-transporting port 702, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a does not roll forward and is not released from the ball-transporting port 702. In addition, since the ball receiving portion 705a is sized to accommodate only one game ball B, when one game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a, the game ball B upstream of it is not received by the ball receiving portion 705a.

After that, when the power supply to the ball-transporting solenoid 706 is stopped (OFF), the attraction of the magnetic pole of the ball-transporting solenoid 706 to the metal plate 708a of the transmission member 708 is released. At this time, since the game ball B is received in the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball-transporting movable member 705, the ball-transporting movable member 705 rotates in a clockwise direction around its bearing portion 705c so that the ball receiving portion 705a moves downward due to the weight of the game ball B, and the transmission member 708 rotates in a counterclockwise direction around its bearing portion 708d via the drive gear portion 708e that is engaged with the movable gear portion 705d of the ball-transporting movable member 705, returning to the normal state.

When the ball sending unit 700 returns to its normal state, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball sending movable member 705 coincides with the ball sending outlet 702, so that the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward and is released from the ball sending outlet 702 to the ball launching unit 550.

In this way, according to the ball sending unit 700 of this embodiment, the game balls B can be sent one by one to the ball launching unit 550 by turning the ball sending solenoid 706 ON and OFF.

[4-7. Ball receiving tray]
The ball receiving tray 720 in the main body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 6, 7, 20, etc. The ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the circulating ball path unit 600, and is for receiving the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600. The ball receiving tray 720 is formed in a container shape that is open upward, and the bottom wall is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the front.

The ball receiving tray 720 is attached by being inserted from the front into the tray insertion recess 501f in the main frame base 501. The ball receiving tray 720 has elastic claws 721 on both the left and right side walls, and when attached to the main frame base 501, the elastic claws 721 are engaged with the engagement claws 501n of the main frame base 501 and will not slip out forward. When removing the ball receiving tray 720, the elastic claws 721 are elastically deformed inward of the ball receiving tray 720, releasing the engagement and allowing it to be pulled out forward.

When the ball receiving tray 720 is attached to the tray insertion recess 501f of the main frame base 501, the ball receiving tray 720 is moved backward from the front of the tray insertion recess 501f and inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. At this time, since the front end of the locking claw 501n is inclined like an arrowhead, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 abuts against the locking claw 501n from the front, the elastic claw 721 is elastically deformed inward due to the inclination of the arrowhead shape, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. Then, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 passes the part of the locking claw 501n and is no longer abutting against the locking claw 501n, the elastically deformed elastic claw 721 returns to its original state and is locked by the locking claw 501n, preventing the ball receiving tray 720 from sliding forward.

This ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f, which is inclined so that the front end is lower. Therefore, when game balls B discharged from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 accumulate and become heavy, the ball receiving tray 720 attempts to slide forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall, but the sliding is prevented by the engagement between the elastic claw 721 and the locking claw 501n. Then, when the engagement of the elastic claw 721 with the locking claw 501n is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be easily removed from the tray insertion recess 501f.

Although not shown in the figures, in this embodiment, when the ball sending unit 700 is attached to the main body frame 4, the wiring connector is connected to the ball sending relay board 707 so as to penetrate the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 from the front, so that even if you try to remove the ball sending unit upward from the ball sending unit mounting portion 501k with the wiring connector connected, the wiring connector will interfere and prevent removal.

In addition, when the ball sending unit 700 is attached to the main frame 4 and assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is located above the ball sending unit 700, so the ball sending unit 700 will not slip out upwards. Also, if the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the game board insertion section 502 while the ball sending unit 700 is not completely inserted from above into the ball sending unit mounting section 501k of the main frame 4, the upper part of the ball sending unit 700 is pressed downward by the game board 5 (game panel 1100), allowing it to be completely inserted.

[4-8. Frame board unit]
The frame board unit 730 in the main body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 17, 18, 58 to 60, etc. Figure 58 is a perspective view showing the main body frame opened relative to the outer frame and the back cover and the frame board unit opened. Figure 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the frame board unit in the outer frame and the main body frame. Figure 60 is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the main body frame with the frame board unit opened. The frame control board 740, which will be described in detail later, is used to display the number of balls held on the ball number display unit 140, perform settlement processing by operating the counting button switch 180, control the ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball sending unit 700, etc., and manage (monitor) the game balls B in the circulating ball path unit 600, etc.

The frame board unit 730 is openably attached to the rear portion of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The frame board unit 730 includes a frame control board 740, a power supply board 750, an interface board 760, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765.

The frame board unit 730 also includes a unit base 770 that is attached to the rear of the main frame base unit 500 in an openable and closable manner, a frame control board box 771 that is attached to the rear of the unit base 770 and houses the frame control board 740, a power board box 772 that is attached between the frame control board box 771 and the unit base 770 and houses the power board 750, an interface board box 773 that is attached to the unit base 770 on the left side of the frame control board box 771 when viewed from the front and houses the interface board 760 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, and a Nylatch 774 for fixing the unit base 770 to the main frame base unit 500 so that it cannot be opened or closed. The Nylatch 774 has the same configuration as the Nylatch 694 described above, and a detailed description of its configuration will be omitted.

Although not shown in the figure, the frame control board 740 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, a CPU that executes the processing programs and commands, etc.

The frame control board 740 has a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, a ball removal switch 742 used to remove the enclosed game ball B from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and a ball number memory/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM etc. and clearing the display on the ball number display section 140 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 63).

The frame control board 740 is connected via two-way communication to the main control board 1310 (described later) provided on the game board 5, and is also connected via two-way communication to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765. The frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765.

The frame control board 740 is connected to the door frame 3 ball count display unit 140, the firing stop switch 161, the handle touch sensor 162, the handle rotation sensor 163, and the count button switch 180.

The frame control board 740 is also connected to the door opening switch 507 of the main frame 4, the frame opening switch 508, the launch solenoid 553, the launch subtraction sensor 554, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the lifting inlet sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, the lifting motor 664, the lifting motor index sensor 666, the ball motor 688, the launch front sensor 704, and the ball delivery solenoid 706.

The power supply board 750 is for supplying power of a predetermined voltage to the frame control board 740, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc. A power switch 751 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the power supply board 750. This power switch 751 is exposed to the rear from the power supply board box 772 so that it can be operated.

The interface board 760 is used to relay connections between the frame control board 740 and various relay boards provided on the door frame 3 side and the game board 5 side.

The game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 is used to relay the connection between the frame control board 740 and the game ball lending device 8.

The unit base 770 is elongated from side to side, with a hinge shaft 770a at its left end that is supported by the frame board unit shaft support 504d provided on the rear surface of the main body frame speaker box 504 of the main body frame base unit 500, and two Nylatches 774 attached to its right end with their operating parts 774a facing backward.

The unit base 770 has a rear portion 770b that extends rightward from the left end by a length that is 1/4 of the overall length in the left-right direction in a plan view, a connecting portion 770c that extends forward a short distance from the right end of the rear portion 770b, and a front portion 770d that extends from the front end of the connecting portion 770c to the right end. As a result, the unit base 770 has a step in the front-to-rear direction between the rear portion 770b and the front portion 770d.

An interface board box 773 is removably attached to the rear side of the rear surface 770b of the unit base 770. Meanwhile, a power supply board box 772 is removably attached to the rear side of the front surface 770d of the unit base 770, and a frame control board box 771 is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board box 772.

The unit base 770 is also provided with a power harness housing 770e that extends left and right and is recessed from rear to front above the area where the frame control board box 771 and power board box 772 are attached. This power harness housing 770e is wide near the left end close to the hinge shaft 770a. The power harness housing 770e is provided with a guide rib, and can house the bundled power harness PH (see FIG. 60). This prevents the power harness PH (power cord) from getting in the way during assembly until the frame board unit 730 is attached to the main frame base unit 500, improving the efficiency of the assembly work.

Also, as shown in FIG. 59, a portion of the rear of the power harness storage section 770e overlaps with a portion of the lower end of the rear cover 505. Even if the power harness PH becomes free while transporting the main body frame 4, etc., the power harness PH can be prevented from popping out by abutting against the rear cover 505, and damage to the power harness PH due to accidental snagging can be prevented.

In the normal state (usage state) of the frame base unit 730 of this embodiment, the hinge shaft 770a provided at the left end of the unit base 770 is supported by the frame base unit support portion 504d of the main body frame base unit 500, and the Nylatch 774 attached to the right end of the unit base 770 is attached to the support protrusion 501r provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. In this state, the frame base unit 730 covers the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600 and ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b, making them inaccessible.

In addition, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 20, the front portion 770d of the unit base 770 in the frame board unit 730, the power board box 772, and the frame control board box 771 are located above the box extension portion 504c in the main frame speaker box 504. At this time, since the front portion 770d and the power board box 772 are formed shorter vertically than the frame control board box 771, a space capable of accommodating wiring, etc. is formed between the power board box 772 and the box extension portion 504c.

Furthermore, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 59, the front end of the rear cover 505 is located behind the upper Nylatch 774, so that the operating portion 774a of the Nylatch 774 cannot be pulled. Also, in the normal state, the lower portion of the rear cover 505 overlaps with the rear of the frame substrate unit 730. As a result, unless the rear cover 505 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the rear cover 505 interferes (abuts) and the frame substrate unit 730 cannot be opened backwards (is prevented from opening).

Therefore, in the normal state, even if the Nylatch 774 is unlocked for some reason and the frame substrate unit 730 tries to hinge backwards, the lower part of the rear cover 505 is positioned behind it, preventing the frame substrate unit 730 from hingedly rotating and opening from the main frame base 501. This prevents the frame substrate unit 730 from coming into contact with the outer frame 2 and being damaged when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is open from the main frame base 501.

When checking the circulating ball path unit 600 and ball lifting unit 650 on the rear side of the main body frame 4 from this normal state, first open the main body frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2. Then, open the rear cover 505 rearward from the main body frame base 501, and pull the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774 rearward to release the lock, which will release the attachment to the support protrusion 501r on the right end of the unit base 770, and the frame base unit 730 can be opened rearward by hinge rotating around the hinge shaft 770a on the left end. By opening this frame base unit 730 rearward, the circulating ball path unit 600 and ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall part 501b will appear, making it possible to approach them (see Figures 58 and 60).

When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened backwards, as shown in Figure 60, the main frame base 501 is black and opaque, while the main frame speaker box 504, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, etc. are made of transparent materials, and their interiors can be seen (checked) from the outside.

To return the frame substrate unit 730 from its rearward open position to its normal position, follow the steps above in reverse to return it to its normal position.

However, if the rear cover 505 is closed against the main frame base 501 first when returning the frame substrate unit 730 to the normal state after opening it from the main frame base 501, the frame substrate unit 730 will interfere with (abut against) the rear cover 505 and will not be able to close even if you try to close it. Also, if you try to close the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is open (the rear cover 505 is open), the frame substrate unit 730 and the rear cover 505 will interfere with (abut against) the outer frame 2 and will be prevented from closing. This makes it possible to notify you that you have forgotten to close the frame substrate unit 730.

In addition, even if you forget to press (lock) the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774 after closing the frame substrate unit 730 against the main frame base 501, when you close the rear cover 505 against the main frame base 501, the front end of the lower right of the rear cover 505 will abut against the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774 from behind, and the operating part 774a can be pressed and locked.

[4-9. Lock unit]
The lock unit 780 in the main body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 6 and 7. The lock unit 780 is attached from the rear along the right edge of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The lock unit 780 is for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The lock unit 780 has a cylindrical lock cylinder 781 that passes through the cylinder insertion port 501m of the main frame base 501 from the rear and has its front end protruding forward, a keyhole 782 provided on the front end surface of the lock cylinder 781, a door frame lock claw 783 that unlocks the door frame 3 and main frame 4 when a key corresponding to the keyhole 782 is inserted and rotated in a specified direction, and an outer frame lock claw 784 that unlocks the main frame 4 and outer frame 2 when a key corresponding to the keyhole 782 is inserted and rotated in a direction determined from the above.

[5. Brief explanation of the game board]
The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has the same board surface configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. 103 and the like, which will be described later, and will be briefly described here with reference to FIG. 8. The game board 5 has prize winning openings such as a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large prize winning opening 2005, which are provided with a special prize by receiving the game ball B, in a game area 5a into which the game ball B is shot, and the player operates a handle 160 so that the game ball B is received in the prize winning opening, thereby enjoying shooting the game ball B. The game board 5 is detachably attached from the front side to the game board insertion part 502 of the main body frame 4. The game board 5, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, is visible from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is shot by the player operating the handle 160.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) that are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball B.

The front component 1000 of the game board 5 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of an approximately square in front view, an inner shape of an approximately circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B received in the outlet 1008 is discharged downward from the game board 5 (to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600) behind the game panel 1100 without being returned to the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is provided with a main control board 1310 that is located behind the game panel 1100 and controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the component 1000 so that it can be seen by the player.

The game board 5 also includes a peripheral control board 1510 provided behind the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located behind the game panel 1100 in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 (front unit 2000) is equipped with a number of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a gate 2010 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and through which game balls B can pass, a first starting opening 2003 and a second starting opening 2004 that are provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and through which a first special pattern and a second special pattern are drawn by receiving game balls B, and a large winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls B depending on the results of the drawing of special patterns drawn by receiving game balls B into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004.

The first starting opening 2003 is located directly above the outlet 1008, below the frame-shaped center device 2500 located in the center of the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is located in the attacca unit 2400, and opens and closes to allow the game ball B to enter depending on the result of the lottery for the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2010.

The big prize slot 2005 is located in the attacca unit 2400, which is attached to the bottom right corner of the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2011 that detects a game ball B passing through the gate 2010, a first starting opening sensor 2101 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 63).

A game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001 behind the game panel 1100, and is then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. A game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 behind the game panel 1100, and is then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. A game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 behind the game panel 1100, and is then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2402 at the rear of the game panel 1100, and is then discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving opening 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

The main control board 1310 controls the game using the game ball B within the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. The main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 via two-way communication, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via one-way output signal only.

The main control board 1310 receives detection signals of game ball B from the general winning hole sensor 3001, gate sensor 2011, first start hole sensor 2101, second start hole sensor 2401, large winning hole sensor 2402, etc. The main control board 1310 also outputs drive signals to the start hole solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second start hole 2004, the attacca solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the large winning hole 2005, etc.

When the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001, the main control board 1310 outputs a predetermined number of prize ball commands (for example, 10). This is no different from conventional pachinko machines, so there is no need to change the software of the main control board 1310. When this prize ball command is received, the frame control board 740 interprets it as a ball count addition signal. Also, when the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, a predetermined number of prize ball commands (for example, 1) are output. Also, when the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a predetermined number of prize ball commands (for example, 1) are output. Furthermore, when the game ball B received in the large winning port 2005 is detected by the large winning port sensor 2402, a predetermined number of prize ball commands (for example, 10 or 13) are output.

In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs signals such as the results of the lottery for normal patterns and the lottery results for special patterns to the peripheral control board 1510.

The function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the results of the regular pattern lottery, the results of the special pattern lottery, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that display the lottery results of the normal pattern drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2010, and a normal reserve display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved normal patterns drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2010.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the lottery result for the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 causes the performance display device 1600 to display performance images and execute light-emitting performances, moving performances, etc. based on signals sent from the main control board 1310.

[6. Flow of the Game Ball]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61 and 62. Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram showing various paths of the game ball on the rear side of the main body frame from the rear. Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the main body frame.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the player is not operating the handle 160, as shown in FIG. 62, a large number (for example, 40 to 60 balls) of circulating game balls B are stored in a portion of the main body frame 4 below the game board 5. The circulation path R of the game balls B in the main body frame 4 is provided with, in order from the upstream side, a foul unit 570, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball sending unit 700, and a ball launching unit 550. The circulation path R is composed of an out ball passage 601, a safe ball passage 602, a foul ball passage 603, a ball storage passage 604, a ball lifting inlet passage 651, a ball lifting outlet passage 652, etc.

The multiple sensors for detecting the game ball B circulating on the circulation path R are arranged in the following order from the upstream side: safe ball sensor 606, out ball sensor 605, foul ball sensor 607, excess circulating ball sensor 622, insufficient circulating ball sensor 621, lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, pre-launch sensor 704, and launch subtraction sensor 554. Based on the signals from these various sensors, various control processes described below are executed in the frame control board 740.

When the player is not operating the handle 160, the safe ball sensor 606, out ball sensor 605, foul ball sensor 607, and excess circulating ball sensor 622 are in an OFF (non-detecting) state, and the insufficient circulating ball sensor 621, lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, pre-launch sensor 704, and launch subtraction sensor 554 are in an ON (detecting) state.

A large number of game balls B are stored in a line within the circulation path R in the main body frame 4. The leading ends of the numerous game balls B lined up in a line are located on the ball launch pad 552b of the launch unit cover 552 in the ball launch unit 550, and the trailing ends are located upstream of the ball removal shutter 615 within the range of the gauge section 620 in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600.

In the circulation path R, in the section between the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting unit 650 and the lifting outlet sensor 654, a specific number (e.g., 4 balls) of game balls B is lined up, which is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 5 balls) of game balls B lined up along the length of the line. This is to ensure that even if one game ball B is lifted when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is returned to its origin, there is enough space to receive the lifted game ball B.

In addition, in the circulation path R, a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of sensors are lined up between the pre-launch sensor 704 and the lifting outlet sensor 654. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls B from running out of balls to be launched before they are lifted up and replenished by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661, even if the game balls B continue to be launched in the ball launching unit 550 after the detection of the game balls B in the lifting outlet sensor 654 has turned OFF (non-detection).

When the player operates the handle 160 to activate the launch solenoid 553 of the ball launch unit 550, the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b in the launch unit cover 552 is launched, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects the game ball B as not detected (OFF). This causes the number of balls held by the player to be subtracted by one (held ball subtraction process described below). After that, the ball sending solenoid 706 of the ball sending unit 700 is energized for a predetermined time, the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball sending movable member 705 moves up and down, one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 goes into a detection (ON) state.

When the player operates the handle 160 to launch game balls B one by one, the number of game balls B stored between the pre-launch sensor 704 and the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 (ball lifting exit passage 652) decreases by one, and the lifting exit sensor 654 eventually detects no game balls B (OFF). Then, when a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., three) are launched after the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detecting, the lifting motor 664 of the ball lifting unit 650 starts rotating the lifting spiral shaft 661, which rotates three times to supply three game balls B to the ball lifting exit passage 652, and then stops (lifting motor operation process described below).

When the lifting motor 664 rotates the lifting spiral shaft 661, the game ball B located at the downstream end of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 moves upward toward the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. This causes the numerous game balls B lined up in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball storage passage 604 to flow downstream, and the number of game balls B stored in the ball storage passage 604 decreases.

The game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550 and shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is received by either the out port 1008 or the winning port (general winning port 2001, first starting port 2003, second starting port 2004, large winning port 2005). The game ball B received by the out port 1008 of the game board 5 is discharged downward from the game board 5 and handed over to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600. The game ball B handed over to the out ball receiving port 600a passes through the out ball passage 601, is detected by the out ball sensor 605, and is sent to the ball storage passage 604.

On the other hand, the game ball B received in the winning port of the game board 5 is discharged downward from the game board 5 and handed over to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. The game ball B handed over to the safe ball receiving port 600b passes through the safe ball passage 602 and is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and is sent to the ball storage passage 604.

When game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605, the number of out balls is counted, and when game ball B is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, the number of safe balls is counted. This makes it possible to calculate an accurate ball payout rate for game ball B. The calculated ball payout rate is displayed on a display unit (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310. This ball payout rate changes depending on the game status, so it is calculated as the ball payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) as "(number of balls added due to winning within a specified period - number of safe balls within a specified period) ÷ number of out balls within a specified period = ball payout rate within a specified period".

Meanwhile, game ball B that was launched from the ball launching unit 550 (ball launching pad 552b) but did not land in the game area 5a of the game board 5 is collected by the foul unit 570 as a foul ball and then handed over to the foul ball receiving port 600c of the circulating ball path unit 600. Then, game ball B handed over to the foul ball receiving port 600c flows through the foul ball path 603 and is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, and sent to the ball storage path 604. When game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls held by the player is increased by one (ball addition process described below).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B is sealed inside without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside, and as it circulates inside, the player does not come into contact with the game ball B.

[7. Various control processes]
Next, various control processes in the frame control board 740 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 63 to 76. Fig. 63 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the launch permission process. Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the ball subtraction process, and Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the ball addition process by foul balls. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the launch control process. Fig. 68 is a time chart showing the operation of the launch solenoid and the ball sending solenoid in the launch sequence. Fig. 69(a) is a flowchart showing a launch control process different from that in Fig. 67, and Fig. 69(b) is a flowchart showing the ball subtraction process in the case of the launch control process in (a).

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the prize ball processing. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the lifting motor operation processing, Figure 72 is a table showing the relationship between the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor and the operation of the lifting motor, and Figure 73 is a graph showing the relationship between the launching operation of the game ball and the operation of the ball lifting unit. Figure 74 is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. Figure 75 (a) is a flowchart showing the security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the security processing of an embodiment different from (a). Figure 76 is a table showing the relationship between the circulating ball shortage sensor and the circulating ball excess sensor and the error notification. Note that in Figure 63, some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, LEDs, etc. connected to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 63, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is made up of a frame control board 740 attached to the main frame 4, and a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. The frame control board 740 mainly performs control processing for the launch and circulation of game balls B, the number of balls held, etc. The main control board 1310 mainly performs control processing for the game. The peripheral control board 1510 mainly performs control processing for the presentation.

Signals are input to the frame control board 740 from the launch stop switch 161, handle touch sensor 162, handle rotation sensor 163, counting button switch 180, door open switch 507, frame open switch 508, launch subtraction sensor 554, out ball sensor 605, safe ball sensor 606, foul ball sensor 607, too few circulating balls sensor 621, too many circulating balls sensor 622, lifting inlet sensor 653, lifting outlet sensor 654, lifting motor index sensor 666, launch front sensor 704, RAM clear switch 741, ball removal switch 742, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, etc.

The frame control board 740 also outputs signals to the ball count display unit 140, the launch solenoid 553, the lifting motor 664, the ball motor 688, the ball delivery solenoid 706, etc.

Furthermore, the frame control board 740 receives signals from the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, and outputs signals. The frame control board 740 also receives signals from the main control board 1310, and outputs signals.

Signals are input to the main control board 1310 from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first start opening sensor 2101, the second start opening sensor 2401, the large prize opening sensor 2402, etc. The main control board 1310 also outputs signals to the start opening solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the peripheral control board 1510, etc.

The game ball lending device 8 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs signals to the management server 9 via the communication network. Signals are input to the game ball lending device 8 from the ball lending button switch 8a, the return button switch, the frame control board 740, etc. The game ball lending device 8 also outputs signals to the display unit, the frame control board 740, etc.

[7-1. Launch permission processing]
The launch permission process will be described with reference to Fig. 64. The launch permission process is a process for determining whether or not the game ball B should be launched. When the launch permission process is started, first in step S101, it is confirmed whether or not the player is touching the handle 160, and if the player touches the handle 160 and the handle touch sensor 162 is ON (YES), the process proceeds to the next step S102. If the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF in step S101 (NO), the process proceeds to step S107, where the frame control launch permission signal is turned OFF and the process ends.

In step S102, it is confirmed whether the firing stop switch 161 is OFF or not, and if the firing stop switch 161 is ON, the process proceeds to the next step S103 as YES. On the other hand, if the firing stop switch 161 is OFF in step S102, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, and the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF to end the process.

In step S103, it is confirmed whether the frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, and if it is connected to the game ball lending device 8, the process proceeds to the next step S104 as YES. On the other hand, if the connection to the game ball lending device 8 is not confirmed in step S103, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control launch permission signal is turned OFF, and the process ends.

In step S104, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of main control launch permission from the main control board 1310 is confirmed, and if main control launch permission is present, the process proceeds to the next step S105 as YES. On the other hand, if main control launch permission is not present in step S104, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control launch permission signal is turned OFF, and the process ends.

The conditions for the main control launch permission to be turned ON include "the absence of any fatal errors, such as a RAM error, in the main control board 1310."

In addition, the conditions for the frame control launch permission (frame control launch permission signal) to be ON may include other conditions as necessary, such as "there is no fatal error, such as a RAM error, in the frame control board 740," in addition to the conditions in steps S101 to S105 described above.

In step S105, it is confirmed whether the number of balls held by the player is greater than 0, and if the number of balls held is greater than 0, the process proceeds to the next step S106 as YES, the frame control firing permission signal is turned ON, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the number of balls held is less than 0 in step S105 (the number of balls held is 0), the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF, and the process ends.

In this way, the launch permission process allows the launch of game ball B, and when the player rotates handle 160 in this state, the launch solenoid 553 is driven with a strength according to the angle of rotation, and game ball B is launched from ball launch unit 550. When the launch solenoid 553 is driven, the launch control process described below is executed.

[7-2. Ball subtraction processing]
The ball subtraction process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. The ball subtraction process is a process for subtracting the number of balls held by a player by launching a game ball B. In the ball subtraction process, first, in step S111, it is determined whether the launch subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launching unit 550 has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. When the game ball B is placed on the ball launching stand 552b of the ball launching unit 550, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects the game ball B and is in an ON state. From this state, when the launching solenoid 553 is driven to cause the launching hammer 555 to strike the game ball B on the ball launching stand 552b and launch the game ball B, the launch subtraction sensor 554 becomes non-detecting and is in an OFF state.

Then, in step S111, when game ball B is launched and launch subtraction sensor 554 changes from ON to OFF, the process proceeds to the next step S112 as YES, the number of balls held is subtracted by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in step S111, if the shot subtraction sensor 554 does not change from ON to OFF and remains ON, the result is NO and the process ends without subtracting the number of balls held.

In this way, when game ball B is launched from ball launching unit 550 through the ball subtraction process, the number of balls the player has is reduced by one.

[7-3. Ball addition process]
The ball count addition process due to fouls will be described with reference to Fig. 66. When a game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the number of balls the player has is subtracted by the ball count subtraction process. However, if the launched game ball B is not shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, the game is not played with that game ball B, and the player's interest is reduced if the number of balls remains subtracted. Therefore, in the ball count addition process, the game ball B (foul ball) that was not shot into the game area 5a is added to the number of balls the player has.

In step S121, the ball count addition process determines whether the foul ball sensor 607 of the circulating ball path unit 600 has turned from OFF to ON by detecting game ball B (foul ball). If the foul ball sensor 607 has turned ON, the process proceeds to the next step S122 as YES, and the number of balls held is added by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if in step S121 the foul ball sensor 607 does not turn ON and remains OFF, the result is NO and the process ends without incrementing the number of balls held.

In this way, the ball count addition process makes it possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage by adding foul balls to the number of balls in hand when game ball B is not shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 despite being launched from the ball launching unit 550.

[7-4. Launch control processing]
The launch control process will be described with reference to Figures 67 and 68. The launch control process is a process for determining whether or not to actually launch the game ball B by driving the launch solenoid 553 after the frame control launch permission signal is turned ON in the launch permission process and the player rotates the handle 160. The launch control process first determines whether or not frame control launch permission is present (ON/OFF) in step S131, and if frame control launch permission is present (ON), the process proceeds to the next step S132 as YES, and the launch permission signal is turned ON to end the process. On the other hand, if frame control launch permission is not present (OFF) in step S131, the process proceeds to step S133, and the launch permission signal is turned OFF to end the process.

When the launch permission signal is turned ON, when launching the game ball B by the launch solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. 68, first, the ball-transporting solenoid 706 is turned ON for a first time t1 (e.g., 150 ms), and the ball-receiving portion 705a of the ball-transporting movable member 705 is moved upward to receive the game ball B detected by the pre-launch sensor 704. This first time t1 is set to a time sufficient for the ball-receiving portion 705a of the ball-transporting movable member 705 to receive the game ball B.

When a second time t2 (e.g., 90 ms) that is shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the ball delivery solenoid 706 was turned ON, the launch solenoid 553 is turned ON for a third time t3 (e.g., 23 ms) to launch the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. Then, when the third time t3 has elapsed, the launch solenoid 553 is turned OFF. Note that the first time t1 is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, when the first time t1 has elapsed, the ball sending solenoid 706 is turned OFF, and the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. This completes the series of operations of the launch sequence.

When game balls B are continuously launched, after the first time t1 has elapsed, and then after a fourth time t4 (e.g., 450.5 ms) has elapsed, the ball delivery solenoid 706 turns ON again for the first time t1, and the same operation as above is repeated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first time the pachinko machine 1 is installed, there is no game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b, so in step S132 of the launch control process, "Launch subtraction sensor ON?" becomes NO, and in the subsequent step S136, the ball sending solenoid 706 turns ON and game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. After that, since game ball B is always placed on the ball launch pad 552b, game ball B can be launched at any time.

On the other hand, if game ball B falls from ball launch pad 552b due to thuds, vibrations, etc., launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, so it is considered to have been launched and the number of balls held is subtracted by one through ball subtraction processing. However, since the dropped game ball B is collected by foul unit 570 and detected by foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls held is added by one through ball addition processing, restoring the number of balls held before the ball was dropped, so the player is not at a disadvantage.

In addition, when the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b returns to the ball launch pad 552b, as described above, the next game ball B is supplied by the ball sending solenoid 706 of the ball sending unit 700 after launch, and since only one game ball B can be placed on the ball launch pad 552b, either the game ball B that returned or the next game ball B supplied from the ball sending unit 700 falls and is collected by the foul unit 570. Therefore, as described above, even if the number of balls held is subtracted by the launch, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and is added to the number of balls held, so the number of balls held before the launch can be restored, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

If the number of balls held is "0" and game ball B falls from ball launcher 552b, the number of balls held cannot be subtracted in the ball subtraction process, so the dropped game ball B is treated as a foul ball and the number of balls held becomes "1" through the ball addition process. In such a case, an alarm may be sounded and the game hall attendant may resolve the discrepancy in the number of balls held.

In this embodiment, if there is a jolt that causes the launch subtraction sensor 554 to turn OFF due to a thud or the like, the game ball B will always fall because the ball launch pad 552b is short. Therefore, there is no false detection in which the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF and it is assumed that the game ball B has been launched, even though the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b.

However, it is possible that a power outage will occur (the frame control board 740 or main control board 1310 will receive a power outage signal) during the above-mentioned launch sequence. For example, if a power outage occurs before the launch solenoid 553 is turned on (before it is excited), the launch hammer 555 will not move, but depending on the operation timing of the ball sending solenoid 706, if the next game ball B is received in the ball receiving section 705a, that game ball B will be supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, where it will be bounced off the game ball B placed previously and collected by the foul unit 570. However, when a power outage signal is received, the frame control board 740 etc. will not look at the sensors, and will ignore the signal from the foul ball sensor 607. As a result, the foul ball will not be added to the number of balls held, so the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power outage is maintained.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the launch solenoid 553 is energized or has already been energized, the launch hammer 555 moves and the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched, but since the frame control board 740 does not look at the launch subtraction sensor 554 before the launch subtraction sensor 554 is judged to be OFF (before the OFF threshold of 80 ms has elapsed), it is not considered to have been launched. At the time the launch solenoid 553 is energized, the game ball B is received by the ball receiving section 705a by the ball sending solenoid 706, so after the game ball B is launched, the game ball B received by the ball receiving section 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the state before launch is restored. On the other hand, even if the launched game ball B enters the winning hole of the game board 5, the main control board 1310 does not look at the winning sensor, so the winning is invalid and the number of balls held is not added. Therefore, even in this case, the number of balls held before the power outage is still accurate.

[7-4a. Launch control process and ball subtraction process of the second embodiment]
In the above embodiment, the consistency of the number of balls held when the game ball B falls from the ball launcher 552b is maintained by a hardware launch sequence, but as shown in Fig. 69, the consistency may be maintained by software. In this launch control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether or not frame control launch is permitted (ON/OFF), and if frame control launch is permitted (ON), the process proceeds to the next step S134 as YES. On the other hand, if frame control launch is not permitted (OFF) in step S131, the process ends as NO without driving the launch solenoid 553.

In step S134, it is determined whether the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON or not, and if the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON (there is a game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b), the process proceeds to the next step S135 as YES and it is determined whether the subtraction completion flag is ON or not. As shown in FIG. 69(b), if the number of held balls has been subtracted by the held ball subtraction process of the second embodiment, the subtraction completion flag is set ON in step S113, and if the number of held balls has not been subtracted, the subtraction completion flag is set OFF in step S114.

Therefore, in the normal pre-launch state, game ball B is placed on ball launch pad 552b and the subtraction completion flag is OFF, so a NO judgment is made in step S135, and the process proceeds to the next step S136, where the launch solenoid 553 is turned ON to strike game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of handle 160, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if game ball B falls from ball launch pad 552b due to a thud or the like, the number of balls held is subtracted by the ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 69(b), and the subtraction completion flag is set to ON. Therefore, step S135 of the launch control process is judged as YES, and the process proceeds to step S137.

In step S137, it is determined whether the pre-launch sensor 704 is ON or not. If the pre-launch sensor 704 is not ON (if game ball B is not detected), the process proceeds to the next step S138 as NO, an error display indicating "out of balls to be fired" is turned ON, and the process returns to step S137, and is repeated until the pre-launch sensor 704 is turned ON. The error display is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the performance display device.

The error may be indicated by lighting a warning lamp or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (Holcon) of the amusement hall via the game ball lending device 8, causing a warning lamp provided in the amusement hall to light up.

In this step S137, if the launch-preceding sensor 704 detects game ball B and is ON, the process proceeds to the next step S139 as YES, and the ball-transmitting solenoid 706 is turned ON (energized) to move the ball-transmitting movable member 705. As a result, the game ball B detected by the launch-preceding sensor 704 is handed over to the ball-receiving portion 705a of the ball-transmitting movable member 705, and when the ball-transmitting solenoid 706 turns OFF after a predetermined short time, the game ball B handed over to the ball-receiving portion 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. At this time, if there is a game ball B upstream (ball lifting exit passage 652) of the game ball B sent to the ball launch pad 552b by the ball-transmitting movable member 705, that game ball B moves downstream and the launch-preceding sensor 704 turns ON.

In step S139, when the ball delivery solenoid 706 is turned ON, the process proceeds to the next step S140, where it is again determined whether the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON. If the launch subtraction sensor 554 is not ON, the process returns to step S137 as NO, and the above flow is repeated until the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON.

If the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON in step S140, the process proceeds to the next step S141 as YES, the "out of firing balls" error display is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S136, where the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON, and the game ball B is struck with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the process ends.

In this way, the launch control process can confirm that game ball B is placed on ball launch pad 552b in ball launch unit 550, and then launch game ball B.

When game ball B falls from ball launcher 552b, the number of balls held is subtracted by the ball subtraction process in FIG. 69(b), but the dropped game ball B is collected by foul unit 570 and detected by foul ball sensor 607, which executes ball addition process. As a result, the number of balls held is added back to the number of balls held before the ball fell, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

In this way, the launch control process and ball subtraction process of the second embodiment also make it possible to maintain the consistency of the number of balls held when game ball B falls from ball launch pad 552b.

[7-5. Handling of prize balls]
The prize ball process will be described with reference to Fig. 70. In the prize ball process, when a game ball B is received in a prize hole such as the general prize hole 2001, the first start hole 2003, the second start hole 2004, the big prize hole 2005, etc. provided on the game board 5, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole are awarded as a privilege, and the prize balls are added to the number of balls held by the player.

In the prize ball processing, when game ball B is received in a winning port on the game board 5 and a signal (prize ball signal) output from the main control board 1310 is input to the frame control board 740, the input prize ball signal is analyzed in step S141. The prize ball signal output from the main control board 1310 may be the number of prize balls or the type of winning port into which game ball B is received.

Then, when the prize ball signal is analyzed in step S141, the number of prize balls corresponding to the analyzed prize ball signal is added to the number of balls held by the player in the following step S142, and the process ends.

In this way, the prize ball processing can add the number of game balls B (number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning slot into which game ball B entered on game board 5 to the number of balls waiting for the player.

[7-6. Lifting motor operation processing]
The lifting motor operation process will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 74. In the lifting motor operation process, when the game balls B are launched by the ball launching unit 550 and the number of game balls B in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 decreases, the game balls B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 are lifted by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the ball lifting unit 650 and supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652.

The lifting motor operation process first clears retry counter 1 in step S201 and proceeds to the next step S202. In step S202, it is determined whether the lifting motor index sensor 666 for detecting the lifting motor index 665 attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 is ON.

The lifting motor index 665 has a detection section 665a that is provided by cutting out a portion of the circumference of a disk (flange-shaped), and when the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates and the detection section 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is located at the lifting motor index sensor 666, the lifting motor index sensor 666 turns ON, and the lifting motor index sensor 666 turns OFF in areas other than the detection section 665a.

If the lift motor index sensor 666 is ON in step S202, the process proceeds to the next step S203 as YES, where it is determined whether the lift exit sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more. If it is determined in step S203 that the lift exit sensor 654 has not been ON for 80 ms or more (the lift exit sensor 654 is OFF), the process proceeds to the next step S204 as NO.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S203 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more, the process returns to step S203 as a YES and is repeated until the lifting outlet sensor 654 is no longer ON for 80 ms or more (until the lifting outlet sensor 654 turns OFF). In other words, the process is repeated until the rear end of the row of multiple game balls B in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is reduced by the launch of the game balls B and becomes downstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654, and when the lifting outlet sensor 654 turns OFF, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether the lifting inlet sensor 653 has been ON for 80 ms or more. If it is determined that the lifting inlet sensor 653 has not been ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting inlet sensor 653 is OFF), the process proceeds to step S205 as NO, the error display indicating "Lifting inlet bulb out" is turned ON, and the process returns to step S204. This makes it possible to notify of bulb outage in the bulb lifting inlet passage 651 and prompt the user to resolve the bulb outage.

If it is determined in step S204 that the lifting inlet sensor 653 has been ON for 80 ms or more, the process proceeds to the next step S206 as YES, and the error display indicating "Lifting inlet ball out" is turned OFF. After that, in the following step S207, after 1800 ms has elapsed, the lifting motor 664 is started to operate and the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated. This starts the lifting of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651. The lifting spiral shaft 661 ejects one game ball B with each rotation.

Here, in other words, as shown in FIG. 73, the lifting motor 664 starts to operate when the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON (continuously ON) for 80 ms or more, the lifting motor 664 is stopped, the lifting outlet sensor 654 is ON (continuously ON) for 80 ms or more, and the launch front sensor 704 is ON (continuously ON) for 80 ms or more. In this state, the game ball B is continuously launched at a predetermined time interval (600 ms in this case) by operating the handle 160. Then, when the lifting outlet sensor 654 turns OFF, the lifting motor 664 starts to operate after the ts time (1800 ms in this case) has elapsed, and the game ball B starts to be discharged (lifting device ball discharge) from the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 side.

In this embodiment, when three game balls B have been launched after the lifting outlet sensor 654 turns OFF, the lifting motor 664 is activated and the lifting spiral shaft 661 starts to rotate. The time interval at which game balls B are ejected by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is set to be shorter than the time interval at which game balls B are continuously launched. This ensures that the supply of game balls B to the ball launching unit 550 will not be unable to keep up with the launch of game balls B.

The ball polishing motor 688 provided in the ball lifting unit 650 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, as shown in FIG. 73, and operates so that the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1,000 game balls B are shot.

As shown in FIG. 72, this lifting motor 664 will not operate and will be stopped unless the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON and the lifting outlet sensor 654 is OFF.

Returning to the explanation of the lift motor operation process, when the lift motor 664 starts to operate in step S207, the retry counter 2 is cleared in the following step S208, and it is determined in the following step S209 whether the lift motor index 665 (lift motor index sensor 666) has turned ON again within 600 ms after turning OFF.

If it is determined in step S209 that the lifting motor index 665 has turned ON again within 600 ms after it was turned OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotating), the process proceeds to the next step S210 as YES and determines whether the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more. If it has not been ON, the process returns to step S208 as NO and the operation of the lifting motor 664 continues.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or more, the process proceeds to the next step S211 as YES, the lifting motor 664 is stopped at the third detection position of the detection unit 665a of the lifting motor index 665, and the process returns to step S201 to repeat the lifting motor operation process.

That is, as shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the lift motor 664 stops when the lift motor index 665 rotates for the third time to be unshaded (the lift motor index sensor 666 is ON by the detection unit 665a) after the lift outlet sensor 654 is ON (continuous ON). At this time, the lift spiral shaft 661, which rotates together with the lift motor index 665, discharges one game ball B per rotation to the ball lift outlet passage 652 side (lift device ball discharge), so that three game balls B are discharged between the time the lift outlet sensor 654 turns ON and the time the lift motor 664 stops. In other words, when the lift outlet sensor 654 turns ON, three game balls B are discharged to the ball lift outlet passage 652 side and the lift motor 664 stops. As a result, a sufficient number of game balls B are stored in the ball lift outlet passage 652. In addition, to ensure that the lifting motor origin return process described below is carried out smoothly, the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is never filled with game balls B, but rather a certain number of balls are left empty.

In this lift motor operation process, if it is determined in step S202 that the lift motor index 665 is not ON (the lift motor index sensor 666 is OFF), the process proceeds to the next step S212 as NO, and it is determined whether the retry counter 1 is less than 3.

If retry counter 1 is less than 3 in step S212, the answer is YES and the lift motor origin return process is executed in the next step S213, and then retry counter 1 is incremented by "1" in step S214 and the process returns to step S202.

In the lift motor origin return process of step S213, when the lift motor index sensor 666 is OFF, the lift motor 664 is operated to rotate the lift motor index 665 together with the lift spiral shaft 661, and when the lift motor index sensor 666 is OFF and reaches the detection unit 665a, it turns ON. After that, the lift motor 664 rotates twice and stops, and the lift motor 664 (lift motor index 665) returns to the origin.

In more detail, the lifting motor index 665 (lifting spiral shaft 661) is configured to rotate once for every 32 rotations of the lifting motor 664 due to the gear ratio between the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. The circumferential length of the detection part 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is formed to be a length for four rotations of the lifting motor 664, so the position where the lifting motor 664 stops after two rotations after the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned ON is located at the center of the detection part 665a. In other words, the center of the detection part 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is set as the origin of the lifting motor 664 (lifting spiral shaft 661, lifting motor index 665) (see FIG. 74).

When the lifting motor origin return process is executed, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates approximately once, and one game ball B is ejected into the ball lifting outlet passage 652. However, since the ball lifting outlet passage 652 has a predetermined number of spaces available for accommodating game balls B, the ejection of game balls B from the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not impeded, and the lifting motor 664 can be returned to the origin.

If it is determined in step S212 above that retry counter 1 is not less than 3, the process proceeds to step S215 as NO, the error display indicating "lifting ball jamming error" is turned ON, and operation is stopped in the following step S216. The condition for canceling this operation stop can be released by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 above that the lifting motor index 665 has not been turned ON again within 600 ms after it was turned OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not rotating), it is set to ON and the process proceeds to step S217, where it is determined whether the retry counter 2 is less than 3. If it is determined that the retry counter 2 is not less than 3, it is set to NO and the process proceeds to step S215, where an error display indicating a "lifting ball jamming error" is turned ON, and operation is stopped in the following step S216.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S217 that retry counter 2 is less than 3, the result is YES and the ball jamming release process is executed in the next step S218, and in the following step S219, "1" is added to retry counter 2 and the process returns to step S209.

The ball jamming release process in step S218 stops the lift motor 664 without monitoring the ON/OFF state of the lift outlet sensor 654, then rotates the lift motor 664 in the reverse direction, stops the lift motor 664 after a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms), and operates the lift motor 664 again (forward rotation).

In this way, when the game ball B is launched by the lifting motor operation process, decreasing the number of game balls B in the ball lifting exit passage 652, the lifting motor 664 is operated to rotate the lifting spiral shaft 661, lifting the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 from the lower end and ejecting it from the upper end to supply it to the ball lifting exit passage 652.

Note that the operating time of the lifting motor 664 and the number of game balls B ejected described above are merely examples, and may be any appropriate time or number.

[7-7. Security Processing]
The security process will be described with reference to Figure 75 etc. The purpose of the security process is to monitor whether or not there is any fraudulent activity. As shown in Figure 75 (a), the security process clears the contradiction counter in step S301, and in the following step S302, calculates the number of recovered balls in a specified time in the circulating ball path unit 600. The number of recovered balls is calculated as the sum of the number of out balls, the number of safe balls and the number of foul balls.

After the number of recovered balls is calculated in step S302, the process proceeds to the next step S303, where it is determined whether the number of shot balls measured by the shot subtraction sensor 554 is the same as the number of recovered balls, and if it is determined that they are the same, the process returns to step S302 as a YES result. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of shot balls is not the same as the number of recovered balls, the process proceeds to the next step S304 as a NO result, where "1" is added to the discrepancy counter, and the process proceeds to the following step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether the contradiction counter is greater than n (e.g., 50), and if it is determined that the contradiction counter is less than n, the process returns to step S302 as NO. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contradiction counter is greater than n, the process proceeds to the next step S306 as YES, and an error display indicating that fraud is occurring is turned ON, and then in the following step S307, a game stop process is executed to end the process.

The error display in step S306 can be cleared by turning the power switch 751 on the power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4 on and off.

The game stop processing in step S307 includes stopping the launch of game ball B by the ball launching unit 550, stopping the lifting of game ball B by the ball lifting unit 650 (stopping circulation), stopping the game on the main control board 1310 side, etc.

The security process may be as shown in FIG. 75(b). In this security process, first, in step S311, the discrepancy counter is cleared, and in the following step S312, it is determined whether the number of shot balls detected by the shot subtraction sensor 554 is equal to or greater than the number of foul balls detected by the foul ball sensor 607.

If it is determined in step S312 that the number of balls shot is equal to or greater than the number of foul balls, the process returns to step S312 as YES. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls shot is not equal to or greater than the number of foul balls, the process proceeds to the next step S313 as NO, increments the contradiction counter by 1, and proceeds to the next step S314.

In step S314, it is determined whether the contradiction counter is greater than n (e.g., 50), and if it is determined that the contradiction counter is less than n, the process returns to step S312 as NO. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contradiction counter is greater than n, the process proceeds to the next step S315 as YES, and an error display indicating that fraud is occurring is turned ON, and then in the following step S316, a game stop process is executed to end the process.

The error display in step S315 can be cleared by turning the power switch 751 on the power supply board 750 in the main body frame 4 on and off.

The game stop processing in step S316 includes stopping the launch of game ball B by the ball launching unit 550, stopping the lifting of game ball B by the ball lifting unit 650 (stopping circulation), stopping the game on the main control board 1310 side, etc.

In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any cheating based on the number of balls fired, the number of game balls B discharged from the game board 5 (number of recovered balls), the number of foul balls, etc.

[7-8. Enclosed ball amount detection process]
The enclosed ball amount detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 76 etc. The enclosed ball amount detection process detects whether the amount (number) of enclosed game balls B is appropriate or not. The enclosed ball amount detection process determines whether the amount of game balls B is appropriate or not by combining the ON/OFF of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the ON/OFF of the circulating ball excess sensor 622. The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are ON when the detection of game balls B continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 80 ms) or more.

Specifically, in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, which is upstream of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 in the ball lifting unit 650, when the rearmost end of a line of game balls B is located between the under-circulating ball sensor 621 and the over-circulating ball sensor 622, the under-circulating ball sensor 621 turns ON and the over-circulating ball sensor 622 turns OFF. In such a combination, the amount of game balls B is determined to be appropriate, and no related error is reported.

On the other hand, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the low circulating balls sensor 621, the low circulating balls sensor 621 will be OFF and the excess circulating balls sensor 622 will be OFF. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is too few, and an error message is displayed informing the user that there are "too few game balls."

In addition, if the rearmost end of game balls B lined up in a row in ball storage passage 604 is located upstream of the too few circulating balls sensor 621 and the too many circulating balls sensor 622, the too few circulating balls sensor 621 will be ON and the too many circulating balls sensor 622 will be ON. In such a combination, it is determined that there is an excess of game balls B, and an error is issued to inform the user that there are "too many game balls."

Depending on the environment (game hall) in which the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is installed, it may be installed together with a pachinko machine that uses conventional iron balls SB as game balls, and there is a risk that iron balls SB may become mixed in when the game balls B are refilled or replaced during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment. If iron balls SB become mixed in with this pachinko machine 1, the strong magnet 616 is provided in the ball removal shutter 615 of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulation route R, and the mixed iron ball SB becomes magnetically attracted by the magnet 616 and stops on the ball removal shutter 615.

When the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball ejection shutter 615 and the ball launching unit 550 continues to launch game balls B, the game balls B downstream of the ball ejection shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604 are lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 and reduced, and eventually the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 turns OFF. Meanwhile, the game balls B launched from the ball launching unit 550 are collected by the out ball receiving port 600a, safe ball receiving port 600b, foul unit 570, etc. of the circulating ball path unit 600 and supplied to the upstream side of the ball storage passage 604, where they accumulate upstream of the ball ejection shutter 615 (iron ball SB), and eventually the circulating ball excess sensor 622 turns ON. In this way, when the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, it is determined that an iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter 615, and an error message is issued indicating that an "iron ball has been mixed in."

If ball jamming occurs between the low circulating ball sensor 621 and the high circulating ball sensor 622, an error message will be displayed indicating that "iron balls have been mixed in" since the combination will be the same as above.

Also, the error may be notified by lighting a notification lamp or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (Holcon) of the amusement hall via the game ball lending device 8, and a notification lamp provided on the amusement hall side may be lighted.

In this way, the enclosed ball amount detection process makes it possible to appropriately manage the amount of enclosed game balls B, and also to detect the inclusion of iron balls SB.

[7-9. Ball removal processing]
The ball removal process will be described. The ball removal process is executed in the circulating ball path unit 600 when the ball removal shutter 615 opens the ball removal port 613p to remove the game ball B to the ball receiving tray 720. The ball removal process is executed by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, turning off the door opening switch 507, pulling the ball removal shutter 615 forward to open the ball removal port 613p, and turning on the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740.

[7-9. Ball removal processing]
The ball removal process will be described. The ball removal process is executed in the circulating ball path unit 600 when the ball removal shutter 615 opens the ball removal port 613p to remove the game ball B to the ball receiving tray 720. The ball removal process is executed by opening the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4, turning off the door opening switch 507, pulling the ball removal shutter 615 forward to open the ball removal port 613p, and turning on the power with the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 turned on (by turning on the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on).

During the ball removal process, the lifting inlet sensor 653 is disabled on/off, the launch solenoid 553 in the ball launching unit 550 repeatedly turns on/off at a predetermined time interval, and the lifting motor 664 remains in an operating state.

At this time, even if the launch solenoid 553 is turned ON and the game ball B is launched, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position because the door frame 3 is open, and the foul ball is sent to the circulation ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being shot out from the foul unit 570. During the ball removal process, the launch of the game ball B is not stopped, but the game is stopped, and even if there is a start winning, for example, no game balls are paid out, and no lottery or variable display for special patterns is performed, making it impossible to play a normal game. During the ball removal process, a special notification is given using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc. In addition, if the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, RAM clearing, which initializes the RAM built into the main control board 1310, is not performed, and information related to the game, such as the game state at the time of power interruption, is maintained.

In this way, the enclosed game ball B can be removed by the ball removal process. When inserting a game ball B, it is possible to insert it through the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or to remove the game board 5 from the main frame 4 and insert (refill) it through the out ball receiving port 600a or safe ball receiving port 600b that open upward.

[7-10. Others]
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is described on the assumption that a stainless steel ball made of stainless steel is used as the game ball B, but this is not limited to this, and an iron ball SB may be used as the game ball B as in the past. When an iron ball is used as the game ball B, the magnet 616 in the circulating ball path unit 600 is eliminated to allow the game ball B (iron ball SB) to flow through the ball storage passage 604, and the passing sensor (ball sensor) for the game ball B dedicated to stainless steel balls provided on both the main frame 4 and the game board 5 is replaced with one capable of detecting the iron ball SB. With these changes, the pachinko machine 1 becomes operable. The optical ball sensor can be used as it is without replacement.

However, when using an iron ball SB as the game ball B, it becomes possible to commit fraud using a magnet M (so-called magnet cheating), so a conventional magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) is required on the game board 5 to detect fraud.

In the following, the arrangement of the magnetic sensor on a typical game board will be described with reference to FIG. 77 etc. FIG. 77(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range of the magnetic sensor on the game board, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the magnetic lines from the magnet are undetectable, (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the magnetic lines from the magnet are detectable, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holder separately. Note that the arrangement examples of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 77 etc. can be adopted in the game board of each embodiment in this specification.

Generally, multiple magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1 to detect unauthorized magnetism (magnetic lines of force). As shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 comprises a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1032 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, and a transparent sensor case 1033 that covers the sensor board 1032 and the sensor body 1031. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1031, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, etc. are mounted on the sensor board 1032. In this embodiment, a magnetic sensor using a GMR element is used for the sensor body 1031.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is rectangular in plan view and is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped with a height shorter than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one portion of the side in the height direction is chamfered. The magnetic sensor 1030 allows the internal sensor body 1031 and sensor board 1032 to be viewed from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1033.

The magnetic sensor 1030 can detect the passage of magnetic lines parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship with the magnet M are as shown in FIG. 77(a), the magnetic lines of magnet M pass in a direction parallel to the long side, so the magnetism (magnetic lines of force) of magnet M can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship with the magnet M are as shown in FIG. 77(b), the magnetic field lines of the magnet M pass perpendicular to the long side (perpendicular to the rectangular surface formed by the long and short sides), so the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet M cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1030 has a detection area DA of the magnet M on one side and the other side of the long side centered on the magnetic sensor 1030, as shown by the hatching in Figure 77 (c). In other words, the magnetic sensor 1030 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA made up of two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. Note that Figure 77 (c) is a diagram assuming that the magnetic sensor 1030 is placed near the first starting hole 2003 of the game board 5 as a countermeasure against fraud.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(d), if a magnetic body M1 is placed in parallel to a magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet M, the magnetic lines of force are attracted to the magnetic body M1, and the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 are reduced, which may result in the magnetic sensor 1030 being unable to detect the magnetic lines of force (magnetism) from the magnet M.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(e), when a magnetic body M2 is arranged in series with a magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet M, the magnetic body M2 attracts the magnetic lines of force, thereby increasing the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030. This makes it possible to detect the magnetism of a magnet M that is far away or a magnet M with weak magnetic force.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material. Depending on the relative positions of the magnetic sensor and the screw, the magnetic field lines from the magnet M used to commit fraud can be attracted to the screw, which has a high magnetic permeability, reducing the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor, making it impossible to detect the approach of the magnet M. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030 is attached without using a screw.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 is attached to the frame of the gaming machine (main frame 4 and game board 5) via a holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding portion 1035 is molded integrally with a member not shown. This holding portion 1035 has a storage portion 1036 capable of storing the magnetic sensor 1030 from one side, and an elastic claw 1037 that engages with the magnetic sensor 1030 stored in the storage portion 1036. The holding portion 1035 also has a protrusion 1038 that protrudes from the leg of the elastic claw 1037 into the storage portion. This holding portion 1035 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1030 is inserted from the outside into the storage section, the retaining section 1035 that retains the magnetic sensor 1030 elastically deforms the elastic claw 1037 in a direction away from the storage section 1036, and when the magnetic sensor 1030 is stored in the storage section 1036, the elastic claw 1037 returns to its original position and engages with the end of the magnetic sensor 1030. At this time, the protrusion 1038 provided on the leg of the elastic claw 1037 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1030, pressing the magnetic sensor 1030 against a portion of the inner surface of the storage section 1036 opposite the elastic claw 1037.

The elastic claw 1037 engages the magnetic sensor 1030, preventing it from moving out of the housing 1036 and preventing it from falling off. In addition, the protrusion 1038 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1030, pressing it into the housing 1036, preventing the magnetic sensor 1030 from rattling in the housing 10361.

In this way, because the holding portion 1035 is made of a non-magnetic material, when the magnet M is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding portion 1035 can be prevented from attracting the magnetic lines of force from the magnet M, and a decrease in the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented. This makes it easier to detect the magnetism acting on the play area 5a, making it possible to detect fraudulent behavior using the magnet M at an early stage, and by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1030, it is possible to dissuade fraudulent behavior, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent behavior.

In addition, the holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material prevents the magnetic lines from being attracted from the magnet M, and prevents a decrease in the magnetic lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1030. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1030 than in conventional pachinko machines, and therefore allows for fewer magnetic sensors 1030 than in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1037 of the holding portion 1035, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding portion 1035. This means that the magnetic sensor 1030 can be attached using the elastic claws 1037 without using metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the process of assembling the pachinko machine 1, and helps prevent an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is biased (pressed) toward the storage section 1036 by the protrusion 1038 of the holding section 1035, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented from vibrating finely due to the bias of the protrusion 1038, and therefore, the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented from coming loose or causing poor contact due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1030 can be reliably operated.

In the case of a pachinko machine 1 having a circulation path R in the main frame 4 (game machine frame), if an iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, it becomes possible to commit fraud (so-called magnet goto) in the circulation path R using a magnet M, so it is desirable to provide a magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) that can detect fraudulent magnetism in the circulation path R (especially around the launch subtraction sensor 554, the foul ball sensor 607, the launch front sensor 704, etc., which are involved in adding/subtracting the number of balls held by the player). In this embodiment, the area that is particularly likely to be the target of fraud is the vicinity of the launch subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launch unit 550, specifically the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b (launch rail) and the path from the foul unit 570 to the foul ball sensor 607. Details of the embodiment regarding the arrangement of the magnetic sensor that can detect fraudulent magnetism in the circulation path R will be described later.

[8. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall structure of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 78 to 84. Fig. 78 is a front view of the game board with the transparent center gadget and the like made opaque. Fig. 79 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 78 as seen from the right front, Fig. 80 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 78 as seen from the left front, and Fig. 81 is a perspective view of the game board in Fig. 78 as seen from the back. Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the front, and Fig. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components as seen from the back. Fig. 84 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate, with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by a player operating a handle 160. The game area 5a is provided with a general prize opening 2001, a normal prize opening 2002, a first start opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, a big prize opening 2005, a special prize opening 2006, and a second V prize opening 2008, which give a player a predetermined privilege (e.g., an addition of a predetermined number of balls to the player's possession) when a game ball B is accepted or passed through the game area 5a. This game board 5 is for playing an entertaining game in which the handle 160 is operated to strike the ball B and the ball B circulates within the game area 5a so that the ball B can be received by the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular external shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a, and a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 93, etc.) that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 93, etc.) that controls the game content that is played by shooting the game ball B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, a panel relay board (not shown) that is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear side of the performance display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a normal winning opening 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open and can receive the game ball B, a first starting opening 2003 that is provided in the center in the left-right direction below the center device 2500 and is always open and can receive the game ball B, and a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is received by the normal winning opening 2002. The game board 5 is provided with a second starting hole 2004 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the normal symbol that is drawn, a large prize hole 2005 or a special prize hole 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the result of the lottery for the first special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2003 or the second special symbol that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004, and a first V prize hole 2007 and a second V prize hole 2008 that can receive the game ball B received into the special prize hole 2006. The game board 5 is also provided with a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 is provided with an outlet 2020, which is provided at the most downstream position in the play area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B outside the play area 5a without returning it, and two sub-outlets 2021, which are provided upstream of the outlet 2020 in the play area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and discharge the received game ball B outside the play area 5a without returning it. Two outlets 2020 are provided on the left and right with the first starting port 2003 in between. The two sub-outlets 2021 are provided at a position to the left of the center of the play area 5a in the left-right direction and a position to the right of the center of the play area 5a in the left-right direction, respectively.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2003 and an outlet port 2020, a side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and an upper left side unit 2300 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an attacca unit 2400 that is provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100 and has a second starting port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and one sub-out port 2021, a frame-shaped center role 2500 that is provided slightly above the center in a front view of the game area 5a and has a role winning port 2006, a first V winning port 2007, and a second V winning port 2008, and a normal winning port unit 2600 that is provided at the upper right end of the attacca unit 2400 and has a normal winning port 2002.

The center device 2500 comprises a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a device winning port 2006 and a first V winning port 2007, and a lottery device 2550 located at the bottom within the frame of the main unit 2510 and having a second V winning port 2008.

The rear unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the play area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibrations acting on the play board 5 (pachinko machine 1), a rear box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the play panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a lock slider 3020 that detachably attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a rear board unit 3040 that is located behind the performance display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear ball guide unit 3100, which is provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear decoration unit 3200 provided behind the rear ball guide unit 3100 within the rear box 3010, a rear front performance unit 3300 provided to the left and above the rear ball guide unit 3100 near the front end within the rear box 3010, and a rear rear performance unit 3400 provided behind the rear front performance unit 3300 within the rear box 3010.

[8-1. Front components]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 82 and 83. The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has an outer shape of a substantially square in front view, an inner shape of a substantially circular shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side of the center in the front view to the upper right diagonal direction in the clockwise circumferential direction, passing the upper end of the center in the front left direction in the front view, an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front left direction to the upper left diagonal direction in the front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right side of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right side of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with the game ball B that rolls along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap with the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. This outlet 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100.

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas near the bottom ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main body frame 4, a rear protrusion (not shown) that protrudes rearward of the security cover (not shown) on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the area between the security cover and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear protrusion of the security cover and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100. When the component 1000 is attached to the main frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to players, the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 pass through the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage and the lower full payout passage of the lower full ball path unit to face forward, allowing game balls to be supplied to the upper and lower trays of the door frame.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower right corner.

Also, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 and rear unit 3000 located at the rear to be viewed from the front.

[8-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 is equipped with a flat panel board 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of a wooden game panel, which is about 20 mm, and the minimum thickness required to sufficiently support the installation of obstacle nails on the front and the attachment of the front unit 2000 is about 10 mm. In this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel plate 1110 is at its lowest position within the play area 5a, and the position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the previous component 1000 is recessed upward from the bottom end. In other words, in this embodiment, the outlet 1008 of the panel plate 1110 is not hole-shaped, but is formed as a notch that opens downward from the panel plate 1110. The outlet 1008 may also be formed as a hole. The panel plate 1110 is also formed with multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000. In this embodiment, the openings 1112 are formed as holes, but they may also be formed as notches that open outward from the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a number of positioning holes formed as round holes and short long holes penetrating from front to back, and a number of engagement steps formed with a thin plate thickness and spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are for removably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with the engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center device 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. This makes the panel plate 1110 frame-shaped, and the width perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B (circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to line up multiple game balls B on the left, right, and lower sides, excluding the area above the center, and narrow enough that multiple game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is sized to encompass the panel plate 1110, has a roughly rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (in this embodiment, about 38 mm, the same thickness as a wooden gaming panel). This is so that regardless of whether the gaming panel is a wooden gaming panel or a gaming panel 1100 made of transparent synthetic resin, it can be attached to the main frame 4 of the same pachinko machine 1 (gaming machine) and used for play.

The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (e.g., a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side to the rear side and has approximately the same size as the panel board 1110, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and has a size approximately equal to that of the play area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end at the bottom left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000. When this notch 1122 is attached to the main frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to players, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage and the lower full payout passage of the lower full ball path unit penetrate the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 to face forward and supply game balls to the upper and lower trays of the door frame.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion that communicates with the out port 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are disposed outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can detachably attach the panel plate 1110 in a state where it is housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement steps at the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from the front diagonally above, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engagement steps at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This game panel 1100, together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, is formed transparent, so when assembled to the game board 5, the boundaries of the game area 5a are less clearly visible, giving the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a appears larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is made transparent, the light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear as if it is emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the game board 5.

[8-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection part 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4. As a result, game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 or sub-out port 2021 are discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulating ball path unit 600, and by being received in the out ball receiving port 600a, they flow through the out ball passage 601 and are detected (counted) one by one by the out ball sensor 605. On the other hand, game balls B that are received in winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, the first starting port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006 and discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600, and by being received in the safe ball receiving port 600b, they flow through the safe ball passage 602 and are detected (counted) one by one by the safe ball sensor 606.

[8-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 81 to 83. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 93) that controls the game content and the granting of benefits to players, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a board base 1330 which is attached to the board holder 1200 and has the main control board 1310 attached to its rear surface, and a board cover 1340 which is attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from behind. The board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. The main control board 1310 is housed in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. Because the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, it is possible to check the condition of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized tampering has been performed, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) from the outside of the main control board box 1320.

The main control board box 1320 is also provided with multiple sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, the sealing mechanism 1350 must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320 again, and traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrent effect against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 760, the out ball sensor 605, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the general winning port sensor 3001, the normal winning port sensor 3002, the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2401, the large winning port sensor 2402, the special winning port sensor 2501, the first V winning port sensor 2502, the second V winning port sensor 2503, the losing port sensor 2504, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the special winning port solenoid 2516, the first distribution solenoid 2534, the second distribution solenoid 2544, the lottery loop solenoid 2558, the striking piece drive motor 2561, the gutter swing drive motor 2564, the swing piece solenoid 2565, the magnetic sensor 1030, the vibration sensor 1040, etc.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (not shown). The base monitor can be seen from behind through the transparent board cover 1340. This base monitor displays the number of game balls B that have been launched by the ball launching unit 550, ejected downward from the game board 5 after being shot into the game area 5a, and counted by being detected by the out ball sensor 605 provided in the circulating ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4. The base monitor of this embodiment displays the number of balls (the number of balls that have returned to the game hall) counted by the out ball sensor 605 after 100 shots have been launched as a percentage.

[8-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the game window 101 of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the lottery results for normal symbols, the lottery results for special symbols, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern display consisting of two LEDs that displays the lottery results of the normal pattern drawn by the reception of a game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, and a normal reserve display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved balls related to the reception of a game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the drawing of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserved number related to the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the lottery result for the first special pattern or the lottery result for the second special pattern is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc., by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[8-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. In detail, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 that attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 93) that controls the performance presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission performance, sound performance, movable performance, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 250, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 93). The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the performance display device 1600, details of which will be described later.

[8-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 82 and 83. The effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The performance display device 1600 is attached to the front of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 which is attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010. Since the performance display device 1600 is detachable from the box 3010, the performance display device 1600 can be detached from the rear box 3010 via the liquid crystal spacer 1610. The performance display device 1600 is a transparent It can be seen from the front (player's side) through the game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center device 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color LCD display device with a white LED backlight, and is attached in landscape orientation to the front of the LCD spacer 1610. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 is attached with an offset (eccentricity) such that its center is located to the lower right of the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610, so that space is created above and to the left of the liquid crystal spacer 1610.

The liquid crystal spacer 1610 is formed in a transparent flat plate shape with the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has two upper fixing pieces 1611 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 protruding downward from the lower end surface. With the liquid crystal screen of the performance display device 1600 facing forward, the two upper fixing pieces 1611 are inserted from the diagonal rear of the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner surface of the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 described later, and the lower fixing piece 1612 is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left when viewed from behind, thereby attaching the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to the rear box 3010.

[8-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear end partly protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a normal winning opening 2002 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, a first starting opening 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive the game ball B, and a normal symbol which is drawn by lottery when the game ball B is received by the normal winning opening 2002. It is equipped with a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game ball B depending on the lottery result, a large prize opening 2005 and a special prize opening 2006 that can receive game ball B depending on a first special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 or a second special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, and a first V prize opening 2007 and a second V prize opening 2008 that can receive game ball B received into the special prize opening 2006.

The front unit 2000 further includes an outlet 2020 and a sub-outlet 2021 that discharge the game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The outlet 2020 and the sub-outlet 2021 are always open so that they can receive the game ball B. The outlet 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a first start port sensor 2101 that detects a game ball B received in the first start port 2003, a second start port sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, a large prize port sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize port 2005, a first V prize port sensor 2502 that detects a game ball B received in the first V prize port 2007, a second V prize port sensor 2503 that detects a game ball B received in the second V prize port 2008, a loss port sensor 2504 that detects a game ball B received in the loss port 2009, and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects unauthorized magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

Multiple (three in this example) general winning openings 2001 are located on the left side of the horizontal center at the bottom of the play area 5a. The regular winning opening 2002 is located below the vertical center near the right end of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting opening 2003 is located between the two exit openings 2020 in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is located below the regular winning opening 2002 near the right end of the play area 5a. The large winning opening 2005 is located to the right of the first starting opening 2003 in the play area 5a. The special winning opening 2006 is located above the regular winning opening 2002 near the right end of the play area 5a.

The outlets 2020 are located at the downstream end of the game area 5a, below both the left and right sides of the first starting outlet 2003. One of the sub-outlets 2021 is located to the left of the three general winning outlets 2001, and the remaining one is located below the second starting outlet 2004.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the left-right center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2003 and an outlet port 2020, a side unit 2200 which is provided along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and an upper left side unit 2300 which is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 further includes an attacca unit 2400, which is provided to the right of the start port unit 2100 and has a second start port 2004, a large prize port 2005, and one sub-out port 2021; a frame-shaped center role 2500, which is provided slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and has a role prize port 2006, a first V prize port 2007, a second V prize port 2008, and a loss port 2009; and a normal prize port unit 2600, which is provided above the attacca unit 2400 and has a normal prize port 2002.

[8-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and Figure 84. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed directly above the outlet 1008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that can receive only one game ball B, and two outlets 2020 that are always open to receive the game ball B and discharge the received game ball B outside the game area 5a without returning it. The starting port unit 2100 also has a first starting port sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 (see Figure 93).

The outlet 2020 is located at a lower position than the first starting port 2003. The two outlets 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 are located at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2003 in between. The first starting port 2003 opens upward with a width that allows one game ball B to pass through. The outlet 2020 opens upward with a width equivalent to two game balls B, and is located at the lowest position within the game area 5a.

The starting hole unit 2100 is arranged so that the height difference between the first starting hole 2003 and the outlet hole 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting hole and the outlet hole (outlet hole 1008) in a conventional pachinko machine. This gives the player the illusion that the first starting hole 2003 is located lower than a conventional first starting hole, making the playing area 5a appear relatively larger.

The start port unit 2100 has a start port display section 2110 that is provided below the first start port 2003 and can display a predetermined pattern. The start port display section 2110 is composed of a single 7-segment LED. This start port display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the start port display section 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the outlet 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

When the start port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, the first start port 2003 is located directly below the central release section 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center device 2500, and can receive the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a with a high probability. The game ball B received in this first start port 2003 is detected by the first start port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

The game ball B received at the outlet 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[8-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and 84. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B, and one sub-out port 2021 that is always open to receive the game ball B.

The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, with the openings located higher toward the left. Each general winning opening 2001 opens to the size (width) of one game ball B. A sub-out opening 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The sub-out opening 2021 opens to the size (width) of one game ball B.

The side unit 2200 also has a shelf 2201 to the right of the rightmost general winning port 2001, which slopes downward as it goes to the right. The shelf 2201 extends to the right, up to near the right end of the left outlet 2020 in the starting port unit 2100. In other words, when the game ball B rolls down the shelf 2201, it is received by the left outlet 2020.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

The side unit 2200 can also guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[8-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and 84. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200 within the gaming area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side below the center device 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[8-8d. Attacker Unit]
Next, the attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and Figure 84. The attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, to the right of the start hole unit 2100 as seen from the front, which is the lower right corner as seen from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the game panel 1100. This attacca unit 2400 has a second start hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, and one sub-out hole 2021 (see Figure 84, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the Attacka unit 2400 has a second starting hole 2004 located at the top and to the right of the center in the left-right direction, a large prize opening 2005 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting hole 2004, and one sub-out hole 2021 located below the second starting hole 2004 and lower than the large prize opening 2005.

The attacca unit 2400 also includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see FIG. 93). Two large prize opening sensors 2402 are provided, one on the left and one on the right.

The attacker unit 2400 also has a dummy sensor 2403 at a position behind the sub-out port 2021 that is visible from the front. This dummy sensor 2403 cannot detect game ball B, but is formed in the same manner as a through sensor that detects the passage of game ball B, such as the big prize port sensor 2402. With this configuration, the dummy sensor 2403 can be replaced with a sensor that can actually detect game ball B, so it is possible to change to either counting out balls in the main body frame 4 or not. Note that while the dummy sensor 2403 is formed in the same manner as a through sensor, it may also be a spacer that eliminates steps that may cause balls to get stuck in that area.

The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a second start port door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start port 2004, a start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start port door 2411 in response to a normal lottery result drawn by the reception of a game ball B in the normal prize port 2002, a large prize port door 2413 that can open and close the large prize port 2005, and an attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize port door 2413 in response to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of a game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004.

The second starting opening 2004 of the attacca unit 2400 opens upward with a width in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. The large winning opening 2005 opens upward with a width in the left-right direction that is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B. The second starting opening door 2411, which allows the second starting opening 2004 to be opened and closed, is provided so that it can move back and forth in the front-to-rear direction and is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The large winning opening door 2413, which allows the large winning opening 2005 to be opened and closed, is provided so that it can move back and forth in the front-to-rear direction by rotating around an axis that extends in the left-to-right direction and is inclined so that the left end side is lower.

This second starting port door 2411 is arranged to move in the forward and backward directions. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move forward and close the second starting port 2004. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retracts against the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move backward and open the second starting port 2004.

The large prize opening door 2413 is a long flat plate that moves back and forth by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction that is located below the large prize opening sensor 2402. The large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large prize opening door 2413 moves forward as the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the spring force, closing the large prize opening 2005. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized, the large prize opening door 2413 moves backward as the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 retreats against the spring force, opening the large prize opening 2005.

The Attacka unit 2400 has an upper shelf 2421 at its upper end that forms a space between the second starting hole 2004 and the large prize hole 2005 through which the game ball B can flow, and is inclined downward toward the left and is provided to cover the upper parts. The upper shelf 2421 extends in the left-right direction from the upper right end of the second starting hole 2004 to the upper left end of the large prize hole 2005.

The attacca unit 2400 is provided with a first shelf 2422 that is above the second starting opening 2004 and slopes downward from a position that is spaced from the right end (right rail 1005) of the attacca unit 2400 to the left, allowing one game ball B to pass through, toward the second starting opening 2004 on the left; a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward from the left end of the second starting opening 2004; a third shelf 2424 that is below and to the left of the second shelf 2423 and slopes downward from a position that is spaced from the second shelf 2423 to the left, allowing one game ball B to pass through, toward the large winning opening 2005 on the left; and a fourth shelf 2425 that slopes downward from the left end of the large winning opening 2005 to the left.

When a game ball B enters the gap to the right of the first shelf 2422, between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, the attacca unit 2400 receives the game ball B in the sub-out port 2021 and ejects the game ball B outside the game area 5a.

Although detailed illustrations of the Attacca unit 2400 are omitted, in the space between the upper shelf 2421 and the large prize opening 2005 where game balls B can flow to the left, multiple abutment parts that are triangular in plan view protrude into the space so that they are staggered left and right from the front and rear walls that form the space. When the large prize opening 2005 is in the closed state, these multiple abutment parts allow game balls B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag pattern in the front and back directions, lengthening the time that game balls B circulate over the large prize opening door 2413.

In the normal state of the attacca unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414 are both de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second start port door 2411 is located above the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2411 prevents the second start port 2004 from receiving a game ball B. In other words, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411.

In addition, in the normal state, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large prize opening door 2413 is located above the large prize opening 2005, and the large prize opening 2005 cannot receive game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413.

In this normal state, when a game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2422, the inclination of the first shelf 2422 causes the game ball B to roll to the left, roll over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2423, and is then released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2423. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls onto the third shelf 2424 or the big prize gate door 2413 depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of these. Note that when a game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 hits the underside of the upper shelf 2421 and bounces off to the right, it may enter the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424.

The game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large prize opening 2005 alternately comes into contact with multiple abutment parts provided in the space between the upper shelf 2421 and the large prize opening 2005, and rolls to the left while zigzagging back and forth. After rolling to the left on the large prize opening door 2413, the game ball B rolls on the fourth shelf 2425 and is released from its left end to the outside of the attacca unit 2400. Because the left end of the fourth shelf 2425 is located lower than the first starting opening 2003, the game ball B released to the left from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the outlet 2020.

When a game ball B flows down onto the upper shelf 2421 of the Attacca unit 2400, it is guided to the left by the inclination, and is released to the left of the Attacca unit 2400 without being given a chance to be accepted by the second starting hole 2004 or the big winning hole 2005. Because the left end of the upper shelf 2421 is located at a higher position than the first starting hole 2003, game ball B released to the left from the upper shelf 2421 has the potential to be accepted by the first starting hole 2003.

In this attacca unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422, it enters the sub-out port 2021. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it enters the sub-out port 2021. The game ball B that enters the sub-out port 2021 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is delivered to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600. In this attacca unit 2400, the game ball B that flows on the right side of the first shelf 2422 and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 are both formed to enter the sub-out port 2021, and essentially two sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn when game ball B is received by the normal winning port 2002, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the second start port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, as the second start port door 2411 moves rearward, the top of the second start port 2004 is opened, and game ball B can be received by the second start port 2004. In other words, the second start port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is open and game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then released rearward from the attacca unit 2400. The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and released rearward from the attacca unit 2400 is handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

Meanwhile, in the normal state, when the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized (ON) in accordance with the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) that is determined by receiving the game ball B in the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, the plunger moves back against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. By the large prize opening door 2413 moving rearward, the large prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the large prize opening 2005 can receive the game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the large prize opening 2005 is open and game ball B is received in the large prize opening 2005, it is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402 installed below, and is then released rearward from the attacca unit 2400. Game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 and released rearward from the attacca unit 2400 is handed over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

In this way, according to the attacca unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402 and then released to the rear, which makes it possible to prevent the game ball B from getting stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large prize opening sensor 2402, and also makes it possible to receive a large number of game balls B in a short period of time.

[8-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80, 84, 85 to 88, etc. Figure 85(a) is a front view of the lottery role in the center role, and (b) is a perspective view of the lottery role seen from above the front. Figure 86 is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery role in the center role cut at the center in the left-right direction. Figure 87(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the lottery role in a state in which the game ball cannot be looped, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the lottery role in a state in which the game ball can be looped. Figure 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the lottery role.

The center device 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a, above the starting unit 2100, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center device 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape.

The center device 2500, details of which will be described later, includes a device winning opening 2006 that opens and closes to accept a game ball B depending on the results of a drawing of a first special pattern drawn by receiving a game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 and a second special pattern drawn by receiving a game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, a second V winning opening 2008 that can only accept game balls B that have been received into the device winning opening 2006, and a losing opening 2009 that can accept game balls B that have been received into the device winning opening 2006 but not into the second V winning opening 2008.

The center device 2500 is equipped with a device winning port sensor 2501 that detects a game ball B received in the device winning port 2006, a first V winning port sensor 2502 that detects a game ball B received in the first V winning port 2007, a second V winning port sensor 2503 that detects a game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008, and a losing port sensor 2504 that detects a game ball B received in the losing port 2009.

The center role 2500 comprises a main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and a lottery role 2550 provided at the bottom within the frame of the main unit 2510. The main unit 2510 has a role winning hole 2006 and a first V winning hole 2007. The lottery role 2550 has a second V winning hole 2008 and a losing hole 2009.

[8-8e-1. Main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center gadget 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a gadget winning port 2006. The main unit 2510 includes a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511, which rolls the game ball B that has flowed through the warp passage 2512 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a.

The center frame 2511 has a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is arranged along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-to-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an inflow restriction portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The insertion portion 2511a is provided so that its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. The inflow restriction portion 2511c, when assembled to the game board 5, has a front end excluding the bottom edge of the frame shape (annular shape) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As a result, when assembled to the game board 5, the inflow restriction portion 2511c can prevent (restrict) the intrusion (inflow) of the game ball B from the outside of the center role 2500 (center frame 2511) to the inside of the frame.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-to-rear direction.

The support parts 2511d are provided partially on the inner circumference of the insertion part 2511a. The support parts 2511d are also provided on the parts of the insertion part 2511a where the flange part 2511b does not protrude, and reinforce the insertion part 2511a (center frame 2511). The end edge of the support part 2511d protruding from the insertion part 2511a is formed in a shape that imitates the front shape of the insertion part 2511a or in a straight line, so that the support part 2511d is not noticeable. The amount of protrusion of the support part 2511d from the insertion part 2511a is within the range from the thickness of the support part 2511d to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that it is not noticeable to the player while exerting a reinforcing effect.

The warp passage 2512 is open at the left side of the inflow restriction section 2511c when viewed from the front, allowing the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the game ball B that has entered to the stage 2513. A part of the warp passage 2512 is formed by the center frame 2511.

The stage 2513 is attached to the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511. The stage 2513 is curved with a recessed central side in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2003 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate central position in the left-right direction when the center role 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than the left and right sides. This stage 2513 is inclined so that the part (center release part 2513a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the left-right direction and the lowest part on both sides (side release part 2513b) are lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled to the game board 5, its elevated central portion in the left-right direction (central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2003 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when a game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting hole 2003 with an extremely high probability.

The main unit 2510 of the center gadget 2500 is provided in the upper right corner of the center frame 2511 and is equipped with a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game ball B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the normal winning opening 2002 and the attacca unit 2400.

As shown in FIG. 84, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the inflow restriction portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and is composed of a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the collision stopper portion 1006, and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) are both formed from a colorless and transparent material, and the game ball B flowing inside can be seen from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically downward from the impact stop 1006 of the previous component 1000 for a short distance, then bends at a right angle to the right, and when it approaches the right rail 1005, bends downward and extends along the right rail 1005, bends left at approximately 3/4 of the height of the play area 5a from the bottom, extends left at a gentle angle, bends downward at a position one game ball B to the left of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, extends to the center height of the play area 5a, bends right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward so that the exit opens downward.

The first guide passage 2521 does not bend in the front-to-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100. A special prize opening 2006 is provided in the upper leftward extending portion of the first guide passage 2521. In addition, below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, a normal prize opening 2002 opens upward.

On the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 is spaced to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, and its entrance opens upward. The second guide passage 2522 extends downward in a generally straight line from the entrance at the top, bends backward at a height lower than the height of the part where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, bends downward behind the front of the game panel 1100 so that it is aligned in the front-to-back direction with the first guide passage 2521, extends downward so that the left-to-right direction is roughly aligned with the leftmost part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends downward, bends to the right in a crank shape at a height at the center of the game area 5a, bends downward, bends forward at a position lower than the part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the right on the lower side, bends to the right so that it extends along the lower side of the part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the right on the lower side, and then bends downward adjacent to the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521, so that the exit opens downward.

The main unit 2510 is provided in the middle of one of the guide passages 2520 (here, the first guide passage 2521), and is equipped with a prize winning port 2006 into which the game ball B can be received according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004, a first allocation device 2530 that allocates the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 to the chance port 2531, a second allocation device 2540 that allocates the game ball B allocated to the chance port 2531 by the first allocation device 2530 to the first V winning port 2007, and a lottery guide passage 2545 that guides the game ball B not allocated to the first V winning port 2007 by the second allocation device 2540 (the game ball B allocated to the second slack port 2541) to the lottery device 2550.

The main unit 2510 (center gambling device 2500) has a gambling device winning port 2006 in a portion extending to the upper left of the first guide passage 2521, and extends left and right over the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction, and opens upward. The gambling device winning port door 2515 extends forward and backward, and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lower, and can open and close the gambling device winning port 2006 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. The gambling device winning port door 2515 can close the gambling device winning port 2006 by moving forward, and when the gambling device winning port 2006 is closed, it forms the bottom surface of the portion extending to the left of the first guide passage 2521, and can guide the game ball B that has circulated from the upstream side to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The bonus prize opening door 2515 opens the bonus prize opening 2006 by moving backwards due to the drive of the bonus prize opening solenoid 2516, and allows the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 to be received by the bonus prize opening 2006. This bonus prize opening door 2515 closes the bonus prize opening 2006 when the bonus prize opening solenoid 2516 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the bonus prize opening 2006 when the bonus prize opening solenoid 2516 is ON (when energized).

The first distribution device 2530 includes a chance port 2531 and a first spurt port 2532 into which a game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 and detected by the role winning port sensor 2501 can enter, a distribution rotor 2533 having a storage section 2533a on its outer periphery capable of storing only one game ball B and capable of rotating around an axis in the front-to-rear direction, and a first distribution solenoid 2534 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution rotor 2533 between a state in which the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 faces rightward and a state in which it faces upward. The distribution rotor 2533 has an outer periphery formed in a truncated cone shape narrowing toward the rear.

The chance port 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is provided downstream of the distribution rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game balls B, and is provided to the right of the distribution rotor 2533 so that the game balls B stored in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 can enter. The chance port 2531 is connected to the second distribution device 2540. The first spur port 2532 is provided upstream of the distribution rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game balls B, and is provided above the distribution rotor 2533 so that the game balls B that are not stored in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 can enter. The first spur port 2532 opens forward and guides the entering game balls B rearward of the game panel 1100.

When the first distribution solenoid 2534 is OFF (not energized), the first distribution device 2530 has the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 facing to the right. In this state, when a game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 flows down from above to the distribution rotor 2533 after being detected by the role winning port sensor 2501, it comes into contact with the outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2533. Since the outer circumferential surface of this distribution rotor 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape narrowing toward the rear, the inclination of the outer circumferential surface guides the game ball B backward, and it enters the first slot 2532.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2534 is ON (energized), the distribution rotor 2533 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise, and the storage section 2533a faces upward. In this state, when a game ball B received in the role winning port 2006 flows down from above into the distribution rotor 2533 after being detected by the role winning port sensor 2501, only one is stored in the storage section 2533a. When a game ball B is stored in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533, if another game ball B flows down from above from the role winning port 2006 side into the distribution rotor 2533, the game ball B will come into contact with the game ball B stored in the storage section 2533a and then enter the first suction port 2532 at the rear. The game ball B that enters the first suction port 2532 is detected by a sensor and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, from which it is discharged into the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

When game ball B is stored in storage section 2533a, the first distribution solenoid 2534 rotates distribution rotor 2533 90 degrees clockwise so that storage section 2533a faces to the right, and game ball B stored in storage section 2533a rolls to the right from storage section 2533a and is received by chance port 2531. Game ball B received by chance port 2531 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

In this way, the first distribution device 2530 can distribute the game ball B received in the special prize opening 2006 to either the chance opening 2531 side (the second distribution device 2540 side) or the first spurt opening 2532 side.

The second sorting device 2540 sorts the game balls B sorted by the first sorting device 2530 to the chance port 2531 to either the second spurt port 2541 or the first V winning port 2007. When viewed from the front, the second sorting device 2540 is provided at a height between the first sorting device 2530 and the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the sorting rotor 2533 of the first sorting device 2530.

The second distribution device 2540 includes a second draw port 2541 and a first V winning port 2007 that are provided to allow the game ball B accommodated in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 in the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to the chance port 2531 to enter, a distribution piece 2543 that can open and close the second draw port 2541 by moving back and forth, and a second distribution solenoid 2544 (see Figure 93) for moving the distribution piece 2543 back and forth.

The second spur port 2541 opens upward at a position to the right of the distribution rotor 2533, and game balls B distributed to the chance port 2531 are supplied from above. The first V winning port 2007 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second spur port 2541, and opens upward. The distribution piece 2543 is a flat plate that slopes lower to the right, and by protruding forward, it can close the upper end opening of the second spur port 2541, making it impossible for game balls B to be received by the second spur port 2541, and can guide game balls B that come into contact with the upper surface to the right and allow them to be received by the first V winning port 2007.

When the second distribution solenoid 2544 is OFF (not energized), the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 advances and closes the second spur port 2541. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance port 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, it abuts on the upper surface of the distribution piece 2543, and is guided to the right by the inclination of the distribution piece 2543 and is received (distributed) into the first V winning port 2007. The game ball B distributed to the first V winning port 2007 is detected by the first V winning port sensor 2502 and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is ON (energized), the distribution piece 2543 retracts, the second spur port 2541 is opened upward, and the second spur port 2541 is able to receive the game ball B. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance port 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, the game ball B passes in front of the retracted distribution piece 2543 and is received (distributed) by the second spur port 2541. The game ball B distributed to the second spur port 2541 is then guided by the lottery guide passage 2545 to the lottery device 2550 on the left.

In this way, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 in the first distribution device 2530, i.e., the game ball B distributed to the chance port 2531, can be distributed to either the second spurt port 2541 (lottery device 2550) side or the first V winning port 2007 side.

The lottery guide passage 2545 is provided with a lottery ball entrance sensor 2546 that detects the circulation of game ball B. When game ball B is detected by this lottery ball entrance sensor 2546, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the performance display device 1600, the main frame speaker 503, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and executes a performance that livens up the lottery (allocation) of game ball B in the lottery device 2550. As a result, the game ball B is allocated to the second slot 2541 in the second allocation device 2540, which dispels the player's disappointment and increases his or her expectations for the lottery device 2550.

[8-8e-2. Lottery item]
The lottery device 2550 in the center device 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figs. 85 to 88. The lottery device 2550 of the center device 2500 is provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and has a second V winning hole 2008 and a losing hole 2009. The lottery device 2550 is supplied with game balls B received in the winning hole 2006. In detail, the game balls B received in the winning hole 2006 and distributed to the chance hole 2531 by the first distribution device 2530, and further distributed to the second losing hole 2541 by the second distribution device 2540 are supplied. In addition, the lottery device 2550 is equipped with a second V winning port sensor 2503 that detects a game ball B accepted into the second V winning port 2008, and a losing port sensor 2504 that detects a game ball B accepted into the losing port 2009.

The lottery device 2550 of the center device 2500 is provided with a guide path 2551 that is inclined downwards to the left and to which the game balls B that have been distributed to the second suction port 2541 by the second distribution device 2540 and circulated through the lottery guide passage 2545 are supplied, a distribution section 2552 that distributes the game balls B that have circulated through the guide path 2551 to either the loop side or the non-loop side (the loss port 2009 side), a hitting section 2553 that can hit the game balls B that have been distributed to the loop side by the distribution section 2552 backwards, and a game ball B that has been hit backwards by the hitting section 2553 is supplied and hit forwards. The table 2555 has a wide surface in both the front and rear and left and right directions along which the game ball B guided by the oscillating gutter 2554 rolls and which is inclined so as to become lower toward the guide path 2551 in front, and has a second V winning opening 2008 near the downstream end. The table 2555 has a pair of oscillating pieces 2556 that are provided between the second V winning opening 2008 on the table 2555 and the oscillating gutter 2554 and can swing around the axis in the vertical direction.

This lottery device 2550 will be described in detail later, but as long as the distribution unit 2552 distributes the game ball B to the loop side, the game ball B released from the table 2555 on which the second V winning port 2008 is provided is supplied to the striking unit 2553, and the game ball B can loop between the striking unit 2553 and the table 2555.

The guide path 2551 of the lottery device 2550 extends from near the rear end to the front end along the right edge of the lottery device 2550 so that the front becomes lower, and then extends along the front edge of the lottery device 2550 to near the left end so that the left becomes lower, and is formed in an L shape in a plan view. This guide path 2551 extends with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. Game ball B is supplied to the guide path 2551 from the lottery guide passage 2545 to the portion that extends in the front-rear direction along the right edge.

The distribution section 2552 of the lottery device 2550 is provided near the downstream end (left end) of the part extending in the left-right direction of the guideway 2551. The distribution section 2552 is equipped with a losing port 2009 that penetrates the guideway 2551 and opens upward, a swing-bridge-like distribution bridge 2557 that is provided near the left end of the losing port 2009 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and that allows the losing port 2009 to be opened and closed, and a lottery loop solenoid 2558 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution bridge 2557. The guideway 2551 is divided into an upstream side and a downstream side by the losing port 2009.

When viewed from above, the sorting bridge 2557 is formed as a long flat plate, with its left side supported so that it can rotate around an axis in the front-to-rear direction, and its right side being the free end. The sorting bridge 2557 is rotatable between a loop position (see FIG. 87(a)) in which the right side approaches the right side of the missing opening 2009 and extends left-to-right and is tilted over, and a non-loop position (see FIG. 87(b)) in which the right side is positioned above the left side and extends up-down and stands upright.

When the sorting bridge 2557 is in the loop position, it bridges the guideway 2551, which is divided into two by the loss port 2009, into the upstream side and the downstream side, and the game ball B can roll from the upstream side to the downstream side by passing over the sorting bridge 2557. In other words, when the sorting bridge 2557 is in the loop position, it can close the loss port 2009 and not accept the game ball B. On the other hand, when the sorting bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position, the loss port 2009 is opened upward, and the game ball B that has rolled from the upstream side can be accepted by the loss port 2009 without being passed to the downstream side. In this way, in the sorting unit 2552, the sorting bridge 2557 can sort the game ball B to either the loop side or the non-loop side.

The sorting bridge 2557 is provided with a sorting display section 2557a, which is formed in a flag shape with an X mark on it, on the side opposite the rolling surface of the game ball B. This sorting display section 2557a becomes visible to the player when the sorting bridge 2557 is in a non-loop position that opens the losing hole 2009. This allows the player to recognize that the game ball B cannot reach the downstream striking section 2553 (cannot loop).

The left end of the sorting bridge 2557, which is supported so as to be rotatable, is located to the left of the left end of the downstream end (front end edge) of the table 2555. Therefore, the game ball B released from the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 side is released to a position to the right of the sorting bridge 2557 in the non-loop position, so that when in the non-loop position, the game ball B from the table 2555 does not go to the downstream side of the guideway 2551, which is divided into two (downstream of the sorting bridge 2557), but is received by the open losing port 2009.

The striking section 2553 of the lottery device 2550 is inclined so that its front end is lower than the downstream end of the guideway 2551 and becomes higher toward the rear, and is equipped with an uphill section 2559 to which the game balls B sorted to the loop side by the sorting section 2552 are supplied, a fan-shaped striking piece 2560 that is provided at the downstream end of the uphill section 2559 and can strike the game balls B, and a striking piece drive motor 2561 (see FIG. 93) that rotates the striking piece 2560 around an axis perpendicular to the uphill section 2559.

The fan-shaped striking piece 2560 is rotated at a relatively high speed by the striking piece drive motor 2561. Therefore, the strength with which the game ball B is struck varies depending on the timing when the game ball B reaches the part where the striking piece 2560 is provided and the timing of the rotation position of the striking piece 2560. Therefore, if the game ball B is struck to a certain degree strongly, it can go over the uphill part 2559 and move to the rear oscillating gutter 2554 side, and if the strike is weak, it cannot go over the uphill part 2559 and returns to the front. This makes the player nervous and excited depending on whether the game ball B is struck strongly and goes to the oscillating gutter 2554 (table 2555) side, and the player can be entertained. In addition, if the strike by the striking piece 2560 is weak, the game ball B returns, so the time until the game with the game ball B is confirmed can be extended, and the player can feel a sense of gain, which makes the player enjoy and suppresses a decline in interest.

This lottery device 2550 has a swinging passage 2562 between the striking part 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554, into which the game ball B that has climbed over the slope 2559 is supplied, which is curved so that both ends are high and the center is low, and a discharge port 2563 that is provided in the center of the swinging passage 2562 and discharges the game ball B into the swinging gutter 2554. A plurality of projections and recesses are provided near the raised both ends of the swinging passage 2562, which can reduce the rolling speed of the game ball B. This swinging passage 2562 is provided along the rear end edge of the lottery device 2550 and is provided behind the table 2555. The game ball B supplied from the striking part 2553 to the swinging passage 2562 rolls in the left-right direction, similar to the stage 2513, and is then discharged from the central discharge port 2563 into the swinging gutter 2554.

The oscillating gutter 2554 of the lottery device 2550 is formed in a disk shape, and has a gutter section 2554a that extends from the center toward the outer periphery and is recessed like a gutter. The disk-shaped oscillating gutter 2554 has an axis of rotation that is inclined so that the rear side is higher. The lottery device 2550 has a gutter swing drive motor 2564 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the oscillating gutter 2554 back and forth within a predetermined angle range. The gutter swing drive motor 2564 causes the oscillating gutter 2554 to swing back and forth so that the tip of the gutter section 2554a faces the second V winning opening 2008 in front and faces left and right within a predetermined angle range.

The oscillating gutter 2554 is provided at the rear end (top end) of the table 2555 in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball B released from the release port 2563 is delivered to the gutter section 2554a. Since the oscillating gutter 2554 rotates back and forth, the game ball B delivered to the gutter section 2554a can be released into a fan-shaped range according to the rotation direction in which the tip of the gutter section 2554a on the table 2555 is facing. At this time, since the oscillating gutter 2554 is rotating even until the received game ball B rolls in the gutter section 2554a and is released from the tip, an inertial force acts on the game ball B due to the rotation. Therefore, the game ball B released from the tip of the gutter section 2554a does not roll on the table 2555 straight in the direction in which the gutter section 2554a is facing, making it difficult to predict the rolling direction.

The table 2555 of the lottery device 2550 is inclined so that the front end is lower, and the length of the front end, which is the downstream end, in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the rear end in the left-right direction. The table 2555 also has a swinging gutter 2554 at the top end in the left-right center, and a second V winning hole 2008 near the bottom end in the left-right center. The table 2555 has a central groove 2555a that extends from the swinging gutter 2554 to the second V winning hole 2008 in the left-right center, and a recess 2555b that is recessed more than the surrounding area near the bottom end in the left-right center. The recess 2555b is recessed in the shape of a pentagonal home base, and the second V winning hole 2008 is provided at the bottom.

This table 2555 has a central groove 2555a leading to the second V winning opening 2008, and a recess 2555b at the bottom where the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, so that the player can feel that when the game ball B enters these grooves, it will be received by the second V winning opening 2008, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling around on the table 2555.

The front end, which is the downstream end of the table 2555, is located at a higher position than the forward guideway 2551. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the guideway 2551 is not supplied onto the table 2555 without passing through the striking section 2553 and the oscillating gutter 2554.

The pair of oscillating pieces 2556 of the lottery device 2550 are provided symmetrically at positions symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the table 2555 between the oscillating gutter 2554 and the second V winning port 2008 in the table 2555. The oscillating pieces 2556 are formed in a droplet shape, with the circular base end facing forward and the pointed tip facing backward, and are provided so as to be rotatable around the circular base end.

The lottery device 2550 is equipped with a rocking piece solenoid 2565 for rocking a pair of rocking pieces 2556 by rotating them back and forth within a predetermined angle range around an axis in the vertical direction. The pair of rocking pieces 2556 are arranged to rotate in opposite directions by a single rocking piece solenoid 2565.

The pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are rotated by the oscillating piece solenoid 2565, so the rotation speed is faster than when they are rotated by a drive motor. Therefore, when the game ball B hits the oscillating piece 2556 while the oscillating piece 2556 is moving while swinging, the game ball B can be strongly bounced away. Therefore, depending on the rotation direction of the oscillating piece 2556, the abutting game ball B can be sent to the center in the left-right direction of the table 2555 or to both ends in the left-right direction, and the flow of the game ball B can be changed.

When the pointed tips of the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are close to each other, the distance between the oscillating pieces 2556 narrows, and the rearward facing surface of the oscillating piece 2556 is inclined away from the left-right center as it moves forward, resulting in the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 narrowing toward the rear. As a result, when a game ball B that flows down from the rear of the oscillating gutter 2554 or table 2555 passes between the pair of oscillating pieces 2556, it is more likely to be accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, and when it comes into contact with the rearward facing surface of the pair of oscillating pieces 2556, it is guided away from the left-right center due to the inclination, so it is less likely to be accepted into the second V winning hole 2008.

On the other hand, when the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 have their pointed tips moving away from each other (as shown by the dashed lines in FIG. 88), the rearward facing surface of the oscillating piece 2556 is inclined so as to approach the left-right center as it moves forward, and the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are in a state of being spread out toward the rear. As a result, when a game ball B flowing down from the rear of the oscillating gutter 2554 or table 2555 comes into contact with the rearward facing surface of the pair of oscillating pieces 2556, the inclination will guide it to the left-right center, and it may be received by the second V winning opening 2008.

Therefore, when the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are widened toward the rear, the game ball B that comes into contact with the oscillating pieces 2556 is guided toward the center in the left-right direction, so that the game ball B that flows down from the rear is more likely to be received by the second V winning port 2008 than when the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are narrowed toward the rear. In other words, the probability of receiving the game ball B by the second V winning port 2008 can be changed depending on the state of the pair of oscillating pieces 2556.

The lottery device 2550 of this embodiment is provided with a transparent cover 2566 that covers the entire device from above (see Figures 78 to 80, etc.). This cover 2566 can prevent the game ball B supplied through the lottery guide passage 2545 from flying out of the lottery device 2550, and can also prevent the game ball B from being supplied (entering) from outside other than the lottery guide passage 2545.

Next, the flow of game balls B in the lottery device 2550 will be described. In the lottery device 2550, one of the game balls B received in the device winning port 2006, which opens and closes in a predetermined pattern depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result (for example, "a hit") obtained when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, is supplied to the upstream area of the guide path 2551 through the lottery guide passage 2545. The game ball B supplied to the upstream area of the guide path 2551 rolls toward the left sorting section 2552 according to the inclination of the guide path 2551.

In the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 is in a collapsed loop position for a predetermined time, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream side passes through the distribution bridge 2557 and rolls to the striking section 2553 on the downstream side. The game ball B supplied to the striking section 2553 is then struck backward by the rotating striking piece 2560, and rolls up the uphill section 2559 extending backward.

At this time, since the striking piece 2560 is formed in a fan shape and rotates at a relatively fast speed, depending on the timing of the impact of the game ball B relative to the rotational position of the striking piece 2560, the striking piece 2560 may strike the game ball B hard or just barely touch it, and the momentum of the game ball B struck backwards may vary. Therefore, if the impact by the striking piece 2560 is weak, the game ball B may not be able to climb the rising slope 2559 toward the rear and may come back down the rising slope 2559, causing the game ball B to go back and forth on the rising slope 2559.

When the game ball B struck by the striking piece 2560 gets over the uphill section 2559, it enters the swinging passage 2562 provided at the rear and rolls left and right along the swinging passage 2562, which is lower in the left and right center. At this time, since multiple irregularities are provided near both the left and right ends of the swinging passage 2562, as the game ball B passes through the uneven areas, the impact of the irregularities reduces the rolling speed. This makes it possible to reduce the momentum of the game ball B that has been struck by the striking piece 2560 and gotten over the uphill section 2559.

The game ball B, which has rolled so as to swing left and right along the swing passage 2562, is finally released onto the table 2555 from the release port 2563 provided in the center via the swing gutter 2554. At this time, the swing gutter 2554 is swinging and rotating so as to move back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the gutter swing drive motor 2564, so that the game ball B is released from the swing gutter 2554 in various directions depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the release port 2563 to the swing gutter 2554 and the timing of the rotation position of the swing gutter 2554.

The game ball B released from the oscillating gutter 2554 onto the table 2555 rolls forward as the table 2555 tilts, and is released from the front edge onto the guideway 2551. At this time, a pair of oscillating pieces 2556 spaced apart on the left and right are oscillating near the center of the table 2555 in the front-to-back direction, so that the game ball B that comes into contact with the oscillating pieces 2556 can be bounced and the rolling direction changed. In addition, a second V winning hole 2008 is provided near the front end of the table 2555 in the center of the left-to-right direction, so that the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be received by the second V winning hole 2008.

The game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, and is then handed over to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is then discharged to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is received in this second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot game" is executed as a favorable game state in which the large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the game ball B is supplied to the lottery device 2550, the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

The game ball B released from the front edge of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 is supplied to the striking section 2553 through the sorting bridge 2557 within a predetermined time because the sorting bridge 2557 of the sorting section 2552 is in the loop position. Therefore, when the sorting bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the game ball B can loop between the striking section 2553 and the table 2555 any number of times as long as the game ball B is not accepted by the second V winning port 2008. In other words, when the sorting bridge 2557 is in the loop position, there are any number of opportunities for the game ball B to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008. As a result, even if the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 is not accepted by the second V winning port 2008, there is another opportunity for it to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008 by passing through the sorting bridge 2557 in the loop position, so the player can continue to enjoy the game.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, the sorting bridge 2557 of the sorting section 2552 moves from the loop position to the raised non-loop position, and the losing port 2009 that was closed by the sorting bridge 2557 is opened upward. In this state, the game ball B released from the front end edge of the table 2555 and the game ball B that has rolled along the guideway 2551 are received by the losing port 2009, and the lottery at the lottery device 2550 ends without the game ball B looping. At this time, the sorting display section 2557a, which resembles a flag with an X mark, rises and becomes visible due to the upright sorting bridge 2557, so that the sorting display section 2557a can make the player aware that the game ball B will not loop.

The game ball B received in the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2504, and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

In this way, according to the lottery device 2550 of this embodiment, the game ball B supplied from the device winning port 2006 can be excited and thrilled depending on whether it will be accepted by the second V winning port 2008, and the player can be entertained. Even if the game ball B is not accepted by the second V winning port 2008, when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, the game ball B is sent again to the swinging gutter 2554 located upstream of the second V winning port 2008 via the striking section 2553 and looped, so that the game ball B is given another opportunity to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008, which gives the player a sense of expectation again, entertains the player, and prevents a decline in interest.

[8-8f. Regular winning unit]
Next, the normal winning hole unit 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and 84. The normal winning hole unit 2600 has a normal winning hole 2002, and is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the game area 5a, below the center in the vertical direction. This normal winning hole unit 2600 is provided between the attacca unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center role 2500, and the normal winning hole 2002 is provided so as to be located directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521.

The normal winning port 2002 of the normal winning port unit 2600 is always open so that it can receive the game ball B facing upward. The game ball B received by the normal winning port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and after being detected by the normal winning port sensor 3002, is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

[8-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84. When assembled on the game board 5, the center role 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center role 2500, and in the part between the attacca unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center role 2500. In addition, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B hits it is provided on the left side of the center role 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

On the left side of the center device 2500, there are a number of obstacle nails planted in a specified gauge arrangement between the inner rail 1002. On the left side of the center device 2500 in the play area 5a, the entrance to the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left at a location below the center in the vertical direction of the inflow restriction section 2511c of the center frame 2511. A windmill is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf section 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

The game ball B shot into the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that enters the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center role 2500, rolls left and right on the stage 2513, and is released from either the central release section 2513a or the side release section 2513b so as to return to the game area 5a. The central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting hole 2003 in the left and right center of the game area 5a, so the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting hole 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting hole 2003 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2003 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 2101 of the starting hole unit 2100, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and discharged downward from the rear ball guiding unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 2101, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a lottery is held for a first special symbol that allows the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four). The first special symbol that is drawn is also referred to as the first special lottery result.

The game ball B that is released from the stage 2513 and is not received by the first starting port 2003 is received by the outlet 2020 and discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received by the outlet 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged from the back ball guiding unit 3100 to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

When a game ball B is shot into the left outer side of the center device 2500 and does not enter the warp passage 2512, if it flows to the right of the center of the windmill, there is a high probability that it will flow down to the right along the multiple obstacle nails that are lined up diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500. A game ball B that flows to the right of the center of the windmill may be accepted by the first starting port 2003 or the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B that flows to the right of the center of the windmill may be accepted by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B that is not accepted by the first starting port 2003, the general winning port 2001, or the sub-out port 2021 is accepted by the out port 2020 and discharged outside the game area 5a.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus is awarded that adds a specified number of balls to the player's possession.

On the other hand, if the ball B flows to the left of the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and then flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. The game ball B that flows to the left of the center of the windmill may be received by the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received by the sub-out opening 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. The game ball B that is not received by the general winning opening 2001 or the sub-out opening 2021 is received by the out opening 2020 and discharged outside the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center gambling device 2500, there are arranged, in order from the top, a guide passage group 2520, a gambling device winning hole 2006, a normal winning hole 2002, a second starting hole 2004, a large winning hole 2005, and a sub-out hole 2021. A number of obstacle nails are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the second starting hole 2004.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with enough force to enter above the portion of the inflow restriction portion 2511c of the center frame 2511 of the center device 2500 that becomes lower from near the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To be more specific, when the game ball B is struck with enough force to strike the impact stop 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes part of the periphery of the play area 5a (i.e., struck to the right), the game ball B that strikes the impact stop 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the special prize opening door 2515 that closes the special prize opening 2006 midway through the first guide passage 2521, and is released downward from the right exit at the bottom end of the guide passage group 2520 toward the normal prize opening unit 2600.

On the other hand, when the game ball B that is shot above the center device 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and starts to flow, it is twisted backwards and lines up in the front-to-back direction with the first guide passage 2521, and then twisted forwards and released downward from the left exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the normal winning port unit 2600.

The normal winning port 2002 of the normal winning port unit 2600 is located directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, so that a game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 is more likely to be accepted by the normal winning port 2002 than a game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522.

The game ball B received by the normal winning port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the normal winning port sensor 3002 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning port sensor 3002, a bonus is given to add a predetermined number of balls to the number of balls held, and when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is less than four), a lottery is held for a normal symbol that allows the game ball B to be received by the second starting port 2004. The normal symbol that is drawn is also referred to as the normal lottery result.

After being shot to the right into the game area 5a and flowing through the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B that was not accepted by the normal winning port 2002 flows down above the attacca unit 2400 while abutting against multiple obstacle nails. When the game ball B flows down to the upper shelf part 2421 of the attacca unit 2400, it is guided leftward and downward according to the inclination of the upper shelf part 2421, and is discharged leftward from the attacca unit 2400 without having a chance to be accepted by the second starting port 2004 or the large winning port 2005. Note that since the downstream end (left end) of the upper shelf part 2421 of the attacca unit 2400 is located above the first starting port 2003, there is a possibility that the game ball B that has flowed through the upper shelf part 2421 will be accepted by the first starting port 2003.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400, it rolls to the left due to its inclination, rolls over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2423, and is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2423. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls onto the third shelf 2424 or the large prize gate door 2413 depending on its momentum, rolls to the left due to their inclination, rolls from the large prize gate door 2413 to the fourth shelf 2425, and is released from the fourth shelf 2425 to the left outside the attacca unit 2400. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the outlet 2020.

Furthermore, if game ball B does not flow down to either the upper shelf 2421 or the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400, but flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422, it is received by the sub-out port 2021. Even if game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2422, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 when it enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424. Game ball B received by the sub-out port 2021 is handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

When a game ball B flows down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400, the game ball B rolls on the second starting port door 2411. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2002, a "normal win" is drawn as a normal symbol (normal lottery result), and the second starting port door 2411 is moved back by the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the second starting port 2004. At this timing, when the game ball B circulates (rolls) from the first shelf 2422 side, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004.

After being detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is then discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a bonus is given in which the number of balls held is increased by a predetermined number, and a lottery is executed for a second special pattern that allows the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of reserved second special patterns is less than four). The second special pattern that is drawn is also referred to as the second special lottery result.

In addition, the game ball B that flows down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400 and rolls on the second start opening door 2411 and the second shelf 2423 rolls on the large prize opening door 2413. Therefore, depending on the first special symbol (first special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2003 and the second special symbol (second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second start opening 2004 (for example, when the drawn special symbol (special lottery result) is "large win", "medium win", "small win", etc.), when the large prize opening door 2413 is moved back by the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 is opened, when the game ball B flows (rolls) from the second shelf 2423 side, the game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005.

When game ball B is received in the large prize opening 2005, it is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402 located below, and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, before being discharged into the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. When game ball B is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402, a bonus is awarded that adds a specified number of balls to the player's possession.

When the game ball B is received by the first start opening 2003 or the second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special symbol, the prize winning opening 2006 provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "perfect prize" is drawn, the prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that the player can perform a "right hit" so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 where the prize winning opening 2006 is provided, so that the game ball B can be received by the prize winning opening 2006.

In this embodiment, the probability of a "hit" being drawn is higher than that of a "jackpot", and three patterns of "hits" are set: "first hit", "second hit", and "third hit", and in each pattern, the winning slot 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning port 2006 in each "perk" will be described in detail. In the "first perk", the prize winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms) after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, then closes, and after a short time (1252 ms) it opens again for a short time (80 ms) before closing, completing the process. In the "second perk", the prize winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms) after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, then closes, and after a longer time (5420 ms) than the "first perk", it opens for a long time (9414 ms) before closing, completing the process. For the "third role win", after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, the role win port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms), then closes, and after a longer time (19366 ms) has elapsed than for the "second role win", it remains open for a longer time (9404 ms) before closing again and completing the process.

The second opening state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "first prize winning" occurs after the time when the "first prize winning" is completed from the start of execution. Also, the second opening state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning" occurs after the time when the "second prize winning" is completed from the start of execution.

In addition, in the second long-time open state in the "second role hit" and "third role hit", the open state is repeated eight times (80 ms) at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the role winning port 2006 opens and closes (is in the open state) twice in the "first role hit" and nine times in the "second role hit" and "third role hit".

Next, the operation of the distribution rotor 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "per reel" is to rotate counterclockwise at the start of execution and enter the first storage state with the storage section 2533a facing upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms), then rotate clockwise and enter the unstorable state with the storage section 2533a facing rightward after the predetermined time (4560 ms) has passed, entering the second storage state for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first time, and after entering the unstorable state for a short time (500 ms), enter the third storage state for the same time (13446 ms) as the second time, before entering the unstorable state.

The first available state of this distribution rotor 2533 ends halfway through the first open state of the device winning port 2006 in the "perfect hit", and the distribution rotor 2533 becomes unable to accommodate. Also, the distribution rotor 2533 enters the second available state after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "first hit". Therefore, during the "first hit", the control of the distribution rotor 2533 ends before the second available state is reached, and the second and third available states are not executed. The second available state of this distribution rotor 2533 begins before the second open state of the device winning port 2006 in the "second hit", and becomes unable to accommodate after the second open state becomes closed.

The distribution rotor 2533 also enters the third storage state after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "second role hit". Therefore, during the "second role hit", the control of the distribution rotor 2533 ends before the third storage state is reached, and the third storage state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotor 2533 enters the storage state once during the "first role hit", twice during the "second role hit", and three times during the "third role hit". The third storage state of this distribution rotor 2533 begins before the second opening state of the role winning port 2006 during the "third role hit", and becomes unstorable after the second opening state ends and the closed state is reached.

Next, the operation of the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 in the "hit of the role" is to protrude forward at the same time as the execution starts, and to enter a first closed state (a state in which distribution to the first V winning port 2007 is possible) in which the second spurt opening 2541 is closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms), and then to enter an open state in which the second spurt opening 2541 is opened (a state in which distribution to the lottery role 2550 is possible) after a predetermined time (23006 ms) has passed, and then to enter a second closed state for a time longer than the first open state (13446 ms), and then to enter an open state.

The first closing state of this distribution piece 2543 ends in the middle of the first opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "perfect hit", and the distribution piece 2543 becomes open. Also, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution piece 2543 starts in the middle of the second opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third hit", and after the second opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 becomes closed, the distribution piece 2543 changes from closed to open. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution piece 2543 is executed only in the "third hit", and the second closing state of the distribution piece 2543 is not executed in the "first hit" or "second hit".

For this reason, in the "first role hit", the opening and closing of the role winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short time, so it is unlikely that game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 by "hitting to the right" will be accepted by the role winning port 2006. In addition, the first opening state of the role winning port 2006 in the "second role hit" and "third role hit" is also short, so it is unlikely that game ball B will be accepted by the role winning port 2006. In addition, the time during which the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2533 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the device winning port 2006 in the "perfect hit" is shorter than the time during which the device winning port 2006 is first open, so the possibility that the game ball B received in the device winning port 2006 during the first open state of the device winning port 2006 will be stored in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 is even lower. And since the time when the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2533 ends and the first closed state of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 end is the same, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2533a during the first storage state of the distribution rotor 2533 will not be distributed to the first V winning port 2007 side.

On the other hand, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize winning" and "third prize winning" takes a long time, so there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be received by the prize winning port 2006 through the first guide passage 2521. At this time, the distribution rotor 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 opens, and then becomes in a state where it cannot be accommodated after the prize winning port 2006 changes from an open state to a closed state. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received by the prize winning port 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533.

Thus, in this example, in addition to the low probability of game ball B being accepted by the device winning port 2006 in the first opening state of the device winning port 2006 in the "second device winning" and "third device winning", the even lower probability of game ball B accepted by the device winning port 2006 being accommodated in the storage section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 when the device winning port 2006 is in the first opening state, the distribution rotor 2533 rotates counterclockwise at the same time as the execution of the device winning game state begins to play, so that the storage section 2533a is facing upward and is in a storage-capable state, and after facing the storage section 2533a upward for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms), it rotates clockwise and so that the storage section 2533a is facing rightward and is in an unstorable state. In other words, immediately after the start of the game state where a per-game feature is played, the distribution rotor 2533 is unlikely to distribute game ball B to the chance hole 2531 side, but the distribution rotor 2533 performs an operation to distribute game ball B to the chance hole 2531 side, thereby indicating the distribution operation by the distribution rotor 2533 in advance.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the per-game play state, the distribution rotor 2533 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the chance port 2531 side, but at the same time as the start of the per-game play state, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is pushed forward to close the second spurt port 2541, making it possible to distribute to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it retreats and opens the second spurt port 2541, making it possible to distribute to the lottery device 2550. In other words, immediately after the start of the per-game play state, the distribution piece 2543 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, but the distribution piece 2543 executes the operation of distributing the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, and the distribution operation by the distribution piece 2543 is shown in advance.

In this example, the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 operate simultaneously with the start of the per-game play state, that is, during the performance of the performance at the start of the per-game play state (the opening performance of the per-game play state, in which an explanation of the game in the per-game play state, such as "aim for the per-game win hole 2006," is given), and the per-game win hole 2006 opens for the first time after the operation of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543. This reduces the possibility of the distribution rotor 2533 distributing game ball B to the chance hole 2531 side and the distribution piece 2543 distributing game ball B to the second spurt hole 2541 side. In addition, if there is no possibility or is extremely low possibility that the distribution rotor 2533 will distribute the game ball B to the chance hole 2531 side and that the distribution piece 2543 will distribute the game ball B to the second spurt hole 2541 side, the prize winning hole 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the operation of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543.

Also, only one of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the multiple movable parts (distribution rotor 2533, distribution piece 2543) that distribute the game ball B that has entered the role winning port 2006 may be operated in advance to perform the distribution operation, and the other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution piece 2543 that is more likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning port (in this example, the first V winning port 2007) by operating (high V winning expectation) may not be operated in advance, and only the distribution rotor 2533 that is less likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning port (in this example, the second V winning port 2008) than the distribution piece 2543 (low V winning expectation) may be operated in advance. As a result, while some of the allocation destinations of the game ball B that enters the bonus prize opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other allocation destinations can remain unknown. When the other allocation destinations are revealed, the player can be surprised by the increased number of allocation destinations, which can heighten anticipation, and the player can be drawn to the game ball B that is being allocated and enjoy its movement, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the presence of the moving part (distribution piece 2543) with a high V winning expectation is concealed by not operating it in advance, leading the player to believe that game ball B will enter the lottery device 2550, and when the "third role hit" is executed, the moving part (distribution piece 2543) with a high V winning expectation operates to cause game ball B to enter the V winning hole (first V winning hole 2007 in this example), providing an element of surprise, and game ball B entering an unexpected allocation destination can increase interest in the game. In addition, the allocation to the first V winning hole 2007 side is concealed, leading the player to believe that there are only two allocation destinations, the first slack hole 2532 side and the lottery device 2550 side, so that the player will not be disappointed even if the "second role hit" with a lower V winning expectation than the "third role hit" is executed and game ball B is allocated to the lottery device 2550 side.

In this example, the distribution rotor 2533 is arranged in a manner that is easily visible to the player, whereas the distribution piece 2543 is flat and moves back and forth on the game board 5, and has a small area on the front side, so that its operation is difficult to notice. Furthermore, the passage on the side of the first V winning hole 2007, which can be entered by the distribution piece 2543 protruding forward, is difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, when the "third role hit" occurs, the distribution piece 2543 operates and the behavior of the game ball B when it enters the first V winning hole 2007 is difficult to notice, and the player can be given the sensation that a V win has suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot has been executed, without being made aware that the game ball B has entered the first V winning hole 2007.

Also, by operating the distribution rotor 2533 in advance during the opening performance of the hit game state, the player can easily recognize the destination of the shot, i.e., the position to aim for during the hit game state, by the operation of the distribution rotor 2533 in addition to the instructions in the opening performance, such as "aim for the hit game winning hole 2006."

When the "hit" is drawn as described above and the reel winning port 2006 is opened, game ball B that has flowed down the first guide passage 2521 is received by the reel winning port 2006, is detected by the reel winning port sensor 2501, and is then sent to the first distribution device 2530. When game ball B is detected by the reel winning port sensor 2501, a bonus is awarded, such as adding a specified number of balls to the player's possession.

In the "second feature hit", when the feature winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is open, so when the distribution rotor 2533 rotates from a storage state to an unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2533a flows down through the chance port 2531 to the second distribution device 2540 side, flows from the second spurt port 2541 through the lottery guide passage 2545, is detected by the lottery feature entry sensor 2546, and is sent to the lottery feature 2550.

In the lottery device 2550, the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position is in the loop position. For example, the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position in response to the opening of the second suction port 2541 due to the retreat of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540. Then, the game ball B sent from the second distribution device 2540 to the lottery device 2550 rolls leftward on the guide path 2551 and is sent to the striking section 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557 in the loop position. Then, the game ball B sent to the striking section 2553 is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 provided at the central rear end of the table 2555 by the impact of the striking piece 2560 rotating at high speed, and is released from the oscillating gutter 2554 onto the table 2555.

The game ball B released onto the table 2555 rolls forward due to its inclination, and either enters the second V winning port 2008 located at the front center of the table 2555, or is released forward (guideway 2551) from the front edge of the table 2555. If the distribution bridge 2557 is still in the loop position when the game ball B is released forward from the front edge of the table 2555, the game ball B will pass through the distribution bridge 2557 and be supplied to the striking section 2553. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the game ball B loops around the striking section 2553, the oscillating gutter 2554, the table 2555, and the guideway 2551 in that order until it is received by the second V winning port 2008.

Then, the lottery for a V winning at the lottery device 2550 ends when either game ball B is received by the second V winning port 2008, or game ball B is received by the losing port 2009, which is opened when the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in a non-loop position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

The game ball B received in the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2503 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the lower circulating ball path unit 600 via the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the losing port 2009 is detected by the losing port sensor 2504 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the lower circulating ball path unit 600 via the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning port sensor 2503, a special privilege is given in which the large winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In the "third role hit", when the role winning port 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the closed state, so when the distribution rotor 2533 rotates from the storage state to the non-storage state, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2533a passes through the chance port 2531 and abuts against the upper surface of the distribution piece 2543 in the closed state of the second distribution device 2540, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted by) the first V winning port 2007. After being detected by the first V winning port sensor 2502, the game ball B that entered the first V winning port 2007 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below via the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. When the first V winning hole sensor 2502 detects game ball B, a special bonus is awarded in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In this embodiment, in the lottery for the first special pattern and the second special pattern in which the big prize winning port 2005 and the accessory prize winning port 2006 open and close to create a favorable game state in which the player has an advantage, the first start port 2003 is always open to receive the game ball B, whereas the second start port 2004 is only able to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern when the normal lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal prize winning port 2002 is a "normal win". This makes it more likely that the first start port 2003 will receive the game ball B than the second start port 2004.

For this reason, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be accepted by the first starting opening 2003. By showing the movement of game ball B being guided by multiple obstacle pins, the player can enjoy playing the pachinko machine 1 with game ball B as intended, while also heightening the player's sense of anticipation for game ball B being accepted by the first starting opening 2003.

When game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2003 and a "win" (for example, a "small win", "medium win", "big win", "gift win", etc.) is selected as the lottery result for the first special pattern, the large prize opening 2005 or the gift winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, allowing the player to enjoy hitting game ball B aimed at the right side of the center gift winning opening 2500 (so-called "right hit") so that game ball B can be accepted into the large prize opening 2005 or the gift winning opening 2006, and increasing the player's anticipation of game ball B being accepted into the large prize opening 2005 or the gift winning opening 2006.

When hitting the game ball B to the right of the center device 2500, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center device 2500, and since it has a variety of flow paths, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired flow path, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B.

In addition, a normal winning hole 2002 is provided on the right side of the center device 2500, and a normal lottery is held in which the second starting hole 2004 is opened when game ball B is received by the normal winning hole 2002. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether game ball B shot into the right side passes through the normal winning hole 2002 or not, and can also enjoy whether game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004 when the second starting hole 2004 becomes open. At this time, since the normal winning hole 2002 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, the player can enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B aimed at the first guide passage 2521.

Furthermore, in the role winning port 2006, one game ball B that is received and selected by the first allocation device 2530 is allocated to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second spurt port 2541 by the second allocation device 2540, so that the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether the game ball B is allocated to the first V winning port 2007 or not. And even if the game ball B is allocated to the second spurt port 2541 by the second allocation device 2540, the game ball B is supplied to the lottery role 2550 that is conspicuously provided in the lower center of the center role 2500, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that the game ball B will be accepted by the second V winning port 2008 in the lottery role 2550. Thereafter, the player can be excited again depending on whether or not the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 of the lottery device 2550 is received by the second V winning port 2008, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

When game ball B is received by the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, or when game ball B is received by the first starting hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 and a "big win" is drawn as the first and second special symbols, the large winning hole 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, providing an opportunity for many game balls B to be added to the number of balls held. In order to allow game ball B to be received by the large winning hole 2005 that is open and closed, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B toward the right side of the center device 2500, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

[8-10. Overall configuration of the rear unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see Figure 93) that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a regular winning opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received by the regular winning opening 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the regular winning opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guide unit 3100.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, a lock slider 3020 that is slidable left and right on the rear wall of the rear box 3010 for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a rear board unit 3040 that is hingedly attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010.

The rear board unit 3040 comprises a board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and thin from front to back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed within the board box 3041. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a on the outer edge of the part extending up and down in the L shape that are rotatably supported by the shaft support part 3010f of the rear box 3010. The board box 3041 also has a locking claw 3041b at the tip of the part extending left and right in the L shape that locks into the locking part 3010g of the rear box 3010.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a rear ball guide unit 3100 provided at the bottom near the front end of the rear box 3010 and through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, a rear decoration unit 3200 provided behind the rear ball guide unit 3100 within the rear box 3010, a rear front performance unit 3300 provided to the left and above the rear ball guide unit 3100 near the front end within the rear box 3010, and a rear rear performance unit 3400 provided behind the rear front performance unit 3300 within the rear box 3010.

The back ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to the front of the back decoration unit 3200. The back decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown). The left end of the back front performance unit 3300 is attached near the front end of the back box 3010, and the right end is attached to the front of the right end of the back rear performance unit 3400. The upper part of the back rear performance unit 3400 is attached to the front of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown), and the lower part is attached to the back decoration unit 3200.

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front performance unit 3300, and the back rear performance unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 can show the player predetermined moving and light-emitting effects depending on the progress of the game.

[8-10a. Back box]
Next, the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The rear box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the presentation unit is attached inside the box-like shape, while the presentation display device 1600 and the rear board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. The rear box 3010 is formed transparent. This allows the inside to be seen from the outside even when assembled to the game board 5.

The rear box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a mounting surface 3010b provided at the bottom of the opening 3010a on which the performance display device 1600 is placed, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the top of the opening 3010a, and a locking mechanism 3010d provided below near the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction and to which a lock slider 3020 is attached so that it can slide left and right.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed in a rectangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the left-right direction. The opening 3010a is also provided in a position that is offset (eccentric) upward from the center of the rear box 3010 in the up-down direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (a 19-inch liquid crystal display device).

The upper fixed piece 1611 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached is inserted from below into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the rear box 3010. In addition, the lower fixed piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached can be inserted from behind into the lock mechanism part 3010d of the rear box 3010 with the lock slider 3020 slid to the left in rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 inserted into the lock mechanism part 3010d, sliding the lock slider 3020 to the right in rear view prevents the lower fixed piece 1612 from moving backwards by the lock slider 3020, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (performance display device 1600) can be attached.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixed piece 3010e that extends outward from the front end. This fixed piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting against the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

Furthermore, the rear box 3010 is provided with a pair of pivot supports 3010f on the rear surface that can rotatably support the shaft 3041a of the rear substrate unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a locking portion 3010g that is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the pair of pivot supports 3010f and that locks the locking claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040.

The rear box 3010 has a pair of pivot supports 3010f and a locking portion 3010g, allowing the rear board unit 3040 to be attached to the rear side across the opening 3010a (the liquid crystal spacer 1610 and the performance display device 1600). When assembled to the game board 5, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends vertically is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 when viewed from the rear. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear board unit 3040 that extends horizontally is located below the peripheral control unit 1500.

When the rear box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the rear box 3010 can be opened by releasing the locking claw 3041b of the rear board unit 3040 that is locked to the locking portion 3010g and rotating the locking claw 3041b so that it moves rearward around the axis portion 3041a, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610, i.e., the performance display device 1600, can be attached and detached without removing the rear board unit 3040 from the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 also has multiple functional hole sections, each consisting of a set of two through holes aligned vertically or horizontally, provided on the surface facing the front-to-rear direction excluding the fixed piece section 3010e, and a functional surface section facing the front-to-rear direction that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole sections have the same diameter. The functional hole sections are intended for attaching the performance unit to the rear box 3010 directly or via an attachment supporter.

[8-10b. Back ball guidance unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 82 etc. The back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010, and is attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200. The back ball guiding unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 that can detect unauthorized magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

The back ball guiding unit 3100 can receive the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, the first starting port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first V winning port 2007, the second V winning port 2008, the losing port 2009, and the first missing port 2532 in the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guide it to the center in the left-right direction, and then discharge it to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the lower circulation ball path unit 600. The back ball guiding unit 3100 can receive the game ball B received in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 in the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guide it to the center in the left-right direction, and then discharge it to the out ball receiving port 600a of the lower circulation ball path unit 600.

[8-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the rear decoration unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The rear decoration unit 3200 is provided behind the rear ball guiding unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010, and is attached to the front of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter. A vibration sensor 1040 is attached to the rear decoration unit 3200. The rear ball guiding unit 3100 is attached to the front of this rear decoration unit 3200.

When assembled to the game board 5, the rear decoration unit 3200 comprises a rear bottom left decorative body 3210 and a rear bottom right decorative body 3220 that decorate the rear of the outer left and right sides of the lottery device 2550 in the center device 2500, and a rear bottom left decorative board and a rear bottom right decorative board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear bottom left decorative body 3210 and the rear bottom right decorative body 3220, respectively.

The lower left decorative body 3210 and the lower right decorative body 3220 are translucent, and on their respective upper surfaces are formed multiple projections and recesses that resemble a miniature town. The lower left decorative board and the lower right decorative board are provided below the lower left decorative body 3210 and the lower right decorative body 3220, respectively, and multiple LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted on their upper surfaces. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative board and the lower right decorative board, the lower left decorative body 3210 and the lower right decorative body 3220 can be illuminated and decorated.

[8-10d. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the back front performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 78 to 80 and 82. The back front performance unit 3300 is provided to the left and above the back ball guide unit 3100 near the front end of the back box 3010, with its left end attached near the front end of the back box 3010 and its right end attached to the right end side of the back rear performance unit 3400.

The back-front performance unit 3300 comprises a back-front left decorative body 3301 that is a long, flat plate-like body located on the left end side, a back-front ascent decorative body unit 3310 that is arranged to the right of the back-front left decorative body 3301 and can be raised and lowered, and a back-front ascent mechanism 3350 for raising and lowering the back-front ascent decorative body unit 3310.

The back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front performance unit 3300 is provided with a magnetic sensor 1030 located downward from the center in the vertical direction. The back-front left decorative body 3301 extends vertically at a length approximately equal to the total height inside the back box 3010, and is translucent. Behind the back-front left decorative body 3301 is provided a back-front left decorative board (not shown) with multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on this back-front left decorative board, the back-front left decorative body can be illuminated and decorated.

The back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is formed long in the left-right direction. The back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is equipped with a transparent flat back-front lifting base 3311 that is long in the left-right direction, a back-front central decorative body 3320 that is attached to the front center of the back-front lifting base 3311 and has a performance count display unit 3005, a back-front central left decorative body 3330 that is attached to the left of the back-front central decorative body 3320 on the front of the back-front lifting base 3311, and a back-front central right decorative body 3340 that is attached to the right of the back-front central decorative body 3320 on the front of the back-front lifting base 3311.

The back front central decorative body 3320 comprises a back front central decorative part 3321 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, a back front central decorative board (not shown) provided behind the back front central decorative part 3321 and having multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a back front central base 3323 which supports the back front central decorative board and the back front central decorative part 3321 from the rear and is attached to the back front lift base 3311. The back front central decorative part 3321 has a portion which three-dimensionally mimics a pine tree design, and this portion is provided with a performance count display part 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays. The performance count display part 3005 uses some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front central decorative board.

The back-front middle left decorative body 3330 comprises a back-front middle left decorative part 3331 formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a specified character and having translucency, a back-front middle left decorative board (not shown) provided behind the back-front middle left decorative part 3331 and having multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a back-front middle left base 3333 which supports the back-front middle left decorative board and the back-front middle left decorative part 3331 from behind and is attached to the back-front lift base 3311. The back-front middle left decorative body 3330 can illuminate and decorate the back-front middle left decorative part 3331 by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the back-front middle left decorative board.

The back-front middle right decorative body 3340 has a back-front middle right decorative part 3341 which is formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a specified character and has translucency, a back-front middle right decorative board (not shown) which is provided behind the back-front middle right decorative part 3341 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a back-front middle right base 3343 which supports the back-front middle right decorative board and the back-front middle right decorative part 3341 from behind and is attached to the back-front lift base 3311. The back-front middle right decorative body 3340 can illuminate and decorate the back-front middle right decorative part 3341 by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the back-front middle right decorative board.

The back-front lifting mechanism 3350 is provided with a back-front left lifting rail (not shown) that is provided behind the back-front left decorative body 3301 and supports the left end side of the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 so that it can be raised and lowered, a back-front right lifting rail 3352 that supports the right end side of the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a back-front lifting drive unit (not shown) that is provided behind the back-front left decorative body 3301 and lifts and lowers the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310. The back-front lifting mechanism 3350 also has a drop solenoid for dropping the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 from the elevated standby position, and a back-front lifting drive motor that raises the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 from the performance position where it has dropped downward to the standby position above, although not shown.

When assembled to the game board 5, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 of the rear-front performance unit 3300 is arranged so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center gimmick 2500. In the normal state, the rear-front performance unit 3300 is positioned in a standby position, which is the upper end of its movement, and is prevented from falling downward by the engagement of a locking claw. In the normal state, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is positioned near the upper end of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, as shown in Figure 78, etc.

In addition, when the rear-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 of the rear-front performance unit 3300 is in the standby position, which is the normal state, the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body unit of the rear-rear performance unit 3400 is located in a retracted position behind it, making the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 invisible from the front.

When the rear front performance unit 3300 is in the normal state, the rear front lifting drive motor moves the lifting slider to the lower end, allowing the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 to fall from the standby position to the lower performance position. Then, when the fall solenoid releases the locking claw from this state, the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 falls freely toward the standby position. When the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, it is located above the lottery device 2550 of the center device 2500 and slightly below the vertical center of the play area 5a.

When the rear-front rising decoration unit 3310 falls and reaches the performance position, the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 in the retreated position of the rear-rear performance unit 3400 located at the rear becomes visible from the front. This can surprise the player and make them think that something good is about to happen (that an opportunity has arrived).

In addition, a damper is provided at the bottom of the back-front lifting mechanism 3350 to absorb or mitigate the impact caused by the falling back-front lifting decorative unit 3310.

The rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 that has fallen to the performance position rises to an upper standby position as the lifting slider moves upwards due to the rear-front lifting drive motor, and returns to the standby position as the locking claws automatically engage.

This back front performance unit 3300 has a performance count display section 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays on the back front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (back front central decorative body 3320), so that by executing a countdown display in which the numbers displayed on the performance count display section 3005 decrease, the player can see a countdown performance in which the back front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 falls. Note that in the countdown performance, the back rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 may be moved to a lower appearance position without dropping the back front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310, or the back front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 may be dropped and the back rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 may be moved to a lower appearance position.

[8-10e. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear performance unit 3400 in the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 82 and 83. The rear performance unit 3400 is provided behind the front rear performance unit 3300 in the rear box 3010, with the upper part attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter and the lower part attached to the rear decorative unit 3200. The rear performance unit 3400 is equipped with a rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 that is long from side to side, and a rear rear lifting mechanism 3450 for lifting and lowering the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410.

The rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 in the rear-rear performance unit 3400 includes a rear-rear lifting decoration part 3411 that is long in the left and right directions and has translucency, a rear-rear lifting decoration board (not shown) that is provided behind the rear-rear lifting decoration part 3411 and has multiple LEDs mounted thereon, and a rear-rear lifting base (not shown) that supports the rear-rear lifting decoration board and the rear-rear lifting decoration part from the rear and is lifted and lowered by the rear-rear lifting mechanism 3450. The rear-rear lifting decoration part 3411 has a logo part 3411a that is applied over its entire length in the left and right direction and is made up of a predetermined logo, and a character part 3411b that is provided in relief above the logo part 3411a and has multiple characters different from the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 lined up on the left and right. The rear-rear lifting decoration part 3411 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs of the rear-rear lifting decoration board.

The rear lifting mechanism 3450 in the rear performance unit 3400 comprises a U-shaped rear base 3451 that opens downwards, a translucent flat rear fixed decorative part 3452 that is provided on the front of the upper edge of the rear base 3451, and a rear fixed decorative board 3453 that is provided between the rear fixed decorative part 3452 and the rear base 3451 and has multiple LEDs mounted on it. The rear fixed decorative part 3452 is formed to be approximately the same length in the left-right direction as the rear lifting decorative body 3410, and has a predetermined pattern applied to its front. The rear fixed decorative part 3452 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the rear fixed decorative board 3453.

The rear-rear lifting mechanism 3450, although not shown in the figure, has a rear-rear left rail provided on the left side of the rear-rear base 3451 and supporting the left end side of the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 so that it can be raised and lowered, a rear-rear right rail provided on the right side of the rear-rear base 3451 and supporting the right end side of the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a rear-rear lifting drive unit provided on the left side of the rear-rear base for raising and lowering the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410.

The rear-rear lifting drive unit has a rear-rear lifting drive motor, and by driving the rear-rear lifting drive motor, the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 can be raised and lowered between a retracted position, which is the upper end of its movement, and an emergent position, which is the lower end of its movement, and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 can be stopped at any position between the retracted position and the emergent position.

In the normal state, the rear-rear performance unit 3400 has the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 in a retracted position, which is the upper end of its movement. In this state, the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 is located in front of the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 of the rear-rear lifting mechanism 3450. Therefore, the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 is hidden from view from the front by the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 in the retracted position.

When assembled on the game board 5, this rear performance unit 3400 is located behind the front performance unit 3300, so in the normal state, the front-rear lifting decoration unit 3310, which is the waiting position of the front-rear performance unit 3300, is located in front of the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410, and is hidden by the front-rear lifting decoration unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

When the rear-rear performance unit 3400 moves the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 from its normal state to the appearance position, which is the lower end of its movement, by driving the rear-rear lifting drive motor of the rear-rear lifting mechanism 3450, it is positioned lower than the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 in the standby position and slightly above the vertical center of the game area 5a. This makes the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 visible to the player.

Even when the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position, when the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is in the standby position, the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 cannot be seen from the front because the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is located in front of the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452. Therefore, when the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved downward (appearance position) from the retracted position and the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the lower performance position, the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 can be seen from the front for the first time. This gives a sense of premium to the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 being visible.

When the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 is moved to the downward appearance position and the rear-front rising decoration unit 3310 is dropped to its performance position, the rear-front rising decoration unit 3310 is positioned in front of the logo section 3411a in the rear-rear rising decoration part 3411 of the rear-rear rising decoration 3410, so that the logo section 3411a is hidden and the character section 3411b, which has multiple characters lined up, faces forward from above the rear-front rising decoration unit 3310 (see Figure 92).

When the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 has been moved to the appearance position, the rear-rear lifting drive motor of the rear-rear lifting mechanism 3450 can be reversed to raise the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 and return it to the retracted position.

[8-11. Game board effects]
Next, the performance by the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 89 to 92. Figure 89 is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. Figure 90 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back front rising decoration unit of the back front performance unit is dropped from the standby position to the performance position from the normal state. Figure 91 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back rear rising decoration of the back rear performance unit is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position from the normal state. Figure 92 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back front rising decoration unit of the back front performance unit is dropped from the standby position to the performance position and the back rear rising decoration of the back rear performance unit is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position from the retreat position from the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 89, the game board 5 of this embodiment is mainly arranged so that the rear unit 3000 and the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which are provided at the rear, can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500. This game board 5 is arranged so that the lottery role 2550 and the rear lower left decoration 3210 and the rear lower right decoration 3220 of the rear decoration unit 3200 provided on the left and right sides of the lottery role 2550 are always visible near the bottom edge through the frame of the center role 2500, and the rear front left decoration 3301 of the rear front performance unit 3300 is always visible near the left edge within the frame of the center role 2500.

In the normal state of the game board 5, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 of the back front performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 has moved to the waiting position, which is the upper end of its movement, and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 of the back rear performance unit 3400 has moved to the retracted position, which is the upper end of its movement. The back front lifting decoration unit 3310 that has moved to the standby position is visible facing forward near the upper edge within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. The back rear lifting decoration 3410 that has moved to the retracted position is located behind the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 at the same height as the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 in the standby position, and is hidden by the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

In addition, in the normal state, the rear-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 is located in a retracted position in front of the rear-rear fixed decorative part 3452 of the rear-rear performance unit 3400, and further in front of that is the front-rear ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 in a standby position, which hides them and makes them invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has moved to an upper waiting position, so that the performance count display section 3005 provided on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (rear front central decorative body 3320) is located above the center of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and appears prominent to the player without interfering with the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600.

The game board 5 of this embodiment can execute the performance shown in FIG. 90 using the back front performance unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. In this performance, in the normal state in which the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 moves to the upper standby position, the back front lifting mechanism 3350 moves the lifting slider to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor, and then the locking claw is released by the drop solenoid, and the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 is allowed to fall freely to the performance position. When the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 falls to the performance position, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 is located above the lottery device 2550 of the center device 2500 and slightly lower than the vertical center of the game area 5a, and is in a state in which the vicinity of the vertical center of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 is hidden. In addition, when the back-front rising and lowering decoration unit 3310 falls to the performance position, the back-rear rising and lowering decoration 3410 in the retreated position of the back-rear performance unit 3400 becomes visible near the upper edge within the frame of the center gimmick 2500. As a result, the back-front rising and lowering decoration unit 3310 falls freely, surprising the player and making the player think that something good is about to happen (that an opportunity has arrived).

Next, the game board 5 can execute a performance as shown in FIG. 91 using the back rear performance unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. In this performance, in the normal state where the back rear lifting decoration 3410 is moved to the upper retracted position, the back rear lifting drive motor of the back rear lifting mechanism 3450 moves the back rear lifting decoration 3410 to the lower moving end to the appearance position state. As a result, the back rear lifting decoration 3410, which was invisible due to the back front lifting decoration unit 3310, becomes visible, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, increasing the expectation for the game. In addition, when the back rear lifting decoration 3410 moves to the appearance position, it is located approximately in the center in the vertical direction of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, so the back rear lifting decoration 3410 can divide the display screen into upper and lower parts, and the player can be shown a performance in which the performance image is physically divided into upper and lower parts.

In addition, as a performance using the rear-end performance unit 3400, the rear-end ascent and descent decorative body 3410 can be moved to any height between the retracted position and the emergent position by the rear-end ascent and descent drive motor, so that as a preview performance, the rear-end ascent and descent decorative body 3410 may be moved slightly downward from the retracted position or vibrated up and down.

Then, the game board 5 can execute the performance as shown in FIG. 92 using both the back front performance unit 3300 and the back rear performance unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. In this performance, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the performance position, and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 is moved downward from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 are in a state in which they cover the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which can give a strong impact to the player, and the back rear fixed decoration part 3452 located above the display screen, which was not visible until now, becomes visible, which can give the player a sense of premium and increase the player's sense of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous.

In this performance, the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 and the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 may be moved downward at the same time, or the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 may be dropped first and then the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 may be moved downward, or the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 may be moved downward first and then the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 may be dropped.

The game board 5 also has a performance count display unit 3005 that is always visible from the front of the back unit 3000, so that a performance can be executed using the performance count display unit 3005. For example, a countdown display that decreases the numbers displayed on the performance count display unit 3005 moment by moment can be used to count down the timing when the back front rising decoration unit 3310 falls or the back rear rising decoration 3410 moves downward. Or, for example, the detection of game ball B by the lottery ball entry sensor 2546 can be used to count down the time when game ball B can no longer loop in the lottery device 2550.

The effect count display unit 3005 may also be configured to display (suggest) as a number the expectation level for the special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004. Alternatively, since the effect count display unit 3005 has four seven-segment displays, the effect pattern may be formed by combining the illumination of each segment, and the effect pattern may be displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, so that the expectation level is suggested by the stopped-displayed effect pattern.

9. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 63 and Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. Note that Fig. 93 omits some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the frame control board 740.

As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a frame control board 740 attached to the main body frame 4, with each being responsible for its own control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during play based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511.

[9-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU, which is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying setting values and errors, and a base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also includes a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU also has built-in watchdog timers (hereafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU as a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) to identify the individual unit. Once this ID code is assigned, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, as it is stored in the non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU is capable of retrieving the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and referencing it.

The main control MPU also has a built-in circuit that resets the main control MPU by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a specified register of the main control MPU, and if the register changes to an inconsistent content, it resets the main control MPU as it has been affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by controlling it with a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forced to reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing described below, and it will again execute the main control side power on processing described below. In this case, since the main control side power off processing is not executed, as described below, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU does not output a reset signal to the frame control board 740, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) is restarted, and the frame control board 740 remains in an activated state.

The main control MPU also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to gaming. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and is configured so that the predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as the initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU), and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery selection, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time when it obtains a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from the various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2003, the second start port sensor 2401 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, the general prize port sensor 3001 detects the game ball B received in the general prize port 2001, the normal prize port sensor 3002 detects the game ball B received in the normal prize port 2002, the large prize port sensor 2402 detects the game ball B received in the large prize port 2005, the special prize port sensor 2501 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2006, the first V prize port sensor 2007 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2008, the first V prize port sensor 2009 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2009, the first V prize port sensor 2010 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2001, the first V prize port sensor 2011 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2002, the first V prize port sensor 2012 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2003, the first V prize port sensor 2013 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2004, the first V prize port sensor 2014 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2005, the special prize port sensor 2501 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2006, the first V prize port sensor 2015 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2007, the first V prize port sensor 2016 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2008, the first V prize port sensor 2017 detects the game ball B received in the special prize port 2009, the first V prize port sensor 2020 detects the game ball B received in the Detection signals from the first V winning port sensor 2502 that detects the game ball B that has been inserted, the second V winning port sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the second V winning port 2008, the losing port sensor 2504 that detects the game ball B that has been accepted into the losing port 2009, the out ball sensor 605 that detects the game ball B that has been discharged from the game board 5, the safe ball sensor 606, the magnetic sensor 1030 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor 1040 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door open switch 507 and the detection signal from the frame open switch 508 are input to the main control board 1310 via the frame control board 740, and are then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out ball sensor 605, the first start opening sensor 2101, and the second start opening sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 3002, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2501, the first V winning opening sensor 2502, the second V winning opening sensor 2503, the losing opening sensor 2504, the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the main control solenoid drive circuit outputs respective drive signals to the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, role winning port solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, striking piece drive motor 2561, gutter oscillation drive motor 2564, and oscillation piece solenoid 2565 via the panel relay board, i.e. indirectly, and outputs respective drive signals from the output terminal of the specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern display, normal hold indicator, first special pattern display, first special hold number display, second special pattern display, second special hold number display, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 without going through other boards, i.e. directly. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU also outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the specified output port, thereby outputting a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp on the setting change board.

The main control MPU outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the frame control board 740 by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the specified output port, outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the frame control board 740 by outputting a launch permission signal from the output terminal of the specified output port. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. Note that the logic of the launch permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the launch permission logic as an initial value (default) from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started.

In this embodiment, the first start hole sensor 2101, the second start hole sensor 2401, the normal winning hole sensor 3002, the large winning hole sensor 2402, the accessory winning hole sensor 2501, the first V winning hole sensor 2502, the second V winning hole sensor 2503, the miss hole sensor 2504, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the normal winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF operation mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters the first start hole 2003, the second start hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2002, so the first start hole sensor 2101, the second start hole sensor 2401, and the normal winning hole sensor 3002 also frequently detect game ball B. For this reason, the first start port sensor 2101, the second start port sensor 2401, and the normal winning port sensor 3002 use proximity switches that are highly durable and have a long lifespan.

In addition, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 and the accessory prize opening 2006 are opened and game ball B enters the opening frequently, so that the large prize opening sensor 2402 and the accessory prize opening sensor 2501 also frequently detect game ball B. For this reason, the large prize opening sensor 2402 and the accessory prize opening sensor 2501 also use a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life. In addition, since the game ball B shot into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the out opening 2020 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the out ball sensor 605 also frequently detects game ball B. For this reason, the out ball sensor 605 also uses a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, into which game ball B does not enter frequently, does not frequently detect the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch, which has a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch, is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001. Note that a highly durable, long-lifespan proximity switch may be used regardless of whether or not game ball B frequently enters the general winning hole 2001.

The main control MPU also transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the granting of bonuses to the frame control board 740, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740. Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740, which will be described in detail later, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 750 of the frame board unit 730, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 750, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the frame control board 740.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 750, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the frame control board 740, etc.

[9-2. Frame control board]
The frame control board 740, which controls the number of game balls B held by a player, is equipped with a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in RAM, a ball removal switch 742 used to remove the enclosed game ball B from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and a ball number memory/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in RAM, etc. and clearing the display on the ball number display section 140 of the door frame 3.

[9-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 93, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[9-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, although detailed illustration is omitted, is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated onto a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM which stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC which produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM which stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 in order to output a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands, and transmits game board side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to output a drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various performance units provided on the game board 5, and transmits game board side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5. the door side drive light emission data, which is composed of door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a vibrator or the like provided on the door frame 3 and door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side; control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512; and a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 of the performance operation unit 250 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker 503 of the main frame 4, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, so that music and sound effects corresponding to various performances are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending audio signals (e.g., 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 503 for low tones on the main frame 4, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the performance display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be sent per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing command, game board side light flashing command, movable body drive command, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[9-3b. Performance display control unit]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, the display control ROM stores multiple items such as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands). The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that specifies the screen configuration, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that specifies the order in which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data specifies the order in which the various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. When the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the display device 1600 of this. The VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" is a method in which one line's worth of drawing data that draws the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and this affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Now, to explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image that is displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their positions on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "order of sprite overlapping") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas of 64 pixels each. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 x 3. Even larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified arbitrarily for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When the performance display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600. When the output of one line is completed, the performance display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line in a main scan from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 based on the drawing data for the next line.

[10. Game Contents]
The game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 160 arranged in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, and the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is shot into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and a game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the shooting strength. The shooting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 160, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the ball can be shot, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously in one minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B hits the obstacle nails, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B hits it is installed above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

When a game ball B is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it flows on the left side of the center device 2500, that is, between the inner rail 1002 and the center device 2500, while abutting against multiple obstacle nails. On the left side of the center device 2500, the entrance to the warp passage 2512 is always open so that it can receive the game ball B.

The game ball B that enters the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center device 2500, rolls left and right on the stage 2513, and is released from either the central release section 2513a or the side release section 2513b so as to flow back into the game area 5a. The central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting hole 2003 in the left and right center of the game area 5a, so the game ball B released from the central release section 2513a is accepted by the first starting hole 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a may be accepted by the first starting hole 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2003, a predetermined number (e.g., 3) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a first special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "hit with special feature," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the drawn first special symbol is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the lottery for the drawn first special symbol is then suggested to the player over a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called the special change time).

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2003 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2003 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special variable time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each first starting port 2003, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2003. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

If the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp passage 2512, it may be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 or obstacle nails of the upper left side unit 2300, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or sub-out opening 2021 of the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the game ball B that is shot into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest part of the inflow restriction part 2511c of the center frame 2511 in the center role 2500, it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500. The game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the role winning port door 2515 that closes the role winning port 2006 on the way, and is released above (directly above) the normal winning port unit 2600. On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the second guide passage 2522 is released above the normal winning port 2002 to the left. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the role winning port 2006.

When the result of the lottery for the special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B in first start opening 2003 or second start opening 2004 is a "small win" or "game win", the special winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to become ready to receive game ball B. When game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

The game ball B received in the special prize winning port 2006 is sent to the first distribution device 2530, and is distributed by the distribution rotor 2533 to either the chance port 2531 or the first spurt port 2532. The game ball B distributed to the first spurt port 2532 is discharged. The game ball B distributed to the chance port 2531 is sent to the second distribution device 2540. The game ball B sent to the second distribution device 2540 is distributed to either the first V prize winning port 2007 or the second spurt port 2541. When the game ball B is received in the first V prize winning port 2007 by the distribution of the second distribution device 2540, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big prize winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern.

When the game ball B is allocated to the second slot 2541 by the second allocation device 2540, it is sent to the lottery device 2550. The game ball B sent to the lottery device 2550 loops between the table 2555 on which the second V winning slot 2008 is provided and the striking section 2553 that supplies the game ball B to the table 2555 while the allocation bridge 2557 of the allocation section 2552 is moving to the loop position. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second V winning slot 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning slot 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed and the distribution bridge 2557 has moved from the loop position to the non-loop position and the losing port 2009 has been opened, the game ball B that was not accepted into the second V winning port 2008 of the table 2555 is accepted into the losing port 2009. The game ball B that has been accepted into the losing port 2009 is discharged.

The normal winning port 2002, which is located downstream of the guide passage group 2520, is located directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, so that a game ball B that has flowed through the first guide passage 2521 is more likely to be accepted by the normal winning port 2002 than a game ball B that has flowed through the second guide passage 2522. Game balls B that are not accepted by the normal winning port 2002 flow down to the attacca unit 2400.

When a game ball B is received into this normal winning opening 2002 and detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn is a "normal win", the second starting opening 2004, which is closed by the second starting opening door 2411, opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball B to be received into the second starting opening 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is conducted when game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the lottery result for the normal symbol is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). This indication of the lottery result for the normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If game ball B is received in normal winning port 2002 between the time when game ball B is received in normal winning port 2002 and the time when the lottery result for the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern is reserved until the previous suggestion of the lottery result for the normal pattern has ended. Also, the number of reserved lottery results for the normal pattern is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B is received in normal winning port 2002. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

Game ball B that is not accepted by the normal winning port 2002 and flows down will flow down to either the upper shelf 2421, the first shelf 2422, or to the right of the first shelf 2422 in the attacca unit 2400. Game ball B that flows down to the upper shelf 2421 will be guided to the left and released to the left of the large winning port 2005. Therefore, game ball B that flows down onto the upper shelf 2421 will not be accepted by the second starting port 2004 or the large winning port 2005.

The game ball B that flows down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and after rolling over the second starting opening door 2411 closing the second starting opening 2004, the second shelf 2423, the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005, and the fourth shelf 2425, it is released to the left. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 is received and discharged by the outlet 2020. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf 2422, there is a possibility that it will be received by the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005.

A game ball B that flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422 of the attacca unit 2400 is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. Although this is rare, if a game ball B that flows down to the first shelf 2422 enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged.

When a game ball B is received in the second starting hole 2004 of the attacca unit 2400, a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 draws a lottery for a second special symbol (e.g., "miss," "small hit," "hit with special feature," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time reduction (time reduction) hit," "probability change time reduction hit," "probability change without time reduction hit," "second jackpot," etc.). If the result of the lottery for the drawn second special symbol is anything other than "miss," a favorable game state in which the player is at an advantage is created. The result of the lottery for the selected second special symbol is then suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special fluctuation time) that is longer than the special fluctuation time of the result of the lottery for the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B by the second starting port 2004 until the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot start, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previously drawn second special symbol is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the second special symbol that are reserved is limited to four for each second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the game hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2003. As a result, since it takes longer to consume the reserved number of the lottery result of the second special pattern, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first starting hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 is the same, the number of lottery results of the second special pattern executed by the second starting hole 2004 is smaller. Therefore, even if the game ball B is shot into the right side of the center role 2500 in a normal state, there is a possibility that only the second starting hole 2004 will be accepted, and the frequency of the lottery result of the second special pattern being executed is low, so that the player can be actively made to perform a shooting operation that causes the game ball B to circulate on the left side of the center role 2500.

As described above, depending on the result of the drawing for the first special pattern or the second special pattern drawn by receiving game ball B into first start opening 2003 or second start opening 2004, big prize opening 2005 or special prize opening 2006 opens or closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, making it possible to receive game ball B.

In the attacca unit 2400, when a game ball B flows down at a timing when the large prize opening 2005 is available for reception according to the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the result of the lottery for the second special symbol, or due to reception of a game ball B in the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008, the game ball B is received in the large prize opening 2005. When the game ball B is received in the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

After the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving game ball B, once either a predetermined time (e.g., 20 to 40 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received into the large prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that closes the state and prevents game ball B from being received is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, this is repeated two rounds for a "2R jackpot", five rounds for a "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for a "15R jackpot", creating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "wins" that change the probability of drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the "jackpot" ("probability win"), or change the display time of the presentation image suggesting the result of the drawing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ("time-saving win").

If the result of the drawing for the first special symbol or the result of the drawing for the second special symbol (for example, the result of the drawing for the second special symbol) is a "second jackpot," the big prize winning port 2005 or the accessory prize winning port 2006 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (Special Time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of the special bonus or time-saving mode for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

In this way, when the large prize winning port 2005 or the special prize winning port 2006 is able to accept game ball B, the large prize winning port 2005 or the special prize winning port 2006 can accept game ball B, allowing the player to have many game balls B and add them to the ball count, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the lottery results for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the lottery results for the special symbols (the lottery results for the first special symbol and the lottery results for the second special symbol). The lottery results for the special symbols are suggested by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, and then the combination of lit LEDs suggests the lottery results for the special symbols.

On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as a performance image. The performance image suggesting the result of the lottery for the special symbol on the performance display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up in the left-right direction, and changes each picture row, sequentially stops and displays the variable picture rows, and each picture row is stopped and displayed so that the pictures of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed form a combination that corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is other than "miss", after the three picture rows stop and each picture is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, "small win" game, "big win" game, etc.) according to the lottery result of the special symbol that was drawn is generated.

The time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (special change time)) is different from the time indicating the result of the special pattern lottery on the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row changes and the final image is displayed), and is set to a longer time on the function display unit 1400.

In addition to displaying a performance image to suggest the result of the lottery for the special symbol by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform a player participation type performance in which the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 on the performance operation unit 250 in the door frame 3 are operated according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol drawn. In the player participation type performance, the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252 can be made to pop up to make them stand out, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the first performance button 251 and the second performance button 252.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the starting gate display unit 2110, the performance count display unit 3005, the back decoration unit 3200, the back front performance unit 3300, the back rear performance unit 3400, etc. to perform light-emitting performances, display performances, movable performances, etc., and the player can be entertained by various types of performances, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation type presentation in which the first presentation button 251 or the second presentation button 252 is operated, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform the operation that should be performed, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the player can perform the correct operation.

According to this embodiment, a game ball B is shot into the game area 5a by a player, and as a result of fulfilling a predetermined condition, the reel winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern based on the lottery results of a special pattern drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and the game ball B accepted into the reel winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting device 2530 and the second sorting device 2540 and is supplied to the guide path 2551 of the lottery reel 2550 in the center reel 2500, and the game ball B circulates toward the downstream sorting section 2552. In this distribution section 2552, when the losing port 2009 opening to the guideway 2551 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, the game ball B is distributed to the striking section 2553 as the first side, and when the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the losing port 2009, the game ball B is distributed to the losing port 2009 (second side), and the distribution state of the game ball B is displayed by the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution section 2552, it is supplied to the striking section 2553. On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009) in the distribution section 2552, it is not supplied to the striking section 2553 and is discharged from the lottery device 2550.

The game ball B supplied from the distribution section 2552 to the striking section 2553 is struck backward by the rotating striking piece 2560 of the striking section 2553, and circulates (rolls) so as to climb the ascending slope 2559 which becomes higher toward the rear. In this striking section 2553, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing at which the striking piece 2560 strikes the game ball B, the game ball B may be struck strongly or hardly at all, and the momentum of the game ball B struck backward varies. Therefore, if the momentum of the struck game ball B is weak, the game ball B cannot climb the ascending slope 2559 and returns to the striking section 2553, and the game ball B moves back and forth on the ascending slope 2559. Then, when the game ball B is hit hard by the hitting section 2553 and overcomes the uphill section 2559, it is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 located in the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the table 2555, and is released from the oscillating gutter 2554 onto the table 2555. At this time, since the oscillating gutter 2554 rotates back and forth so as to oscillate around an axis in the up-down direction, the game ball B is released from the gutter section 2554a of the oscillating gutter 2554 into the table 2555 in various directions depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing of the rotation position of the oscillating gutter 2554.

The game ball B released from the oscillating gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination, and is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551. At this time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received by the second V winning hole 2008 provided on the central axis in the front-to-rear direction passing through the center of the oscillating gutter 2554 near the front end of the table 2555, and the game ball B will come into contact with the oscillating piece 2556 provided symmetrically on the left and right sides of the central axis between the oscillating gutter 2554 and the second V winning hole 2008, causing the flow direction of the game ball B to move toward or away from the second V winning hole 2008. When the game ball B is received by the second V winning hole 2008 of the table 2555, a favorable game state (for example, a big win game) occurs. On the other hand, if game ball B is not accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 and is released from the front end of the table 2555 into the guide path 2551, and then is sorted to one side by the sorting unit 2552, the game ball B is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 by the hitting unit 2553. Therefore, as long as game ball B is sorted to one side (striking unit 2553) by the sorting unit 2552, the game ball B loops in the order of the guide path 2551, sorting unit 2552, hitting unit 2553, oscillating gutter 2554, and table 2555 until it is accepted by the second V winning opening 2008.

For this reason, when the accessory winning port 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to enable supply of the game ball B to the lottery accessory 2550, the player can check whether the game ball B is in a state to be distributed to the first side (striking section 2553) in the distribution section 2552 by looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution section 2552. As a result, when the distribution section 2552 is in a state to distribute to the first side (striking section 2553, and therefore the second V winning port 2008) by looking at the distribution display section 2557a, the player can be excited by whether the game ball B received in the accessory winning port 2006 (here, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation section 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 in the first distribution device 2530) is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guideway 2551). Thereafter, when the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is supplied to the lottery device 2550 (guideway 2551), the player can be made to feel anxious and excited depending on whether or not it is distributed to the first side (the striking section 2553 side) in the distribution section 2552. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side and supplied to the striking section 2553, the game ball B goes back and forth on the uphill section 2559 depending on the timing at which the game ball B is struck, so the player can be entertained depending on whether or not the game ball B is struck with enough strength to overcome the uphill section 2559. In addition, the game ball B that has gone over the uphill portion 2559 is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 that rotates back and forth, so that the game ball B is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 at the timing when the oscillating gutter 2554 can release the game ball B toward the second V winning opening 2008. Depending on whether or not the game ball B is hit with enough strength to go over the uphill portion 2559, the player can enjoy the suspenseful and thrilling game.

When the game ball B struck by the striking portion 2553 climbs over the slope 2559 and is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554, the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether the game ball B is released from the swinging gutter 2554, which is rotating back and forth, toward the second V winning opening 2008. Even if the game ball B is released from the swinging gutter 2554 in a direction away from the central axis (second V winning opening 2008), depending on the swinging state of the pair of swinging pieces 2556, which are provided symmetrically on the left and right sides of the central axis, the game ball B that abuts against the swinging pieces 2556 may be pulled toward the central axis and head toward the second V winning opening 2008, so the player will not be disappointed and will be entertained, preventing a decline in interest. The player can be kept on edge depending on whether or not game ball B is received by second V winning opening 2008, which is located near the downstream end of table 2555. If game ball B is received by second V winning opening 2008, a favorable game state (a big win game in which big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern) occurs, providing great entertainment for the player.

On the other hand, even if game ball B is not accepted by the second V winning port 2008, it is released into the guide path 2551 from the downstream end of the table 2555, so the player's expectations can be heightened depending on whether game ball B is again allocated to the first side (striking section 2553) by the distribution section 2552 provided downstream of the guide path 2551, and if game ball B is again allocated to the first side by the distribution section 2552, it is supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 upstream of the table 2555 via the striking section 2553 and the climbing section 2559, so that there is another chance for it to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008 and the player will not be disappointed. At this time, when the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557 is in a state where the distribution section 2552 is distributing to the first side (striking section 2553), the player can be excited by whether or not the game ball B will be released from the front end of the table 2555 into the guideway 2551. Therefore, since the player can be made to feel anxious and excited in various scenes in the lottery device 2550, the player is less likely to become bored, the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed, and a pachinko machine equipped with a lottery device 2550 that can entertain the player can be provided.

The lottery device 2550 of the center device 2500 has a large planar table 2555 that is wide from front to back and left to right, and has a guideway 2551 in front of the front end of the table 2555, so that the lottery device 2550 is large. This lottery device 2550 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, strongly attracting the player's attention and increasing the player's expectations for the game using the lottery device 2550. This makes it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine as the pachinko machine to play, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided on the central axis in the left-right direction of the table 2555, which is inclined so that the rear end is higher, the second V winning opening 2008 can be made to stand out, making it easier for the player to direct his or her gaze toward the second V winning opening 2008 and to create a sense of anticipation about the game ball B being received by the second V winning opening 2008, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, the oscillating gutter 2554 is provided near the rear end on the central axis of the table 2555, which has a raised rear end, and a pair of oscillating pieces 2556 are provided symmetrically on the left and right sides of the central axis, so that the visibility of the oscillating gutter 2554 at the rear is not obstructed by the oscillating pieces 2556, and the player can clearly see the second V winning hole 2008, the pair of oscillating pieces 2556, and the oscillating gutter 2554 provided on the table 2555. As a result, the rotation and oscillating conditions of the pair of oscillating pieces 2556 and the oscillating gutter 2554 are easy to recognize, making it easier to predict the rolling path of the game ball B due to these movements, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B depending on whether or not it rolls as predicted.

In addition, in the distribution section 2552, a losing port 2009 that communicates with the second side is provided in the guide path 2551. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the losing port 2009 from a closed state by the distribution bridge 2557, the losing port 2009 opens upward in the guide path 2551. This makes the losing port 2009 stand out to the player, making it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball B circulating through the guide path 2551 is being distributed to the second side (losing port 2009), that is, is not being distributed to the first side (striking section 2553, and therefore the second V winning port 2008). Therefore, when the conspicuous losing port 2009 is closed by the sorting bridge 2557, it is easy to recognize that the ball is being sorted to the first side (striking section 2553), and it is easy to tell which way the ball is being sorted just by looking at the guideway 2551.

Furthermore, depending on the timing of striking the game ball B with the striking section 2553, the game ball B can go back and forth on the ascending slope 2559, which can increase (lengthen) the time the game ball B stays on the lottery device 2550. This can avoid disappointing the player by ending the game on the lottery device 2550 in a short time, and the time gained by the ascending slope 2559 can be used to fully show the player the effects such as the effect images on the effect display device 1600, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player.

In addition, since an uphill section 2559 is provided between the striking section 2553 and the oscillating gutter 2554 (oscillating passage 2562), even if the game ball B is struck hard at the striking section 2553, its momentum can be attenuated by climbing the uphill section 2559, and the momentum can be further attenuated by oscillating it left and right in the oscillating passage 2562. This prevents the game ball B from being supplied to the oscillating gutter 2554 with force, causing it to be released from the oscillating gutter 2554 in a direction different from the release direction of the oscillating gutter 2554 due to its momentum, even though the oscillating gutter 2554 rotates back and forth to change the release direction, causing discomfort to the player, or the game ball B being released from the oscillating gutter 2554 with force onto the table 2555, shortening the residence time (rolling time) of the game ball B on the table 2555. Therefore, the player can enjoy the release of the game ball B from the oscillating gutter 2554 without feeling uncomfortable, and can easily enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555.

In addition, in the case where the player can select the timing at which game ball B is supplied to the lottery device 2550 by the operation of shooting game ball B, the shooting operation can be performed so that game ball B is supplied at the timing when the distribution display unit 2557a displays that game ball B is in a state to be distributed to the first side. This allows the player to enjoy not only the movement of game ball B within the lottery device 2550, but also the operation of shooting game ball B, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the losing mouth 2009 is opened, the sorting bridge 2557 is positioned so that its tip is higher than its base end and stands upright from the guideway 2551. Therefore, even if game ball B flows forcefully through the guideway 2551 and attempts to jump over the losing mouth 2009, the upright sorting bridge 2557 prevents the game ball B from jumping over and entering the first side (striking section 2553), and the game ball B can be reliably sorted into the losing mouth 2009 (second side).

In addition, when the losing hole 2009 is opened, the sorting bridge 2557 is positioned so that its tip is higher than its base end and stands upright from the guideway 2551, so that the sorting bridge 2557 is prominently visible to the player, and the sorting display unit 2557a provided on the sorting bridge 2557 is visible, so that the sorting bridge 2557 (sorting display unit 2557a) also enables the player to determine that the game ball B is being sorted to the second side.

[11. Details of the center role on the game board]
Next, the center gimmick 2500 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail.

[11-1. Center feature of the first embodiment]
The center role 2500 of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 94 to 97. Figure 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the center role of the first embodiment, cut in the middle in the vertical direction in a state where it is attached to a game panel, together with the front component member. Figure 95 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body of the center role from the front decorative part and the rear decorative part in a state where it is disassembled into the front decorative part and the rear decorative part, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body consisting of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part from the front. Figure 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the center role of Figure 94 in a state where the center frame is placed on a stand with the rear end facing down. Figure 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a center role with a center frame to which a decorative body different from that of Figure 94 is attached, in a partial cross section.

The center device 2500 of the first embodiment is provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment shown in Figures 78 to 83, etc. This center device 2500 is equipped with a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), warp passages 2512 that can guide game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 that is provided on the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511 and rolls the game balls B that have flowed through the warp passage 2512 in the left-right direction and then releases them into the game area 5a.

The center feature 2500 also includes a decorative body 2570 that is attached to the center frame 2511 and has a predetermined decoration applied to it.

The center frame 2511 has a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is arranged along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-to-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an inflow restriction portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the gaming panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). Note that the rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, or may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 94, the decorative body 2570 has a flat transparent front plate 2571 attached to the front end of the center frame 2511, a front decorative part 2572 attached to the front surface of the front plate, and a rear decorative part 2573 provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion part 2511a). In other words, the decorative body 2570 is provided so as to extend within the frame of the center frame 2511, and has a rear decorative part 2573 provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a front decorative part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part 2573. The front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 are decorated in a coordinated manner.

The front plate 2571 is arranged so that its rear surface abuts against the front end surface of the inflow restriction portion 2511c. This front plate 2571 forms a ball passage 2517 between itself and the support portion 2511d, through which the game ball B can flow.

The front decorative part 2572 of the decorative body 2570 is decorated with a specific pattern (here, a pattern of a cloud-like design arranged around the face of an ogre) as shown in Figure 95. The front decorative part 2572 has a transparent translucent part 2572a provided in front of the spherical passage 2517, and a number of opaque dot parts 2572b provided in the translucent part 2572a that form part of the decorative pattern (see Figure 95 (a)).

The transparent portion 2572a of the front decorative portion 2572 is formed to be colorless transparent or colored transparent. The colored transparent portion 2572a is colored the same color as the pattern so as to form part of the pattern. In this embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a in the demon's face portion is colored transparent, and the transparent portion 2572a in the cloud design portion is colorless transparent.

Each dot 2572b of the front decorative part 2572 is colored the same color as the pattern. As shown enlarged in Figure 95 (a), each of the multiple dots 2572b is formed in a circle and is arranged diagonally at an angle of 45 degrees above and below the horizontal at intervals equal to the diameter of the circle.

The rear decorative part 2573 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support part 2511d in the center frame 2511. The rear decorative part 2573 is arranged to extend within the frame of the frame-shaped insertion part 2511a in the center frame 2511. The decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 is an opaque design with the same pattern as the front decorative part 2572 arranged in front. Note that if the gaming panel 1100 is made of a transparent material, the rear decorative part 2573 may be on the back surface of the gaming panel 1100. In this case, there is an effect of allowing the area of the decoration to be made larger.

The front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 are made by printing decorative patterns on transparent resin film. In this embodiment, the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 are formed in a film shape.

As shown in Figure 95 (b), when this decorative body 2570 is viewed from the front (front), the decoration (pattern) of the rear decorative part 2573 located at the rear can be seen through the transparent translucent part 2572a in the decoration (pattern) of the front decorative part 2572, and the pattern of the rear decorative part 2573 complements the translucent part 2572a, so that the original pattern can be seen as if the translucent part 2572a did not exist.

On the other hand, when game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573, game ball B becomes visible through the transparent transmission part 2572a in the front decorative part 2572. This makes it possible to avoid causing distrust or anxiety to the player by making game ball B invisible, even if only temporarily, and allows the player to enjoy playing with game ball B and prevents a decline in interest.

In this embodiment, the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511 at a position forward of the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a. In other words, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511, no part of the decorative body 2570 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, as shown in Figure 96, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511 and the center frame 2511 is placed with its rear end facing down on a stand TA, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a abuts (touches) the stand TA.

In this embodiment, the center role 2500 is not described in detail, but in addition to the decorative body 2570, a pattern display 2518, a first distribution device 2530, a second distribution device 2540, a lottery role 2550, etc. are attached to the center frame 2511. The pattern display 2518 displays the special pattern and the fourth pattern, etc., that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540, which are attached to the center frame 2511, are attached so that their metal cases are located at the rear end. This means that when the center frame 2511 (center role 2500) is placed with its rear end facing down on the stand TA, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the stand TA, making it less likely to be damaged during assembly work, etc. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the center role 2500 is provided with wiring connected to the LED board, relay board, solenoid, etc. The wiring is provided so as to follow the insertion part 2511a of the center frame 2511 of the center role 2500, and is provided so as to be hidden by the decoration of the decorative body 2570. This prevents the wiring from being visible to the player, which would result in a poor appearance. The insertion part 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed into a double wall shape, and the wiring may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is preferable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as the wiring.

In the above embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b may be reversed. In more detail, the transparent portion 2572a may be an opaque portion with a pattern, and the dot portion 2572b may be a transparent portion.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the transmissive portion 2572a is shown as a transparent portion, but this is not limited thereto, and the transmissive portion may be a portion that penetrates from front to back.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decorative body 2570 consisting of the front decorative part 2572 having a transparent part 2572a and a dot part 2572b in the applied decoration (pattern) and the rear decorative part 2573 having a decoration (pattern) that complements the transparent part 2572a is provided on the center frame 2511 of the center role 2500, but this is not limited to this, and the decorative body 2570 may be provided on the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacca unit 2400, the back unit 3000, etc.

In the above embodiment, the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 is shown as a transparent film with a printed pattern, but this is not limited to this, and the decorative body 2570A may be a center gimmick 2500 equipped with a center frame 2511 to which the decorative body 2570A is attached as shown in FIG. 97. This decorative body 2570A is equipped with a flat front decorative part 2572 attached to the front end of the inflow restriction part 2511c in the center frame 2511, and a three-dimensionally formed rear decorative part 2573 attached within the frame of the frame-shaped insertion part 2511a behind the front decorative part 2572.

The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570A are each decorated with a three-dimensionally shaped ornament, though detailed illustrations are omitted. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are each decorated with ornaments that coordinate with each other. Furthermore, the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are arranged so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front.

The decorative body 2570A (rear decorative portion 2573) is located forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511. Therefore, when the decorative body 2570A is attached to the center frame 2511, no part of the decorative body 2570A protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511.

This decorative body 2570A may be made by molding a pre-colored resin, or it may be painted or have a sticker attached after molding. Metallic pigments or plating may also be used to decorate the decorative body 2570A, and the glittering decoration can strongly attract the player's attention, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decorative body 2570A may have a portion of the rear decorative part 2573 protruding forward to the same position as the front decorative part 2572. This makes it easier to create a sense of depth in the decorative body 2570A, further enhancing the decorative effect.

According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2570 consisting of a rear decorative part 2573 arranged forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511 and a front decorative part 2572 arranged to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part 2573 is provided on a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 is transparent, it is possible to make the decorative body 2570 stand out relatively by making it less noticeable, and since a portion of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 of the decorative body 2570 overlap, it is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 difficult to distinguish, and the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 can be shown to the player in good condition. This allows the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 to form a decorative body 2570 with a high decorative effect, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes it difficult for the player to become bored, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the player's interest from declining.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the decoration of a part (the area in front of the ball passage 2517) of the front decorative part 2572 constituting the decorative body 2570 is composed of a transparent part 2572a and a number of dot parts 2572b, and a rear decorative part 2573 with a decoration (decoration with the same pattern) that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 is provided behind that part. Therefore, the rear decorative part 2573, which can be seen through the transparent transparent part 2572a, complements the part of the transparent part 2572a, and a single good decoration (pattern) can be shown as if the transparent part 2572a did not exist, and the good decoration has a high decorative effect, allowing players to enjoy it.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as described above, the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 in the front part of the ball passage 2517 is composed of the transparent part 2572a and multiple dot parts 2572b, so that the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 can be seen from the front through the transparent part 2572a. As a result, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 at the rear can be seen through the transparent part 2572a, allowing the player to enjoy the excellent decoration by the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573, while when the game ball B is flowing through the ball passage 2517, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent part 2572a, which avoids the player feeling distrustful or anxious because the game ball B becomes invisible, and the player can enjoy playing with the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, so when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511 and the center frame 2511 is placed on the stand TA with its rear end facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a abuts against the stand TA. Therefore, when the center frame 2511 is placed on the stand TA with its rear end facing down for assembly or disassembly work, the center frame 2511 does not wobble, and a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to assemble and disassemble can be provided.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, so that the decorative body 2570 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511, making it easier to secure space behind the center frame 2511 (game panel 1100). Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a large decorative body, a movable decorative body, etc. behind the center frame 2511, making it easier to construct a pachinko machine 1 that can provide more entertainment to players.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the pattern display 2518 for displaying special patterns is attached to the center frame 2511, so that the pattern display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced compared to when the pattern display 2518 is attached separately.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2570, decorative body 2570A) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

[11-2. Center feature of the second embodiment]
The center role 2500 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 98. Figure 98(a) is an explanatory diagram of the main part of the center role of the second embodiment seen from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the center role of (a) with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on a stand.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the center device 2500 of the second embodiment, like the center device 2500 of the first embodiment, is equipped with a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), warp passages 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower edge within the frame of the center frame 2511, which rolls the game balls B that have flowed through the warp passages 2512 in the left-right direction and then releases them into the game area 5a.

The center feature 2500 also includes a decorative body 2580 that is attached to the center frame 2511 and has a predetermined decoration applied to it.

The center frame 2511 has a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is arranged along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 and extends in the front-to-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, an inflow restriction portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the gaming panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). Note that the rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, or may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The decorative body 2580 has a front decorative part 2581, a rear decorative part 2582, a transparent front cover 2583 covering the front side of the rear decorative part 2582, a flat diffusion lens 2584 provided on the rear side of the rear decorative part 2582 and capable of irradiating light incident from the side forward, a transparent rear cover 2585 attached to the rear side of the front cover 2583 so as to cover the diffusion lens 2584 from the rear, and an LED board 2586 on which an LED 2586a is mounted that irradiates light onto the side of the diffusion lens 2584.

The front decorative part 2581 is located forward of the rear decorative part 2582. The front decorative part 2581 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support part 2511d of the center frame 2511.

The rear decorative portion 2582 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511, and a portion of it protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a).

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are decorated in a coordinated manner and are arranged so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front. Although not shown in the figures, the decoration of the front decorative portion 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2582 are each decorated with a pattern of the corresponding portion of a single design, separated by the portion where they overlap when viewed from the front.

The front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 are entirely opaque. In other words, the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 are composed of opaque parts. In addition, the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 are translucent. Note that the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 may be provided with a transparent part (transparent part) as part of the decoration.

The front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 are made by printing decorative patterns on transparent resin film. In this embodiment, the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 are formed in a film shape.

The LED board 2586 is provided behind the front decorative part 2581. As a result, the LED board 2586 and the wiring connected to the LED board 2586 are hidden by the front decorative part 2581 so that they cannot be seen from the front. The LED board 2586 can illuminate and decorate the rear decorative part 2582 by illuminating the multiple LEDs 2586a mounted thereon.

When the decorative body 2580 of this embodiment is attached to the center frame 2511, a portion of it protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when the decorative body 2580 is attached to the center frame 2511 and the center frame 2511 is placed with its rear end facing down on the stand TA, the rear end of the decorative body 2580 (rear decorative part 2582) abuts (touches) the stand TA, and a portion of the rear end of the center frame 2511 abuts the stand TA.

In this embodiment, the center role 2500 is not described in detail, but in addition to the decorative body 2580, a pattern display 2518, a first distribution device 2530, a second distribution device 2540, a lottery role 2550, etc. are attached to the center frame 2511. The pattern display 2518 displays the special pattern and the fourth pattern, etc., that are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540, which are attached to the center frame 2511, are attached so that their metal cases are located at the rear end. This means that when the center frame 2511 (center role 2500) is placed with its rear end facing down on the stand TA, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the stand TA, making it less likely to be damaged during assembly work, etc. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

In the above embodiment, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed into a double wall shape, and the wiring of the LED board 2586 may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is preferable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as the wiring.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the decoration of the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 is shown as a transparent film with a pattern printed thereon, but this is not limited to this, and the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 may also be three-dimensionally shaped. Alternatively, the configuration of the decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 may be applied to this embodiment.

According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2580 consisting of a rear decorative portion 2582, a part of which protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a front decorative portion 2581, which is provided forward of the rear decorative portion 2582, is provided on a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5. Since the center frame 2511 is transparent, it is less noticeable and the decorative body 2580 stands out in comparison, and the front decorative portion 2581 and rear decorative portion 2582 of the decorative body 2580 allow the player to see a decoration with depth. In this case, the rear decorative part 2582 and the front decorative part 2581 are decorated in a coordinated manner, and are arranged so that a part of each overlaps when viewed from the front, so that the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative part 2582 is difficult to distinguish when viewed from the front (front), and the large decoration of the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and the rear decorative part 2582 and the front decorative part 2581 can form a large, deep decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's interest can be provided.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that the rear decorative portion 2582 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the game ball B in the game area 5a in good conditions.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that it is possible to decorate the periphery of the performance display device 1600 (display screen) for the performance display device 1600, the back front performance unit 3300, the back rear performance unit 3400, etc., which are provided behind the game panel 1100, and to show decorations (performances) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies) of the back front performance unit 3300 and the back rear performance unit 3400, making it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the opaque parts of the decorative body 2580 make it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED board 2586 from the front, and the wiring can be hidden by the opaque parts, which prevents the wiring from being visible and thus reduces the appearance, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the decorative body 2580 (front decorative portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, so that the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decorative body 2580 (decoration), which can avoid the poor appearance caused by the LED board 2586 being visible, and makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the pattern display 2518 for displaying special patterns is attached to the center frame 2511, so that the pattern display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced compared to when the pattern display 2518 is attached separately.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

[11-3. Center feature of the third embodiment]
Next, the center role 2500A of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 99 to 102. Figure 99 is a front view of a game board on which the center role of the third embodiment is provided, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. Figure 100 is an exploded perspective view of the center role and the game panel of Figure 99 in an exploded state as seen from the front. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view of the center role of Figure 99 in an exploded state as seen from the front. Figures 102(a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center role. In the following, the same reference numerals are used for the same configuration as the center role 2500 described above, and detailed explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, the center device 2500A of the third embodiment is located in the play area 5a, above the starting unit 2100, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the play panel 1100. Note that the play panel 1100 of this embodiment is made of a single plate material, as shown in FIG. 100.

The center gimmick 2500A includes a transparent center frame 2700 formed in a frame shape, a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2700 to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower edge of the center frame 2700, which rolls the game ball B that has flowed through the warp passage 2512 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. As will be described in detail later, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into multiple frames in the circumferential direction of the frame. In addition, the decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 or the decorative body 2580 shown in FIG. 98 may be provided in this embodiment. In addition, the decoration of the center frame 2700 (decorative body 2570, decorative body 2570A, decorative body 2580) may be linked to the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

In addition, the center role piece 2500A has a connecting retainer 2710 that connects adjacent frames to each other among the multiple frames that make up the center frame 2700.

Furthermore, the center device 2500A has a pattern display 2518 that displays the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, a second starting hole unit 2720 that has a gate 2010 and the second starting hole 2004, an attacca unit 2730 that has a big winning hole 2005, and a device winning hole unit 2740 that has a device winning hole 2006.

[11-3a. Center frame]
The center frame 2700 in the center device 2500A of the third embodiment is provided to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and has an inflow restriction portion 2700a that restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112, and a flange portion 2700b extending from the rear end of the inflow restriction portion 2700a in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The inflow restriction portion 2700a of the center frame 2700 protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the gaming panel 1100.

The flange portion 2700b extends flatly to the outside or inside of the frame depending on the circumferential location on the center frame 2700. When the center frame 2700 is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, a portion of the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b abuts against the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The center frame 2700 also has a non-flange portion 2700c where the flange portion 2700b does not extend from the rear end of the inflow restriction portion 2700a on at least one of the outer and inner sides of the frame, and an insertion portion (not shown) that extends rearward beyond the flange portion 2700b and is inserted into the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100. At the location of this non-flange portion 2700c, the rear surface of the inflow restriction portion 2700a coincides with the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b. The insertion portion is provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the center frame 2700.

The frame-shaped center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into multiple parts in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the center frame 2700 is divided into five parts: a first frame 2701, a second frame 2702, a third frame 2703, a fourth frame 2704, and a fifth frame 2705, each of which is formed with the same configuration. This center role 2500A has a connecting retaining portion 2710 that connects adjacent frames.

The first frame 2701 constitutes the upper part of the top and left sides of the center frame 2700 from the vertical center. The second frame 2702 constitutes the lower part and bottom side of the left side of the center frame 2700 from the vertical center to the vertical center, so as to be continuous with the lower end of the left side of the first frame 2701. The third frame 2703 constitutes the upper part of the right side of the center frame 2700, so as to be continuous with the right end of the first frame 2701. The fourth frame 2704 constitutes the middle part of the right side of the center frame 2700, so as to be continuous with the lower end of the third frame 2703. The fifth frame 2705 constitutes the lower part of the center frame 2700, so as to be continuous with the lower end of the fourth frame 2704 and the right end of the second frame 2702.

The warp passage 2512 and stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702. The role winning port unit 2740 is attached to the third frame 2703. The second starting port unit 2720 is attached to the fourth frame 2704. The attacca unit 2730 is attached to the fifth frame 2705.

Below, we will provide a detailed explanation of the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 as representative of the multiple frames that make up the center frame 2700.

First, the first frame 2701 of the center frame 2700 is formed to be transparent. This first frame 2701 is formed to constitute the upper side portion and the upper portion of the left side in the vertical direction of the center frame 2700 (center role piece 2500A).

The first frame 2701 is provided to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the gaming panel 1100, and has a first inflow restriction portion 2701a that restricts the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112, a flat first flange portion 2701b that is connected to the rear end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and extends along the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a first non-flange portion 2701c at the rear end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a where the first flange portion 2701b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame.

The first inflow restriction section 2701a of the first frame 2701 slopes linearly from near the center of the top edge in the left-right direction so that the right side becomes lower to the right, and then the left side of that section bends in multiple stages to become lower as it moves to the left, and the bottom end of the left side extends vertically downward.

One end of the connecting retainer 2710 is removably attached to the inner portion of the frame near the right end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and to the inner portion of the frame at the portion extending vertically downward from the lower left end.

The first flange portion 2701b is provided so as to extend both outside and inside the frame in the portion of the upper edge of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a that is inclined linearly so as to become lower to the right. Also, the first flange portion 2701b is provided so as to extend outside the frame except near the left end in the portion of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a that is bent in multiple stages so as to become lower toward the left, and is provided so as to extend inside the frame near the left end (the portion above the portion that extends vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a).

The first flange portion 2701b has mounting holes at appropriate positions for mounting to the game panel 1100.

The first non-flange portion 2701c is provided only on the inside of the frame at the right end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a, and is provided on both the outside and inside of the frame at the portion that extends vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a.

Next, the second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is formed to be transparent. This second frame 2702 is formed to constitute the lower portion in the vertical direction on the left side and the lower side portion of the center frame 2700 (center role 2500A). The warp passage 2512 and stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702.

The second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is provided to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the gaming panel 1100, and has a second inflow restriction portion 2702a that restricts the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112, a flat second flange portion 2702b that is connected to the rear end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a and extends along the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a second non-flange portion 2702c at the rear end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a where the second flange portion 2702b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame.

The second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is provided separately on the left side at a portion of the left side extending up and down, and on a portion of the right end of the bottom side, and is not provided between these portions. In detail, the second inflow restriction portion 2702a on the left side extends downward from the upper end of the left side along the left side, then transitions to the bottom side, and extends a short distance to the right (bottom right) along the bottom side so that the right end is lower. The second inflow restriction portion 2702a on the right side extends up and down along the right end of the bottom side.

One end of the connecting retainer 2710 is removably attached to the inner portion of the frame at the upper end of the left second inflow restriction portion 2702a and to the right side (right side surface) of the right second inflow restriction portion 2702a.

The left second inflow restriction section 2702a has an entrance to the warp passage 2512, and a stage 2513 is provided between the left and right second inflow restriction sections 2702a.

The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend inwardly of the frame at the portion (left side portion) of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a on the left side that extends up and down, and is provided so as to extend both outwardly and inwardly of the frame at the portion extending to the lower right along the bottom side of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a on the left side. This second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend significantly outwardly of the frame at the bottom side, connecting the two second inflow restriction portions 2702a that are separated to the left and right by this portion.

The second flange portion 2702b has mounting holes at appropriate positions for mounting to the game panel 1100.

The second non-flange portion 2702c is provided on the outside of the frame in the portion that extends vertically along the left side of the left second inflow restriction portion 2702a, and is provided on the right side (right side surface) of the right second inflow restriction portion 2702a.

This second frame 2702 extends rearward beyond the second flange portion 2702b and further has a second insertion portion (not shown) that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100. The second insertion portion protrudes rearward from the second flange portion 2702b so as to connect the two second inflow restriction portions 2702a that are separated to the left and right. The stage 2513 is attached to this second insertion portion.

Next, the attachment of the center frame 2700 to the gaming panel 1100 will be described using the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 as examples. The first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the gaming panel 1100 with mounting screws through mounting holes provided in the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, as shown in Figures 99 and 102 (a), the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 are attached to the gaming panel 1100 so that they are adjacent to each other.

In more detail, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 with the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 positioned to the right of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 so that their vertical positions slightly overlap. In other words, the right side of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a on which the first non-flange portion 2701c is provided and the left side of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a on which the second non-flange portion 2702c is provided are attached so as to face each other. This makes it possible for the first non-flange portion 2701c and the second non-flange portion 2702c to bring the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a as close together as possible.

However, in the case of a center device 2500 of the first embodiment that uses a center frame 2511 that is not divided in the circumferential direction of a frame, if it is desired to change the size of the play area 5a on the front side of the play panel 1100 due to a design change or the like, it is necessary to remake the center frame 2511, which may increase costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the center frame 2700 is divided into multiple frames (here, five frames: a first frame 2701 to a fifth frame 2705) in the circumferential direction of the frame, so the size of the play area 5a can be freely changed by changing the mounting position of each frame.

Specifically, for example, when enlarging the area below the second frame 2702 in the play area 5a, the second frame 2702 is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 102(a) and attached as shown in FIG. 102(b). This makes it possible to accommodate the expansion and contraction of the play area 5a (the opening 1112 of the play panel 1100) in the vertical direction.

Alternatively, if the area to the left of the second frame 2702 in the play area 5a is to be made smaller, as shown in FIG. 102(c), the second frame 2702 is moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 102(a) so that the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is positioned to the left of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701. This makes it possible to accommodate expansion and contraction of the play area 5a (opening 1112 of the play panel 1100) in the left-right direction.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(d), the lower end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the upper end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 may be opposed to each other and butted together to be attached to the gaming panel 1100. This makes it possible to make the area to the left and below the second frame 2702 in the gaming area 5a smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 102(a). In this case, the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a are butted together, making it possible to make the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 appear to be one unit.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102(e), a gap C may be formed between the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. In this case, it is desirable to make the gap C smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. Note that, if the gap C is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, an obstacle nail may be planted to prevent the game ball B from passing through the gap C.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(f), a second non-flange portion 2702c where the second flange portion 2702b is not formed may be provided on both the left and right sides of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a side of the second frame 2702. As a result, the first non-flange portion 2701c is provided on both the left and right sides of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a, and the second non-flange portion 2702c is provided on both the left and right sides of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a, so that the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a can be brought as close as possible in the left and right direction. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the second frame 2702 relative to the first frame 2701 can be increased, and it is possible to accommodate various sizes of the play area 5a due to design changes, etc. In other words, it is possible to easily accommodate the expansion and contraction of the play area 5a (the opening 1112 of the play panel 1100) in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Also, as shown in FIG. 102(g), a first flange portion 2701b may be provided in the first frame 2701 up to the lower end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a. This increases the rigidity of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a due to the presence of the first flange portion 2701b, making it less likely to be damaged even if the game ball B comes into contact with the first inflow restriction portion 2701a.

In this center frame 2700, a clearance is provided between adjacent frames. Although no particular reference numeral is given to the clearance, as illustrated in FIG. 102, it is a portion (a portion around the end of the frame) that allows relative movement with respect to the ends of adjacent frames. If the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 can expand and contract in the left-right direction, at least two clearances are required to allow movement in the left-right direction. Similarly, if the opening 1112 can expand and contract in the up-down direction, at least two clearances are required to allow movement in the up-down direction. Furthermore, if the opening 1112 can expand and contract in the up-down, left-right, and up-down directions, at least two clearances are required to allow movement in the up-down direction and at least two clearances are required to allow movement in the left-right direction.

Specifically, there is clearance in the vertical direction at two locations on both ends of the second frame 2702, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705 (see Figures 99 to 101). In addition, there is clearance in the horizontal direction at two locations on both ends of the third frame 2703, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and between the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704. Note that although the clearance in the vertical direction is shown in Figure 102, the same applies to the clearance in the horizontal direction.

However, in the area between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, for example, where there is a clearance in the left-right direction, the game ball B rolls on the upper surface of the part of the first inflow restriction part 2701a of the first frame 2701 that extends left-right. Therefore, if the first frame 2701 is moved to the left and attached, a gap will be formed between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and the flow of the game ball B may be obstructed by the gap. In such a case, spacers or rows of obstacle nails are provided in the clearance area so as not to obstruct the flow of the game ball B. For this reason, it is more difficult to expand the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) left-right than to expand it up-down, due to the flow of the game ball B, etc.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center role 2500A is divided into multiple frames such as the first frame 2701, the second frame 2702, etc. in the circumferential direction of the frame. Therefore, when it is necessary to change the size of the play area 5a due to design changes or the like, it is possible to easily respond by changing the mounting positions of the divided frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 without having to redesign the entire center frame 2700, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of design freedom.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the center frame 2700 in the center role 2500A is divided into multiple frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702. Therefore, when partially changing the design of the center role 2500A, the center role 2500A can be easily changed to the desired design by changing only the frame corresponding to the part to be changed. This makes it possible to reduce the cost of changing models and provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate model changes.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into multiple frames, such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, in the circumferential direction of the frame. By changing the mounting position of each frame relative to the game panel, the size of the game area 5a can be easily changed without having to remake the entire center frame 2700, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center role 2500A is divided into multiple frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. Therefore, when a malfunction occurs in the pattern display 2518, the second starting port unit 2720, the attacca unit 2730, etc., provided in the center role 2500A, it is not necessary to remove the entire center frame 2700 from the game panel 1100. Instead, it is sufficient to remove only the frame in which the malfunctioning unit is provided, which simplifies the labor required for maintenance work.

[11-3b. Connection holding part]
The connecting and holding portion 2710 connects adjacent frames of a center frame 2700, which is divided into a plurality of frames such as a first frame 2701 and a second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. It is something.

As described above, the center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into multiple frames in the circumferential direction of the frame, so there is a risk that some of the frames may fall and be damaged during removal and installation work during assembly, maintenance, etc. In response to this, in this embodiment, a connecting and retaining portion 2710 is provided to connect adjacent frames. As shown in Figures 99 to 101, the connecting and retaining portion 2710 is formed of a flexible linear (string-like) member. From the perspective of fall protection, it is desirable for the length of this connecting and retaining portion 2710 to be such that, for example, when the center frame 2700 is removed with the game board 5 upright, it does not reach the bottom end of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, the connecting and holding part 2710 uses a decorative ball chain. This allows the connecting and holding part 2710 to be visible, but because it is decorative, it can also serve as a decoration, so the overall appearance of the game board 5 is not marred.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connecting and holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701, and the other end is detachably attached to the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. The attachment of this connecting and holding portion 2710 is similar between the other frames.

In Figures 99 to 101, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705 are shown connected by connecting and holding parts 2710, but the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704, and the fourth frame 2704 and the fifth frame 2705 are also connected by similar connecting and holding parts 2710.

This connecting and retaining portion 2710 connects adjacent frames together among multiple frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 that make up the center frame 2700. Therefore, even if one frame is removed during installation or removal, the removed frame will not fall onto a workbench or floor, preventing damage to the frame due to falling.

In the above embodiment, the connecting and holding portion 2710 is shown to be decorative, but this is not limiting and it may be non-decorative. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connecting and holding portion 2710 in a location that is hidden by the center frame 2700 or decorative body and is difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the connecting and holding portion 2710 is shown to be visible to the player, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be completely invisible to the player under normal conditions. In other words, if the connecting and holding portion 2710 is provided in a portion of the center frame 2700 that is not visible to the player, it will not be seen by the player under normal conditions, such as during play.

In the above embodiment, all adjacent frames are connected to each other by the connecting and retaining parts 2710, but this is not limiting. Frames that do not need to be removed from the gaming panel 1100 for maintenance or the like may not be connected to adjacent frames by the connecting and retaining parts 2710. For example, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 do not have any movable objects, so they do not need maintenance, and are light in weight, so there is no risk of damage even if they are dropped, so they do not need to be connected. On the other hand, the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 have movable objects and are heavy, so the need for connection increases. Therefore, it is preferable to simplify the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 by not connecting them, and to detachably connect the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 to other sturdy members on the back of the gaming board 5 (gaming panel 1100) rather than to other frames.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, multiple (pieces) of connecting and retaining parts 2710 may be provided. In this case, it is desirable to bundle multiple connecting and retaining parts 2710 together to prevent the connecting and retaining parts 2710 from becoming entangled with the obstructing nails and bending the obstructing nails during manufacturing or maintenance, etc.

In addition, if multiple connection holders 2710 are provided and connected to multiple locations on the back of the game board 5 (game panel 1100), it becomes possible to maintain the position of the center frame 2700 (each frame) even when the mounting screws that attach the center frame 2700 to the game panel 1100 are removed. This eliminates the need to support the center frame 2700 during manufacturing and maintenance, improving workability.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the center frame 2700 is divided into multiple frames such as the first frame 2701, the second frame 2702, etc. in the circumferential direction of the frame, and adjacent frames are connected to each other by the connecting and retaining parts 2710. Therefore, even if some of the frames come off the game panel 1100 and attempt to fall by removing the mounting screws attached to the game panel 1100 during installation and removal work during assembly or maintenance, the frames are connected to the other frames by the flexible string-like connecting and retaining parts 2710, which act like a lifeline and keep the detached frames hanging down. This prevents the detached frames from falling onto a workbench, floor, etc., and prevents them from being damaged.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the connecting and holding part 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restriction part 2701a, the second inflow restriction part 2702a, etc., so that the first frame 2701, etc. can be removed separately from the gaming panel 1100 by removing the attachment part of the connecting and holding part 2710 from the first inflow restriction part 2701a, etc.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, adjacent frames are connected to each other by a flexible string-like connecting and holding portion 2710. Therefore, even if the position of the second frame 2702 is changed relative to the first frame 2701 due to a design change or the like, the connecting and holding portion 2710 can deform and follow the change in position, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of design freedom.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(a), when the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the gaming panel 1100 so that a gap C is formed between the first inflow restriction portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a of the second frame 2702, the connecting and retaining portion 2710 that connects (connects) the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a may be made to function as a restriction portion that prevents the game ball B from passing through the gap C.

[12. Details of the side unit on the game board]
Next, details of the side unit 2200 provided on the game board 5 will be described. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B, and one sub-out port 2021 that is always open to receive the game ball B.

Although not shown in detail, the side unit 2200 has a number of ball receiving sections that are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, have a U-shaped cross section that forms the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021, extend in the front-to-rear direction, are open upward and rearward, and are U-shaped in cross section; a shelf section 2201 that is the same length as the ball receiving sections and extends in the front-to-rear direction in a frame-like manner and is located to the right of the rightmost ball receiving section when viewed from the front; a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the multiple ball receiving sections and shelf sections; flange sections that extend outward in the left-to-right direction in a flat shape from the rear ends of the leftmost ball receiving section and shelf section 2201 when viewed from the front; and a gutter section that extends rearward in a gutter-like shape from the rear ends of each ball receiving section.

The side unit 2200 also has two positioning projections protruding rearward from the flange portion and two mounting holes penetrating the flange portion. The positioning projections are inserted into positioning holes 1113 (see FIG. 104) of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position the side unit 2200 relative to the panel plate 1110. The mounting holes are used to mount the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by inserting mounting screws from the front and screwing them into mounting holes 1114 (see FIG. 104) of the panel plate 1110 and tightening them while the flange portion is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the ball receiving sections, i.e., the three general winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the rear end of the gutter section extending rearward from the ball receiving sections is located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving section) to the rear of the game panel 1100 using the gutter section, and passes it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. The game ball B passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is then detected by the general winning port sensor 3001 and discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the same manner as above, and is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

This side unit 2200 has a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the ball receiving parts, each of which has a U-shaped cross section, to the front end of the shelf part 2201, which has a frame-shaped cross section, and therefore has higher rigidity than conventional side units in which multiple ball receiving parts protrude forward from a flat base plate. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the side unit 2200 will not bend when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2200 is pulled forward, due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2200. As a result, the positioning protrusions of the side unit 2200 will not tilt relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2200 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

In addition, because part of the front panel of the side unit 2200 at the front end of the shelf portion 2201 protrudes above the shelf portion 2201, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1, the worker can easily pull the side unit 2200 forward by hooking their fingers on the part protruding from the shelf portion, improving the workability of the disassembly work.

In addition, when the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the flat base plate blocks the opening 1112 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel board 1110.

[12-1. Side unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 103 to 105. Figure 103(a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board on which the side unit of the second embodiment is provided, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. Figure 104(a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit disassembled from the game panel in the game board of Figure 103, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit of (a) disassembled from the front, (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit seen from the back of (b), and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in a vertical section. Figure 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit of Figure 104 and the game panel in a cross section.

In the game board 5 on which the side unit 2800 of this embodiment is provided, parts having the same configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. 78 are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The side unit 2800 of the second embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2800 has three general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 104 etc., the side unit 2800 is composed of a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, and a second component 2812 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a number of ball receiving portions 2811b that protrude forward from the base plate 2811a and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The three ball receiving portions 2811b are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and are positioned further downward than the rightmost ball receiving portion 2811b. The leftmost ball receiving portion 2811b has a front end surface parallel to the base plate 2811a all the way to the bottom end. The remaining (center and rightmost) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined so that their front end surfaces move further rearward as they approach the bottom end.

The first component 2811 also has two positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a, multiple (three in this case) mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the gaming panel 1100, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component 2812.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusions 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c are the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the top near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess on the front side, and a countersunk head mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The mounting hole is where the mounting screw inserted into the mounting hole (not shown) of the second component 2812 described below is screwed into.

The second component 2812 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and has a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component 2811.

As shown in Figures 104(d) and 105, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth fits within the thickness of the panel board 1110. Note that Figure 104(d) shows a cut at the ball receiving portion 2811b in the center in the left-right direction.

The spherical passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is formed so as to follow the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000 and to become lower toward the right along the surface of the panel plate 1110. The passage outlet 2812b opens toward the rear at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the spherical passage 2812a.

The mounting holes of the second component 2812 are provided at locations corresponding to the mounting holes of the first component 2811. The second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear by inserting mounting screws from the rear into the mounting holes of the second component 2812 and screwing them into the mounting holes of the first component 2811.

As shown in FIG. 105, the side unit 2800 of this embodiment has a branch portion 2801 (a portion shown with light shading in FIG. 105) that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b), and a main portion 2802 (a portion shown with dark shading in FIG. 105) that merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of multiple branch portions 2801 and the main portion 2802.

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a position forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a position (within the thickness of the panel plate 1110) rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main portion 2802.

The main flow section 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from near the left end to near the right end of the base plate 2811a so as to lower to the right. The length of the main flow section 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the gaming ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

The side unit 2800 of this embodiment is assembled by positioning the second component 2812 behind the first component 2811 and screwing mounting screws from the rear of the second component 2812 through mounting holes in the second component 2812 into mounting holes in the first component 2811. This completes the construction of the side unit 2800 in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is open to the front as shown in the figure, but when the first component 2811 is attached to the front side to construct the side unit 2800, the front end side of the ball passage 2812a is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811, and the game ball B does not spill forward from the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is formed by the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812.

This side unit 2800 abuts the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing and tightening a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating up due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

When the side unit 2800 is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 is located within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, when assembled to the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, making it possible to secure a large space behind the panel plate 1110.

In this embodiment, the side unit 2800 and the panel board 1110 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the decoration of the performance unit provided behind the panel board 1110 can be seen from the front through the side unit 2800, etc. Here, a back-bottom performance unit 3500 having a back-bottom movable decoration 3510 that can rise and fall according to the progress of the game is provided behind the side unit 2800. This back-bottom movable decoration 3510 is provided so that it can rise and fall between a standby position where most of the entirety is located below the frame of the center role 2500, and an application position where it rises from the standby position and is located within the frame of the center role 2500. And, when the back-bottom movable decoration 3510 is in the standby position where it is lowered, it can be seen from the front through the transparent side unit 2800 and the panel board 1110.

In the side unit 2800, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110, and after flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, it is handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 located at the rear from the passage exit 2812b. The game ball B handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage exit 2812b of the second component 2812 is provided below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In other words, the general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800, the general winning port sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole sensor 3001 is not provided in the side unit 2800, but is provided in the back unit 3000 (back ball guide unit 3100). In other words, the side unit 2800 has a non-wired structure. In this way, by providing electronic components such as ball sensors and magnetic sensors with wiring to the back unit 3000 for various units attached from the front side of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, when the mounting screws attached to the panel board 1110 are removed and the unit is pulled forward, the unit is connected by wiring through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, so there is no need to cut the wiring or unplug it from the connector, and the unit can be removed forward from the panel board 1110 without worrying about the wiring, allowing for efficient disassembly.

According to the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, a flat base plate 2811a is provided on the first component member 2811, and by screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 via the mounting hole 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a to attach the first component member 2811 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a, and it is possible to hide the rear of the panel plate 1110 (gaming panel 1100) from the front side (player side) through the opening 1112, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). On the other hand, the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. Since the base plate 2811a is flat, the rigidity of the first component 2811 may be reduced, but the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 with mounting screws through its mounting hole to form the side unit 2800, so the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screw screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is removed and the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, and the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800 (first component 2811) does not tilt relative to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

However, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811, when the first component 2811 is pulled forward during disassembly, the first component 2811 is bent in a curved shape so that the centre of the first component 2811 moves forward. This bending creates a force that tilts each of the positioning protrusions 2811c so that the tips of the positioning protrusions 2811c, which are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction, move closer to each other, which may prevent the positioning protrusions 2811c from coming out of the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 to the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased, so that even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 does not bend and the positioning protrusions 2811c that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction do not tilt, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for separation.

Furthermore, since the multiple ball receiving portions 2811b protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward to remove it from the panel plate 1110 during disassembly of the pachinko machine 1, the ball receiving portions 2811b can be grasped and pulled, making it easier to remove the side unit 2800.

In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the gaming area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, because the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 with mounting screws through mounting holes (not shown), the mounting screws attaching the second component 2812 can be made less visible from the front, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

In addition, a ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 to allow the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning opening 2001) to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, protruding into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and to easily secure the empty space behind the panel plate 1110, compared to the conventional side unit in which the game ball B that has entered the general winning opening 2001 is guided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to allow it to flow downward. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a back-under performance unit 3500 (back-under movable decoration 3510) in the empty space, and a pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to players can be provided.

Furthermore, the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811, so that when the side unit 2800 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the gaming panel 1100.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited to this, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the board thickness is thicker than that of a resin panel, making it easier to make more effective use of the board thickness of the gaming panel 1100.

In addition, the above side unit 2800 has a ball passage 2812a composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2812c, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving section 2811b.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800 is shown as not being provided with a ball sensor to detect the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b, but this is not limited thereto, and the ball sensor may be provided. If the side unit 2800 is provided with a ball sensor, it is preferable to provide the ball sensor within the thickness of the panel board 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear performance device (the rear-bottom performance unit 3500).

In addition, while the above side unit 2800 does not have an LED board on the rear side, this is not limiting and LEDs for illumination and decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800 is provided with an LED board, it is desirable to provide a unit cover that covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end face abuts the rear face of the side unit 2800 (second component 2812), and to provide a non-contact surface portion where the unit cover and the side unit are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portion where they are in contact with each other. This allows the side unit 2800 to be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs on the LED board, and allows heat from the LEDs to be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

[12-2. Modifications of Side Unit]
Next, various modifications of the side unit 2800 of the above embodiment will be described in detail.

[12-2a. Modification 1 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800A having a different configuration from the side unit 2800 shown in Fig. 103 etc. will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 106 etc. Fig. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit having a different configuration from the side unit in Fig. 103 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800A extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800A is composed of a first component 2811 that is attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, and a second component 2813 that is provided on the rear side of the first component 2811.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800A has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a number of ball receiving portions 2811b that protrude forward from the base plate 2811a and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001. The first component 2811 also has a number of positioning projections 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, and a number of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for mounting to the gaming panel 1100 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. A plurality of positioning projections 2811c are provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A has a ball passage 2813a through which a game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning port 2001) of the first component 2811 can flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within an opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 so that the game ball B is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and a ball sensor 2813b that detects the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2813a.

The second component 2813 may be made up of a single component, or may be made up of a combination of multiple components.

As shown in the figure, this spherical passage 2813a is placed near the lower end of the opening 1112 and bent backwards, then bent downwards to follow the rear surface of the panel board 1110, with its downstream end extending below the opening 1112. In other words, the spherical passage 2813a bends backwards at a location below the rear-bottom performance unit 3500 (rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510) located at the rear. This allows sufficient space to be secured for the placement of the rear-bottom performance unit 3500, and allows the movable range (lifting and lowering range) of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 to be widened or the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 to be made larger.

The ball sensor 2813b is provided at a portion extending along the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the ball passage 2813a. In other words, the ball sensor 2813b is provided at a portion lower than the back-under performance unit 3500 (back-under movable decorative body 3510) provided at the rear of the ball passage 2813a, and does not interfere with the back-under movable decorative body 3510.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800A is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 by abutting the base plate 2811a against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the corresponding opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110, and by screwing and tightening mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 via the mounting holes 2811d while inserting the multiple positioning protrusions 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110.

On the other hand, the second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A is attached to the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. When the second component 2813 is attached to the rear unit 3000, a part of the ball passage 2813a (the part housed in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110) protrudes forward from the rear box 3010, although this is not shown in the figure.

When the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, the portion of the second component 2813 that protrudes forward from the rear box 3010 is inserted from the rear into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and this portion is positioned behind the first component 2811 to form the side unit 2800A.

When this side unit 2800A is assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface of the portion of the ball passage 2813a of the second component 2813 that is within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The amount of protrusion TL is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B.

Incidentally, when the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the portion of the gaming area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted tends to be thinner than when the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or cut from a resin board, so there is a risk that the portion of the second component 2813 in the ball passage 2813a that is aligned with the surface of the panel board 1110 will not be able to fit within the thickness of the panel board 1110 and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. And if the second component 2813 protrudes rearward by a large amount beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110, it will be impossible to secure sufficient space behind. In contrast, in this embodiment, the amount of protrusion TL from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 at the ball passage 2813a portion of the second component 2813 is less than half the diameter D of the game ball B, so that sufficient space can be secured at the rear, allowing a desired size of back-bottom performance unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) to be provided.

In the side unit 2800A, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811 forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2813a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component 2813. The game ball B delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component 2813 first flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to be within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and flows rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 near the lower end of the opening 1112, and then flows downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. After that, the game ball B is detected by the ball sensor 2813b and discharged downward from an outlet not shown.

The side unit 2800A of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800A, the second component 2813 on which the ball sensor 2813b is provided is attached to the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), so the ball sensor 2813b is not provided on the first component 2811 attached to the panel plate 1110. Therefore, electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b are gathered together in the back unit 3000, and the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b is not extended from the game panel 1100 side, so that in the manufacture of the game board 5, when assembling the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000, the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b will not get caught on obstacle nails, etc., and it is possible to avoid cutting of the wiring due to getting caught, and to improve the workability of the assembly work.

In addition, when the side unit 2800A is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

The side unit 2800A may be provided with an independent ball passage 2813a for each ball receiving section 2811b, or, similar to the ball passage 2812a of the side unit 2800, a single ball passage 2813a may be provided downstream of the ball receiving section 2811b to allow the game balls B that enter each ball receiving section 2811b to merge.

In addition, in the above side unit 2800A, the second component 2813 is attached to the rear unit 3000, but this is not limited to the above, and the second component 2813 may be attached to the rear side of the first component 2811.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited to this, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the board thickness is thicker than that of a resin panel, making it easier to make more effective use of the board thickness of the gaming panel 1100.

[12-2b. Modification 2 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800B having a different configuration from the side unit 2800 and side unit 2800A described above will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 107. Fig. 107(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical section of a side unit having a different configuration from the side unit shown in Fig. 105 together with a game panel, and Fig. 107(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the main parts of the LED board and board cover of the side unit in Fig. 107(a). Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800B extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800B comprises a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and an LED board 2825 mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2825a and disposed between the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820. The unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800B also has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided as part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B has a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a second component 2812 attached from the rear to the first component 2811, and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811. Also, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component member 2812.

The first component 2811 of the unit body 2810 has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b that protrude forward from the base plate 2811a and are open at the top and rear to form the general winning opening 2001. The first component 2811 also has a plurality of positioning projections 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) that are provided on the rear end surface of the base plate 2811a and are used for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. A plurality of positioning projections 2811c are provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2812 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and has a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a passage outlet (not shown) that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, multiple mounting holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811, and a mounting hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820.

The second component 2812 has a support frame 2814 on the rear side, the rear end of which abuts against the front end of the unit cover 2820. In other words, the second component 2812 has a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and the rear end surface of which abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. When assembled to the side unit 2800B, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 abuts against the front end surface of a peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b form the contact surface 2830.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component member 2812 is provided above the passage outlet (not shown) which is the outlet of the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the passage outlet of the second component member 2812 is provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830).

The unit body 2810 is assembled by positioning the second component 2812 behind the first component 2811 and screwing mounting screws from the rear of the second component 2812 through mounting holes in the second component 2812 into mounting holes in the first component 2811. This results in the construction of the unit body 2810 in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 107, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth is within the thickness of the panel board 1110.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens to the front, and houses an LED board 2825 inside. As shown in FIG. 107, this unit cover 2820 has a flat cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b that protrudes forward from the outer periphery of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c that is recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with multiple slits for ventilation.

The unit cover 2820 also has multiple bosses 2820d that protrude forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a and are shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, for mounting the LED board 2825, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) that penetrate the cover portion 2820a and through which mounting screws for mounting to the unit body 2810 are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed to a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b abuts against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810 when assembled to the side unit 2800B. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The notch 2820c is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c to the side unit 2800B, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame 2814 in the unit body 2810. In other words, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 composed of the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-shaped unit cover 2820, and allows heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be dissipated to the outside, so that heat does not build up in the unit cover 2820.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800B is attached to the inside of the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface abutting against the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The multiple LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800B can be decorated with illumination in a variety of colors.

This side unit 2800B can be assembled by attaching the LED board 2825 to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, abutting (contacting) the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810, and screwing and tightening mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the second component member 2812 of the unit body 2810.

To attach the side unit 2800B to the gaming panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800B, the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110. The cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component 2812 is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. The side unit 2800B is formed by attaching the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, to the first component 2811, which may have a low rigidity due to having a flat base plate 2811a, from the rear side of the first component 2811, so that the rigidity of the side unit 2800B can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800B to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800B is pulled forward, the side unit 2800B does not bend because the rigidity of the side unit 2800B is increased. This prevents the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800B (first component 2811) from tilting relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, allowing the side unit 2800B to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

When the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and a part of the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) is provided on the top and bottom, the upper cutout portion 2820c can discharge heat from the LED board 2825 upward, while the lower cutout portion 2820c can take in outside air. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the second component member 2812, and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. This makes it easier for heat from the LED board 2825 to be released to the outside through the cutout 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in a plan view. This makes it difficult for dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 even if dust and dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, and the effects of dust and dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that enters from the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

In addition, by assembling the side unit 2800B of this embodiment to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800B is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The amount of this protrusion is less than 1/2 the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

When the gaming panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the portion of the gaming area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted tends to be thinner than when the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or cut from a resin board, so there is a risk that the portion of the ball passage 2812a of the unit body 2810 that is aligned with the surface of the panel board 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 will not fit within the thickness of the panel board 1110 and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the side unit 2800B protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110 by a large amount, it will be impossible to secure sufficient space behind. In contrast, in this embodiment, the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the portion of the side unit 2800B that is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 at the ball passage 2813a and extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 is less than 1/2 the diameter D of the game ball B, so that sufficient space can be secured at the rear, and a back-bottom performance unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) of the desired size can be provided.

In the side unit 2800B, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110, and after flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, it is handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 located at the rear from a passage exit not shown. The game ball B handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, the passage outlet (not shown) of the second component 2812 in the unit body 2810 is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In other words, the general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800B, the general winning port sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, the unit body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 in FIG. 104, and has a branch section 2801 that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving section 2811b), and a main stream section 2802 that merges with the branch section 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of multiple branch sections 2801 and the main stream section 2802.

The side unit 2800B of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above-mentioned side unit 2800B, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with a notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), but this is not limited thereto. Instead of providing a notch 2820c in the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, a notch (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut from the rear end to the front may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface portion) may be provided in both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800B, the unit body 2810 is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, this is not limited to this, and the unit body 2810 may not be provided with the support frame portion 2814, and the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be made to abut against the rear surface of the unit body 2810, and the abutting portion may be made the contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800B can be reduced, and a larger empty space can be secured behind the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800B, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited thereto, and the LED board 2825 may be attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 (second component 2812).

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800B, a diffusion lens section consisting of multiple projections and recesses that diffuse the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800B has a ball passage 2812a composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2811b, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving section 2811b.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. By making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the thickness of the panel becomes thicker than that of a resin panel, so that the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 can be more effectively utilized. However, if the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and diffuses into the panel plate 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward decreases, which may weaken the performance effect of the light emission. In contrast, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, but can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the light emission.

[12-2c. Modification 3 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800C having a different form from the above will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 108. Fig. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit having a different form from the side unit shown in Fig. 107 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the above side unit 2800B will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800C extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800C includes a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and an LED board 2825 on which multiple LEDs 2825a are mounted, which is provided between the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820. The unit body 2810 and unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800C also has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided as part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B has a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a second component 2812 attached from the rear to the first component 2811, a support frame part 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts against the front end face of the unit cover 2820, and a ball sensor 2815 (general winning port sensor 3001) that is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 and detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001. In this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811. Also, in this embodiment, the support frame part 2814 protrudes from the rear face of the second component 2812.

The first component 2811 of the unit body 2810 has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b that protrude forward from the base plate 2811a and are open at the top and rear to form the general winning opening 2001. The first component 2811 also has a plurality of positioning projections 2811c that protrude rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d that penetrate the base plate 2811a and are used for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) that are provided on the rear end surface of the base plate 2811a and are used for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. A plurality of positioning projections 2811c are provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811.

The second component 2812 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and has a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, multiple mounting holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811, and a mounting hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820.

The second component 2812 has a support frame 2814 on the rear side, the rear end of which abuts against the front end of the unit cover 2820. In other words, the second component 2812 has a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and the rear end surface of which abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. When assembled to the side unit 2800C, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 abuts against the front end surface of a peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b form the contact surface 2830.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component member 2812 is provided above the passage exit 2812b of the spherical passage 2812a and the spherical sensor 2815. In other words, the passage exit 2812b and the spherical sensor 2815 of the second component member 2812 are provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830). This makes it less likely that the spherical sensor 2815 will interfere with the illumination decoration provided by the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825.

The unit body 2810 is assembled by positioning the second component 2812 behind the first component 2811 and screwing a mounting screw from the rear of the second component 2812 through a mounting hole in the second component 2812 into a mounting hole in the first component 2811. At this time, the ball sensor 2815 is placed and assembled at a predetermined position in the ball passage 2812a so that it is sandwiched between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. This completes the unit body 2810 in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 108, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth is within the thickness of the panel board 1110.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800C is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens to the front, and houses an LED board 2825 inside. This unit cover 2820 has a flat cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b that protrudes forward from the outer periphery of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c that is recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with multiple slit holes for ventilation.

The unit cover 2820 also has multiple bosses 2820d that protrude forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a and are shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, for mounting the LED board 2825, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) that penetrate the cover portion 2820a and through which mounting screws for mounting to the unit body 2810 are inserted.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed to a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b abuts against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810 when assembled to the side unit 2800C. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The notch 2820c is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c to the side unit 2800C, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame 2814 in the unit body 2810. In other words, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 composed of the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-shaped unit cover 2820, and allows heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be dissipated to the outside, so that heat does not build up in the unit cover 2820.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800C is attached to the inside of the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface abutting against the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The multiple LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800C can be decorated with illumination in a variety of colors.

This side unit 2800C can be assembled by attaching the LED board 2825 to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, abutting (contacting) the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810, and screwing and tightening mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the second component member 2812 of the unit body 2810.

To attach the side unit 2800C to the gaming panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 and tightening it into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800C, the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110. The cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component 2812 is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. The side unit 2800C is formed by attaching the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, from the rear side of the first component 2811 to the first component 2811, which may have a low rigidity due to having a flat base plate 2811a, so that the rigidity of the side unit 2800C can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800C to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800C is pulled forward, the side unit 2800C does not bend because the rigidity of the side unit 2800C is increased. This prevents the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800C (first component 2811) from tilting relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, allowing the side unit 2800C to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

When the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 and ball sensor 2815 of the unit body 2810 are located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and are located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and a part of the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) is provided on the top and bottom, the upper cutout portion 2820c can discharge heat from the LED board 2825 upward, while the lower cutout portion 2820c can take in outside air. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800C inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the second component member 2812, and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. This makes it easier for heat from the LED board 2825 to be released to the outside through the cutout 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in a plan view. This makes it difficult for dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 even if dust and dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, and prevents the effects of dust and dirt as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that enters from the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

In addition, by assembling the side unit 2800C of this embodiment to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The amount of this protrusion is less than 1/2 the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

When the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted tends to be thinner than when the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or cut from a resin board, so there is a risk that the part of the ball passage 2812a of the unit body 2810 that is aligned with the surface of the panel board 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 will not fit within the thickness of the panel board 1110 and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the side unit 2800C protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110 by a large amount, it will be impossible to secure sufficient space behind. In contrast, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800C, the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the portion of the ball passage 2813a that is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 and extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 is less than 1/2 the diameter D of the game ball B, so that sufficient space can be secured at the rear, and a back-bottom performance unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) of the desired size can be provided.

In the side unit 2800C, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the ball passage 2812a causes the ball to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and after being detected by the ball sensor 2815, it is discharged from the passage exit 2812b which opens toward the rear.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the side unit 2800C of this embodiment has a passage outlet 2812b of the second component 2812 in the unit body 2810 located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In addition, a ball sensor 2815 (general winning port sensor 3001) that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is located within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 and within the plate thickness of the panel board 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800C, the ball sensor 2815, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, the unit body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 in FIG. 104, and has a branch portion 2801 that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b), and a main stream portion 2802 that merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of multiple branch portions 2801 and the main stream portion 2802.

The side unit 2800C of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above-mentioned side unit 2800C, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with a notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), but this is not limited thereto. Instead of providing a notch 2820c in the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, a notch (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut from the rear end to the front may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810. Alternatively, a notch (non-contact surface portion) may be provided in both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800C, the unit body 2810 is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, this is not limited to this, and the unit body 2810 may not be provided with the support frame portion 2814, and the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be made to abut against the rear surface of the unit body 2810, and the abutting portion may be made the contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800C can be reduced, and a larger empty space can be secured behind the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800C, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited to the above, and the LED board 2825 may be attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810 (second component 2812).

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800C, a diffusion lens section consisting of multiple projections and recesses that diffuse the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800C has a ball passage 2812a composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2811b, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving section 2811b.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. By making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the thickness of the panel becomes thicker than that of a resin panel, making it easier to use the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 more effectively. However, if the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and diffuses into the panel plate 1110, reducing the amount of light irradiated forward, which may weaken the performance effect of the light emission. In contrast, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, but can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the light emission.

[12-2d. Modification 4 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800D having a different configuration from the above will be described with reference to Fig. 109 and other figures. Fig. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit having a different configuration together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the above side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, and side unit 2800C will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800D extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800D comprises a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and an LED board 2825 on which multiple LEDs 2825a are mounted, which is provided between the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. The unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D are formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800D has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided as part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other.

The unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800D has a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a second component 2812A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A, and a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. In addition, the support frame 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a ball passage 2811e that penetrates the base plate 2811a and through which the game ball B can flow. The upstream end of the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A is located behind the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A described later.

The first component 2811A also has a number of positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a, a number of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the gaming panel 1100, a number of mounting holes (not shown) penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting the second component 2812A, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. A plurality of positioning projections 2811c are provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 on the rear side, the rear end of which abuts against the front end of the unit cover 2820. In other words, the first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and the rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. The support frame 2814 is provided at a location below the ball passage 2811e on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame 2814 abuts against the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b (described later) of the unit cover 2820 when assembled to the side unit 2800D. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The second component 2812A has a number of ball receiving sections 2812c that extend slightly in the front-to-rear direction and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001, a flat front plate 2812d that connects the front ends of the ball receiving sections 2812c, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component 2811A. The ball receiving sections 2812c are located in front of the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component 2812A.

The unit body 2810A is assembled by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A and screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A from the rear into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A. This creates the unit body 2810A in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward in front of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first component 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth is within the thickness of the panel board 1110.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens to the front, and houses an LED board 2825 inside. This unit cover 2820 has a flat cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b that protrudes forward from the outer periphery of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c that is recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with multiple slit holes for ventilation.

The unit cover 2820 also has multiple bosses 2820d that protrude forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a and are shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, for mounting the LED board 2825, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) that penetrate the cover portion 2820a and through which mounting screws are inserted for mounting to the unit body 2810A.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed to a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. When assembled to the side unit 2800D, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b abuts against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The notch 2820c is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame 2814 in the unit body 2810A. In other words, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 composed of the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-shaped unit cover 2820, and allows heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be dissipated to the outside, so that heat does not build up in the unit cover 2820.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800D is attached to the inside of the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface abutting against the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The multiple LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800D can be decorated with illumination in a variety of colors.

This side unit 2800D can be assembled by attaching the LED board 2825 to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, abutting (contacting) the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A, and screwing and tightening mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800D to the gaming panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800D, by assembling it to the unit body 2810A, the front and rear ends of the multiple ball receiving portions 2812c in the second component member 2812A are sandwiched between the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A and the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A, so that the rigidity can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800D to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800D is pulled forward during disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800D is increased so that the side unit 2800D does not bend. This prevents the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800D (first component 2811A) from tilting relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and allows the side unit 2800D to be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the amount of disassembly required for separation.

When the side unit 2800D is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A in the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) are located within the thickness of the panel board 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and are located forward of the rear surface of the panel board 1110. As a result, since the LED board 2825 is provided within the thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the thickness of the panel board 1110 is effectively utilized, making it easier to secure empty space behind the LED board 2825 (unit cover 2820). Therefore, it is possible to provide part of the performance device in the empty space, and a pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to players can be provided.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 has cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) on the top and bottom, so that the upper cutout 2820c allows heat from the LED board 2825 to be discharged upward, while the lower cutout 2820c allows outside air to be taken in. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800D that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. This makes it easier for heat from the LED board 2825 to be released to the outside through the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing for efficient heat dissipation.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in a plan view. This makes it difficult for dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 even if dust and dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, and the effects of dust and dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that enters from the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800D of this embodiment is assembled to the gaming board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is located within the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so dust and dirt are unlikely to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800D of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 in the unit cover 2820 to be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch portion 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and prevents foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

In the side unit 2800D, when a game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2811e of the rear first component member 2811A by the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A forming the general winning port 2001, and after flowing rearward through the thickness of the panel plate 1110 by the ball passage 2811e, it is handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110 (game panel 1100). The game ball B handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

The side unit 2800D of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above side unit 2800D, the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with a notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831), but this is not limited thereto. The peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 may not have a notch 2820c, and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A may have a notch (non-contact surface 2831) cut forward from the rear end. Alternatively, the notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800D, the unit body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830, but this is not limited to the above. The unit body 2810A may not be provided with a support frame portion 2814, and the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be made to abut against the rear surface of the unit body 2810A, with the abutting portion being the contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since there is no support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, the LED board 2825 can be positioned further forward, and a brighter light-emitting decoration (light-emitting performance) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800D, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited thereto, and the LED board 2825 may be attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A (first component 2811A).

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800D, a diffusion lens section consisting of multiple projections and recesses that diffuse the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A) or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810A.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. By making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the thickness of the panel becomes thicker than that of a resin panel, so that the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 can be more effectively utilized. However, if the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and diffuses into the panel plate 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward decreases, which may weaken the performance effect of the light emission. In contrast, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, but can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the light emission.

[12-2e. Modification 5 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800E having a different configuration from the above will be described with reference to Fig. 110. Fig. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of a side unit having a different configuration together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the above side unit 2800D will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800E extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800E comprises a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and an LED board 2825 on which multiple LEDs 2825a are mounted, which is provided between the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. The unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E are formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800E has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided as part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other.

The unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800E has a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a second component 2812A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A, and a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. In addition, the support frame 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a ball passage 2811e that penetrates the base plate 2811a and opens forward, allowing the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a passage outlet (not shown) that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e.

The first component 2811A also has a number of positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a, a number of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the gaming panel 1100, a number of mounting holes (not shown) penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting the second component 2812A, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. A plurality of positioning projections 2811c are provided at intervals in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 on the rear side, the rear end of which abuts against the front end of the unit cover 2820. In other words, the first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and the rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. The support frame 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame 2814 abuts against the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, when assembled to the side unit 2800E. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The second component 2812A has a number of ball receiving sections 2812c that extend slightly in the front-to-rear direction and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001, a flat rear plate 2812e that connects the rear ends of the ball receiving sections 2812c, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A and the front surface of the rear plate 2812e.

The unit body 2810A is assembled by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A and screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A from the rear into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A. This creates the unit body 2810A in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward in front of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

The unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800E has a branch section 2801 that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving section 2812c), and a main section 2802 that merges with the branch section 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The ball passage 2811e is composed of multiple branch sections 2801 and the main section 2802.

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a position forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a position (within the thickness of the panel plate 1110) rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main portion 2802.

The main flow section 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from near the left end to near the right end of the base plate 2811a so as to lower to the right. The length of the main flow section 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the gaming ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In addition, when assembled to the unit main body 2810A, the ball passage 2811e, which is open forward in the first component member 2811A, is closed by the rear plate 2812e of the second component member 2812A except for the rear of the ball receiving portion 2812c, so that the game ball B does not spill forward from the ball passage 2811e. In other words, the ball passage 2811e is formed by the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A. In other words, the ball passage 2811e is provided between the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 110, the first component 2811A of this embodiment, except for the base plate 2811a, is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens to the front, and houses an LED board 2825 inside. This unit cover 2820 has a flat cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b that protrudes forward from the outer periphery of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c that is recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with multiple slit holes for ventilation.

The unit cover 2820 also has multiple bosses 2820d that protrude forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a and are shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, for mounting the LED board 2825, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) that penetrate the cover portion 2820a and through which mounting screws are inserted for mounting to the unit body 2810A.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed to a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. When assembled to the side unit 2800E, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b abuts against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The notch 2820c is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame 2814 in the unit body 2810A. In other words, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 composed of the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-shaped unit cover 2820, and allows heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be dissipated to the outside, so that heat does not build up in the unit cover 2820.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800E is attached to the inside of the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface abutting against the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The multiple LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800E can be decorated with illumination in a variety of colors.

This side unit 2800E can be assembled by attaching the LED board 2825 to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, abutting (contacting) the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A, and screwing and tightening mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800E to the gaming panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800E, the first component 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component 2811A. On the other hand, the second component 2812A has a shape in which multiple ball receiving portions 2812c protrude forward from the flat rear plate 2812e, so it is similar to a conventional side unit and has low rigidity, but by assembling it to the unit main body 2810A, the first component 2811A, which has increased rigidity, can increase the rigidity more than that of a conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800E to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800E is pulled forward, the side unit 2800E does not bend because the rigidity of the side unit 2800E is increased. This prevents the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800E (first component 2811A) from tilting relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, allowing the side unit 2800E to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

When the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A is located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, when assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. At this time, since the notches 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) are provided on the top and bottom, the heat from the LED board 2825 can be discharged upward through the upper notch 2820c, while the outside air can be taken in through the lower notch 2820c. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800E inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, the outer periphery of the ball passage 2811e in the first component member 2811A and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. As a result, heat from the LED board 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be dissipated efficiently.

In addition, in the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in a plan view. This makes it difficult for dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 even if dust and dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, and prevents the effects of dust and dirt as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that enters from the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E of this embodiment is assembled to the gaming board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is located within the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so dust and dirt are unlikely to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800E of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 in the unit cover 2820 to be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch portion 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and prevents foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 110, a portion (front end side) of the ball passage 2811e provided in the unit main body 2810A protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Here, the ball passage 2811e protrudes forward by the thickness of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of protrusion of the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, so that sufficient space can be secured behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a desired size of back-under performance unit 3500 (back-under movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

The amount of rearward protrusion from the panel plate 1110 is set to less than 1/2 the diameter D of the game ball B, similar to the side unit 2800A in FIG. 106.

When the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a where the obstacle nails are planted tends to be thinner than when the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is made of wooden plywood or cut from a resin board, so there is a risk that the part of the ball passage 2811e of the unit body 2810A that is aligned with the surface of the panel board 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810A will not fit within the thickness of the panel board 1110 and will protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110. If the side unit 2800E protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110 by a large amount, it will be impossible to secure sufficient space behind. In contrast, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800E protrudes from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 by less than half the diameter D of the game ball B, so that sufficient space can be secured at the rear, allowing a desired size of back-bottom performance unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) to be installed.

In the side unit 2800E, when a game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001, it is guided to the rear ball passage 2811e by the ball receiving portion 2812c forming the general winning port 2001, and after flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 while being caught within the thickness of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2811e, it is handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear from the passage exit not shown. The game ball B handed over to the rear ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted for the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, the passage outlet (not shown) of the first component 2811A in the unit body 2810A is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In other words, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800E, the general winning opening sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

The side unit 2800E of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above side unit 2800E, the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with a notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831), but this is not limited thereto. The peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 may not have a notch 2820c, and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A may have a notch (non-contact surface 2831) cut forward from the rear end. Alternatively, the notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800E, the unit body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, this is not limited to this, and the unit body 2810A may not be provided with the support frame portion 2814, and the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be made to abut against the rear surface of the unit body 2810A, and the abutting portion may be made the contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of protrusion rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800E can be reduced, and it is possible to secure a larger empty space behind the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800E, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited thereto, and the LED board 2825 may be attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A (first component 2811A).

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800E, a diffusion lens section consisting of multiple projections and recesses that diffuse the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A) or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800E has a ball passage 2811e that is composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2812c, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving section 2812c.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. By making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the thickness of the panel becomes thicker than that of a resin panel, so that the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 can be more effectively utilized. However, if the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and diffuses into the panel plate 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward decreases, which may weaken the performance effect of the light emission. In contrast, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, but can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the light emission.

[12-2f. Modification 6 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800F having a different form from the above will be described mainly with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit having a different form together with a game panel in cross section, and Fig. 111(b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in vertical section. Here, the same components as those of the above side unit 2800D will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800F extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is equipped with multiple (2 to 4) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800F includes a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and an LED board 2825 on which multiple LEDs 2825a are mounted, which is provided between the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. The unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F are formed from a transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800F has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is provided as part of the contact surface portion 2830 and is not in contact with each other.

The unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800F has a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the game panel 1100 are planted, a second component 2812A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A, and a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts against the front end face of the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. In addition, the support frame 2814 protrudes from the rear face of the first component 2811A.

The first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a ball passage 2811e that penetrates the base plate 2811a and opens forward, allowing the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a passage outlet (not shown) that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e.

The first component 2811A also has a number of positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a, a number of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the gaming panel 1100, a number of mounting holes (not shown) penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting the second component 2812A, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. In addition, in the side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e of the first component 2811A is provided below the vertical center of the base plate 2811a.

The positioning projections 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning projections 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, each positioning projection 2811c has the same length. The mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning projections 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess formed on the front side, and a countersunk mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 on the rear side, the rear end of which abuts against the front end of the unit cover 2820. In other words, the first component 2811A has a support frame 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer periphery of the unit cover 2820 and the rear end surface abuts against the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. The support frame 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a above the ball passage 2811e. The rear end surface of the support frame 2814 abuts against the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, when assembled to the side unit 2800F. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830.

The second component 2812A has a number of ball receiving sections 2812c that extend slightly in the front-to-rear direction and are open at the top and bottom, forming the general winning opening 2001, a flat front plate 2812d that connects the front ends of the number of ball receiving sections 2812c, a ball passage 2812f that is located behind the front plate 2812d and below the ball receiving sections 2812c and is open to the rear, through which the game balls B received in the ball receiving sections 2812c flow, and a number of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a translucent decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component 2812A.

The unit body 2810A is assembled by positioning the second component 2812A in front of the first component 2811A and screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole of the first component 2811A from the rear into the mounting hole of the second component 2812A. This creates the unit body 2810A in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear. In this unit body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward in front of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

The unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800F has a branch section 2801 (a portion shown with light shading in FIG. 111) that is connected to the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving section 2812c), and a main section 2802 (a portion shown with dark shading in FIG. 111) that merges with the branch section 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f are composed of multiple branch sections 2801 and a main section 2802.

When viewed from the front, the tributary portion 2801 extends downward in front of the panel plate 1110 at the ball receiving portion 2812c in the left-right center and at the ball receiving portion 2812c on the left end, and at the ball receiving portion 2812c on the right end, it extends rearward from a position in front of the panel plate 1110 to a position within the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The main flow section 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 in front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the lower part of the ball receiving portion 2812c on the left end to the lower part of the ball receiving portion 2812c in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, bends backward at the lower part of the ball receiving portion 2812c in the center in the left-right direction, extends into the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and then extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 to the rear part of the ball receiving portion 2812c on the right end. The length of the main flow section 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the gaming ball B (8 to 15 times in this embodiment).

When assembled to the unit body 2810A, the ball passage 2811e that is open to the front in the first component member 2811A is closed by the ball passage 2812f and rear surface of the second component member 2812A. Also, the ball passage 2812f that is open to the rear in the second component member 2812A is closed by the base plate 2811a and ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A. This prevents the game ball B from spilling out of the ball passage 2811e and ball passage 2812f. In other words, the ball passage 2811e and ball passage 2812f are formed by the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A. In other words, the ball passage 2811e and ball passage 2812f are provided between the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 111, the first component 2811A of this embodiment, except for the base plate 2811a, is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens to the front, and houses an LED board 2825 inside. This unit cover 2820 has a flat cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b that protrudes forward from the outer periphery of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c that is recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. Note that the cover portion 2820a may be provided with multiple slit holes for ventilation.

The unit cover 2820 also has multiple bosses 2820d that protrude forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a and are shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, for mounting the LED board 2825, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) that penetrate the cover portion 2820a and through which mounting screws are inserted for mounting to the unit body 2810A.

The cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is formed to a size that covers the LED board 2825 from the rear. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. When assembled to the side unit 2800F, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b abuts against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. In other words, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b form the contact surface portion 2830.

The notch 2820c is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame 2814 in the unit body 2810A. In other words, the notch 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 composed of the rear end surface of the support frame 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall 2820b. This notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-shaped unit cover 2820, and allows heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside to be dissipated to the outside, so that heat does not build up in the unit cover 2820.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800F is attached to the inside of the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface abutting against the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820. The multiple LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800F, the side unit 2800F can be decorated with illumination in a variety of colors.

This side unit 2800F can be assembled by attaching the LED board 2825 to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, abutting (contacting) the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 against the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A, and screwing and tightening mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800F to the gaming panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811A is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

In the side unit 2800F, the first component 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped, so the rigidity of the first component 2811A is increased by the presence of the ball passage 2811e. On the other hand, the second component 2812A is also provided with a ball passage 2812f that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812f is U-shaped, so the rigidity of the second component 2812A is increased by the presence of the ball passage 2812f. As a result, the side unit 2800F is constructed by combining the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A, which have increased rigidity, so that the rigidity can be increased more than that of conventional side units. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800F to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800F is pulled forward, the side unit 2800F does not bend because the rigidity of the side unit 2800F is increased. Because of this, the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800F (first component 2811A) do not tilt relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800F can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

When the side unit 2800F is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e and unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) of the first component 2811A in the unit body 2810A are located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and are located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, when assembled to the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, making it possible to secure a large space behind the panel plate 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided on the top and bottom, so that the upper cutout 2820c allows heat from the LED board 2825 to be discharged upward, while the lower cutout 2820c allows outside air to be taken in. In addition, when assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the unit body 2810A of the side unit 2800F that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, that is, between the outer periphery of the support frame portion 2814 of the first component member 2811A and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. As a result, heat from the LED board 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), allowing efficient heat dissipation.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in a plan view. This makes it difficult for dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 even if dust and dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, and prevents the effects of dust and dirt as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust and dirt that enters from the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F of this embodiment is assembled to the gaming board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is located within the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so dust and dirt are unlikely to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800F of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 in the unit cover 2820 to be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch portion 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and prevents foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the ball passage 2812f through which the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2812c flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. This allows the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) provided on the rear side of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A to be contained within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and to be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, it is possible to secure sufficient space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the side unit 2800F, and a desired size of the back-under performance unit 3500 (back-under movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

In the side unit 2800F, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it flows down to the ball passage 2812f below by the ball receiving portion 2812c that forms the general winning opening 2001, and flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball passage 2812f, and then bends backward in a crank shape and flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and is then handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear from a passage exit not shown. The game ball B handed over to the back ball guide unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward. On the other hand, if a game ball B flowing down toward the side unit 2800F is not received by the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) of the side unit 2800F, the game ball B flows down through the space between the base plate 2811a and the front plate 2812d to the outlet 1008, and is discharged through the outlet 1008 to the rear and below of the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 111(b), in the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, the passage outlet (not shown) of the first component 2811A in the unit body 2810A is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In other words, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is located below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800F, the general winning opening sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

The side unit 2800F of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above side unit 2800F, the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with a notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831), but this is not limited thereto. The peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 may not have a notch 2820c, and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A may have a notch (non-contact surface 2831) cut forward from the rear end. Alternatively, the notch (non-contact surface) may be provided in both the peripheral wall 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame 2814 of the unit body 2810A.

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800F, the unit main body 2810A is provided with a frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, this is not limiting, and the unit main body 2810A may not be provided with a support frame portion 2814, and the front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may be made to abut against the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A, with the abutting portion being the contact surface portion 2830. As a result, since a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward protrusion in the side unit 2800F can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800F, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited thereto, and the LED board 2825 may be attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A (first component 2811A).

In addition, in the above-mentioned side unit 2800F, a diffusion lens section consisting of multiple projections and recesses that diffuse the light from the LED 2825a may be provided in front of the LED board 2825. This diffusion lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A) or may be provided on a member separate from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800F has a ball passage 2811e composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2812c, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving section 2812c.

In the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited thereto, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. By making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the thickness of the panel becomes thicker than that of a resin panel, so that the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 can be more effectively utilized. However, if the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and diffuses into the panel plate 1110, and the amount of light irradiated forward decreases, which may weaken the performance effect of the light emission. In contrast, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the gaming panel 1100 from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, but can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the light emission.

[12-3. Side unit etc. of the third embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800G of the third embodiment will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 112 and 114. Fig. 112(a) is a front view showing the main part of a game board on which the side unit of the third embodiment is provided, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the outlet in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical section of (b). Fig. 113(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the outlet of a game board on which a side unit having a finger hook part of a different form from that in Fig. 112 is provided, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical section of (a). Fig. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing a panel plate of a game panel in which the opening to which the side unit is attached and the outlet are continuously connected. Here, the same configuration as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800G of the third embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160, and is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) from the front. The side unit 2800G has three general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B.

In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening area 1101 penetrating the panel plate 1110 through which game balls B can pass from the front side to the rear side of the panel plate 1110. This opening area 1101 is composed of a normal opening area 1102 through which game balls B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2800G can pass, and a specific opening area 1103 through which game balls B that are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 can pass. The normal opening area 1102 is an opening 1112 at the location where the side unit 2800G is attached, and the specific opening area 1103 is an outlet 1008. This outlet 1008 is formed in the shape of a notch that opens downward in the panel plate 1110.

In the embodiment of FIG. 112 and FIG. 113 described later, the normal opening area 1102 and the specific opening area 1103 constituting the opening area 1101 are independent and not connected to each other. In other words, the specific opening area 1103 is formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 separately from the normal opening area 1102. In other words, the outlet 1008 is formed by the specific opening area 1103 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 separately from the normal opening area 1102 in which the side unit 2800G is fitted. This makes it possible to reduce the area of the area of the panel plate 1110 that is open outwardly from the outer peripheral surface in a notched shape, thereby suppressing a decrease in the strength of the panel plate 1110 caused by forming the opening area 1101.

This side unit 2800G has a finger hook 2816 whose outer edge overlaps part of the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) that penetrates the panel board 1110 when it is attached to the panel board 1110. In other words, the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel board 1110 so that part of its outer edge overlaps the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103).

Since the side unit 2800G is provided with a finger hook 2816, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, by inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008 with the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 removed, the finger can be hooked on the finger hook 2816 and the side unit 2800G can be pulled forward. This allows the side unit 2800G to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), reducing the amount of disassembly work required for sorting.

To further explain the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the side unit 2800G, like the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. 104 etc., is composed of a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails of the gaming panel 1100 are planted, and a second component 2812 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear of the first component 2811.

The first component 2811 of the side unit 2800G has a flat base plate 2811a that can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a number of ball receiving portions 2811b that protrude forward from the base plate 2811a and are open at the top and rear, forming the general winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. As shown in FIG. 112, the right end of the base plate 2811a in this embodiment extends further to the right than the ball receiving portion 2811b at the right end so as to approach the starting port unit 2100. The base plate 2811a is provided so that a part of its outer edge overlaps the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103). In other words, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a part of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a is formed so as to protrude forward of the outlet 1008 so as to overlap the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) in a front view. In this embodiment, the part of the base plate 2811a that protrudes forward of the outlet 1008 is the finger hook portion 2816.

The outer edge of the base plate 2811a is inclined so that the front surface moves rearward as it approaches the outer edge. Therefore, the portion of the outlet 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, i.e., the front end surface of the finger hook portion 2816, is inclined so as to move toward the outlet 1008.

The three ball receiving portions 2811b are spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and are positioned so that the rightmost ball receiving portion 2811b is located further downward. The leftmost ball receiving portion 2811b has a front end surface parallel to the base plate 2811a up to the bottom end. The remaining ball receiving portions 2811b (center and right end) are inclined so that their front end surfaces move further rearward as they approach the bottom end.

The first component 2811 also has two positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a, multiple (three in this case) mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the gaming panel 1100, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component 2812.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. Here, the two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far from the outlet 1008. The positioning protrusions 2811c are inserted into positioning holes 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c are the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c on the base plate 2811a and at the top near the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 2811a. These mounting holes 2811d have a countersunk recess on the front side, and a countersunk head mounting screw (not shown) that is screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 is inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

The mounting hole is where the mounting screw inserted into the mounting hole (not shown) of the second component 2812 described below is screwed into.

The second component 2812 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and has a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) to flow down along the surface (plate surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), a passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and multiple mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component 2811.

The second component 2812 in this embodiment is inserted (fitted) into the opening 1112 (normal opening area 1102) of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that its depth fits within the plate thickness of the panel board 1110.

The spherical passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is formed so as to follow the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000 and to become lower toward the right along the surface of the panel plate 1110. The passage outlet 2812b opens toward the rear at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the spherical passage 2812a.

The mounting holes of the second component 2812 are provided at locations corresponding to the mounting holes of the first component 2811. The second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear by inserting mounting screws from the rear into the mounting holes of the second component 2812 and screwing them into the mounting holes of the first component 2811.

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment has a branch section 2801 that is connected to the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving section 2811b), and a main stream section 2802 that merges with the branch section 2801 and extends along the surface (board surface) of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The ball passage 2812a is composed of multiple branch sections 2801 and the main stream section 2802.

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a position forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a position (within the thickness of the panel plate 1110) rearward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main portion 2802.

The main flow section 2802 extends along the surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from near the left end to near the right end of the base plate 2811a so as to lower to the right. The length of the main flow section 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the gaming ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment is assembled by positioning the second component 2812 behind the first component 2811 and screwing mounting screws from the rear of the second component 2812 through mounting holes in the second component 2812 into mounting holes in the first component 2811. This creates a side unit 2800G in which the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811 from the rear.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is open to the front, but when the first component member 2811 is attached to the front side, the front end side of the ball passage 2812a is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, and the game ball B does not spill forward from the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is formed by the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812. In other words, the ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812.

This side unit 2800G abuts the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 so that the base plate 2811a closes the opening 1112 (the normal opening area 1102 of the opening area 1101) that penetrates the panel plate 1110. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110.

The side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing a mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 from the front into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening it. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component 2811 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c, by screwing the mounting screw through the mounting hole 2811d into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and floating due to incomplete insertion of the positioning protrusion 2811c can be prevented.

When the side unit 2800G of this embodiment is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 (when the gaming board 5 is assembled), the finger hook portion 2816 of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 protrudes forward of the outlet 1008 (the specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101).

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 (when the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 is located within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and is located forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, when assembled to the game board 5, the side unit 2800G does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, making it possible to secure a large space behind the panel plate 1110.

In the side unit 2800G, when a game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110, and after flowing down along the surface of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, it is handed over from the passage exit 2812b to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 located at the rear. The game ball B handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then discharged downward.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage exit 2812b of the second component 2812 is provided below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. In other words, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800G, the general winning opening sensor 3001, etc. do not get in the way of the rear-bottom movable decorative body 3510.

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

According to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. The second component 2812, which has increased rigidity, is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 to form the side unit 2800G, so the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 are removed and the side unit 2800G is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800. This prevents the positioning protrusions 2811c of the side unit 2800G (first component 2811) from tilting relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, allowing the side unit 2800G to be easily removed from the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the amount of disassembly required for separation.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, a finger hook 2816 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 of the panel board 1110 is provided on part of the outer edge, so that when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, by inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008 with the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 removed, the finger can be hooked on the finger hook 2816 and the side unit 2800G can be pulled forward. This allows the side unit 2800G to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the finger hook portion 2816 is provided so as to overlap with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103), and since the outlet 1008 is large enough for two or more game balls B, the operator's fingers can be easily inserted into the outlet 1008, and the fingers can be easily hooked on the finger hook portion 2816.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G, the finger hook 2816 of the base plate 2811a is protruded forward of the outlet 1008 so as to overlap the outlet 1008, so that when the game ball B that has flowed down the game area 5a is discharged through the outlet 1008, it is possible to prevent the game ball B that has flowed down from above the outlet 1008 along the surface of the panel board 1110 from licking the corner of the front end of the outlet 1008 and entering the outlet 1008, or the game ball B that has bounced upward at the out guide section 1003 in front of the outlet 1008 from hitting the corner of the front end of the outlet 1008. In other words, the finger hook 2816 can protect the game ball B from hitting the corner of the front end of the outlet 1008 in the panel board 1110. This can prevent the front end of the outlet 1008 from being chipped.

In the side unit 2800G, the front surface of the finger hook 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the outlet 1008, so that the corners of the outer edge are obtuse angles. Therefore, when the worker hooks his/her fingers on the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817) that overlaps with the outlet 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 during disassembly of the pachinko machine 1, even if the fingers come into contact with the corners of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the obtuse angle makes it difficult to injure the fingers, compared to when the corners are right angles, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with the fingers.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the outlet 1008, so that the game ball B flowing down along the front surface of the base plate 2811a to the outlet 1008 can be smoothly guided to the outlet 1008, and the game ball B can be prevented from stagnating near the outlet 1008. In addition, because the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 is inclined, the corner of the front end of the finger hook portion 2816 is an obtuse angle, making it difficult for the corner of the front end to chip.

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 from the front, preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110.

However, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c, each of which is inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 during disassembly, if one attempts to pull out both positioning protrusions 2811c from the positioning holes 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the worker. In contrast, in this embodiment, the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at locations close to and far from the outlet 1008. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the worker can hook his or her finger or the like onto the finger hook portion 2816, which overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800, and pull forward, thereby applying a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion 2811c close to the outlet 1008. As a result, during disassembly, of the two positioning protrusions 2811c, the one closest to the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining positioning protrusion 2811c farthest from the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113. This means that it is possible to pull out the two positioning protrusions 2811c with less force than if two were to be pulled out at the same time, reducing the burden on the worker.

In the above-mentioned side unit 2800G, the finger hook 2816 is shown as a flat plate that fits along the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, but this is not limited to this, and the finger hook 2817 may be in the form shown in FIG. 113.

When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the finger hook 2817 overlaps with the outlet 1008 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 in a front view, and extends from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 along the inner surface of the outlet 1008. The finger hook 2817 is provided on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800G. The front surface of the finger hook 2817 is inclined toward the outlet 1008.

In the example of FIG. 113, the depth of the finger hook 2817 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103) at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is long, and the portion inserted into the outlet 1008 has a certain degree of thickness. Therefore, the size of the outlet 1008 is reduced due to the thickness of the finger hook 2817 (reducing the passage volume for discharging game ball B), but in this embodiment, the size of the outlet 1008 is made wider (increasing the passage volume for discharging game ball B) in anticipation of the thickness of the finger hook 2817. This allows game ball B to be discharged smoothly at the outlet 1008.

This finger hook 2817 can provide the same effect as the finger hook 2816 described above. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, by inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008 with the mounting screws attaching the side unit 2800G to the panel board 1110 removed, the finger can be hooked on the finger hook 2817 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. This allows the side unit 2800G to be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

In addition, since the finger hook 2817 protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 along the inner surface of the outlet 1008, the finger hook 2817 can protect the inner surface of the outlet 1008. In addition, when a wooden game panel 1100 is used, the finger hook 2817 can hide the inner surface of the outlet 1008 where the wood is exposed, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hook portion 2816 and the finger hook portion 2817, but this is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 112 and 113, the start hole unit 2100 and the attacca unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be provided with the finger hook portion 2816 and the finger hook portion 2817, the outer edge of which overlaps part of the outlet 1008.

In more detail, the starting hole unit 2100 has a flat base plate 2103 that abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and finger hooks 2816 and 2817 are provided at the portion of the base plate 2103 that overlaps with the outlet 1008. Although not shown in the figure, the starting hole unit 2100 has a number of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the base plate 2103 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110.

The attacca unit 2400 also has a flat base plate 2431 that abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and finger hooks 2816 and 2817 are provided at the portion of the base plate 2431 that overlaps with the outlet 1008. Although not shown in the figure, the attacca unit 2400 has multiple positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the base plate 2431 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110.

The starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2400 can achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800G described above.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 blocked by the side unit 2800G and the outlet 1008 are not connected and are provided separately in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, but this is not limited thereto, and the opening 1112 and the outlet 1008 may be connected so as to be continuous, as shown in FIG. 114. In other words, the panel plate 1110 may have an opening area 1101 in which the normal opening area 1102 blocked by the side unit 2800G and the specific opening area 1103 constituting the outlet 1008 are connected. In other words, the outlet 1008 may be formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the normal opening area 1102 in which the side unit 2800G is fitted, but may be constituted by the specific opening area 1103 in which the side unit 2800G is not fitted.

In the embodiment of FIG. 114, the side unit 2800G has a finger hook 2816 so that a portion of the base plate 2811a overlaps with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103), and in addition to providing the same effect as above, the specific opening area 1103 is formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 so as to be continuous with the normal opening area 1102. Therefore, when the normal opening area 1102 and the specific opening area 1103 are formed on the panel plate 1110 using a cutting tool such as an end mill, the normal opening area 1102 and the specific opening area 1103 can be cut continuously, and the cost of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) that overlaps with the outlet 1008 is provided on the base plate 2811a (base plate 2103, base plate 2431) that abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100, but this is not limited to this, and the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) may be provided on a portion that is separated in the front-rear direction from the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 (for example, the front plate 2812d that is separated forward from the panel plate 1110).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is shown to have a panel board 1110 made of transparent resin, but this is not limited to this, and the gaming panel 1100 may be made of wood. As a result, by making the gaming panel 1100 out of wood, the board thickness is thicker than that of a resin panel, making it easier to make more effective use of the board thickness of the gaming panel 1100.

In addition, the above side unit 2800G has a ball passage 2812a composed of multiple branch sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2812c, and a main section 2802 where the multiple branch sections 2801 join, but this is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving section 2811b.

Furthermore, the above side unit 2800G is shown as not being provided with a ball sensor to detect the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b, but this is not limited thereto, and the ball sensor may be provided. If the side unit 2800G is provided with a ball sensor, it is preferable to provide the ball sensor within the thickness of the panel board 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear performance device (the rear-bottom performance unit 3500).

In addition, while the above side unit 2800G does not have an LED board on the rear side, this is not limited to the above, and LEDs for illumination and decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800G is provided with an LED board, it is desirable to provide a unit cover that covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end face abuts the rear face of the side unit 2800G (second component 2812), and to provide a non-contact surface portion where the unit cover and the side unit are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portion where they are in contact with each other. This allows the side unit 2800G to be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs on the LED board, and allows heat from the LEDs to be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

In the above embodiment, the side units 2800 (side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, side unit 2800G) are shown as units that effectively utilize the inner thickness of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, but this is not limited to this, and the inner thickness of the panel board 1110 may also be effectively utilized in the start opening unit 2100, the attacca unit 2400 (attacca unit 2730), the normal winning opening unit 2600, the second start opening unit 2720, the special winning opening unit 2740, etc.

[12-4. Relationship between the LED board and the non-contact surface in the side unit]
Next, the relationship between the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in the side units 2800B to 2800F in which the LED board 2825 is provided will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 115 and the like. FIG. 115(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED board, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED board in a form different from (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to hang over the LED board, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided around the entire circumference of the unit cover. In FIG. 115(a) and (c), the side unit 2800B in FIG. 107 is shown as an example, and in FIG. 115(c) and (d), the side unit 2800D in FIG. 109 is shown as an example. Here, the same configuration as above will be described with the same reference numerals.

The LED board 2825 shown in Figs. 107 to 111 has a resistor mounted on a separate board to limit the current that drives the mounted LED 2825a. Therefore, in this LED board 2825, the LED 2825a generates the most heat. In other words, in the LED board 2825, a lot of heat is released from the front side where the LED 2825a is mounted. In the embodiment shown in Figs. 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided near the front side of the LED board 2825 where the amount of heat generated is large. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 to be quickly released to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and heat does not build up inside the unit cover 2820.

In the above embodiment, the resistor (current limiting resistor) is mounted on a separate board for the LED board 2825, but this is not limited thereto, and the resistor may be mounted on the LED board 2825. For example, the resistor may be mounted on the same surface of the LED board 2825 on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted. In this case, similar to the embodiment shown in Figures 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) may be provided on the side of the LED board 2825 close to the surface on which the LEDs 2825a and resistors are mounted (here, the front surface).

When mounting the LED 2825a and the resistor on the same surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable to ensure that the LED 2825a and the resistor do not overlap in the vertical direction. This makes it possible to prevent the heat emitted by the LED 2825a and the resistor from affecting each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b for limiting the current supplied to the LED 2825a may be mounted on different surfaces of the LED board 2825. In other words, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the surface of the LED board 2825 opposite to the surface on which the LED 2825a is mounted. In this case, since the resistor 2825b has a larger heat capacity than the LED 2825a, as shown in FIG. 115, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch 2820c) may be provided on the side of the LED board 2825 closer to the surface on which the resistor 2825b is mounted (here, the rear surface).

In more detail, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward so that the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is located closer to the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface of the LED 2825a, and the LED board 2825 is located within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 to be quickly dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and heat does not build up inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view, so that even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c, it is difficult for the dust or dirt to get on the LED board 2825, and the effects of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, because the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust or dirt that enters through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward from the lower notch 2820c.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on the unit cover 2820 side, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be provided on the unit main body 2810 (support frame portion 2814) side, or on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the unit body 2810 has a plurality of bosses 2814a that protrude rearward from within the support frame 2814 on the rear surface thereof and to which the LED board 2825 is attached, and a notch 2814b that is cut forward from the rear end surface of the frame-shaped support frame 2814. In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 has only a flat cover portion 2820a, but may have a peripheral wall portion 2820b as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the LED 2825a is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, and the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface. When the LED board 2825 is attached to the boss portion 2814a, the notch 2814b is located behind the rear surface of the LED board 2825. In other words, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch 2814b) is provided on the side of the LED board 2825 closer to the surface (here, the rear surface) on which the resistor 2825b is mounted. This allows heat from the LED board 2825 to be quickly dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch 2814b), and heat does not build up inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the cutout 2814b (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view, so that even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the cutout 2814b, it is difficult for the dust or dirt to get on the LED board 2825, and the effects of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, because the cutout 2814b is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust or dirt that enters through the upper cutout 2814b can be discharged downward from the lower cutout 2814b.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the unit body 2810 (support frame portion 2814) side, but this is not limited thereto, and it may be provided on the unit cover 2820 side, or on both the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the LED board 2825 is not overlapped with the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b, notch portion 2820c) in a plan view, but this is not limited thereto, and as shown in FIG. 115(c), the LED board 2825 may overlap with the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c). In more detail, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the support frame portion 2814 are provided so as to be located within the plate thickness of the panel board 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. In other words, the space formed by the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 and in which the LED board 2825 is accommodated is provided within the plate thickness of the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (cutout portion 2820c) are arranged to overlap, the cutout portion 2820c is located within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and within its plate thickness, so it is possible to minimize the possibility that foreign matter such as dust and dirt from the outside of the panel board 1110 will enter the opening 1112 and then enter the unit cover 2820 through the cutout portion 2820c, making it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to get on the LED board 2825 and preventing the effects of dust and dirt as much as possible.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided so that it is applied to the LED board 2825. This allows both heat from the LED 2825a mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825 and heat from the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface to be efficiently dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and prevents heat from building up inside the unit cover 2820.

Note that in FIG. 115(c), the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are shown mounted on different sides of the LED board 2825, but this is not limited thereto, and the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b may be provided on the same side of the LED board 2825.

In addition, in FIG. 115(c), a cutout portion 2820c is provided on the unit cover 2820 as the non-contact surface portion 2831, but this is not limited to this. The non-contact surface portion 2831 may be provided on the unit main body 2810A (support frame portion 2814) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment of FIG. 115(c), a part of the LED board 2825 may be inserted into the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, or may protrude to the outside as long as it does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831. By inserting the LED board 2825 into the non-contact surface portion 2831 or protruding to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, the LED board 2825 can be exposed to the outside air, further enhancing the heat dissipation effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on a part of the contact surface portion 2830 between the unit body 2810A (support frame portion 2814) and the unit cover 2820, but this is not limited thereto, and as shown in FIG. 115(d), the non-contact surface portion 2831 may be provided around the entire circumference of the unit cover 2820. In other words, a gap is provided around the entire circumference between the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit body 2810A and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b in the unit cover 2820. In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 is attached to the boss portion 2814a protruding rearward from the rear surface of the unit body 2810A.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(d), a part of the LED board 2825 is inserted into or protrudes out of the non-contact surface portion 2831 (gap) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit body 2810A and the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820. Even in this case, the LED board 2825 does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831. According to this embodiment, the LED board 2825 can be more easily exposed to the outside air, and the heat dissipation effect can be further improved. Also, in terms of preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as dust and dirt, the usefulness of using the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 is increased.

Although not shown in the figures, the LED board 2825 uses a light-colored (e.g., white) solder resist on at least the board surface on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted, as a solder resist applied to prevent solder from adhering to unnecessary areas when mounting electronic components and to protect the circuit pattern from oxidation and insulation. This allows the light from the LEDs 2825a, etc. to be reflected by the light-colored solder resist, thereby improving the light-emitting efficiency. Alternatively, when a full-color LED is used as the LED 2825a, the white solder resist allows the various colors of emitted light to be in tune with the viewer's sense of color, creating a natural luminous decoration.

In this LED board 2825, information (letters and symbols) such as the part numbers and mounting positions of the electronic components to be mounted, the name, mounting position and mounting direction of the LED board 2825, etc., are printed (e.g., silk screen printed) in a similar color (e.g., yellow) so that they can be read when desired.

However, electronic components such as resistors and LED drivers mounted on LED boards often have their packages molded in black resin, so if the LED board is placed close to the player, the electronic components will be noticeable even when the LEDs are turned off, which may affect the appearance of the gaming machine. In contrast, in the embodiment shown in Figure 115, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface of the LED board 2825, so it is possible to hide the resistor 2825b from the player and improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

In the embodiment shown in Figures 107 to 111, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable to make the resistor 2825b less noticeable to the player. In this embodiment, a decorative sticker 2803 with a predetermined decoration and transparency is provided in front of the LED board 2825, so that the decorative sticker 2803 can make the resistor 2825b less noticeable.

Alternatively, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, a plate-shaped or sheet-shaped diffusion lens that diffuses light may be provided in front of the LED board 2825 to make the resistor 2825b less noticeable. Also, a plate-shaped or sheet-shaped decorative body with a partially opaque design may be provided in front of the LED board 2825, so that the resistor 2825b is hidden by the design of the decorative body and is not noticeable. Also, the resistor 2825b mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825 may be colored with a bright paint or ink. The decorative sticker 2803, diffusion lens, decorative body, etc. described above may be used in appropriate combinations.

The gaming panel 1100 can be made of wood, which does not have translucency, or resin, which has translucency. In the case of wood, the opening 1112 is a dark tunnel shape, so a certain amount of outside light is blocked. However, in the case of transparent resin, even though the opening 1112 is the same tunnel shape, you can see through to the outside. Therefore, by using the above-mentioned structure to improve appearance, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved when utilizing the thickness of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110).

[13. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The protrusion 102 of the door frame main body 100 in the door frame 3 in this embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention, the ball launching unit 550 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment corresponds to the ball launching means of the present invention, the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 in this embodiment correspond to the ball circulating means of the present invention, the ball grinding cassette 681 in this embodiment corresponds to the attachment/detachment unit of the present invention, the ball grinding motor base 686 in this embodiment corresponds to the locking piece of the locking means of the present invention, the positioning pin 686b and the rotating connecting part 692 in this embodiment correspond to the insert of the present invention, the cassette pressing piece 693 in this embodiment corresponds to the pressing piece of the present invention, and the Nylatch 694 in this embodiment corresponds to the fixing means of the present invention.

[14. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550, which launches the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, is collected by the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 and supplied to the ball launching unit 550, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 based on the ball holding data of the player. In this pachinko machine 1 (a so-called enclosed game machine, a managed game machine), when the ball polishing mechanism 680 in the ball lifting unit 650 is placed in the locked position with the ball polishing cassette 681 attached to the main frame 4, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connecting part 692 are inserted into the ball polishing cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, and the ball polishing cassette 681 is pressed backward by the cassette pressing piece 693 (spring 695). In this state, the pressing piece is fixed by the Nylatch of the locking means so that it cannot move. As a result, even if the installation of the ball polishing cassette 681 is incomplete, the ball polishing cassette 681 can be properly installed by pressing it backward, and the positioning pin 686b or the like can prevent the ball polishing cassette 681 from being removed forward. In addition, the Nylatch 694 can maintain the pressing of the cassette pressing piece 693 against the ball polishing cassette 681, so that the ball polishing cassette 681 cannot be removed. At this time, by looking at the position of the operating part 694a of the Nylatch 694, it is easy to determine whether the Nylatch 694 has fixed the cassette pressing piece 693 so that it cannot move, and the occurrence of forgetting to lock the cassette can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball polishing cassette 681 from being accidentally removed due to some reason such as vibration during play, and it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the ball polishing cassette 681 being removed, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 for maintenance or the like, the cassette pressing piece 693 is pressed backwards by the cassette pressing piece 693, and the cassette pressing piece 693 is made immovable by the Nylatch 694, so that even if the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the cassette pressing piece 693 maintains its pressing force against the smashing cassette 681, and the smashing cassette 681 is prevented from immediately coming off forward. To remove the smashing cassette 681, the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 supporting the game board 5, the Nylatch 694 is operated to make the cassette pressing piece 693 movable, and the smashing motor base 686 is rotated to move from the locked position to the unlocked position, so that the positioning pins 686b, etc. are released from the smashing cassette 681, and the smashing cassette 681 attached to the main frame 4 (the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668) can be removed forward. This makes it possible to remove the ball polishing cassette 681, which has a polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, and check the inside of the ball lifting mechanism 660 (lifting spiral shaft 661, etc.) of the ball lifting unit 650 located behind it, improving the ease of maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.

When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, even if the ball motor base 686 is not in the locked position, when the door frame 3 is closed, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the ball motor base 686, causing the ball motor base 686 to rotate and move to the locked position, and the positioning pin 686b etc. are inserted into the ball cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-to-back direction, preventing forgetting to lock and preventing the ball cassette 681 from coming off during play, and preventing damage to the ball motor base 686, cassette pressure piece 693, ball cassette 681 etc. due to the door frame 3 coming into contact.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed in an incomplete state where the ball motor base 686 has not yet moved to the locked position, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the ball motor base 686, causing the ball motor base 686 to rotate and move to the locked position, and the cassette pressing piece 693 presses the ball cassette 681 backwards due to the biasing force of the spring 695. Therefore, in addition to the locking by the positioning pin 686b of the ball motor base 686, even if the ball cassette 681 is not completely attached, the ball cassette 681 can be attached in a good state, and it is possible to reliably prevent the ball cassette 681 from coming off.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the protrusions 102 of the door frame 3 lift the door frame 3, which prevents excessive load from being continuously applied to the door frame hinge mechanism 110 that allows the door frame 3 to be opened and closed. This makes it difficult for the hinge to become distorted, and even if the hinge becomes distorted, the protrusions 102 can lift the door frame 3, allowing the door frame 3 to be closed in the correct position against the main frame 4.

In addition, since the ball polishing cassette 681 has a polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, if the polishing cloth 682 becomes dirty, the ball polishing cassette 681 can be removed and replaced with a new ball polishing cassette 681 having a clean polishing cloth 682, and the circulating game balls B can be maintained in a good, unsoiled condition. By applying the above configuration to the ball polishing cassette 681 (detachable unit) which is periodically replaced and otherwise maintained, problems associated with attaching and detaching the detachable unit during maintenance can be kept to a minimum.

[15. Other features included in this embodiment]
[15-1. First technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-1a. Background of the first technical feature]
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball launching means is used to launch a gaming ball into a gaming area based on the digitized ball data of a player, and when the gaming ball is launched, the launched gaming ball is subtracted from the ball data, and when the ball is launched from the ball launching means but not supplied to the gaming area and collected by a foul ball collecting means, the collected gaming ball is added to the ball data (for example, Patent Document A: JP 2020-89489 A). According to the technology of this Patent Document B, it is possible to circulate the gaming balls within the gaming machine, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

However, with the technology of Patent Document A, if a game ball launched by the ball launching means returns to the ball launching means for some reason, the game ball is not collected by the foul ball collection means, and the game ball remains subtracted from the ball held data, which may cause an error with the actual number of game balls launched into the play area and cause a disadvantage to the player.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the error between the actual number of gaming balls launched into the play area and the number of returned gaming balls that are released.

[15-1b. Solution of the first technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a foul ball collecting means for collecting game balls that have been shot by the ball shooting means but not supplied to the game area;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The ball projecting means includes:
The game machine has a launch rail on which a game ball to be launched is placed, and the launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball;
When a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while a game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is collected by the foul ball collection means.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area of the gaming board, a foul ball collecting means for collecting gaming balls that have been launched by the ball launching means but not supplied to the gaming area, and a ball circulating means for collecting the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player. The ball launching means has a launching rail on which the gaming ball to be launched is placed, and the launching rail is long enough to accommodate only one gaming ball. When a new gaming ball is supplied to the launching rail by the ball circulating means while a gaming ball is placed on the launching rail, the gaming ball later supplied to the launching rail is collected by the foul ball collecting means (see the descriptions in chapters [4-2. Ball launching unit] and [7-4. Launch control processing], Figures 27 and 68, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which game balls launched from a ball launching means that launches game balls into the game area of the game board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and game balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the player's ball data (e.g., the number of balls held is 1 or more), the length of the launch rail in the ball launching means is set to a length that allows only one game ball to be placed thereon, so if a launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, if the next game ball is already placed on the launch rail, the game ball placed on the launch rail can bounce the returned game ball and make it a foul ball. On the other hand, if the launched game ball returns before the next game ball is placed on the launch rail, the returning game ball will be placed on the launch rail, but the next game ball supplied from the ball circulation means can be bounced by the game ball that has returned and is placed on the launch rail and become a foul ball. Therefore, the ball data of the player is subtracted when the ball is launched from the launch rail, but even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail, since only one game ball can be placed on the launch rail, either the returning game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is collected by the foul ball collection means, so by adding to the ball data when a foul ball is detected, the ball data can be returned to the state before launch, and the error with the actual number of game balls launched into the play area is eliminated, so the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

Incidentally, because the launch rail is long enough to hold only one game ball, there is a risk that the ball may fall off the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. However, if a game ball falls from the launch rail when there is held ball data, the fall is mistakenly recognized as a launch, and the held ball data (number of balls held) is subtracted. However, as described above, the ball is collected by the foul ball collection means and treated as a foul ball, which is added to the held ball data and returns it to the state before the fall. On the other hand, if there is no held ball data (number of balls held is 0), and a game ball falls from the launch rail and is collected by the foul ball collection means, it may not be added to the held ball data, or an alarm may be issued to the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

The ball circulation means may also be configured to supply one game ball to the launch rail after the ball launch means launches the game ball. In this way, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. Therefore, even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, it can be bounced by the game ball supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means to make it a foul ball, and a game machine that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

In addition, as described above, when the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball is launched, it is possible to perform a series of operations, including the launch of the game ball by the ball launching means and the supply of the game ball to the ball launching means (launching rail) by the ball circulation means. This reduces the load on the control of the gaming machine, as compared to, for example, a case where it is determined whether or not the launched game ball has returned to the launch rail based on the presence or absence of a game ball on the launch rail, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulation means, etc. (a case where the determination is made by programming).

The gaming machine may further include a ball subtraction means for subtracting one ball from the ball held data when the number of balls on the launch rail changes from present to absent while there is ball held data, and a ball addition means for adding one ball to the ball held data when a ball is collected by the foul collection means. In this way, when a ball is launched toward the play area of the game board by the ball launching means while there is ball held data for the player (a state in which the number of balls held is one or more), one ball is subtracted from the ball held data by the ball subtraction means, and the game ball is supplied to the play area, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the ball. On the other hand, if the ball launched by the ball launching means is not supplied to the play area, it is collected by the foul ball collection means as a foul ball, and one ball is added to the ball held data by the ball addition means, so that the player is not disadvantaged by the fact that the ball was not supplied to the play area, and can continue to enjoy playing. If the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, because the launch rail is long enough to hold only one game ball, if the next game ball is already placed on the launch rail, the game ball placed on the launch rail can bounce the returning game ball and make it a foul ball. The returning game ball can be placed on the launch rail, and the next game ball supplied from the ball circulation means can return and be bounced by the placed game ball, making it a foul ball. Since both are foul balls, the held ball adding means can add one game ball to the held ball data, returning the held ball data to its state before launch, eliminating the error with the actual number of game balls launched into the game area.

Furthermore, it may be possible to make it possible to recover game balls that have fallen from the launch rail by the foul ball recovery means. In this way, since the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means, when a game ball that has been launched and returned or the next game ball supplied from the ball circulation means is bounced off a game ball placed on the launch rail, it can be recovered by the foul ball recovery means, and can be added to the ball holding data as a foul ball, making it possible to reliably provide a game machine that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, as described above, when a game ball that has fallen from the launch rail is collected by a foul ball collection means, even if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, it is collected by the foul ball collection means and can be added to the ball data as a foul ball, restoring it to the state before it fell, so the player is not put at a disadvantage.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The ball circulation means is
The present invention is characterized in that "after the ball launching means launches the game ball, one game ball is supplied to the launching rail."

According to the configuration of means 2, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the ball launching means launches the game ball (see chapter 7-4. Launch control processing and the description in Figure 68, etc., in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. Therefore, even if a launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, it can be bounced off by the game ball supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means, making it a foul ball, and it is possible to reliably provide a game machine that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since it is possible to carry out a series of operations, namely the launching of game balls by the ball launching means and the supply of game balls to the ball launching means (launching rail) by the ball circulating means, the load on the control of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to, for example, a case where it is determined whether or not a launched game ball has returned to the launching rail based on the presence or absence of a game ball on the launching rail, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulating means, etc. (a case where the determination is made by programming).

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"When the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent while the game ball data exists, a game ball subtraction means subtracts one game ball from the game ball data;
a ball-holding adding means for adding one ball to the ball-holding data when the ball is collected by the foul collecting means;
It is characterized in that it further comprises.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine is further provided with a ball subtraction means for subtracting one ball from the ball held data when the number of balls on the launch rail changes from present to absent while there is ball held data, and a ball addition means for adding one ball to the ball held data when a ball is collected by the foul collection means (see the descriptions in chapters [7-2. Ball held subtraction processing] and [7-3. Ball held addition processing], Figures 65 and 66, etc. in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, when a game ball is launched by the ball launching means toward the game area of the game board when there is ball data for the player (a state in which the number of balls held is one or more), one game ball is subtracted from the ball data by the ball subtraction means, and the game ball is supplied to the game area, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the game ball. On the other hand, if a game ball launched by the ball launching means is not supplied to the game area, it is collected by the foul ball collection means as a foul ball, and one game ball is added to the ball data by the ball addition means, so that the player is not disadvantaged by the fact that a game ball was not supplied to the game area, and can continue to enjoy playing. If the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, because the launch rail is long enough to hold only one game ball, if the next game ball is already placed on the launch rail, the game ball placed on the launch rail can bounce the returning game ball and make it a foul ball. The returning game ball can be placed on the launch rail, and the next game ball supplied from the ball circulation means can return and be bounced by the placed game ball, making it a foul ball. Since both are foul balls, the held ball adding means can add one game ball to the held ball data, returning the held ball data to its state before launch, eliminating the error with the actual number of game balls launched into the game area.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The foul ball recovery means is
The game balls that fall from the launch rail can be retrieved.
The present invention is characterized in that

The configuration of means 4 allows the foul ball recovery means to recover game balls that have fallen from the launch rail (see the description of the ball launch unit 550 and the foul unit 570 in the [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, the game balls that fall from the launch rail are collected by the foul ball collection means, so that when a game ball that has been launched and returned or the next game ball supplied from the ball circulation means is bounced off a game ball placed on the launch rail, it can be collected by the foul ball collection means and can be added to the ball holding data as a foul ball, making it possible to reliably provide a game machine that provides the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because game balls that fall from the launch rail are collected by a foul ball collection means, even if a game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, it is collected by the foul ball collection means and is added to the ball data as a foul ball, restoring it to the state before it fell, so the player is not put at a disadvantage.

In addition, if there is no ball held data (number of balls held is 0) and a game ball falls from the launch rail and is collected by the foul ball collection means, it may be possible to not add it to the ball held data, or to issue an alarm to the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board and having a launching rail on which the game ball to be launched is placed;
a foul ball collecting means for collecting game balls that have been launched by the ball launching means but not supplied to the game area and game balls that have fallen from the launching rail;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
a ball held subtraction means for subtracting one ball from the ball held data when the number of balls on the launch rail changes from "present" to "absent" in a state where the ball held data exists;
a ball-holding adding means for adding one ball to the ball-holding data when the ball is collected by the foul collecting means;
Further comprising:
The launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball,
The ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball is launched by the ball launch means,
When a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while a game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is collected by the foul ball collection means.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a game area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the game area of the gaming board and having a launching rail on which the gaming balls to be launched are placed, a foul ball recovery means for recovering gaming balls that have been launched by the ball launching means but not supplied to the game area and gaming balls that have fallen from the launching rail, and a ball circulation means for recovering gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of a player, and is configured to launch when the ball data is available. The system further includes a ball subtraction means for subtracting one game ball from the ball held data when the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to not being present, and a ball addition means for adding one game ball to the ball held data when a game ball is collected by the foul collection means, the launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the ball launch means launches the game ball, and if a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while a game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball later supplied to the launch rail is collected by the foul ball collection means.

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which gaming balls launched from a ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the playing area of the gaming board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the ball data held by the player (for example, the number of balls held is one or more), when a gaming ball is launched by the ball launching means towards the playing area of the gaming board when there is ball data held by the player (the number of balls held is one or more), one ball is subtracted from the ball data held by the ball subtraction means, and the gaming ball is supplied to the playing area, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the gaming balls. On the other hand, if the game ball launched by the ball launching means is not delivered to the game area, it is collected by the foul ball collection means as a foul ball, and one game ball is added to the ball held data by the ball held counting means. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged by the fact that the game ball was not delivered to the game area, and can continue to enjoy playing.

If the launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, because the launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball, if the next game ball has already been placed on the launch rail by the ball circulation means, the returning game ball is bounced by the game ball placed on the launch rail and falls from the launch rail, and is collected by the foul ball collection means as a foul ball. On the other hand, if the launched game ball returns before the next game ball is placed on the launch rail by the ball circulation means, the returning game ball will be placed on the launch rail, but the next game ball supplied by the ball circulation means will be bounced by the game ball placed on the launch rail and fall from the launch rail, and is collected by the foul ball collection means as a foul ball. Therefore, when a ball is launched from the launch rail, the held ball subtraction means subtracts one game ball from the held ball data of the player. However, even if the launched game ball returns to the launch rail, since only one game ball can be placed on the launch rail, either the returning game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is collected by the foul ball collection means. Therefore, the held ball addition means adds one game ball to the held ball data, and the held ball data can be returned to the state before launch. The error with the actual number of game balls launched into the play area is eliminated, and the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means ensures that one game ball is supplied to the launch rail. Therefore, even if a launched game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, it can be bounced off by the game ball supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means, making it a foul ball, and it is possible to reliably provide a game machine that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball is launched, and it is possible to perform a series of operations, including the launch of the game ball by the ball launching means and the supply of the game ball to the ball launching means (launching rail) by the ball circulation means. This reduces the load on the control of the gaming machine, compared to, for example, determining whether the launched game ball has returned to the launch rail based on the presence or absence of a game ball on the launch rail, the operation of the ball launching means and ball circulation means, etc. (when this determination is made by programming).

Furthermore, because the launch rail is long enough to accommodate only one game ball, there is a risk that the game ball may fall off the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. However, if a game ball falls off the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. while there is ball held data (one or more balls held), the ball may be mistakenly recognized as having been launched as a result of the fall, and the ball held data (number of balls held) may be subtracted. However, since the ball is collected by the foul ball collection means, the ball held data can be returned to the state before the ball was dropped by adding one game ball to the ball held data as a foul ball using the ball held addition means, and the player will not be at a disadvantage.

In addition, since the launch rail is long enough to hold only one game ball, if a game ball falls from the launch rail and is collected by the foul ball collection means when there is no ball held data (number of balls held is 0), the ball held counting means may be configured not to add the game ball to the ball held data, or an alarm may be issued to the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

In this way, the above-mentioned solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate the error between the actual number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area and the number of balls that return after launching.

[15-1c. Relationship between the solution of the first technical feature and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, the ball launching unit 550 of the main frame 4 corresponds to the ball launching means of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball launching pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment corresponds to the launch rail of the above-mentioned solution means, the foul unit 570 in this embodiment corresponds to the foul ball recovery means of the above-mentioned solution means, the circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball sending unit 700 in this embodiment correspond to the ball circulating means of the above-mentioned solution means, the held ball subtraction processing in the frame control board 740 in this embodiment corresponds to the held ball subtraction means of the above-mentioned solution means, and the held ball addition processing in the frame control board 740 in this embodiment corresponds to the held ball addition means of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-1d. Characteristic effect of the first technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550, which launches the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, is collected by the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 and supplied to the ball launching unit 550, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 based on the ball data of the player (the number of balls held is 1 or more). In this pachinko machine 1 (a so-called enclosed game machine, a managed game machine), when the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching unit 550 in a state where the player has ball data (the number of balls held is 1 or more), one game ball B is subtracted from the ball data by the ball subtraction process, and the game ball B is supplied to the game area 5a, so that the player can enjoy playing with the game ball B. On the other hand, if the game ball B launched by the ball launching unit 550 is not supplied to the game area 5a, it is collected by the foul unit 570 as a foul ball, and one game ball B is added to the held ball data by the held ball addition process, so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage due to the game ball B not being supplied to the game area 5a, and can continue to enjoy the game.

If the launched game ball B returns to the ball launch pad 552b for some reason, since the ball launch pad 552b is long enough to accommodate only one game ball B, if the next game ball B has already been placed on the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending unit 700, the returning game ball B is bounced by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b, falls from the ball launch pad 552b, and is collected by the foul unit 570 as a foul ball. On the other hand, if the launched game ball B returns before the next game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending unit 700, the returning game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, but the next game ball B supplied from the ball sending unit 700 is bounced by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b, falls from the ball launch pad 552b, and is collected by the foul unit 570 as a foul ball. Therefore, when a game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, one game ball B is subtracted from the held ball data by the held ball subtraction process. However, even if the launched game ball B returns to the launch rail, since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and is collected by the foul unit 570. Therefore, one game ball B is added to the held ball data by the held ball addition process, and the held ball data can be returned to the state before launch. The error with the actual number of game balls B launched into the game area 5a is eliminated, and the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, when a game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the ball sending unit 700 is always configured to supply one game ball B to the ball launch pad 552b. Therefore, even if the launched game ball B returns to the ball launch pad 552b for some reason, it can be bounced off by the game ball B supplied to the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending unit 700, making it a foul ball, and a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably provided.

In addition, after the ball sending unit 700 launches the game ball B, it supplies one game ball B to the ball launching pad 552b. Since the launch of the game ball B by the ball launching unit 550 and the supply of the game ball B to the ball launching pad 552b by the ball sending unit 700 are performed as a series of operations, the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced compared to a case where, for example, it is determined whether the launched game ball B has returned to the ball launching pad 552b based on the presence or absence of the game ball B at the ball launching pad 552b, the operation of the ball launching unit 550 and the ball sending unit 700, etc. (when the determination is made by programming).

Furthermore, because the ball launch pad 552b is long enough to hold only one game ball B, there is a risk that game ball B may fall from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration, etc. However, if game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration, etc. while there is ball data (the number of balls held is 1 or more), the fall may be mistaken as a launch and the ball data (number of balls held) may be subtracted. However, since the ball is collected by the foul unit 570, one game ball B can be added to the ball data as a foul ball by the ball holding addition process, restoring the state before the fall, and the player will not be at a disadvantage.

In addition, if there is no ball held data (number of balls held is 0) and game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b and is retrieved by the foul unit 570, the game ball B may not be added to the ball held data by the ball held addition process, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[15-2. Second technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-2a. Background of the second technical feature]
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a machine has been proposed that includes a main body frame that detachably supports a gaming board, a ball circulation means that is provided on the main body frame and that circulates gaming balls within the gaming machine, and a board unit that is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the main body frame below the gaming board (for example, Patent Document B: JP 2015-188537 A). According to the technology of this Patent Document B, since the board unit having a control board that controls the ball circulation means and the like is provided below the gaming board, it is possible to utilize the depth direction of the gaming board as much as possible, and it is possible to further differentiate it from other gaming machines.

However, in technology such as that described in Patent Document B, part of the ball circulation means is located between the rear surface of the main body frame and the base unit, and in order to check or maintain that part, it is necessary to remove the base unit, which creates the problem of time-consuming maintenance. To address this issue, it is conceivable to make the rear unit, such as the base unit, openable and closable relative to the main body frame, thereby eliminating the need to remove it and improving maintainability, but there is a risk that forgetting to close the rear unit could cause a malfunction.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the rear unit, which is openable and closable at the rear of the main frame, from being left open during maintenance, etc.

[15-2b. Solution of the second technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area where a game is played with a game ball from the front,
A rear cover that is provided so as to be capable of being opened and closed rearward relative to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear;
A ball launching means is provided on the main body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The game machine further includes a rear unit that is provided at a portion of the rear surface of the main body frame below the game board and can be opened and closed rearward;
The rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the rear cover when an attempt is made to close the rear cover onto the main body frame while the rear unit is open from the main body frame.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "rear unit" include "a board unit having a frame control board for controlling the ball launching means, ball circulation means, etc., and a power supply board for supplying power," "a ball passage unit that forms part of the ball path in the ball circulation means," "a speaker unit having a speaker," "a protective cover that protects the rear side of the board, passage components, etc."

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine is equipped with a main frame that supports a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls in a detachable manner from the front, a rear cover that is provided to be able to open and close backward with respect to the main frame so as to cover the gaming board supported by the main frame from the rear, a ball launching means that is provided to the main frame and capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area, and a ball circulating means that collects the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplies them to the ball launching means again, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player, and further includes a rear unit that is provided at a position below the gaming board on the rear surface of the main frame and is able to open and close backward, and the rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the rear cover when an attempt is made to close the rear cover to the main frame while it is open from the main frame (see the description of chapter [4-8. Frame base unit], Figures 58 to 60, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which the gaming balls launched from the ball launching means that launches the gaming balls into the playing area of the gaming board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the gaming balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the ball data of the player (for example, the number of balls held is 1 or more), the rear unit is provided at a position below the gaming board on the rear surface of the main body frame, so that the component provided at the rear of the gaming board in a conventional gaming machine is made into the rear unit of this configuration, so that the depth direction of the gaming board can be widened by the amount of the component, and it is possible to differentiate the gaming machine from other gaming machines as a gaming machine with a gaming board that is wide in the depth direction, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players. And, since this rear unit is provided so as to be openable and closable, by opening the rear unit backward, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the component provided in front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the main body frame, the front side of the rear unit, etc., and it is possible to improve the workability of maintenance, etc. At this time, the rear unit and the rear cover interfere with each other (abut), so when performing maintenance, the rear cover is opened first, then the rear unit is opened, and when maintenance is completed, the rear unit is closed before closing the rear cover. Therefore, when an attempt is made to close the rear cover that covers the rear of the game board with the rear unit open relative to the main frame, the unclosed rear unit and the rear cover interfere with each other, meaning that the unclosed rear unit prevents the rear cover from being closed, making it clear that the rear unit is not closed and preventing players from forgetting to close it during maintenance, etc.

In addition, because the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere with each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the main frame during play due to vibration or some other reason, it interferes with (is prevented from opening by) the back cover, preventing the rear unit from opening too wide and preventing malfunctions caused by the rear unit opening.

It is desirable to arrange the rear unit so that at least a portion of the ball circulation means can be seen from the rear when it is opened from the main body frame. This makes it possible to check and maintain the area between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means by opening the rear unit from the main body frame, making it easier to eliminate defects in the ball circulation means. Even if you forget to close the rear unit from the main body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the rear cover, the unclosed rear unit and the rear cover will interfere (abut) and prevent it from being closed, so you can be aware that the rear unit is not closed and can prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance, etc.

The gaming machine may further be provided with a locking means that is movable between a locked position and an unlocked position, and that locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the locking means is moved to the locked position with the rear unit closed to the main body frame, and the locking means is arranged to move to the locked position when the rear cover is closed to the main body frame in the unlocked position and with the rear unit closed to the main body frame. In this way, when the locking means is moved to the locked position with the rear unit closed to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed, so that the rear unit can be prevented from opening on its own due to some reason such as vibration, and malfunctions caused by the rear unit being opened can be prevented. Even if the locking means is forgotten to be used after the rear unit is closed to the main body frame at the end of maintenance, the locking means can be moved to the locked position and locked by closing the back cover, so that forgetting to lock can be prevented.

In addition, when a locking means as described above is provided, the locking means is designed to move between a locked position and an unlocked position, so by checking the position of the locking means, it is easy to determine whether or not the device is locked, and this helps prevent forgetting to lock the device.

Furthermore, the gaming machine may further be provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed forward, and the back cover may be provided so that it interferes with the outer frame when the main body frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back cover is open relative to the main body frame and the main body frame is closed to the outer frame. In this way, when the main body frame is opened forward relative to the outer frame with the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be confirmed, and when the back cover is opened in this state, the rear side of the game board can be confirmed, and further, when the rear unit is opened, the members between the main body frame and the rear unit can be confirmed, thereby improving the workability of confirmation and maintenance. And when closing the main body frame relative to the outer frame, if the rear cover is tried to be closed without closing the rear unit, the rear cover interferes with (abuts against) the rear unit and cannot be closed, which makes it possible to notice that the rear unit has been left closed, and prevents the rear unit from being left closed. Furthermore, if you try to close the main frame against the outer frame when the rear cover is open with the rear unit closed, or when both the rear unit and the rear cover are open, the rear cover will interfere with (contact) the outer frame and prevent the unit from closing, making you aware that the rear cover is open and preventing you from forgetting to close it.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The rear unit is
By opening the main body frame, at least a part of the ball circulation means can be seen from the rear.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear unit is configured so that at least a portion of the ball circulation means can be seen from the rear when it opens from the main frame (see the descriptions of the circulation ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, frame base unit 730, etc. in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, by opening the rear unit relative to the main body frame, the area between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means can be checked and maintained, making it easier to eliminate defects in the ball circulation means. Furthermore, even if you forget to close the rear unit relative to the main body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the rear cover, the unclosed rear unit and the rear cover will interfere (abut) and prevent the unit from being closed, making you aware that the rear unit is not closed and preventing you from forgetting to close it during maintenance, etc.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The locking means is movable between a locked position and an unlocked position, and when the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a state where it is closed relative to the main body frame, the locking means locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed.
The locking means comprises:
When the rear cover is closed against the main body frame in the released position and in a state in which the rear unit is closed against the main body frame, the rear cover is moved to the locked position.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "locking means" include "one that is fixed by pushing the operating part into the locked position when the rear cover abuts against it and expanding the diameter of the tip (e.g., a Nylatch)", "one that has a lock piece that is rotatably supported at one end and rotates from the unlocked position to the locked position when the rear cover abuts against the other end on the opposite side", "one that has a pressing piece that presses the rear unit against the main frame when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position when the rear cover abuts against it", "one that has a lock pin that is inserted into the rear unit or the main frame from a direction intersecting the front-to-rear direction when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position when the rear cover abuts against it", "one that slides from the unlocked position to the locked position when the rear cover abuts against it", etc.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine is further provided with a locking means that is movable between a locked position and an unlocked position, and that locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the locking means is moved to the locked position with the rear unit closed to the main body frame, and the locking means is arranged to move to the locked position when the rear cover is closed to the main body frame in the unlocked position and with the rear unit closed to the main body frame (see the description of the rear cover 505 and the Nylatch 774 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, when the locking means is moved to the locked position while the rear unit is closed relative to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed, preventing the rear unit from opening on its own due to vibration or other reasons, and preventing malfunctions caused by the rear unit being open. Even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing it relative to the main body frame when maintenance is completed, you can close the rear cover to move the locking means to the locked position and lock it, preventing you from forgetting to lock.

In addition, the locking means is designed to move between a locked position and an unlocked position, so by checking the position of the locking means, it is easy to determine whether or not it is locked, preventing forgetting to lock it.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The device further includes a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that the main body frame can be opened and closed forward.
The back cover is
The main body frame is open relative to the outer frame, and the rear cover is open relative to the main body frame. When the main body frame is closed onto the outer frame in this state, the rear cover interferes with the outer frame.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 4, the gaming machine is further provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main frame so that it can be opened and closed forward, and the rear cover is arranged so as to interfere with the outer frame when an attempt is made to close the main frame onto the outer frame while the main frame is open relative to the outer frame and the rear cover is open relative to the main frame (see the description of the rear cover 505 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

With this, when the main frame is opened forward relative to the outer frame with the outer frame attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main frame can be confirmed, and when the rear cover is opened in this state, the rear side of the game board can be confirmed, and further, when the rear unit is opened, the members between the main frame and the rear unit can be confirmed, improving the workability of confirmation and maintenance. When closing the main frame relative to the outer frame, if an attempt is made to close the rear cover without closing the rear unit, the rear cover will interfere with (abut) the rear unit and will not be able to be closed, making it possible to notice that the rear unit has been left unclosed and preventing it from being forgotten to be closed. Furthermore, when an attempt is made to close the main frame relative to the outer frame with the rear unit closed and the rear cover open, or with both the rear unit and the rear cover open, the rear cover will interfere with (abut) the outer frame and will be prevented from being closed, making it possible to notice that the rear cover is open and preventing it from being forgotten to be closed.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"The outer frame and
A main body frame is supported on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable forward, and supports a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls in a detachable manner from the front;
A rear cover that is provided so as to be capable of being opened and closed rearward relative to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear;
A ball launching means is provided on the main body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
A rear unit that is provided at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame and can be opened and closed rearward, and at least a portion of the ball circulation means can be viewed from the rear by opening the rear unit from the main body frame;
a locking means that is movable between a locked position and an unlocked position and that locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a state where it is closed relative to the main body frame;
Further,
the rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the rear cover when the rear cover is closed on the main body frame in a state where the rear unit is open from the main body frame,
the locking means is provided to move to the locking position when the rear cover is closed against the main body frame in a state where the rear unit is closed against the main body frame at the release position,
The rear cover is provided so as to interfere with the outer frame when the main frame is open relative to the outer frame and when the main frame is closed onto the outer frame in a state in which the rear cover is open relative to the main frame.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming machine is provided with a frame-shaped outer frame, a main frame that is supported on the outer frame so as to be able to open and close forward, and that supports a gaming board having a gaming area where games are played with gaming balls in a removable manner from the front, a back cover that is provided on the main frame so as to be able to open and close backward relative to the main frame so as to cover the gaming board supported on the main frame from the rear, a ball launching means that is provided on the main frame and is capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area, and a ball circulating means that collects the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplies them again to the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls by the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player, and is provided on the rear surface of the main frame at a position below the gaming board so as to be able to open and close backward, and by opening it from the main frame, at least the ball circulating means is provided. The device further includes a rear unit, part of which is visible from behind, and a locking means that is movable between a locked position and an unlocked position and that locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened or closed when the rear unit is moved to the locked position while closed against the main body frame. The rear unit is arranged so that it interferes with the rear cover when an attempt is made to close the rear cover to the main body frame while the rear unit is open from the main body frame, and the locking means is arranged so that it moves to the locked position when the rear cover is closed to the main body frame while in the unlocked position and the rear unit is closed against the main body frame, and the rear cover is arranged so that it interferes with the outer frame when an attempt is made to close the main body frame to the outer frame while the main body frame is open against the outer frame and the rear cover is open against the main body frame.

As a result, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which gaming balls launched from a ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the playing area of the gaming board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the player's ball data (for example, the number of balls held is 1 or more), the rear unit is provided below the gaming board on the rear surface of the main body frame, so by using the member provided behind the gaming board in conventional gaming machines as the rear unit of this configuration, the depth direction of the gaming board can be widened by the amount of that member, and as a gaming machine with a gaming board that is wide in the depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate it from other gaming machines and provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players. With this gaming machine, when the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main frame can be opened forward relative to the outer frame to check the rear side of the main frame, and when the back cover is opened in this state, the rear side of the game board can be checked. Furthermore, when the rear unit is opened, it is possible to check and maintain the area between the main frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, the components installed in front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the main frame, the front side of the rear unit, etc., improving the workability of maintenance, etc.

When closing the main frame against the outer frame, if an attempt is made to close the rear cover without closing the rear unit, the rear cover will interfere with (abut) the rear unit and will not be able to close, making it possible to notice that the rear unit has been left closed and preventing the rear unit from being left closed. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame against the outer frame when the rear unit is closed and the rear cover is open, or when both the rear unit and the rear cover are open, the rear cover will interfere with (abut) the outer frame and will be prevented from closing, making it possible to notice that the rear cover, etc. is open and preventing the rear cover, etc. from being left closed. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit or rear cover during maintenance, etc.

In addition, because the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere with (abut against) each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the main frame during play due to vibration or some other reason, it interferes with (is prevented from opening by) the back cover, preventing the rear unit from opening too wide and preventing malfunctions caused by the rear unit opening.

In addition, when the locking means is moved to the locked position while the rear unit is closed relative to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed, preventing the rear unit from opening on its own due to vibration or other reasons, and preventing malfunctions caused by the rear unit being open. Even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing it relative to the main body frame when maintenance is completed, you can close the rear cover to move the locking means to the locked position and lock it, preventing you from forgetting to lock it.

Furthermore, the locking means is designed to move between a locked position and an unlocked position, so by checking the position of the locking means, it is easy to determine whether or not it is locked, preventing forgetting to lock it.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide an amusement machine that can prevent the rear unit, which is openable and closable at the rear of the main frame, from being left open during maintenance, etc.

[15-2c. Relationship between the solution of the second technical feature and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, the ball launching unit 550 of the main frame 4 corresponds to the ball launching means of the above-mentioned solution means, the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 in this embodiment correspond to the ball circulating means of the above-mentioned solution means, the frame base unit 730 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear unit of the above-mentioned solution means, the Nylatch 774 in this embodiment corresponds to the locking means of the above-mentioned solution means, and the rear cover 505 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear cover of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-2d. Characteristic effect of the second technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550, which launches the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, is collected by the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 and supplied to the ball launching unit 550, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 based on the ball data of the player (the number of balls held is 1 or more). In this pachinko machine 1 (a so-called enclosed game machine, a managed game machine), Since a frame base unit 730 serving as a rear unit is provided below the game board 5 on the rear surface of the main body frame 4, the component provided at the rear of the game board in conventional pachinko machines is replaced by the frame base unit 730 of this embodiment, so that the depth direction of the game board 5 can be increased by the amount of that component. As a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 5 with a wide depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate it from other pachinko machines, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided. In this pachinko machine 1, when the outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall, the main frame 4 can be opened forward relative to the outer frame 2, allowing the rear side of the main frame 4 to be seen, and when the rear cover 505 is opened in this state, the rear side of the game board 5 can be seen, and further, when the frame base unit 730 is opened, the main frame speaker 503, main frame speaker box 504, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, front side of the base unit 730, etc. can be seen and maintained, thereby improving the ease of work involved in maintenance, etc.

When closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, if you try to close the back cover 505 without closing the frame board unit 730, the back cover 505 will interfere with (abut) the frame board unit 730 and will not be able to close, making it possible to notice that the frame board unit 730 has been left closed, and preventing the frame board unit 730 from being left closed. Furthermore, if you try to close the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 when the frame board unit 730 is closed and the back cover 505 is open, or when both the frame board unit 730 and the back cover 505 are open, the back cover 505 will interfere with (abut) the outer frame 2 and will be prevented from being closed, making it possible to notice that the back cover 505, etc. is open, and preventing the back cover 505, etc. from being left closed. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to close the frame board unit 730 or the back cover 505 during maintenance, etc.

In addition, because the frame base unit 730 and the back cover 505 are designed to interfere with (abut against) each other, even if the frame base unit 730 attempts to open from the main frame 4 due to some reason such as vibration during play, it interferes with (is prevented from opening by) the back cover 505, preventing the frame base unit 730 from opening too wide, and preventing malfunctions caused by the frame base unit 730 opening.

In addition, when the frame substrate unit 730 is closed relative to the main frame 4, pressing the Nylatch 774 as a locking means to move it to the locked position locks the frame substrate unit 730 so that it cannot be opened or closed, thereby preventing the frame substrate unit 730 from opening on its own due to some reason such as vibration, and preventing malfunctions caused by the frame substrate unit 730 opening. Even if you forget to lock the frame substrate unit 730 with the Nylatch 774 after closing it relative to the main frame 4 at the end of maintenance, etc., you can move the Nylatch 774 to the locked position by closing the rear cover 505, preventing you from forgetting to lock it.

Furthermore, since the Nylatch 774, which serves as the locking means, is designed to move between a locked position and an unlocked position, by checking the position of the operating part 774a of the Nylatch 774, it is easy to determine whether or not it is locked, and this helps prevent forgetting to lock it.

[15-3. Third technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-3a. Background of the third technical feature]
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a ball sensor with a detection hole in a portion extending vertically in the ball passage through which the gaming balls flow is provided to detect the gaming balls flowing through the ball passage (for example, Patent Document C: JP 2016-96868 A).

However, if a ball sensor with a detection hole like that in Patent Document C is provided in a part of the ball passage where game balls flow left and right (or front and back), the passage will narrow at the detection hole, which may slow down the flow speed of the game balls or cause the balls to become clogged. Therefore, it is possible to use a photosensor without a detection hole as the ball sensor, but if the inner circumference of the ball passage is square, the game balls will tend to swing in the width direction of the ball passage, and the game balls will frequently come into contact with the side walls, causing the sides to wear and get scratched, making it easy for dirt such as dust and dirt to occur. This dirt, etc., may hinder the light reception and emission of the photosensor, resulting in a false detection.

Therefore, in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of gaming balls circulating through the ball passage.

[15-3b. Solution of the third technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The ball circulation means is
A ball passage through which game balls are distributed;
A photosensor for detecting game balls passing through the ball passage;
The ball passage is
At least the portion where the photosensor is provided is provided so as to contact the game ball at two points below the center of the game ball.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of the part of the ball passage that "contacts the game ball at two points below its center" include "a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they go upward (such as a V-shaped cross section or an inverted trapezoidal cross section that narrows downward)" and "a pair of protrusions that extend in the direction of ball flow with a distance narrower than the diameter of the game machine."

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area of the gaming board, and a ball circulating means for collecting the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player. The ball circulating means has a ball passage through which the gaming balls flow and a photosensor for detecting the gaming balls flowing through the ball passage, and the ball passage is arranged so that at least the part where the photosensor is provided is in contact with the gaming ball at two points below the center of the gaming ball (see the description of chapter [4-5. Ball lifting unit], Figures 52 and 53, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which the gaming balls launched from the ball launching means that launches the gaming balls into the playing area of the gaming board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the gaming balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the player's ball data (for example, the number of balls held is 1 or more), at least the photosensor portion in the ball passage through which the gaming balls flow is contacted by the gaming ball at two points below the center, so that the gaming ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the photosensor portion, and it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from contacting the side wall of the ball passage and wearing or scratching the side wall, causing dirt such as dust and dirt. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball passage as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent false detection caused by dirt or the like impeding the reception and emission of light by the photosensor, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of gaming balls flowing through the ball passage.

In addition, at least at the photosensor location in the ball passage, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and allowing the game ball flowing through the ball passage to be detected reliably.

The ball passage may have a first-shaped passage section provided at least in the area where the photosensor is provided, with a pair of inclined surfaces that the game ball comes into contact with and that are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they move upward. In this way, the game ball comes into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces in the first-shaped passage section in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, so that wear and scratches on the contact area caused by the game ball can be reduced compared to when the game ball comes into contact with a pair of protrusions, and the generation of dirt such as dust and dirt can be prevented, thereby reducing false detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, as described above, when a first-shaped passage section is provided in the ball passage, a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first-shaped passage section of the ball passage. Therefore, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, thereby reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

The ball passage may also have an opening located upstream of the area where the photosensor is located, opening downward to a size that does not impede the flow of game balls. This allows dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball passage to be discharged to the outside through the opening, reducing the effect of dirt on the photosensor and reducing false detection of game balls caused by dirt in the photosensor.

Furthermore, the ball passage may have a second-shaped passage section provided at least on the downstream or upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, with a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and which is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction. As a result, at least one of the downstream or upstream sides of the portion where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is a second-shaped passage section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that when multiple game balls stop in the second-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and the game balls from the downstream side are lined up so that they alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls stop in the second-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, because part of the ball pressure of the game balls toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surface with which they are in contact, the ball pressure on the member holding the game balls can be reduced compared to when they are lined up in a row on the axis, making the member less likely to be damaged and eliminating the need to reinforce the member excessively, which helps to suppress increases in the cost of the game machine.

In addition, if the portion of the ball passage where the photosensor is located is capable of temporarily stopping the flow of game balls, the presence or absence of a game ball at the portion of the ball passage where the game ball is stopped may be determined when the detection and non-detection times of the game ball by the photosensor exceed a predetermined threshold. Meanwhile, detection of a game ball at a winning port, etc. is performed by checking the output from the photosensor (ball sensor) at each predetermined interrupt period (e.g., 4 ms), and when the output becomes non-detection, detection, detection (in other words, "011"), it is determined that a game ball has been detected (ON). In other words, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, in a photosensor provided in a portion (stopping portion) where the flow of game balls temporarily stops, if the presence or absence of game balls is judged by the above-mentioned judgment method, the photosensor will only turn OFF if there are no game balls in the stopping portion, will turn ON at short intervals many times if game balls are supplied to the stopping portion, and will turn OFF at short intervals many times if the game balls stored in the stopping portion are moving one by one (the game balls are moving at the firing interval). Therefore, the judgment method described above could not accurately judge that there are no game balls in the stopping portion. In contrast, the presence or absence of game balls is judged by the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceeding a predetermined threshold. In other words, a threshold is set for each of the judgments of ON (presence) and OFF (absence), and ON or OFF is judged only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the photosensor is "01111...", it is judged as ON, and when it is "10000...", it is judged as OFF. This makes it possible to reliably determine whether or not there are game balls in the ball passageway where multiple game balls are stationary.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said ball passage is
The first-shaped passage portion is provided at least in the area where the photosensor is provided, and has a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gap between them increases as they go upward, with the game ball coming into contact with each of the inclined surfaces.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 2, the ball passage has a first-shaped passage portion provided at least at the portion where the photosensor is provided, with a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gap between them increases as they move upward and are in contact with the game ball (see the description of the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 in the [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, in the first shape passage section where the photosensor in the ball passage is provided, the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces, which reduces wear and damage to the contact area caused by the game ball compared to when the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions, prevents the generation of dirt such as dust and dirt, and reduces false detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, because a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage section of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The said ball passage is
It is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and has an opening that opens downward and is large enough not to impede the flow of game balls.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball passage has an opening that is provided upstream of the location where the photosensor is provided and opens downward to a size that does not impede the flow of game balls (see the description of the ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 and the ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 in the [Form for implementing the invention]).

This allows dirt, dust, and other contaminants in the ball passage to be expelled to the outside through the opening, reducing the impact of dirt on the photosensor and reducing false detection of game balls caused by dirt in the photosensor.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The said ball passage is
The second-shaped passage portion is provided at least on either the downstream side or the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and has a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and which has a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side walls standing upright from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction.
The present invention is characterized in that

However, if the shape of the ball passage is such that there are two contact points below the center of the game ball, as mentioned above, the game ball will not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so when multiple game balls are stopped in the ball passage, the multiple game balls will line up in a row on the axis of the ball passage. As a result, the component that holds the multiple game balls will be subjected to large ball pressure from the multiple game balls, which may make the component more susceptible to damage, and reinforcing the component to prevent damage may increase costs.

According to the configuration of Means 4, the ball passage has a second-shaped passage portion provided at least on either the downstream or upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, the second-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction (see the description of the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, at least one of the downstream and upstream sides of the portion of the ball passage where the photosensor is provided is a second-shaped passage section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that when multiple game balls are stopped in the second-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and line up so that the game balls from the downstream side alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls are stopped in the second-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since a portion of the ball pressure of the game balls toward the downstream side can be alternately released to the side wall surfaces they are in contact with, the ball pressure on the member that is stopping the multiple game balls can be reduced compared to when they are lined up in a line on the axis, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the member, which suppresses increases in the cost of the game machine.

The second-shaped passage section may be provided only downstream of the photosensor, only upstream of the photosensor, or both downstream and upstream of the photosensor. In the case of a ball passage in which many game balls are retained downstream of the photosensor, it is desirable to provide the second-shaped passage section at least downstream of the photosensor.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The ball circulation means is
A ball passage through which game balls are distributed;
A photosensor for detecting game balls passing through the ball passage;
The ball passage is
A first shape passage portion is provided at the portion where the photosensor is provided, and has a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gaming ball contacts each of them so as to contact at two points below the center of the gaming ball and the distance between the inclined surfaces increases as the inclined surfaces move upward;
An opening portion is provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion and opens downward with a size that does not hinder the flow of game balls;
and a second-shaped passage portion which is provided on at least one of the downstream side or the upstream side of the first-shaped passage portion and has a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and which has a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area of the gaming board, and a ball circulating means for recovering the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player, the ball circulating means having a ball passage through which the gaming balls circulate and a photosensor for detecting the gaming balls circulating in the ball passage, the ball passage being provided at a location where the photosensor is provided, The passage has a first shape with a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gaming ball comes into contact with each of them at two points below the center of the ball and the distance between them increases as the passage goes upward; an opening that is provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage and opens downward with a size that does not impede the flow of the gaming ball; and a second shape passage that is provided on at least one of the downstream and upstream sides of the first shape passage and has a flat bottom surface with which the gaming ball comes into contact and that is wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces that stand up from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction.

As a result, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which gaming balls launched from a ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the playing area of the gaming board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the ball data of the player (for example, the number of balls held is 1 or more), at least the photosensor portion in the ball passage through which the gaming balls flow is a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that incline so that the spacing between them increases as they go upward, and the pair of inclined surfaces cause the gaming ball to contact the ball at two points below its center, so that the gaming ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the photosensor portion, and it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from contacting the side wall of the ball passage, which would wear down or scratch the side wall, causing dirt such as garbage and dust. Therefore, it is possible to reduce as much dirt, dust, and other contaminants in the ball passage as possible, which can prevent false detections caused by dirt or other impediments to the light reception and emission of the photosensor, thereby providing a gaming machine that can reduce false detections of gaming balls circulating in the ball passage.

In addition, in the first shape passage section where the photosensor is installed in the ball passage, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and allowing the game ball flowing through the ball passage to be detected reliably.

In addition, in the first shape passage section where the photosensor is provided, the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces, which reduces wear and damage to the contact area caused by the game ball compared to when the game ball is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions, and prevents the generation of dirt such as dust and dirt, thereby reducing false detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

Furthermore, because a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage section of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

In addition, an opening is provided upstream of the first-shaped passage section in the ball passage where the photosensor is located, so dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball passage can be discharged to the outside through the opening, reducing the effect of dirt on the photosensor and reducing erroneous detection of game balls caused by dirt in the photosensor.

In addition, at least one of the downstream and upstream sides of the first-shaped passage section in which at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is a second-shaped passage section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces. When multiple game balls are stopped in the second-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and line up so that the game balls from the downstream side alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls are stopped in the second-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern and are not lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since a portion of the ball pressure of the game balls toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces they are in contact with, the ball pressure on the member that is stopping the multiple game balls can be reduced compared to when they are lined up in a line on the axis, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to increase the strength and rigidity of the member more than necessary, which can suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In this way, the above solution can provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detection of gaming balls circulating through the ball passage.

[15-3c. Relationship between the solution of the third technical feature and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, the ball launching unit 550 of the main frame 4 corresponds to the ball launching means of the above-mentioned solution means, the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 in this embodiment correspond to the ball circulating means of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 in this embodiment, and the ball sending passage 703 of the ball sending unit 700 in this embodiment correspond to the ball passage of the above-mentioned solution means, the V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a in this embodiment correspond to the first shaped passage portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the U-shaped passage portion 652b, and the ball sending passage 703 in this embodiment correspond to the second shaped passage portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the portions where the ball lifting inlet earth metal plate 655 and the ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 in this embodiment are attached correspond to the openings of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-3d. Characteristic effect of the third technical feature]
In the following, the effects of the ball lifting exit passage 652 in the ball lifting unit 650 as a ball passage will be described, and the effects of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 will be omitted because the same effects are also achieved in the ball lifting entrance passage 651. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550 that launches the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is collected by the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 and supplied to the ball launching unit 550, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data (the number of balls held is 1 or more) in the pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed game machine, managed game machine), The portion of the lifting outlet sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor in 652 is a V-shaped passage portion 652a having a V-shaped cross section with a pair of inclined surfaces inclined so that the distance therebetween increases as it goes upward, and the pair of inclined surfaces allow the game ball B to contact the ball at two points below its center, so that the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 at the portion of the lifting outlet sensor 654, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from contacting the side wall of the ball lifting outlet passage 652, causing the side wall to be worn or damaged, thereby preventing the generation of dirt such as dust and dirt. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent false detection caused by dirt or the like impeding the reception and emission of light by the photosensor in the lifting outlet sensor 654, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing false detection of the game ball B circulating through the ball lifting outlet passage 652.

In addition, in the V-shaped passage section 652a where the lifting outlet sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting outlet passage 652, so the positional relationship between the lifting outlet sensor 654 (photosensor) and the game ball B can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and allowing the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting outlet passage 652 to be reliably detected.

In addition, in the V-shaped passage section 652a where the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided, the game ball B is brought into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces. This reduces wear and damage to the contact area caused by the game ball B compared to when the game ball B is brought into contact with a pair of protrusions, prevents the generation of dirt such as dust and dirt, and reduces false detection of the game ball B by the lifting exit sensor 654.

Furthermore, since a pair of inclined surfaces is provided in the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting outlet passage 652, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball B, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball B, thereby reducing the effect of the dirt on the lifting outlet sensor 654 and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball B.

In addition, an opening to which the ball lifting outlet earth metal plate 656 is attached is provided upstream of the V-shaped passage section 652a in which the lifting outlet sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652. This allows dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 to be discharged to the outside through the opening, thereby reducing the effect of dirt on the lifting outlet sensor 654 and reducing erroneous detection of the game ball B caused by dirt in the lifting outlet sensor 654.

In addition, at least one of the downstream or upstream sides (here, both the upstream and downstream sides) of the V-shaped passage section 652a, where the lifting outlet sensor 654 consisting of a photosensor is provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652, is a U-shaped passage section 652b and a ball sending passage 703, which have a U-shaped cross section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces. Therefore, when multiple game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage section 652b and the ball sending passage 703, they are pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side, and the game balls B from the downstream side are lined up so that they alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage section 652b and the ball sending passage 703, they are lined up in a staggered pattern and are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 or the ball sending passage 703. Therefore, since a portion of the ball pressure of the game ball B toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surface with which it is in contact, the ball pressure acting on the ball-transporting movable member 705 (ball stopping portion 705e) of the ball-transporting unit 700 that holds multiple game balls B can be reduced compared to when they are lined up in a row on the axis, making it difficult for the ball-transporting movable member 705 to be damaged, and there is no need to excessively reinforce the ball-transporting movable member 705, suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[15-4. Fourth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-4a. Background of the fourth technical feature]
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball sensor has been provided in a ball passage through which gaming balls flow, and the presence or absence of gaming balls in the ball passage is determined by the detection of the gaming balls by the ball sensor (for example, Patent Document D: JP 2015-188537 A). In the technology of this Patent Document 1, two ball sensors are provided at an interval in the ball passage, and the presence or absence of gaming balls is determined by the combination of detection signals from the two ball sensors.

However, the technology of Patent Document D has problems in that multiple ball sensors are provided to determine the presence or absence of gaming balls at specific locations in the ball passage, which increases costs and increases the load on the control means involved in the determination. Therefore, it is conceivable to determine the presence or absence of gaming balls using a single ball sensor, but in locations where the circulation of gaming balls temporarily stops (stopping areas), it is difficult to accurately determine that there are no gaming balls.

In view of the above situation, the following solution aims to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect the presence or absence of gaming balls at a stopping section where gaming balls temporarily stop in a passageway through which gaming balls circulate.

[15-4b. Solution of the fourth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
A control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball projecting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The ball launching means and the ball circulating means are
A stop section is provided on a circulation ball path along which the game balls circulate, and is capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls;
A ball sensor that detects a game ball stopped at the stopping portion;
It has
The control means
When the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stopping portion is determined and the ball circulation means is controlled.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "stopping portions" include "launch rails (launch pads) in the ball launching means," "ball sending passages of the ball sending unit that supplies game balls one by one to the ball launching means in the ball circulating means," "ball lifting inlet passages and ball lifting outlet passages of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls in the ball circulating means," and "ball storage passages of the circulating ball path unit that stores game balls in the ball circulating means."

Examples of "ball sensors" include "photo sensors having a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element," "dielectric sensors that detect changes in induced current," "contact sensors that detect contact with a game ball," "magnetic sensors that detect changes in magnetism," and "capacitive sensors that detect changes in electrostatic capacitance." When multiple holding areas are provided, the ball sensors provided at each holding area may be the same type or different types.

Conventionally, the detection of game balls at the winning slot or the like is performed by checking the output from a photosensor (ball sensor) at a predetermined interruption period (for example, 4 ms), and when the output is not detected, detected, detected (in other words, "011"), it is determined that a game ball has been detected (ON). In other words, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, when a ball sensor is provided in a retention section where the flow of game balls temporarily stops, if the presence or absence of game balls is determined using the above-mentioned conventional determination method, the ball sensor will only generate OFF when there are no game balls in the retention section, generate many ONs at short intervals when game balls are being supplied to the retention section, and generate many OFFs at short intervals when the game balls stored in the retention section are moving one by one (the game balls are moving at the firing interval). Therefore, the conventional determination method was not able to accurately determine that there are no game balls in the retention section.

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area of the gaming board, a ball circulating means for collecting the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player. The ball launching means and the ball circulating means are provided on the circulating ball path along which the gaming balls circulate, and have a stopping section where the circulation of the gaming balls can be temporarily stopped, and a ball sensor that detects the gaming balls stopped in the stopping section, and when the detection time and non-detection time of the gaming ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of gaming balls in the stopping section and controls the ball circulating means (see the description of chapter [4-5. Ball lifting unit], Figures 52 and 53, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which gaming balls launched from a ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area of the gaming board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the gaming balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the player's ball data (e.g., the number of balls held is 1 or more), a ball sensor is provided at a stopping section where the gaming balls can temporarily stop on the circulating ball path along which the gaming balls circulate, and when the detection time and non-detection time of the gaming ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of a gaming ball at the stopping section and controls the ball circulation means. In other words, in conventional determinations, the presence or absence of a gaming ball (ON/OFF) is determined using only the condition (threshold) that the gaming ball is present (ON), whereas in this means, a threshold is provided for each of the ON (present) and OFF (absent) determinations, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is judged to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is judged to be OFF. This makes it possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of game balls in the ball passageway stop section where multiple game balls are stopped.

In addition, because the presence or absence of game balls in the holding area is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, it is possible to avoid situations where balls run out in the circulating ball path (holding area) and game balls cannot be released even though there is ball holding data (number of balls held), or where the ball circulation means is damaged or the balls become clogged when more game balls are supplied to the holding area when it is full, allowing players to continue enjoying the game.

If the threshold is too small, even a slight vibration will cause a false detection, resulting in noise in the control. If the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will not be detected. Therefore, the appropriate threshold will vary depending on where the ball sensor is installed, but it is desirable to set it to a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 300 ms. Furthermore, if the threshold is set to a multiple of the interrupt cycle, the software only needs to count the number of interrupts, reducing the burden on the software.

In addition, multiple stopping sections may be provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means may determine the presence or absence of game balls using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping section. This allows the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of game balls to be different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, it is possible to reduce the threshold value for a ball sensor in a stopping section such as the ball sending passage of a ball sending unit that supplies game balls to the ball launching means, and to increase the threshold value for a ball sensor in a stopping section such as the ball lifting inlet passage or ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball sending unit. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls depending on the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control means can perform control efficiently and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, a plurality of stopping sections may be provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means may determine the presence or absence of a game ball using the same threshold value, or different threshold values depending on the stopping section. This allows the threshold value for when a game ball is present and the threshold value for when a game ball is absent to be different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, the threshold value for when a game ball is present and the threshold value for when a game ball is absent may be the same for a ball sensor of a stopping section such as the launch rail of a ball launching means that launches game balls, and the threshold value for when a game ball is present and the threshold value for when a game ball is absent may be different for a ball sensor of a stopping section such as the ball lifting inlet passage or ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls. Therefore, by determining whether the threshold for when game balls are present and the threshold for when game balls are absent are the same or different depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stop area, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control by the control means can be performed efficiently in accordance with the stop area, and the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, at least a part of the retention section may be provided with a U-shaped passage section having a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and which is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction. As a result, at least a part of the retention section where the game ball temporarily stops is provided with a U-shaped passage section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that when multiple game balls stop in the U-shaped passage section, the game balls from the downstream side are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and line up so that they alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls stop in the U-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and the game balls are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the retention section (passage). Therefore, part of the ball pressure of the game ball toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surface with which it is in contact, which reduces the ball pressure applied to the specific member that holds the game ball, making the member less likely to be damaged and eliminating the need to reinforce the member excessively, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the game machine.

Furthermore, a photo sensor may be included as the ball sensor, and a V-shaped passage section having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gap between the game balls increases as the game balls contact the pair of inclined surfaces and move upward may be provided at least at the location of the photo sensor in the parking section. As a result, since a V-shaped passage section is provided at the location where the photo sensor is provided in the parking section, the game balls do not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the parking section at the location of the photo sensor when the game balls contact the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section, and it is possible to prevent the game balls from contacting the side walls and wearing or scratching the side walls, causing dirt such as dust and dirt. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dust and dirt in the parking section as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent false detections caused by dirt or other impediments to the light reception and emission of the photosensor, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce false detections of game balls parked in the parking section.

In addition, when a V-shaped passage section is provided as described above, at least at the location of the photosensor in the stopping section, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section prevents the gaming ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the gaming ball can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and ensuring reliable detection of the gaming ball.

Furthermore, when a V-shaped passage section is provided as described above, since the V-shaped passage section has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball. Note that the V-shaped passage section may be any section that has a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage with a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or may be an inverted trapezoidal cross section that narrows downward.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said stop portion is
A plurality of the ball circulation paths are provided on the ball circulation paths,
The control means
The presence or absence of a gaming ball is determined by the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping portion.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 2, multiple stopping areas are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means determines the presence or absence of game balls using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping area (see the description of the launch subtraction sensor 554, lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, launch pre-sensor 704, etc. in [Form for implementing the invention]).

This allows the threshold value for determining whether or not game balls are present to be different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, it is possible to make the threshold value smaller for ball sensors in stopping sections such as the ball sending passage of the ball sending unit that supplies game balls to the ball launching means, and to make the threshold value larger for ball sensors in stopping sections such as the ball lifting inlet passage and ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball sending unit. Therefore, by determining whether or not game balls are present depending on the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control means can perform control efficiently and the load on control can be reduced.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The said stop portion is
A plurality of the ball circulation paths are provided on the ball circulation paths,
The control means
Depending on the stop portion, the presence or absence of a gaming ball is determined using the same threshold value, or the presence or absence of a gaming ball is determined using different threshold values.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 3, multiple stopping areas are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means determines whether or not there is a game ball using the same threshold value, or whether or not there is a game ball using different threshold values, depending on the stopping area (see the description of the launch subtraction sensor 554, lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, launch pre-sensor 704, etc. in [Form for implementing the invention]).

This allows the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent to be different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, it is possible to make the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent the same for a ball sensor in a stopping section, such as the launch rail of a ball launching means that launches game balls, and to make the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent different for a ball sensor in a stopping section, such as the ball lifting inlet passage and ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls. Therefore, by making the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent the same or different depending on the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of the game balls in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control by the control means can be performed efficiently in accordance with the stopping section, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The said stop portion is
At least a part of the machine is provided with a U-shaped passageway having a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side walls standing upright from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction.
The present invention is characterized in that

However, in the retention section of the circulating ball path, the circulation of game balls is temporarily stopped by a specified member. Therefore, the more game balls that are retained in the retention section, the greater the ball pressure that is exerted on the specified member retaining the game balls, which may make the member more susceptible to damage. Reinforcing the member to prevent damage may increase costs.

According to the configuration of Means 4, at least a portion of the retention section is provided with a U-shaped passage section having a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction (see the description of the U-shaped passage section 651b of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage section 652b of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, at least a portion of the retention section where the game balls temporarily stop is provided with a U-shaped passage section consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that when multiple game balls stop in the U-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and the game balls line up from the downstream side so that they alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls stop in the U-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and the game balls are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the retention section (passage). Therefore, part of the ball pressure of the game balls toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces they are in contact with, so that the ball pressure on the specified member that retains the game balls can be reduced, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to reinforce the member excessively, which suppresses increases in the cost of the game machine.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The sphere sensor is
It includes a photosensor,
The stop portion is
A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gap between them increases as the game ball comes into contact with the V-shaped passage portion and moves upward is provided at least at the location of the photosensor.
The present invention is characterized in that

When using a photosensor as a ball sensor, if the inner circumference of the photosensor in the holding area is square, the game ball will tend to swing in the width direction of the holding area (ball passage). This means that the game ball will frequently come into contact with the side wall, causing the side to wear and get scratched, making it easier for dirt such as dust and dirt to form. This dirt, etc. may hinder the light reception and emission of the photosensor, resulting in a false detection.

According to the configuration of Means 5, a photo sensor is included as the ball sensor, and at least at the location of the photo sensor in the stopping section, a V-shaped passage section is provided with a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the distance between them increases as the game ball comes into contact with each of them and moves upward (see the description of the V-shaped passage section 651a of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651 and the V-shaped passage section 652a of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652, the lifting inlet sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, a V-shaped passage section is provided at the location where the photosensor is provided in the parking section, and when the game ball comes into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the parking section at the photosensor location, and it is possible to avoid the game ball coming into contact with the side wall, which would cause the side wall to be worn or scratched, resulting in the generation of dirt, dust, and other contaminants. Therefore, since dirt, dust, and other contaminants in the parking section can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to prevent false detections caused by dirt, etc. impeding the light reception and emission of light by the photosensor, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of reducing false detections of game balls parked in the parking section.

In addition, at least at the location of the photosensor in the stopping section, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section prevents the gaming ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the gaming ball can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and ensuring reliable detection of the gaming ball.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage section has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball.

The V-shaped passage section may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage with a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or may be an inverted trapezoidal cross section that narrows downward.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area in which a game is played with a game ball;
A ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
A ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them again to the ball shooting means;
A control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball projecting means;
and a ball launching means for launching a game ball based on a digitized ball data of a player,
The ball launching means and the ball circulating means are
A plurality of stop sections are provided on a circulation ball path along which the game balls circulate, and are capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls;
A plurality of ball sensors including a photosensor for detecting game balls parked at each of the ball park sections;
It has
The stop portion is
"A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the gaming ball comes into contact with each of them and the spacing between them increases as they move upward" is provided at least in the area of the photosensor, and "a U-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with which the gaming ball comes into contact and a width larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction" is provided in the area excluding the V-shaped passage portion,
The control means
When the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stopping area is judged and the ball circulation means is controlled, and further, "the presence or absence of the game ball is judged by the same threshold or a different threshold depending on the stopping area" and "the presence or absence of the game ball is judged by the same threshold or a different threshold depending on the stopping area."
It is characterized by:

According to the configuration of means 6, the gaming machine is equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area where a game is played with gaming balls, a ball launching means capable of supplying gaming balls to the gaming area of the gaming board, a ball circulating means for collecting the gaming balls launched by the ball launching means and supplying them again to the ball launching means, and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulating means and the ball launching means, and is configured to launch gaming balls using the ball launching means based on the digitized ball data of the player, and the ball launching means and the ball circulating means are provided on the circulating ball path along which the gaming balls circulate, and have a plurality of stopping sections that can temporarily stop the circulation of the gaming balls, and a plurality of ball sensors including a photosensor that detects the gaming balls stopped at each stopping section, and the stopping sections "are spaced apart as the gaming balls come into contact with each of them and move upward." A "V-shaped passage section having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so as to widen" is provided at least in the area of the photosensor, and a "C-shaped passage section having a flat bottom surface with which the game ball comes into contact and a width greater than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side walls erected from both ends of the width direction of the bottom surface" is provided in the area excluding the V-shaped passage section, and when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of a game ball in the stopping section and controls the ball circulation means, and further "determines the presence or absence of a game ball using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping section" and "determines the presence or absence of a game ball using the same threshold value or different threshold values depending on the stopping section."

In this way, in a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) in which gaming balls launched from a ball launching means that launches gaming balls into the gaming area of the gaming board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to the ball launching means, and the gaming balls are launched from the ball launching means based on the player's ball data (e.g., the number of balls held is 1 or more), a ball sensor is provided at a stopping section where the gaming balls can temporarily stop on the circulating ball path along which the gaming balls circulate, and when the detection time and non-detection time of the gaming ball by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold, the control means determines the presence or absence of a gaming ball at the stopping section and controls the ball circulation means. In other words, in conventional determinations, the presence or absence of a gaming ball (ON/OFF) is determined using only the condition (threshold) that the gaming ball is present (ON), whereas in this means, a threshold is provided for each of the ON (present) and OFF (absent) determinations, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is judged to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is judged to be OFF. This makes it possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of game balls in the ball passageway stop section where multiple game balls are stopped.

In addition, because the presence or absence of game balls in the holding area is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, it is possible to avoid situations where balls run out in the circulating ball path (holding area) and game balls cannot be released even though there is ball holding data (number of balls held), or where the ball circulation means is damaged or the balls become clogged when more game balls are supplied to the holding area when it is full, allowing players to continue enjoying the game.

Furthermore, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be made different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, it is possible to make the threshold smaller for ball sensors in stopping sections such as the ball sending passage of the ball sending unit that supplies game balls to the ball launching means, and to make the threshold larger for ball sensors in stopping sections such as the ball lifting inlet passage and ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts game balls to the ball sending unit. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls depending on the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of game balls in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control means can perform control efficiently and the load on control can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent can be made different depending on the stopping section (ball sensor). For example, the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent can be made the same for a ball sensor in a stopping section, such as the launch rail of a ball launching means that launches game balls, and the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent can be made different for a ball sensor in a stopping section, such as the ball lifting inlet passage and ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls. Therefore, by making the threshold for when a game ball is present and the threshold for when a game ball is absent the same or different depending on the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of the game balls in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls, etc., the control means can efficiently control the stopping section and reduce the load on the control.

Furthermore, since a V-shaped passage section is provided at the location where the photosensor is provided in the parking section, when the game ball comes into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the parking section at the photosensor location, and it is possible to avoid the game ball coming into contact with the side wall, which would cause the side wall to be worn or scratched, resulting in the generation of dirt, dust, and other contaminants. Therefore, since it is possible to reduce dirt, dust, and other contaminants in the parking section as much as possible, it is possible to prevent false detections caused by dirt, etc. impeding the light reception and emission of light by the photosensor, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of reducing false detections of game balls parked in the parking section.

In addition, a U-shaped passage consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion of the retention section other than the V-shaped passage section where the photosensor is provided. Therefore, when multiple game balls are retained in the U-shaped passage section, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, and the game balls from the downstream side line up so that they alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls are retained in the U-shaped passage section, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and the game balls are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the retention section (passage). Therefore, part of the ball pressure of the game balls toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surfaces they are in contact with, so that the ball pressure on the specified member retaining the game balls can be reduced, making the member less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to reinforce the member excessively, which can suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, at the location of the photosensor in the stopping section, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section prevents the gaming ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the gaming ball can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and ensuring reliable detection of the gaming ball.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage section has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the point of contact with the game ball, reducing the effect of the dirt on the photosensor and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball. Note that the V-shaped passage section may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage with a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or may be an inverted trapezoidal cross section that narrows downward.

If the threshold is too small, even a slight vibration will cause a false detection, resulting in noise in the control. If the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will not be detected. Therefore, the appropriate threshold will vary depending on where the ball sensor is installed, but it is desirable to set it to a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 300 ms. Furthermore, if the threshold is set to a multiple of the interrupt cycle, the software only needs to count the number of interrupts, reducing the burden on the software.

In this way, the above-mentioned solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect the presence or absence of gaming balls at a stopping section where gaming balls temporarily stop in a passage through which gaming balls flow.

[15-4c. Relationship between the solution of the fourth technical feature and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, the ball launching unit 550 of the main body frame 4 corresponds to the ball launching means of the above-mentioned solving means, the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 correspond to the ball circulating means of the above-mentioned solving means, the circulation path R in this embodiment corresponds to the circulating ball path of the above-mentioned solving means, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550, the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 in the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit The ball sending passage 703 of the ball launching unit 550 corresponds to the stopping portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the launch subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 of the circulating ball path unit 600, the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 of the ball lifting unit 650, and the pre-launch sensor 704 of the ball sending unit 700 correspond to the ball sensors of the above-mentioned solution means, and the launch subtraction sensor 554, the lifting inlet sensor 653, and the lifting outlet sensor 654 in this embodiment correspond to the photosensors of the above-mentioned solution means.

In this embodiment, the ball launch pad 552b, the V-shaped passage section 651a of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651, and the V-shaped passage section 652a of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652 correspond to the V-shaped passage section of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball storage passage 604, the U-shaped passage section 651b of the ball lifting upper inlet passage 651, the U-shaped passage section 652b of the ball lifting upper outlet passage 652, and the ball sending passage 703 in this embodiment correspond to the U-shaped passage section of the above-mentioned solution means, and the frame control board 740 in this embodiment corresponds to the control means of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-4d. Characteristic effects of the fourth technical feature]
In the following, the effects of the lifting inlet sensor 653 of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 in the ball lifting unit 650 will be described as a stopping section where the circulation of the game ball B is temporarily stopped and stopped at a fixed position, and the effects of the launch subtraction sensor 554, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the lifting outlet sensor 654, the launch front sensor 704, etc. will be omitted unless particularly necessary, since they have similar effects. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B launched from the ball launching unit 550 that launches the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is collected by the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball sending unit 700 and supplied to the ball launching unit 550, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 based on the ball data of the player (the number of balls held is 1 or more) (so-called sealed game In the game machine (game machine, managed game machine), a lifting inlet sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided in a ball lifting inlet passage 651 of a ball lifting unit 650 as a stopping section where the game ball B can temporarily stop on a circulation route R along which the game ball B circulates, and when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball B by the lifting inlet sensor 653 exceed a predetermined threshold value, the frame control board 740 judges the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and controls the drive of the lifting motor 664. In other words, in the conventional judgment, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball B is judged using only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball B is present (ON), whereas in this embodiment, a threshold value is provided for each of the judgments of ON (presence) and OFF (absence), and ON or OFF is judged only when the non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold value. That is, for example, when the output from the lifting inlet sensor 653 is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. This makes it possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 where multiple game balls B are parked.

In addition, the presence or absence of game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is reliably determined and the drive of the lifting motor 664 is controlled, so it is possible to avoid a situation where balls run out in the circulation path R (here, the ball lifting inlet passage 651) and game ball B cannot be released even though there is ball holding data (number of balls held), or damage to the ball lifting unit 650 or ball clogging caused by more game balls B being supplied when the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is full, allowing the player to continue enjoying the game.

Furthermore, the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of game ball B may be different depending on the stopping section where the circulation of game ball B is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to make the threshold value smaller for the launching sensor 704 provided in a stopping section such as the ball sending passage 703 of the ball sending unit 700 that supplies game ball B to the ball launching unit 550, and to make the threshold value larger for the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 provided in a stopping section such as the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts game ball B to the ball sending unit 700. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game ball B according to the circulation speed (stopping frequency) of game ball B in the stopping section, the number of stopped game balls B, etc., the control by the frame control board 740 can be performed efficiently, and the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold value for when game ball B is present and the threshold value for when game ball B is absent can be made different depending on the stopping section where the circulation of game ball B is temporarily stopped. For example, the threshold value for when game ball B is present and the threshold value for when game ball B is absent can be made the same in the launch subtraction sensor 554 provided in a stopping section such as the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 that launches game ball B, and the threshold value for when game ball B is present and the threshold value for when game ball B is absent can be made different in the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 provided in a stopping section such as the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts game ball B. Therefore, by determining whether the threshold value for when game ball B is present and the threshold value for when game balls are absent are made the same or different depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game ball B in the stop area, the number of stopped game balls B, etc., control by the frame control board 740 can be performed efficiently in accordance with the stop area, and the load on control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage section 651a is provided at the portion where the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 at the lifting entrance sensor 653 portion when the game ball B comes into contact with a pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage section 651a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from coming into contact with the side wall, which causes the side wall to be worn or damaged, thereby causing dirt such as dust and dirt. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dust and dirt in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent false detection caused by dirt or the like impeding the reception and emission of light by the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce false detection of the game ball B parked in the parking section.

In addition, since a U-shaped passage section 651b consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 other than the V-shaped passage section 651a where the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor is provided, when multiple game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage section 651b, the game balls B are pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side, and line up so that the game balls B from the downstream side alternately come into contact with the pair of side wall surfaces. In other words, when multiple game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage section 651b, they are lined up in a staggered pattern, and the game balls B are not lined up in a single row on the axis of the ball lifting entrance passage 651. Therefore, part of the ball pressure of the game ball B toward the downstream side can be released alternately to the side wall surface with which it is in contact, which reduces the ball pressure acting on the lifting spiral shaft 661 that keeps the game ball B stationary, making the lifting spiral shaft 661 less likely to be damaged, and there is no need to reinforce the lifting spiral shaft 661 excessively, which helps to suppress increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, at the location of the lifting inlet sensor 653 consisting of a photosensor in the ball lifting inlet passage 651, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion 651a prevents the game ball B from swinging in the width direction of the ball lifting inlet passage 651, so the positional relationship between the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the game ball B can be kept constant, eliminating false detections due to deviations in this positional relationship and ensuring that the game ball B is detected.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage section 651a of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dust or dirt is generated due to contact with the game ball B, the inclined surfaces can guide the dirt below the contact point with the game ball B, reducing the effect of the dirt on the lifting entrance sensor 653, which is a photosensor, and preventing dirt from adhering to the game ball B. Note that the V-shaped passage section 651a may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage with a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected, or may be an inverted trapezoidal passage with a cross section that narrows downward.

[15-5. Fifth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-5a. Background of the fifth technical feature]
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) is known in which a large number of gaming balls enclosed inside are circulated during play, and the player does not touch the gaming balls (for example, Patent Document X: JP 2020-162850 A). In a gaming machine such as this Patent Document X, the gaming balls shot into the playing area of the game board are collected by a ball circulation means and supplied to a ball launching means.

This type of so-called sealed gaming machine is not yet in widespread use, but as it becomes more widespread, it is expected that it will be mixed with conventional pachinko machines in island facilities for conventional pachinko machines.

For this reason, even in so-called sealed gaming machines, the supply balls flow above the rear surface of the gaming machine, and the collected balls flow below the rear surface of the gaming machine. As a result, game balls, metal powder generated from the game balls, and even screws that were forgotten to be collected during the replacement work fall from above.

Therefore, in consideration of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can properly handle objects that fall from above the gaming machine.

[15-5b. Solution of the fifth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine in which game balls are enclosed inside the machine and games are played with the game balls that circulate inside the machine,
The gaming machine accommodates a gaming board in a gaming machine frame, the gaming machine frame including an upper cover that protects the gaming board from above and a rear cover that protects the gaming board from behind,
The upper surface of the top cover is spherical, allowing the game balls to flow backward, but the non-spherical member has a gentle slope that allows the balls to remain on the upper surface of the top cover.

Here, "a gaming machine in which gaming balls are sealed inside the gaming machine and the game is played with the gaming balls that circulate inside the gaming machine" refers to gaming machines called sealed-in type pachinko machines, circulating type pachinko machines, and managed gaming machines.

The "top cover" and "rear cover" can be plate-shaped members made of synthetic resin. As for the "rear cover," it is preferable that it can be opened and closed for maintenance purposes, but from a crime prevention standpoint, it is preferable that it cannot be opened and closed easily.

A gentle slope is one with an angle of a few degrees to about 15 degrees from the horizontal plane. Any angle greater than this is not suitable as non-spherical screws, metal powder, etc. may slide off.

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a gaming machine in which gaming balls are enclosed within the gaming machine and a game is played with the gaming balls circulating inside the gaming machine, the gaming machine houses a gaming board in a gaming machine frame, and the gaming machine frame has a top cover that protects the gaming board from above and a rear cover that protects it from the rear, and the top surface of the top cover allows spherical gaming balls to flow backward, but the non-spherical member has a gentle slope that allows the balls to remain on the top surface of the top cover (see the description in Chapter 4-1. Main Frame Base Unit, Figures 22 to 24, etc. in [Mode for carrying out the invention]).

When configured as described above, for example, game balls that fall from the ball supply passage flow down the top surface of the top cover and then fall straight down into the game ball recovery passage where they are collected, so no problems arise. Also, metal powder, screws, etc. do not flow down because of the gentle slope, but remain on the top surface of the cover that protects them from the top. Therefore, there is no inconvenience such as screws falling into the recovery passage and interfering with the recovery of game balls.

By creating a gentle slope as described above, falling objects can be selectively allowed to flow down or remain there. In other words, objects falling from above the gaming machine can be appropriately handled.

In this embodiment of the present invention, the inclination of the top surface of the cover that protects from above is 2.00 degrees from the horizontal plane, and when the so-called lying down (generally tilted backwards by about 0.75 degrees) is taken into account when the pachinko machine is installed, the downward inclination is 2.75 degrees.

The protective cover for the game machine frame that houses the game board must have ventilation holes to dissipate heat from the game board, but it is preferable to provide these ventilation holes in the rear cover and not in the top cover. By not providing ventilation holes in the top cover, it is possible to prevent metal powder from adversely affecting the electrical components of the game board. In addition, unevenness caused by the ventilation holes does not impede the flow of game balls.

Furthermore, if the top cover is molded using a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to provide a so-called gate on the top surface of the top cover for injecting resin into the mold. This is because providing a gate can cause unevenness, which may hinder the flow of game balls.

Also, if the top cover is molded using a resin injection molding machine, it is preferable to avoid leaving any ejector pin marks, which are created when pushing the molded product out of the mold, just like the gate. Naturally, even if the ejector pin marks are small, they can still create unevenness that can impede the flow of game balls, and metal powder can get in when cleaning, making the product look unsightly.

By keeping the top surface of the top cover as smooth as possible in this way, the effect of the present invention, which is to properly handle objects that fall from above the gaming machine, can be better achieved.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
The device is characterized in that "there are no ventilation holes on the top surface of the top cover, but ventilation holes are provided on the rear cover."

According to the configuration of Means 2, no ventilation holes are provided on the top surface of the top cover, but ventilation holes are provided on the rear cover. In other words, ventilation holes are an essential component of the protective cover for the gaming machine frame that houses the gaming board in order to dissipate heat from the gaming board that generates heat, but it is preferable to provide these ventilation holes in the rear cover and not in the top cover (see the description of ventilation hole 502f in [Mode for carrying out the invention]).

By configuring it this way, there are no ventilation holes on the top surface of the top cover, which prevents falling metal powder from adversely affecting the electrical components of the game board. In addition, unevenness caused by ventilation holes does not impede the flow of game balls.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
The top cover is made of resin, and no resin injection port is provided on the top surface of the top cover.

According to the configuration of Means 3, the top cover is made of resin, and no resin injection port is provided on the top surface of the top cover (see the description of the top cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

By configuring it in this way, there are no irregularities on the top surface of the top cover caused by the resin injection port (so-called gate), so the flow of game balls is not impeded.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
The feature of the present invention is that "the top cover is made of resin, and no ejector pin marks are left on the top surface of the top cover."

According to the configuration of Means 4, the top cover is made of resin, and no ejector pin marks are left on the top surface of the top cover (see the description of top cover 502a in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

This construction improves the smoothness of the top surface of the top cover because no ejector pin marks are left when the molded product is pushed out of the mold during injection molding. The ejector pin marks are not very uneven, but by not leaving any ejector pin marks, the flow of game balls down is not impeded. Also, since there are no uneven ejector pin marks, metal powder and the like cannot get in during cleaning, resulting in a better appearance.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine frame is characterized by having an outer frame fixed to the game island equipment and a gaming board housing frame journaled on the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the gaming board housing frame.

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming machine frame comprises an outer frame that is fixed to the game island equipment, and a gaming board housing frame that is journaled on the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the gaming board housing frame (see the description of the main frame base 501 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce assembly man-hours by molding it as a single unit, and to improve the strength of the entire game board housing frame (main frame).

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 5,
It is characterized by the fact that "when the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the top cover has a positioning portion on its inside that contacts the game board and positions it."

According to the configuration of means 6, when the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the top cover has a positioning portion on the inside that contacts the game board and positions it (see the description of the abutment surface 502j in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

By configuring it in this way, the relative positions of the game board and the top cover are firmly fixed, and the purpose of protecting the game board in the game board housing frame can be achieved.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can properly handle objects that fall from above the gaming machine.

[15-5c. Relationship between the solution of the fifth technical feature and the embodiment]
The main body frame 4 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game board storage frame of the above-mentioned solution, the top cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 in this embodiment corresponds to the top cover of the above-mentioned solution, the rear cover 502b in this embodiment corresponds to the rear cover of the above-mentioned solution, and the ventilation hole 502f in this embodiment corresponds to the ventilation hole of the above-mentioned solution.

[15-5d. Characteristic effects of the fifth technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper cover 502a of the main frame base 501, which protects the game board 5 stored in the main frame 4 from above, is a gentle slope that slopes downward toward the rear, so that the game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. that fall from above the pachinko machine 1 can be properly handled. Specifically, the spherical game balls B can be made to flow down the upper surface of the upper cover 502a and fall below the pachinko machine 1, so the game balls B are collected as they are and do not cause any trouble. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be kept on the upper cover 502a without flowing down, so they also do not cause any trouble.

In addition, there are no ventilation holes 502f on the top surface of this top cover 502a. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a, which is molded by an injection molding machine, does not have a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, no unevenness caused by the gate is created on the top surface of the top cover 502a, so the flow of the game ball B is not impeded.

Similarly, consideration has been given to not leaving any ejector pin marks when the injection-molded main frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Normally, ejector pin marks are unlikely to impede the flow of game balls B if the burrs are properly removed, but there is a possibility that ejector pin marks will remain when cleaning the top surface of the top cover 502a where metal powder or the like has accumulated, and this may mar the aesthetic appearance. For this reason, by not leaving any ejector pin marks, the aesthetic appearance can be easily restored by cleaning.

In addition, this top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. By molding it in this way, it is possible to reduce assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board housing frame).

The top cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 stored inside with its top surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) on the inside that contacts the game board 5 to position it. This fixes the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a, and fulfills the purpose of the game board storage frame (main frame 4) of protecting the game board 5.

In addition, no reinforcing ribs are provided on the top surface of the top cover 502a, which means that ribs do not make cleaning difficult and maintenance is easier. Note that there are other members (e.g., frame 501a, outer frame 2, etc.) that cover the top surface of the top cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign objects will not fall.

[15-6. Sixth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-6a. Background of the sixth technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become more important in light of environmental issues. From this perspective, development is being carried out to make more parts of gaming machines out of recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of gaming machines at game halls (game parlors) where gaming machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of gaming machines that are discarded and dismantled is on the rise. Therefore, the burden of dismantling and separating gaming machines is growing, and there is a demand to reduce this work even as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that shown in Patent Document Y (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-018185), when attempting to disassemble the machine by pulling forward the side unit (ball entry unit) that has multiple general winning ports as ball entry ports and removing it from the gaming panel, the ball entry unit bends, causing the positioning protrusions inserted into the positioning holes of the gaming panel to tilt, resulting in a problem that disassembly is time-consuming.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of disassembly work required when separating the machines for recycling, etc.

[15-6b. Solution of the sixth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component member having a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting the first component member to the game panel, the first component member being attached to the game panel so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side;
a second component member having a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component member and being attached to the rear side of the first component member;
The present invention is characterized in that it comprises the following.

Here, examples of "ball entry ports" include "a prize entry port that confers a specified bonus when a game ball enters the port (e.g., a general prize entry port, a normal prize entry port, a start prize entry port (start prize entry port), a big prize entry port, a special feature prize entry port, a V prize entry port, etc.)" and "an outlet port that does not award a bonus when a game ball enters the port and expels the game ball from the gaming machine without returning it to the player", etc.

The "ball inlet" may be provided in either the first component or the second component.

Examples of "game panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood," "those made of a panel plate machined from a transparent resin plate and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate," and "those made by injection molding transparent resin."

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has multiple ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, a first component member that is attached to the gaming panel so as to block the opening that penetrates the gaming panel from the front side, and a second component member that has a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component member and is attached from the rear side of the first component member (see chapter [12-1. Side unit of the second embodiment] and the descriptions in Figures 103 to 105, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the first component is attached to the front of the gaming panel with a mounting screw through the first mounting hole, and the second component is attached with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, so the rigidity of the ball-entering unit composed of the first and second components can be increased. Therefore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screw screwed into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole is removed and the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the ball-entering unit will not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit (first component) will not tilt with respect to the positioning hole of the gaming panel, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming panel, thereby providing a gaming machine that can reduce disassembly work for sorting.

In addition, because the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the mounting screw that attaches the second component can be made less visible from the front, improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

It is preferable to provide a first mounting hole for mounting the first component to the gaming panel near the positioning protrusion. This allows the positioning protrusion to be firmly pressed against the gaming panel by screwing a mounting screw into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole, ensuring that the positioning protrusion is inserted securely into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, and preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

The second component may also be attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening. This allows the second component, which is attached from the rear side of the first component, to protrude into the opening of the gaming panel, making more effective use of the thickness of the gaming panel compared to when the second component protrudes from the front or rear of the gaming panel, and making it easier to secure empty space in front of or behind the gaming panel. This makes it possible to provide presentation devices such as decorative bodies, LED boards, and movable gimmicks in the empty space, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, the second component may be attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and may have a ball passage between the first component and the second component, which allows game balls that have entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel. As a result, since the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, and the presence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. And, since the second component, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage, is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball entrance unit, the rigidity of the ball entrance unit can be further increased, and a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

As described above, the second component attached from the back side of the first component protrudes into the opening of the gaming panel, and a ball passage is provided between the first and second component members to allow gaming balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the gaming panel. This makes it possible to make effective use of the thickness of the gaming panel and to easily secure empty space behind the gaming panel, compared to when the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the gaming panel. This makes it possible to provide presentation devices such as decorative bodies, LED boards, and movable parts in the empty space, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

It is also desirable to provide at least two positioning protrusions spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member. In this way, since the multiple positioning protrusions on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-scoring unit is attached to the gaming panel, the ball-scoring unit does not rotate along the surface of the gaming panel, and the ball-scoring unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the gaming panel.

However, when multiple positioning protrusions are provided at a distance in the longitudinal direction on a conventional ball-entering unit with low rigidity, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward during disassembly, the ball-entering unit bends in a curved shape so that the center of the ball-entering unit moves forward. This bending creates a force that tilts the positioning protrusions so that the tips of the positioning protrusions that are separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the positioning protrusions cannot be removed from the positioning holes of the gaming panel. In contrast, when multiple positioning protrusions are provided in the first component member so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member as described above, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased by attaching the second component member to the first component member, so that even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning protrusions that are separated in the longitudinal direction do not tilt, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming panel, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for separation.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the ball entry openings in the first component so that they protrude forward from the front surface of the gaming panel. In this way, since the multiple ball entry openings protrude forward from the front surface of the gaming panel, when the ball entry unit is pulled forward to remove it from the gaming panel during disassembly of the gaming machine, the ball entry openings can be grasped and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball entry unit.

The second component may also have multiple ball entry ports that protrude forward from the front surface of the first component, and a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the multiple ball entry ports. This allows the second component, which connects the front ends of the multiple ball entry ports that protrude forward with the flat front plate, to be attached from the rear side of the first component, which is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel through the first mounting hole, to form a ball entry unit, making it possible to increase rigidity compared to conventional ball entry units and to achieve the same effects as described above.

The first component may also have a flat base plate that can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel. As a result, since the first component has a flat base plate, the opening of the gaming panel can be blocked from the front side by attaching the first component to the front surface of the gaming panel through the first mounting hole, and the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden from the front side (player side) through the opening by the base plate, improving the appearance of the gaming machine. In this case, the rigidity of the first component may be reduced because the base plate is flat, but since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit formed by the first component and the second component can be increased to be higher than the rigidity of a conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 2, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening (see the description of the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800 in the [Mode for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the second component, which is attached from the back side of the first component, protrudes into the opening of the gaming panel, making more effective use of the thickness of the gaming panel compared to when the second component protrudes from the front or rear of the gaming panel, and making it easier to secure empty space in front of or behind the gaming panel. This makes it possible to provide presentation devices such as decorations, LED boards, and movable props in the empty space, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and has a ball passage between the first component and the second component that allows the game ball that has entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 3, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and has a ball passage between the first component and the second component that allows game balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel (see the description of the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, and the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the presence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. And, since the second component, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage, is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball entry unit, the rigidity of the ball entry unit can be further increased, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the second component attached from the back side of the first component protrudes into the opening of the gaming panel, and a ball passage is provided between the first and second component members to allow gaming balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the gaming panel. This makes it possible to make effective use of the thickness of the gaming panel and to easily secure empty space behind the gaming panel, compared to when the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the gaming panel. This makes it possible to provide presentation devices such as decorative bodies, LED boards, and movable parts in the empty space, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

When installing a ball sensor to detect game balls circulating in the ball passage, it is desirable to install the ball sensor within the thickness of the game panel (inside the opening). Alternatively, it is desirable to install the ball sensor below the performance device (movable prop) installed at the rear. This prevents the ball sensor from interfering with the performance device, and makes it possible to increase the range of motion of the movable prop.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"At least two of the positioning projections are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 4, at least two positioning protrusions are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component (see the description of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 in the [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the multiple positioning protrusions on the first component are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, so that when the ball-scoring unit is attached to the gaming panel, the ball-scoring unit does not rotate along the surface of the gaming panel, and the ball-scoring unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the gaming panel.

However, when multiple positioning protrusions are provided at a distance in the longitudinal direction on a conventional ball-entry unit with low rigidity, when the ball-entry unit is pulled forward during disassembly, the center of the ball-entry unit bends in a curved shape so that it moves forward. This bending creates a force that tilts the positioning protrusions so that the tips of the positioning protrusions that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction approach each other, preventing the positioning protrusions from coming out of the positioning holes in the gaming panel. In contrast, in this configuration, the rigidity of the ball-entry unit is increased by attaching the second component member to the first component member as described above, so that even if the ball-entry unit is pulled forward, the ball-entry unit does not bend and the positioning protrusions that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction do not tilt, and the ball-entry unit can be easily removed from the gaming panel, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for separation.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 5,
"The ball entrance is provided in the first component member so as to protrude forward beyond the front surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball entrance is provided in the first component so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel (see the description of the first component 2811 of the side unit 2800 in the [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, multiple ball entry ports protrude forward from the front surface of the gaming panel, so when disassembling the gaming machine, the ball entry port can be grasped and pulled when pulling the ball entry unit forward to remove it from the gaming panel, making it easier to remove the ball entry unit.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 5,
"The second component member has a plurality of ball inlets protruding forward from the front surface of the first component member, and a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball inlets."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 6, the second component has multiple ball inlets that protrude forward from the front surface of the first component, and a flat front plate that connects the front ends of the multiple ball inlets (see the description of the second component 2812A of the side unit 2800D in the [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the ball entry unit is constructed by attaching the second component member, which connects the front ends of the multiple ball entry ports that protrude forward with a flat front plate, from the rear side of the first component member that is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first mounting hole, making it possible to increase rigidity compared to conventional ball entry units and achieve the same effects as described above.

Means 7: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 6,
"The first component member has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, the first component member has a flat base plate that can abut against the front surface of the game panel (see the description of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, because a flat base plate is provided on the first component, by attaching the first component to the front surface of the gaming panel through the first mounting hole, the opening of the gaming panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate, and the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden from the front side (player side) through the opening by the base plate, improving the appearance of the gaming machine. In this case, the rigidity of the first component may be reduced because the base plate is flat, but because the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-scoring unit made up of the first component and the second component can be increased compared to the rigidity of conventional ball-scoring units, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component member having a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting the first component member to the game panel, the first component member being attached to the game panel so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side;
a second component member having a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component member and being attached to the rear side of the first component member;
Equipped with
The first component member has a flat base plate with the positioning projection protruding therefrom and the first mounting hole penetrating therethrough, capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel, at least two of the positioning projections are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate, and the ball entrance is provided to protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate,
The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and has a ball passage between the first component and the second component that allows game balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 8, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit comprises a first component member that has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to block an opening that is provided to penetrate the gaming panel from the front side, and a second component member that has a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component member and is attached from the rear side of the first component member. The first component has a flat base plate with a protruding positioning projection and a first mounting hole penetrating it that can abut against the front surface of the game panel, at least two positioning projections are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate, and the ball entrance is provided to protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and has a ball passage between the first component and the second component that allows game balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel.

As a result, since a flat base plate is provided on the first component, the first component is attached to the front of the game panel by screwing a mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole penetrating the base plate, and the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate, and the rear of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), improving the appearance of the game machine. On the other hand, since the second component is provided with a ball passage that allows game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, and the rigidity of the second component can be increased by the presence of the ball passage. And, since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component can be reduced, but since the second component, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage, is attached from the rear side of the first component through the second mounting hole with a mounting screw to form the ball entry unit, the rigidity of the ball entry unit can be increased compared to conventional ball entry units. Therefore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screw screwed into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole is removed and the ball-striking unit is pulled forward, the ball-striking unit does not bend due to its increased rigidity, so the positioning protrusion of the ball-striking unit (first component) does not tilt relative to the positioning hole of the gaming panel, and the ball-striking unit can be easily removed from the gaming panel, providing a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for sorting.

However, since the multiple positioning protrusions on the first component are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the first component is pulled forward during disassembly, the first component is bent in a curved shape so that the center of the first component moves forward. This bending creates a force that tilts the positioning protrusions so that the tips of the positioning protrusions that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and there is a risk that the positioning protrusions will not be able to be removed from the positioning holes of the gaming panel. However, in this configuration, as described above, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball-entering unit, and the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Therefore, even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning protrusions that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction do not tilt, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming panel, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for separation.

Furthermore, since the multiple ball entry ports protrude forward from the front surface of the gaming panel, when disassembling the gaming machine, the ball entry port can be grasped and pulled when pulling the ball entry unit forward to remove it from the gaming panel, making it easier to remove the ball entry unit.

In addition, because the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the mounting screw that attaches the second component can be made less visible from the front, improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

In addition, a ball passage that allows game balls that enter the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel is provided between the first and second components so as to protrude into the opening of the game panel. This makes it possible to make effective use of the thickness of the game panel and makes it easier to secure empty space behind the game panel, compared to conventional ball entrance units that guide game balls that enter the ball entrance behind the rear surface of the game panel and provide a ball passage behind the rear surface of the game panel to allow them to flow downward. This makes it possible to provide presentation devices such as decorative bodies, LED boards, and movable parts in the empty space, making it possible to provide a game machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the multiple positioning protrusions on the first component are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component, when the ball-scoring unit is attached to the gaming panel, the ball-scoring unit does not rotate along the surface of the gaming panel, and the ball-scoring unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the gaming panel.

If the first mounting hole for mounting the first component to the gaming panel is provided near the positioning protrusion, the mounting screw can be screwed into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole to press the positioning protrusion firmly against the gaming panel and ensure that it is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the amount of disassembly work required when separating the parts for recycling, etc.

[15-6c. Relationship between the solution of the sixth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the above-mentioned solving means, the positioning hole 1113 in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means, the general winning port 2001, the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811, and the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812 in this embodiment correspond to the ball entry port of the above-mentioned solving means, and the side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment correspond to the ball entry units of the above-mentioned solving means.

In addition, the first component 2811 and the first component 2811A in this embodiment correspond to the first component of the above-mentioned solution, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment corresponds to the base plate of the above-mentioned solution, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning protrusion of the above-mentioned solution, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment corresponds to the first mounting hole of the above-mentioned solution, the second component 2812 and the second component 2812A in this embodiment correspond to the second component of the above-mentioned solution, the ball passage 2812a and the ball passage 2812f in this embodiment correspond to the ball passage of the above-mentioned solution, the front plate 2812d in this embodiment corresponds to the front plate of the above-mentioned solution, and the mounting hole of the second component 2812 in this embodiment corresponds to the second mounting hole of the above-mentioned solution.

[15-6d. Characteristic effect of the sixth technical feature]
Here, side unit 2800 will be described as a representative of the features of side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800 which is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, a flat base plate 2811a is provided on the first component member 2811, and by screwing mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 through mounting holes 2811d which penetrate the base plate 2811a to attach the first component member 2811 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a, and the rear components of the gaming panel 1100 can be hidden by the base plate 2811a through the opening 1112 from the front side (player side), thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a for causing the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped, so that the presence of the ball passage 2812a can increase the rigidity of the second component 2812. Since the base plate 2811a is flat, the rigidity of the first component 2811 may be reduced, but since the second component 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 by means of mounting screws through its mounting hole to form the side unit 2800, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to conventional side units. Therefore, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the mounting holes 2811d are removed and the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, and the positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component 2811 in the side unit 2800 do not tilt relative to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

However, in the side unit 2800, the multiple positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are arranged so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811. Therefore, when the first component member 2811 is pulled forward during disassembly, the center of the first component member 2811 bends in a curved shape so as to move forward. This bending creates a force that tilts each of the positioning protrusions 2811c so that the tips of the positioning protrusions 2811c that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction approach each other, which may result in the positioning protrusions 2811c becoming unable to come out of the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 to the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased, so that even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 does not bend and the positioning protrusions 2811c that are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction do not tilt, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for separation.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, the multiple ball receiving portions 2811b (general winning openings 2001) protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward to remove it from the panel plate 1110 during disassembly of the pachinko machine 1, the ball receiving portions 2811b can be grasped and pulled, making it easier to remove the side unit 2800.

In addition, with the side unit 2800, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 with mounting screws through the mounting holes, making it difficult to see the mounting screws that attach the second component 2812 from the front, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, a ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812, which allows the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning port 2001) to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, protruding into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, compared to a conventional side unit in which the game ball B that has entered the general winning port 2001 is guided rearward of the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and a ball passage is provided rearward of the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to allow it to flow downward, the thickness of the panel plate 1110 can be effectively utilized, making it easier to secure empty space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). Therefore, it is possible to install presentation devices such as decorations, LED boards, and movable parts (underside presentation unit 3500) in the empty space, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, the multiple positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component 2811 are arranged so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component 2811. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the panel board 1110.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the first component 2811 to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. Therefore, by screwing a mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

[15-7. Seventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-7a. Background of the seventh technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become more important in light of environmental issues. From this perspective, development is being carried out to make more parts of gaming machines out of recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of gaming machines at game halls (game parlors) where gaming machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of gaming machines that are discarded and dismantled is on the rise. Therefore, the burden of dismantling and separating gaming machines is growing, and there is a demand to reduce this work even as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that shown in Patent Document Y (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-018185), when attempting to disassemble the side unit (ball entry unit), which has multiple general winning ports as ball entry ports, by pulling it forward to remove it from the gaming panel, the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, and the resistance to the inner surface of the positioning hole makes it difficult to remove the positioning protrusion, resulting in a problem that disassembly is time-consuming.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the amount of disassembly work required when separating the machines for recycling, etc.

[15-7b. Solution of the seventh technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The gaming panel includes:
It has an opening area through which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side,
The ball entry unit includes:
The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to block from the front a normal opening area of the opening area through which game balls that have entered the ball entry port can pass, and is attached to the game panel so that a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit overlaps with a specific opening area of the opening area through which game balls that have not entered the ball entry port can pass.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "ball entry ports" include "a prize entry port that confers a specified bonus when a game ball enters the port (e.g., a general prize entry port, a normal prize entry port, a start prize entry port (start prize entry port), a big prize entry port, a special feature prize entry port, a V prize entry port, etc.)" and "an outlet port that does not award a bonus when a game ball enters the port and expels the game ball from the gaming machine without returning it to the player", etc.

Examples of "game panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood," "those made of a panel plate machined from a transparent resin plate and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate," and "those made by injection molding transparent resin."

Furthermore, examples of the "opening area" include "a hole-like structure that penetrates the game panel and whose inner circumferential surface is connected all around", "a notch-like structure that penetrates the game panel and has a portion that is open to the side of the game panel", etc. Furthermore, the "opening area" includes a normal opening area through which game balls that enter the ball entry opening can pass, and a specific opening area (out opening) through which game balls that do not enter the ball entry opening can pass, and the specific opening area may be connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area may be independent and not connected to the normal opening area.

Examples of "ball entry units" include "ones that are at least comprised of a first component attached to the front of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a second component attached from the rear side of the first component, with a ball entry port provided in the first component or the second component", "ones that are at least comprised of a flat base plate attached to the front of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a ball receiving part that protrudes forward from the base plate and is open upward and backward to form a ball entry port", and "ones that are at least comprised of a flat base plate attached to the front of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a ball entry port penetrating the base plate", etc.

Furthermore, the "part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit that overlaps with the ball outlet" means that the part overlaps with the ball outlet when viewed from the front, and the outer edge constituting the part may be in contact with the front surface of the game panel, or the outer edge may be separated from the surface of the game panel.

According to the configuration of the first means, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit attached to the front of a gaming panel that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and through which game balls can flow down, the gaming panel has an opening area through which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side, and the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and an attachment hole for attachment to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to block from the front side a normal opening area through which game balls that have entered the ball entry ports can flow, and is attached to the gaming panel so that a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit overlaps with a specific opening area through which game balls that have not entered the ball entry ports can flow (see the description of chapter [12-3. Side unit, etc. of the third embodiment] in [Form for carrying out the invention], Figures 112 and 114, etc.).

By inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit from the front into the positioning hole of the game panel and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel, and the game ball that entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is blocked from the front by the ball entry unit, the rear of the game panel can be hidden and made difficult to see through the normal opening area, improving the appearance of the game machine. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached so that it overlaps with the specific opening area of the opening area (when viewed from the front, a part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the specific opening area), and therefore a part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. Furthermore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when removing the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel, the worker can hook his/her finger or tool on the part of the outer edge of the ball-scoring unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, and by hooking the finger, the ball-scoring unit can be pulled forward with great force. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily remove the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, thereby reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

It is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball entry unit to the gaming panel near the positioning protrusion. This allows the mounting screw to be screwed into the gaming panel through the mounting hole and tightened, which presses the positioning protrusion firmly against the gaming panel and ensures that it is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

The front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit may also be inclined toward the rear. Since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined toward the rear, the corner of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, when a worker hooks his/her finger or the like on the part of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly of the gaming machine, even if the finger or the like comes into contact with the corner of the outer edge, since the angle is an obtuse angle, the finger or the like is less likely to be injured compared to when the corner is a right angle, and the ball-entering unit can be safely removed with the finger or the like.

In addition, when the front surface of the outer edge is inclined as described above, the corner of the outer edge of the ball entry unit becomes an obtuse angle, so even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area, the corner of the outer edge will not chip, compared to when the corner is a right angle, and the durability of the ball entry unit can be improved.

In addition, as described above, by tilting the outer edge of the ball entry unit backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided into the specific opening area, preventing the game ball from becoming stuck in the specific opening area.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the outer edge of the entrance unit transparent. In this way, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the specific opening area, it is possible to avoid the specific opening area appearing smaller in size, since the outer edge of the entrance unit is made transparent.

It is also desirable to provide the positioning protrusions at a location close to the specific opening area and at a location far from the specific opening area. In this way, since the two positioning protrusions are provided at a distance from each other, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the gaming panel, the ball-entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the gaming panel, and the ball-entering unit can be reliably positioned at the desired location on the gaming panel.

Now, when two positioning protrusions are provided on the ball-entering unit and each is inserted into a positioning hole on the gaming panel, if the two positioning protrusions are simultaneously pulled out of the positioning holes when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly, the ball-entering unit must be pulled forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the worker. In contrast, when positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from it as described above, one positioning protrusion is provided near the specific opening area, so when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly of the gaming machine for recycling, etc., the worker can hook his/her finger or the like on the portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area and pull it forward, thereby applying a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion close to the specific opening area. As a result, during disassembly, the positioning protrusion closest to the specific opening region can be first removed from the positioning hole, and then the remaining positioning protrusion farthest from the specific opening region can be removed from the positioning hole. This means that it is possible to pull out the positioning protrusions with less force than if two positioning protrusions were pulled out at the same time, reducing the burden on the worker.

Also, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area may be made to protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel, penetrating the specific opening area. However, when disassembling a gaming machine, if an operator hooks the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulls it forward to remove the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel, if the strength of that portion is weak, the outer edge may crack and the ball-entering unit may remain on the gaming panel. In contrast, as described above, the depth of the portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area is increased, so compared to the method of overlapping part of the outer edge (extension portion) on the front of the game panel, the size of the specific opening area (ball outlet) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball outlet) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging game balls is increased), but because the strength of the area can be increased, even if an operator hooks their finger or the like on the area and pulls it forward, it will not break (be damaged), and the ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

In addition, as described above, if the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area is made to penetrate the specific opening area and protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel, this portion can cover the inner surface of the specific opening area, making it difficult for players to see, thereby improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the ball-entering unit may have a flat base plate that forms an outer edge and has a positioning projection protruding therefrom and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, which can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel. As a result, since the ball-entering unit has a flat base plate, by mounting the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the gaming panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can block the normal opening area of the gaming panel from the front side, making it possible to use the base plate to hide the rear of the gaming panel through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming panel through which gaming balls can flow,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry port through which a game ball can enter;
A ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter;
The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and an attachment hole for attaching the ball entry unit to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to be fitted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel;
The ball discharge port is constituted by a specific opening area formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted,
An extension portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit,
The extension portion is formed so that at least a portion of the extension portion overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "normal opening areas" and "specific opening areas" include "hole-like openings that penetrate the gaming panel and have a continuous inner surface all around" and "notch-like openings that penetrate the gaming panel and have a portion that is open to the side of the gaming panel."

According to the configuration of the second means, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming panel through which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry unit having a ball entry port through which the gaming balls can enter, and a ball discharge port through which the gaming balls that did not enter the ball entry port can enter. The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and a mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to fit into a normal opening area formed in the gaming panel. The ball discharge port is composed of a specific opening area formed in the gaming panel separately from the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted. An extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part is formed so that at least a part of it overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel (see the description of the embodiment shown in Figures 112 and 113 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

By inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit from the front into the positioning hole of the game panel and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel so as to fit into the normal opening area of the game panel, the rear of the game panel can be hidden and made difficult to see through the normal opening area, improving the appearance of the game machine. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, the extension part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit is formed so that a part of it overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area (when viewed from the front, a part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the specific opening area), so that a part of the extension part protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. Furthermore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when removing the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel, the worker can hook his/her finger or tool on the portion (extension portion) of the outer edge of the ball-scoring unit that overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area, and by hooking the finger, the ball-scoring unit can be pulled forward with great force. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily remove the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, thereby reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

In addition, because the ball discharge port (specific opening area) is formed separately from the normal opening area in the gaming panel, the deterioration of the strength of the gaming panel can be suppressed compared to when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected.

Means 3: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming panel through which gaming balls can flow,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry port through which a game ball can enter;
A ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter;
The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and an attachment hole for attaching the ball entry unit to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to be inserted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel;
The ball discharge port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous with the normal opening area in which the ball entry unit is fitted, but is composed of a specific opening area in which the ball entry unit is not fitted,
An extension portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit,
The extension portion is formed so that at least a portion of the extension portion overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of the third means, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming panel through which gaming balls can flow, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry unit having a ball entry port through which the gaming balls can enter, and a ball discharge port through which the gaming balls that did not enter the ball entry port can enter. The ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and a mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to be inserted into a normal opening area formed in the gaming panel. The ball discharge port is formed in the gaming panel so as to be continuous with the normal opening area into which the ball entry unit is fitted, but is composed of a specific opening area into which the ball entry unit is not fitted, and an extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part is formed so that at least a part of it overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area when the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 114 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

By inserting the positioning protrusion of the ball entry unit from the front into the positioning hole of the game panel and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball entry unit is attached to the game panel so as to fit into the normal opening area of the game panel, the rear of the game panel can be hidden and made difficult to see through the normal opening area, improving the appearance of the game machine. When this ball entry unit is attached to the front of the game panel, the extension part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit is formed so that a part of it overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area (when viewed from the front, a part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the specific opening area), so that a part of the extension part protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. Furthermore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when removing the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel, the worker can hook his/her finger or tool on the portion (extension portion) of the outer edge of the ball-scoring unit that overlaps with the edge of the specific opening area, and by hooking the finger, the ball-scoring unit can be pulled forward with great force. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily remove the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, thereby reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

In addition, since the ball outlet (specific opening area) is formed in the gaming panel so as to be continuous with the normal opening area, when a cutting tool such as an end mill is used to form the normal opening area and the specific opening area on the gaming panel, the normal opening area and the specific opening area can be cut continuously, which reduces the cost of the gaming panel.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The ball-entering unit is inclined so that the front surface of the outer edge faces rearward."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 4, the ball-entering unit has a front surface of the outer edge that is inclined toward the rear (see the description of the base plate 2811a, finger hook portion 2816, and finger hook portion 2817 of the first component 2811 in the [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined toward the rear, and the corner of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, when a worker hooks his/her finger or the like on the part of the outer edge (extended portion) of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly of the gaming machine, even if the finger or the like comes into contact with the corner of the outer edge, the obtuse angle makes it less likely that the finger or the like will be injured compared to when the corner is a right angle, and the ball-entering unit can be safely removed with the finger or the like.

In addition, as mentioned above, the corners of the outer edge of the ball entry unit are obtuse angles, so that, compared to when the corners are right angles, even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the specific opening area, the corners of the outer edge will not chip, improving the durability of the ball entry unit.

In addition, the outer edge of the ball entry unit is inclined backwards, so that the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, preventing the game ball from getting stuck in the specific opening area.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The outer edge of the ball-entering unit is transparent."
It is characterized by:

According to the configuration of Means 5, the ball entry unit is characterized by having a transparent outer edge (see the description of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 in the [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, because the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is made transparent, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the specific opening area, it is possible to avoid the specific opening area appearing smaller in size.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 5,
"The positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the specific opening region and at a portion far from the specific opening region."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 6, the positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and at a portion far from the specific opening area (see the description of the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component 2811 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, the two positioning protrusions are spaced apart from each other, so when the ball-scoring unit is attached to the gaming panel, it does not rotate along the surface of the gaming panel, and the ball-scoring unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the gaming panel.

However, if two positioning protrusions are provided on the ball-entering unit and each is inserted into a positioning hole on the gaming panel, when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly, if the two positioning protrusions are to be pulled out of the positioning holes at the same time, the ball-entering unit must be pulled forward with great force, which may increase the burden on the worker. In contrast, in this configuration, one positioning protrusion is provided near the specific opening area, so that when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly of the gaming machine for recycling, etc., the worker can hook his/her finger or the like on the part of the outer edge (extension portion) of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area and pull it forward, thereby applying a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion close to the specific opening area. As a result, during disassembly, the positioning protrusion closest to the specific opening region can be first removed from the positioning hole, and then the remaining positioning protrusion farthest from the specific opening region can be removed from the positioning hole. This means that it is possible to pull out the positioning protrusions with less force than if two positioning protrusions were pulled out at the same time, reducing the burden on the worker.

Means 7: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 6,
"The portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates the specific opening area and protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates the specific opening area and protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel (see the description of finger hook portion 2817 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

When disassembling a gaming machine, if the worker hooks his/her fingers or the like on the part of the outer edge (extension part) that overlaps with the specific opening area and pulls it forward to remove the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel, if the strength of that part is weak, the outer edge may break and the ball-entering unit may remain on the gaming panel. In contrast, in this configuration, the depth of the part of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area is increased, so compared to the method of overlapping a part of the outer edge (extension part) on the front of the gaming panel, the size of the specific opening area (ball outlet) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging the game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball outlet) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging the game balls is increased), but since the strength of that part can be increased, the ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the gaming panel even if the worker hooks his/her fingers or the like on that part and pulls it forward without breaking (breaking).

In addition, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area penetrates the specific opening area and protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the gaming panel, so that the portion covers the inner surface of the specific opening area, making it difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 8: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 7,
The ball-entering unit is characterized by having a flat base plate that forms the outer edge, with the positioning protrusion protruding and the mounting hole passing through, and that can abut against the front surface of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 8, the ball-scoring unit has a flat base plate that forms an outer edge and has a positioning protrusion protruding therefrom and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and that can abut against the front surface of the game panel (see the description of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, since the ball-entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entry unit to the front of the gaming panel through the mounting hole, the base plate can block the normal opening area of the gaming panel from the front side, making it possible to hide the rear of the gaming panel from the front side (player side) through the normal opening area with the base plate, improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 9: In any one of the configurations of means 1 and means 4 to 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to penetrate the game panel independently of the normal opening area without being connected to the normal opening area."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 9, the specific opening area is provided so as to penetrate the game panel independently, without being connected to the normal opening area (see the description of the embodiment shown in Figures 112 and 113 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

In addition to achieving the same effect as above, the specific opening area is provided independently of the normal opening area on the gaming panel and is not connected to the normal opening area, which helps prevent a decrease in the strength of the gaming panel compared to when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected.

Means 10: In any one of the configurations of means 1 and means 4 to 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 10, the specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area (see the description of the embodiment shown in Figure 114 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

In addition to providing the same effects as above, this structure connects the specific opening area and the normal opening area, so when a cutting tool such as an end mill is used to form the opening areas (normal opening area and specific opening area) on the gaming panel, the normal opening area and the specific opening area can be cut continuously, reducing the cost of the gaming panel.

Means 11: In a gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The gaming panel includes:
The game panel has an opening area in which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side, the opening area being made up of a normal opening area through which game balls that have entered the ball entrance can flow, and a specific opening area through which game balls that have not entered the ball entrance can flow, the specific opening area being not connected to the normal opening area but penetrating the game panel independently, or the specific opening area being connected to the normal opening area;
The ball entry unit includes:
a flat base plate capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel, a positioning protrusion protruding from the base plate and inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole penetrating the base plate for mounting to the game panel; the base plate is attached to the game panel so as to cover the normal opening region of the opening region from the front side, and is attached to the game panel so that a part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate overlaps the specific opening region of the opening region;
Furthermore, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is inclined toward the rear, and the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the ball discharge port and a portion far from the ball discharge port.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 11, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down, the gaming panel is configured so that game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side, and is made up of a normal opening area through which game balls that have entered the ball entry port can flow, and a specific opening area through which game balls that have not entered the ball entry port can flow, and the specific opening area has an opening area that is not connected to the normal opening area and penetrates the gaming panel independently, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area, and the ball entry unit is attached to the front of the gaming panel. It has a flat base plate that can abut against the front surface of the panel, a positioning protrusion that protrudes from the base plate and is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole that penetrates the base plate and is used for mounting to the game panel. It is attached to the game panel so as to cover the normal opening area of the opening area from the front, and is attached to the game panel so that a part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate overlaps with the specific opening area of the opening area. Furthermore, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is inclined toward the rear, and the positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the ball discharge opening and a portion far from the ball discharge opening.

With this arrangement, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front of the game panel by inserting the positioning protrusions protruding from the base plate of the ball entry unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front and abutting the base plate against the front surface of the game panel, and then screwing and fastening the mounting screws into the game panel through the mounting holes penetrating the base plate. The ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening area of the game panel. At this time, the normal opening area of the game panel is blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, so that the rear of the game panel can be hidden and made difficult to see through the normal opening area, improving the appearance of the game machine. When the ball entry unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, a part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate of the ball entry unit overlaps with the specific opening area of the opening area (when viewed from the front, a part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the specific opening area), so that a part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. Furthermore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, the worker can hook his/her fingers or tools on the part of the outer edge of the base plate that overlaps with the specific opening area when removing the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel, and by hooking the fingers, the ball-scoring unit can be pulled forward with great force together with the base plate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily remove the ball-scoring unit from the gaming panel against the resistance between the positioning hole and the positioning protrusion, reducing the disassembly work required for sorting.

However, if two positioning protrusions are provided on the ball-entering unit and each is inserted into a positioning hole on the gaming panel, when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly, if the two positioning protrusions are to be pulled out of the positioning holes at the same time, the ball-entering unit must be pulled forward with great force, which may increase the burden on the worker. In contrast, in this configuration, the positioning protrusions are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from it, so that when removing the ball-entering unit from the gaming panel during disassembly of the gaming machine for recycling or the like, the worker can hook the finger or the like on the portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area and pull it forward, thereby applying a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion close to the specific opening area. As a result, during disassembly, the positioning protrusion closest to the specific opening region can be first removed from the positioning hole, and then the remaining positioning protrusion farthest from the specific opening region can be removed from the positioning hole. This means that it is possible to pull out the positioning protrusions with less force than if two positioning protrusions were pulled out at the same time, reducing the burden on the worker.

In addition, because the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined toward the rear, the corner of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, when a worker hooks his/her finger or the like on the part of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly of the gaming machine, even if the finger or the like comes into contact with the corner of the outer edge, the obtuse angle makes it less likely that the finger or the like will be injured compared to when the corner is a right angle, and the ball-entering unit can be safely removed with the finger or the like.

In addition, as mentioned above, the corners of the outer edge of the ball entry unit are obtuse angles, so that, compared to when the corners are right angles, even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the specific opening area, the corners of the outer edge will not chip, improving the durability of the ball entry unit.

In addition, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball entry unit is inclined toward the rear, so the corners of the outer edge are obtuse. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the specific opening area, the outer edge will not chip because the corners of the outer edge are obtuse, and the durability of the ball entry unit can be improved.

In addition, the outer edge of the base plate in the ball entry unit is inclined backwards, so that the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, preventing the game ball from becoming stuck in the specific opening area.

Furthermore, because the outer edge of the base plate in the ball entry unit is made transparent, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the specific opening area, it is possible to avoid the specific opening area appearing smaller in size.

In addition, because the two positioning protrusions are spaced apart from each other, when the ball-scoring unit is attached to the game panel, it does not rotate along the surface of the game panel, and the ball-scoring unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the game panel.

It is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball entry unit to the gaming panel near the positioning protrusion. This allows the mounting screw to be screwed into the gaming panel through the mounting hole and tightened, which presses the positioning protrusion firmly against the gaming panel and ensures that it is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the amount of disassembly work required when separating the parts for recycling, etc.

[15-7c. Relationship between the solution of the seventh technical feature and the embodiment]
The outlet 1008 and the specific opening area 1103 of the game board 5 in this embodiment correspond to the ball outlet (specific opening area) of the above-mentioned solution means, the opening area 1101 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening area of the above-mentioned solution means, the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solution means, the opening 1112 and the normal opening area 1102 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment correspond to the normal opening area of the above-mentioned solution means, the positioning hole 1113 in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solution means, the general winning port 2001 in this embodiment and the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811 correspond to the ball entry port of the above-mentioned solution means, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment corresponds to the ball entry unit of the above-mentioned solution means.

In addition, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment corresponds to the base plate (extension) of the above-mentioned solution means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning protrusion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment corresponds to the mounting hole of the above-mentioned solution means. Furthermore, the finger hook portion 2816 and the finger hook portion 2817 in this embodiment correspond to the portion where a part of the outer edge (base plate, extension portion) of the ball entrance unit (side unit 2800G) overlaps with the ball discharge port (out port 1008, specific opening area 1103) in the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-7d. Characteristic effects of the seventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the positioning protrusion 2811c protruding from the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G on the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the base plate 2811a is abutted against the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Then, a mounting screw is screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a and tightened, thereby enabling the side unit 2800G to be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that has entered the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) of the side unit 2800G to be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the opening 1112 (normal opening area 1102 of the opening area 1101) of the panel plate 1110. At this time, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is closed from the front by the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G, so that the rear of the game panel 1100 can be hidden and made difficult to see through the opening 1112, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a part of the transparent outer edge (finger hook part 2816 and finger hook part 2817) of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is attached so as to overlap with the outlet 1008 (specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101) (when viewed from the front, a part of the outer edge overlaps with the projection range of the outlet 1008), so that the finger hook part 2816 (finger hook part 2817) protrudes toward the center side of the outlet 1008. In disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the finger hook 2816 (finger hook 2817) overlapping with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a can be hooked by the worker's finger or tool, etc., and the side unit 2800G can be pulled forward with a strong force together with the base plate 2811a by hooking the finger, etc. Thus, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 against the resistance between the positioning hole 1113 and the positioning protrusion 2811c, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting.

However, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c, each of which is inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 during disassembly, if one attempts to pull out both positioning protrusions 2811c from the positioning holes 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the worker. In contrast, in this embodiment, the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at locations close to and far from the outlet 1008. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when removing the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the worker can hook his or her finger or the like onto the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) that overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800 and pull it forward, thereby applying a strong pulling force to the positioning protrusion 2811c close to the outlet 1008. As a result, during disassembly, of the two positioning protrusions 2811c, the one closest to the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining positioning protrusion 2811c farthest from the outlet 1008 can be removed from the positioning hole 1113. This means that it is possible to pull out the two positioning protrusions 2811c with less force than if two were to be pulled out at the same time, reducing the burden on the worker.

In addition, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is inclined toward the rear, so that the corners of the outer edge are obtuse angles. Therefore, when the worker hooks his/her fingers on the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) that overlaps with the outlet 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 during the disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1, even if the fingers come into contact with the corners of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the obtuse angle makes it difficult to injure the fingers, compared to when the corners are right angles, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with the fingers.

In addition, as described above, the corners of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G are obtuse angles, so that, compared to when the corners are right angles, even if the game ball B rolls along the outer edge of the base plate 2811a to enter the outlet 1008, the outer edge will not chip, thereby improving the durability of the side unit 2800G.

In addition, the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is inclined backward, so that the game ball B can be smoothly guided to the outlet 1008, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from becoming stuck at the outlet 1008.

Furthermore, because the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is made transparent, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the outlet 1008, such as the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817), it is possible to avoid the outlet 1008 appearing smaller in size.

In addition, because the two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart from each other, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800G does not rotate along the surface of the panel board 1110, and the side unit 2800G can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the panel board 1110.

In addition, the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. By screwing a mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

Incidentally, when dismantling the pachinko machine 1, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, when an operator hooks his or her fingers or the like on the part of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a that overlaps with the outlet 1008 and pulls it forward, if the strength of that part is weak, there is a risk that the outer edge will crack and the side unit 2800G will remain on the gaming panel 1100 side. In contrast, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 113, the depth of the finger hook 2817 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, so compared to a method in which a part of the outer edge (extension) of the base plate 2811a overlaps with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the size of the specific opening area 1103 (outlet 1008) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area 1103 (outlet 1008) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased), but since the strength of the finger hook 2817 can be increased, even if the operator hooks the finger of the operator on the finger hook 2817 and pulls it forward, it will not crack (be damaged), and the side unit 2800G can be reliably removed from the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

In addition, the finger hook portion 2817 that overlaps with the outlet 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G penetrates the outlet 1008 and protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. This allows the finger hook portion 2817 to cover the inner surface of the outlet 1008, making it difficult for the player to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

[15-8. Eighth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-8a. Background of the eighth technical feature]
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to create effects that can attract the attention of players, the presentation devices have been made larger, the movable area of the presentation devices has been widened, and the presentation devices have been made more flashy with illumination.

In a conventional gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document Y (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-018185), a ball entry unit with multiple ball entry ports (e.g., general winning ports) is attached to the front of a gaming panel along which gaming balls flow. A gaming ball that enters the ball entry port of this ball entry unit is guided to the rear of the gaming panel, and is detected by a ball sensor in a ball guidance unit provided behind the gaming panel, and then discharged downward. In order to illuminate and decorate such a ball entry unit, it is necessary to provide an LED with an LED mounted on it behind the ball guidance unit provided behind the ball entry unit, and providing an LED board narrows the space behind the ball entry unit, making it difficult to secure a larger space for providing a performance device.

Therefore, in consideration of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-8b. Solution of the eighth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component having a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, the first component being attached to the game panel so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side;
a second component part having a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component part, the second component part being mounted from the rear side of the first component part so as to form a predetermined space within the opening together with the first component part;
An LED substrate on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "ball entry ports" include "a prize entry port that confers a specified bonus when a game ball enters the port (e.g., a general prize entry port, a normal prize entry port, a start prize entry port (start prize entry port), a big prize entry port, a special feature prize entry port, a V prize entry port, etc.)" and "an outlet port that does not award a bonus when a game ball enters the port and expels the game ball from the gaming machine without returning it to the player", etc.

Examples of "game panels" include "those made of wooden plywood such as plywood," "those made of a panel plate machined from a transparent resin plate and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate," and "those made by injection molding transparent resin."

Furthermore, the "LED board" may be attached to the first component part or to the second component part. The "non-contact surface portion" may be provided on the first component part or on the second component part, or on both the first component part and the second component part.

According to the configuration of the first means, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to close the opening that penetrates the gaming panel from the front side, and a second component part that has a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component part and is attached from the rear side of the first component part so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component part, and an LED board on which LEDs are mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component part and the second component part (see the description of chapter [12-2b. Variation example 2 of side unit], Figure 107, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

With this arrangement, the ball-entering unit can be attached to the front of the gaming panel by attaching the second component part from the rear side of the first component part with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, inserting the positioning protrusion of the first component part from the front into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, and screwing and tightening the mounting screw through the first mounting hole into the gaming panel. The first component part can block the opening that penetrates the gaming panel, making it difficult to see the rear of the gaming panel through the opening, improving the appearance of the gaming machine, and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side of the gaming panel through the opening from the rear side of the gaming panel. The first component part and the second component part that is attached from the rear side of the first component part with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole form a space in the opening of the gaming panel, and an LED board is provided in the space, so that the ball-entering unit can be illuminated and decorated with LEDs on the LED board. In this case, because a space in which the LED board is installed is formed within the opening of the gaming panel, the space and the LED board can be contained within the thickness of the gaming panel, and the amount of rearward protrusion from the rear surface of the gaming panel can be minimized, allowing a larger space to be secured behind the ball-entering unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a large presentation device or a presentation device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, which allows the player to be presented with a more impactful presentation, and a gaming machine with high appeal to players can be provided.

It is desirable to provide a first mounting hole for mounting the ball entry unit to the gaming panel near the positioning protrusion. This allows the mounting screw to be screwed into the gaming panel through the first mounting hole and tightened, which presses the positioning protrusion firmly against the gaming panel and ensures that it is inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming panel, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

It is also desirable to provide the ball entry unit with a non-contact surface portion on a portion of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other. This allows the LED board to be provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and also provides a non-contact surface portion on a portion of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, so that heat from the LED board can be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, thereby avoiding the effects of heat.

Furthermore, when a non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the front end side of the opening of the gaming panel is blocked by the first component, so heat released to the outside from the non-contact surface portion does not flow to the front side of the gaming panel, but can be dissipated to the rear side of the gaming panel.

In addition, when providing a non-contact surface portion as described above, it is desirable to form the ball entry unit so that there is a gap between it and the inner circumference of the opening of the gaming panel, and to provide the non-contact surface portion at least on the upper contact surface portion. In this way, the non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED board provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component to the outside is provided at least in the upper part of the contact surface portion, so that the non-contact surface portion can reliably dissipate heat from the LED board to the outside and heat is not trapped in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the part of the ball entry unit inserted into the opening of the gaming panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, because a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner circumference of the opening, heat from the LED board can be reliably dissipated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and heat can be exhausted from inside the opening through the gap.

When providing a non-contact surface portion as described above, it is desirable to provide the LED board so that it does not overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view. This makes it difficult for foreign matter such as dust or dirt to get on the LED board even if it enters the space in which the LED board is provided through the non-contact surface portion, and prevents the effects of foreign matter as much as possible.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the gaming panel opaque. In this way, since the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter the inside of the gaming panel through the inner periphery of the opening of the gaming panel, but can be reflected by the inner periphery of the opening, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and it is easier to fully utilize the dramatic effect of the LED light emission.

When a non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the non-contact surface portion may be provided behind the rear surface of the gaming panel. This allows heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component to be reliably dissipated behind the rear surface of the gaming panel through the non-contact surface portion, thereby avoiding the effects of heat.

The first component may also have a flat base plate with a positioning projection protruding therefrom and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, which can abut against the front surface of the gaming panel. As a result, since the ball-entering unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the gaming panel through the mounting hole, the opening of the gaming panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate, and the rear of the gaming panel can be hidden from the front side (player side) through the opening by the base plate, improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, by providing the first component with a base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, so that heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel from the rear side through the opening of the game panel.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The entry unit is
A non-contact surface portion is provided on a part of a contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other, and the non-contact surface portion is not in contact with the first component portion and the second component portion.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 2, the ball entry unit is provided with a non-contact surface portion on a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, where the first component and the second component are not in contact with each other (see the description of the side unit 2800B, the contact surface portion 2830, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, an LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a non-contact surface portion is provided in a portion of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, so that heat from the LED board can be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, thereby avoiding the effects of heat.

In addition, because the front end side of the opening of the gaming panel is blocked by the first component, heat released to the outside from the non-contact surface portion does not flow to the front side of the gaming panel, but can be dissipated to the rear side of the gaming panel.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The ball entry unit is formed so as to have a gap between the ball entry unit and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel,
The non-contact surface portion is provided on at least the upper contact surface portion.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 3, the ball entry unit is formed so that there is a gap between it and the inner circumference of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is provided on at least the upper contact surface portion (see the description of the side unit 2800B and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, a non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED board provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component to the outside is provided at least in the upper portion of the contact surface portion, so that the non-contact surface portion can reliably dissipate heat from the LED board to the outside and heat does not become trapped in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the ball entry unit that is inserted into the opening of the gaming panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, because a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, heat from the LED board can be reliably dissipated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and heat can be exhausted from inside the opening through the gap.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 2 or 3,
"The LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 4, the LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view (see the description of the LED substrate 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in the [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, even if foreign matter such as dust or dirt enters the space in which the LED board is installed through the non-contact surface portion, it is difficult for the foreign matter to get on the LED board, and the effects of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The gaming panel is opaque."
It is characterized by:

However, if the gaming panel is made transparent, the light from the LED board will enter the gaming panel from the inner surface of the opening and diffuse into the interior of the gaming panel, reducing the amount of light radiated forward, which could weaken the dramatic effect of the LED light emission.

According to the configuration of means 5, the gaming panel is made opaque (see the description of the gaming panel 1100 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, because the gaming panel is made opaque, the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter the interior of the gaming panel through the inner periphery of the opening of the gaming panel, but can be reflected by the inner periphery of the opening, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light radiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects produced by the LEDs' light emission.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 2 to 5,
"The non-contact surface portion is provided rearward of the rear surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 6, the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel (see the description of side unit 2800B in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

This allows the heat from the LED board located in the space between the first component and the second component to be reliably dissipated behind the rear surface of the gaming panel through the non-contact surface portion, thereby avoiding the effects of heat.

Means 7: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 6,
"The first component has a flat base plate from which the positioning projection protrudes and through which the mounting hole penetrates, and which can abut against the front surface of the game panel."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, the first component has a flat base plate with a protruding positioning protrusion and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, which can abut against the front surface of the game panel (see the description of the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, since the ball-entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entry unit to the front of the game panel through the mounting hole, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front with the base plate, making it possible to hide the rear of the game panel from the front (player side) through the opening with the base plate, improving the appearance of the game machine.

In addition, because the opening of the gaming panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate of the ball entry unit, heat from the LED board located in the space between the first component and the second component can be dissipated to the rear side of the gaming panel through the non-contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the front side of the gaming panel from the rear side through the opening of the gaming panel.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry ports through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component having a positioning protrusion to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, the first component being attached to the game panel so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side;
a second component part having a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component part, the second component part being mounted from a rear side of the first component part so as to form a predetermined space within the opening together with the first component part;
and a gap is provided between the opening of the game panel and the inner periphery of the opening,
a non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with the first component portion and the second component portion is provided at least in an upper portion of a contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other,
An LED substrate on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space defined by the first component portion and the second component portion so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a gaming panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the gaming panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the gaming panel, and is attached to the gaming panel so as to close the opening that is provided to penetrate the gaming panel from the front side, and a second component part that has a second mounting hole for mounting to the first component part and is attached from the rear side of the first component part so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component part, and is formed so as to provide a gap between the inner periphery of the opening of the gaming panel, and a non-contact surface part that is not in contact with each other is provided at least in the upper part of the contact surface part where the first component part and the second component part are in contact with each other, and an LED board on which LEDs are mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component part and the second component part so as not to overlap the non-contact surface part in a plan view.

With this arrangement, the ball-entering unit can be attached to the front of the gaming panel by attaching the second component part from the rear side of the first component part with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, inserting the positioning protrusion protruding from the flat base plate of the first component part into the positioning hole of the gaming panel from the front, and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw through the first mounting hole into the gaming panel so that the base plate abuts against the front side of the gaming panel. At the same time, the base plate of the first component part can block the opening penetrating the gaming panel, making it difficult to see the rear of the gaming panel through the opening, improving the appearance of the gaming machine, and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side of the gaming panel through the opening from the rear side of the gaming panel. The first component part and the second component part attached from the rear side of the first component part with a mounting screw through the second mounting hole form a space in the opening of the gaming panel, and an LED board is provided in the space, so that the ball-entering unit can be illuminated and decorated with LEDs on the LED board. In this case, because a space in which the LED board is installed is formed within the opening of the gaming panel, the space and the LED board can be contained within the thickness of the gaming panel, and the amount of rearward protrusion from the rear surface of the gaming panel can be minimized, allowing a larger space to be secured behind the ball-entering unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a large presentation device or a presentation device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, making it possible to present a more impactful presentation to the player, and providing a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, an LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with the first component and the second component is provided at least in the upper portion of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, so that heat from the LED board can be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the effects of heat can be avoided. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion of the ball entry unit that is inserted into the opening of the gaming panel and the inner periphery of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, heat from the LED board can be reliably dissipated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap. And, since the front end side of the opening of the gaming panel is blocked by the base plate of the first component, heat released from the non-contact surface portion to the gap can be guided to the rear side of the gaming panel without flowing through the gap to the front side of the gaming panel, and heat from the LED board can be reliably dissipated.

In addition, because the LED board is positioned so that it does not overlap the non-contact surface in a plan view, even if foreign matter such as dust or dirt enters the space in which the LED board is located through the non-contact surface, it is difficult for the foreign matter to get on the LED board, and the effects of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, because the game panel is opaque, the light from the LEDs on the LED board does not enter the inside of the game panel through the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, but can be reflected by the inner periphery of the opening, which prevents a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effects of the LED light emission.

In addition, because the opening of the game panel is blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, heat from the LED board located in the space between the first component and the second component can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel from the rear side through the opening of the game panel.

In addition, in the first component of the ball entry unit, it is desirable to provide a first mounting hole penetrating the base plate for mounting to the game panel near the positioning protrusion. This allows the positioning protrusion to be firmly pressed against the game panel and securely inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-8c. Relationship between the solution of the eighth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the above-mentioned solving means, the positioning hole 1113 in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means, the general winning port 2001 in this embodiment and the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811 correspond to the ball entry port of the above-mentioned solving means, and the side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, and side unit 2800F in this embodiment correspond to the ball entry units of the above-mentioned solving means.

In addition, the unit body 2810 and the unit body 2810A in this embodiment correspond to the first component of the above-mentioned solution, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment corresponds to the base plate of the above-mentioned solution, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning protrusion of the above-mentioned solution, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment corresponds to the mounting hole of the above-mentioned solution, the unit cover 2820 in this embodiment corresponds to the second component of the above-mentioned solution, and the LED board 2825 in this embodiment corresponds to the LED board of the above-mentioned solution. In addition, the contact surface portion 2830 in this embodiment (the portion where the support frame portion 2814 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact) corresponds to the contact surface portion of the above-mentioned solution, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in this embodiment (the notch portion 2814b of the support frame portion 2814 and the notch portion 2820c of the unit cover 2820) corresponds to the non-contact surface portion of the above-mentioned solution.

[15-8d. Characteristic effects of the eighth technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800B will be described as a representative of the features of the side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, and side unit 2800F in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800B attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the unit cover 2820 is attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810 by means of attachment screws through attachment holes, and then the positioning protrusions 2811c protruding from the flat base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of the unit body 2810 are inserted from the front into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and the attachment screws are inserted into the panel through the attachment holes 2811d so that the base plate 2811a abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2800B can be attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the panel plate 1110 and fastening it, and the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 can be blocked by the base plate 2811a, so that the rear of the game panel 1100 is difficult to see through the opening 1112, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side (game area 5a) of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810 by mounting screws through the mounting holes form a space in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the LED board 2825 is provided in the space, so that the side unit 2800B can be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825. In this case, since a space in which the LED board 2825 is provided is formed within the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the space and the LED board 2825 can be contained within the thickness of the panel board 1110, and the amount of rearward protrusion from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 can be minimized, and a larger space can be secured behind the side unit 2800B. Therefore, since a large presentation device or a presentation device with a wide movable area can be provided behind the side unit 2800B, a more impactful presentation can be presented to the player, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

In addition, the LED board 2825 is provided in the space between the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 in the side unit 2800B, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) that is not in contact with the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 is provided at least in the upper portion of the contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, so that heat from the LED board 2825 can be dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and the influence of heat can be avoided. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer periphery of the portion inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800B and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion 2831 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, heat from the LED board 2825 can be reliably dissipated from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap. Furthermore, because the front end side of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 is blocked by the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in the unit body 2810, the heat released from the non-contact surface portion 2831 into the gap can be guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 without flowing through the gap to the front side of the panel board 1110, and the heat from the LED board 2825 can be reliably dissipated.

In addition, since the LED board 2825 is arranged so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 in a plan view, even if foreign matter such as dust or dirt enters the space in which the LED board 2825 is arranged through the non-contact surface portion 2831, it is difficult for the foreign matter to get on the LED board 2825, and the effects of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, by making the gaming panel 1100 opaque, the light from the LED 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the interior of the gaming panel 1100 through the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100, and can be reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light irradiated forward, and makes it easier to fully utilize the dramatic effect produced by the light emitted by the LED 2825a.

In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in the side unit 2800B blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front side, so that heat from the LED board 2825 provided in the space between the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the front side of the panel plate 1110 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B, the first component 2811 of the unit body 2810 has a mounting hole 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, which is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. By screwing a mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

[15-9. Ninth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-9a. Background of the ninth technical feature]
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to create effects that can attract the attention of players, the presentation devices have been made larger, their range of motion has been widened, and the presentation devices have been made more flashy and decorated with lights.

As an example of this type of gaming machine, a conventional gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document Y (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-018185) is known that is equipped with a ball entry unit having multiple ball entry ports (e.g., general winning ports) on the front of a gaming panel along which gaming balls flow, and a ball guidance unit that detects gaming balls that have entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit at the rear of the gaming panel and ejects them downward.

However, in the technology of Patent Document Y, a ball guiding unit is provided behind the game panel, and the presence of the ball guiding unit narrows the space behind the ball entry unit, making it impossible to secure a larger space for installing the presentation device.

Therefore, in consideration of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-9b. Solution of the ninth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component having a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, the first component being attached to the game board so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game board from the front side;
A second component is provided behind the first component, and has a ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the ball entrance can flow down along the surface of the game board within the opening so that the ball falls within the thickness of the game board.
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

Here, examples of "ball entry ports" include "a prize entry port that confers a specified bonus when a game ball enters the port (e.g., a general prize entry port, a normal prize entry port, a start prize entry port (start prize entry port), a big prize entry port, a special feature prize entry port, a V prize entry port, etc.)" and "an outlet port that does not award a bonus when a game ball enters the port and expels the game ball from the gaming machine without returning it to the player", etc.

In addition, "game boards" are boards on which obstacle nails are planted in a specified gauge arrangement, and examples include "boards made of wooden plywood such as plywood," "boards made of panel boards machined from transparent resin boards," and "boards made by injection molding transparent resin."

Furthermore, the "ball passage" may extend entirely within the thickness of the game board, or may extend only partially within the thickness of the game board.

According to the configuration of the first aspect, in a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has multiple ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a game board through which game balls can flow, the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided on the game board and an attachment hole for attaching to the game board, and is attached to the game board so as to block the opening that penetrates the game board from the front side, and a second component that is provided behind the first component and has a ball passage that allows game balls that enter the ball entry openings to flow down along the game board surface within the opening so as to be within the thickness of the game board (see the description of Figures 103 to 108, etc. in Chapter [12-1. Side unit of the second embodiment] in [Form for carrying out the invention]).

By inserting the positioning protrusion of the first component into the positioning hole of the gaming panel from the front, and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the gaming board through the mounting hole, the first component (ball entry unit) can be attached to the front of the gaming board, and the opening penetrating the gaming board can be blocked by the first component, making it difficult to see the rear of the gaming board through the opening, improving the appearance of the gaming machine, and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side of the gaming board through the opening from the rear side of the gaming board. And, since the second component provided on the rear side of the first component is provided with a ball passage extending along the board surface of the gaming board in the opening so as to be within the board thickness of the gaming board, the ball passage allows the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry port to flow down so as to be within the board thickness of the gaming board, so that the thickness of the gaming board can be used to minimize the amount of rearward protrusion of the ball entry unit from the rear side of the gaming board, and a larger space can be secured behind the ball entry unit. This makes it possible to provide a large presentation device or a presentation device with a wide range of movement (movable props) behind the ball-entering unit, allowing for more impactful presentations to be presented to players, providing a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players.

It is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the first component of the ball entry unit to the game board near the positioning protrusion. This allows the positioning protrusion to be firmly pressed against the game board by screwing a mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and securely inserted into the positioning hole of the game board, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

In addition, at least the forward portion of the movable role in the ball passage may be arranged to be within the thickness of the game board. This allows the forward portion of the movable role as a performance device in the ball passage to be within the thickness of the game board, so that sufficient space can be secured in the front-to-rear direction of the portion where the movable role is provided, and the movable role can be moved in a wider range, providing a gaming machine that can present a more impactful performance to the player.

Furthermore, as described above, when the portion in front of the movable part in the ball passage is arranged so as to overlap within the thickness of the game board, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front-to-rear direction of the portion on the rear side of the game board where the movable part is arranged, so that, for example, a decorative body can be arranged between the ball entry unit and the movable part, and the decorative body can be used to hide the movable part in the lowered position so that it is difficult for the player to see. This allows the player to see an effect in which the movable part appears when it is raised from the lowered position, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a strong impact on the player and entertain them.

Furthermore, a ball sensor that detects game balls flowing down the ball passage may be provided at a position lower than the movable device located at the rear of the ball passage. In this way, since the ball sensor that detects game balls that enter the ball entrance is provided at a position lower than the movable device located at the rear, the ball sensor does not get in the way of the movable device, and the desired presentation effect of the movable device can be fully achieved.

The ball passage may also have a branch section that is connected to the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main section that merges with the branch section and extends downward along the surface of the game board. This allows each branch section that is connected to each ball entrance to merge with the main section and flow down, eliminating the need to provide a ball passage for each of the multiple ball entrances, allowing the balls to be discharged together through a single ball passage and making it easier to secure space behind the ball entrance unit.

The second component may also be attached to the rear of the first component. As a result, since the second component is attached to the rear of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. In more detail, for example, in disassembling a gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to remove it from the gaming board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend, and the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming board may tilt due to the bending, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, which may make the disassembly work more difficult. In contrast, if the second component is attached to the rear of the first component, the second component is provided with a ball passage, and since the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, and therefore the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching this second component. Therefore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so the positioning protrusion does not tilt relative to the positioning hole in the gaming board, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming board, providing a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for sorting.

Furthermore, the second component may be attached to a back member provided at the rear of the game board. As a result, since the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member at the rear of the game board, it is possible to extend the ball passage downward from the opening penetrating the game board at the rear side of the game board. In detail, if the second component is attached to the first component, the first component blocks the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component in which the ball passage is provided must be smaller than the opening, making it difficult to extend a part of the ball passage downward from the opening at the rear side of the game board. In contrast, if the second component is attached to a back member provided at the rear of the game board, it is possible to extend a part of the ball passage downward from the opening at the rear side of the game board. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball passage to the lower end of the game board, the falling height of the game ball discharged downward can be lowered, and the impact of the discharged game ball can be reduced. In addition, because a portion of the ball passage can be extended downward beyond the opening on the rear side of the game board, there is no need to extend the opening that penetrates the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board, and the strength of the game board is not reduced.

Furthermore, as described above, by attaching the second component of the ball entry unit to the rear member behind the game board, when a ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, electronic components such as the ball sensor are provided on the rear member side behind the game board, and the electronic components can be gathered together on the rear member side, eliminating the need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, during the assembly and disassembly of the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic components does not extend from the game board side, the wiring will not get caught on components such as obstacle nails, impeding the work or causing the wiring to be cut.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The second component is provided so that at least the portion in front of the movable part in the ball passage is within the thickness of the game board."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 2, the second component is arranged so that at least the portion of the ball passage that is in front of the movable part is within the thickness of the game board (see the description of the ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, the front part of the movable prop acting as a presentation device in the ball passage is placed within the thickness of the game board, so that sufficient space can be secured in the front-to-rear direction of the part where the movable prop is installed, and the movable range of the movable prop can be made wider, providing a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation to the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front-to-rear direction of the area where the movable parts are located on the rear side of the game board, so that, for example, a decorative body can be placed between the ball-entering unit and the movable parts, and the decorative body can be used to hide the movable parts in the lowered position so that they are difficult for the player to see. This allows the player to see an effect in which the movable parts appear when they are raised from the lowered position, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a strong impact on the player and entertain them.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The second component is provided with a ball sensor that detects the game ball flowing down the ball passage at a position below the movable device provided at the rear of the ball passage."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 3, the second component is a ball sensor that detects game balls flowing down the ball passage, located below the movable device located at the rear of the ball passage (see the description of ball sensor 2813b in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, the ball sensor that detects the game ball that enters the ball entrance is located below the movable parts located at the rear, so the ball sensor does not get in the way of the movable parts, allowing the movable parts to fully exert the desired presentation effect.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The ball passage has a branch portion that is connected to the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main stream portion that merges with the branch portion and extends downward along the surface of the game board."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball passage has a branch portion that is connected to the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main portion that merges with the branch portion and extends downward along the surface of the game board (see the description of the branch portion 2801 and main portion 2802 in the ball passage 2812a in [Form for implementing the invention]).

As a result, each branch section that is connected to each ball inlet is made to merge with the main stream section and flow down, eliminating the need to provide a ball passage for each of the multiple ball inlets. The balls can be discharged together through a single ball passage, and it is also easier to secure space behind the ball inlet unit.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 5, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component (see the description of the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800 in the [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. In more detail, for example, in disassembling a gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to remove it from the gaming board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component will bend, and the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming board will tilt due to the bending, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, which may make the disassembly work more difficult. In contrast, in this means, a ball passage is provided in the second component, and since the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, and therefore the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching this second component. Therefore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so the positioning protrusion does not tilt relative to the positioning hole in the gaming board, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming board, providing a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for sorting.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The second component is attached to a back member provided at the rear of the play board."
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "back components" include "back decorations," "back units," "back boxes," etc.

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component is attached to a rear member provided at the rear of the play board (see the description of the second component member 2813 of the side unit 2800A in the [Embodiment for carrying out the invention]).

As a result, since the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the rear member at the rear of the game board, it is possible to extend the ball passage downward beyond the opening penetrating the game board at the rear of the game board. In detail, if the second component is attached to the first component, the first component blocks the opening of the game board from the front, so the second component in which the ball passage is provided must be smaller than the opening, making it difficult to extend a part of the ball passage downward beyond the opening at the rear of the game board. In contrast, in this means, since the second component is attached to the rear member at the rear of the game board, it is possible to extend a part of the ball passage downward beyond the opening at the rear of the game board. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball passage to the lower end of the game board, the falling height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact of the discharged game balls can be reduced. In addition, because a portion of the ball passage can be extended downward beyond the opening on the rear side of the game board, there is no need to extend the opening that penetrates the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board, and the strength of the game board is not reduced.

In addition, because the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the rear member behind the game board, when a ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, electronic components such as the ball sensor are provided on the rear member side behind the game board, and the electronic components can be gathered together on the rear member side, eliminating the need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, during the assembly and disassembly of the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic components does not extend from the game board side, the wiring will not get caught on components such as obstacle nails, impeding the work or causing the wiring to be cut.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entry unit includes:
a first component having a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, the first component being attached to the game board so as to close an opening provided to penetrate the game board from the front side;
A second component is provided behind the first component, and has a ball passage through which a game ball that has entered the ball entrance can flow down along the surface of the game board within the opening so that the game ball falls within the thickness of the game board;
Equipped with
The second component is attached to the rear side of the first component or to a back member provided at the rear of the game board, and a ball sensor is provided at a position below the movable role to detect game balls flowing down the ball passage,
The ball passage has a branch section that is connected to the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main section that merges with the branch section and extends downward along the surface of the game board, and is arranged so that at least the portion in front of the movable role is within the thickness of the game board.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, in an amusement machine having a ball entry unit that has a plurality of ball entry openings through which game balls can enter and is attached to the front of a game board through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit has a positioning protrusion that is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, and is provided on the rear side of the first component part, and the ball that enters the ball entry opening is moved along the surface of the game board within the opening so as to be within the thickness of the game board. and a second component having a ball passage through which balls can flow down, the second component being attached to the rear side of the first component or to a back member provided at the rear of the game board, and a ball sensor is provided at a portion below the movable device to detect game balls flowing down the ball passage, the ball passage having a branch portion that is connected to the ball entrance and extends rearward, and a main portion that merges with the branch portion and extends downward along the surface of the game board, and is provided so that at least the portion in front of the movable device is within the thickness of the game board.

By inserting the positioning protrusion of the first component into the positioning hole of the gaming panel from the front, and then screwing and tightening the mounting screw into the gaming board through the mounting hole, the first component (ball entry unit) can be attached to the front of the gaming board, and the opening penetrating the gaming board can be blocked by the first component, making it difficult to see the rear of the gaming board through the opening, improving the appearance of the gaming machine, and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front side of the gaming board through the opening from the rear side of the gaming board. And, since the second component provided on the rear side of the first component is provided with a ball passage extending along the board surface of the gaming board in the opening so as to be within the board thickness of the gaming board, the ball passage allows the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry port to flow down so as to be within the board thickness of the gaming board, so that the thickness of the gaming board can be used to minimize the amount of rearward protrusion of the ball entry unit from the rear surface of the gaming board, and a larger space can be secured behind the ball entry unit. This makes it possible to provide a large presentation device or a presentation device with a wide range of movement (movable props) behind the ball-entering unit, allowing for more impactful presentations to be presented to players, providing a gaming machine that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the front part of the movable props acting as a presentation device in the ball passage is designed to be within the thickness of the game board, so that sufficient space can be secured in the front-to-rear direction of the part where the movable props are installed, and the movable range of the movable props can be made wider, providing a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation to the player.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front-to-rear direction of the area where the movable parts are located on the rear side of the game board, so that, for example, a decorative body can be placed between the ball-entering unit and the movable parts, and the decorative body can be used to hide the movable parts in the lowered position so that they are difficult for the player to see. This allows the player to see an effect in which the movable parts appear when they are raised from the lowered position, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a strong impact on the player and entertain them.

In addition, the ball sensor that detects the game ball that enters the ball entrance is located below the movable parts located at the rear, so the ball sensor does not get in the way of the movable parts, allowing the movable parts to fully exert the desired presentation effect.

In addition, each branch section that is connected to each ball inlet is made to merge with the main stream section and flow down, so there is no need to provide a ball passage for each of the multiple ball inlets. The balls can be discharged together through a single ball passage, and it is also easier to secure space behind the ball inlet unit.

In addition, if the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. In more detail, for example, in disassembling a gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to remove it from the gaming board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component will bend, and the positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole of the gaming board will tilt due to the bending, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole, which may make the disassembly work more difficult. In contrast, if the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the second component is provided with a ball passage, and since the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, and therefore the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching this second component. Therefore, when disassembling the gaming machine for recycling or the like, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the first component from which the positioning protrusion protrudes does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so the positioning protrusion does not tilt relative to the positioning hole in the gaming board, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the gaming board, providing a gaming machine that reduces the disassembly work required for sorting.

Furthermore, if the second component of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member at the rear of the game board, it becomes possible to extend the ball passage downward beyond the opening penetrating the game board at the rear of the game board. In detail, if the second component is attached to the first component, the first component blocks the opening of the game board from the front, so the second component in which the ball passage is provided must be smaller than the opening, making it difficult to extend a part of the ball passage downward beyond the opening at the rear of the game board. In contrast, if the second component is attached to the back member provided at the rear of the game board, it becomes possible to extend a part of the ball passage downward beyond the opening at the rear of the game board. Therefore, since it becomes possible to extend the ball passage to the bottom end of the game board, the falling height of the game balls discharged downward can be lowered, and the impact of the discharged game balls can be reduced. In addition, because a portion of the ball passage can be extended downward beyond the opening on the rear side of the game board, there is no need to extend the opening that penetrates the game board downward to the bottom end of the game board, and the strength of the game board is not reduced.

In addition, by attaching the second component of the ball entry unit to the rear member behind the game board, electronic components such as the ball sensor installed in the ball passage are installed on the rear member side behind the game board, so that the electronic components can be gathered on the rear member side, and there is no need to install electronic components such as the ball sensor on the game board side. Therefore, during the assembly and disassembly of the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic components does not extend from the game board side, the wiring will not get caught on components such as obstacle nails, interfere with the work, or be cut.

It is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the first component of the ball entry unit to the game board near the positioning protrusion. This allows the positioning protrusion to be firmly pressed against the game board by screwing a mounting screw into the game board through the mounting hole and securely inserted into the positioning hole of the game board, preventing the positioning protrusion from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can present a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-9c. Relationship between the solution of the ninth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game board of the above-mentioned solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the above-mentioned solving means, the positioning hole 1113 in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning hole of the above-mentioned solving means, the general winning port 2001 and the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811 in this embodiment correspond to the ball entry port of the above-mentioned solving means, and the side unit 2800, side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment correspond to the ball entry units of the above-mentioned solving means.

In addition, the first component member 2811 of the unit main body 2810 in this embodiment corresponds to the first component part of the above-mentioned solving means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment corresponds to the positioning protrusion of the above-mentioned solving means, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment corresponds to the mounting hole of the above-mentioned solving means, the second component member 2812 and the second component member 2813 in this embodiment correspond to the second component part of the above-mentioned solving means, the ball passage 2812a and the ball passage 2813a in this embodiment correspond to the ball passage of the above-mentioned solving means, the ball sensor 2813b and the ball sensor 2815 in this embodiment correspond to the ball sensor of the above-mentioned solving means, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) in this embodiment corresponds to the back member of the above-mentioned solving means, and the back-bottom performance unit 3500 in this embodiment corresponds to the movable role of the above-mentioned solving means.

[15-9d. Characteristic effects of the ninth technical feature]
Here, the features of side unit 2800, side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment will be described as a representative of side unit 2800. According to this embodiment, in the game board 5, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component 2811 in the side unit 2800 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and then a mounting screw is screwed into the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightened, thereby enabling the first component 2811 (side unit 2800) to be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the first component 2811 can block the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110, making it difficult to see behind the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and preventing foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering the front surface (game area 5a) of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the second component 2812 provided on the rear side of the first component 2811 is provided with a ball passage 2812a extending along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 so as to be within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning port 2001) can be made to flow down so as to be within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, and by utilizing the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the amount of rearward protrusion from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800 can be made as small as possible, and a larger space can be secured behind the side unit 2800. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device such as the back-under performance unit 3500 or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the side unit 2800, so that a more impactful performance can be presented to the player, and a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

In addition, the portion of the ball passage 2812a in front of the back-bottom performance unit 3500 is designed to be within the thickness of the panel board 1110, so that sufficient space can be secured in the front-to-rear direction of the portion where the back-bottom performance unit 3500 is installed, and the movable range of the back-bottom performance unit 3500 can be made wider, providing a pachinko machine 1 that can show players more impactful performances.

In addition, as described above, it is possible to secure sufficient space in the front-to-rear direction at the rear of the panel board 1110 where the back-bottom performance unit 3500 is installed, so that, for example, a decorative body can be placed between the side unit 2800 and the back-bottom performance unit 3500, and the decorative body can be used to hide the back-bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the lowered position so that it is difficult for the player to see. As a result, when the back-bottom movable decorative body 3510 is raised from the lowered position, the player can be shown an effect in which the back-bottom movable decorative body 3510 appears, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can make a strong impact on the player and entertain them.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, the tributary sections 2801 that are connected to each ball receiving section 2811b are merged into the main flow section 2802 and allowed to flow down, so there is no need to provide a ball passage 2812a for each of the multiple ball receiving sections 2811b, and the water can be discharged together through a single ball passage 2812a, making it easier to secure space behind the side unit 2800.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, the ball sensor 2813b that detects the game ball B that enters the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning port 2001) is located at a lower position than the rear-bottom performance unit 3500 located at the rear, so that the ball sensor 2813b does not interfere with the rear-bottom performance unit 3500, and the desired performance effect can be fully achieved by the rear-bottom performance unit 3500.

In addition, when the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811, as in the side unit 2800, the rigidity of the first component 2811 can be increased by the second component 2812. In more detail, for example, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the first component 2811 is pulled forward to be removed from the panel plate 1110, if the rigidity of the first component 2811 is low, the first component 2811 will bend, and the bending will tilt the positioning protrusion 2811c inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole 1113, which may make the disassembly work more difficult. On the other hand, if the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811, the second component 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a, and the ball passage 2812a has a U-shaped cross section, so that the rigidity of the second component 2812 is increased by the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Therefore, by attaching the second component 2812, the rigidity of the first component 2811 (side unit 2800) can be increased. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward during disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the first component 2811 with the protruding positioning protrusion 2811c does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800. Therefore, the positioning protrusion 2811c does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, and a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting can be provided.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, the second component 2813 is attached to a rear member such as the rear unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, so that the ball passage 2813a can be extended downward from the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. In detail, when the second component 2812 is attached to the first component 2811, the first component 2811 blocks the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 from the front side, so that the second component 2812 in which the ball passage 2812a is provided must be smaller than the opening 1112, and it becomes difficult to extend a part of the ball passage 2812a downward from the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. In contrast, in the side unit 2800A, the second component 2813 is attached to a rear member such as the rear unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110, so that a part of the ball passage 2813a can be extended downward from the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, since it is possible to extend the ball passage 2813a to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, the falling height of the game ball B discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact of the discharged game ball B can be reduced. In addition, since a part of the ball passage 2813a can be extended downward from the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, there is no need to extend the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 downward to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, and the strength of the panel plate 1110 is not reduced.

In addition, in the side unit 2800A, the second component 2813 is attached to a rear member such as the rear unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, so that electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b provided in the ball passage 2813a are provided on the rear member side behind the panel plate 1110, and the electronic components can be gathered together on the rear member side, eliminating the need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b on the panel plate 1110 side. Therefore, during the assembly and disassembly of the pachinko machine 1, the wiring of the electronic components does not extend from the panel plate 1110 side, so the wiring will not get caught on components such as obstacle nails, impeding the work or causing the wiring to be cut.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the first component 2811 to the panel plate 1110 is provided near the positioning protrusion 2811c. By screwing a mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be firmly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, preventing the positioning protrusion 2811c from floating up due to incomplete insertion.

[15-10. Tenth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-10a. Background of the Tenth Technical Feature]
There is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is equipped with a center role that is attached from the front to an opening of a gaming panel that forms a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, and has a decorative body that is decorated with a predetermined ornament (for example, Patent Document Z: JP 2017-074434 A). In the technology of Patent Document Z, the decorative body provided on the center role improves the appearance of the gaming machine.

However, in the technology of Patent Document Z, a flat decorative body is placed near the front end of the center role, so even if the decorative body is decorated with a relief-like decoration, it lacks a sense of depth, and some players may quickly tire of looking at it, which could reduce the player's interest.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from losing interest by providing decorative elements with a more decorative effect.

[15-10b. Solution of the tenth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow is formed,
The game board is
A center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
A rear decorative portion extends within the frame of the center frame and a portion of the rear decorative portion protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion is provided forward of the rear decorative portion,
The rear decorative portion and the front decorative portion are decorated in a coordinated manner.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "game panel" include "opaque panels such as plywood," "panel boards made of transparent resin," and "those composed of a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame-shaped panel holder that holds the outer edge of the panel board."

Examples of "center frames" include "those having a flat flange portion capable of contacting the front surface of the gaming panel, and an inflow restriction portion extending forward from the flange portion to restrict gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening of the gaming panel," and "those having an insertion portion that is inserted into the opening of the gaming panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, a flat flange portion that extends from the front end of the insertion portion in a direction along the surface of the gaming panel and is capable of contacting the front surface of the gaming panel, and an inflow restriction portion that extends forward beyond the flange portion to restrict gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening of the gaming panel."

Examples of "decorative objects" include "objects decorated with patterns printed or painted on," "objects decorated with three-dimensionally shaped decorations," and "objects decorated with a metallic sheen, such as plating."

Further examples of "decorative objects" include "those that are illuminated by the light emitted by LEDs mounted on an LED board", "those that have opaque sections to make the wiring of the electronic components (e.g., LED board, relay board, ball sensor, magnetic sensor, display (display with special design), solenoid, etc.) located at the rear difficult to see from the front", and "those that have electronic components (e.g., LED board, relay board, ball sensor, magnetic sensor, display (display with special design), solenoid, etc.) that protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame".

Examples of "decorations that harmonize with each other" include "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the back decorative part form a single decoration (pattern)", "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the back decorative part are continuous with each other in a pattern (figure)", "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part or the decoration of the back decorative part enhances (emphasizes) the decoration of the back decorative part or the decoration of the front decorative part", etc.

According to the configuration of the first means, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area is formed in which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming board is equipped with a frame-shaped center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the gaming panel, and a decorative body that is attached to the center frame and is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and the decorative body has a rear decorative part that extends within the frame of the center frame and a part of which protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part that is provided forward of the rear decorative part, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in a coordinated manner. (See the description of the chapter [11-2. Center gimmick of the second embodiment] and Figure 98, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention])

As a result, a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative part, part of which protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part, which is provided forward of the rear decorative part, is provided on the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board, so that the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body can create a decorative body with depth for the player. In this case, because the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are provided with decorations that coordinate with each other, a large decoration can be presented to the player, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part can form a decorative body that is large, deep, and highly decorative. Therefore, because a decorative body with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's attention and make it difficult for the player to become bored, and a gaming machine can be provided that can suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, because the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, the rear decorative part does not narrow the playing area on the front of the playing panel or make it difficult to see the playing balls flowing down the playing area, allowing players to enjoy playing with the playing balls in the playing area in good conditions.

Furthermore, since the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decorative body, decorative body, etc. are provided behind the gaming panel, the rear decorative part can decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or work together with the decorative body (movable decorative body) to present a decoration (performance) with a more decorative effect, making it possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players.

It is desirable to arrange the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion so that they at least partially overlap when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative portion and the decoration of the rear decorative portion when viewed from the front (front), allowing the player to see the large decoration made up of the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion in a better condition, and further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

It is also desirable to form the center frame transparent. This makes it difficult for players to see the center frame and makes it less noticeable, while making the decorative body (front decorative portion and rear decorative portion) stand out in comparison, further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Furthermore, the decorative body may have an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. In this way, the opaque section of the decorative body makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front, and the opaque section can hide the wiring, preventing the wiring from being visible and thus preventing the appearance from being impaired, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

The decorative body may also be provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. This allows the decorative body (decoration) to hide the LED board, which avoids the poor appearance caused by the LED board being visible, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body.

A display device capable of displaying the results of a lottery for a special symbol drawn by the starting ball entry of a gaming ball in the gaming area may also be attached to the center frame. In this way, since the display device for displaying the special symbol is attached to the center frame, the display device can be attached to the gaming panel together with the center frame, and the effort required for assembling the gaming machine can be reduced compared to when the display device is attached separately.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion are arranged so as to overlap at least partially when viewed from the front."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 2, the front decorative part and the rear decorative part are arranged so that they at least partially overlap when viewed from the front. (See the description of the decorative body 2580 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the front and rear decorative parts, which are decorated in a coordinated way, are arranged so that they overlap partially when viewed from the front, making it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part when viewed from the front (front), allowing the player to see the large decoration made up of the front and rear decorative parts in a better condition and further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 and means 2,
The center frame is characterized by being transparent.

According to the configuration of the third aspect, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent material. (See the description of the center frame 2511 in the [Description of the Invention].)

As a result, because the center frame is transparent, it is difficult for players to see the center frame and it is difficult to stand out, which makes the decorative body (front decorative part and rear decorative part) stand out in comparison, further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, because the center frame is transparent, if the game panel is also made transparent and a decoration or performance display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less noticeable, making the decoration or performance image visible through the transparent game panel more noticeable, and providing a gaming machine that provides more enjoyment to players.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The decorative body is
It has an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, "electronic components" include "LED boards," "relay boards," "ball sensors that detect game balls," "magnetic sensors," "displays for displaying special patterns," "solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning openings," and "solenoids or drive motors for moving the movable decorative bodies," etc.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description of the decorative body 2580 in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the opaque parts of the decorative body make it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front, and the opaque parts allow the wiring to be hidden, preventing the wiring from being visible and spoiling the appearance, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The decorative body is
It is provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. (See the description of the LED board 2586 of the decorative body 2580 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the decorative body is placed in front of the LED board, and the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), which prevents the LED board from being visible and makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, if the light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board is irradiated onto the decorative object, the LED board can cause the decorative object to emit light, making the decorative object look bright and beautiful, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 5,
"The center frame has
A display capable of displaying the results of a special pattern drawn by a starting ball entry by a gaming ball in the gaming area is attached.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 6, a display capable of displaying the results of a special pattern drawn by the starting ball in the play area is attached to the center frame. (See the description of the pattern display 2518 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the display for displaying the special symbols is attached to the center frame, so the display can be attached to the gaming panel together with the center frame, reducing the effort required for assembling the gaming machine compared to when the display is attached separately.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow is formed,
The game board is
A display device capable of displaying the result of a lottery for a special pattern drawn by a starting ball entry by a game ball in the game area is attached, and a frame-shaped transparent center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame, having a predetermined decoration and having an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, and provided in front of an LED board on which an LED is mounted;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
A rear decorative portion extends within the frame of the center frame and a portion of the rear decorative portion protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion is provided forward of the rear decorative portion,
The rear decorative portion and the front decorative portion are decorated in a coordinated manner and are arranged so as to overlap at least partially when viewed from the front.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, the gaming machine is provided with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area is formed in which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming board is provided with a display capable of displaying the result of a lottery for a special pattern drawn by a starting ball entry by a gaming ball in the gaming area, a frame-shaped transparent center frame attached from the front to an opening formed in the gaming panel, and a decorative body attached to the center frame and provided with a predetermined decoration, having an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, and provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted, the decorative body having a rear decorative part that extends within the frame of the center frame and a part of which protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part provided forward of the rear decorative part, the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are provided with decorations that coordinate with each other, and are provided so that at least a part of them overlap when viewed from the front.

As a result, a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative part, part of which protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part, which is provided forward of the rear decorative part, is provided on a transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board. The transparent center frame makes the decorative body less noticeable, making it relatively more noticeable, and the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body can show a decoration with depth to the player. In this case, the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in a coordinated manner, and are provided so that they overlap each other when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to make it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part when viewed from the front (front). The large decoration of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part can be shown to the player in a good condition, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part can form a decorative body with a large depth and high decorative effect. Therefore, since a decorative body with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame, the decorative body can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a gaming machine can be provided that can suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, because the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, the rear decorative part does not narrow the playing area on the front of the playing panel or make it difficult to see the playing balls flowing down the playing area, allowing players to enjoy playing with the playing balls in the playing area in good conditions.

Furthermore, since the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decorative body, decorative body, etc. are provided behind the gaming panel, the rear decorative part can decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or work together with the decorative body (movable decorative body) to present a decoration (performance) with a more decorative effect, making it possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, the opaque parts of the decorative body make it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front, and the opaque parts allow the wiring to be hidden, preventing the wiring from being visible and spoiling the appearance, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Furthermore, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration), which avoids the poor appearance caused by the LED board being visible, and makes it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, because the display for displaying the special symbols is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the gaming panel together with the center frame, reducing the effort required for assembling the gaming machine compared to when the display is attached separately.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from losing interest by providing decorative objects with a more decorative effect.

[15-10c. Relationship between the solution of the tenth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solution means, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the game panel of the above-mentioned solution means, the center frame 2511 of the center gimmick 2500 in this embodiment corresponds to the center frame of the above-mentioned solution means, the pattern display 2518 in this embodiment corresponds to the display of the above-mentioned solution means, the decorative body 2580 in this embodiment corresponds to the decorative body of the above-mentioned solution means, the front decorative portion 2581 in this embodiment corresponds to the front decorative portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the rear decorative portion 2582 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the LED board 2586 in this embodiment corresponds to the LED board of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-10d. Characteristic effects of the tenth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2580 consisting of a rear decorative portion 2582, a part of which protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a front decorative portion 2581, which is provided forward of the rear decorative portion 2582, is provided on a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5.Since the center frame 2511 is transparent, it is less noticeable, making the decorative body 2580 stand out in comparison, and the front decorative portion 2581 and rear decorative portion 2582 of the decorative body 2580 allow the player to see a decoration with depth. In this case, the rear decorative part 2582 and the front decorative part 2581 are decorated in a coordinated manner, and are arranged so that a part of each overlaps when viewed from the front, so that the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative part 2582 is difficult to distinguish when viewed from the front (front), and the large decoration of the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and the rear decorative part 2582 and the front decorative part 2581 can form a large, deep decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's interest can be provided.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that the rear decorative portion 2582 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the game ball B in the game area 5a in good conditions.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that it is possible to decorate the periphery of the performance display device 1600 (display screen) for the performance display device 1600, the back front performance unit 3300, the back rear performance unit 3400, etc., which are provided behind the game panel 1100, and to show decorations (performances) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies) of the back front performance unit 3300 and the back rear performance unit 3400, making it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the opaque parts of the decorative body 2580 make it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED board 2586 from the front, and the wiring can be hidden by the opaque parts, which prevents the wiring from being visible and thus reduces the appearance, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the decorative body 2580 (front decorative portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, so that the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decorative body 2580 (decoration), which prevents the LED board 2586 from being exposed, making it look unsightly, and makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the pattern display 2518 for displaying special patterns is attached to the center frame 2511, so that the pattern display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511, and the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced compared to when the pattern display 2518 is attached separately.

[15-11. Eleventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-11a. Background of the eleventh technical feature]
There is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is equipped with a center role that is attached from the front to an opening of a gaming panel that forms a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, and has a decorative body that is decorated with a predetermined ornament (for example, Patent Document Z: JP 2017-074434 A). In the technology of this Patent Document Z, the decorative body provided on the center role improves the appearance of the gaming machine.

However, in the technology of Patent Document Z, a flat decorative body is placed near the front end of the center role, so even if the decorative body is decorated with a relief-like decoration, it lacks a sense of depth, and some players may quickly tire of looking at it, which could reduce the player's interest.

To address this issue, it is possible to enhance the decorativeness of the center role by providing a decorative body that is three-dimensionally formed in the front-to-rear direction on the center role, but if the rear end of the decorative body protrudes rearward beyond the center role (center frame), the protruding part can easily get in the way when manufacturing the gaming machine, making it difficult to handle, and there is a risk that manufacturing costs will increase.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve handling during manufacturing while maintaining decorativeness.

[15-11b. Solution of the eleventh technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow is formed,
The game board is
A center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
A rear decorative portion extending within the center frame and provided forward of a rear end of the center frame;
and a front decorative portion arranged to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative portion.

Here, examples of "game panel" include "opaque panels such as plywood," "panel boards made of transparent resin," and "those composed of a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame-shaped panel holder that holds the outer edge of the panel board."

Examples of "center frames" include "those having a flat flange portion that can come into contact with the front surface of the gaming panel, and an inflow restriction portion that extends forward from the flange portion and restricts gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening of the gaming panel," and "those having an insertion portion that is inserted into the opening of the gaming panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, a flat flange portion that extends from the front end of the insertion portion in a direction along the surface of the gaming panel and can come into contact with the front surface of the gaming panel, and an inflow restriction portion that extends forward beyond the flange portion and restricts gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening of the gaming panel."

Examples of "decorative objects" include "objects decorated with patterns printed or painted on," "objects decorated with three-dimensionally shaped decorations," "objects decorated with a metallic luster such as plating," etc.

Further examples of "decorative objects" include "those that are illuminated by the light emitted by LEDs mounted on an LED board", "those that have opaque sections to make the wiring of the electronic components (e.g., LED board, relay board, ball sensor, magnetic sensor, display (display with special design), solenoid, etc.) located at the rear difficult to see from the front", and "those that have electronic components (e.g., LED board, relay board, ball sensor, magnetic sensor, display (display with special design), solenoid, etc.) that protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame".

In addition, the relationship between the rear decorative part and the front decorative part that make up the decorative body can be exemplified by "a rear decorative part that is decorated in a way that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative part", "a rear decorative part that is decorated in the same way as the decoration of the front decorative part so as to coordinate with it", "a rear decorative part that is decorated in a way that differs from the decoration of the front decorative part", "a front decorative part decoration (front decoration) has a transparent part through which the decoration of the rear decorative part to the rear (rear decoration) is visible", "a front decorative part decoration (front decoration) has a transparent part through which the decoration of the rear decorative part to the rear (rear decoration) is visible, and a plurality of dots that are provided in the transparent part and decorated as part of the front decoration", etc.

According to the configuration of the first means, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area is formed in which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming board is equipped with a frame-shaped center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the gaming panel, and a decorative body that is attached to the center frame and is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and the decorative body extends within the frame of the center frame and has a rear decorative part that is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part that is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative part. (In [Form for carrying out the invention], see the chapter [11-1. Center gimmick of the first embodiment] and the description of Figures 94 to 97, etc.)

As a result, a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative part provided forward of the rear end of the center frame and a front decorative part provided so as to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part is provided on the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board, so that the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body can show a player a decoration with depth. In this case, since a portion of the rear decorative part overlaps with the front decorative part, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part when viewed from the front (front), and a large decoration made by the front decorative part and the rear decorative part can be shown to the player, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part can form a large decorative body with depth and high decorative effect. Therefore, since a decorative body with high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame, the decorative body can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in the player's interest can be provided.

In addition, since the rear decorative portion is located forward of the rear end of the center frame, and there are no parts that would get in the way during the manufacture of the gaming machine by protruding rearward from the center frame, the machine can be easily handled during manufacture, and the increased workability can suppress increases in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed with the rear end side facing down on a workbench, the center frame does not wobble. Also, when the center frame is handled during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since no part of the decorative body protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, there is no risk of the protruding part from the center frame coming into contact with other parts, etc., and being scratched or damaged. For this reason, there is no need to work with the utmost caution, and workability can be improved.

Furthermore, because the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, the rear decorative part does not narrow the playing area on the front of the playing panel or make it difficult to see the playing balls flowing down the playing area, allowing players to enjoy playing with the playing balls in the playing area in good conditions.

In addition, since the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decorative body, decorative body, etc. are provided behind the gaming panel, the rear decorative part can decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or work together with the decorative body (movable decorative body) to create a more decorative (performance) effect, providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players.

It is desirable to apply a decoration to the rear decorative portion that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative portion. This allows the player to see one large decoration made up of the decorations of the rear decorative portion and the front decorative portion, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

It is also desirable to make the center frame transparent. This makes it difficult for players to see the center frame and makes it less noticeable, while making the decorative body (front decorative part and rear decorative part) stand out in comparison, further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

The decorative body may also have an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. This makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front due to the opaque section of the decorative body, and the wiring can be hidden by the opaque section, preventing the wiring from being visible and causing a poor appearance, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Furthermore, the rear decorative part is provided with a rear decoration that is the same as the part of the front decoration of the front decorative part that overlaps in front of it when viewed from the front, and the front decorative part may have a transparent part that allows the rear decoration and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front, in a part in front of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, which is provided at least in a part of the front decorative part between the front decorative part and the rear decorative part. As a result, when game balls are not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decorative part and the rear decorative part, the rear decoration of the rear decorative part provided at the rear can be seen through the transparent part provided in the part in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decorative part. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decorative part is the same as the front decoration of the front decorative part, the rear decoration of the rear decorative part complements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part, so that the original decoration can be shown to the player as if there was no transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exerted. On the other hand, when game balls are flowing through the ball passage provided between the front and rear decorative parts, the game balls can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part, so it is possible to avoid causing distrust or anxiety to the player by making the game balls invisible, even if only temporarily, and it is possible to enjoy playing with game balls and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, when a transparent portion is provided in the front decoration of the front decoration part in a portion in front of the ball passage, and the same rear decoration as the front decoration is provided on the rear decoration part behind the transparent portion, the front decoration part may have a plurality of dot portions provided in the transparent portion and decorated with decorations that are smaller than the game ball and form part of the front decoration. In this way, even if the decoration of the rear decoration part visible through the transparent portion of the front decoration of the front decoration part is blocked by the game ball flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part and becomes invisible, the decoration of the plurality of dot portions provided in the transparent portion in front of the game ball can be seen, allowing the player to see the game ball in the ball passage while avoiding the appearance of the decoration body being impaired, and allowing the decorative effect of the decoration body to be fully exerted.

The decorative body may also be provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. This allows the decorative body (decoration) to hide the LED board, which avoids the poor appearance caused by the LED board being visible, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body.

A display device capable of displaying the results of a lottery for a special symbol drawn by the starting ball entry of a gaming ball in the gaming area may also be attached to the center frame. In this way, since the display device for displaying the special symbol is attached to the center frame, the display device can be attached to the gaming panel together with the center frame, and the effort required for assembling the gaming machine can be reduced compared to when the display device is attached separately.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The rear decorative portion is decorated in a manner that is in harmony with the decoration of the front decorative portion."
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "coordinating decoration" include "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the back decorative part form a single decoration (pattern)", "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the back decorative part are continuous with each other in a pattern (figure)", "decorations in which the decoration of the front decorative part or the decoration of the back decorative part complement (emphasize) the decoration of the back decorative part or the decoration of the front decorative part", etc.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear decorative part is decorated in a way that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative part. (See the description of decorative body 2570 and decorative body 2570A in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

This allows the rear decorative part to be decorated in a way that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative part, so that the decoration of the rear decorative part and the decoration of the front decorative part combine to create one large decoration for the player, further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The center frame is formed to be transparent."
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of the third aspect, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent material. (See the description of the center frame 2511 in the [Description of the Invention].)

By making the center frame transparent, it is possible to make the center frame less visible to the player and less conspicuous, while making the decorative body (front decorative part and rear decorative part) stand out in comparison, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, because the center frame is transparent, if the game panel is also made transparent and a decoration or performance display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less noticeable, making the decoration or performance image visible through the transparent game panel more noticeable, and providing a gaming machine that provides more enjoyment to players.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 3,
"The decorative body is
It has an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, "electronic components" include "LED boards," "relay boards," "ball sensors that detect game balls," "magnetic sensors," "displays for displaying special patterns," "solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning openings," and "solenoids or drive motors for moving the movable decorative bodies," etc.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description of decorative body 2570 and decorative body 2570A in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the opaque parts of the decorative body make it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front, and the opaque parts allow the wiring to be hidden, preventing the wiring from being visible and spoiling the appearance, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 1 to 4,
"The rear decorative part is provided with a rear decoration having the same decoration as the part of the front decorative part that overlaps the front decoration of the front decorative part in a front view,
The front decoration has a transparent portion in a portion in front of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, which is provided in at least a portion between the front decoration and the rear decoration, through which the game balls flow. The transparent portion allows the game balls flowing through the rear decoration and the ball passage to be seen from the front.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "transparent parts" include "colorless transparent parts", "colored transparent parts", "through-hole parts", etc.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear decoration is decorated with the same decoration as the part of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration when viewed from the front, and the front decoration has a transparent part that allows the rear decoration and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front, in the part in front of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, which is provided in at least a part of the front decoration between the front decoration and the rear decoration. (See the description of the decoration 2570 in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, when game balls are not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, the rear decoration of the rear decorative portion provided at the rear can be seen through the transparent portion provided in the forward portion of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decorative portion. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decorative portion is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decorative portion, the rear decoration of the rear decorative portion complements the transparent portion in the front decoration of the front decorative portion, allowing the player to see the original decoration as if there was no transparent portion in the front decoration of the front decorative portion, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exerted.

On the other hand, when game balls are flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decorative part and the rear decorative part, the game balls can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part, so it is possible to avoid causing distrust or anxiety to the player due to the game balls becoming invisible even temporarily, and it is possible to enjoy playing with game balls and prevent a decline in interest.

Means 6: In the configuration of Means 5,
"The front decorative part is
The transparent portion has a plurality of dots that are smaller than the game ball and are decorated to form part of the front decoration.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of means 6, the front decoration part has a plurality of dots that are provided in the transparent part and are smaller than the game balls and are decorated to form part of the front decoration. (See the description of the decoration 2570 in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, even if the decoration of the rear decorative part, which is visible through the transparent part of the front decoration of the front decorative part, is blocked by a game ball flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decorative part and the rear decorative part and becomes invisible, the decoration of the multiple dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, allowing the player to see the game ball in the ball passage while avoiding the appearance of the decorative body being impaired, and allowing the decorative effect of the decorative body to be fully exerted.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow is formed,
The game board is
A transparent center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel;
a decorative body attached to the center frame, having a predetermined decoration and having an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front;
Equipped with
The decorative body is
A rear decorative portion extending within the center frame and provided forward of a rear end of the center frame;
A front decorative part is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative part,
The rear decorative part is provided with a rear decoration that is the same as the front decoration of the front decorative part and overlaps the front decoration of the front decorative part in a front view in coordination with the front decoration of the front decorative part,
The front decoration has a transparent portion that allows the rear decoration and the game balls passing through the ball passage to be seen from the front, the transparent portion being located at least in a portion between the front decoration and the rear decoration, and a plurality of dot portions that are smaller than the game balls and that form part of the front decoration.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming panel in which a gaming area is formed in which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming board is equipped with a frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the gaming panel, and a decorative body that is attached to the center frame and has a predetermined decoration and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, and the decorative body extends within the frame of the center frame and has a rear decorative part that is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, and at least a part of the rear decorative part The front decoration has a front decoration that is arranged to overlap the front of the front decoration of the front decoration, and the rear decoration is decorated with a rear decoration that is the same as the part of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration of the front decoration when viewed from the front, and the front decoration has a transparent part in the front part of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, which is arranged in at least a part of the front decoration between the front decoration and the rear decoration, through which the game balls flow, and a plurality of dot parts that are arranged in the transparent part and decorated with a size smaller than the game balls and that form part of the front decoration.

In this way, a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative part provided forward of the rear end of the center frame and a front decorative part provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative part is provided on a transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board, so that the decorative body can be made to stand out relatively by making it less noticeable because the center frame is transparent, and the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body can show a decoration with depth to the player. In this case, the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in a coordinated manner, and are provided so that a part of each overlaps when viewed from the front, so that it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part when viewed from the front (front), and the large decoration of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part can be shown to the player in a good state, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part can form a decorative body with a large depth and high decorative effect. Therefore, since a decorative body with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame, the decorative body can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in the interest of the player can be provided.

In addition, the rear decoration is decorated with the same decoration as the part of the front decoration overlapping the front of the front decoration when viewed from the front, and the front decoration has a transparent part in the front part of the ball passage through which the game ball flows, which is provided at least in a part of the front decoration between the front decoration and the rear decoration, through which the rear decoration and the game balls flowing through the ball passage can be seen from the front, and a plurality of dot parts are provided in the transparent part and decorated with decorations that are smaller than the game balls and form part of the front decoration, so that when the game balls are not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration and the rear decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration provided at the rear can be seen through the transparent part provided in the front part of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration is the same as the front decoration of the front decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration complements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration, so that the original decoration can be shown to the player as if there was no transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be reliably exerted.

On the other hand, when a game ball is flowing through the ball passage provided between the front and rear decorative parts, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part, so that it is possible to avoid the player feeling distrustful or anxious due to the game ball becoming invisible even temporarily, and to prevent a decline in interest by allowing the player to enjoy playing with the game ball. In this case, since multiple dot parts constituting part of the front decoration are provided in the transparent part, even if the decoration of the rear decoration part visible through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decorative part is blocked and becomes invisible by the game ball flowing through the ball passage provided between the front and rear decorative parts, the decoration of the multiple dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decoration from being impaired while allowing the player to see the game ball in the ball passage, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be fully exerted.

In addition, since the rear decorative portion is located forward of the rear end of the center frame, and there are no parts that would get in the way during the manufacture of the gaming machine by protruding rearward from the center frame, the machine can be easily handled during manufacture, and the improved workability can suppress increases in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed with the rear end side facing down on a workbench, the center frame does not wobble. Also, when the center frame is handled during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since no part of the decorative body protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, there is no risk of the protruding part from the center frame coming into contact with other parts, etc., and being scratched or damaged. For this reason, there is no need to work with the utmost care, and workability can be improved.

In addition, because the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, the rear decorative part does not narrow the playing area on the front of the playing panel or make it difficult to see the playing balls flowing down the playing area, allowing players to enjoy playing with the playing balls in the playing area in good conditions.

Furthermore, since the rear decorative part that constitutes the decorative body extends within the framework of the center frame, if a performance display device, movable decorative body, decorative body, etc. are provided behind the gaming panel, the rear decorative part can decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or work together with the decorative body (movable decorative body) to present a decoration (performance) with a more decorative effect, making it possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, the opaque parts of the decorative body make it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components from the front, and the opaque parts allow the wiring to be hidden, preventing the wiring from being visible and spoiling the appearance, making it easier to bring out the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide an amusement machine that can improve ease of handling during manufacturing while maintaining decorativeness.

[15-11c. Relationship between the solution of the eleventh technical feature and the embodiment]
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 consisting of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solution means, the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the game panel of the above-mentioned solution means, the center frame 2511 of the center gimmick 2500 in this embodiment corresponds to the center frame of the above-mentioned solution means, the ball passage 2517 in this embodiment corresponds to the ball passage of the above-mentioned solution means, the decorative body 2570 and the decorative body 2570A in this embodiment correspond to the decorative body of the above-mentioned solution means, the front decorative portion 2572 in this embodiment corresponds to the front decorative portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the transparent portion 2572a in this embodiment corresponds to the transparent portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the dot portion 2572b in this embodiment corresponds to the dot portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the rear decorative portion 2573 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative portion of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-11d. Characteristic effects of the eleventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) consisting of a rear decorative portion 2573 located forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511 and a front decorative portion 2572 located so as to overlap with at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative portion 2573 is provided on a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5.Since the center frame 2511 is transparent, it is less noticeable and the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) can be made to stand out in comparison, and the front decorative portion 2572 and rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) can give the player a decoration with depth. In this case, the rear decorative part 2573 and the front decorative part 2572 are decorated in a coordinated manner, and are arranged so that a part of each overlaps when viewed from the front, so that the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 is difficult to distinguish when viewed from the front (front), and the large decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and the rear decorative part 2573 and the front decorative part 2572 can form a large, deep decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) can strongly attract the interest of the player and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's interest can be provided.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the decorative body 2570, the rear decorative part 2573 is decorated with a decoration (rear decoration) that is the same as the part of the decoration (front decoration) of the front decorative part 2572 that overlaps in front of it when viewed from the front, and the front decorative part 2572 is provided with a transparent part 2573 that allows the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 and the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 to be visible from the front, in a part in front of the ball passage 2517 through which the game ball B flows, which is provided in at least a part between the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 in the decoration of the front decorative part 2572. 572a, and a plurality of dots 2572b that are smaller than the game ball B and are provided in the transparent portion 2572a and are decorated to form part of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. Therefore, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573, the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 provided at the rear can be seen through the transparent portion 2572a provided in the front part of the ball passage 2517 in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. At this time, since the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 is the same as that of the front decorative portion 2572, the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 complements the transparent portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, so that the original decoration can be shown to the player as if the transparent portion 2572a did not exist in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 can be reliably exerted.

On the other hand, when game ball B is flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent part 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative part 2572, so it is possible to avoid the game ball B becoming invisible, even if only temporarily, which may cause the player to feel distrustful or anxious, and it is possible to enjoy playing with game ball B and prevent a decline in interest. In this case, since the transparent portion 2572a is provided with a plurality of dot portions 2572b that constitute part of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, even if the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 that can be seen through the transparent portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572 is blocked and becomes invisible by the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573, the decoration of the plurality of dot portions 2572b provided in the transparent portion 2572a in front of the game ball B can be seen, allowing the player to see the game ball B in the ball passage 2517 while avoiding the appearance of the decorative body 2570 being impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 can be fully demonstrated.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative part 2573 of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and there is no part that would get in the way during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 by protruding backward from the center frame 2511, so that the handling during the manufacture can be improved, and the increase in the cost of manufacturing can be suppressed by improving the workability. Specifically, for example, when the rear end side of the center frame 2511 is placed on a workbench TA or the like with the rear end side facing down, the center frame 2511 does not rattle. Or, when the center frame 2511 is handled during the assembly work, transportation work, etc., a part of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) does not protrude backward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, so there is no risk that the part protruding from the center frame 2511 will come into contact with other members or the like and be scratched or damaged. For this reason, there is no need to work with extreme caution, and workability can be improved.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative part 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) extends within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that the rear decorative part 2573 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy playing with the game ball B in the game area 5a in good conditions.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, so that it is possible to decorate the periphery of the performance display device 1600 (display screen) for the performance display device 1600, the back front performance unit 3300, the back rear performance unit 3400, etc., which are provided behind the game panel 1100, and to show decorations (performances) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies) of the back front performance unit 3300 and the back rear performance unit 3400, making it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the interest of players.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the opaque parts of decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) make it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as an LED board from the front, and the wiring can be hidden by the opaque parts, which prevents the wiring from being visible and thus prevents the appearance from being impaired, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A).

[15-12. Twelfth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-12a. Background of the twelfth technical feature]
There is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is equipped with a center role as an inflow restriction part that is attached from the front to an opening of a gaming panel that forms a gaming area through which gaming balls can flow, and that restricts gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening of the gaming panel (for example, Patent Document Z: JP 2017-074434 A). According to the technology of Patent Document Z, it is possible to divide the gaming area into a desired size by the center role.

However, with the technology of Patent Document Z, if the size of the opening of the gaming panel differs depending on the model of gaming machine, it is necessary to manufacture a center device (inflow restriction part) separately, making it difficult to reuse the inflow restriction part.

In view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can reuse the inflow restriction section even if the opening of the gaming panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12b. Solution of the twelfth technical feature]
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a playing area through which gaming balls can flow,
The game board is
A game panel on the front side of which the game area is formed;
An inflow restriction portion that is provided corresponding to an edge portion of an opening formed in the game panel and restricts game balls flowing down the game area from flowing into the inside of the opening;
Equipped with
The inflow regulating portion has at least a first inflow regulating portion and a second inflow regulating portion,
The first inflow restriction portion and the second inflow restriction portion each have a flange portion formed along the front surface of the gaming panel, and at least one of their ends has a non-flange portion where the flange portion is not formed, and the end of the first inflow restriction portion and the end of the second inflow restriction portion are attached to the front surface of the gaming panel by an attachment portion provided on the flange portion so that the end of the first inflow restriction portion and the end of the second inflow restriction portion are adjacent to each other.
The present invention is characterized in that

Here, examples of "game panel" include "opaque panels such as plywood," "panel boards made of transparent resin," and "those composed of a panel board made of transparent resin and a frame-shaped panel holder that holds the outer edge of the panel board."

Examples of "flange portion" include "one that extends toward the outside of the opening in the gaming panel, with the inflow restriction portion as the boundary," "one that extends toward the inside of the opening in the gaming panel, with the inflow restriction portion as the boundary," and "one that extends toward both the outside and inside of the opening in the gaming panel, with the inflow restriction portion as the boundary."

The "non-flange portion" may be provided on the side of the inflow restriction portion facing the center of the gaming panel, or on the side of the inflow restriction portion facing outward away from the center of the gaming panel, or on both sides of the inflow restriction portion.

Furthermore, examples of the configuration in which "the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so as to be adjacent to each other" include "the end face of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end face of the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so as to face each other", "the inner side of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the outer side of the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so as to face each other", "the outer side of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the inner side of the end of the second inflow regulating part are attached so as to face each other", and the like. In addition, the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part may be in contact with each other or may be separated from each other.

According to the configuration of the first means, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area through which gaming balls can flow, the gaming board is equipped with a gaming panel on which the gaming area is formed on the front side, and an inflow restriction part that is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening formed in the gaming panel and restricts the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the inside of the opening, and the inflow restriction part has at least a first inflow restriction part and a second inflow restriction part, and the first inflow restriction part and the second inflow restriction part each have a flange part formed along the front side of the gaming panel, and at least one of the ends of each has a non-flange part that does not have a flange part formed thereon, and the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part are attached to the front side of the gaming panel by the attachment part provided on the flange part so that the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part are adjacent to each other. (See the description of [11-3. Center role of the third embodiment] and Figures 99 to 102, etc. in [Form for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, the inflow restriction section, which is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel on the front side where the game area is formed and restricts the inflow of game balls into the opening, is composed of at least a first inflow restriction section and a second inflow restriction section, and is attached so that the end of the first inflow restriction section and the end of the second inflow restriction section are adjacent to each other on the front side of the game panel via the mounting section of the flange section provided on each section. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the relationship of the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction section and the second inflow restriction section relative to the game panel, the inflow restriction section can be attached to game panels having openings of various sizes and shapes without having to be newly manufactured, and the inflow restriction section can be reused even if the model is different.

In more detail, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part so that they are spaced apart from each other, it is possible to accommodate gaming panels with large openings. In this case, it is desirable that the gap between the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part is large enough that gaming balls cannot pass through, but if the gap is large enough that gaming balls can pass through, obstacle nails may be planted in to prevent the gaming balls from passing through.

Alternatively, the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion can be attached so that their respective side surfaces face each other, making it possible to accommodate gaming panels with small openings. In this case, since a non-flange portion is provided at least on one end of the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion, it is possible to bring the side of the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the side of the end of the second inflow regulating portion as close as possible, which increases the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion, making it easier to accommodate gaming panels with openings of various sizes.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to accommodate game panels with openings of various sizes, if it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction unit and the second inflow restriction unit, thereby increasing the design freedom of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is no need to manufacture a new inflow restriction unit to match the size of the game area to be changed, and increases in the costs of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

The game board may further include a plurality of frames from the first frame on which the first inflow restriction portion is provided to the nth frame on which the nth inflow restriction portion (n is an integer of 2 or more) is provided, and a connecting and retaining portion that prevents at least one of the frames from falling off the game panel. As a result, since the inflow restriction portion is made up of a plurality of frames, the same effect as above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame relative to the game panel. Also, since the inflow restriction portion is made up of a plurality of frames, if a malfunction occurs in one of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, and the maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connecting and retaining portion is provided, it is possible to prevent the frames from falling off the game panel and being scratched or damaged during the assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

Furthermore, as described above, when providing a connecting and retaining portion, it is desirable that the connecting and retaining portion be formed in a flexible string-like shape. As a result, since the connecting and retaining portion is made in a flexible string-like shape, even if the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction portion (first frame) and the second inflow restriction portion (second frame) is changed, the connecting and retaining portion can follow by flexibly deforming, and can accommodate the size and shape of the opening of the gaming panel while preventing the frame from falling off the gaming panel.

Furthermore, as described above, by providing a flexible string-like connecting and retaining part, when the frame tries to come off the gaming panel, the connecting and retaining part tries to flexibly deform, providing resistance and preventing the frame from immediately coming off the gaming panel. Furthermore, if the frame comes off the gaming panel, the connecting and retaining part flexibly deforms, making it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame.

Furthermore, as described above, when providing a connecting retaining portion, it is desirable to connect adjacent frames together with the connecting retaining portion. This makes it easier to handle multiple frames as a single unit compared to when one end of the connecting retaining portion is connected to a gaming panel or other member, and improves workability during the manufacture of gaming machines, etc.

In addition, when providing a connecting and retaining part as described above, it is desirable to provide the connecting and retaining part so that it can be attached and detached from the frame. This allows, for example, when attaching multiple frames to the game panel in sequence, or when removing some of the frames from the game panel for maintenance, etc., to improve the handling and maneuverability of the frames by removing and attaching the connecting and retaining part, thereby improving workability.

In addition, as described above, by making the connecting and retaining parts detachable, it becomes possible to connect the frame to the gaming panel using the connecting and retaining parts until the frame is attached to the gaming panel, and then to remove the connecting and retaining parts once the frame is attached to the gaming panel, thereby preventing the connecting and retaining parts from spoiling the appearance.

Furthermore, when multiple frames are provided as described above, the gaming board may further include electronic components attached to at least one of the frames. This allows electronic components to be attached to at least one of the frames, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached becomes heavy, if the frame comes off the gaming panel and falls during assembly work of the gaming machine, the weight of the frame makes it more likely to be damaged. However, since a connecting retaining portion is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exert the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The game board is,
A plurality of frames from a first frame in which the first inflow regulation portion is provided to an nth frame in which an nth inflow regulation portion (n is an integer of 2 or more) is provided;
and a connecting and retaining portion that prevents at least one of the frames from falling off the game panel.

The number of multiple frames, "n," is preferably in the range of 2 to 6. If the number of frames is greater than this range, it may be more time-consuming to attach the frames during the manufacture of the gaming machine, which could increase costs. Electronic components such as LED boards may be attached to some of the multiple frames.

Examples of the "connecting and holding part" include "flexible string-like parts" and "flexible band-like parts". Examples of the "connecting and holding part" include "parts that connect adjacent frames together", "parts that connect a frame to another component", and "parts that connect a frame to a game panel". Furthermore, the "connecting and holding part" may or may not be decorative. It is desirable for the "connecting and holding part" to be long enough that when the frame comes off the game panel and falls while the game board is upright, the frame does not come into contact with the base, floor, etc.

According to the configuration of the second means, the game board further comprises a plurality of frames, from the first frame on which the first inflow restriction portion is provided to the nth frame on which the nth inflow restriction portion is provided (n is an integer of 2 or more), and a connecting and retaining portion that prevents at least one of the frames from falling off the game panel. (See the description of the center frame 2700 and the connecting and retaining portion 2710 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, since the inflow restriction section is made up of multiple frames, the same effect as above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame relative to the gaming panel. Also, since the inflow restriction section is made up of multiple frames, if a malfunction occurs in one of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, reducing maintenance costs. Furthermore, since a connecting retaining section is provided, it is possible to prevent the frames from falling off the gaming panel and being scratched or broken during assembly or maintenance of the gaming machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The connecting and holding portion is
It is characterized by being "formed in a flexible string shape."

According to the configuration of the third aspect, the connection and holding part is formed in a flexible string shape. (See the description of the connection and holding part 2710 in the [Description of the Invention].)

As a result, because the connecting and retaining part is made flexible and string-like, even if the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction part (first frame) and the second inflow restriction part (second frame) is changed, the connecting and retaining part can flexibly deform to follow, and can accommodate the size and shape of the opening of the gaming panel while preventing the frame from falling off the gaming panel.

In addition, because the connecting and retaining parts are made in the form of flexible strings, when the frame tries to come off the gaming panel, the connecting and retaining parts try to flexibly deform, providing resistance and preventing the frame from immediately coming off the gaming panel. And, if the frame does come off the gaming panel, the connecting and retaining parts flexibly deform, making it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 2 or 3,
"The connecting and holding portion is
The frame is characterized in that it connects adjacent frames together.

According to the configuration of Means 4, the connecting and holding part connects adjacent frames. (See the description of the connecting and holding part 2710 in [Embodiment of the invention].)

This makes it easier to handle multiple frames as a single unit compared to connecting one end of the connecting retainer to a gaming panel or other component, improving workability during the manufacture of gaming machines, etc.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations of means 2 to 4,
"The connecting and holding portion is
The present invention is characterized in that the device is "detachably attached to the frame."

According to the configuration of means 5, the connection and holding part is detachably attached to the frame. (See the description of the connection and holding part 2710 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

This allows, for example, when multiple frames are attached to a gaming panel in sequence, or when some of the frames are removed from the gaming panel for maintenance, etc., to easily move and handle the frames by removing and attaching the connecting retaining parts, improving workability.

In addition, because the connecting and retaining parts are detachable, the frame can be connected by the connecting and retaining parts until it is attached to the game panel, and then the connecting and retaining parts can be removed once the frame is attached to the game panel, preventing the connecting and retaining parts from spoiling the appearance.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations of means 2 to 5,
"The game board is,
At least one electronic component attached to the frame,
The present invention is characterized in that it further comprises:

Here, "electronic components" include "LED boards," "relay boards," "ball sensors," "magnetic sensors," "displays (displays with special designs)," "solenoids," "motors," etc.

According to the configuration of means 6, the game board further includes electronic components attached to at least one frame. (See the description of the symbol display 2518 and center frame 2700 in [Embodiment for carrying out the invention].)

As a result, electronic components can be attached to at least one of the frames, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached becomes heavy, if the frame comes off the gaming panel and falls during assembly work of the gaming machine, the weight of the frame makes it more susceptible to damage. However, since a connecting retaining section is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exert the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a playing area through which gaming balls can flow,
The game board is
A game panel on the front side of which the game area is formed;
an inflow restriction portion provided in correspondence with an edge portion of an opening formed in the game panel, restricting game balls flowing down the game area from flowing into the inside of the opening, the inflow restriction portion having a first inflow restriction portion to an n-th inflow restriction portion (n is an integer of 2 or more);
A plurality of frames from a first frame in which the first inflow regulation portion is provided to an nth frame in which an nth inflow regulation portion (n is an integer of 2 or more) is provided;
At least one connecting and retaining portion for preventing the frame from falling off the game panel;
At least one electronic component attached to the frame;
Equipped with
The inflow restriction portion is
The m inflow regulation portion (m is an integer between 1 and n-1) and the (m+1) inflow regulation portion each have a flange portion formed along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of their ends is formed with a non-flange portion where the flange portion is not formed, and the end of the m inflow regulation portion and the end of the (m+1) inflow regulation portion are attached to the front surface of the game panel by an attachment portion provided on the flange portion so that the end of the m inflow regulation portion and the end of the (m+1) inflow regulation portion are adjacent to each other;
The connection holding portion is
It is formed in a flexible string shape, connects adjacent frames together, and is detachably attached to the frames.
The present invention is characterized in that

According to the configuration of Means 7, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming board having a gaming area through which gaming balls can flow down, the gaming board comprises a gaming panel on the front side of which the gaming area is formed, an inflow restriction portion provided in correspondence with the edge of an opening formed in the gaming panel and restricting gaming balls flowing down the gaming area from flowing into the opening and having a first inflow restriction portion to an nth inflow restriction portion (n is an integer of two or more), a plurality of frames from a first frame on which the first inflow restriction portion is provided to an nth frame on which the nth inflow restriction portion (n is an integer of two or more) is provided, a connecting retaining portion that prevents at least one frame from falling from the gaming panel, and at least one frame. and electronic components attached to the m-th inflow restriction section (m is an integer between 1 and n-1) and the (m+1)-th inflow restriction section, each of which has a flange section formed along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of the ends of each of which has a non-flange section where no flange section is formed, the end of the m-th inflow restriction section and the end of the (m+1)-th inflow restriction section are attached to the front surface of the game panel so that they are adjacent to each other by the attachment section provided on the flange section, and the connecting and holding section is formed in a flexible string shape, connects adjacent frames together, and is provided detachably to the frames.

As a result, the inflow restriction section, which is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel on the front side where the game area is formed and restricts the inflow of game balls into the opening, is composed of at least a first inflow restriction section to an nth inflow restriction section (n is an integer of 2 or more), and is attached to the front side of the game panel so that the end of the mth inflow restriction section (m is an integer between 1 and n-1) and the end of the (m+1)th inflow restriction section are adjacent to each other via the mounting section of the flange section provided on each section. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the relationship of the mounting positions of the mth inflow restriction section and the (m+1)th inflow restriction section relative to the game panel, the inflow restriction section can be attached to game panels having openings of various sizes and shapes without having to be newly manufactured, and the inflow restriction section can be reused even if the model is different.

In the following detailed explanation, assuming m is 1, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part so that they are spaced apart from each other, it is possible to accommodate gaming panels with large openings. In this case, it is desirable that the gap between the end of the first inflow restriction part and the end of the second inflow restriction part is large enough that gaming balls cannot pass through, but if the gap is large enough that gaming balls can pass through, it is also possible to prevent the passage of gaming balls by planting obstacle nails.

Alternatively, the end of the first inflow regulating part and the end of the second inflow regulating part can be attached so that their respective side surfaces face each other, making it possible to accommodate gaming panels with small openings. In this case, since a non-flange portion is provided at least on one end of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part, it is possible to bring the side of the end of the first inflow regulating part and the side of the end of the second inflow regulating part as close as possible, which increases the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part, making it easier to accommodate gaming panels with openings of various sizes.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to accommodate game panels with openings of various sizes, if it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction unit and the second inflow restriction unit, thereby increasing the design freedom of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is no need to manufacture a new inflow restriction unit to match the size of the game area to be changed, and increases in the costs of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restriction section is made up of multiple frames, the same effect as above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame relative to the gaming panel. Also, since the inflow restriction section is made up of multiple frames, if a malfunction occurs in one of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, reducing maintenance costs. Furthermore, since a connecting retaining section is provided, it is possible to prevent the frames from falling off the gaming panel and being scratched or broken during assembly or maintenance of the gaming machine.

In addition, because the connecting and retaining part is made flexible and string-like, even if the mounting position relationship between the first inflow restriction part (first frame) and the second inflow restriction part (second frame) is changed, the connecting and retaining part can flexibly deform to follow, and can accommodate the size and shape of the opening in the gaming panel while preventing the frame from falling off the gaming panel.

In addition, because a flexible string-like connecting and retaining part is provided, when the frame tries to come off the game panel, the connecting and retaining part tries to flexibly deform, providing resistance and preventing the frame from immediately coming off the game panel. And, if the frame comes off the game panel, the connecting and retaining part flexibly deforms, making it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame.

Furthermore, because adjacent frames are connected together by the connecting and retaining parts, it is easier to handle multiple frames as a single unit compared to when one end of the connecting and retaining part is connected to a gaming panel or other component, improving workability during the manufacture of gaming machines, etc.

In addition, because the connecting and retaining parts are detachably attached to the frame, for example, when attaching multiple frames to the game panel in sequence or removing some of the frames from the game panel for maintenance, the connecting and retaining parts can be detached and attached to improve the handling and maneuverability of the frames, thereby improving workability.

In addition, because the connecting and retaining parts are removable, the frame can be connected by the connecting and retaining parts until it is attached to the game panel, and then the connecting and retaining parts can be removed once the frame is attached to the game panel, preventing the connecting and retaining parts from spoiling the appearance.

Furthermore, electronic components are attached to at least one of the frames, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached becomes heavy, if the frame comes off the gaming panel and falls during assembly work of the gaming machine, the weight of the frame makes the frame more susceptible to damage. However, since a connecting retaining part is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exert the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

In this way, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reuse the inflow restriction section even if the opening of the gaming panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12c. Relationship between the solution of the twelfth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100) in the game board 5 of this embodiment corresponds to the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the game panel of the above-mentioned solving means, the symbol display 2518, the second start opening unit 2720, the attacca unit 2730, and the role winning opening unit 2740 in this embodiment correspond to the electronic components of the above-mentioned solving means, and the inflow restriction portion 2700a of the center frame 2700 in the center role 2500A in this embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned The flange portion 2700b of the center frame 2700, the first flange portion 2701b of the first frame 2701, and the second flange portion 2702b of the second frame 2702 in this embodiment correspond to the flange portions of the above-mentioned solution means, and the non-flange portion 2700c of the center frame 2700, the first non-flange portion 2701c of the first frame 2701, and the second non-flange portion 2702c of the second frame 2702 in this embodiment correspond to the non-flange portions of the above-mentioned solution means, respectively.

In addition, the first frame 2701, the second frame 2702, the third frame 2703, the fourth frame 2704, and the fifth frame 2705 in this embodiment correspond to the frames of the above-mentioned solution means, the first inflow restriction portion 2701a in this embodiment corresponds to the first inflow restriction portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the second inflow restriction portion 2702a in this embodiment corresponds to the second inflow restriction portion of the above-mentioned solution means, the mounting holes provided in the flange portion 2700b such as the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b in this embodiment correspond to the mounting portion of the above-mentioned solution means, and the connecting and retaining portion 2710 in this embodiment corresponds to the connecting and retaining portion of the above-mentioned solution means.

[15-12d. Characteristic effects of the twelfth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, in the center frame 2700 in the center gimmick 2500A of the game board 5, the inflow restriction portion 2700a is provided corresponding to the edge portion of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a is formed on the front side, and restricts the game ball B from flowing into the inside of the opening 1112. The inflow restriction portion 2700a is composed of at least a first inflow restriction portion 2701a and a second inflow restriction portion 2702a, and the inflow restriction portion 2700a is attached to the game panel 1100 via the mounting portion of the flange portion 2700b (the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b) provided on each of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a. Since the end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a are attached adjacent to each other on the front surface, by appropriately selecting the relationship of the attachment positions of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a relative to the gaming panel 1100, the inflow regulating portion 2700a (center frame 2700) can be attached to gaming panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes and shapes without having to manufacture a new inflow regulating portion 2700a (center frame 2700), and the inflow regulating portion 2700a (center frame 2700) can be reused even if the model is different.

In more detail, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a so that they are spaced apart from each other, it is possible to accommodate a gaming panel 1100 with a large opening 1112. In this case, it is desirable that the gap C between the end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a is large enough that the gaming ball B cannot pass through, but if it is large enough that the gaming ball B can pass through, it is also possible to prevent the gaming ball B from passing through by planting obstacle nails.

Alternatively, the end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a can be attached so that their respective side surfaces face each other to accommodate a gaming panel 1100 with a small opening 1112. In this case, since a non-flange portion 2700c (first non-flange portion 2701c or second non-flange portion 2702c) is provided at least on one end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a, it is possible to bring the side of the end of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a and the side of the end of the second inflow restriction portion 2702a as close as possible, so that the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the first inflow restriction portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a (second frame 2702) can be increased, and it is possible to easily accommodate gaming panels 1100 with openings 1112 of various sizes.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to accommodate game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes, if it is desired to change the size of the play area 5a due to design changes or the like, the size of the play area 5a can be easily changed by changing the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restriction part 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restriction part 2702a (second frame 2702), thereby increasing the design freedom of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, there is no need to manufacture a new inflow restriction part 2700a (center frame 2700) to match the play area 5a of a different size, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restriction section 2700a (center frame 2700) is composed of multiple frames such as the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705, the same effect as above can be achieved by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame relative to the gaming panel 1100. Also, since the inflow restriction section 2700a is composed of multiple frames, if a malfunction occurs in one of the frames, only that frame needs to be replaced, reducing maintenance costs. Furthermore, since the connecting and holding section 2710 is provided, it is possible to prevent the frames from falling off the gaming panel 1100 and being scratched or damaged during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the connecting and holding portion 2710 is made flexible and string-like, even if the mounting position relationship between the first inflow restriction portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restriction portion 2702a (second frame 2702) is changed, the connecting and holding portion 2710 can follow by flexibly deforming, and can accommodate the size and shape of the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 while preventing the frame from falling off the gaming panel 1100.

In addition, because a flexible string-like connecting and retaining portion 2710 is provided, when a frame such as the first frame 2701 attempts to come off from the gaming panel 1100, the connecting and retaining portion 2710 attempts to flexibly deform, providing resistance and preventing the frame from immediately coming off the gaming panel 1100. If the frame comes off the gaming panel 1100, the connecting and retaining portion 2710 flexibly deforms, making it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame.

Furthermore, since the connecting and holding portion 2710 connects adjacent frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, it is easier to handle multiple frames as a single unit compared to when one end of the connecting and holding portion 2710 is connected to the game panel 1100 or other components, and this improves workability during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

In addition, because the connecting and holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the frame, for example, when multiple frames are attached to the gaming panel 1100 in sequence, or when some frames are removed from the gaming panel for maintenance, etc., the connecting and holding portion 2710 can be removed and attached to improve the handling and maneuverability of the frames, thereby improving workability.

In addition, because the connecting and holding part 2710 is removable, it is possible to connect the frame to the gaming panel 1100 using the connecting and holding part 2710 until the frame is attached to the gaming panel 1100, and then remove the connecting and holding part 2710 once the frame is attached to the gaming panel 1100, thereby preventing the presence of the connecting and holding part 2710 from spoiling the appearance.

Furthermore, electronic components such as a pattern display 2518 can be attached to at least one of the frames, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached becomes heavy, if the frame falls off the game panel 1100 during assembly work of the pachinko machine 1, the weight of the frame makes it more susceptible to damage. However, since a connecting retaining portion 2710 is provided to prevent the frame from falling, the frame will not fall onto a workbench, floor, etc. and be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably exert the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

[Regarding the ID code of the frame decoration material]
In this embodiment, a game board 5 that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is attached to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 is attached with the following frame decoration members: a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, a door frame right side unit 340 provided to the right of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and a performance operation unit 250 (operation device) that is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction and can be operated by the player. Figure 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame decoration members that can be attached and detached to the door frame.

As shown in FIG. 116, the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and a set of predetermined game boards 5, door frame top units 300, door frame right side units 340, and performance operation units 250 can be installed as one group for each model series. In other words, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250 corresponding to the previous model series are removed while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and then the game board 5, door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250 corresponding to the new model series are attached. With this configuration, when changing models and wanting to completely renew not only the gameplay but also the appearance of the gaming machine, the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and door frame 3 can be reduced, and the gameplay and appearance of the gaming machine can be efficiently renewed.

In this example, the door frame right side unit 340 is formed integrally with the door frame top unit 300, and the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 can be attached and detached integrally to the door frame 3. In this regard, the door frame right side unit 340 may be separate from the door frame top unit 300 and can be attached and detached separately from the door frame 3. In addition to giving the gaming machine a new look, the protruding side parts of this type of door frame right side unit 340 act as a barrier between players who have left their seats, reducing the discomfort felt by players who are concerned about being seen by others, and the protruding upper and side parts create a space unique to each player.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 300. The door frame top relay board is for relaying the connection with the door frame top decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the door frame top decorative body 301 of the door frame top unit 300, and the door frame right side decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 341, the door frame right side left side decorative body, and the door frame right side right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 340. This allows the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on the door frame top decorative board and the door frame right side decorative board, for example, via the door frame top relay board.

The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is also electrically connected to an operation unit relay board (not shown) attached to the performance operation unit 250. The operation unit relay board is intended to relay the connection to an operation unit decoration board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the first performance button 251 and second performance button 252 of the performance operation unit 250. This allows the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 to control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on the operation unit decoration board, for example, via the operation unit relay board.

The door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the operation section relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250 are pre-stored with a unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying the series of the machine. This ID code is unique for each series of the machine, and cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is capable of retrieving and referencing the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation section relay board. In addition, a table for referencing the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation section relay board is stored in the RAM built into the peripheral control unit 1511. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 that matches the series of the machine for the game board 5, and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250 that matches the series of the machine.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 judges within a predetermined judgment period whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250. Here, when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 of the same model series (in a regular relationship) are attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300, while when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 of the different model series (not in a regular relationship) are attached to the game board 5, the respective ID codes do not match. Similarly, when a presentation operation unit 250 of a matching model series (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table will match the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the presentation operation unit 250; on the other hand, when a presentation operation unit 250 of a mismatched model series (not regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table will not match the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the presentation operation unit 250.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as the mode of operation when the power is turned on. Power-on pattern A is when the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and RAM clear, which initializes the RAM built into the main control board 1310, is not executed, and information related to the game is not initialized. Power-on pattern B is when the power switch 751 is operated while turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and RAM clear is executed and information related to the game is initialized. Power-on pattern C is when the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned on, but the power switch 751 is operated while turning on the ball removal switch 742, and the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed. In such power-on pattern C, RAM clear is not executed and information related to the game is not initialized, but the progress of the game during the ball removal process is stopped. And, the determination of whether the above ID codes match is executed when the power is turned on with power-on patterns A and B, but is not executed when the power is turned on with power-on pattern C. In other words, when the power is turned on using power-on pattern C, the game stops during the ball removal process, and there is no need to perform a light-emitting effect using the frame decoration member, so there is no need to check whether the ID code of the member matches.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 1 (for example, displaying "Please check the type of door frame top unit") to notify that a door frame top unit 300 and a door frame right side unit 340 that do not match the model series have been installed. In addition, if only the ID code of the performance operation unit 250 does not match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 2 (for example, displaying "Please check the type of performance operation unit") to notify that a performance operation unit 250 that does not match the model series has been installed. Furthermore, if neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 nor the ID code of the performance operation unit 250 match for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 3 (for example, a message saying "Please check the types of the door frame top unit, door frame right side unit, and performance operation unit") to notify the player that a door frame top unit 300 and door frame right side unit 340 that do not match the model series and a performance operation unit 250 that does not match the model series are installed.

On the other hand, if the door frame top unit 300 or the performance operation unit 250 is not attached to the door frame 3, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot extract and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board when the power is turned on. In such a case, when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID code is not connected if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation unit relay board even after a predetermined judgment period has passed.

In addition, if only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 cannot be confirmed (obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 4 (for example, displaying "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit and the door frame right side unit") to notify that the performance operation unit 250 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not attached. In addition, if only the ID code of the performance operation unit 250 cannot be confirmed (obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 5 (for example, displaying "Please check the connection of the performance operation unit") to notify that the performance operation unit 250 is not attached. Furthermore, if neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 nor the ID code of the performance operation unit 250 can be confirmed (obtained) for the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute error notification pattern 6 (for example, a display of "Please check the connections between the door frame top unit, door frame right side unit, and performance operation unit") to notify that the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250 are not attached.

Here, for the game board 5, regardless of whether the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the operation unit relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250 match, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when normal performances (changing performances and non-changing performances) are being performed. Similarly, for the game board 5, even if there are parts among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250 whose ID codes cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when normal performances (changing performances and non-changing performances) are being performed.

In addition, for the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, if the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300, for example, various LEDs mounted on the door frame top decorative board of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side decorative board of the door frame right side unit 340 can be controlled to emit light via the door frame top relay board during normal performance (changing performance or non-changing performance), whereas if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 that do not match the model series (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. In addition, if the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not controlled to emit light.

Similarly, for the performance operation unit 250, if the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation unit relay board attached to the performance operation unit 250, the various LEDs mounted on, for example, the front decorative board 321 and the rear decorative board 322 can be controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board during normal performance (changing performance or non-changing performance), whereas if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 250 that does not match the model series (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Also, if the performance operation unit 250 is not attached and the ID code of the operation unit relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 250 are not controlled to emit light.

In addition, when a predetermined execution condition is met, when controlling the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting boards of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 as components located around the game board 5 and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 250 are controlled in cooperation with each other. This allows an integrated illumination performance to be performed using not only the game board 5, but also the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250. However, for parts of the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250 whose ID codes do not match those of the game board 5, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting boards of the parts that do not match are not controlled to illuminate, and therefore cannot participate in the illumination performance. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 300, door frame right side unit 340, and performance operation unit 250, those parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes have not been confirmed cannot participate in the light-emitting performance because the light-emitting control of the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting boards of those parts that have not been confirmed cannot be performed.

As described above, when a predetermined execution condition is met, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 are controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, which are components located around the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 250 are controlled to emit light in cooperation with each other. However, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 can also be controlled to emit light in cooperation with each other. This makes it possible to execute an integrated light-emitting performance using not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250, but also the door frame 3.

[Regarding confirmation of operation of frame decoration parts (reusable products)]
In recent years, with the improvement of the performance of gaming machines, if new parts are constantly procured to manufacture gaming machines, the cost of manufacturing gaming machines may become high. In order to suppress such an increase in cost, it is possible to reuse some or all of the specific decorative parts (including drive-related, light-emitting, etc.) that are part of the gaming machine. For example, the game board 5 can be easily attached and detached to the door frame 3, and the above-mentioned frame decoration member can also be easily attached and detached to the door frame 3 and used as a reusable part. However, for such reusable parts, it is necessary to determine whether they are parts that operate normally during inspection at the shipping source, so it is necessary to individually check the operating state of the reusable parts. However, when attaching or detaching a reusable part, if it is necessary to temporarily remove the game board 5 from the door frame 3 because the reusable part is attached to the game board 5, or if the operating state of the reusable part can be checked only when the power is turned off and then turned on again after the reusable part is attached or detached, it is necessary to remove the game board 5 and turn off the power every time a reusable part is attached or detached, which makes it time-consuming to check the operating state of the reusable part. In this respect, in this example, the time-consuming removal of the game board 5 and the power-off are eliminated, improving the efficiency of checking the operating state of the reusable part, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly convenient.

Although the frame decoration member described above is a specific decorative part that is a part of the pachinko machine 1, it is not a part that is attached to the game board 5, but a part that is attached to the door frame 3. Therefore, the frame decoration member can be attached and detached to the door frame 3 without removing the game board 5 from the door frame 3, and with the game board 5 still attached to the door frame 3. In addition, for the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration members, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250, a mounting structure using a tool-less locking part is adopted in order to ease the installation work of the hall manager. Examples of tool-less locking parts include hand screws with a knob for turning by hand at the head, well-known snap locks that can be attached and detached with a one-touch operation of moving a lever up or down (not shown), and well-known crescent locks that can be attached and detached by rotating a lever. In this way, the frame decoration member can be easily attached and detached to the door frame 3, and there is no need to take the time to check the operating state of the frame decoration member.

The frame decoration member can be attached and detached even before or after the power is turned on. However, if the operation state of the detached frame decoration member is checked by turning off the power in the power-on state, detaching the frame decoration member, and then turning on the power again, it is time-consuming to check the operation state. For this reason, in this example, if a specific operation is performed before detaching the frame decoration member in the power-on state, a special state (reuse confirmation state) is entered in which the operation state of the detached frame decoration member can be checked after detaching the frame decoration member without turning off the power and then turning on the power again. In addition, in the power-on state, it is monitored whether the reuse permission switch is operated as a specific operation, and at the judgment timing when a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed after the power is turned on, it is judged whether the reuse permission switch was turned ON before the judgment timing. Specifically, the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referenced at a determination timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after power-on, and if the operation information is "operated" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON before or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state is started, and the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state, making it possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. On the other hand, if the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referenced at a determination timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after power-on, and the operation information is "not operated" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON after the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state is not started and the normal state is maintained, and even if the frame decoration member is detached in the normal state, the operating state of the detached frame decoration member cannot be checked. Note that, in order to notify the operator that the reuse permission switch can be turned ON during the period from power-on to the lapse of the predetermined period of time, a notification to that effect may be sent to the outside.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as the mode of operation when the power is turned on. Power-on pattern A is when the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and RAM clear, which initializes the RAM built into the main control board 1310, is not performed, and information related to the game is not initialized. Power-on pattern B is when the power switch 751 is operated while turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and RAM clear is performed and information related to the game is initialized. Power-on pattern C is when the power switch 751 is operated while turning on the ball removal switch 742 without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and the ball removal process described above is performed. In such power-on pattern C, RAM clear is not performed and information related to the game is not initialized, but the progress of the game during the ball removal process is stopped. And, at the above-mentioned judgment timing, the judgment of whether the reuse permission switch was turned on before the judgment timing is performed when the power is turned on with power-on patterns A and B, but is not performed when the power is turned on with power-on pattern C. In other words, when the power is turned on using power-on pattern C, the ball removal process is simply executed, and the reuse confirmation state is not initiated, so the operating state of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed.

To explain the specific operation mentioned above in detail, a reuse permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as an operation section (such as a button that allows switching between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that allows switching between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) on the main control board 1310, which is used for operations that cannot be touched by the player. Furthermore, before the determination timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after power-on, each time the reuse permission switch is turned ON, operation information for the reuse permission switch is input to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 stores the number of times that operation information for the reuse permission switch has been input. At the determination timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 refers to the memory of the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch has been input, and when the memory of the number of times the operation information has been input is "1 time" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned ON once before the determination timing or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state A is started, and when the memory of the number of times the operation information has been input is "2 times or more" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned ON twice before the determination timing or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state B is started. These reuse confirmation states may be terminated at a timing when a certain period of time has elapsed, but it is preferable that they are terminated at the discretion of the operator by a termination operation (for example, by operating the same operation unit as the operation unit operated at the start of the reuse confirmation state) rather than at the discretion of the certain period of time. This allows the occurrence period of the reuse confirmation state to be arbitrary, improving the convenience when the operator detaches the frame decoration member and checks the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. In this example, whether reuse confirmation state A or reuse confirmation state B is started is determined based on the number of times operation information for the reuse permission switch is input, but it may be determined based on another operation mode.

The peripheral control board 1510 also monitors whether or not the frame decoration members, such as the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, are electrically connected. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 using a drawer connector. If the electrical connection by the drawer connector is cut off, the frame decoration member has come off or shifted position from the pachinko machine 1, and the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. In other words, for example, when the power is on and the worker removes the frame decoration member, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected, and when the frame decoration member is attached again, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. Unlike this example, a detection switch may be provided to detect whether each of the frame decoration members is in the correct position, and when the detection switch connected by wiring to the peripheral control board 1510 is OFF, the frame decoration member has come off the pachinko machine 1 or has shifted position, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is detached during normal business hours. Normal business hours refer to a state in which the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on in a power-on state, and the frame decoration member is detached in a normal state, not in a reuse confirmation state. Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is detached in a reuse confirmation state. The reuse confirmation state refers to a state in which the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on in a power-on state, and the frame decoration member is detached after transitioning to a reuse confirmation state.

(Removal and installation of frame decoration parts during normal business hours)
117 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is detached during normal business hours. First, a case will be described in which the reuse permission switch is not operated before a predetermined judgment timing, and the frame decoration member is detached in the normal state without transitioning from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state. In addition, regarding the detachment of the frame decoration member during normal business hours, in the case where a malfunction (abnormality, failure, etc.) occurs in the frame decoration member, such as the LED of the frame decoration member no longer emitting light, the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed, and then the door frame 3 is closed once with the frame decoration member not connected, and the door frame 3 is opened again to attach the same frame decoration member or a different frame decoration member.

As shown in FIG. 117, first, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed is set. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. In addition, in the normal state, regardless of whether the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2 or the like described later, the period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed continues. The peripheral control board 1510 also monitors whether it is electrically connected to the frame decoration components such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250. After the power is turned on at time ts, the frame decoration components are not removed until the timing tx described below arrives, and it is determined that the frame decoration components are connected.

The peripheral control board 1510 also controls the frame interior LED (lamp A) mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member, the frame exterior LED (lamp B) mounted on various decorative boards other than the frame decoration member, the liquid crystal display device 1600, the speaker, etc., and for these components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, normal operation is performed after the power is turned on at timing ts. Furthermore, the lamp B can be classified into the frame exterior LED 1 mounted on various decorative boards of some components as components other than the frame decoration member, and the frame exterior LED 2 mounted on various decorative boards of the other components, and the frame exterior LED 1 is set to perform normal operation regardless of whether the door frame 3 is open or not, or whether the frame decoration member is attached or not. Here, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, an operation corresponding to a standby performance (e.g., a demo performance) is executed in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol to start, and when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, an operation corresponding to a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) is executed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (e.g., a reach performance) including the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the LEDs of the lamp A (inside the frame decoration), lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2) light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, for components whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, normal operation is performed after the power is turned on at timing ts, but for such components, the volume and light intensity can be changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity are adjusted internally so that they are reflected in the volume and light intensity currently being executed. However, for lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), which is one of the components whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the LED light intensity is kept constant, and the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

The external terminal board can also output specific signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals the hall computer can understand the behavior of the pachinko machine 1. Here, the door frame 3 is closed, so the door frame open signal described below is not output, and since this is the normal state, not the reuse confirmation state described below, the reuse confirmation signal described below is not output.

After the power is turned on at timing ts, at timing tz1 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a judgment timing is provided for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. In other words, at the judgment timing, it is judged whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, since the reuse permission switch has not been operated before timing tz1, there is no transition to the reuse confirmation state at timing tz1, and the normal state continues thereafter. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is also assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing tz1. For example, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate normally even after timing tz1.

And even if the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz2 after it is determined that the reuse permission switch has not been operated at timing tz1, there is no transition from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state, and the normal state continues thereafter. In other words, the operation of the reuse permission switch at timing tz2 is treated as invalid. And the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is also not changed before and after timing tz2. For example, the components that the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed to operate are still performing normal operations even after timing tz2.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, a signal from the opening switch to detect the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame open command to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the door frame 3 has been opened is output. At this time, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing normal operations, but at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command and performs the open operation.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a door frame open command, lamp A (inside the frame LED) and lamp B (outside the frame LED 2) light up or flash in a single color with high brightness to emit light when opened, and the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Door frame is open" to indicate that the door is open, and outputs the sound "Door frame is open" from the speaker to indicate that the door is open. However, of the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, lamp B (outside the frame LED 1) continues to operate normally without executing the opening operation.

Also, at the time t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing the opening operation except for the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and the light intensity of the LEDs and the like is constant and the volume from the speaker is constant during the opening operation. Therefore, for the components performing the opening operation, the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. When the operation is returned to normal, such internally adjusted volume and light intensity are reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. Note that the light intensity may change when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated for the performance display device 1600.

In addition, if the door frame 3 is opened under normal conditions at time t1, a door frame open signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, so that the hall can know that the door frame 3 has been opened. The output of this door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at time t2, which will be described later. This makes it easier for the hall to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state at the time tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at the time t1, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation at the time of opening for the member instructed to operate, but after the frame decoration member is removed at the time tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation at the time of opening in priority over the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration, although it is possible to execute the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration for the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration is executed after the door frame 3 is closed and the operation at the time of opening is completed. In this way, if the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration is executed in priority for the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the opening of the door frame 3 is not notified to the outside, and the hall manager is not aware of it, and there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but by executing the operation at the time of opening in priority, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. In addition, under normal circumstances, the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side continues regardless of whether the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2.

However, among the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, the performance display device 1600 also performs operations when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operations when it is opened. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 not only displays the message "Door frame is open" when it is opened, but also displays the message "Frame decoration member is not connected" when the frame decoration is not connected. In other words, under normal conditions, the frame decoration member is not permitted to be removed without performing the operations when the frame decoration is not connected. Also, with regard to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will not light up or flash afterwards.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, if the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2, a signal from the closing switch to detect the closure of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the door frame 3 is closed is output. At this time, after the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the open operation for the member instructed to operate in priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, but at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command and ends the open operation, and executes the operation when the frame decoration is not connected.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a door frame close command, the LED of lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) lights up or flashes in a single color (different from the color of light emitted when open) with high brightness as the light emitted when the frame decoration is not connected, and the performance display device 1600 displays a message saying "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the display when the frame decoration is not connected, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the frame decoration not connected notification sound. However, among the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) continues to operate normally without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. In addition, among the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) is set to emit light when closed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame close command, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, it is set to emit light when the frame decoration is not connected. This makes it easier for the hall staff to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, by emitting light when the door is closed.

Also, at the time of timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, except for the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and in the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the light intensity of the LEDs and the like are constant, and the volume from the speaker is constant. Therefore, for the components performing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. When the operation is returned to normal, such internally adjusted volume and light intensity are reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. Note that, for the performance display device 1600, the light intensity may change when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Next, at time t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in the normal state to attach the frame decoration member, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at time t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again after the frame decoration member has been removed, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 perform their open operation in priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. However, since the frame decoration member has been removed, the open operation is not performed for Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration). Also, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the open operation.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is attached again in the normal state at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at timing t2, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform the operation at the time of opening, but even after the frame decoration member is attached at timing ty, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate at the time of opening. However, for the performance display device 1600, among the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, even after the frame decoration member is attached at timing ty, the operation at the time of opening is added to the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration. Also, after the frame decoration member is attached, the operation at the time of opening is terminated after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t4 described later, but the operation at the time of not connecting the frame decoration is continued without returning to the normal operation. This means that if the frame decoration member is removed under normal conditions, even if it is reattached, a trace will remain that the frame decoration member is no longer connected, preventing fraudulent acts caused by attaching and detaching the frame decoration member.

In addition, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at the time of timing ty, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) starts to receive electricity when the frame decoration member is attached, but it does not light up or blink after that and remains in the off state. As a result, when the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, a trace that the frame decoration member is not connected can be left, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts by attaching and removing the frame decoration member. In addition, in this example, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, and the state does not transition to the reuse confirmation state after timing tz1 while remaining in the normal state. Even if the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in such a normal state, the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. In other words, in the normal state, the operation of the frame decoration member by attaching the frame decoration member is not permitted.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closure of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command for notifying the closure of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, after the frame decoration member is attached at timing ty, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform the operation when opened, but at timing t4, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the door frame closing command, the operation when opened is terminated and the normal operation is performed. However, among the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) is made to emit light when closed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, it is made to emit light when closed. This makes it easier for the hall staff to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, by emitting light when the door is closed.

As described above in detail, after the frame decoration member is attached, at time t4, the door frame 3 is closed and the operation when opened ends, but does not return to normal operation and continues to operate when the frame decoration is not connected. Also, if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at time ty, lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned off, but the off state is continued even after the door frame 3 is closed at time t4. In such a case, unless the power is turned back on after that, the off state will not be released and the lamp will not light up, which makes it time-consuming to check the operating state of the attached and detached frame decoration member.

(Removal and installation of frame decoration members in reuse confirmation state A, part 1)
118 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when a frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state A and a frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is open. First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is removed after the normal state transitions to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before a predetermined judgment timing. In addition, with regard to the removal and attachment of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, when checking the operating state of multiple frame decoration members used as reusable parts, it is assumed that after the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed, the door frame 3 is closed once with the frame decoration member left unconnected, the door frame 3 is opened again and another frame decoration member is attached, or the same frame decoration member is attached again for reconfirmation.

As shown in FIG. 118, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. 117. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed is set. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. The peripheral control board 1510 also monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the frame decoration components such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250. After the power is turned on at time ts, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration components are not removed and are connected by the time the power is turned on at time tx, which will be described later. Furthermore, the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate are performing normal operations after the power is turned on at time ts.

Then, at the time tz1 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at the time ts, a judgment timing is provided to judge whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before the time tz1. In other words, at the judgment timing, it is judged whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between the time ts and the time tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at the time tx3 before the time tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at the time tz1. Note that after the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the time tz1, it is a period during which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area 5a, and even if there is a start winning, the variable display of the special pattern cannot be started, and normal game cannot be played. This makes it possible to prevent normal play from impeding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member or the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A. Note that in the reuse confirmation state A, a period during which play (main play) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 described below to end the reuse confirmation state A.

After transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, some of the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed the operation are used to perform the operation during reuse confirmation. Specifically, after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the performance display device 1600 displays a message saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration components" as a display for reuse confirmation, and outputs a sound saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration components" from the speaker as a reuse confirmation sound. Meanwhile, among the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed the operation, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) continue to operate normally without performing the operation during reuse confirmation. In this way, after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, only some of the components for which operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing operations during reuse confirmation, but the transition to reuse confirmation state A is caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and since there is no need to notify the outside in an easily recognizable manner, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) are not configured to perform operations during reuse confirmation. Furthermore, such operations during reuse confirmation are configured to continue until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 described below to end reuse confirmation state A.

After transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, some of the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing operations during reuse confirmation, but for such components, the light intensity of the LEDs and the like are kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. For this reason, for components performing operations during reuse confirmation, the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the volume and light intensity being executed. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the volume and light intensity being executed based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 described later to transition from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state and return to normal operation. On the other hand, even after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the components that are performing normal operations, Lamp A (inside frame decoration LED) and Lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2), have their light intensity changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but for Lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), the LED light intensity is kept constant so that the light intensity does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, in this example, because a component with a constant LED light intensity is provided, it is easy to determine whether or not the light intensity has changed for a component that does not have a constant LED light intensity. Note that the light intensity of the performance display device 1600 may change when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

After the transition to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, a reuse confirmation signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred. When the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, described below, to end reuse confirmation state A, output of this reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer is terminated. Note that output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the end of reuse confirmation state A. This makes it easier for the hall to notice that the transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred, even if the transition period to reuse confirmation state A is short.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing t1, a signal of the opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing normal operations are made to continue normal operations even after timing t1, and the components performing operations during reuse confirmation continue operations during reuse confirmation even after timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the opening operation, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. This makes it possible to prevent the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the opening operation being performed in the reuse confirmation state A.

Furthermore, if the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at time t1, a door frame open signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, so that the hall can know that the door frame 3 has been opened. The output of this door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at time t2, which will be described later. This makes it easier for the hall to know that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing tx. For example, among the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, the members performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing tx, and the members performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to perform operations during reuse confirmation even after timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the frame decoration member is removed, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation do not perform operations when the frame decoration is not connected, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing tx. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is permitted in a state in which the operations when the frame decoration is not connected are not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating status of the frame decoration member from being hindered in the reuse confirmation state A by the execution of operations that are performed when the frame decoration is not connected.

The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, but as for Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will no longer light up or flash.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing t2, a signal of the closing switch for detecting the closure of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command for notifying the closure of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. For example, among the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the members performing normal operations continue to operate normally even after timing t2, and the members performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to operate during reuse confirmation even after timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the closing operation, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. This prevents the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the closing operation in the reuse confirmation state A.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened again at timing t3 in reuse confirmation state A to attach the frame decoration member, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1 in reuse confirmation state A. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member has been removed, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the operation at the time of opening, and are assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing t3. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, those performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing t3, and those performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to perform operations during reuse confirmation even after timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing ty. For example, among the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 has instructed operation, those performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing ty, and those performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to perform operations during reuse confirmation even after timing ty.

In addition, at the time of timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) starts to receive electricity by attaching the frame decoration member, and performs normal operation. As described above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, an operation corresponding to a standby performance (e.g., a demo performance) is executed in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special pattern to start, and when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, an operation corresponding to a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) is executed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is configured to light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600. However, if the frame decoration is installed and a malfunction occurs, such as a disconnection in the wiring to Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) causing no electricity to be supplied, or a malfunction in Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself, normal operation will not be performed and the LED will not light up or flash.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the device remains in the normal state and does not transition to the reuse confirmation state, and even if the frame decoration member is removed and then reattached, the light does not light up or blink, but remains off. However, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the device transitions to reuse confirmation state A, and after the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty to perform normal operation. In other words, in reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is permitted by attaching the frame decoration member. The device transitions to reuse confirmation state A on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state A, the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member can be confirmed.

In addition, in this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A to attach or detach the frame decoration member, the LED of lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is not reflected. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) based on the internally adjusted amount of light when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, which will be described later, and the LED can be turned on or blinked. In this way, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, which will be described later, the amount of light adjusted internally is not reset to the initial state, and the amount of light adjusted internally is reflected as it is, so that it is easy to determine whether the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) of the attached (detached) frame decoration member changes normally. Regardless of whether the frame decoration member is removed or not, the light intensity of the LED for lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and the light intensity does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Therefore, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, it is easy to determine whether the light intensity for lamp A (inside frame decoration LED) of the frame decoration member has changed normally by comparing it with lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1).

The above-mentioned lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is an LED in the frame decoration mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member, and is provided in the frame decoration member. However, the frame decoration member may be provided with an LED 2 (lamp A') in the frame decoration mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member in addition to the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration). The light intensity of the LED for lamp A' (LED 2 in the frame decoration) is kept constant, so that the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. As a result, since lamp A' (LED 2 in the frame decoration) is provided in the frame decoration member like lamp A (LED in the frame decoration), when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, it is easy to determine whether the light intensity for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) of the frame decoration member has changed normally with the light intensity internally adjusted during the period when the frame decoration member was removed, in comparison with lamp A' (LED 2 in the frame decoration) of the frame decoration member.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is attached, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not execute the operation at the time of closure, and are assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing t4. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing t4, and the components performing reuse confirmation operations continue to perform reuse confirmation operations even after timing t4.

Next, after closing the door frame 3, if the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, the reuse confirmation state A ends and the state transitions to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. In other words, after the main control board 1310 transitions to the normal state at timing tz4, it is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In addition, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4, normal operations are performed. In this way, in this example, the frame decoration member as a reusable part can be detached, and after the confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member is completed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again, so that after the confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally, etc.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, and the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) performs the normal operation. However, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, the normal operation is not performed, and the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) may be configured to perform the normal operation by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member. The operation permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operation unit for work (such as a button that can switch between the ON state and the OFF state, or a key switch that can switch between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player. Also, at the timing ty, between attaching the frame decoration member again and operating the operation permission switch, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is in a standby operation, for example, with the LED turned on or off. This allows the hall manager to check the operating status of the frame decoration at will by operating the operation permission switch, improving convenience.

The above-mentioned operation permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, normal operation is not performed, but by operating the reuse permission switch after the frame decoration member is attached, lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) may perform normal operation. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured to allow one option to be selected from multiple options, and may be configured to have an option for starting a reuse confirmation state and an option for lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) to perform normal operation.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty while the door frame 3 is open, causing lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) to perform its normal operation. However, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty, the normal operation may not be performed, and the open door frame 3 may be closed at timing t2, causing lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) to perform its normal operation. In this case, between the time when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty and the time when the open door frame 3 is closed, lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is in a standby operation, for example, with the LED turned on or off. This allows the hall manager to optionally start checking the operation status of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, improving convenience.

In this example, the period is set as a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state, and the period is set as a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state at timing tz4. However, even before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the period may be set to a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed by operating the play permission switch. The play permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operating unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key). As a result, during the period when the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the handle 160 is operated, when there is an initial winning, a lottery can be held to start the changing display of special symbols, and when the changing display of special symbols stops and displays a winning symbol, the jackpot game can start, so that the hall manager can check at will whether the game (main game) is progressing normally by operating the game permission switch, improving convenience.

The above-mentioned play permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the play permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch again at a timing before terminating the reuse confirmation state, a transition may be made to a period in which play (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. The reuse permission switch may also be configured to allow one option to be selected from multiple options, and may be configured to have an option for starting the reuse confirmation state and an option for transitioning to a period in which play (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side.

In the above, if the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch is input is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the system transitions from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state A. However, if the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch is input is stored as "2 times or more" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the system transitions from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state B, and the frame decoration member can be detached in the reuse confirmation state B. Here, the reuse confirmation state A is a period during which it is not possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, while the reuse confirmation state B is a period during which it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other respects, reuse confirmation state B behaves in the same way as the pachinko machine 1 behaves in reuse confirmation state A. For example, even if the reuse confirmation state B is entered on the condition that the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch is input is "2 or more times" at the time of the determination timing of timing tz1, when a frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member.

Figure 119 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is open in reuse confirmation state B, and then the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame 3 is next open. Here, the differences from reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed during this period. Then, at the timing tz1 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at the timing ts, a judgment timing is provided for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before the timing tz1, and at this judgment timing, the number of times the reuse permission switch was operated between the timing ts and the timing tz1 is also judged. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before the timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B at the timing tz1. Then, in the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed during this period. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the play area 5a, when a start winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays the winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, so that normal play can be played. Note that in the reuse confirmation state A, the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state A.

In addition, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the system transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, allowing normal operation to be performed. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is permitted to operate by attaching it. And, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the system transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating status of the attached (detached) frame decoration member.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the machine transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and reuse confirmation state B is set as a period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part while detaching the frame decoration member, but it is also possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally at the same time without waiting for the state to return from reuse confirmation state B to the normal state again, which improves the efficiency of inspection of the pachinko machine 1, including checking the operating state of multiple frame decoration members.

(Removal and installation of frame decoration members in reuse confirmation state A, part 2)
120 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when a frame decoration member is detached while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state A. First, a case will be described where a frame decoration member is detached after a transition from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A is made by operating the reuse permission switch before a predetermined judgment timing. Regarding the detachment of the frame decoration member, when checking the operating state of multiple frame decoration members used as reusable parts, it is assumed that after the door frame 3 is opened and a frame decoration member is removed, another frame decoration member is attached without closing the door frame 3, or the same frame decoration member is attached again for reconfirmation.

As shown in FIG. 120, after the power is turned on at time ts, a predetermined operation is performed and the frame decoration member is removed at time tx in reuse confirmed state A. During this period, the behavior is the same as that of the period from when the power is turned on at time ts in FIG. 118 until the frame decoration member is removed at time tx in reuse confirmed state A. In other words, after the power is turned on at time ts, the reuse permission switch is operated at time tz3, the state transitions from the normal state to reuse confirmed state A at time tz1, the door frame 3 is opened in reuse confirmed state A at time t1, and the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmed state A at time tx. In this sense, the same operations as those shown in FIG. 118 are performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is the same.

In this example, after the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx in reuse confirmation state A, but after removing the frame decoration member, the door frame 3 is not closed and the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty while the door frame 3 is open. In this way, when the frame decoration member is reattached at timing ty in reuse confirmation state A while the door frame 3 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected.

And, when the door frame 3 is open and the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A at the time ty, the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) starts to receive electricity by attaching the frame decoration member, and performs normal operation. As described above in detail, in normal operation, when the special pattern variable display is not being performed, an operation corresponding to a standby performance (e.g., a demo performance) is performed in a state of waiting for the special pattern variable display to start, and when the special pattern variable display is being performed, an operation corresponding to a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) is performed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) is configured to light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display performed by the performance display device 1600. However, if the frame decoration is installed and a malfunction occurs, such as a disconnection in the wiring to Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) causing no electricity to be supplied, or a malfunction in Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself, normal operation will not be performed and the LED will not light up or flash.

The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is not changed before or after timing ty. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, those performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing ty, and those performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to perform operations during reuse confirmation even after timing ty.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the device remains in the normal state and does not transition to the reuse confirmation state, and even if the frame decoration member is attached again, the light does not light up or blink, but remains off. However, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the device transitions to reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached again to perform normal operation. In other words, in reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is permitted by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, the device transitions to reuse confirmation state A on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state A, the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member can be confirmed. In addition, in this example, even if the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at time tx while the door frame 3 is open, and then reattached at time ty while the door frame 3 is open, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member. In other words, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A at time tx, it is not necessary to close and open the door frame 3 again before reattaching the frame decoration member at time ty. In this way, even if the frame decoration member is removed and attached in the reuse confirmation state A while the door frame 3 is open once, it is possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member, which makes it more efficient to check the operating states of multiple frame decoration members.

In addition, in this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A to attach or detach the frame decoration member, the LED of lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is not reflected. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) based on the internally adjusted amount of light when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, which will be described later, and the LED can be turned on or blinked. In this way, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, which will be described later, the amount of light adjusted internally is not reset to the initial state, and the amount of light adjusted internally is reflected as it is, so that it is easy to determine whether the amount of light for lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) of the attached (detached) frame decoration member changes normally. Regardless of whether the frame decoration member is removed or not, the light intensity of the LED for lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and the light intensity does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Therefore, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, it is easy to determine whether the light intensity for lamp A (inside frame decoration LED) of the frame decoration member has changed normally by comparing it with lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1).

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing t2, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closure of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command for notifying the closure of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. For example, among the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the members performing normal operations continue to operate normally even after timing t2, and the members performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to operate during reuse confirmation even after timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the closing operation, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. This prevents the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the closing operation in the reuse confirmation state A.

Then, after the door frame 3 is opened again, if a different frame decoration member is attached or detached while the door frame 3 is open, the above-mentioned period from timing t1 to timing t2 is repeated. In other words, the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1', the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx', a different frame decoration member is attached at timing ty', and the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2'. In this sense, the same operations are performed as in the above-mentioned period from timing t1 to timing t2, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is the same.

Next, after closing the door frame 3, if the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, the reuse confirmation state A ends and the state transitions to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. In other words, after the main control board 1310 transitions to the normal state at timing tz4, it is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In addition, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4, normal operations are performed. In this way, in this example, the frame decoration member as a reusable part can be detached, and after the confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member is completed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again, so that after the confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally, etc.

In the above, if the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch is input is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the system transitions from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state A. However, if the number of times the operation information of the reuse permission switch is input is stored as "2 times or more" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the system transitions from the normal state to the reuse confirmation state B, and the frame decoration member can be detached in the reuse confirmation state B. Here, the reuse confirmation state A is a period during which it is not possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side, while the reuse confirmation state B is a period during which it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other respects, reuse confirmation state B behaves in the same way as the pachinko machine 1 behaves in reuse confirmation state A. For example, even if the reuse confirmation state B is entered on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, when a frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member.

Figure 121 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is detached while the door frame 3 is open in reuse confirmation state B. Here, the differences from reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 121, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed during this period. Then, at the timing tz1 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at the timing ts, a judgment timing is provided for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch was operated before the timing tz1, and at this judgment timing, the number of times the reuse permission switch was operated between the timing ts and the timing tz1 is also judged. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before the timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B at the timing tz1. Then, in the reuse confirmation state B, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed during this period. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state B, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the play area 5a, when a start winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays the winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, so that normal play can be played. Note that in the reuse confirmation state B, the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state B.

In addition, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the system transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, allowing normal operation to be performed. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is permitted to operate by attaching it. And, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the system transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B, the operating status of the attached (detached) frame decoration member can be confirmed.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the machine transitions to reuse confirmation state B, and reuse confirmation state B is set as a period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally. In other words, in reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part while detaching the frame decoration member, but it is also possible to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally at the same time without waiting for the state to return from reuse confirmation state B to the normal state again, which improves the efficiency of inspection of the pachinko machine 1, including checking the operating state of multiple frame decoration members.

(Attachment of frame decoration parts when the frame decoration parts are not connected at the time of judgment)
FIG. 122 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before a predetermined determination timing and the frame decoration member is determined to be connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member can be confirmed. On the other hand, even if the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is not shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. And even if the frame decoration member is attached after that, the LED does not light up or blink, so that the operation state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. Such a specific example will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 122, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is approximately the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. 117. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed is set. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. The peripheral control board 1510 also monitors whether it is electrically connected to the performance operation unit 250 and other frame decoration components such as the performance operation unit 250, but after power is turned on at time ts, it determines that the frame decoration component is not connected until the arrival of the timing tx described below. In other words, for Lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration), since the frame decoration component is not connected, the LED does not light up or blink. Furthermore, for components that are instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, normal operation is performed after power is turned on at time ts.

After the power is turned on at time ts, at time tz1 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a judgment timing is provided for judging whether the reuse permission switch was operated before time tz1, and at that judgment timing, it is also judged whether the frame decoration member is not connected. If the frame decoration member is judged to be connected at the judgment timing in a situation where the reuse permission switch was operated before time tz1, the normal state is transitioned to reuse confirmation state A, but if the frame decoration member is judged to be not connected at the judgment timing, the normal state is not transitioned to reuse confirmation state A, and the normal state continues thereafter. Note that in the normal state, regardless of whether the frame decoration member is not connected at time tz1, etc., the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues.

After determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some of the members that it instructs to operate to perform the operation when the reuse check is not activated. Specifically, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the performance display device 1600 displays a message saying "The operation check of the frame decoration member cannot be performed" as a display when the reuse check is not activated, and outputs a sound saying "The operation check of the frame decoration member cannot be performed" from the speaker as a sound when the reuse check is not activated. Meanwhile, among the members that it instructs to operate, lamp A (inside the frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2) continue to operate normally without performing the operation when the reuse check is not activated. In this way, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, only some of the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform the operation when reuse confirmation is not activated. However, the determination that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1 is caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and since there is no need to notify the outside in an easily recognizable manner, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) do not perform the operation when reuse confirmation is not activated. Furthermore, such operation when reuse confirmation is not activated continues regardless of whether the frame decoration member is attached or the door frame 3 is opened or closed after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1.

After determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, some of the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation are performing operations when reuse confirmation is not in progress, but for such members, the light intensity of the LEDs and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. For this reason, for members performing operations when reuse confirmation is not in progress, the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the operation is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. On the other hand, even after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the light intensity of lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) as a member performing normal operations is changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but the light intensity of lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and the light intensity is not changed even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, in this example, since a component that keeps the LED light output constant is provided, it is easy to determine whether the light output is changing compared to a component that does not keep the LED light output constant. Note that the performance display device 1600 may be configured to change the light output when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, the external terminal board does not output a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at the time of timing t1, a signal of the opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing the normal operation are made to continue the normal operation even after timing t1, and the components performing the operation when the reuse check is not activated continue the operation when the reuse check is not activated even after timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration component is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, but the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the opening operation, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. This makes it possible to prevent the confirmation of whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally in the normal state after it has been determined that the frame decoration member is not connected from being hindered by the execution of the opening operation.

In addition, if the door frame 3 is opened under normal conditions at time t1, a door frame open signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the door frame 3 has been opened. The output of this door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at time t2, which will be described later. This makes it easier for the hall to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing ty. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, those performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing ty, and those performing operations when reuse check is not activated continue to perform operations when reuse check is not activated even after timing ty.

In addition, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state at the time of timing ty, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) does not light up or blink after the frame decoration member is attached, but remains in an off state. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, a trace that the frame decoration member is not connected can be left, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts by attaching and removing the frame decoration member. In addition, if the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) lights up or blinks when the frame decoration member is attached, it may be impossible for an operator who wants to check whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally to check. In this respect, in this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is not connected at that determination timing, even if the frame decoration member is attached after that, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) does not light up or blink, and it is possible to prevent such check from being hindered. On the other hand, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is connected at that judgment timing, when the frame decoration member is subsequently attached, the LED of lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration) will light up or flash. Therefore, the operator can select at the judgment timing whether he/she wants to check the operating status of the frame decoration member as a reusable part, or whether he/she wants to check only whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at the time of timing t2, a signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command for notifying the closure of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing the normal operation are made to continue the normal operation even after timing t2, and the components performing the operation when the reuse check is not activated continue the operation when the reuse check is not activated even after timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the closing operation, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the closing operation from impeding confirmation of whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally in the normal state after it has been determined that the frame decoration member is not connected.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened again at timing t3 in order to remove the frame decoration member in the normal state, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state at timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is attached, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not execute the operation at the time of opening, and are assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing t3. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing t3, and the components performing operations when reuse confirmation is not activated continue to perform operations when reuse confirmation is not activated even after timing t3.

Next, if the frame decoration member is removed again in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing tx. In other words, if the frame decoration member is removed again after the door frame 3 is opened, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 will not execute the operation that would be performed when the frame decoration is not connected, and it is assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing tx. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing normal operations will continue to perform normal operations even after timing tx, and the components performing operations when reuse confirmation is not in operation will continue to perform operations when reuse confirmation is not in operation even after timing tx.

The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, but as for Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will no longer light up or flash.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4 after removing the frame decoration member, it behaves in substantially the same way as when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after removing the frame decoration member, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not execute the operation required for closing, and are assumed to remain unchanged before and after timing t4. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing normal operations continue to perform normal operations even after timing t4, and the components performing operations when reuse confirmation has not yet been performed continue to perform operations when reuse confirmation has not yet been performed even after timing t4.

In this example, after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation when reuse check is not activated, but such operation when reuse check is not activated continues regardless of whether a frame decoration member is subsequently attached or whether the door frame 3 is opened or closed. As a result, even if a frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, a trace that the frame decoration member was not connected can be left, preventing fraudulent acts from being performed by attaching or detaching the frame decoration member. Also, as explained above, if it is determined that the reuse permission switch is not operated at timing tz1 in a situation where the frame decoration member is connected, then when the frame decoration member is subsequently removed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected for the member that is instructed to operate. In this example, if it is determined that the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz1 in a situation where the frame decoration member is not connected, then even if the frame decoration member is subsequently removed, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation when the frame decoration is not connected for the member that is instructed to operate. This makes it possible to prevent the confirmation of whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected from being hindered by the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Also, in this example, the purpose of the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is to convey that the operation confirmation of the frame decoration member cannot be performed, and is different from the operation when the frame decoration is not connected as explained above, but these operations may be made common.

(Confirmation of error light emission when the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state A)
FIG. 123 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the case where the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is open in the error state and the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached while the door frame 3 is next open. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before a predetermined judgment timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to check the operation state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member. On the other hand, when an abnormality is detected, such as detection of magnetism, vibration, or radio waves with respect to the pachinko machine 1, the state is shifted to an error state. In such an error state, the LED of the frame decoration member emits an error light, but in order to check the operation state of the frame decoration member, it is also necessary to check whether the LED of the frame decoration member emits an error light normally. In this respect, in this example, when the reuse confirmation state A and the error state are generated at the same time, it is possible to check that the LED of the attached (detached) frame decoration member emits an error light when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in that state. Such a specific example will be described below.

In this example, the error detection unit has a configuration for detecting magnetism using a magnetic sensor that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, a configuration for detecting vibrations using a vibration sensor that detects the vibrations applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, and a configuration for detecting radio waves using a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves applied to the pachinko machine 1 by irradiating it with illegal radio waves. After the main control board 1310 is powered on at timing ts, it monitors whether or not it has detected magnetism, vibration, or radio waves applied to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 123, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. 117. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the power-on process of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed is set. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. In other words, in the normal state after the power is turned on, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started. The peripheral control board 1510 also monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the frame decoration components such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the performance operation unit 250. After the power is turned on at time ts, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration components are not removed and are connected by the time the power is turned on at time tx, which will be described later. Furthermore, the components that the peripheral control board 1510 instructs to operate are performing normal operations after the power is turned on at time ts.

After power is turned on at timing ts, when signals from a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 at timing t0, the main control board 1310 detects abnormalities in magnetism, vibration, and radio waves, and outputs an abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the execution of an abnormality notification based on the occurrence of the abnormality. At this time, after power is turned on at timing ts, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing normal operations, but at timing t0, an error state occurs based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the abnormality notification command. In the error state, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform normal operations, but performs operations in the event of an error. In addition, even after the main control board 1310 sends an abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t0, it controls the game state to the normal state, just as if no abnormality had occurred, and this is the period during which it is possible for the game (main game) to proceed on the main control board 1310 side.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an abnormality notification command, the lamp A (inside the frame decoration LED) and the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2) are configured to light up or flash in a single color with high brightness as an error light emission, and the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "A magnetic error has occurred", "A vibration error has occurred", or "A radio wave error has occurred" as an error display, and the speaker outputs a sound such as "A magnetic error has occurred", "A vibration error has occurred", or "A radio wave error has occurred" as an error sound. In this example, the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification is made different depending on whether magnetism, vibration, or radio waves are detected, for example, by changing the message display, the color of the LED light, or the notification sound, so that it is possible to know whether magnetism, vibration, or radio waves have been detected. However, among the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 1) continues normal operation without executing the operation in the event of an error.

In addition, when an abnormality is detected at the time t0, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the operation in error for the components instructed to operate, except for lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and in this operation in error, the light intensity of the LEDs and the like are kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. For this reason, for the components performing the operation in error, the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but the volume and light intensity are not reflected in the volume and light intensity during operation. When the operation is returned to normal, such internally adjusted volume and light intensity are reflected in the volume and light intensity during operation based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. In addition, for the performance display device 1600, the light intensity may change when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, if an abnormality is detected at timing t0, an error signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that an abnormality has been detected.

Next, at the time tz1 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at the time ts, a judgment timing is provided to judge whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before the time tz1. In other words, at the judgment timing, it is judged whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between the time ts and the time tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at the time tx3 before the time tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at the time tz1. Note that after the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the time tz1, it is a period during which it is impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area 5a, and even if there is a start winning, the variable display of the special pattern cannot be started, and normal game cannot be played. This makes it possible to prevent normal play from impeding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member or the confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A. Note that in the reuse confirmation state A, a period during which play (main play) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 described below to end the reuse confirmation state A.

After transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, some of the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform operations during reuse confirmation. Specifically, after transitioning to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "You can check the operation of the frame decoration components" in addition to the error display as a display during reuse confirmation. The speaker outputs a sound "You can check the operation of the frame decoration components" as a reuse confirmation sound. Meanwhile, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2), and speaker are set to continue operation during an error. Furthermore, such operations during reuse confirmation are set to continue until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 described later to end reuse confirmation state A.

After the transition to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, a reuse confirmation signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred. When the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, described below, to end reuse confirmation state A, output of this reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer is terminated. Note that output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after end of reuse confirmation state A. This makes it easier for the hall to notice that a transition to reuse confirmation state A has occurred, even if the transition period to reuse confirmation state A is short.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing t1, a signal of the opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. For example, among the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing the operation at the time of an error continue to perform the operation at the time of the error even after timing t1, and the components performing the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation continue to perform the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame opening command, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the operation at the time of opening, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. This prevents the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operational status of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the opening operation in the reuse confirmation state A.

In addition, if the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1, a door frame open signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer, so that the hall can know that the door frame 3 has been opened. The output of this door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. This makes it easier for the hall to notice that the door frame 3 has been opened, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing tx, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing tx. For example, among the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation, the members performing the operation at the time of an error continue to perform the operation at the time of an error even after timing tx, and the members performing the operation at the time of reuse confirmation continue to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation even after timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the frame decoration member is removed, the members for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation do not perform the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t1. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is permitted in a state in which the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating status of the frame decoration member from being hindered in the reuse confirmation state A by the execution of operations that are performed when the frame decoration is not connected.

The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, but as for Lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will no longer light up or flash.

Next, after removing the frame decoration member, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the time of timing t2, a signal from the closing switch for detecting the closure of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and a door frame closing command for notifying the closure of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. For example, among the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing the operation at the time of an error continue to perform the operation at the time of the error even after timing t2, and the components performing the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation continue to perform the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the components instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 do not perform the operation at the time of closing, and it is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t2. This makes it possible to prevent the removal and installation of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the closing operation in the reuse confirmation state A.

Next, when the door frame 3 is opened again at timing t3 in reuse confirmation state A to attach the frame decoration member, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in reuse confirmation state A at timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again in a situation where the frame decoration member has been removed, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not execute the operation at the time of opening, and are assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t3. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components performing the operation in the event of an error continue to perform the operation in the event of an error even after timing t3, and the components performing the operation during reuse confirmation continue to perform the operation during reuse confirmation even after timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, if the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is assumed to be unchanged before and after timing ty. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, those performing operations in the event of an error continue to perform the operations performed in the event of an error even after timing ty, and those performing operations during reuse confirmation continue to perform the operations performed during reuse confirmation even after timing ty.

Furthermore, at timing ty, if a frame decoration member is attached in reuse confirmation state A, the supply of electricity to lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) will begin when the frame decoration member is attached, but the operation performed during an error is not the normal operation. As described above in detail, the operation performed during an error in lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is such that the LED lights up or flashes in a single color with high brightness as an error light. However, if a malfunction occurs when the frame decoration member is attached, such as a situation in which the wiring to lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is broken and electricity is not supplied, or a situation in which lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) itself has broken down, the operation performed during an error is not executed and the LED does not light up or flash.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state transitions to reuse confirmation state A, and if the frame decoration member emits an error light in reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is removed and then reattached at timing ty to resume operation during the error. In other words, in reuse confirmation state A, it is permitted to resume operation during an error with the frame decoration member as the target by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state transitions to reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to check whether the attached (detached) frame decoration member emits an error light normally.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is attached, the behavior is approximately the same as when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 do not execute the operation at the time of closure, and are assumed to be unchanged before and after timing t4. For example, among the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, the components that are executing the operation in the event of an error continue to operate in the event of an error even after timing t4, and the components that are executing the operation during reuse confirmation continue to operate during reuse confirmation even after timing t4.

Next, after closing the door frame 3, if the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, the reuse confirmation state A ends and the state transitions to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state before transitioning to the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1. In other words, after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4, the main control board 1310 is in a period during which it is possible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In addition, for the components for which the peripheral control board 1510 instructs operation, after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4, an error operation based on an error state is executed. In this way, in this example, the frame decoration member as a reusable part is detached, and after confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member is completed, it is possible to return from the reuse confirmation state A to the normal state again, so that confirmation of whether the game (main game) is proceeding normally can be performed following confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, and the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) performs the operation in the event of an error. However, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, the operation in the event of an error may not be performed, and the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) may perform the operation in the event of an error by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member. The operation permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operation section for work (such as a button that can switch between the ON state and the OFF state, or a key switch that can switch between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting a key). Also, between the time when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty and the time when the operation permission switch is operated, the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is in a standby operation state, for example, the LED is turned on or off. This allows the hall manager to check the operating status of the frame decoration at will by operating the operation permission switch, improving convenience.

The above-mentioned operation permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, at the time ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the operation in the event of an error is not executed, but by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) may execute the operation in the event of an error. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured to allow one option to be selected from a number of options, and may be configured to have an option for starting a reuse confirmation state and an option for lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) to execute the operation in the event of an error.

In this example, after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty while the door frame 3 is open, causing lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) to perform the operation in the event of an error. However, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty, the operation in the event of an error may not be performed, and the open door frame 3 may be closed at timing t2, causing lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) to perform the operation in the event of an error. In this case, between the time when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open at timing ty and the time when the open door frame 3 is closed, lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) is in a standby operation, for example, with the LED turned on or off. This allows the hall manager to optionally start checking the operation status of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, improving convenience.

In this example, the period is set as a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state, and the period is set as a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state at timing tz4. However, even before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the period may be set to a period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed by operating the play permission switch. The play permission switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operating unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key). As a result, during the period when the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the handle 160 is operated, when there is an initial winning, a lottery can be held to start the changing display of special symbols, and when the changing display of special symbols stops and displays a winning symbol, the jackpot game can start, so that the hall manager can check at will whether the game (main game) is progressing normally by operating the game permission switch, improving convenience.

The above-mentioned play permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the play permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch again at a timing before terminating the reuse confirmation state, a transition may be made to a period in which play (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. The reuse permission switch may also be configured to allow one option to be selected from multiple options, and may be configured to have an option for starting the reuse confirmation state and an option for transitioning to a period in which play (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side.

[Change settings and display confirmation]
In the following example, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 will be described, in which a setting function is added to the pachinko machine 1 of each of the above-mentioned embodiments. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a setting value related to the probability of winning or losing, and by performing a predetermined operation when the power is turned on, it is possible to change the setting value or display a confirmation of the setting value.

First, the main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided on the main frame 4 by two-way communication, and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by one-way output signal only. The main control board 1310 also receives detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning hole sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting hole sensor 2101, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the large winning hole sensor 2402, etc. The main control board 1310 also outputs drive signals to the starting hole solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting hole 2004, the attacca solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the large winning hole 2005, etc.

The main control board 1310 is also provided with a setting key switch having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and turned, as well as a setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (e.g., red), and a setting indicator consisting of a single 7-segment LED indicator (one 7-segment LED) with a decimal point (so-called dot). The setting indicator is capable of displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

The setting key switch is in the OFF state as the initial position when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket formed on the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket is along the vertical direction). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the socket and removed from the socket. In this embodiment, even if the rear cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason and the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the socket, the depth dimension of the setting key switch is adopted so that the setting key and the components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment of the game hall) arranged back to back on the island equipment of the game hall do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it ON, and this setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch OFF). This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch and setting display on the main control board 1310. Here, we will first explain how to change the setting value, and then how to confirm and display the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as to confirm the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

First, when changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch on the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch ON, and the pressing portion of the RAM clear switch 741 on the frame control board 740 must be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value change permission condition." In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch and turn it ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, turning the setting key switch ON, and then operate the power switch 751 while operating the pressing portion of the RAM clear switch 741 to power on the pachinko machine 1.

The person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, insert a metal setting key into the insertion hole of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, and turn the setting key switch ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees. Next, while operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. This inputs the ON signal of the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display, and switches the setting change permission lamp from off to on.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 on the frame control board 740, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741 is input from the frame control board 740 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of setting value 1, increases by one again, and controls the setting value to be displayed on the setting display.

When a person who changes the setting value decides on a setting value, they turn the setting key switch OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value decided by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU, switches the setting display from a display state to a non-display state, and switches the setting change permission lamp from a lit state to an unlit state.

The person changing the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the setting value change operation.

Next, in order to display and check the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 must not be operated, thereby satisfying the "predetermined setting value display permission condition." In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch and turn it ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, thereby turning the setting key switch ON, and then operate the power switch 751 to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741.

A person who checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, and turn the setting key switch to setting key ON by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to ON. Next, without operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This inputs a setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU displays the current setting value (the value that is set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display. At this time, the setting change permission lamp remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display is not changed either.

When the person who checks and displays the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU switches the setting display from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who checks and displays the currently set setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the check and display of the currently set setting value.

As described above, the "predetermined setting value change permission conditions" require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, thereby turning the setting key on, and the press operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated, whereas the "predetermined setting value display permission conditions" require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, thereby turning the setting key on, and the press operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is not operated. In this way, the "predetermined setting value change permission conditions" and the "predetermined setting value display permission conditions" have a common requirement in that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. However, the "predetermined setting value change permission conditions" require that "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated," whereas the "predetermined setting value display permission conditions" require that "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is not operated."

Here, to briefly explain the setting values, the "setting values" in this example can change the probability that the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described above will be a jackpot, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls that the player can acquire can be increased) is preset. In this embodiment, the setting values are set to setting value 1 (jackpot probability is 1/319), setting value 2 (jackpot probability is 1/310), setting value 3 (jackpot probability is 1/300), setting value 4 (jackpot probability is 1/290), setting value 5 (jackpot probability is 1/280), and setting value 6 (jackpot probability is 1/270), and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects various tables (e.g., a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that a jackpot has been won is specified) used in various lottery determinations associated with the set value, or selects various tables (e.g., a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) used in various allocation rates associated with the set value. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set value, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. Note that the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some of the various tables used in various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and some of the tables are set so that the values are different based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. In addition, the above-mentioned set values are six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, but the range may be smaller or larger than this. For example, there may be four set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 8.

In this example, the setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as the setting values, and each is set to have a different probability of winning, but while multiple setting values can be set, it is possible to set all of the setting values to be the same (same probability of winning). For example, while six setting values can be set, it is possible to set all of the setting values in one stage so that they are set to setting value 1. In this way, when all the setting values are setting value 1, a state in which the setting value can be changed occurs in the setting change state, and even if the setting value is switched, it is only switched from setting value 1 to setting value 1, and the setting value is not changed. Also, even if the setting value is confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the setting value 1 is always confirmed. Here, there are pachinko machines 1 that require a change of the setting value (change of the probability of winning) and pachinko machines 1 that do not require a change of the setting value (change of the probability of winning), but by making it possible to make all the setting values the same, it is possible to use a common control program regardless of whether the setting value needs to be changed. Furthermore, for pachinko machines 1 that do not require changing the setting value (changing the probability of winning), the configuration of the setting key switch, etc. may be left as is, but instead of allowing six setting values to be set, only one setting value may be set, achieving setting in one stage.

In addition, while the setting value is being changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control board 1310 controls the state in which a game cannot be played, for example, a state in which the display of the changing patterns does not start even if the game ball B enters various ball entry ports such as the first starting port 2003. In addition, the frame control board 740 controls the state in which the game ball cannot be circulated, for example, a state in which the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated, and a state in which various controls such as the settlement process by operating the counting button switch 180, the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball sending unit 700, etc. are stopped, and the game ball B is not managed (monitored) in the circulation ball path unit 600. As a result, if a game or ball circulation progresses while the setting value is being changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, there is a possibility that work related to the setting value may be hindered, but by stopping the game or ball circulation, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. After that, when the setting value change and confirmation display of the setting value are finished and the setting display is no longer displaying the setting value, the machine enters a state in which play and ball circulation can be performed; for example, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 by operating the handle 160, the game ball B enters various ball entry ports such as the first starting port 2003, and the display of changing patterns begins; settlement processing is performed by operating the counting button switch 180, and various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, and ball sending unit 700 are started, and the game ball B is managed (monitored) in the circulation ball path unit 600.

However, while the setting values are being changed or the setting value confirmation display is in progress, the system may be controlled to a state in which ball circulation can be performed, for example, a state in which game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550 by operating the handle 160, or a state in which settlement processing is performed by operating the counting button switch 180, and various controls of the ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball sending unit 700, etc. are started to manage (monitor) game ball B in the circulating ball path unit 600. This allows game play to begin promptly after the setting values are changed or the setting value confirmation display has ended.

In addition to displaying the setting value as described above, the setting display also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, displays an error message to that effect, saying that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in its own built-in RAM (or that they are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display as an error message.

In addition to the setting display, the main control board 1310 is provided with a base monitor consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row. Here, the setting display is capable of displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, while the base monitor is capable of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered (the number of prize balls to the number of balls entered), as will be described in detail later. However, it is also possible to provide only the base monitor and have it function both of displaying the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. In such a case, the base monitor displays the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state) or in a state in which the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), while displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered in a state other than the change permission state or the confirmation display state. This allows the number of parts to be reduced, leading to cost reduction.

In the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch 741 is provided on the frame control board 740, and the operation-related parts related to the setting value (setting key switch, setting display, RAM clear switch 741) are distributed and arranged on the frame control board 740 and the main control board 1310. In this way, it is necessary to operate multiple operation parts provided in different positions to change the setting value, and it is more difficult to make unauthorized setting changes than when the operation-related parts related to the setting value are concentrated and arranged on one board, which is effective in terms of fraud prevention. Note that the RAM clear switch 741 may be concentrated and arranged on the main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch and setting display are provided, rather than on the frame control board 740. In this case, the effect of fraud prevention is inferior to when they are distributed, but the various operation parts and confirmation parts are easier to recognize at a glance due to the arrangement relationship, and the operation efficiency when setting and checking the setting value can be improved.

[Manage Base Monitor]
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the other embodiments described above, the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) was described as displaying the number of game balls B counted by being detected by the out ball sensor 605 provided in the circulating ball path unit 600, but the base monitor of the fourth embodiment counts the number of balls entering and the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls) that increase as the game progresses, and displays the base value (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering). The basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is the same as in the other embodiments.

The game area 5a, which is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, is provided with a number of ball entry ports through which game ball B can enter. Of the multiple ball entry ports, the winning ports from which prize balls are paid out (a prize ball number is awarded) upon entry include a number of (three in this case) general winning ports 2001 that are always open to receive game ball B that has been shot into the game area 5a, a normal winning port 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive game ball B, and a first initial winning port 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive game ball B. The machine is equipped with a moving opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004 which can accept game ball B depending on the result of a lottery for a normal pattern drawn when game ball B is accepted into the normal winning opening 2002, and a large winning opening 2005 and a special winning opening 2006 which can accept game ball B depending on a first special pattern drawn when game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2003 or a second special pattern drawn when game ball B is accepted into the second starting opening 2004. In addition, game ball B that enters general prize entry port 2001, normal prize entry port 2002, first start port 2003, second start port 2004, large prize entry port 2005, and special prize entry port 2006 is detected by general prize entry port sensor 3001, normal prize entry port sensor 3002, first start port sensor 2101, second start port sensor 2401, large prize entry port sensor 2402, and special prize entry port sensor 2501, respectively.

Of the multiple ball entry ports, the outlet port for collecting game balls B that did not enter the winning port is the outlet port 2020, which is located at the most downstream position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive game balls B, and discharges the received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them, and two sub-outlets 2021, which are located upstream of the outlet port 2020 within the game area 5a and are always open to receive game balls B, and discharge the received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them.

The game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 among the multiple ball entry ports is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulating ball path unit 600, and by being received by the out ball receiving port 600a, it flows through the out ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) one by one by the out ball sensor 605. On the other hand, the game ball B received by a winning port such as the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, the first starting port 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006 and discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600, and by being received by the safe ball receiving port 600b, it flows through the safe ball passage 602 and is detected (counted) one by one by the safe ball sensor 606.

The main control MPU counts the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry ports (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 (number of entering balls), that is, the number of game balls B that are discharged from within the game area 5a. Specifically, the number of game balls B that have entered the winning port, which is the target for paying out prize balls upon entry, is counted as the total number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and the number of game balls B that have entered the out port, which collects game balls B that did not enter the winning port, is counted as the number of entering balls.

The main control MPU also counts the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the payout number) that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls when a ball enters a winning hole. Specifically, it is predetermined that a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., three balls for a ball entering the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004) will be paid out corresponding to the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the winning hole, and when the ball is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the winning hole, the predetermined number of game balls B is counted as the payout number. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 10 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, 1 game ball B is paid out, when a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, 3 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, 10 game balls B are paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of balls paid out. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the payout of actual balls is not involved, the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls is added to the number of balls held by the player.

The main control MPU then calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, and stores the result of this calculation as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, while also displaying it on the base monitor. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is "base value = (number of payouts / number of balls that enter) x 100". For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is too high, it is possible that only the balls are entering the winning holes, which are the holes that are the target of the payout of prize balls when balls enter, and by monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to determine whether or not balls are being entered into the winning holes through fraudulent activity.

In this example, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball entrance) (number of balls entering) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of balls paid out) are counted only in the low-probability non-time-saving state among the multiple game states, and are reflected in the display on the base monitor. Here, in the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability-changing state), balls frequently enter the second starting hole 2004, so the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls also increases, and the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering tends to increase. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering increases depends on the period during which the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) or the high-probability time-saving state (probability-changing state) is in effect, but by excluding such periods, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering can be kept within a certain range unless there is any fraudulent activity.

The base monitor also displays the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, but it may also be possible to display the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number paid out).

For the base monitor, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the base monitor. The information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. However, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is newly calculated each time the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) reaches 60,000, and the calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls that have been outdated are stored as history up to a specified number of calculation results. In the specifications of such a base monitor, for example, from the time when the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering is newly calculated until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches at least 1000 balls, the execution of the display regarding the ratio of the new payout number to the number of balls entering may be restricted. This is because, immediately after the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering is newly calculated, the situation where balls enter the winning entrance that is the target for paying out prize balls due to entering balls continues, and the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering is higher than the reference value, or the situation where balls do not enter the winning entrance that is the target for paying out prize balls due to entering balls continues, and the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering is lower than the reference value, etc., bias is likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering is newly calculated, it is sufficient to determine that the information obtained from the base monitor information command is unreliable, and not to display the ratio of the payout number to the number of balls entering.

In this example, the game balls B collected in the out hole 2020 or the sub-out hole 2021 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main frame 4 side, and the game balls B that enter the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the large winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 are detected (counted) by the safe ball sensor 606 provided on the main frame 4 side, but these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage may be formed so that the game balls B collected in the out hole 2020 or the sub-out hole 2021 and the game balls B that enter the various winning holes join together, and a sensor may be provided on the passage, and the number of game balls B that enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls that enter) may be counted by the detection of the sensor.

In this example, the base monitor is arranged on the main control board 1310, but it may also be arranged on the frame control board 740. In such a case, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor via the frame control board 740, but another method may be used. For example, at a predetermined timing, commands related to the number of balls entered and the number of payouts may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 may calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered and display the calculation result on the base monitor. In this way, by having the frame control board 740 take on part of the control related to the base monitor, the control burden on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In this example, the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) is calculated using the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606, but the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) may be calculated using another configuration. For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is calculated on the frame control board 740 side, the number of game balls launched into the game area 5a may be calculated based on the detection result of the launch subtraction sensor 554 in the ball launch unit 550, and this value (the number of game balls launched into the game area 5a) may be replaced with the "number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance)". Note that the "number of game balls launched into the game area" here preferably excludes the number of balls that were treated as foul balls as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the frame control board 740 side can be, for example, "base value = (number of payouts / number of game balls shot into the game area) x 100)." In this way, by having the frame control board 740 side take on part of the control related to the base monitor, the control burden on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

[New form of gaming management]
In recent years, even if a large amount of balls is awarded to a fraudster due to a new fraudulent act, it is difficult for the game parlor to urge the fraudster to stop playing because it is indistinguishable from the case where a large amount of balls is awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing, and there are cases where it is difficult to manage the gaming machine. In addition, there are cases where a large amount of balls is awarded to a legitimate player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing, and there are problems with so-called "addiction". Therefore, as one embodiment for solving these problems, a new game control that newly extracts the "amount of balls awarded in a specified period" and reflects it in the game progress, separate from the control that calculates and displays the above-mentioned base value, with the aim of optimizing the management of a gaming machine that has been awarded a large amount of balls, will be described below. For the sake of convenience, the following will be described based on the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

(Extraction of ball volume for a specified period)
In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating and deriving the following two types of ball output amount A and ball output amount B as the ball output amount (difference in ball amount) for a specified period of time by the main control board 1310.

First, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (number of shots) that are shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160. Specifically, when the handle 160 is operated to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a, the shot subtraction sensor 554 detects that game ball B has been shot from the ball launch pad 552b, and counts the number of game balls B (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls) as the "number of shots" for calculating the amounts of balls A and B. Note that the number of shots may be counted by a different method, and for example, a sensor other than the shot subtraction sensor 554 may be installed to detect and count game balls that enter the game area 5a.

The main control MPU also counts the number of game balls B (number of payouts) that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls when a ball enters a winning hole. Specifically, it is predetermined that a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., three balls for a ball entering the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004) will be paid out (awarded) corresponding to the winning hole that is the object of the prize balls to be paid out (awarded) when the ball enters the winning hole, which is the object of the prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters, is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole, and the number of the predetermined number of game balls B is counted as the "number of payouts (number of awards)" for calculating the amount of balls A and B. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 15 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, 1 game ball B is paid out, when a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, 3 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, 15 game balls B are paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of balls to be paid out for calculating the amount of balls A and B. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the payout of actual balls is not involved, the number of game balls B given as the number of prize balls is counted as the number of balls to be paid out for calculating the amount of balls A and B.

The main control MPU is capable of calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts within a period until a predetermined clear condition described below is met, separate from the normal number of balls that a player can settle by operating the counting button switch 180 (the number of balls displayed on the ball count display unit 140), and storing the calculation result in a "limit counter" as a value for calculating the amounts of balls A and B. The value of the limit counter is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The formula for calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts can be "limit counter value = number of payouts - number of shots". For example, if the value of the limit counter is too high, it can be determined that a large number of balls have been dispensed from the pachinko machine 1, regardless of whether the player has been replaced or not. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the normal number of balls held by player A is subtracted by the shooting of game ball B, and the normal number of balls held by player A is added by the payment of prize balls, thereby managing the increase and decrease of player A's normal number of balls held (the number of balls held displayed on the ball number display unit 140). However, as described above, the value of the limit counter is stored (stored) in a specific area of the RAM separately from the normal number of balls held and managed by the main control MPU. The value of this limit counter is also subtracted by the shooting of game ball B and added by the payment of prize balls, and in this respect it is similar to the process of managing the increase and decrease of the normal number of balls held. However, the value of the limit counter is not something that the player can settle by operating the counting button switch 180, and in this respect it is significantly different from the normal number of balls held. Below, the amount of balls A and B calculated using the value of the limit counter will be explained.

The amount of balls dispensed A is the difference between the value at the time when the counter for limiting the number of balls is the highest within the period until the specified clear condition described later is met, and the value at the time when the counter for limiting the number of balls is the lowest within the period until the specified clear condition described later is met. In other words, the main control MPU stores the transition of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed, calculates the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed, updates the calculation result as the amount of balls dispensed A from time to time, and stores it in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The amount of balls dispensed A is cleared when the specified clear condition described later is met, and is returned to its initial value of 0. Note that the clear condition described later does not include "settlement of balls held (operation of the counting button switch 180)", and even if player B starts playing after the settlement of player A, the amount of balls dispensed A during the game progress of both players A and B is stored (maintained) in a cumulative form, as long as the clear condition is not met. This makes it possible to know not only when one gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to multiple players.

The amount of balls dispensed B is the difference between the predetermined initial value 0 and the value at the time when the counter for limiting the number of balls is at its highest within the period until the specified clear condition described later is met. In other words, the main control MPU stores the transition of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed, calculates the difference (i.e., a difference of 0 or more) between the initial value 0 and the value at the time when the counter for limiting the number of balls is at its highest, updates the calculation result as the amount of balls dispensed B from time to time, and stores it in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The amount of balls dispensed B is cleared and returned to the initial value 0 when the specified clear condition described later is met. Note that the clear condition described later does not include "settlement of balls held (operation of the counting button switch 180)", and even if player B starts playing after the settlement of player A's balls, the amount of balls dispensed B during the game progress of both players A and B is stored (maintained) in a cumulative form as long as the clear condition is not met. This makes it possible to know not only when one gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to multiple players.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls dispensed that is calculated in response to the progress of the limit counter. Here, we explain a specific example in which the limit counter starts from an initial value of 0, and the limit counter repeatedly increases and decreases as the game is played.

As shown in FIG. 124, the cap counter starts from the initial value 0, then decreases to -2000, increases to 3000, decreases to -4000, increases to 2000, decreases to -500, increases to 4000, and decreases to 2500. In this case, the amount of balls dispensed A is calculated and stored as 8000, which is the difference between 4000 when the cap counter is at its highest and -4000 when the cap counter is at its lowest. On the other hand, the amount of balls dispensed B is calculated and stored as 4000, which is the amount of balls dispensed B when the cap counter is at its highest, starting from the initial value 0. The maximum difference between the amounts of balls dispensed A and B is stored and stored, and the maximum difference is newly calculated, and the amounts of balls dispensed A and B stored and stored are updated.

In this example, the main control board 1310 calculates two types of ball output amounts, A and B, but the hall can freely select which one to use according to the hall's management style. Specifically, an operation switch A that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and by operating the operation switch A, either the ball output amount A or the ball output amount B can be selected. On the other hand, in consideration of the control load of the main control board 1310, only one of the ball output amount A or the ball output amount B may be adopted and installed. In addition, the operation of the operation switch A when selecting either the ball output amount A or the ball output amount B may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

In addition, the calculation of the base value described above calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls inserted, whereas the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed calculates the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. These calculation programs are executed by a separate program in the main control MPU. This means that even if the calculation of the base value is not performed normally, it will not affect the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed, and it is easy to separately control the processes related to the initialization of the base value and the amount of balls dispensed, including the specified clear conditions described below. In addition, it is easy to rewrite the calculation program for the amount of balls dispensed for each model, and for example, it becomes possible to easily change which of the amount of balls dispensed A and the amount of balls dispensed B is adopted for each model.

The base value mentioned above is displayed on the base monitor, but unlike the base value, it is desirable not to display the amount of balls dispensed at all times in order to prevent fraud. However, when the hall manager performs a specified operation (such as when a dedicated switch is operated to turn on the power), the amount of balls dispensed may be displayed on a specified display device (such as the performance display device 1600 or a dedicated display device provided on the back side of the gaming machine).

In this example, the amount of balls to be dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, but a different method may be used. For example, a limit counter may be provided on the frame control board 740 side, and commands related to the number of shots and the number of payouts may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing, and the frame control board 740 may manage the limit counter and calculate the amount of balls to be dispensed from the increase or decrease in the limit counter. Also, a limit counter may be provided on the main control board 1310 side, and commands related to the limit counter may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing, and the frame control board 740 may calculate the amount of balls to be dispensed from the increase or decrease in the received limit counter. In addition, from the viewpoint of reducing the control burden, the amount of balls to be dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, while the above-mentioned base value may be calculated on the frame control board 740 side. In addition, from the perspective of reducing the control burden, the normal number of balls held and the management of the limit counter may be calculated separately on the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740.

The amount of balls to be dispensed is calculated using a counter for limiting the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts, but the number of balls that entered the base value described above may be used to calculate the amount of balls to be dispensed by storing the difference between the number of balls that entered the base value and the number of payouts in the counter for limiting the amount of balls to be dispensed. In other words, the number of balls that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) may be substituted for the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance). In this case, the value of the counter for limiting the amount of balls to be dispensed may be exemplified as "value of counter for limiting the amount of balls to be dispensed - number of balls that entered". In this way, the number of balls that entered the base value described above may be used as the value to be stored in the counter for limiting the amount of balls to be dispensed, and the control burden on the main control board 1310 may be reduced by sharing the value with part of the base monitor-related control on the main control board 1310. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) and are discharged to the outside. The number of shots and the number of balls that enter should show approximately the same value, and as a result, whether the number of shots or the number of balls that enter is used, the amount of balls dispensed will show approximately the same value.

(Game Restrictions)
In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed (amount of balls dispensed A, B) reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 executes one of the following three types of restriction patterns, and the main control board 1310 puts the balls into a stop state, making it possible to execute restrictions on the game. When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restrictions on the game are executed thereafter, but information related to the game, such as the game state (high probability state, time-saving state, information on the number of reserved balls stored, information on the changing patterns), is retained without being cleared. As will be described in detail later, the information related to the game is configured to be selected to be maintained or cleared when the power is turned on again after being turned off.

First, the specific value is configured to be able to select one of the predetermined values of 50,000, 80,000, or 100,000. Specifically, an operation switch B that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and one of 50,000, 80,000, or 100,000 shots is selected by operating the operation switch B. Here, the lower the value selected as the specific value, the higher the possibility of implementing game restrictions, and the higher the value selected as the specific value, the lower the possibility of implementing game restrictions. Note that, from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs, only one of the specific values may be adopted. In addition, the specific value selected may be a value commonly used for the ball output amounts A and B, or may be separately selectable for the ball output amounts A and B. In addition, the operation of the operation switch B when selecting one of several specific values may be judged only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be judged at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

The restriction pattern is configured so that one of restriction patterns 1 to 3, which have different game restrictions, can be selected. Specifically, an operation switch C that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 is selected by operating the operation switch C. Note that, from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs, only one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 may be adopted for the restriction pattern. Furthermore, the operation of the operation switch C when selecting one of multiple restriction patterns may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one has been selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one has been selected at any time (in real time).

Restriction pattern 1 is a pattern in which a stoppage state is created with a "game stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In the case of a "game stop," game balls can be fired into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, but even if there is a starting win, no game balls are paid out, the variable display of special patterns cannot start, and normal play cannot be played. In other words, although the firing of game balls is permitted, the game (main game) currently being played on the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 cannot proceed.

Restriction pattern 2 is a pattern in which a stopping state with "launch stop" is performed when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In the case of "launch stop", game balls cannot be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. However, if a start winning occurs, game balls are paid out, the variable display of special patterns can start, and normal play can be played. In other words, since the launch of game balls is not permitted, there is no start winning in the first place, and although the progress of the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side that is being executed is permitted, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed thereafter. Specific examples of "launch halt" situations include a state in which the frame control board 740 is unable to circulate the game balls, for example, a state in which game ball B is not launched from the ball launching unit 550 even when the handle 160 is operated, or various controls of the ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball sending unit 700, etc. are stopped, and the game ball B is not managed (monitored) in the circulating ball path unit 600.

Restriction pattern 3 is a pattern in which a stopping state is created with both "game stop" and "launch stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In the case of "game stop" and "launch stop", not only is it not possible to launch game balls into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, but even if there is a starting winning, no game balls are paid out and the variable display of special patterns cannot start, making it impossible to play normal games. In other words, the launch of game balls is not permitted, and the game (main game) currently being played on the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, making it impossible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310.

In this example, in all of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the settlement process by operating the counting button switch 180 is enabled (permitted) and not disabled. This allows the player to operate the counting button switch 180 to execute the settlement process even if the player is unable to continue playing due to any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, preventing confusion for the player. However, in consideration of the fact that a large amount of balls are awarded to a fraudulent person due to fraudulent activity, etc., the settlement process by operating the counting button switch 180 may also be disabled in all of the restriction patterns 1 to 3. In such a case, it is possible to enable the operation of the counting button switch 180 (make the settlement process executable) by a predetermined operation by the hall manager (for example, operating the spare counting button switch provided on the frame control board 740) after it has been confirmed that there is no fraudulent activity.

...

In this example, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, a stoppage state is generated in which play is restricted based on one of restriction patterns 1 to 3, preventing fraudulent acts by preventing a large number of dispensed balls from being awarded to a fraudulent player. In addition, a bias in the probability of winning or losing prevents a large number of dispensed balls from being awarded to a legitimate player, preventing problems such as so-called "addiction." This allows for the proper management of gaming machines that dispense large amounts of dispensed balls.

In this example, the game restriction content restricted in the stop state includes patterns of "play stop", "fire stop", and "both play stop" and "fire stop", but the restriction content is not limited to these methods as long as it makes it difficult to increase the number of balls after the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value. For example, as another restriction content, the time (variation time) required for the variable display of all special symbols that starts after the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value may be made longer, so that even if there is a starting winning, it takes time for the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be displayed, thereby restricting the game progress. In addition, in a gaming machine that controls the game state to either a low probability state or a high probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability state, regardless of whether or not a winning that should be in the high probability state has occurred, the game progress may be restricted by forcibly controlling only the low probability state after the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value. In these cases, since it takes more time to win than before the game restriction, the amount of balls obtained is less likely to increase, and the desire to continue playing can be reduced. Also, after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, "play stop" or "firing stop" is not performed, but a special notification corresponding to the amount of balls dispensed reaching a specific value may be given using the performance display device 1600 or another performance device. In such a case, the progress of the performance is hindered by the special notification, which can reduce the desire to continue playing. In addition, when giving a special notification, it is preferable to display a special image on the entire screen of the performance display device 1600 so that the conventional performance display cannot be seen at all. In such a case, the progress of the performance is greatly hindered, which can more effectively reduce the desire to continue playing.

In this example, even if the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value, the information on the amount of balls discharged is stored and retained without being erased until the clear condition described later is met. After the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value, the update of the amount of balls discharged A and B (update of the counter for limiting the balls) may be forcibly stopped, or the calculation may continue without stopping. For example, if the update of the amount of balls discharged A and B (update of the counter for limiting the balls) is continued without stopping, it is possible that the game balls were discharged due to some malfunction or fraud when the above-mentioned "discharge stop" was not performed, causing the counter for limiting the balls to decrease. In such a case, the counter for limiting the balls may fall below the specific value, but taking these into consideration, it is preferable to continue the limiting state without terminating it once the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value, even if the counter for limiting the balls decreases thereafter.

(Clearing the limits on ball output and play)
The pachinko machine 1 in this example is designed to trigger a stop state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but the arcade can choose whether to maintain or clear the "amount of balls dispensed calculated before the stop state was initiated" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state" when the power is turned back on after a power outage.

First, there are five types of power-on patterns for operation when the power is turned on. Power-on pattern 1 is when the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are not turned on when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated), and the game state (game information) at the time of power off is maintained without being initialized, without changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation.

Power-on pattern 2 is when the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON but the setting key switch is not turned ON when the power is turned on. No changes are made to the settings or confirmation displays are made to the settings, but a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control board 1310, and the game state at the time of power cut is initialized. However, information related to the settings is not initialized by the RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 3 is when the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON and the setting key switch is turned ON when the power is turned on. After changing the setting value, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control board 1310, and the game state at the time of power cut is initialized. However, information related to the setting values is not initialized by the RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 4 is when the setting key switch is turned ON without turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. After the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the game state at the time of power off is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are not turned on when the power is turned on, but the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 is turned on, and the game state (game information) at the time of power off is maintained without changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation. When the ball removal switch 742 is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B can be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Note that when the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are turned on and the ball removal switch 742 is also turned on when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed preferentially without changing the setting value, displaying a confirmation, or clearing the RAM.

Thus, for power-on patterns 2 and 3 out of power-on patterns 1 to 5, the game state at the time of power-off is initialized by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on, whereas for power-on patterns 1, 4 and 5, the RAM clear switch 741 is not turned on when the power is turned on, so the game state at the time of power-off is maintained. The game state at the time of power-off includes game states such as high probability state, time-saving state, and winning game state, as well as whether or not a variable display of a special symbol is being executed, whether or not it is on hold, etc. When the power is turned on using power-on patterns 2 and 3, the game state at the time of power-off is not restored, but when the power is turned on using power-on patterns 1, 4 and 5, the game state at the time of power-off is restored.

Figure 125 is a table showing the clearing conditions of "amount of balls calculated before the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on play during the stop state". In this example, it is configured so that one of the limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 with different clearing conditions can be selected. Specifically, a limited clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and one of the limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 is selected by operating the limited clear pattern selection switch. Note that, with regard to the limited clear pattern table, only one of the limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs. In addition, the operation of the limited clear pattern selection switch when selecting the limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time). In addition, the "amount of balls dispensed" in FIG. 125 also includes the "value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed." In this example, if the amount of balls dispensed is maintained, the value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed is also maintained, and if the amount of balls dispensed is cleared, the value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed is also cleared.

Figure 125 (A) shows the limited clear pattern table 1 selected when the limited clear pattern selection switch is "1". When the power is turned on, the power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state at the time of power off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started and after the limit state is started" and the "limit on the game during the limit state". When such a limit state is maintained, a state in which the game (main game) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side is maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state are maintained," and the performance display device 1600 is also made to display a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state are maintained."

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state was started and after the stop state was started" and the "restriction on playing during the stop state" are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when play is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 1, "play is stopped", but the "play stop" is released when the stop state is cleared, when play is restricted by restriction pattern 2, "firing is stopped", but the "firing stop" is released when the stop state is cleared, when play is restricted by restriction pattern 3, "play is stopped" and "firing is stopped", but the "play stop" and "firing stop" are released when the stop state is cleared, and in either case, it is possible to resume play (main play) on the main control board 1310 side. As a notification method to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period of time has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The ball output limit has been cleared," and an image message stating "The ball output limit has been cleared" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

When the power is turned on, power-on pattern 3 clears (initializes) the game state at the time the power was turned off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was started" and the "game limits during the stop state." In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period of time has passed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Power-on pattern 4 maintains the game state when the power is turned off when the power is turned on, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the limit state was started" and the "limits on play during the limit state." In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside world, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period of time has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 5 maintains the game state from when the power was turned off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state." In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside world, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light until a specified period of time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 1, when the power is turned on, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "limits on playing during the stopped state" are cleared (initialized) only if the game state at the time of power cut is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power cut is maintained as in power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "limits on playing during the stopped state" are maintained. In this way, not only the game state at the time of power cut, but also the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state are cleared all at once, which makes it less likely that the hall manager will make an operational error when deciding whether to clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state.

Figure 125 (B) shows the restriction clear pattern table 2 that is selected when the restriction clear pattern selection switch is set to "2." Of power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 2 to 5 are the same as those in restriction clear pattern table 1, so their explanation is omitted.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state from when the power was turned off, but the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was started" and the "game limits during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light until a specified period of time has passed from the time the power is turned on, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this way, power-on pattern 1 is the same as power-on pattern 4 in that it maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but differs from power-on pattern 4 in that it clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state." In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 2, when the game state at the time of power-off is maintained at the time of power-on, the hall manager can select whether to clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" as in power-on pattern 1, or to maintain the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" as in power-on pattern 4. Furthermore, since power-on pattern 1 does not require the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch to be turned on when the power is turned on, the hall manager can easily clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state is initiated" and the "play limits during the stop state."

Figure 125 (C) shows the restriction clear pattern table 3 that is selected when the restriction clear pattern selection switch is set to "3." Of the power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 1, 3 to 5 are the same as those in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so their explanations are omitted.

When the power is turned on, power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power off, but maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was started" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state." In addition, as a notification method to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light until a specified period of time has passed from the time the power is turned on, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this way, power-on pattern 2 is the same as power-on pattern 3 in that it clears (initializes) the game state at the time the power was shut off when the power was turned on, but differs from power-on pattern 3 in that it maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state." In other words, with the limit clear pattern table 3, when the game state at the time the power was shut off is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on, the hall manager can choose whether to maintain the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" as in power-on pattern 2, or to clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" as in power-on pattern 3. Furthermore, it is only possible to clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state begins and after the stopped state begins" and the "restrictions on playing during the stopped state" when the power is turned on using power-on pattern 3; for power-on pattern 3, since both the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch must be turned ON when the power is turned on, clearing (initializing) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state begins and after the stopped state begins" and the "restrictions on playing during the stopped state" can be done under strict supervision by the hall manager.

In this example, the amount of balls dispensed can be cleared (initialized) by turning on the power in a specified power-on pattern, but as another example, it may be possible to clear (initialize) it every unit of time (e.g., 3 hours). If the amount of balls dispensed was not cleared (initialized) every unit of time (e.g., 3 hours), the amount of balls dispensed by the previous player's play would affect the next player in terms of whether the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. However, by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls dispensed every unit of time (e.g., 3 hours), it is possible to make it less likely that the amount of balls dispensed by the previous player's play will affect the next player.

(Details of gaming restrictions)
In this example of the pachinko machine 1, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 enters a stop state in which restrictions are imposed on play, the details of which are described below.

Figure 126 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and play is restricted. Here, a case is explained in which, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, it is determined that the stop flag has been turned ON, and the machine transitions to a stop state. When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restriction pattern 3, which performs both "stop playing" and "stop firing", is selected as a restriction on play in the stop state. After transitioning to the stop state, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the play state at the time of power shut off, as well as the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state.

As shown in FIG. 126, before timing t1, the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state (state where the game is not at a dead end), and a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed is set. In other words, in the normal state where the game is not at a dead end, the variable display of the special symbol can be started when a starting winning occurs, and when the variable display of the special symbol stops and displays as a winning symbol, the jackpot game can be started, so that normal gameplay can be played.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (LED mounted on the light-emitting board of the function display unit 1400), speaker, and movable body are configured to execute normal operations before timing t1. Note that lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Here, for lamp C, multiple LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are made to light up or blink as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, an operation corresponding to a standby performance (for example, a demo performance) in a state waiting for the start of the variable display of the special pattern is executed, and when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, an operation corresponding to a variable performance (a performance based on a variable pattern) is executed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (e.g., a reach performance) including a variation display of the decorative pattern, the LEDs of lamps A and B light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the movable body performs a predetermined operation in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600.

The external terminal board can also output specific signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals the hall computer can understand the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 on the hall side. For example, when a starting winning occurs, when the special symbol changing display stops at a winning symbol and a jackpot game is being played, when an abnormality is detected, etc., corresponding signals are output.

In addition, before timing t1, it is possible for the player to launch a game ball into the game area 5a when he or she operates the handle 160.

The base monitor also counts the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out), calculates the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and displays the calculation result as a base value, but it is possible to perform such calculations before timing t1.

In addition, before timing t1, when a ball is detected entering the winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls, and the number of game balls held by the player is increased by the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, and the limit counter is also updated.

Next, when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot at a timing tx prior to timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components such as the performance display device 1600 to execute the pre-notification operation. Here, the ball entering the winning slot at timing tx is one ball prior to the ball entering the winning slot at timing t1, and even if prize balls are paid out (a number of prize balls is awarded) based on the ball entering the winning slot at timing tx, the amount of balls paid out does not reach the specific value, but when prize balls are paid out (a number of prize balls is awarded) based on the ball entering the winning slot at timing t1, the amount of balls paid out reaches the specific value.

The operation during advance notification is performed using the performance display device 1600 and lamp B. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "+xx shots remaining until game limit" as an advance notification display, and lamp B flashes an LED as an advance notification light. This allows the player to know that their game will soon be restricted. Also, because only some of the components such as the performance display device 1600 are used for the operation during advance notification, variable performance based on the winning can be performed, and interest in the variable performance is not lost.

In this example, the pre-notification operation is executed when the ball enters the winning slot one ball before the ball enters the winning slot at timing t1, but the pre-notification operation may be executed at any timing before the specific value is reached, such as from an earlier ball (for example, five balls before). Also, the pre-notification operation may be executed each time a predetermined number of balls enter the winning slot or a special pattern changes before the ball enters the winning slot at timing t1. As another example of the pre-notification operation, "+xx balls remaining until play limit" may be displayed based on the amount of balls dispensed at that time for a certain period of time after the power is turned on, or at all times after the power is turned on, to let the player know the approximate time until the limit is reached.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, and when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, it turns on the stop flag and transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "game stop" and "launch stop". In the stop state, game balls cannot be launched, and the main control board 1310 is in a stop state in which it is not possible to progress the game (main game). In other words, in the stop state, the special symbol variation display and jackpot game are not executed, and even if a start win occurs, the special symbol variation display is not newly started.

The performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body perform the operation when progress is not possible after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play is restricted" as a progress-impossible indication, and lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as a progress-impossible indication, and the speaker outputs a sound indicating progress is not possible saying, "Play is restricted as the daily ball payout limit has been reached."

Lamp C also has a function display unit 1400 including a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold number indicator, and a round indicator, and all of these LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to notifying the end of the game, and in the end of the game state, the LED dedicated to notifying the end of the game may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off.

In addition, the movable body is put into an inoperable state in which it will not operate after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. For example, if the movable body is in operation before the predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, the movable body is forcibly stopped mid-operation when the predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. However, as another example, a movable body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after the predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, and then stopped. In this way, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 when the predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, the movable body will return to its initial position after the predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, making it difficult to miss the progress-impossible display being executed by the performance display device 1600.

In this example, the game transitions to a stop state at time t1, but the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body execute the operation when progress is impossible after a predetermined time has passed since time t1. This means that if a ball enters the winning hole at time t1, the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole will be paid out after that. However, by executing the operation when progress is impossible after a predetermined time has passed since time t1, it is possible to wait for the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole to be paid out before executing the operation when progress is impossible, preventing the occurrence of a sense of incongruity. However, the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body may execute the operation when progress is impossible from time t1.

At timing t1, the external terminal board transitions to a stopped state and outputs a security signal. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, or when the set value is being changed or the set value is being displayed for confirmation, and the same security signal is output even when the system transitions to the stopped state. In other words, in the stopped state, a forced output state is entered in which a security signal is forcibly output, even when no abnormality is detected, or when the set value is not being changed or the set value is being displayed for confirmation. As a result, in the stopped state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the system has transitioned to the stopped state.

In addition, in this example, at time t1, the system transitions to a stopped state and outputs a security signal. However, if, for example, a security signal based on abnormality detection is being output at time t1, the security signal being output is not terminated and a new security signal is not output, but the security signal being output continues to be output. This prevents the hall from mistakenly thinking that abnormality detection has ended.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the security signal, various signals are output from the external terminal board to the hall computer to inform the game status, balls entering the winning slot, payout of winning balls, etc. If such various signals are being output at timing t1, the various signals being output are terminated before the security signal is output. This allows the hall to reliably understand that the game has transitioned to a stop state.

Also, at the time t1, after the state has been changed to the no-shooting state, it is not possible for the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. However, in this example, if the restriction pattern 3, which performs both "stop playing" and "stop shooting" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, is selected, and if the restriction pattern 1, which only performs "stop playing" and does not perform "stop shooting" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, is selected, it will be possible for the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160 after the state has been changed to the no-shooting state.

Also, at the time t1, after the transition to the stop state, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, so that this is reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, after the transition to the stop state at timing t1, for balls detected entering the winning slot before timing t1, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player. This allows the player to obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, for balls detected entering the winning slot after the transition to the stop state at timing t1, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player. However, it is also possible to configure the machine not to detect balls entering the winning slot after the transition to the stop state at timing t1, and similarly, even if a ball enters the winning slot, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

In this example, when a ball is detected entering a winning hole at timing t1, the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole are not paid out, but it is determined that the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value due to the payout of the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole, and the machine transitions to a stopped state. However, another method may be adopted. For example, when a ball is detected entering a winning hole at timing t1, the machine may not transition to a stopped state, but may transition to a stopped state when the payout of the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole is completed and the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value. This makes it possible to transition to a stopped state after the payout of the prize balls based on the ball entering the winning hole is completed and the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value, preventing the occurrence of a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this example, after the transition to the dead-end state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made to determine whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected after the transition to the dead-end state, no abnormality determination is made, and therefore no abnormality notification is made to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred. In this way, after the transition to the dead-end state, the action for when progress cannot be made corresponding to the dead-end state is executed in priority over the abnormality notification, thereby ensuring that players and hall managers are aware that the transition to the dead-end state has occurred. However, it is also possible to configure the system not to detect abnormalities such as magnetism or vibration after the transition to the dead-end state at timing t1, and similarly, even if no abnormality is detected in the first place, no abnormality notification is made to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred, even if an abnormality has occurred.

Next, after the transition to the stopped state, the power is shut off at time t2, and then turned back on at time t3. In this example, after the transition to the stopped state, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power-off, as well as the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state. Therefore, after the power is turned back on at time t3, it does not return to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped), and the stopped state is maintained, just like from time t1 to t2.

In addition, the mode of the stop state is maintained in the same mode as the stop state at timing t1 to t2. In other words, since the stop state is maintained after the power is turned on again at timing t3, for example, the main control board 1310 side is set to be unable to proceed with the game (main game), and the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body perform the operation when the game is unable to proceed. This allows the player and the hall manager to recognize that the game has returned to the stop state when the power is turned on again after being cut off. In this example, although not shown in the figure, before performing the operation when the game is unable to proceed, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The ball amount and stop state are maintained" and the performance display device 1600 temporarily displays a message image saying "The ball amount and stop state are maintained". In addition, for the lamps A to C, the LEDs are made to emit light in a color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned on again. In addition, the period during which the speaker outputs the voice "The ball output amount and capped state are being maintained" and the message image "The ball output amount and capped state are being maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be omitted.

After the power is turned back on at time t3, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play is restricted" to indicate that progress cannot be made, but the message content may be changed from the stopped state at times t1 to t2. Also, at the same time as or prior to the display of "Play is restricted," a message is displayed stating "Ball volume and stoppage state are maintained." This allows the hall manager to recognize that the situation is a continuation of the previous day when the power is turned back on the next business day, etc., and prevents the hall manager from becoming confused by a sudden stoppage state.

Also, when the power is turned on normally, not when the power is turned on again after being shut off in a stopped state, the normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. However, in this example, after the power is turned on again at timing t3, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The stopped state of the amount of balls dispensed has been maintained," but the normal power-on sound is not output. In this way, if the stopped state is restored when the power is turned back on, the sound "The stopped state of the amount of balls dispensed has been maintained" is output from the speaker in priority over the normal power-on sound, ensuring that players and hall managers are aware that the stopped state has been restored.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on normally, rather than when the power is turned on again after being cut off in a stalled state, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align it to its initial position. However, in this example, at the point in time t3, after the power is turned on again, the movable body has stopped operating and has not performed the initial operation. In this way, if the stalled state is restored when the power is turned on again, the movable body does not perform the initial operation, which allows the user to recognize that it has not been returned to the normal state (a state that is not stalled). However, at the point in time t3, after the power is turned on again, the movable body may perform the initial operation.

Figure 127 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game restriction is released when the power is turned on again after being cut off. In the above explanation, after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state, when the power is turned on again after being cut off, the game state at the time of power cut is maintained, and the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are maintained. In this example, when the power is turned on again after being cut off, the game state at the time of power cut is cleared (initialized), and the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are cleared (initialized). Specifically, after transitioning to a stop state, when the power is turned on again after being cut off, a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power cut and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state is selected as the power-on pattern. Here, the above explanation is the same as up to the power being cut off at timing t2, so the explanation is given for the period from when the power is turned on again at timing t3.

As shown in FIG. 127, after the power is shut off in the stopped state, the power is turned on again at timing t3. When the power is turned on again after the power is shut off, the power-on pattern is selected to clear (initialize) the game state at the time of the power shut off, and to clear (initialize) the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state. Therefore, after the power is turned on again at timing t3, the stopped state flag is turned OFF, and the stopped state is not maintained, but before returning to the normal state (state where the game is not stopped), the game is controlled to a waiting state for returning to the normal state (state where the game is not stopped). In the waiting state for return, the game (main game) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stopped state, the special symbol change display and the big win game are not executed, and even if a start winning occurs, the special symbol change display is not started again.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body perform the recovery operation at timing t3. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The ball output amount and the limit state have been cleared" as the recovery display, and lamps A to C emit LEDs in the color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned back on as the recovery light, and the speaker outputs the sound "The ball output amount and the limit state have been cleared" as the recovery sound.

In addition, at time t3, the movable body is rendered inoperable and cannot move.

The external terminal board also outputs a security signal at time t3, just as it does when the system transitions to the stop state. In other words, in the recovery waiting state, the system is in a forced output state where a security signal is forcibly output, even though no abnormality has been detected, no setting value has been changed, or no confirmation display of the setting value has been made. As a result, in the recovery waiting state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the stop state may be lifted.

Also, at the time of timing t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, it is not possible for the player to launch game balls into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. As described above in detail, if the restriction pattern 1 is selected in which only "play is stopped" and "launching is not stopped" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, it is possible to launch game balls into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160 after the transition to the shot limit state. However, even in such a case, it is not possible to launch game balls into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160 after the transition to the return waiting state at the time of timing t3.

In addition, at the time t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the waiting-for-return state at timing t3, even if a ball is detected entering the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the number of balls the player has. However, after transitioning to the waiting-for-return state at timing t3, the system may be configured not to detect balls entering the winning hole, and similarly, even if a ball enters the winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the number of balls the player has.

Next, at time t4, after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since time t3, the waiting-for-return state is ended, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is transitioned to the normal state (not in a stopped state). Here, the normal state (not in a stopped state) is the same as the normal state (not in a stopped state) before time t1, and the game restrictions in the stopped state are lifted. Note that the timing for ending the waiting-for-return state is not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) since time t3, but may also be triggered by the hall manager performing a predetermined restart operation. For example, when the power-on operation at time t3 is power-on pattern 3, the setting key switch is turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch off).

At timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not in a stalled state), lamps A to C perform the initial light emission when powered on. Lamps A to C also perform the initial light emission when powered on when powered on normally, not just when power is turned on again after being shut off in a stalled state.

At timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not the stalled state), the speaker outputs the normal power-on sound. Note that the speaker also outputs the normal power-on sound when the power is turned on normally, not when the power is turned on again after being shut off in the stalled state.

Furthermore, after returning to the normal state (not at the end of the game) at timing t4, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align it to its initial position. Note that the initial operation of the movable body is also performed when the power is turned on normally, not just when the power is turned on again after being cut off in the end of the game. However, the initial operation of the movable body may be performed at timing t3, prior to returning to the normal state (not at the end of the game). This allows the initial operation of the movable body to be completed before returning to the normal state (not at the end of the game), and allows the operation corresponding to the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) to be performed immediately after the return.

The external terminal board outputs a security signal at time t3 during the recovery waiting state, but by the time a predetermined time has passed since time t4, the normal state (not a stalled state) has been restored, but the security signal continues to be output. As a result, even if the recovery waiting state ends in a short time, the security signal continues to be output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the stalled state may be lifted.

In this example, after the power is shut off in the stopped state, the power is turned back on at timing t3, and when the power is turned back on after being shut off, it is controlled to a recovery waiting state and then returns to the normal state (a state where play is not stopped). However, as another example, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, it may be set to return to the normal state (a state where play is not stopped) without being controlled to a recovery waiting state. This allows play to begin immediately after the power is turned back on after being shut off.

(Example of a performance when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot or when a special pattern is displayed)
In this example, when the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the game is restricted. Of the amount of balls to be put out, the amount of balls to be put out A is the difference between the value at the time when the counter for the limiting hit is at its highest and the value at the time when the counter for the limiting hit is at its lowest, and the amount of balls to be put out B is the difference between the value at the time when the counter for the limiting hit is at its highest and the predetermined initial value 0, and both involve the value at the time when the number of balls held is at its highest. When a game ball enters the large prize winning hole 2005 during a big win game, or when a game ball enters a winning hole other than the large prize winning hole 2005 (the general prize winning hole 2001, the normal prize winning hole 2002, the first start hole 2003, the second start hole 2004) during a variable display or non-variable display of a special pattern, the number of payouts increases due to the payout of the prize balls, and the counter for the limiting hit increases, so that at the timing when the balls enter, it is determined that the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, and the game is restricted. Here, we will first explain a specific example of the presentation when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value when a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and then explain a specific example of the presentation when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value when a gaming ball enters the general prize opening 2001 during the changing display of special patterns.

Figure 128 is a specific example of a performance when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value when a game ball enters the big prize opening during a big win game. In this example, 80,000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value," and the above-mentioned "restriction pattern" is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern." In other words, if restriction pattern 1 is set, a stop state accompanied by "play stop" occurs when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value (80,000 balls), and if restriction pattern 3 is set, a stop state accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop" occurs when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value (80,000 balls). In this example, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a 10-round big win game in which the big prize opening 2005 and the role winning opening 2006 are opened and closed is given, and a high probability state is given after the big win game ends.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), the performance display device 1600 executes a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decoration symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Here, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the reception of a game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "777" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the decoration symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variable display of the second decoration symbol is performed, and when the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "◯" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the second decoration symbol. In addition, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is waiting to be displayed. In addition, in the lower right area of the performance display device 1600, a "consecutive win mode" message is displayed indicating that the "consecutive win mode" is in effect, and a "right hit" arrow is displayed to instruct the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big win hole 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during a big win game.

As shown in FIG. 128(B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for the V!" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, and the large prize winning hole 2005 and the accessory prize winning hole 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is informed that they should aim for the game ball to enter the first V prize winning hole 2007 and the second V prize winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(C), while a jackpot game is being played, the current round number is displayed in the upper left area of the performance display device 1600, and the total number of prize balls paid out as a result of game balls entering the jackpot opening 2005 during "consecutive win mode" is displayed in the center area of the performance display device 1600. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current round number, and "18,000 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the main control board 1310 monitors the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, and when a game ball enters the large winning hole 2005 where the remaining number of balls is "+1500 balls", the advance flag is turned ON, and the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, upon receiving the ON information of the advance flag, the operation at the time of advance notification is continuously executed until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (until the number of remaining balls becomes 0). The amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side based on a counter for limiting the number of shots, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value increases as the number of shots increases, and decreases as the number of payouts increases. Furthermore, the operation during advance notification continues after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value is 1,500, i.e., the number of balls dispensed reaches 78,500), until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, so that the player does not miss information regarding game restrictions.

In addition, in this example, once a pre-notification has been made, even if the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value exceeds a predetermined value (1500 remaining), the pre-notification is not terminated and continues until the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value. Specifically, even if the number of shots increases after the main control board 1310 sends the ON information of the pre-flag to the peripheral control board 1510 side from the main control board 1310 and the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value exceeds a predetermined value (1500 remaining), the main control board 1310 keeps the pre-flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, even if the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls discharged reaches a specific value reaches 1500, the number of remaining balls exceeds 1500, and then the number of remaining balls reaches 1500 again, the main control board 1310 does not frequently switch the pre-flag, and the ON information of the pre-flag is suppressed from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times, thereby avoiding the control burden and control complication.

As shown in FIG. 128(D), when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls", a pre-notification display "+1500 balls remaining until game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation, informing the player of the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of winning balls. The performance display device 1600 continuously displays the current round number in the upper left area, the total number of winning balls paid out by the game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 during the "consecutive win mode" in the upper area, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the "right hit" arrow in the lower right area, and although the advance notice display of "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display regarding the big win game being executed. Specifically, in this example, since the "current round number," "total number of winning balls," and the "right hit" arrow are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a part of the information display, as long as the contents of the information display can be recognized without being completely overlapped and becoming invisible to the player. This allows the player to play smoothly during a jackpot game without missing the information display regarding the jackpot game in progress. The movable body can move toward the front of the performance display device 1600 during a jackpot game, but it may also be moved toward the front while the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until game limit" is being displayed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the message "Continuous mode continues! (10th time)" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, informing the player that the high probability state will continue again after the jackpot game ends (the "Continuous mode" will continue). Here, at the end of the jackpot game, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just as during the jackpot game. Note that since the display of the message "Continuous mode continues! (10th time)" is an important information display that the player should be aware of, the advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with such information display. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, as long as the information display contents can be recognized and not completely overlapped and the player cannot see them.

As shown in FIG. 128(F), during the "consecutive wins mode", when a variation display (a display based on a variation pattern) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is executed again, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, four reserved displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the state of the reserved display with a high probability of winning. Also, while the variation display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed in the left area of the performance display device 1600. Note that the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted starts to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time has passed since the start of the display.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern variation during the "consecutive mode", a pre-notification display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just as during a jackpot game. The performance display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern variation display in the central area, the second decorative pattern variation display in the upper right area, the message "consecutive mode" and the "right hit" arrow in the lower right area, the hold display in the lower left area, and the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity in the left area. The pre-notification display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays related to the variable game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative pattern variation display", "second decorative pattern variation display", "message of "consecutive mode", "arrow of "right hit", "hold display", and "image corresponding to the volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, so long as the information display is not completely overlapped and the player cannot see it, but is able to recognize the contents of the information display. This allows the player to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information display related to the variable play being played. Note that the movable body can move toward the front of the performance display device 1600 during variable play, but when the advance notice display saying "+1500 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed, the movable body may be moved toward the front. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game during variable play.

As shown in FIG. 128(G), when the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning symbol again during the "consecutive wins mode," "777" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Here again, the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol, "777" (a type of important information display), so that the player can see the display of the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol, "777."

As shown in FIG. 128(H), when a jackpot game is started again, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, and the opening and closing of the large prize winning hole 2005 and the accessory prize winning hole 2006 are started during the jackpot game, and the player is informed that the player should aim for the game ball to enter the first V prize winning hole 2007 and the second V prize winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game. At this point, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just like during the previous jackpot game. Here again, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is not displayed so as to overlap with the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" (a type of important information display), so that the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" can be seen by the player.

As shown in FIG. 128(I), while a jackpot game is being played, the upper left area of the performance display device 1600 displays the current round number, and the central area of the performance display device 1600 displays the total number of prize balls paid out as a result of game balls entering the jackpot opening 2005 during "consecutive win mode." Here, "10R" is displayed as the current round number, and "19,900 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. At this point, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value has decreased due to the payout of prize balls during the jackpot game, and a pre-notification display is displayed stating "+10 balls remaining until game limit."

In this example, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value is monitored. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the large prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value and the game enters a stopped state until a specified clear condition is met, and an operation for when progress is impossible is performed. Then, at the point where the game enters a stopped state, the game in progress is stopped (interrupted) to forcibly close the large prize opening 2005, and no more game balls enter the large prize opening 2005, and game play restriction is initiated.

As shown in FIG. 128(J), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game (when transitioning to a dead end state), a pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the dead end state shown in FIG. 128(K) is displayed.

In this example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice displayed on the performance display device 1600, but the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed at the time when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, which will cause the amount of balls to reach a specific value, but are displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. This prevents information regarding whether the amount of balls paid out has reached a specific value from being overlooked, and ensures that the player is aware of the reason why the game will subsequently begin to stop. Also, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls", a pre-notification display stating "+10 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed, but for the prize balls (15 balls in this example) dispensed when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached, the excess prize balls (5 balls in this example) are dispensed. This prevents a situation in which the number of prize balls exceeds the specific value even though a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, and makes it less likely that the player will be dissatisfied. However, if it is important to monitor the amount of balls dispensed from the perspective of preventing fraud, the excess prize balls may not be dispensed for the amount of prize balls that exceed the specific value.

In the above, the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. However, it is also possible to end the display when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and display an image corresponding to the stopped state. In other words, instead of displaying the image shown in FIG. 128(J), it is also possible to proceed to the image shown in FIG. 128(K) described below. In this way, the game will transition to a stopped state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, the player can immediately understand that the game has transitioned to a stopped state.

In addition, since the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are implemented when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the game ball to be fired invisible to the player after the image corresponding to the stop state is displayed to prevent the player from accidentally firing the game ball, and in this example, it is erased. Also, in other situations, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while a display encouraging the game ball to be fired (for example, a hit right display, a hit left display, a "Aim for V!" display, etc.) is being displayed, the display encouraging the game ball to be fired at that point is made invisible to the player (it is erased).

As shown in FIG. 128(K), when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stop state. The image corresponding to the game-stop state displays the message "Game Restriction", along with messages such as "The daily ball-dispensing limit of 80,000 balls has been reached, so the game is restricted.", "Please call an attendant.", and "The settlement button is valid." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stopped pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of winning balls, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Game Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is restricted, and to know that the game restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. In addition, the player can know that the number of balls he or she has can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stopped pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of winning balls, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is executed so that all of the information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may be made unrecognizable, while the other information may be made recognizable. For example, the total number of winning balls and the advance notice display may be made unrecognizable, since they are information regarding whether or not to implement a game restriction, while the current number of rounds and the stopped pattern of the second decorative pattern may be made recognizable. This makes it possible to know under what circumstances the amount of balls dispensed reached a specific value even after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value.

In this example, in order for a predetermined clear condition to end the stalled state to be satisfied, it is necessary to re-power on the machine with a predetermined power-on pattern after the power is cut off. Here, the following cases will be described: when a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-on and maintains the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 1, power-on patterns 4 and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected); when a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-on and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in the limited clear pattern table 1, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in the limited clear pattern table 2, and power-on pattern 3 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected); when a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-on and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on pattern 1 in the limited clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected).

First, after the transition to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, if a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of the power off and maintains the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state is selected, the game restriction as the stop state is not lifted, and the performance display device 1600 displays the image shown in FIG. 128 (K) again. Note that, although not shown in the present example, before displaying the image shown in FIG. 128 (K), a sound "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are maintained" is temporarily displayed on the performance display device 1600. Here, the dedicated period for displaying the message image "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are maintained" on the performance display device 1600 may be omitted, but in order to emphasize that the hall manager is aware of the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state, the dedicated period may be omitted, and the message image "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are maintained" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600 together with the image shown in FIG. 128 (K).

In addition, when the power is turned on again after the transition to the stop state, if a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of the power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state, the restrictions on play in the stop state are lifted by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state. Here, when the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are cleared (initialized), all information involved in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed, such as the stop counter, payout number, and shot number, is cleared (initialized). In addition, information regarding the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state and information regarding the "consecutive mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are retained after the transition to the stop state and at the time of power-off, but when the power is turned on again after power-off, information regarding the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted and information regarding the "consecutive mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are lost, so that the game starts in a low probability state. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 128 (L), the performance display device 1600 is configured to display an initial image in which the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after the transition to the stop state, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state, the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are cleared (initialized), and the game restriction as the stop state is released. In addition, information about the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state and information about the "consecutive mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are retained after the transition to the stop state and at the time of power-off, but even when the power is turned on again after power-off, information about the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted and information about the "consecutive mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are retained, so that the game is resumed in the state when it was interrupted. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 128 (L'), the performance display device 1600 returns to and displays an image related to the "consecutive mode" (high probability state), which is the ending period when the final round of the jackpot game has ended. In addition, when a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state is selected, a special return notification (image and sound indicating that the game will return to the state before the game limit) indicating that the game will return to the middle of the previous game may be made before the game is resumed after the power is turned off and then turned back on. This special return notification corresponds to the return display, return light emission, and return sound in the return waiting state from timing t3 to timing t4 in FIG. 125 described above, and as described above, examples of the return notification include outputting a sound from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared" and displaying a message image on the performance display device 1600 saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared."

Figure 129 is a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value when a game ball enters the general winning slot while the special symbol is being displayed. In this example, 80,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and either restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. In other words, if restriction pattern 1 is set, a stopping state accompanied by "play stop" occurs when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls), and if restriction pattern 3 is set, a stopping state accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop" occurs when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls).

As shown in FIG. 129(A), the performance display device 1600 executes a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decoration symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Here, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the reception of a game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "777" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and when the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "◯" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is waiting to be displayed. In addition, in the lower right area of the performance display device 1600, a "consecutive win mode" message is displayed indicating that the "consecutive win mode" is in effect, and a "right hit" arrow is displayed to instruct the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big win hole 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during a big win game.

As shown in FIG. 129(B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for the V!" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, and the large prize winning hole 2005 and the accessory prize winning hole 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is informed that they should aim for the game ball to enter the first V prize winning hole 2007 and the second V prize winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(C), while a jackpot game is being played, the current round number is displayed in the upper left area of the performance display device 1600, and the total number of prize balls paid out as a result of game balls entering the jackpot opening 2005 during "consecutive win mode" is displayed in the center area of the performance display device 1600. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current round number, and "17,500 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the main control board 1310 monitors the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, and when a game ball enters the large winning hole 2005 where the remaining number of balls becomes "+1500 balls", the advance flag is turned ON, and the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 side receives the ON information of the advance flag and continues to execute the operation at the time of advance notification until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. The amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side based on a counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed, which is the difference between the number of balls dispensed and the number of balls dispensed. In other words, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value increases as the number of balls dispensed increases, and decreases as the number of balls dispensed increases. Furthermore, the operation during advance notification continues after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value is 1,500, i.e., the number of balls dispensed reaches 78,500), until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, so that the player does not miss information regarding game restrictions.

In addition, in this example, once a pre-notification has been given, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value falls below a predetermined value (1500 remaining), the pre-notification is not terminated and continues until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Specifically, even if the number of shots increases after the main control board 1310 sends the pre-flag ON information to the peripheral control board 1510 and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value falls below a predetermined value (1500 remaining), the main control board 1310 keeps the pre-flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value reaches 1500, the number of balls remaining falls below 1500, and then the number of balls remaining reaches 1500 again, the main control board 1310 does not frequently switch the pre-flag, and the pre-flag ON information is suppressed from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times, thereby avoiding control burden and control complication.

As shown in FIG. 129(D), when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls", a pre-notification display "+1500 balls remaining until game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation, informing the player of the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of winning balls. The performance display device 1600 continuously displays the current round number in the upper left area, the total number of winning balls paid out by the game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 during the "consecutive win mode" in the upper area, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the "right hit" arrow in the lower right area, and although the advance notice display of "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display regarding the big win game being executed. Specifically, in this example, since the "current round number," "total number of winning balls," and the "right hit" arrow are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a part of the information display, as long as the contents of the information display can be recognized without being completely overlapped and becoming invisible to the player. This allows the player to play smoothly during a jackpot game without missing the information display regarding the jackpot game in progress. The movable body can move toward the front of the performance display device 1600 during a jackpot game, but it may also be moved toward the front while the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until game limit" is being displayed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the message "Continuous mode continues! (10th time)" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, informing the player that the high probability state will continue again after the jackpot game ends (the "Continuous mode" will continue). Here, at the end of the jackpot game, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just as during the jackpot game. Note that since the display of the message "Continuous mode continues! (10th time)" is an important information display that the player should be aware of, the advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with such information display. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, as long as the information display contents can be recognized and not completely overlapped and the player cannot see them.

As shown in FIG. 129(F), during the "consecutive wins mode", when a variation display (a display based on a variation pattern) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is executed again, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, four reserved displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the state of the reserved display with a high probability of winning. Also, while the variation display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed in the left area of the performance display device 1600. Note that the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted starts to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time has passed since the start of the display.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern variation during the "consecutive mode", a pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, just as during a jackpot game. The performance display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern variation display in the central area, the second decorative pattern variation display in the upper right area, the "consecutive mode" message and the "right hit" arrow in the lower right area, the hold display in the lower left area, and the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity in the left area. The pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays related to the variable game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative pattern variation display", "second decorative pattern variation display", "message of "consecutive mode", "arrow of "right hit", "hold display", and "image corresponding to the volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, so long as the information display is not completely overlapped and the player cannot see it, but is able to recognize the contents of the information display. This allows the player to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information display related to the variable play being played. Note that the movable body can move toward the front of the performance display device 1600 during variable play, but when the advance notice display saying "+10 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed, the movable body may be moved toward the front. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game during variable play.

In this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls reaches a specific value is monitored before the amount of balls released reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. When the number of balls remaining becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the general winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern, the ball release flag is turned ON, and the game is stopped until a predetermined clear condition is met, and an operation when progress is impossible is performed. Then, at the time of the transition to the variable display state, the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special pattern being executed does not progress, the game is forcibly stopped, and the game restriction is started. Here, the function display unit 1400 when the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special pattern being executed does not progress will be described. The function display unit 1400 continues to flash the LED in the first special pattern display or the second special pattern display (control mode during variable display) (the variable time is not measured, so it continues to flash until the clear condition is met). However, the function display unit 1400 may have the LEDs of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display all lit or all off instead of flashing. In this case, not only the LEDs of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, but also other LEDs in the function display unit 1400 (such as the LEDs of the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator) are all lit or all off. Also, if the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to the end of the game notification, the LED dedicated to the end of the game notification may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off. Note that the remaining time of the change when the measurement of the change time is stopped (interrupted) is stored in the RAM built into the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 129(G), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern, a pre-notification display of "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are displayed, but when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the variable display of the decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "767"), and the variable display of the second decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "x"). Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notice display "+0 shots remaining until game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the play limit state shown in Figure 129 (H) is displayed.

In this example, the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display displayed on the performance display device 1600, but the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed at the time when the game ball enters the general winning port 2001, which will reach the specific value, but are displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the amount of prize balls is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display. This makes it possible to avoid overlooking information regarding whether the amount of balls has reached the specific value, and allows the player to reliably recognize the reason why the game is stopped after that. In addition, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be paid out reaches the specific value becomes "+0 balls", a advance notice display saying "+10 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed, but for the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 (15 balls in this example), even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached, the excess amount of prize balls (5 balls in this example) is paid out. This prevents a situation in which the number of prize balls exceeds a specific value even though a game ball has entered the general prize opening 2001, and makes it less likely that the player will become dissatisfied. However, if it is important to monitor the amount of balls dispensed in order to prevent fraud, the excess number of prize balls may not be dispensed when the number of prize balls exceeds a specific value.

In the above, the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but rather continue to be displayed until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display. However, it may be arranged to end when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and an image corresponding to the stopped state be displayed. In other words, instead of displaying the image shown in FIG. 129(G), it may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 129(H) described below. In this way, the game will transition to a stopped state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, the player can immediately understand that the game has transitioned to a stopped state.

In addition, since the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are implemented when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the game ball to be fired invisible to the player after the image corresponding to the stop state is displayed to prevent the player from accidentally firing the game ball, and in this example, it is erased. Also, in other situations, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while a display encouraging the game ball to be fired (for example, a hit right display, a hit left display, a "Aim for V!" display, etc.) is being displayed, the display encouraging the game ball to be fired at that point is made invisible to the player (it is erased).

As shown in FIG. 129(H), when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stop state. The image corresponding to the game-stop state displays the message "Game Restriction", along with messages such as "The daily ball-dispensing limit of 80,000 balls has been reached, so the game is restricted.", "Please call an attendant.", and "The settlement button is valid." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Game Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the user to know that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is restricted, and to know that the game restriction cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. In addition, the player can know that the number of balls he or she has can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above, before the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the hold display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is executed so that all of the information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may be made unrecognizable, while the other information may be made recognizable. For example, the advance notice display may be made unrecognizable because it is information regarding whether or not to implement a game restriction, while the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, and the hold display may be made recognizable. This makes it possible to know under what circumstances the amount of dispensed balls reached a specific value even after the amount of dispensed balls has reached the specific value.

Here, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as a result of a game ball entering the general winning port 2001 while the special pattern is being displayed, the same action as when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as a result of a game ball entering the big winning port 2005 during a big win game is executed when progress is impossible, and an image corresponding to the game's no-go state is displayed, etc. In this way, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, regardless of the trigger, a common notification is issued, allowing the player to reliably understand that the game has entered a no-go state.

In this example, in order for a predetermined clear condition to end the stalled state to be satisfied, it is necessary to re-power on the machine with a predetermined power-on pattern after the power is cut off. Here, the following cases will be described: when a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-on and maintains the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 1, power-on patterns 4 and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected); when a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-on and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in the limited clear pattern table 1, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in the limited clear pattern table 2, and power-on pattern 3 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected); when a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-on and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state (in this example, power-on pattern 1 in the limited clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the limited clear pattern table 3 are selected).

First, after the game has entered a stopped state, if the game state at the time of the power cut is maintained when the power is turned back on after being shut off and a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, the game restrictions in the stopped state are not lifted, and the performance display device 1600 will again display the image shown in FIG. 129 (H).

In addition, when the power is turned on again after the transition to the stop state, if a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of the power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state, the restrictions on play in the stop state are lifted by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state. Here, when the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are cleared (initialized), all information such as the stop counter, payout number, and shot number involved in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed is cleared (initialized). In addition, information regarding the remaining time of fluctuation when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state, information regarding the "consecutive mode" (high probability state), and information regarding the reservation are retained after transition to the stop state and at the time of power-off, but when the power is turned on again after power-off, information regarding the remaining time of fluctuation when interrupted, information regarding the "consecutive mode" (high probability state), and information regarding the reservation are lost, so that the game starts in a low probability state with no reservation. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), the performance display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reservation display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, after the transition to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after being cut off, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state, the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are cleared (initialized), and the restrictions on play as the stop state are lifted. In addition, information on the remaining change time when the game was interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state, information on the "consecutive mode" (high probability state), and information on the reserved are retained after transition to the stop state and when the power is turned off, but even when the power is turned on again after being cut off, information on the remaining change time when the game was interrupted, information on the "consecutive mode" (high probability state), and information on the reserved are retained, so that the game is resumed in a state in the middle of the previous change in the high probability state. In other words, the remaining change time when the clocking of the change time is stopped (interrupted) at the time of transition to the stop state is stored in the RAM built into the main control board 1310, but after the power is turned on again, the display of the change of the decorative pattern and the display of the change of the second decorative pattern are executed for the remaining change time. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 129(I'), the effect display device 1600 returns to and displays an image related to the "consecutive wins mode" (high probability state), and resumes displaying the varying decorative patterns and the varying second decorative patterns based on the information related to the reserved state. Note that if a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state is selected, a special return notification (image and sound indicating that the state will be restored to before the game limit) indicating that the game will return to the middle of the previous game may be made before the various effect displays are restored after the power is turned back on after being turned off.

In the above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, a stop state is immediately generated. However, as another example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the timing of the start of the stop state may be delayed until the end of the jackpot game. In other words, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during multiple rounds in a jackpot game, the jackpot game may be continued until the end of the final round. In such a case, even after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the amount of balls dispensed increases due to the payout of prize balls, but such an increase in the amount of balls dispensed is permitted. Also, the stop state accompanied by "play stop" or "firing stop" is entered after waiting for the jackpot game to end. This prevents the game from being restricted during the jackpot game and does not cause any disadvantage in winning prize balls, making it less likely for the player to become dissatisfied.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, a gaming machine of the type that circulates gaming balls without paying out prize balls as real balls outside the gaming machine (so-called sealed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) was described, but the above-mentioned "technology for generating a dead-end state based on the amount of balls paid out (amount of balls paid out A, B)" is not limited to this type of gaming machine, and may be applied to conventional gaming machines (types of gaming machines that pay out prize balls as real balls outside the gaming machine). Furthermore, when applied to conventional gaming machines, it is preferable to set the timing of the occurrence of the dead-end state and the game control during the dead-end state as follows.

That is, conventional gaming machines have a payout control board instead of the frame control board 740, and the payout control board is generally capable of controlling a payout device that pays out the gaming balls stored in the ball tank on the back side of the gaming machine as prize balls. The prize balls paid out to the ball tray on the front side of the gaming machine are given to the player as real balls, but in this configuration, a larger time lag occurs between the time when the gaming balls enter the various winning holes and the time when the prize balls are paid out than in a gaming machine that uses the gaming balls in a circulating manner. In particular, it is possible that a situation will occur in which multiple gaming balls enter the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, leaving many prize balls unpaid and stored, and in such a case, many prize balls may remain unpaid and stored even after the start of the above-mentioned stop state. In such a case, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the payout process on the payout control board is stopped at the same time that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 is stopped when the limit state begins, the player may not be able to obtain the profit that he or she should have (the prize balls that are stored as unpaid). Therefore, when applying the "technology for generating a limit state based on the amount of paid balls (amount of paid balls A and B)" to a conventional type of gaming machine, the following two control methods are possible.

In the first pattern, the "number of payouts" that is the subject of calculation of the limit counter is the number of balls actually paid out. Specifically, a ball sensor is provided that detects the number of game balls sent by the payout device toward the ball tray, and the detection result of the ball sensor is reflected in the "number of payouts." This makes it possible to reduce the number of unpaid prize balls compared to calculating the limit counter based on prize ball information on the main control board 1310.

In the second pattern, even if the game is stopped when the ball reaches its limit, the "payout of unpaid prize balls" will continue. Then, when there are no more unpaid prize balls, the game will stop completely. Note that the second pattern may be used in conjunction with the first pattern.

(Addition of Restriction Clear Pattern Table 4)
In the above, limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 are provided as limited clear pattern tables with different clear conditions for "amount of balls calculated before the start of the stalled state" and "limits on play during the stalled state", but a limited clear pattern table 4 may be provided separately. Even in this case, one of the limited clear pattern tables 1 to 4 is selected by operating a limited clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager. However, with regard to the limited clear pattern table, only limited clear pattern table 4 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs.

Figure 130 shows the restricted clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the restricted clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". When restricted clear pattern table 4 is selected, the arcade can choose whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on play during a stalled state" when the power is turned back on after a power outage, but the "amount of balls calculated before the stalled state began" is always cleared when the power is turned back on after a power outage.

In power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (corresponding to the clear notification 1 and the progress impossible notification described later). In addition to these notifications, a clear method notification showing the method for clearing the stop state for the hall manager may be added.

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state was started and after the stop state was started" and the "restriction on playing during the stop state" are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when play is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 1, "play is stopped", but the "play stop" is released when the stop state is cleared, when play is restricted by restriction pattern 2, "firing is stopped", but the "firing stop" is released when the stop state is cleared, when play is restricted by restriction pattern 3, "play is stopped" and "firing is stopped", but the "play stop" and "firing stop" are released when the stop state is cleared, and in either case, it is possible to resume play (main play) on the main control board 1310 side. As a notification method to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period of time has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The ball output limit has been cleared," and the performance display device 1600 displays an image message saying "The ball output limit has been cleared" (corresponding to the clear notification 2 described below).

When the power is turned on, power-on pattern 3 clears (initializes) the game state at the time the power was turned off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was started" and the "game limits during the stop state." In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period of time has passed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and the performance display device 1600 displays an image message saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared." (This corresponds to clear notification 2 described below).

In power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (corresponding to the clear notification 1 and play unavailable notification described later). In addition to these notifications, a clear method notification showing the method for clearing the stop state for the hall manager may be added.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 5 maintains the game state from when the power was turned off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state." In addition, as a notification method to notify the outside world, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light until a specified period of time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, whether the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power on patterns 1 and 4, or the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power on patterns 2 and 3, the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began or after the limit state began" is cleared (initialized). This ensures that the hall manager does not forget to clear the amount of balls dispensed when the power is turned on, such as when the store opens, and prevents the amount of balls dispensed from reaching a specific value immediately after opening, causing a limit state. Note that when the power is turned on, if power on pattern 5 is selected, the above-mentioned ball removal process is simply executed and game play does not begin, so the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began or after the limit state began" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power on patterns 1 and 4 when the power is turned on, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is maintained. In other words, the game hall can select whether to maintain or clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" when the power is turned on again after a power off. For example, if a stop state has already occurred and you want to release the game restriction, you can perform the power on operation to clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power off, and if you want to maintain the game restriction, you can perform the power on operation to maintain the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power off. Note that when power on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed, and the game does not start, so the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

(Notification regarding the amount of balls dispensed when an abnormality is detected)
In this example, it is possible to detect abnormalities such as magnetism and vibration while the power is on, and it is judged whether an abnormality has been detected. Depending on the type of abnormality, the game progress is stopped when an abnormality is detected, and the game cannot be resumed unless the power is turned on again. However, when the power is turned on again, for example, as is clear from the limit clearing pattern table 4, depending on the mode of the operation at the time of turning on the power, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state is started or after the stop state is started" and the "limit of play during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). For this reason, there is a possibility that a new fraudulent act may be committed by intentionally causing an abnormality before the amount of balls dispensed approaches a specific value and transitions to the stop state, or during the stop state, to make the hall manager turn the power on again and clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state is started or after the stop state is started" and the "limit of play during the stop state". In this example, in order to prevent such a new fraudulent act, the case where a notification is executed regarding the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state is started or after the stop state is started" and the "limit of play during the stop state" when an abnormality is detected will be described below.

In this example, while the power is on, an abnormality determination is performed to determine whether an abnormality has been detected, and whether the abnormality is a minor or major abnormality. Examples of minor abnormalities include the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the removal of the frame decoration member. When a minor abnormality is detected, the game progress is not stopped. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside that a minor abnormality has occurred, but the abnormality notification is terminated when an error termination condition is met, such as the passage of a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). In other words, when a minor abnormality is detected, although there is a possibility that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 by fraudulent conduct, the abnormality notification is terminated at a predetermined timing because it is easy to confirm whether the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2.

On the other hand, the detection of a severe abnormality includes the detection of magnetism, vibration, and radio waves against the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 in this example is provided with a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and a radio wave sensor for detecting illegal radio waves, and each sensor is capable of detecting magnetism, vibration, and radio waves. When a severe abnormality is detected, the game is stopped because it is highly likely that the magnetism, vibration, or radio waves were caused by illegal acts, not the work of the hall manager. When a severe abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside that a severe abnormality has occurred, but the abnormality notification is not terminated even after a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. Therefore, when a severe abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume the game.

The abnormality notification is performed not only by components on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance display device 1600, but also by components on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the back side of the main frame 4 and the back side of the game board 5. This allows the hall manager to know that an abnormality has occurred, even if he is working on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, for example.

Figures 131 to 133 are time charts showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor or major abnormality occurs. In this example, the behavior of the pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stop state, the behavior of the pachinko machine when a major abnormality occurs during a normal state, and the behavior of the pachinko machine when a major abnormality occurs during a stop state are sequentially explained. The normal state is a state that is not a stop state before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and may be any of the following: when special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, when a jackpot game is being played, and a standby state in which neither special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner nor a jackpot game is being played.

Also, when it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot at timing t1, it is determined that the stop flag has been turned ON and the machine transitions to the stop state, as has already been explained using FIG. 126. In other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine in a state that is not a stop state (normal state) before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and in a stop state when no minor or serious abnormality has occurred, has already been explained, so an explanation is omitted here. However, in FIG. 126, after the machine transitions to the stop state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made to determine whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected, but in this example, an abnormality determination is made even during the stop state, and an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restriction pattern 3 is selected, which performs both "stop playing" and "stop firing" as restrictions on play in the stalled state. In addition, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table, and the following power-on patterns are selected: power-on patterns 1 and 4, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state, and power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state.

Figure 131 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during normal operation or during a stoppage state.

First, before timing t1 when the system transitions to the deadlock state, the system is controlled to the normal state (not the deadlock state). The behavior of the normal state (not the deadlock state) is as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where a minor abnormality is detected at timing tx during the normal state (state where the game is not at a dead end). When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board execute the operation required when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in terms of aspects other than the execution of the abnormality notification, such as the progress of the game, there is no change from the situation before timing tx when no minor abnormality was detected, and the behavior of the normal state (state where the game is not at a dead end) is maintained.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operation performed when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Door open error" as error display A, and also displays the message "+xx balls remaining until game limit" as current status display A to show the remaining amount of balls until game play is limited (the remaining amount of balls until the amount of balls reaches a specific value). Specifically, the advance notice display is executed after the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value reaches 5,000 balls, but even if the advance notice display is not being executed, for example, if a minor abnormality is detected when the number of balls to be dispensed until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value is 50,000 balls, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "+50,000 balls remaining until the game limit" as current status display A. Note that, although current status display A shows the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value, it may also show the amount of balls dispensed at that time.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during normal operation (not at the end of the game), the performance display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display A, showing the remaining number of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted (the remaining number of balls to be dispensed until the number of balls reaches a specific value). If the power is cut off at this time, the detection of the minor abnormality will be resolved, but the number of balls to be dispensed will be cleared when the power is turned back on in power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine the remaining number of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted and then decide whether or not to turn the power back on.

In addition, before the timing t1 of the transition to the stop state, in order to inform the player that the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value, the peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing the operation at the time of advance notice using some components such as the performance display device 1600. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "+xx balls remaining until the game limit" in a specific display area as an advance notice display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600 and is a display area used to display when the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value, and is a fixed area that is unchanged under any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it. Then, if a minor abnormality is detected during the execution of such an advance notice display, the performance display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current status display A. Furthermore, when the advance notice display is used to display the current status display A, it is configured to be displayed in a layer higher (closer) than the layers that display other performance images, and in this example, the current status display A is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably and continuously recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, in this example, for the start operation of the advance notice (operation when the advance notice starts), in addition to the advance notice display using the performance display device 1600, the LED of lamp B (an LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as an advance notice light. This makes it easier to recognize that the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value.

In this example, the advance notice display is executed after the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value, which is 5,000 balls. The advance notice display is terminated when the remaining number of balls to be dispensed exceeds 5,000 balls, as will be described later in detail. The advance notice display cannot be erased when a specified time has passed or by administrator operation. On the other hand, when a minor abnormality occurs or a serious abnormality occurs, which will be described later, the current status display A is executed, but the current status display A does not end even if the remaining number of balls to be dispensed changes. The current status display A can be erased when a specified time has passed until the error display A ends, or by administrator operation to resolve the abnormality. This ensures that it is not impossible to distinguish between the advance notice display and the current status display A.

In this example, the current status display A is executed by the performance display device 1600, but instead of the display member on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a display member on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the back side of the main frame 4 or the back side of the game board 5, may be used to display the remaining number of balls until the number of balls reaches a specific value. Even when the current status display A is executed by the performance display device 1600, the current status display A may be the remaining number of balls until the number of balls reaches a specific value, or an encrypted number according to the number of balls (for example, if the remaining number of balls is between 0 and 5000, A is displayed). This allows only the hall manager to check the current status display A, and prevents fraudulent attempts to find out the number of balls by intentionally causing an abnormality.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs or if a serious abnormality, which will be described later, occurs, the current status display A is executed by the performance display device 1600. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type of gaming machine (a type of gaming machine that pays out actual prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the current status display A is not executed by the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display A from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs or if a severe abnormality occurs, as described below, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display A. However, if a RAM error occurs, for example, a severe abnormality is assumed to have occurred, and current status display A is executed by the performance display device 1600. However, if a RAM error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory relating to the amount of balls dispensed itself is abnormal, so current status display A may not be executed by the performance display device 1600.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B are configured to emit an error light by lighting or blinking a single color LED, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "Door open error" as an error sound.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a minor abnormality has occurred.

In this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board are returned to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has elapsed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, and when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, the stop flag is turned ON and the state transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "stop gameplay" and "stop firing." The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where a minor abnormality is detected at timing ty during the stalled state. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes the operation to be performed when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in all other respects, such as disabling game progress, there is no change from the situation before timing ty when no minor abnormality was detected, and the stalled state behavior is maintained.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence at the timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Door open error" as error display A, and also displays the message "Play limit reached" as current status display B to indicate that the machine has already entered a stop state and play is being restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value).

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during a stopped state, the performance display device 1600 displays not only error display A but also current status display B, indicating that the machine has already entered a stopped state and play is restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). In this case, if the power is turned back on, the minor abnormality detection is cleared, but when the power is turned back on with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the restrictions on play during the stopped state are maintained, while when the power is turned back on with power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on play during the stopped state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine which power-on pattern to use to turn the power back on after understanding that the machine has already entered a stopped state and play is restricted.

In this example, only the performance display device 1600 is used to notify of abnormalities, and components other than the performance display device 1600 are given priority in executing operations when progress is impossible. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has already transitioned to a play-stop state and that play is restricted, even if a minor abnormality is detected during a play-stop state.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during a stalled state, or if a serious abnormality, which will be described later, occurs, current status display B is executed, but current status display B will not end even if the amount of balls dispensed changes after that. Also, current status display B can be erased, for example, when a predetermined time has passed until error display A ends, or by administrator operation to resolve the abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent current status display B from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the stall state, or if a serious abnormality occurs as described below, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display B. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type of gaming machine (a type of gaming machine that pays out actual prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the performance display device 1600 is configured not to execute current status display B. This makes it possible to prevent current status display B from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the stalled state, or if a severe abnormality occurs as described below, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display B, but even if a RAM error occurs, for example, a severe abnormality is assumed to have occurred, and current status display B is executed by the performance display device 1600. However, if a RAM error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory relating to the stalled state itself is abnormal, so current status display B may not be executed by the performance display device 1600.

The speaker also performs an operation when progress is not possible after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, outputting a sound for when progress is not possible saying, "Play is being restricted as the daily ball limit has been reached." However, such a sound for when progress is not possible may be ended after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. This prevents the sound for when progress is not possible from continuing to be output after the machine has transitioned to a stop-play state, and prevents it from being a nuisance to players playing on other pachinko machines 1.

In addition, the external terminal board is in a forced output state where a security signal is forcibly output from the time t1 when the state transitions to the stopped state, but if a minor abnormality is detected at time tx, the security signal being output is terminated and no new security signal is output, but rather the security signal being output continues to be output. This prevents the hall from mistakenly thinking that the stopped state has ended.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing ty, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600 is set to return to operation as it would be if progress was impossible. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has elapsed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, after transitioning to the stopped state, the power is cut off at timing t2, and then power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned back on at timing t3, and the power-on pattern 2 or 3, which clears the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state, is selected as the power-on pattern. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stalled state began and after the stalled state began" and the "game limit during the stalled state" are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the "game limit during the stalled state" is cleared to control the game to the normal state (a state where the game is not stalled). In other words, it is possible to resume the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (a state where the game is not stalled) is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute the clear notification 2 at timing t3. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a combination of predetermined decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays a message "Limits cleared" as the clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 2 does not need to notify that the limit state has been cleared when the limit state was not reached when the power was turned off, and may notify that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing.

In addition, for lamps A and B, at timing t3, the red LED lights up or flashes as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed and the limit have been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is terminated. The clear notification 2 displayed on the performance display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such a clear notification 2 may be made to be erased by administrator operation. In this way, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by administrator operation, the clear notification 2 will remain displayed, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as power-on patterns that clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stopped state. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the behavior of the stopped state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on play during the stopped state." In other words, it is not possible to resume play (main play) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stopped state is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute clear notification 1 at timing t3'. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "Amount of balls dispensed has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 1 may notify that the amount of dispensed balls has been maintained when the amount of dispensed balls was in a stopped state when the power was cut off, or may notify not only that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared, but also the amount of dispensed balls at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B are configured to turn on or blink green LEDs as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1, saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared," to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to their operation when progress is impossible. However, the operation when progress is impossible may be started before the end of the clear notification 1.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Clearing the RAM will return to normal" as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state. This allows the hall manager to understand that the stalled state cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on.

When the speaker executes an action when progress is impossible, it outputs a sound saying "Play is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" as a progress impossible notification (sound for progress impossible). However, as mentioned above, such a sound for progress impossible may end when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. However, even if the output of the sound for progress impossible has ended during a stalled state, the sound for progress impossible may be output again when the power is turned back on at timing t3'. In such a case, the output of the sound for progress impossible will end when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned back on, the sound for progress impossible is output again, making it easy to understand that the stalled state has not been cleared and play is restricted.

In this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls is cleared but the stop state is maintained, so the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed after the clear notification 1 is ended, and the clear notification 1 is executed in priority to the progress failure notification and the clear method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1 and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed alternately. In addition, when the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed on the remaining components, or the same components may be used, but the clear notification 1 may be executed in some areas and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining areas. In addition, even when the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may be terminated after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. The clearing method notification may also end after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

Figure 132 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during normal operation.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, the system is controlled to the normal state (not at the end of the road). The behavior of the normal state (not at the end of the road) is as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the normal state (a state where the game is not at a dead end). When a severe abnormality is detected, it is made impossible to launch game balls, and it is made impossible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, when a severe abnormality occurs, the display of special patterns will not change and no jackpot game will be executed, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special patterns will not change again.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, movable body, and external terminal board perform the operation required in the event of an error as an abnormality notification.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operation at the time of error occurrence at the timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the message "+xx balls remaining until game limit" as current status display A to show the remaining amount of balls until game play is limited (the remaining amount of balls until the amount of balls reaches a specific value).

As described above, if a serious abnormality is detected during normal operation (not at the end of the game), the performance display device 1600 will display not only error display B but also current status display A, showing the remaining number of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted (the remaining number of balls to be dispensed until the number of balls reaches a specific value). If the power is cut off at this time, the detection of the serious abnormality will be resolved, but the number of balls to be dispensed will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether or not to turn the power back on after understanding the remaining number of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted.

In addition, before the game is stopped, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the operation of the advance notice by using some components such as the performance display device 1600 to inform the player that the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "+xx balls until the game limit" in a specific display area as an advance notice display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600 and is a display area used to display when the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value, and is a fixed area that does not change under any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it. Then, if a serious abnormality is detected during the execution of such an advance notice display, the performance display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current status display A. Furthermore, when the advance notice display is used to display the current status display A, it is configured to be displayed in a layer higher (closer) than the layers that display other performance images, and in this example, the current status display A is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably and continuously recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B are configured to light up or blink in a single color as an error light.

Lamp C also includes a function display unit 1400, which includes a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold number indicator, and a round indicator, and all of these LEDs are set to light up. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to anomaly notification, and when a serious anomaly is detected, the LED dedicated to anomaly notification may be set to light up and the other LEDs may be set to off.

The speaker also outputs an error sound saying, "A magnetic abnormality has occurred."

In addition, the movable body is in an inoperable state at the time tx, so that it will not operate. For example, if the movable body is in operation at the time tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped midway through its operation. However, as another example, a movable body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after the time tx, and then stopped. In this way, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time tx, the movable body will return to its initial position after the time tx, making it difficult to miss the error display B or current status display A being executed by the performance display device 1600.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a serious abnormality has occurred.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected at the time tx, it is made impossible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, so that this is reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls for balls that have entered the winning hole before the time tx, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player. This allows the player to obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, if a ball is detected entering the winning hole after a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the balls entering the winning hole may be configured not to be detected, and similarly, even if a ball enters the winning hole, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, the operation performed at the time of error occurrence is executed as an abnormality notification, but if another serious abnormality is detected thereafter at timing ty, the operation performed at the time of error occurrence is continued without being changed. However, it may be configured so that after a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, another serious abnormality is not detected.

In this example, the abnormality notification begins at timing tx, but the abnormality notification does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume game progress.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during a normal state (a state other than the stalled state), the power is cut off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on pattern 2 or 3, which clears the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, is selected as the power-on pattern. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state started and after the stopped state started" and the "restriction on playing during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized). In this example, since the game is not stopped when the power is turned off at timing t2, when the power is turned on again at the subsequent timing t3, the game is controlled to the normal state (not stopped state) regardless of whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected. In other words, it is possible to resume the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (not stopped state) is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute the clear notification 2 at the timing t3. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a combination of predetermined decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays the message "Limits cleared" as the clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, since the limit state was not reached when the power was turned off, the clear notification 2 does not need to notify that the limit state has been cleared, and may instead notify that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing.

In addition, for lamps A and B, at timing t3, the red LED lights up or flashes as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed and the limit have been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is terminated. The clear notification 2 displayed on the performance display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such a clear notification 2 may be made to be erased by administrator operation. In this way, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by administrator operation, the clear notification 2 will remain displayed, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, the case where the power is turned on again at the time t3', but the power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected as the power-on pattern, which clears the amount of balls dispensed but maintains the stopped state. When the power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state started or after the stopped state started" is cleared (initialized), while the "restriction on playing during the stopped state" is maintained. In this example, since the game is not in a stopped state when the power is turned off at the time t2, when the power is turned on again at the time t3, it is controlled to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) regardless of whether the power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected or not. In other words, it is possible to resume the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute clear notification 1 at timing t3'. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "Amount of balls dispensed has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 1 may notify that the amount of dispensed balls has been maintained when the amount of dispensed balls was in a stopped state when the power was cut off, or may notify not only that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared, but also the amount of dispensed balls at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B are configured to turn on or blink green LEDs as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1, saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared," to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be started before clear notification 1 is terminated.

Figure 133 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a play stop state.

First, the system is controlled to a stalled state before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected. The behavior of the stalled state is as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stalled state. When a severe abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes the operation to be performed when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in all other respects, such as disabling game progress, there is no change from the situation before timing tx when no severe abnormality was detected, and the stalled state behavior is maintained.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 executes the operation at the time of error occurrence at the timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the message "Play limit reached" as current status display B to indicate that the game has already entered a stop state and play has been restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value).

As described above, if a serious abnormality is detected during a stopped state, the performance display device 1600 displays not only error display B but also current status display B, indicating that the game has already entered a stopped state and play is restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). In this case, if the power is turned back on, the detection of the serious abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned back on with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the restrictions on play during the stopped state are maintained, while when the power is turned back on with power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on play during the stopped state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine which power-on pattern to use to turn the power back on after understanding that the game has already entered a stopped state and play is restricted.

In addition, in this example, only the performance display device 1600 is used to execute the abnormality notification, and components other than the performance display device 1600 are prioritized to execute operations when progress is impossible. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has already transitioned to a play-stop state and play is restricted, even if a serious abnormality is detected during a play-stop state.

In addition, the external terminal board is in a forced output state where a security signal is forcibly output from the time t1 when the state transitions to the stopped state, but if a serious abnormality is detected at time tx, the security signal being output is terminated and no new security signal is output, but rather the security signal being output continues to be output. This prevents the hall from mistakenly thinking that the stopped state has ended.

In this example, the abnormality notification begins at timing tx, but the abnormality notification does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume game progress.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the stopped state, the power is cut off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned back on at timing t3, and the power-on pattern 2 or 3, which clears the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state, is selected as the power-on pattern. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stalled state began and after the stalled state began" and the "game limit during the stalled state" are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the "game limit during the stalled state" is cleared to control the game to the normal state (a state where the game is not stalled). In other words, it is possible to resume the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (a state where the game is not stalled) is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute the clear notification 2 at timing t3. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a combination of predetermined decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays a message "Limits cleared" as the clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 2 does not need to notify that the limit state has been cleared when the limit state was not reached when the power was turned off, and may notify that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing.

In addition, for lamps A and B, at timing t3, the red LED lights up or flashes as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed and the limit have been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, the clear notification 2 displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be configured to continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Also, such a clear notification 2 may be made to be erased by administrator operation. In this way, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by administrator operation, the clear notification 2 will remain displayed, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as power-on patterns that clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stopped state. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began or after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the behavior of the stopped state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on play during the stopped state." In other words, it is not possible to resume play (main play) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stopped state is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute clear notification 1 at timing t3'. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "Amount of balls dispensed has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 1 may notify that the amount of dispensed balls has been maintained when the amount of dispensed balls was in a stopped state when the power was cut off, or may notify not only that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared, but also the amount of dispensed balls at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B are configured to turn on or blink green LEDs as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1, saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared," to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to their operation when progress is impossible. However, the operation when progress is impossible may be started before the end of the clear notification 1.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Clearing the RAM will return to normal" as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state. This allows the hall manager to understand that the stalled state cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on.

When the speaker executes an action when progress is impossible, it outputs a sound saying "Play is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" as a progress impossible notification (sound for progress impossible). However, as mentioned above, such a sound for progress impossible may end when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of output. However, even if the output of the sound for progress impossible has ended during a stalled state, the sound for progress impossible may be output again when the power is turned back on at timing t3'. In such a case, the output of the sound for progress impossible will end when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned back on, the sound for progress impossible is output again, making it easy to understand that the stalled state has not been cleared and play is restricted.

In this example, if power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls is cleared but the stop state is maintained, so the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed after the clear notification 1 is ended, and the clear notification 1 is executed in priority to the progress failure notification and the clear method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1 and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed alternately. In addition, when the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification may be executed on the remaining components, or the same components may be used, with the clear notification 1 executed in some areas and the progress failure notification and the clear method notification executed in the remaining areas. In addition, even when the progress failure notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may be terminated after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed.

(When a stop-preparation state is set: Notification regarding the amount of balls dispensed when an abnormality is detected during the stop-preparation state)
In the above, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 puts out the balls in a stop state and restricts the game, but when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game (win game), the game may be configured to not put out the balls in a stop state until the jackpot game ends, but to transition to a stop state by ending the jackpot game. For example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value in a round in the middle of a jackpot game, the game is not immediately put out, but is transitioned to a stop state by ending the last round in the jackpot game. In other words, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, it is possible to acquire balls that exceed the specific value. In this way, by not ending the jackpot game when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the player's dissatisfaction can be reduced.

In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a ready-to-stop state, and although it is confirmed that the game will transition to the jackpot state, the game is set to continue with the jackpot game. And, like the jackpot state, the game is configured so that the player can choose whether to maintain or clear the ready-to-stop state when the power is turned back on after being shut off.

Specifically, in the limit clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, the "limits on playing during the stop state" are cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, but the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "limits on playing during the stop state" are maintained, but the stop preparation state is also maintained. In other words, as with the stop state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned on again after a power cut. For example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a stop preparation state occurs, if you want to clear the stop preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation to clear the stop preparation state after the power is turned off, and the jackpot game that was being executed will be cleared due to such a power-on operation. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the ready-to-stop state, you can perform the power-on operation to maintain the ready-to-stop state after the power is cut off, and this will restart the jackpot game that was in progress. Note that if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed, and the game does not start, so the ready-to-stop state is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

Figure 134 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, at time t1 during a jackpot game, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, and when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, the stop flag is turned ON and the game transitions to a stop preparation state. Note that before time t1 when the game transitions to the stop preparation state, the game is controlled to the normal state (a state that is not in a stop state) and the jackpot game is being played. The behavior of the normal state (a state that is not in a stop state) is as described above.

In addition, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game being played continues. In addition, in the stop preparation state, after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute a standby notification to inform the outside that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a display (normal display) related to the jackpot game being played, and also displays a message as a standby display saying "The jackpot has ended and today is over" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. In this way, in the stop preparation state, a notice is given in advance that the game will transition to the stop state when the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in terms of aspects other than the execution of the standby notification, such as the progress of the jackpot game, there is no change from the situation before timing t1, and the behavior is maintained in the normal state (a state in which the game is not at a stop).

In this example, the standby notification is performed using only the performance display device 1600, and the components other than the performance display device 1600 are given priority for normal operation. This makes it easy to grasp information about the jackpot game that is currently being played when the game is in the preparation state for the end of the game.

Next, we will explain what happens when a minor abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop preparation state. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board execute the operation required when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in terms of points other than the execution of the abnormality notification, such as the progress of the jackpot game, there is no change from the situation before timing tx when no minor abnormality was detected, and normal behavior (a state in which the game is not stopped) is maintained.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operation performed when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Door open error" as error display A, and also displays the message "The jackpot is over, it's over for today" as current status display C, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the performance display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display C, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. If the power is turned off at this time, the minor abnormality detection will be resolved, but while the stop preparation state will be maintained when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the stop preparation state will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether it is acceptable to turn the power back on using any power-on pattern after understanding that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and transitioned to the stop preparation state.

During the preparation state for stopping, the performance display device 1600 displays a message as a standby display saying "The jackpot is over, it's over for today" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. However, if a minor abnormality is detected during this preparation state for stopping, the performance display device 1600 may display the same data as the standby display as the current status display C. Also, when the standby display is used to display the current status display C, the current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

In this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the preparation state for stopping, or if a serious abnormality occurs as described below, current status display C is executed, but current status display C will not end even if the amount of balls dispensed changes afterwards. Also, current status display C can be erased, for example, when a predetermined time has passed until error display A ends, or by administrator operation to resolve the abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent current status display C from being displayed more than necessary.

In this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the preparation state for the end of the game, or if a serious abnormality occurs as described below, the current status display C is executed by the performance display device 1600. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type of gaming machine (a type of gaming machine that pays out real prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the current status display C is not executed by the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display C from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the ready-to-stop state, or if a severe abnormality occurs, as described below, the performance display device 1600 executes the current status display C. However, if a RAM error occurs, for example, a severe abnormality is assumed to have occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes the current status display C. However, if a RAM error occurs, the memory relating to the ready-to-stop state itself may be abnormal, so the performance display device 1600 may not execute the current status display C.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B are configured to emit an error light by lighting or blinking a single color LED, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "Door open error" as an error sound.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a minor abnormality has occurred.

In this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board are returned to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has elapsed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, at the time tz, it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, but after the jackpot game state ends, the state transitions to a "stop game state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "game stop" and "firing stop." The behavior of the stop game state is as described above.

After the game has entered the stopped state, the power is turned off at time t2, and then turned back on at time t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table. Here, the power is turned back on at time t3, and power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on pattern, and the power is turned back on at time t3', and power-on patterns 1 and 4, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stopped state, are selected as the power-on pattern. The behavior of these patterns is as described in FIG. 131.

Figure 135 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, the machine is controlled to enter a stop-play preparation state, and a jackpot game is being played. The behavior of the stop-play preparation state is as described above.

Here, we will explain the case where a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop preparation state. If a serious abnormality is detected, it is made impossible to launch game balls, and it is made impossible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, if a serious abnormality occurs, the jackpot game being executed is stopped.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to inform the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, movable body, and external terminal board perform the operation required in the event of an error as an abnormality notification.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operation performed when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the message "The jackpot is over, today is over" as current status display C to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value.

As described above, if a serious abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the performance display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display C, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. If the power is turned off at this time, the severe abnormality detection will be resolved, but while the stop preparation state will be maintained when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the stop preparation state will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether it is acceptable to turn the power back on using any power-on pattern after understanding that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and transitioned to the stop preparation state.

During the preparation state for stopping, the performance display device 1600 displays a message as a standby display saying "The jackpot is over, it's over for today" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. However, if a serious abnormality is detected during this preparation state for stopping, the performance display device 1600 may display the same data as the standby display as the current status display C. Also, when the standby display is used to display the current status display C, the current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B are configured to light up or blink in a single color as an error light.

Lamp C also includes a function display unit 1400, which includes a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special symbol indicator, a second special hold number indicator, and a round indicator, and all of these LEDs are set to light up. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to anomaly notification, and when a serious anomaly is detected, the LED dedicated to anomaly notification may be set to light up and the other LEDs may be set to off.

The speaker also outputs an error sound saying, "A magnetic abnormality has occurred."

In addition, the movable body is in an inoperable state at the time tx, so that it will not operate. For example, if the movable body is in operation at the time tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped midway through its operation. However, as another example, a movable body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after the time tx, and then stopped. In this way, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 at the time tx, the movable body will return to its initial position after the time tx, making it difficult to miss the error display B or current status display C being executed by the performance display device 1600.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a serious abnormality has occurred.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected at the time tx, it is made impossible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, so that this is reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls for balls that have entered the winning hole before the time tx, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player. This allows the player to obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, if a ball is detected entering the winning hole after a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at the time tx, the balls entering the winning hole may be configured not to be detected, and similarly, even if a ball enters the winning hole, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and are not added to the number of balls held by the player.

In this example, the abnormality notification begins at timing tx, but the abnormality notification does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn the power back on to resume game progress.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the cutoff preparation state, the power is cut off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the power-on pattern 2 or 3, which clears the amount of balls dispensed and the stoppage state, is selected as the power-on pattern. When the power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), so information about the jackpot game that was in progress is cleared. In addition, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stoppage state began or after the stoppage state began" and the "game limit during the stoppage state" are cleared (initialized), and the stoppage preparation state is also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether the power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the stoppage preparation state is cleared to control the game to the normal state (a state that is not in the stoppage state). In other words, it is possible to resume the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. However, the jackpot game that was in progress will not be resumed. The behavior of the normal state (a state that is not in the stoppage state) is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute the clear notification 2 at the timing t3. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays a combination of predetermined decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays a message "Limit cleared" as the clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit preparation state have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit preparation state have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 2 does not need to notify that the limit preparation state has been cleared when the limit preparation state is not in effect when the power is turned off, and it may be possible to notify that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing. In addition, the clear notification 2 executes a common notification when the limit state is cleared and when the limit preparation state is cleared, but it may be possible to execute a different notification.

In addition, for lamps A and B, at timing t3, the red LED lights up or flashes as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed and the preparation state for limiting the number of balls to be dispensed have been cleared.

In this example, the clear notification 2 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is terminated. The clear notification 2 displayed on the performance display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such a clear notification 2 may be made to be erased by administrator operation. In this way, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by administrator operation, the clear notification 2 will remain displayed, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned on again at timing t3', and power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, which clears the amount of balls dispensed but maintains the stopped state. When power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, so information about the jackpot game that was in progress is maintained. In addition, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stopped state began and after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are maintained, and the stop preparation state is also maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the stop preparation state is maintained. In other words, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game that was in progress is resumed. The behavior of the stop preparation state is as described above.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute clear notification 1 at timing t3'. For example, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Amount of balls dispensed has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, the clear notification 1 may notify that the amount of balls dispensed has been maintained when the amount of balls dispensed was at a stop when the power was cut off, or may notify not only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared, but also the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B are configured to turn on or blink green LEDs as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1, saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared," to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In this example, clear notification 1 is started at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be started before clear notification 1 is terminated.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600 not only displays a display (normal display) related to the resumed jackpot game, but also displays a message as a standby display saying "The jackpot is over, so today is over" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. In addition, the performance display device 1600 displays a message as a clearing method display saying "Clear the RAM to return to normal state" to show the hall manager how to clear the stop preparation state. This allows the hall manager to understand that the stop preparation state cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on. However, the clearing method notification may be executed after waiting for the state to transition from the stop preparation state to the stop state.

In this example, if power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on, after clear notification 1 ends, the performance display device 1600 displays the normal display (display related to the resumed jackpot game) or the standby display, but the normal display and standby display may be executed in parallel with clear notification 1. This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing out on winning balls when the jackpot game is resumed.

In this example, in order to clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the ready state for the ball to be capped, the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification are executed after the clearing notification 1 is ended, and the clearing notification 1 is executed in priority to the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification may be executed in parallel with the clearing notification 1, or the clearing notification 1 and the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification may be executed by switching between them alternately. In addition, when the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clearing notification 1, the clearing notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining components, or the clearing notification 1 may be executed on some areas of the same components and the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining areas. In addition, even when the waiting display notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clearing notification 1, the clearing notification 1 may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. In addition, the clearing method notification may also be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed.

Figure 136 is a specific example of a presentation when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or a dead-end state. In this example, the "specific value" described above is set to 100,000, and the "restriction pattern" described above is set to restriction pattern 3. In other words, if restriction pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000 balls), the game will enter a dead-end state accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop."

As shown in FIG. 136(A), the performance display device 1600 executes a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable display of the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 but the variable display of the special symbol is pending.

As shown in FIG. 136(B), when the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality during normal operation, the display of the decorative pattern continues to change, but in the central area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Door open error. Please call an attendant" is displayed as an error display A, indicating that the main frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "+42,000 balls remaining until game limit" is displayed as a current status display A, indicating the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed until the game is limited (the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value). These error display A and current status display A are displayed in a higher layer than the information display related to the game, such as the decorative pattern. In addition, the current status display A is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display related to the game and the error display A. As a result, when a minor abnormality occurs, the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed until the game is limited can be reliably grasped.

As shown in FIG. 136 (C), when a specified error termination condition is met, such as the closing of the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 erases the error display A and the current status display A.

As shown in FIG. 136(D), when the amount of balls dispensed approaches a specific value, for example when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value becomes "+500 balls", the upper area of the performance display device 1600 displays a pre-notification display of "+500 balls remaining until game limit", indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, as an advance notification operation. Note that the advance notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information related to the game, such as decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 136(E), when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the state transitions to a stop state and game play is restricted, but the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Play Restriction" is displayed, along with messages such as "Play has been restricted because the daily ball dispense limit of 100,000 balls has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is valid." Note that the settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Play Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a certain value and that restrictions on play have been imposed, and that restrictions on play cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. In addition, the player can know that the number of balls held by the player can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

In the above, before the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the hold display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is executed so that all of the information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may be made unrecognizable, while the other information may be made recognizable. For example, the advance notice display may be made unrecognizable because it is information regarding whether or not to implement a game restriction, while the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, and the hold display may be made recognizable. This makes it possible to know under what circumstances the amount of dispensed balls reached a specific value even after the amount of dispensed balls has reached the specific value.

As shown in FIG. 136(F), when the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality during the stop state, the display of the decorative pattern continues to change, but in the central area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Door open error. Please call an attendant" is displayed as an error display A, indicating that the main frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Play limit reached" is displayed in a specific display area, indicating that the game has already entered a stop state and play is limited (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). This specific display area is set as a part of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and is also used for the advance notice display and current status display A described above, and is a fixed area that is unchanged under any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it. The error display A and current status display B are configured to be displayed in a layer higher (toward the front) than layers that display other presentation images such as image displays corresponding to the play-stop state, and in this example, the error display A and current status display B are displayed as the topmost layer. The current status display B is also displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the play-stop state or the error display A. This allows the player to know with certainty that play is being restricted when a minor abnormality occurs.

As shown in FIG. 136 (G), when a specified error termination condition is met, such as the closing of the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 erases the error display A and the current status display B.

In this example, in order for the specified clear condition to end the stalled state to be met, it is necessary to re-power the machine in a specified power-on pattern after the power is cut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state, and where power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state.

First, after the transition to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after being cut off, if power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, which clears the game state at the time of the power-off and clears the amount of balls and the stop state, the stop state is cleared and the game restriction as the stop state is released. In addition, information about the remaining variable display when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state and information about reserved items are held after transition to the stop state and at the time of power-off, but when the power is turned on again after being cut off, information about the remaining variable display when interrupted and information about reserved items are cleared, so that the game starts in a low probability state with no reserved items. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 136 (H-1), the performance display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reserved display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restrictions cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls and the stop state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the display of information about the game, such as decorative patterns, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information about the game. This allows you to know with certainty that the number of balls dispensed and the limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after the game has been stopped, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of the power-off, clear the amount of balls put out, but maintain the stopped state, the game restriction for the stopped state is not lifted. For this reason, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" as a clear notification 1, indicating that the amount of balls put out has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 136 (H-2) again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Clear the RAM to return to normal state" is displayed as a clearing method display, indicating a method for clearing the stopped state for the hall manager. This clearing method display is displayed in a higher layer than the image display corresponding to the stopped state, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the stopped state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably understand that the power needs to be turned on again with RAM clearing to release the game restriction.

Figure 137 is a specific example of a presentation that occurs when a severe abnormality occurs during a normal state or a dead end state. In this example, 100,000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value," and limit pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "limit pattern." In other words, if limit pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000 balls), the game will enter a dead end state accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop."

First, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 137(A), the performance display device 1600 executes a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable display of the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that a game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 but the variable display of the special symbol is pending.

As shown in FIG. 137(B), when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during normal operation, an error state occurs in which the display of the decorative symbols stops and the game cannot proceed, but the performance display device 1600 displays a message "magnetic abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as error display B, along with messages "Please call an attendant" and "Restarting the power will restore and reset the restrictions." When magnetism is detected, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopped decorative symbols, the stopped second decorative symbols, and the hold display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "magnetic abnormality" is displayed after magnetism is detected, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the user to know that an error state has occurred by detecting magnetism. Also, the user can know that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restrictions on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "+42,000 balls remaining until play is limited" is displayed as current status display A, indicating the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted (the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value). These error display B and current status display A are displayed in a higher layer than the display of information related to play, such as decorative patterns. In addition, current status display A is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with error display B (message). This makes it possible to reliably know the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted at the time a serious abnormality is detected.

In this example, in order for the specified clearing conditions to be met in order to end the error state related to the severe abnormality, it is necessary to turn the power back on after it has been cut off. Here, using the limit clearing pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state, are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, and where power-on patterns 1 and 4, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the limit state, are selected.

First, when the power supply is turned on again after an error state occurs, if the power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, which clears the game state at the time of the power supply being turned off and clears the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state, the error state is cleared and the game can be started. In addition, information on the remaining variable display when the game was interrupted at the time of the error state and information on the reserve are retained after the error state occurs or when the power supply is turned off, but when the power supply is turned on again after the power supply is turned off, the information on the remaining variable display when the game was interrupted and information on the reserve are cleared, so that the game starts in a low probability state with no reserves. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 137 (C-1), the performance display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reserve display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Limits cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, which indicates that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer above the display of information on the game, such as decorative patterns, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information on the game. However, in this example, since the stalled state was not reached at the time the error state occurred, it is not necessary to display as clear notification 2 that the stalled state has been cleared, and it is also possible to display as clear notification 2 that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared or the amount of dispensed balls at the time of clearing.

Similarly, when the power is turned on again after an error state occurs, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off, clear the amount of balls put out, but maintain the stop state, the error state is cleared and the game can be started. However, information about the remaining variable display when the error state occurs and information about the reserved state are retained after the error state occurs or when the power is turned off, but even when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, information about the remaining variable display when the interruption occurs and information about the reserved state are retained, so that the game is resumed in a state where there is a reserved state and the game is in the middle of the previous variation. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 137 (C-2), the performance display device 1600 is configured to resume the display of the decorative pattern and the display of the second decorative pattern. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 1, indicating that the amount of balls put out has been cleared. This clear notification 1 is displayed in a higher layer than the display of information about the game, such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information about the game. This allows the player to know for sure that the number of balls dispensed has been cleared when the power is turned back on. In this example, the display of the decorative pattern changes and the display of the second decorative pattern changes are resumed before the end of the clear notification 1, but the display of the decorative pattern changes and the second decorative pattern changes may be resumed after the end of the clear notification 1.

Next, a case where a serious abnormality occurs during the stop state will be described. As shown in FIG. 137 (A'), when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the state transitions to a stop state and restrictions on play are imposed, and the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. The image corresponding to the stop state is a message "Play Restriction", along with messages such as "Play is restricted because the daily ball dispense limit of 100,000 balls has been reached", "Please call an attendant", and "The settlement button is valid". The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Play Restriction" is displayed after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen.

As shown in FIG. 137(B'), when magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality during a game-stopping state, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as error display B, along with messages "Please call an attendant" and "Restarting the power will restore and reset the restrictions." When magnetism is detected, the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stopping state, but such an image is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Magnetic abnormality" is displayed after magnetism is detected, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the user to know that an error state has occurred when magnetism has been detected. It also allows the user to know that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned back on, and that the restrictions on play will be lifted when the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a message "Play limit reached" is displayed in a specific display area as a current status display B, which indicates that the game has already transitioned to a stop state and play is being restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). This specific display area is set as a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and is a display area that is also used for the above-mentioned advance notice display and current status display A, and is a fixed area that is not changed in any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it. These error display B and current status display B are configured to be displayed in a layer higher (front side) than the layer that displays other effect images such as image displays corresponding to the stop state, and in this example, the error display B and current status display B are displayed as the top layer. Also, the current status display B is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). This makes it possible to reliably understand that play is being restricted at the time when a serious abnormality occurs.

In this example, in order for the specified clearing conditions to be met in order to end the error state related to the severe abnormality, it is necessary to turn the power back on after it has been cut off. Here, using the limit clearing pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state, are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, and where power-on patterns 1 and 4, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the limit state, are selected.

First, when an error occurs during a stoppage state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, which clear the game state at the time of the power-off and clear the amount of balls and the stoppage state, the error state is cleared and the stoppage state is cleared, and the game restriction as the stoppage state is released, making it possible to start playing. In addition, information on the remaining variable display when interrupted at the time of transition to the stoppage state and information on the reserve are held after transition to the stoppage state and at the time of power-off, but when the power is turned on again after being turned off, information on the remaining variable display when interrupted and information on the reserve are cleared, so that the game starts in a low probability state with no reserves. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 137 (C'-1), the performance display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reserve display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restrictions cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls and the stoppage state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer above the display of decorative symbols and other game-related information, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of game-related information. This allows the user to know with certainty that the number of balls dispensed and the limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, when an error occurs during the stoppage state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of the power-off, clear the amount of balls put out, but maintain the stoppage state, the error state is cleared, but the game restriction as the stoppage state is not lifted. For this reason, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" as a clear notification 1, indicating that the amount of balls put out has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 137 (C'-2) again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Resetting the RAM will return to normal" is displayed as a clearing method display, indicating a method for clearing the stoppage state for the hall manager. This clearing method display is displayed in a layer higher than the image display corresponding to the stoppage state, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the stoppage state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to reliably understand that the power needs to be turned on again with RAM clear in order to release the game restriction.

Figure 138 is a specific example of a presentation in the case where a minor or serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. In this example, the amount of balls released reaches a specific value when a game ball enters the big prize opening during a big win game, and the game transitions to the stop preparation state, and transitions to the stop state after the big win game ends. In addition, this example is an example when 100,000 is set as the above-mentioned "specific value" and restriction pattern 3 is selected as the above-mentioned "restriction pattern". In other words, if restriction pattern 3 is set, the game will be stopped with "play stop" and "firing stop" when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value (100,000 shots). In addition, in this example, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, 10 rounds of big win game that opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 and the role winning opening 2006 will be given.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), the performance display device 1600 executes a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decoration symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Here, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the reception of a game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "777" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and when the lottery result of the special symbol being a hit causes "◯" to be displayed as the stopping symbol of the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is waiting to be displayed. In addition, in the lower right area of the performance display device 1600, a "consecutive win mode" message is displayed indicating that the "consecutive win mode" is in effect, and a "right hit" arrow is displayed to instruct the player to aim for the game ball to enter the big win hole 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during a big win game.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed approaches a specific value, for example when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value becomes "+1400 balls", the upper area of the performance display device 1600 displays a pre-notification display of "+1400 balls remaining until the game limit", indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, as a pre-notification operation. Note that the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game being played.

As shown in FIG. 138(B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for the V!" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600, and the large prize winning hole 2005 and the accessory prize winning hole 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is informed that they should aim for the game ball to enter the first V prize winning hole 2007 and the second V prize winning hole 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game (when transitioning to a state of preparation for stopping), a pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, "8R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19,900 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" was displayed, the standby display shown in FIG. 138(D) is displayed.

In this example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice displayed on the performance display device 1600, but the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed at the time when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, which will cause the amount of balls dispensed to reach a specific value, but are displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed after the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. This prevents information regarding whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value from being overlooked, and ensures that the player is aware of the reason why the stop state will begin afterwards.

In the above, the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but rather continue to be displayed until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. However, it is also possible to end the display and display a standby display when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In this way, the machine will transition to a ready-to-stop state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but at the same time, by displaying a standby display, it is possible to immediately know that the machine has transitioned to a ready-to-stop state.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the machine will transition to a state where it is ready to stop playing, but the jackpot game that is currently in progress will continue, so the "right hit" arrow that encourages the player to continue firing the game balls will continue to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(D), after the game has transitioned to the ready-to-play state, a standby display is displayed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600. Specifically, the standby display displays a message saying "The jackpot has ended and today is over," indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. This allows the player in the ready-to-play state to know that the game will transition to the ready-to-play state when the jackpot game ends and that the game will be restricted. The standby display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information about the jackpot game currently being played. This allows the player to know that the game has transitioned to the ready-to-play state and information about the jackpot game currently being played. Here, "9R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19,915 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of winning balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(E), if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality during the stop-play preparation state, the jackpot game continues, but in the central area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Door open error. Please call an attendant" is displayed as an error display A, indicating that the main frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, the content of the standby display is continued as a current status display C, and a message "The jackpot has ended and today is over" is displayed, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. These error display A and current status display C are displayed in a layer higher than the information display regarding the jackpot game. In addition, the current status display C is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game and the error display A (message). As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and the game is in a stop-play preparation state at the time when a minor abnormality occurs.

As shown in FIG. 138(F), when a certain error termination condition is met, such as the closing of the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 erases the error display A, but the current status display C continues to be displayed as a standby display. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current round number, and "20,020 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of winning balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(G), at the end of a jackpot game, an ending display is executed to accompany the end of the jackpot game, and the message "Winning game over! Good job! Download the special bonus!" is displayed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, a code that can be read by a camera is displayed in the lower right area of the performance display area 1600, and a special bonus can be downloaded by reading the code. This special bonus can be obtained only when the amount of balls dispensed during the jackpot game reaches a specific value, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction with the game being restricted by entering a deadlock state. At the end of a jackpot game, a standby display is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(H), after the end of the jackpot game, the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are implemented, and the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. The image corresponding to the stop state displays a message "Game Restriction" along with messages such as "The daily ball limit of 100,000 balls has been reached, so play is restricted.", "Please call an attendant.", and "The settlement button is valid." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Game Restriction," it does not display the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game (so that it cannot be seen), and displays the message on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls released has reached a specific value and that game restrictions are being implemented, and that the game restrictions cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. In addition, it allows the player to know that the number of balls the player has can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

However, in the performance display device 1600, the code that was displayed during the ending display following the end of a jackpot game continues to be displayed even after the image corresponding to the end state is displayed. Also, the code that was displayed during the ending display following the end of a jackpot game is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image (message) corresponding to the end state. This allows the code to be read without rushing, even after the game has transitioned to the end state, and prevents the player from missing out on downloading the special bonus.

Next, a case where a serious abnormality occurs during the preparation for the game to stop will be described. As shown in FIG. 138 (E'), if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality during the preparation for the game to stop, an error state occurs in which the jackpot game being played is stopped and the game cannot proceed. However, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "magnetic abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as error display B, along with messages "Please call an attendant" and "Recovery and restrictions will be initialized when the power is turned back on." Also, when magnetism is detected, the performance display device 1600 displays information about the jackpot game, but such information about the jackpot game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "magnetic abnormality" is displayed after the magnetism is detected, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the user to know that an error state has occurred by detecting magnetism. Also, the user can know that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned back on, and that the restrictions on the game will be lifted when the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, the current status display C continues the standby display content and displays a message saying "The jackpot is over, it's over for today", indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. The error display B and current status display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. In addition, the current status display C is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the error display B (message). This allows the player to know with certainty that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and is ready to stop playing when a serious abnormality occurs.

In this example, in order for the specified clear condition to be met for the error state relating to the severe abnormality to end, it is necessary to turn the power back on after it has been cut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed and the limit state, are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, and where power-on patterns 1 and 4, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the limit state, are selected.

First, when an error state occurs during the stop preparation state, when the power is turned on again after being turned off, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, which clear the game state at the time of the power off and clear the amount of balls and the stop state, the error state is cleared and it becomes possible to start playing, but the stop preparation state is also cleared, so that the restriction on the game as the stop state that was planned after the end of the stop preparation state is not executed. In addition, information on the remaining jackpot game when interrupted at the time of the error state and information on the reserve are held after the error state occurs or when the power is turned off, but when the power is turned on again after being turned off, information on the remaining jackpot game when interrupted and information on the reserve are cleared, so that the game starts in a low probability state with no reserve. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 138 (F'-1), the performance display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reserve display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a message "Restrictions cleared" is displayed as a clear notification 2, indicating that the amount of balls and the stop preparation state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a layer above the display of decorative patterns and other game-related information, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of game-related information. This allows the user to know with certainty that the number of balls dispensed and the preparation state for the limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected after an error occurs during the stop preparation state, and when the power is turned on again after a power cut, the game state at the time of the power cut is maintained, the amount of balls put out is cleared, but the stop preparation state is maintained, so that the error state is cleared and it becomes possible to start playing, but the stop preparation state is not cleared. In addition, information about the remaining jackpot game when the error state occurs and information about the reserved game are retained after the error state occurs and when the power is turned off, but even when the power is turned on again after a power cut, the information about the remaining jackpot game when the interruption occurs and information about the reserved game are retained, so that the interrupted jackpot game can be resumed. For this reason, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of balls put out has been cleared" as a clear notification 1, indicating that the amount of balls put out has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 138 (F'-2) again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, not only is a standby display showing that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value, but also a clearing method display showing the hall manager a message saying "Clear the RAM and it will return to normal state", showing how to clear the stop preparation state. This clearing method display is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game. This allows the user to know for sure that when the power is turned back on, it is necessary to turn the power back on with RAM clearing in order to clear the stop preparation state.

(Another example of a limit counter 1)
In the above, the "limit counter" is configured to set 0 as an initial value when the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on, and is subtracted by the launch of the game ball B and is added by the payout of the prize ball. Then, when only the number of shots increases from the point when the limit counter is 0, it counts in the negative direction from 0. In contrast, in the alternative example 1, the "limit counter" is configured to set a non-zero specified value (for example, 100,000) as an initial value when the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on. In such a case, the limit counter starts from an initial value of 100,000 when the power is turned on, and is subtracted by the launch of the game ball B and is added by the payout of the prize ball.

Specifically, the amount of balls dispensed A is calculated as the difference between the value at which the cap counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met, starting from the initial value of 100,000, and the value at which the cap counter reaches its lowest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met.

The amount of balls dispensed B is calculated as the difference between the initial value of 100,000 and the value at the point when the counter for limiting the balls reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met, with the counter for limiting the balls starting from the initial value of 100,000. Note that in the variant 1, the maximum value of the difference is stored as the amount of balls dispensed A and B, and the maximum value of the difference is newly calculated, thereby updating the amount of balls dispensed A and B stored and stored, which is the same as when the initial value is 0.

In Alternative Example 1, when the amount of balls dispensed (amount of balls dispensed A, B) reaches a specific value, a limit is imposed on the game, but if, for example, 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, the limit counter starts from the initial value of 100,000, and when the limit counter is increased by +100,000 for the specific value and reaches 200,000, it is determined that amount of balls dispensed B has reached the specific value.

In addition, in the first example, the "limit counter" is configured not only to start from the initial value of 100,000, but also to have 0 as the minimum value. In other words, even if the number of shots increases after the limit counter reaches 0, it is not counted in the negative direction from 0, but is configured to maintain the 0 state. As a result, even if the number of shots increases after the limit counter reaches 0, the amount of balls B is determined to have reached a specific value when the limit counter reaches 200,000 from the point of 0, so the amount of balls B reaches a specific value earlier than when counting in the negative direction from 0. In other words, by making it possible to generate a limit state that restricts play at an early stage, it is possible to prevent a large amount of balls from being awarded to a fraudulent player due to fraudulent behavior, or a large amount of balls from being awarded to a legitimate player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing.

(Another example of a limit counter 2)
In another example 2, the "limit counter" is configured to set 0 as the initial value and set 0 as the minimum value when the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started or after the limit state was started" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on. In such a case, the limit counter starts from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, is decremented by each shot of game ball B, and is incremented by each payout of prize balls, but once the limit counter reaches 0, even if the number of shots alone increases, it is not counted down from 0, and is configured to maintain the 0 state.

In addition, in the second example, the amount of balls dispensed C is calculated from the limiting counter. The amount of balls dispensed C is calculated starting from the initial value 0 of the limiting counter, and is calculated as the difference between the initial value 0 and the value at the point when the limiting counter reaches its highest value within the period until a specified clear condition is met. In the second example, the maximum value of the difference is stored as the amount of balls dispensed C, and the stored amount of balls dispensed C is updated by calculating a new maximum value of the difference, which is the same as when the minimum value = 0 is not set. Then, when the amount of balls dispensed C reaches a specific value, the limiting state is set and game play is restricted.

In addition, in the second example, when the amount of balls dispensed C reaches a specific value, a limit is imposed on the game, but if, for example, 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, the limit counter starts from the initial value of 0, and when the limit counter reaches 100,000 by adding +100,000 for the specific value, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed C has reached the specific value.

In addition, in the second example, the "limit counter" is configured not only to start from the initial value of 0, but also to have 0 as the minimum value. However, even if the number of shots increases after the limit counter reaches 0, the amount of balls C is determined to have reached the specific value when the limit counter reaches 100,000 from the point of 0, so the amount of balls C reaches the specific value sooner than when counting in the negative direction from 0. In other words, by making it possible to generate a limit state that restricts play at an early stage, it is possible to prevent a large amount of balls from being awarded to a fraudulent player due to fraudulent behavior, or a large amount of balls from being awarded to a legitimate player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing.

The "limit counter" is decremented by the launch of game ball B and incremented by the payout of prize balls, but the initial value may be set to a value greater than the specific value that limits play by setting the limit state, and incremented by the launch of game ball B and decremented by the payout of prize balls. In such a case, for example, if 100,000 shots is selected as the specific value, the limit counter starts from the initial value of 100,000, subtracts +100,000 for the specific value, and when the limit counter reaches 0, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed has reached the specific value. In addition, when applied to Alternative Example 2, for example, the limit counter starts from the initial value of 100,000 when the power is turned on, increments by the launch of game ball B and decrements by the payout of prize balls, but even if the number of shots increases from the point when the limit counter reaches 100,000, it does not count in the positive direction from 100,000, but maintains the state of 100,000.

(Regarding the progress of advance notice display)
In this example, the "counter for limiting the number of balls" is configured to be set to 0 as an initial value when the "amount of balls dispensed before the limiting state is started or after the limiting state is started" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on, and is subtracted by the launch of the game ball B and is added by the payout of the prize ball. Also, 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, and when the counter for limiting the number of balls reaches 100,000, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed has reached the specific value, and the game is restricted by the limiting state. Also, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, after the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value becomes a predetermined value (in this example, the state where the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value is 5,000 balls, that is, the state where the amount of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 balls), a pre-notification display (in this example, "remaining + xx balls until the game limit") is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as an operation at the time of pre-notification until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. Also, when the pre-notification display is performed, the LED of the lamp B flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light emission.

Specifically, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side and the game is restricted, the main control board 1310 monitors the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, and when a game ball enters a winning hole such as the large winning hole 2005 where the remaining number of balls is "+5000 balls", the advance flag is turned ON, and the advance flag ON information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, when the advance flag ON information is received, the performance display device 1600 starts to display an advance notice (in this example, "+xx balls remaining until the game limit") and continues to execute until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. The amount of balls dispensed is calculated based on a counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed, which is the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, the more balls fired, the fewer the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the more balls are dispensed, the fewer the number of balls remaining. Conversely, the more balls are paid out, the more the amount of balls dispensed, and the fewer the number of balls remaining.

When the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+5000 balls", the performance display device 1600 starts to display a pre-notification message; however, if the amount of balls dispensed subsequently decreases and the number of remaining balls increases, causing the number of remaining balls to exceed "+5000 balls" and the pre-notification message to end, or if the amount of balls dispensed increases again and the number of remaining balls decreases, causing the number of remaining balls to reach "+5000 balls" and the pre-notification message to start, the pre-notification flag will be frequently switched on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information for the pre-notification flag will be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times. Also, if the pre-notification message is sometimes displayed and sometimes not displayed, it becomes difficult to grasp the game status. In this regard, in this example, when the advance notice display is started on the performance display device 1600, even if the amount of balls dispensed decreases and the number of remaining balls increases afterwards, the advance notice display is not terminated until the number of remaining balls reaches a predetermined value exceeding "+5000 balls" (in this example, the state in which the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value is 5100 balls, that is, the state in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94900 balls). This prevents frequent switching of the advance flag on the main control board 1310 side, suppresses the advance flag ON information from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times, and avoids control burden and control complication. In addition, by displaying the advance notice display as continuously as possible, it is possible to prevent the game status from becoming difficult to grasp. In this example, the transition of the advance notice display after the advance notice display is started is described below.

Figure 139 is a time chart showing the progression of the advance notice display after the advance notice display has started. In this example, it explains the situation where the amount of balls dispensed increases or decreases around 95,000 balls (5,000 balls remaining).

In (A), as the number of balls dispensed increases, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 starts displaying "+5,000 balls remaining until game limit" as a pre-notification display. At this time, the LED of lamp B flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light.

After the advance notice display is started, when the amount of balls to be put out increases, the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice update command to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the amount of balls to be put out increases by 100, and the performance display device 1600 updates the display contents of the advance notice display. For example, when the amount of balls to be put out increases by 100, the performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit", and when the amount of balls to be put out increases by another 100, the performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+4800 balls remaining until the game limit". Here, when the amount of balls to be put out increases by 100, the display contents of the advance notice display are updated, and when the amount of balls to be put out increases by only 1 to 99, the display contents of the advance notice display are not updated. As a result, the display contents of the advance notice display are not updated in real time when the amount of balls to be put out increases, and advance notice update commands are suppressed from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times, and control burden and control complication can be avoided. In addition, Lamp B only flashes the LED for a specified period (e.g., 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light when there are 5,000 balls remaining before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, i.e., when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 95,000, Lamp B does not emit any light in response to the update when the amount of balls dispensed increases by 100 and the display content of the pre-notification display is updated.

In (B), after the advance notification display has started, if the amount of balls dispensed decreases and falls below 95,000 (if the number of balls remaining exceeds 5,000), the main control board 1310 does not send an advance notification end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 continues to display the advance notification message "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit." Then, as the amount of balls increases again, it exceeds 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), and then as the amount of balls decreases, it falls below 95,000 (more than 5,000 balls remaining). However, at the point when the amount of balls is 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 does not send a pre-notification start command or a pre-notification end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 continues to display the display of "+5,000 balls remaining until game limit" as a pre-notification display. This prevents the pre-notification start command and pre-notification end command from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 many times after the pre-notification display has started, and avoids the control burden and control complication. In addition, although the lamp B emits light in response to the pre-notification start command, it does not emit light in response to the pre-notification end command, which prevents the outside from misunderstanding that something is wrong with the gaming machine.

In (C), after the advance notice display is started, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining) while the amount of balls dispensed is decreasing, the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 ends the advance notice display. Here, after the advance notice display is started, when the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 100, the advance notice display is ended, and the advance notice display is not ended if the amount of balls dispensed decreases by only 1 to 99. In other words, after the advance notice display is started, until the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 99, there is a termination suppression period in which the advance notice display is not ended even if the amount of balls dispensed falls below 95,000. As a result, after the advance notice display is started, a slight decrease in the amount of balls dispensed is tolerated and the advance notice display is continued as much as possible, thereby preventing the game status from becoming difficult to grasp. In this example, the "end inhibition period" during which the advance notice display is allowed to continue is set to "until the amount of balls dispensed is reduced by 1 to 99 balls," but this is not limited to this. The amount of balls dispensed can be set appropriately according to the performance of the gaming machine, such as "until the amount of balls dispensed is reduced by 1 to 199 balls" or "until the amount of balls dispensed is reduced by 1 to 49 balls."

In this example, the operation at the start of the advance notice is to display an advance notice using the performance display device 1600 and to emit a advance notice light using lamp B, but the operation at the start of the advance notice may be to only display an advance notice using the performance display device 1600 and not emit an advance notice light. This prevents lamp B from emitting light multiple times, which may give the outside world the wrong impression that something is wrong with the gaming machine when the advance notice start command is sent several times due to an increase or decrease in the amount of balls dispensed beyond the above-mentioned termination inhibition period.

In (D), as the number of balls dispensed increases again, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 starts displaying the pre-notification message "+5,000 balls remaining until game limit."

In (E), after the advance notice display is started, when the amount of balls dispensed decreases and reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510. However, for some reason, such as a temporary power outage or a poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, an irregularity may occur in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notice end command (the peripheral control board 1510 misses the advance notice end command). When such an irregularity occurs, it is usually possible to resend the advance notice end command when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), but in this example, the performance display device 1600 does not end the advance notice display by deliberately not resending at this opportunity. In other words, when such an irregularity occurs, even if the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining) and it is time to end the advance notice display, the advance notice display will continue to display "+5,000 balls remaining until game limit." This prevents the advance notice end command from being resent at unexpected times during gameplay (for example, when no game balls have been released or when no balls have landed in the out hole), causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In (F), in the situation where the above-mentioned irregularity occurs in which the advance notice display does not end, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,800 (5,200 remaining balls) while the amount of balls dispensed is further decreasing, the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 ends the advance notice display. In this example, assuming that the advance notice display does not end at the timing it should, the main control board 1310 sends a preliminary advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510 not only when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), but also when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,800 (5,200 remaining balls) or 94,700 (5,300 remaining balls). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 temporarily cannot receive the advance notification end command and an irregularity occurs in which the advance notification display does not end, the advance notification display can be ended at a different timing that does not cause discomfort, and it is possible to reliably prevent the advance notification display from continuing to be displayed without ending.

In this example, the timing for sending the preliminary advance notice end command is set in increments of 100 balls from when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining) to when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 94,500 (5,500 balls remaining), but the advance notice display may be ended by other triggers. For example, the advance notice end command may be forcibly sent when the hall manager performs an end operation (for example, operating the RAM clear switch 741 or setting key switch while the power is on, or opening the main frame 4 or door frame 3), forcing the advance notice display to end when it should have ended.

In addition, in this example, if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notification end command (the advance notification end command is missed on the peripheral control board 1510 side) due to some reason such as a temporary power outage or a poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the process of preliminarily sending the advance notification end command at another trigger as described above is performed, but if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notification update command (the advance notification update command is missed on the peripheral control board 1510 side), the process of preliminarily sending the advance notification update command at another trigger is not performed. For example, after the advance notice display is started, if the amount of balls discharged increases by 100 and reaches 95,100 (4,900 remaining balls), the main control board 1310 transmits an advance notice update command to the peripheral control board 1510. If an irregularity occurs in which the advance notice update command cannot be received by the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600 continues to display "+5,000 balls remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display, and if the amount of balls discharged increases by another 100 and reaches 95,200 (4,800 remaining balls), the advance notice update command corresponding to the amount of balls discharged reaching 95,200 (4,800 remaining balls) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the advance notice display is updated to "+4,800 balls remaining until the game limit". This allows the player to feel as if the amount of balls discharged has increased all at once, and the irregularity can be used to increase the interest in the game. Additionally, lamp B emits light in response to a pre-notification start command but does not emit light in response to a pre-notification update command, preventing outsiders from misunderstanding that something is wrong with the gaming machine.

It is possible that due to some abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to update the advance notice display until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In such a case, for example, an advance notice update command may be forcibly sent when an update operation is performed by the hall manager (for example, operating the RAM clear switch 741 or setting key switch while the power is on, or opening the main frame 4 or door frame 3. It is preferable that this be done at a time other than the termination operation described above), thereby forcibly updating the advance notice display.

At (G), as the number of balls dispensed increases again, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a command to start a pre-notification to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 starts to display the pre-notification message "+5,000 balls remaining until the game limit."

In (H), after the advance notice display has started, if the number of balls dispensed increases by 100 and reaches 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice update command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+4,900 balls remaining until play limit."

In (I), after updating the advance notice display to "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit" and the amount of balls dispensed falls below 95,100 (the number of remaining balls exceeds 4,900 balls), the advance notice downgrade command is not sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 continues to display "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display. This prevents advance notice update commands and advance notice downgrade commands from being sent to the peripheral control board 1510 multiple times after updating the advance notice display to "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit", and avoids control burden and control complication. In this example, the advance notice update command used when the amount of dispensed balls increases (the number of remaining balls decreases) and the advance notice downgrade command used when the amount of dispensed balls decreases (the number of remaining balls increases) are separate commands, but they may be shared as commands that indicate the display content of the advance notice display.

In (J), after updating the advance notice display to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit", if the amount of balls dispensed falls below 95,000 (more than 5,000 balls remaining) as the amount of balls dispensed decreases, a advance notice downgrade command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit". Here, after updating the advance notice display to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit" when the amount of balls dispensed is 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), the display content of the advance notice display is updated when the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 100, and the display content of the advance notice display is not updated if the amount of balls dispensed decreases by only 1 to 99 balls. In other words, after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit is reached," the display content of the advance notice display is not updated until the amount of balls dispensed is reduced by 99 balls, which is a demotion suppression period. This prevents the game status from becoming difficult to grasp by continuing to display this as much as possible after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until the game limit is reached."

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the amount of balls dispensed increases, the performance display device 1600 displays "+5000 balls remaining until the game limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the amount of balls dispensed changes from 95,000 balls (5,000 balls remaining) to 95,100 balls (4,900 balls remaining), but in (I) to (J), as the amount of balls dispensed decreases, the performance display device 1600 displays "+4,900 balls remaining until the game limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the amount of balls dispensed decreases from 95,100 balls (4,900 balls remaining) to 95,000 balls (5,000 balls remaining). In this way, even if the interval for the amount of balls dispensed is the same, the display content of the pre-notification display that has been displayed once can be displayed as continuously as possible by changing the display content of the pre-notification display depending on whether the amount of balls dispensed is increasing or decreasing.

In (K), after updating the advance notice display to "+5000 balls remaining until play limit", if the amount of balls dispensed decreases and reaches 94,900 balls (5,100 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 ends the advance notice display.

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the amount of balls dispensed increases, the performance display device 1600 displays "+5000 balls remaining until the game limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the amount of balls dispensed changes from 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining) to 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), but in (J) to (K), as the amount of balls dispensed decreases, the performance display device 1600 displays "+5000 balls remaining until the game limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the amount of balls dispensed decreases from 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining) to 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining). In this way, even if the intervals of the amount of balls dispensed are different, the display content of the pre-notification display that has been displayed once can be displayed as continuously as possible by making the display content of the pre-notification display the same depending on whether the amount of balls dispensed is increasing or decreasing.

In this example, as described above, if a serious abnormality is detected while the advance warning display is being executed, the performance display device 1600 displays the same data as the advance warning display as current status display A. However, if a serious abnormality is detected while the end of the advance warning display or demotion is being suppressed, it is desirable to control the display content of current status display A to show the hall manager the exact amount of balls dispensed while still using the same data as the advance warning display. In this way, even if an irregular situation occurs, the hall manager can recognize the exact amount of balls dispensed through current status display A.

In addition, in each of the above examples, the message of the advance notice display is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the performance display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and the visibility of the advance notice display is not hindered by other performance images. However, if a predetermined area for displaying an adjustment image (e.g., an image corresponding to the volume or light amount, or an image related to other adjustments) that reflects the adjustment operation by the player on the performance surface is provided in a position that overlaps with the specific display area in the front-to-back direction, there is a risk that the visibility of the adjustment image will be hindered by the advance notice display at least while the advance notice display is displayed, which may reduce interest in the game. To solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the predetermined area for displaying the adjustment image may be provided in a position that does not overlap with the specific display area in the front-to-back direction at all. This ensures the visibility of the adjustment image even while the advance notice display is displayed, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. Also, if the specified area for displaying the adjustment image is set up so that it partially overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction, the adjustment image can be displayed offset from the advance notice display to at least allow the player to confirm the results of the adjustment operation (for example, if the adjustment image is a level gauge type, it can be displayed without overlapping to the extent that the change in the level gauge can be grasped, and if the adjustment image is a numerical type, it can be displayed without overlapping to the extent that the numerical value can be grasped), and in this case too, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in each of the above examples, the pre-notification message is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the performance display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and the visibility of the pre-notification message is not hindered by other performance images, but it is desirable to continue to display the pre-notification message even after the game transitions to a standby state in which the game is not progressing. This makes it possible to prevent a new player from starting a game without being aware of information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc., before starting the game. In addition, since the pre-notification message is displayed on the top layer of the performance display device 1600, there is a concern that it may hinder the visibility of demonstration images (such as performance explanations and promotional images) displayed in the standby state, and may not satisfy the needs of players who want to see the demonstration images. To solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the advance notice display in a specific display area is hidden so that it cannot be seen during the entire period or part of the period during which the demonstration image is displayed, and the display of the advance notice display in the specific display area is resumed when at least a new player performs a specified operation (for example, touching before operating the handle 160, performing an adjustment operation, operating another button, etc.). This satisfies the needs of players who want to check the demonstration image, while preventing new players from starting play without being aware of information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc., before starting play.

(Modification of Restriction Clear Pattern Table 4)
As described above in detail, in the limit clear pattern table 4, the "amount of balls before the stop state is started or after the stop state is started" is cleared (initialized) regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on. Specifically, in the limit clear pattern table 4, the "limit of play during the stop state" is cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in the power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on, but the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized) along with clearing the amount of balls. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 when the power is turned on, the "limit of play during the stop state" is maintained, but the stop preparation state is also maintained regardless of the amount of balls being cleared. In other words, as with the stop state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned on again after a power off. For example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a limit preparation state occurs, if you want to clear the limit preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation to clear the amount of balls dispensed that meets the start condition of the limit preparation state after the power is cut off, but in the limit clear pattern table 4, the jackpot game that was being executed is cleared by such a power-on operation. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the limit preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation to maintain the amount of balls dispensed that meets the start condition of the limit preparation state after the power is cut off, but the jackpot game that was being executed is resumed by such a power-on operation.

In this way, in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4, in order to resume the jackpot game that was being played when the power was turned on, it was necessary to maintain the stop preparation state, and it was not possible to clear only the stop preparation state while resuming the jackpot game that was being played when the power was turned on. In the case of such a configuration, for example, in a situation such as a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a stop preparation state occurs, even if it is desired to continue the test firing test without starting the stop state, it is not possible to clear only the stop preparation state, and there is a risk that the continued execution of the test firing test will be hindered by the subsequent occurrence of the stop state. Also, even if an attempt is made to clear the stop preparation state, the jackpot game will be cleared along with the stop preparation state, and in this case too, there is a risk that the continued execution of the test firing test will be hindered. In consideration of these circumstances, in this example, a configuration is described below as a modified version of the limited clear pattern table 4, in which the jackpot game that was running before the power was cut off is resumed when the power is turned on, but only the limit preparation state is cleared.

Figure 140 is a modified example of the limited clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. In this example, the limited clear pattern table 4 (a) and the limited clear pattern table 4 (b) are provided as the limited clear pattern table 4 used when the position of the limited clear pattern selection switch is "4", and the limited clear pattern table 4 (a) and the limited clear pattern table 4 (b) are controlled to be used depending on whether a special external signal is output during the limit preparation state. Then, only when a special external signal is output during the limit preparation state and it is determined that the special external signal is output when the power is turned on, the jackpot game that was being executed before the power was cut off is resumed in response to the power-on operation, while only the limit preparation state is cleared. Here, the "special external signal" is output through a specific circuit implemented in the main control board 1310, and may be a signal that is output from the main control board 1310 to an external device such as an external test device by satisfying a predetermined output requirement. In this example, an empty test circuit is set as a specific circuit formed on the main control board 1310, and a "specific output requirement is satisfied" by detecting that a test electronic component is mounted on the empty test circuit, and if a test electronic component is mounted on the empty test circuit, a special external signal is constantly output to an external test device. The special external signal may be output from the main control board 1310 to the outside via an external terminal board, or may be output directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without passing through an external terminal board.

Figure 140 (A) shows a modified version of the limit clear pattern table 4, limit clear pattern table 4 (a), which is the table selected when the power is cut off while a special external signal is being output during the limit preparation state and then power is turned back on. Note that in this example, the presence or absence of a special external signal being output from the main control board 1310 is determined prior to various clear processes in the power-on process, and limit clear pattern table 4 (a) or limit clear pattern table 4 (b) is selected based on the result of this determination.

In the power-on pattern 1 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a), when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started and after the limit state was started" is cleared (initialized). Also, the "game limit during the limit state" is maintained, but the limit preparation state is cleared (initialized). As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light (if the limit state is maintained; red if the limit preparation state is cleared) from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state is maintained (the limit preparation state has been cleared)." The performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state is maintained (the limit preparation state has been cleared)" (corresponding to clear notification 1 and progress impossible notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stalled state has been maintained, if the power is cut off during a stall preparation state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stall preparation state has been cleared, and in other cases, a notification is only issued that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. In addition, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be added that indicates the method for clearing the stalled state described above.

In the power-on pattern 2 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a), when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started and after the limit state is started" is also cleared (initialized). In addition, the "limit of play during the limit state" and the limit preparation state are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when play is limited by the above-mentioned limit pattern 1, "play is stopped", but the limit state is cleared to release the "play stop", when play is limited by limit pattern 2, "firing is stopped", but the limit state is cleared to release the "firing stop", when play is limited by limit pattern 3, "play is stopped" and "firing is stopped", but the limit state is cleared to release the "play stop" and "firing stop", and in either case, it is possible to resume play (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a voice is output from the speaker stating "The ball output amount and the limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image stating "The ball output amount and the limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared" (corresponding to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is cut off during the limit state, it is notified that the limit state has been cleared when the power is turned on, and if the power is cut off during the limit preparation state, it is notified that the limit preparation state has been cleared when the power is turned on, and in other cases, it is only notified that the ball output amount has been cleared.

The power-on pattern 3 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power off when the power is turned on, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started and after the limit state is started." In addition, the "game limit during the limit state" and the limit preparation state are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared." (corresponding to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stop state, a notification is sent when the power is turned on that the stop state has been cleared; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification is sent when the power is turned on that the stop preparation state has been cleared; otherwise, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared.

In the power-on pattern 4 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a), when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started and after the limit state was started" is cleared (initialized). Also, the "game limit during the limit state" is maintained, but the limit preparation state is cleared (initialized). As a notification mode to the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light (if the limit state is maintained; red if the limit preparation state is cleared) from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state is maintained (the limit preparation state has been cleared)." The performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state is maintained (the limit preparation state has been cleared)" (corresponding to the clear notification 1 and the inability to play notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stalled state has been maintained, if the power is cut off during a stall preparation state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stall preparation state has been cleared, and in other cases, a notification is only issued that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. In addition, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be added that indicates the method for clearing the stalled state described above.

The power-on pattern 5 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) maintains the game state at the time of power off when the power is turned on, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started and after the limit state was started." It also maintains the "game limit during the limit state" and the limit preparation state. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state (limit preparation state) are maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed and the limit state (limit preparation state) are maintained." More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stop state, when the power is turned on, a notification is sent that the stop state has been maintained; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, when the power is turned on, a notification is sent that the stop preparation state has been cleared; otherwise, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4(a) used when a special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, whether the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, or the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" is cleared (initialized). This allows only the limit preparation state to be cleared when the power is turned on under conditions such as test firing tests during the development stage of the gaming machine, and prevents the continuous implementation of test firing tests from being hindered by the occurrence of a subsequent limit state. Note that when the power is turned on and power-on pattern 5 is selected, the above-mentioned ball removal process is only executed and game play is not started, so the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) used when a special external signal is output, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4 when the power is turned on, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is maintained. In other words, the developer can choose whether to maintain or clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" when the power is turned on again after a power off under circumstances such as test firing tests during the development stage of the gaming machine. For example, if a stop state has already occurred and you want to release the restriction on playing, you can perform the power-on operation to clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power is turned off, and if you want to maintain the restriction on playing, you can perform the power-on operation to maintain the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power is turned off. If power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed, and play does not begin, so the "play limit during the game limit state" is not cleared (initialized) and is maintained.

In addition, in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) used when a special external signal is output, when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, not only is the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, not only is the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state is started or after the limit state is started" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). This makes it possible to select whether or not to clear the game state when clearing the limit preparation state in a situation such as a test firing test during the development stage of the gaming machine, and makes it possible to make it suitable for normal operation (such as operation in a gaming hall) that is not a test firing test.

Figure 140 (B) shows a modified version of the limit clear pattern table 4, limit clear pattern table 4 (b), which is the table selected when the power is cut off while the special external signal is not being output during the limit preparation state and then power is turned back on. Note that the power-on patterns 2, 3, and 5 here are the same as those in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a) described above, so their explanations are omitted.

In the power-on pattern 1 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (b), when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power off is maintained, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started and after the limit state was started" is cleared (initialized). In addition, the "game limit during the limit state" and the limit preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state (limit preparation state) is maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state (limit preparation state) is maintained" (corresponding to clear notification 1 and progress impossible notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stalled state has been maintained, if the power is cut off during a stall preparation state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stall preparation state has been maintained, and in all other cases, a notification is only issued that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. In addition, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be added to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state.

When the power is turned on, the power-on pattern 4 of the limit clear pattern table 4 (b) maintains the game state at the time of power off, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was started and after the limit state was started." In addition, the "limits on play during the limit state" and the limit preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on until a specified period has elapsed, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state (limit preparation state) is maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The limit state (limit preparation state) is maintained." (corresponding to clear notification 1 and game unplayable notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stalled state has been maintained, if the power is cut off during a stall preparation state, a notification is issued when the power is turned on that the stall preparation state has been maintained, and in all other cases, a notification is only issued that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. In addition, if the power is cut off during a stalled state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be added to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state.

In this way, in the limit clear pattern table 4(b) used when the special external signal is not being output, when the game state at the time of power cut is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on, not only is the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began or after the limit state began" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power cut is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4 when the power is turned on, although the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began or after the limit state began" is cleared (initialized), the limit preparation state is maintained regardless of the clearing of the amount of balls dispensed. For example, in the case where the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game during normal operation (such as during operation in a game hall) that is not a test shot, and a stop preparation state occurs, if a serious abnormality (such as detection of magnetism, vibration, or radio waves) occurs due to a player's fraudulent behavior and the player wishes to resolve the serious abnormality, the player may perform a power-on operation to resolve the serious abnormality after the power is cut off, but even if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as such power-on operations, the stop preparation state will be maintained. In other words, if the jackpot game that was being played is resumed but the stop preparation state is maintained, the game will transition to the stop preparation state at the end of the resumed jackpot game. In this way, during the stop preparation state, a fraudster or the like may intentionally cause a serious abnormality to cause the hall manager to turn the power back on and clear (initialize) the stop preparation state, which may lead to a new fraudulent attempt, but in the case of a power-on that contributes to the resolution of a serious abnormality, the illegal clearing of the stop preparation state can be avoided, and the game can be terminated at the point when the resumed jackpot game ends, thereby preventing such a new fraudulent attempt. In this way, the restricted clear pattern table 4(b), which is used when no special external signal is being output, can be made to be suitable for normal operation (such as operation in an amusement hall) that is not a test firing test, unlike the restricted clear pattern table 4(a).

In the above example, the special external signal is constantly output when electronic test components are mounted on an empty test circuit, but if the output time of the special external signal is longer than necessary, there is another problem in that the control load on the main control board 1310 increases. In view of this, instead of constantly outputting the special external signal when electronic test components are mounted on an empty test circuit, the special external signal may be output only when necessary when a predetermined output start condition is met. This point will be explained below with reference to Figures 140 (C) and (D).

Figure 141 is a time chart showing the start of output of a special external signal before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state. Of these, Figure 141 (A) is a time chart when the power is cut off before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state, and the power is turned on with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4 (a). Also, Figure 141 (B) is a time chart when the power is cut off after the start of the stop preparation state, and the power is turned on with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4 (a).

First, FIG. 141 (A) will be described. In FIG. 141 (A), even if a test electronic component is mounted on an empty test circuit, the special external signal is not output all the time, but is started to be output at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state. The specific timing (t1) in this example is set to be the same timing as the execution condition of the above-mentioned advance notice display. That is, as described above, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls released due to winning in the game progress reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls", an advance notice display "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the performance display device 1600 as an operation at the time of advance notice, which informs the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. The special external signal is output when the number of balls remaining until the specific value becomes "+1500 balls" at the same timing as the timing of displaying this advance notice display. Here, since it is conceivable that a specific external signal may be output via the external terminal board at the timing when the advance notice display is displayed, in order to avoid confusion between such a specific external signal and a special external signal, in this example, it is preferable to output the special external signal directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board.

When the output of a special external signal begins at a specific timing (t1), in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine, it becomes possible to know that the end preparation state and the end state are approaching due to the operation of test equipment that receives the special external signal. As a result, by cutting off the power (t2) when the output of the special external signal is known, and then turning on the power (t3) with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of the end preparation state and the end state without clearing (initializing) the game state.

In addition, after power-on (t3) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, the presence or absence of the special external signal output from the main control board 1310 is determined prior to various clear processes in the power-on process, so the output of the special external signal may end at any time after this determination is made. However, if the output of the special external signal continues for a longer time than necessary after power-on (t3) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4 (a), there is a possibility that the occurrence of the stop preparation state and the stop state may be erroneously determined, so it is desirable to terminate the output of the special external signal at a relatively early stage (for example, within 5 seconds) after power-on. Note that, even if the power is cut off (t2) at the stage where the output of the special external signal is grasped, if the power is turned on by an incorrect power-on pattern and the amount of balls is maintained, it is preferable to continue to output the special external signal. This allows the special external signal to be output for an extended period of time after an incorrect power-on, making it possible to determine that the number of balls dispensed has not been cleared (initialized), and to guide the user to shut off the power again.

In this way, by configuring the special external signal to be output at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state or the stop state, it is possible to avoid the constant output of the special external signal and suppress the control load of the main control board 1310. In addition, the approach of the start of the stop preparation state or the stop state can be grasped from the outside early through the special external signal together with the advance notice display, making it possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests, etc. at the development stage of the gaming machine. In addition, since the main control board 1310 is configured to output the special external signal to the outside, even if the advance notice display is incomplete at the development stage of the gaming machine, the approach of the start of the stop preparation state or the stop state can be grasped from the outside early through the special external signal, so that in this respect, it is also possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests, etc. at the development stage of the gaming machine.

Next, we will explain Figure 141 (B). In Figure 141 (B), when a test electronic component is mounted in an empty test circuit, output of a special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state, and power is cut off after the stop preparation state starts.

Specifically, even when a test electronic component is installed in an empty test circuit, the special external signal is not output all the time, but rather the output of the special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state, and the output of the special external signal is continued even after the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the stop preparation state occurs (t2). Here, since it is possible that a specific external signal is output via the external terminal board in the stop preparation state, in this example, in order to avoid confusion between such a specific external signal and the special external signal, it is preferable to output the special external signal directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board. In addition, in the stop preparation state, as described above, in the performance display device 1600, in addition to displaying a display (normal display) related to the jackpot game being executed, a standby display saying "The jackpot has ended and today is over" is displayed to indicate that the amount of balls released has already reached a specific value.

After the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a limit preparation state occurs (t2), the machine transitions to the limit state when the jackpot game ends. However, by continuing to output a special external signal during this limit preparation state, in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine, it becomes possible to know that the limit state is approaching due to the operation of test equipment that receives the special external signal. As a result, by cutting off the power (t3) when it is recognized that the special external signal is being output during the limit preparation state, and turning on the power (t4) with power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), it becomes possible to clear the limit preparation state without clearing (initializing) the game state and avoid the occurrence of the limit state.

Then, when the power is cut off (t3) at the stage where the output of a special external signal is detected during the limit preparation state, and the power is turned on (t4) according to power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), the jackpot game that was in progress before the power was cut off is not cleared when the limit preparation state is cleared, and the jackpot game that was in progress before the power was cut off is resumed after various clearing processes in the processing at the time of powering on. As a result, even if the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during a jackpot game in a situation such as a test firing test during the development stage of the gaming machine, and the limit preparation state occurs, the continuous implementation of the test firing test is not hindered by making it possible to clear only the limit preparation state.

Furthermore, after power-on (t4) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, as described above. However, because a determination is made as to whether or not a special external signal is being output from the main control board 1310 prior to the various clear processes in the power-on process, the output of the special external signal can be terminated at any time after this determination is made.

In this way, by configuring the device to continue outputting the special external signal not only before the start of the stop-play preparation state, but also after the start of the stop-play preparation state, it is possible to grasp from the outside at an early stage that the start of the stop-play state is approaching through the special external signal together with the standby display, making it possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests and the like during the development stage of the gaming machine.

The specific timing (t1) does not have to be the same as the execution condition for the advance notice display described above, and may be a timing before the execution condition for the advance notice display, or a timing after the execution condition for the advance notice display, as long as it is before the start of the stop preparation state or the stop state.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments shown in Figs. 141(A) and (B), and may be configured such that, for example, the output/non-output of a special external signal can be switched in response to the ON/OFF operation of an output start switch mounted on the main control board 1310, regardless of whether a test electronic component is mounted on an empty test circuit. Specifically, when the output start switch is turned ON during the stop preparation state, a specific output requirement is met and a special external signal is output, but when the output start switch is turned ON when not in the stop preparation state, the specific output requirement is met and a special external signal is output after a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state has arrived. Even in such a case, the constant output of the special external signal can be avoided, and the control load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

(Regarding the subtraction adjustment of the amount of balls dispensed)
As described above in detail, when the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game (win game) reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop preparation state, and is not stopped until the jackpot game ends, but is configured to transition to the stop state when the jackpot game ends. For example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a round in a jackpot game, the game transitions to a stop preparation state without immediately entering the stop state, and transitions to the stop state when the last round in the jackpot game ends. In other words, when the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, it is possible to acquire balls dispensed in excess of the specific value.

In the case of a situation where "multiple holds that are determined to be jackpots are stored, and after the jackpot game associated with the consumption of earlier holds has ended, it has been confirmed that the jackpot game associated with the consumption of later holds will be executed (the occurrence of multiple jackpots can be recognized by the player as multiple hold displays with high expectations are displayed)", or "it has been confirmed that the jackpot will be a guaranteed jackpot and that a transition to a high probability state (consecutive wins mode, etc.) will occur after the jackpot game ends", or "it has been confirmed that a game ball will enter the first V winning slot 2007 or the second V winning slot 2008 during the jackpot game and that a transition to a high probability state will occur after the jackpot game ends", it is confirmed that the next jackpot can be won even while the jackpot game is being played. However, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during a jackpot game, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, the game cannot be played at the end of the jackpot game because the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, and the player is unable to obtain the profit related to the next jackpot, which causes great dissatisfaction among players. In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, if the hall manager performs a specific operation, the amount of balls dispensed (the value of the stop-play counter) is adjusted by subtracting it, and the amount of balls dispensed is returned to the state before the specific value was reached (normal state), thereby canceling the stop-play preparation state and allowing the player to obtain the next jackpot after the jackpot game ends. This configuration is described below.

First, a ball output subtraction switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to adjust the amount of balls output (the value of the limit counter). This ball output subtraction switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operation unit (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player. When the ball output subtraction switch is operated (for example, an operation to switch to the OFF state after turning it ON for 3 seconds or more), the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, making it possible to subtract a predetermined amount of balls output (for example, 1500 balls) from the current amount of balls output. In other words, it makes it possible to subtract a predetermined amount of balls output (for example, 1500 balls) from the value at the time when the limit counter is at its highest.

In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, the operation of the ball dispense amount subtraction switch is enabled during the stop-play preparation state, and when the hall manager operates the ball dispense amount subtraction switch, a specific amount of balls dispensed (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls dispensed, so that the amount of balls dispensed falls below the specific value. At this time, the stop-play flag that was on when the game transitioned to the stop-play preparation state is turned off, and the stop-play preparation state is canceled and the game returns to the normal state. For example, 100,000 is set as the "specific value," and when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000 balls) during a jackpot game, the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, but when the hall manager operates the ball dispense amount subtraction switch, the specific amount of balls dispensed is subtracted by 1,500 balls, so that the amount of balls dispensed becomes 98,500 balls, which falls below the specific value (100,000 balls). Here, when the amount of balls dispensed is reduced so that it falls below a specific value, the stop preparation state is canceled, but the information for the ongoing jackpot game and the next jackpot is not canceled. Also, after the amount of balls dispensed is reduced so that it falls below a specific value, the counting of the amount of balls dispensed is restarted, starting from the subtracted amount of balls dispensed.

In this way, even if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game transitions to a stop preparation state, the hall manager can cancel the stop preparation state by operating the ball dispense amount subtraction switch, and it is possible to continue playing after the jackpot game ends as long as the amount of balls dispensed does not reach the specific value again. As a result, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during a jackpot game as described above, the game can be continued after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can obtain benefits related to the next jackpot and resolve their dissatisfaction. Note that although the game continues after the jackpot game ends, for example, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value again during the next jackpot game, the game transitions to a stop preparation state, and if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value again when not in a jackpot game, the game transitions to a stop state.

On the other hand, when the machine is not in the stop preparation state, operation of the ball output amount subtraction switch is disabled, and even if the hall manager operates the ball output amount subtraction switch, a specified amount of balls output (e.g., 1,500 balls) will not be subtracted from the current amount of balls output. For this reason, even if the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during a stop state, a specified amount of balls output (e.g., 1,500 balls) will not be subtracted from the current amount of balls output, and the amount of balls output will not fall below a specific value. In other words, the machine will not return to the normal state, but will maintain the stop state, so play cannot be resumed. In such a case, it is necessary to shut off the power during the stop state, and when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls output will be cleared and the stop state will be cleared.

When the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, a predetermined ball output amount (for example, 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current ball output amount, but the subtracted ball output amount is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game. In this example, the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game is about 1500 balls, and the amount of balls that is subtracted when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated is set to 1500 balls. As a result, when the amount of balls reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game is transitioning to the stop preparation state, if the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is canceled, and the amount of balls will not reach a specific value again during that jackpot game, and the game will not transition to the stop preparation state. In other words, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during the jackpot game as described above, the game can be continued after the jackpot game ends, and the profits related to the next jackpot can be obtained. In addition, since the amount of balls subtracted when the ball output subtraction switch is operated is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in one big win game, it is highly likely that the amount of balls output will reach a specific value again in the next big win game and transition to a stop preparation state, and at the end of that next big win game, the game will transition to a stop state and the game can end.

In addition, when the amount of balls discharged during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop-play preparation state, but after the transition to the stop-play preparation state, the game is configured not to count the amount of balls discharged during the jackpot game (the value of the stop-play counter). In other words, the game is configured not to count the amount of balls discharged beyond the specific value. For this reason, when the ball discharge amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-play preparation state, a predetermined amount of balls discharged (e.g., 1500 balls) is subtracted from the specific value, which is the current amount of balls discharged, so that the amount of balls discharged falls below the specific value. However, the amount of balls discharged may be configured to count the amount of balls discharged during a jackpot game (the value of the stop-play counter) even after the game transitions to the stop-play preparation state. In other words, the amount of balls discharged may be counted beyond the specific value. In this configuration, when the ball discharge amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-play preparation state, a predetermined amount of balls discharged (e.g., 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls discharged that exceeds the specific value, so that the amount of balls discharged falls below the specific value.

In addition, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls output. As another example, when the power is cut off during the stop preparation state and the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned back on, a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1500 balls) may be subtracted from the current amount of balls output. In this configuration, even if the stop preparation state is maintained when the power is turned back on, a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls output by operating the ball output amount subtraction switch when the power is turned back on, so that the amount of balls output falls below a specific value. In other words, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned back on, the stop preparation state is cleared and the jackpot game that was being played when the power was cut off can be resumed. In this way, by requiring the power to be turned on and off to enable the operation of the ball output amount subtraction switch, the hall manager can strictly manage the clearing of the stop preparation state.

In addition, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state to allow the next jackpot to be won, and the next jackpot is played, a similar game situation (a situation in which the ball output amount reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the game transitions to the stop preparation state even though the next jackpot has been confirmed) may occur again. In consideration of such a case, it is preferable not to limit the number of times the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state (the number of subtractions), but to allow operation to be accepted for each stop preparation state. This allows the hall manager to properly manage the game so that the player is not dissatisfied even if a similar game situation occurs after the operation of the ball output amount subtraction switch. However, in order to prevent the ball output amount subtraction switch from being operated multiple times during one stop preparation state, resulting in more subtractions than necessary, it is preferable to limit the number of times the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated (the number of subtractions) to only one during one stop preparation state.

In addition, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, the hall manager must perform some work, which means that the player's play will be temporarily stopped. However, the jackpot game will continue during this work, which may cause damage to the player as the player will not be able to obtain balls during the work. In order to avoid this, for example, when the ball output amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, control may be performed to stop the progress of the game, including the jackpot game. For example, if the ball output amount subtraction switch is turned ON for more than three seconds and then turned OFF to subtract the amount of balls output, it is possible to exemplified a case where the progress of the game, including the jackpot game, is stopped at least while the ball output amount subtraction switch is turned ON. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the jackpot game is not being released, it is preferable to make a unique announcement corresponding to the temporary stop of the game, including the jackpot game, while the ball output amount subtraction switch is turned ON, so that the outside can also recognize this.

The amount of balls to be subtracted by operating the ball amount subtraction switch during the stop preparation state is not limited to the above-mentioned "equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in one jackpot game", but may be set appropriately according to the game specifications, etc. For example, in the case of a game in which four jackpot games are guaranteed to be played after one jackpot game (e.g., 5 jackpot games), a value exceeding the amount of balls that can be won in the next jackpot game (500 balls) (e.g., "2000 balls", which is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in four jackpot games) may be subtracted by operating the ball amount subtraction switch once. This can eliminate the player's dissatisfaction.

(Transition to a cap-like state after clearing a cap-like state)
As described above in detail, in the limit clearing pattern table 4, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on, the "amount of balls dispensed before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" is cleared (initialized). In addition, in the limit clearing pattern table 4, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power off is cleared (initialized) as in the power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power off is maintained as in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 when the power is turned on, the "restriction on playing during the stop state" is maintained. In other words, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off. For example, when a stop state has already occurred and you want to release the restriction on playing, you can perform the power-on operation to clear the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power is turned off, and when you want to maintain the restriction on playing, you can perform the power-on operation to maintain the "restriction on playing during the stop state" after the power is turned off.

However, if the hall manager mistakenly performs a power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on play during a stopped state" after a power cut, without realizing that a stopped state has already occurred, there is a possibility that the stopped state will be cleared and play will be able to resume, even though the customer wishes to continue the stopped state. In this example, when a stopped state has already occurred and a power-on operation is performed to clear the "restrictions on play during a stopped state", the stopped state is cleared at that point, but the state does not immediately return to the normal state, but transitions to a stopped-state-like state in which play is restricted in the same way as a stopped state, and the stopped-state-like state will continue until the hall manager performs a specific operation. This configuration is described below.

First, a stop-like state end switch for ending the stop-like state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This stop-like state end switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operation unit (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player. When the stop-like state end switch is operated during the stop-like state, the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, and although the game is restricted during the stop-like state, the stop-like state is canceled and the game is returned to the normal state, making it possible to resume the game. Note that while the stop-like state is enabled, the operation of the stop-like state end switch is disabled during the stop-like state, and even if the stop-like state end switch is operated during the stop-like state, the stop-like state is not canceled. In addition, the stop-like state end switch may also be used as the ball amount subtraction switch described above.

Figure 142 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a similar state to a stoppage occurs after the stoppage state is cleared when the power is turned on.

First, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, and when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, the stop flag is turned ON and the system transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "stop gameplay" and "stop firing." The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Specifically, in the deadlock state, it is not possible to launch game balls, and it is not possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the deadlock state, the display of special symbols is not changed and no big win game is executed, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special symbols is not changed anew.

Next, after the game has entered the stopped state, the power is shut off at time t2, and then turned back on at time t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. Therefore, when the power is turned back on, the game state at the time of power shutoff is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized).

In this example, when the power is turned back on, the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are cleared (initialized), but the state is not immediately returned to the normal state, and the state transitions to a stop-like state in which play is restricted in the same way as the stopped state. In this stop-like state, like the stopped state, it is not possible to launch game balls, and it is not possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stop-like state, the display of special symbols is not changed and no big win game is performed, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special symbols is not newly started. In this way, even if the hall manager mistakenly performs an operation to clear the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" after the power is cut off without realizing that a stop state has already occurred, the state transitions to a stop-like state, and play is restricted in the same way as in the stopped state until the hall manager operates the stop-like state end switch, allowing the hall manager to strictly manage the resumption of play.

In the stop-like state, the notification is made in a manner different from the stop-like state. Specifically, in the stop-like state, for example, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker notify that play is temporarily restricted until the stop-like state end switch is operated. In this way, by notifying in a manner different from the stop-like state, it is possible to reliably recognize whether the stop-like state is in progress or after the power has been cut off during the stop-like state. In addition, when the power is turned back on, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop-like state began and after the stop-like state began" and the "restrictions on play during the stop-like state" are cleared (initialized), so the amount of balls dispensed and the fact that the stop-like state has been cleared are also notified.

The behavior of the similar-to-limit state is substantially the same as that of the limit state, except for the manner in which it is notified to the outside. Specifically, in the similar-to-limit state, the movable body is in an inoperable state in which it cannot move. Also, in the similar-to-limit state, the external terminal board is in a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output, even if no abnormality is detected, no setting value is changed, or no confirmation display of the setting value is being performed. As a result, in the similar-to-limit state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall is able to know that it has transitioned to a similar-to-limit state.

In addition, in a state similar to a dead-end, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, in a state similar to the limit, even if a ball is detected entering the winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and they are not added to the number of balls the player has. However, in a state similar to the limit, it may be configured so that balls entering the winning slot are not detected, and similarly, even if a ball enters the winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and they are not added to the number of balls the player has. In addition, in the state similar to the limit, a period is set in which the number of balls the player has can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

In addition, in a state similar to a limit, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. In other words, in a state similar to a limit, even if an abnormality is detected, no abnormality determination is made, and therefore no abnormality notification is made to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred. In this way, in a state similar to a limit, a notification regarding the state similar to a limit is made in priority over an abnormality notification, thereby ensuring that players and hall managers are aware that they have entered a state similar to a limit. However, in a state similar to a limit, the system may be configured not to detect abnormalities such as magnetism or vibration, and similarly, even if no abnormality is detected in the first place, no abnormality notification is made to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred, even if an abnormality occurs.

Next, after the transition to the limit-like state, the limit-like state end switch is operated at timing t4. In this example, when the limit-like state end switch is operated during the limit-like state, the limit-like state is resolved and the state is returned to the normal state, and the restrictions on play in the limit-like state are lifted. The behavior in the normal state is as described above.

Specifically, in the normal state, it is possible to launch game balls and to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side during this period. In other words, unlike the end-of-game-like state and the end-of-game state, in the normal state, when a starting winning occurs, the display of the special symbols can start changing, and when the display of the special symbols stops at the winning symbol, the jackpot game can start, allowing normal gameplay to be played.

When the power is turned back on, the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state was started" and the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are cleared (initialized), and so a notification is issued that the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state have been cleared. However, such a notification may be issued when the stop-like state switch is operated during the stopped-like state and the normal state is restored. This prevents any discomfort felt when the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state are cleared when the power is turned back on, but the game has transitioned to a stopped-like state and play is restricted in the same way as in the stopped state.

(Regarding visibility of advance warning displays and progress impossibility displays)
In each of the above examples, the message of the advance notice display is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and the visibility of the advance notice display is not hindered by other effect images, but if a predetermined area for displaying an adjustment image (e.g., an image corresponding to the volume or light amount, or an image related to other adjustments) that reflects the adjustment operation by the player on the effect surface is provided in a position that overlaps the specific display area in the front-to-back direction, the visibility of the adjustment image may be hindered by the advance notice display at least while the advance notice display is displayed, which may reduce interest in the game. In such a case, as an example, the advance notice display in the specific display area is hidden so that it cannot be seen, but in the example described below, a configuration will be described in which game information such as the adjustment image is displayed outside the specific display area while the message of the advance notice display is displayed in the specific display area.

Figure 143 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when an advance notice or a progress impossibility notice is displayed during standby.

First, after the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value (e.g., 5,000 balls), a pre-notification display is displayed. This pre-notification display is displayed not only while the special symbols are changing, but also while the special symbols are not changing and are in a standby state until the number of balls to be dispensed reaches the specific value. As described above in detail, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "+xx balls remaining until game limit" in a specific display area as a pre-notification display. This specific display area is set as part of the display area in the performance display device 1600 and is used to display when the number of balls to be dispensed approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged under any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it.

In addition, advance warning displays and progress impossibility displays are displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, in this example, the performance display device 1600 is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, in an overlapping manner, and in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," the higher the layer display, the closer it is to the front, so that it can be viewed with priority. As a result, the visibility of advance warning displays and progress impossibility displays displayed in the upper layer is not obstructed by displays displayed in the middle and lower layers.

In addition, during the non-changing display of the special pattern, the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed as standby display 1 (standby performance 1) from the time the special pattern is fixed and stopped until a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed, but the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. The decorative pattern is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600 regardless of whether the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state or not. In addition, the specified area in standby display 1 where the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and is located in a position that does not overlap with the specific display area in the front-to-back direction at all. This ensures the visibility of the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern even while the advance notice display is displayed, and makes it possible to know that the special pattern is being displayed in a non-changing state. In addition, the specified area of the standby display 1 where the decorative symbol is displayed may be located so that a portion of it overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction. For example, the decorative symbol may be displayed offset from the advance notice display to such an extent that the decorative symbol can be confirmed.

During the non-variable display of the special symbol, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, just as during the variable display of the special symbol, and during the adjustment of the volume and light intensity, an adjustment image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed. The adjustment image is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display. Here, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t1 during the non-variable display of the special symbol, the adjustment image is displayed, and the adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed is outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is provided in a position that does not overlap with the specific display area in the front-back direction at all. This ensures the visibility of the adjustment image even while the advance notice display is displayed, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. The specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed may be positioned so that a portion of it overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction. For example, if the adjustment image is in the level gauge format, it may be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the change in the level gauge can be grasped, and if the adjustment image is in the numerical format, it may be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the numerical value can be grasped. In this way, the adjustment image may be displayed shifted from the advance notice display so that at least the results of the adjustment operation by the player can be confirmed.

In addition, the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are not subject to the image conversion process (mosaic processing, grayscale processing, enlargement/reduction processing, etc.) performed by the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the performance images other than the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are subject to the image conversion process performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance image is allowed to change as the performance progresses, but the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are not subject to the image conversion process performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance image is not allowed to change even if the performance progresses. As a result, the visibility of the advance notice display or the progress impossibility display does not change while it is displayed, making it possible to avoid overlooking information on the amount of balls dispensed, etc.

Next, at timing t3, which is after the variable display of the special symbols has ended and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbols were fixed and stopped, a demonstration period begins in which demonstration images (e.g., images explaining the performance or promotional images) are displayed. This demonstration period ends when the variable display of the special symbols begins. In addition, even after the transition to the demonstration period has begun, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent new players from starting play without being aware of information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc., before starting play.

During the demonstration period, the following demonstration image is displayed as standby display 2 (standby performance 2). Specifically, first, the performance explanation and promotional image display (movie) of the pachinko machine 1 are executed using the performance display device 1600, and at the end of this, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. After the logo display of the model title is finished, the performance display device 1600 executes the display of the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1, and then, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to prevent excessive addiction to the game (for example, a text display of "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Take care not to get addicted") is displayed. By displaying such a warning message, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively addicted to the game in subsequent games.

In this example, the above standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. For example, the predetermined area in which the attention message is displayed is outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is provided at a position that does not overlap the specific display area in the front-to-back direction. This ensures the visibility of the attention message even while the advance notice display is displayed, and can reliably prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game. Note that the predetermined area in which the attention message is displayed may be provided at a position where a part of the predetermined area overlaps the specific display area in the front-to-back direction, and for example, even if the predetermined area and the specific display area overlap, the attention message may be displayed shifted up and down or left and right from the advance notice display to an extent that the content of the attention message can be confirmed. Also, for example, the predetermined area in which the attention message is displayed may be outside the display area in which the adjustment image described below is displayed. This ensures the visibility of the attention message even when the adjustment image is displayed, and can reliably prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.

As another example, the above standby display 2 may be displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. In this case, the predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed and the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed are displayed on the same layer, but it is desirable to shift the predetermined area and the specific display area vertically or horizontally so that they do not overlap at all. This ensures that the warning message is visible even while the advance notice display is displayed, and reliably prevents the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game. Note that a portion of the predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed may be arranged to overlap the specific display area. For example, even if the predetermined area overlaps the specific display area, the warning message may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to an extent that the content of the warning message can be confirmed.

If the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t4 during the demonstration period, an adjustment image is displayed, and as described above, this adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600. The specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed is outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is located in a position that does not overlap at all in the front-to-back direction with the specific display area. This ensures visibility of the adjustment image even while the advance notice display is displayed, and prevents a decrease in interest in playing the game. If the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the demonstration period, the demonstration period may end while the standby state continues, but the advance notice display will continue to be displayed even in the standby state after the end of the demonstration period.

During the demonstration period, the movable body provided on the game board 5 may be moved from an initial position to an appearance position and made to appear in front of the screen of the performance display device 1600, but even if the movable body appears in front of the screen of the performance display device 1600, it is preferable that it is not positioned in front of the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed. This ensures the visibility of the advance notice display even if the movable body is operating during the demonstration period.

Next, at the time t6, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the waiting state ends and the game moves to a stop state in which the game cannot proceed. As described above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value based on the calculation based on the winning balls generated by the winning balls entering each winning port, the game is restricted by the stop state. In this example, such game restrictions are controlled not only during the variable display of special patterns or during a winning game, but also during the waiting state. As a result, for example, when a game ball released in the waiting state enters the general winning port 2001, etc., and the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the winning, the game is restricted even though the game is not proceeding, and the waiting state is directly changed to the stop state, making it possible to avoid the game being restricted during the variable display of special patterns or during a winning game.

When the game moves directly from the standby state to the stop state, the performance display device 1600 displays an indication that progress is not possible as an image corresponding to the stop state. The indication that progress is not possible is the message "Play Restrictions", along with messages such as "Play is restricted as the daily ball output limit of XXX balls has been reached", "Please call an attendant", and "The settlement button is active". As described above, the indication that progress is not possible is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls output has reached a specific value and that play is being restricted.

In addition, for the progress impossible display in this example, a message is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. This blackout display is performed on almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600. As a result, the screen displayed on the layer lower than the upper layer is made invisible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t6, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 continues to display a demonstration image as a waiting display 2, but the upper layer of the performance display device 1600 displays the progress impossible display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, making the demonstration image invisible. As a result, after the transition to the play-stop state, the player does not realize that it is a demonstration period while the progress impossible display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is being restricted. In addition, after the transition to the no-play state has occurred, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) of waiting time has elapsed during which no special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 may be forced to terminate so that the demonstration image does not continue to be displayed.

In addition, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t7 while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, the operation of the setting adjustment button 204 itself can be accepted, and an adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600, but the progress impossibility display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600 using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, making the adjustment image invisible. Note that while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, the adjustment image is not displayed, but the setting adjustment button 204 can be operated internally to adjust the volume and light intensity. However, while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, priority is given to control based on the stalled state as control related to sound and light emission, and the adjustment of the volume and light intensity received through the setting adjustment button 204 is not reflected. Note that, as another example, the adjustment of the volume and light intensity received through the setting adjustment button 204 may be reflected while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, and for example, the adjustment of the volume and light intensity may be reflected except for the volume and light intensity related to the notification mode described later.

In this example, even after the transition to the stop state at the time t6, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 continues to display the demonstration image as the standby display 2, but if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the demonstration image continuing on the lower layer may be terminated. This reduces the control load on the peripheral control board 1510. The condition for terminating the demonstration image continuing on the lower layer is not limited to the operation of the setting adjustment button 204, but may also be the operation of the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 or the operation of the handle 160. In addition, when the setting adjustment button 204, the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252, or the handle 160 is operated while the progress impossible display is being displayed (when a specific operation that is a condition for terminating the demonstration image continuing on the lower layer is performed), it is desirable not to perform any notification such as a dedicated sound, light emission, or display accordingly. That is, if a special sound, light, display, or other notification is made in response to each operation, the player may misunderstand that "can I play?" However, by not making any special sound, light, display, or other notification in response to each operation, this risk of misunderstanding can be prevented. Note that, in the case of the type of gaming machine being the so-called sealed gaming machine or managed gaming machine described above, no special sound, light, display, or other notification is made in response to the operation of the setting adjustment button 204, the first performance button 251, the second performance button 252, or the operation of the handle 160, but only in response to the operation of the counting button switch 180, a special sound, light, display, or other notification in response to that operation may be executed in order to clearly indicate the normal end of the game.

Next, the notification mode regarding light emission and sound during the execution of the limit state will be explained using FIG. 143. In this example, when the limit state is entered, not only the performance display device 1600 but also notification components other than the performance display device 1600 are used to notify the outside world in an emphatic manner so as to actively inform the outside world that the limit state has been entered. However, unless the limit state is resolved, continuing to notify in this emphatic manner may disrupt the game for surrounding players. In order to alleviate such concerns, the configuration for controlling the notification regarding light emission and sound during the limit state so as to change in a unique manner will be explained below.

First, at timing t6, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game restriction is executed, the game transitions to a stopped state in which game progress is disabled, and the performance display device 1600 displays a progress disabled display as an image corresponding to the stopped state, using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600. At this time, as the operation for the progress disabled state is executed, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker forcibly executes a notification in an emphasis mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (e.g., maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as notification mode A, regardless of the setting status set by the operation of the setting adjustment button 204. More specifically, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a single white light, and the LEDs flash or light up at a specific light intensity (for example, maximum light intensity), and a voice message saying "Play is being restricted as the daily ball payout limit has been reached" is output from the speaker at a specific volume (for example, maximum volume). This makes it possible to clearly inform the hall manager that a transition to a play limit state has occurred. Note that it is preferable that the notification in the highlighted mode related to the play limit state be in a different mode from the notification mode given in the event of other errors such as abnormalities.

Then, at the timing t8 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after starting the notification in the highlighted mode as notification mode A, the performance display device 1600 maintains the progress impossible display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker transition to notification in a suppressed mode in which the light amount and sound volume are suppressed as notification mode B. Specifically, while the LEDs of the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) continue to emit white monochromatic light, they are not flashed or lit at a specific light amount (for example, maximum light amount) (they are flashed or lit at a light amount less than the specific light amount), and furthermore, the speaker is not outputted with the voice itself saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," so that no sound can be heard, but a silent state (inaudible state). This makes it possible to end the highlighting notification even during the game-stopping state, and to prevent the notification from interfering with the play of surrounding players. It also makes it possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are no longer being played due to the game-stopping state.

The suppression mode may be one that suppresses the amount of light or volume more than the emphasis mode. For example, for Lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and Lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the emphasis mode may be one in which the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors by changing the light emission color pattern, or a voice saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached" or a specified background music may be output from the speaker at a volume lower than a specific volume. By doing this, even if a game machine has reached a limit and is no longer being played, the decorative effect can be maintained and it can play a role in livening up the entire game hall. In addition, decorative effects are unnecessary for gaming machines that are no longer being played after reaching a dead end state, and if further energy-saving effects are desired, the light intensity and sound volume of the suppression mode may be completely suppressed. For example, the performance display device 1600 may maintain the no-progress display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) may be turned off, and the speaker may be set to a silent state (inaudible state) in which no sound can be heard. In addition, a specified suppression mode selection switch may be provided so that the administrator can change (select) the setting for the suppression mode by operating the suppression mode selection switch.

In addition, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t9 after the start of the notification in the suppressed mode as notification mode B, the performance display device 1600 maintains the indication that progress is impossible, and the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker transition to again executing the notification in the emphasized mode in which the light intensity and volume are emphasized as notification mode A, while maintaining the indication that progress is impossible. Similarly, when the handle 160 is touched and the handle touch sensor 162 detects the touch by the player, the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker transition to again executing the notification in the emphasized mode in which the light intensity and volume are emphasized as notification mode A. As a result, even if a new player tries to start playing without recognizing that the game is at a stop, the notification transitions to the emphasized mode, making the player aware that the game is at a stop. Furthermore, even if the handle 160 is rotated while in contact with it, if play is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the game ball will not be launched toward the play area 5a because "play stopped" and "launch stopped" are in the no-go state.

After the notification in the highlighted mode as notification mode A is started again, at the time t10 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the performance display device 1600 maintains the indication that progress is impossible, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamps B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker transition to again executing the notification in the suppressed mode in which the light intensity and volume are suppressed as notification mode B. This makes it possible to end the notification in the highlighted mode and prevent the surrounding players from being disturbed in their play, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is mistakenly operated or the handle 160 is touched. In this example, the time from the notification mode A (highlighted mode) to the notification mode B (suppressed mode) is the same predetermined time (15 seconds) for the time from the time t6 to the time t8 and the time from the time t9 to the time t10, but the time from the time t6 to the time t8 and the time from the time t9 to the time t10 may be different. For example, it is desirable to set the time from timing t6 to timing t8 to a relatively long time (15 seconds) since the purpose is to inform those around, while the time from timing t9 to timing t10 can be set to a shorter time than timing t6 to timing t8 (for example, 5 seconds) since new players are in a dead end state and the purpose is to extend the energy saving period.

The predetermined condition for transitioning from notification mode A (highlighted mode) to notification mode B (suppressed mode) is not limited to the passage of the predetermined time described above, and may be an operation by an administrator, etc. For example, a predetermined suppression mode setting switch may be provided so that the administrator can forcibly change to notification mode B (suppressed mode) by operating the suppression mode setting switch during notification mode A (highlighted mode).

As described above, when a predetermined condition, such as the passage of a predetermined period of time, is met during the execution of the stop state, the notification mode of lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker changes. In contrast, lamp C is equipped with a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, etc. as the functional display unit 1400, and all of these LEDs are lit during the stop state, so that the notification mode does not change even if a predetermined condition is met. As a result, even if there is a component whose notification mode has changed, it is possible to know that the stop state has not been resolved by the notification using lamp C.

In addition, when notification mode A is executed immediately after the transition to the stop state at timing t6, and when notification mode A is executed at timing t10 due to the operation of the setting adjustment button 204 or contact with the handle 160, a common notification is executed in an emphasized mode in both cases. This allows for a common control program.

As another example, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated or the handle 160 is touched at timing t10, the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker may transition to a notification mode C that is different from notification mode A and notification mode B. Even with this configuration, when a new player tries to start playing without recognizing that the game is at a limit, the notification mode may transition to a notification mode that is different from notification mode A and notification mode B, making the player aware that the game is at a limit.

Next, FIG. 143 will be used to explain whether or not the handle contact effect can be executed while the special symbol is not being changed (during standby state). In this example, if there is new contact with the handle 160 while the special symbol is not being changed, the handle contact effect can be executed, to increase the excitement of starting the game.

First, during the non-variable display of the special symbol in a non-stop state (standby state), the period is set as a period during which the handle contact effect can be executed when the handle 160 is newly contacted, regardless of whether it is during the demonstration period or not. For example, when the handle 160 is newly contacted at timing t1 during the display of the advance notice display, the handle contact effect is started, and the handle contact effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In this handle contact effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a contact-only image (for example, a video display of a specific character that gives the impression of the start of the game) corresponding to the contact with the handle 160, and the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker are also capable of executing a specific effect process (for example, sound or light emission that gives the impression of the start of the game) corresponding to the contact with the handle 160. Note that the contact-only image corresponding to the contact with the handle 160 is outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is displayed on the lower layer described above.

On the other hand, during the display of the progress-impossible display in the play-stop state, if the handle 160 is newly touched, the handle contact effect is set as a period during which it cannot be executed. In other words, even if the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress-impossible display is displayed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the contact-only image corresponding to the touch with the handle 160, and the execution of the handle contact effect is restricted. As a result, even if a new player tries to start playing without recognizing that the play-stop state is reached, the normal handle contact effect is not executed. In other words, the fact that the normal handle contact effect is not executed can make the player aware that the play-stop state is reached. As described above, since the contact-only image is displayed on a lower layer, in order to avoid complicating control due to the presence or absence of the contact-only image, the contact-only image may be displayed on a lower layer when the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress-impossible display is displayed. Even if the contact-only image is displayed on a lower layer, if a progress-impossible display is displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600 using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, the player cannot see the contact-only image, and the normal handle contact effect is not performed, which makes the player aware that the game is at a dead end. Note that even if the player rotates the handle 160 while touching it, if the game is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the game ball will not be released toward the game area 5a because "play stopped" and "launch stopped" are set during the dead end state.

As described above in detail, if new contact is made with the handle 160 while the progress-impossible display is being displayed, it is possible for lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker to change from notification mode B to notification mode A (or, as another example, notification mode C), and transition to a notification in an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start playing without realizing that play has reached its limit, a notification in an emphasized mode can be executed, making the player aware that play has reached its limit.

In addition, if there is new contact with the handle 160 at timing t5 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the handle contact presentation starts, but if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state at timing t6 before the handle contact presentation ends, the handle contact presentation ends midway through and is not executed to the end. In other words, after the game transitions to a deadlock state, the contact-only image corresponding to contact with the handle 160 is made difficult to see. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the game is transitioning to a deadlock state and that they cannot continue playing, even if they are paying attention to the handle contact presentation.

In this example, during the stalled state, data transfer from the gaming machine to the gaming ball lending device 8 is acceptable, but addition of the normal number of balls held by a new player and data transfer from the gaming ball lending device 8 to the gaming machine are not acceptable, so that the new player cannot start playing. If a new player attempts to add to the normal number of balls held (ball lending operation), a specified notification is issued. For example, just as in the case where the handle 160 is newly touched while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the notification mode of lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker is changed from notification mode B to notification mode A (also as another example, notification mode C), and the notification is switched to an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player tries to start playing without recognizing that the game is at a dead end, the normal number of balls held is not incremented during the ball lending operation, preventing the player from starting the game. In addition, the player is made aware of the dead end by issuing a highlighted notification. If the new player's normal number of balls held or data transfer from the game ball lending device 8 is to be disabled during the dead end, it is preferable to control the display mode of the ball count display unit 140 to a mode that does not allow data to be transferred from the game ball lending device 8, such as "EEEE," to notify the player of the dead end in advance.

As another example, during the deadlock state, the new player may be allowed to add to the normal number of balls he has, or data transfer from the game ball lending device 8 to the gaming machine may be accepted. In such a case, if a new player attempts to add to the normal number of balls he has (ball lending operation), a notification is given in a predetermined notification mode. For example, as in the case of a new touch on the handle 160 while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, the notification mode of the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker is changed from notification mode B to notification mode A (another example, notification mode C), and a notification is made in an emphasized mode. As a result, when a new player tries to start playing without recognizing that the deadlock state has been reached, the normal number of balls is added when the ball lending operation is performed, but the notification in an emphasized mode can be executed to make the new player aware that the deadlock state has been reached.

As another example, during the non-variable display of the special symbol (during standby state), a movable body provided on the game board 5 may be moved from the initial position to the appearance position at a predetermined time during the demonstration period, and may be made to wait in front of the screen of the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined operation period (after the operation period has elapsed, the movable body is returned from the appearance position to the initial position), thereby performing a so-called "customer-attracting operation", etc., but such a customer-attracting operation may also be partially restricted in the same manner as the handle contact performance described above. For example, if it is preset to perform an operation (customer-attracting operation) of moving a movable body provided on the game board 5 from the initial position to the appearance position at timing t5 during the display of the advance notice display, the customer-attracting operation is performed for a predetermined operation period from timing t5, but if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game moves to a stop state at timing t6 before the operation period has elapsed, the operation period ends in the middle, and the movable body is forcibly returned from the appearance position to the initial position, thereby shortening the customer-attracting operation. In other words, the customer-attracting operation is not performed after the game moves to a stop state. This allows the player to be made aware that even if they are performing a customer attraction action, they will be put into a stop-play state and will not be able to continue playing.

Next, the acceptability of the effect change operation will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. In this example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held during the variable display of the special symbol, during the non-variable display of the special symbol, and during a winning game (jackpot game), it is possible to change to "an auto button mode that enables an auto button function that considers the first effect button 251 or the second effect button 252 to have been operated even if it is not operated when the operation of the first effect button 251 or the second effect button 252 is requested in the subsequent performance" or to "a 3D display mode that enables 3D image display on the performance display device 1600", providing a gaming environment that meets the needs of the player. Note that if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held again after the change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, the change is canceled and the mode is changed to the normal mode.

First, as an example, a case where the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held during the non-changing display of the special pattern when the game is not at a limit will be described. During the non-changing display of the special pattern when the game is not at a limit, acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled regardless of whether or not it is during a demonstration period, making it possible to change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode. For example, if a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is started at timing t1 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance during acceptance consisting of images and sounds corresponding to the acceptance of the long press (for example, a display or sound such as "If you keep pressing for 5 seconds, the mode will change to the auto button mode and 3D display mode"). Then, at timing t2, when the period of time during which the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the mode is changed to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, and the performance display device 1600 executes an accepted performance consisting of an image and sound corresponding to the acceptance of the long press operation (e.g., a display or sound such as "Changed to auto button mode and 3D display mode"). Note that the image display of the currently accepted performance and the accepted performance is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, although not shown, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held during the display of special symbols that are not in a deadlock state or during a winning game (jackpot game), the acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled in the same manner as when the special symbols are not being displayed and a change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode is possible, and control is also performed to execute the currently accepted or accepted performance. Note that if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while the special symbols are being displayed and changing, the long press is accepted continuously not only during the display of the special symbols, but also after the display of the special symbols has ended and after the display of the next special symbols has started, so that the long press is not forcibly released midway when the display of the special symbols ends and the long press is not canceled midway.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, during the non-variable display of the special symbol, and during a winning game (a big win game), after changing to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, the subsequent performances are changed to correspond to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, and a setting performance (setting image) indicating that the auto button mode or the 3D display mode is set is executed. However, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state in that state, the change to the auto button mode or the change to the 3D display mode is forcibly released, and the execution of the subsequent setting performance (setting image) is restricted. In other words, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state, the set auto button mode or the 3D display mode is forcibly released without any operation on the setting adjustment button 204, and the above-mentioned progress impossible display, etc. is executed in a normal manner that does not correspond to any mode. In addition, the setting performance (setting image) is outside the specific display area where the play impossible display is displayed, as with the images of the reception performance and the reception performance, and is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to avoid a display indicating that progress is impossible being displayed in 3D display, etc., and also makes it possible to avoid a display indicating that play is impossible being difficult to see in the setting performance (setting image), allowing the notification of the game limit to be properly executed without causing discomfort or disgust to the player.

Next, a case will be described in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode during the variable display of the special pattern, the non-variable display of the special pattern, or during a winning game (a big win game). Using FIG. 143 as an example of a non-variable display of a special pattern in a state where the game is not in a deadlock state, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state at timing t6 (for example, a state where the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for 3 seconds) while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, the game is blocked from continuing to accept the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 at timing t6, forcing the game to disable subsequent operation acceptance. In addition, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state during the execution of a performance currently being accepted or a performance that has already been accepted, the performance is forced to end at the point of transition to the deadlock state. In other words, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for five seconds or more thereafter, restrictions are imposed so that a change to the auto button mode or a change to the 3D display mode cannot be made. As a result, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held before the game is stopped, if the game is stopped during the long press, none of the reception effect, reception completion effect, or setting effect is executed after the game is stopped, and the game can be properly notified of the game stopped state without causing discomfort or dislike to the player.

Meanwhile, while the progress impossible display is being displayed in the play-stop state, acceptance of a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is disabled, and a restriction is imposed so that a change to the auto button mode or a change to the 3D display mode cannot be made. In other words, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is long pressed while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 is restricted so that the accepting effect, accepted effect, and setting effect are not executed. As a result, even if a new player long presses the setting adjustment button 204 without recognizing that the play is stopped, a notification regarding a change to the auto button mode or a change to the 3D display mode is not executed, and it is possible to avoid the mistaken belief that play is possible.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to release the already set auto button mode or 3D display mode during the variable display of the special symbol or the non-variable display of the special symbol, or during a winning game (a big win game), the following control is performed. That is, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state at timing t6 (for example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for 3 seconds) during the variable display of the setting adjustment button 204 to release the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, the continued acceptance of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked at timing t6, and subsequent operation acceptance is forcibly disabled as described above. In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state during the execution of a currently accepted performance or a currently accepted performance, the performance is forcibly terminated at the point of transition to a stop state as described above. However, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to release the already set auto button mode or 3D display mode, even if the continued acceptance of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked, the auto button mode or 3D display mode is controlled to be released based on the amount of balls dispensed reaching a specific value. In other words, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held (operation for release) before the game is stopped, the game is stopped during the long press operation, and after the game is stopped, none of the accepting performance, accepted performance, or setting performance is executed, but the auto button mode and 3D display mode are forcibly released. This prevents the notification of the game stop state from being distorted to reflect a special mode, and avoids giving the player a sense of discomfort or dislike.

As described above in detail, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated (pressed and held) while the progress impossible display is being displayed, it is possible for lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker to change from notification mode B to notification mode A (or, as another example, notification mode C), and transition to a notification in an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player presses and holds the setting adjustment button 204 without realizing that play is at a standstill, a notification in an emphasized mode can be executed, making the player aware that play is at a standstill.

In addition, when the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is started at timing t5 during the display of the advance notice display, the performance display device 1600 displays an image of the performance currently being accepted. However, at timing t6 before the period of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stop state, the display of the image of the performance currently being accepted is terminated halfway and the display of the image of the performance currently being accepted is not executed to the end. In other words, after the game transitions to the stop state, the display of the image of the performance currently being accepted is not visible. In addition, since the acceptance of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is invalidated after the game transitions to the stop state, even if the long press operation has been continued before the game transitions to the stop state, at timing t7 when the period of the long press operation reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode is not performed, and the performance display device 1600 does not display the image of the performance that has been accepted. This allows the player to be made aware that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for a long time, the game will be stopped and the player will be unable to continue playing.

When the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game reaches a specific value and the game is switched to a stop-play preparation state, unlike when the progress-impossible display is displayed in the stop-play state, the reception of the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled, and it is possible to change to the auto button mode or the 3D display mode. Therefore, if the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204 is started while the advance notice display is displayed, and the game is switched to the stop-play preparation state before the long press operation period reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the performance during reception is not terminated in the middle of execution, and when the long press operation period reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the game is switched to the stop-play preparation state, the game is changed to the auto button or the 3D display, and the performance display device 1600 displays an image of the performance that has been accepted. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the long press operation of the setting adjustment button 204, it is possible to know whether the game has been switched to the stop-play preparation state or the stop-play preparation state, and after the game is switched to the stop-play preparation state, the corresponding performance is executed, so that the game can be played according to the needs of the player.

In the above, an example of changing to another mode such as the auto button mode or 3D display mode by pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 has been given, but the other modes that can be changed to by pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 are not limited to these modes. For example, the other mode may be a change to "another presentation mode in which advance notice presentations and reach presentations are executed in different ways." In addition, while an example of changing to another mode by pressing and holding the setting adjustment button 204 has been given, the player's operation that triggers the change to the other mode is not limited to a long press of the setting adjustment button 204, but may be a "short press of the setting adjustment button 204 or another button."

The timing for reflecting the change to the other mode, such as the auto button mode or the 3D display mode, is not limited to the above example, and for example, the change may be put on hold until the next time the special symbol starts to change, and the change to the other mode may be reflected when the next special symbol starts to change. In such a case, the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and reaches a plateau between the time the change to the other mode is put on hold and the time the next special symbol starts to change, so that the next special symbol does not start to change, and the change to the other mode cannot be reflected, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. In such a case, the control load on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced by erasing information about the fact that the change to the other mode is put on hold when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and reaches a plateau.

(Operation of the movable body after transition to the deadlock state)
As described above in detail, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value by the payout of the prize balls at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 or the like during the variable display of the special pattern, the game transitions to a stop state and the game is restricted. When the game transitions to the stop state, the performance display device 1600 displays a message "Game Restriction" as an image corresponding to the stop state, thereby notifying the user that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is restricted. However, during the variable display of the special pattern, as part of the variable performance, it is possible to move movable bodies such as the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 from a standby position to a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 in a performance pattern determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern. For this reason, when the display of the special symbols changes to the stop state during the display of the special symbols, the display of the special symbols is stopped. However, if the movable body is made to operate in the performance pattern determined at the start of the display of the special symbols after the display of the stop state, the display contents (images corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 are hidden by the movable body and cannot be seen, making it difficult to understand that the game is being restricted. In addition, when the display of the special symbols changes to the stop state during the display of the special symbols, not only the display of the special symbols is stopped but also the movable body is forcibly stopped, when the movable body stops in the performance position, the display contents (images corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 are hidden by the movable body and cannot be seen, making it difficult to understand that the game is being restricted. Therefore, in this example, a configuration in which the movable body does not stop in the performance position after the display of the special symbols changes to the stop state and the movable body does not move to the performance position anew will be described below.

The game board 5 in this example is provided with a back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 and a back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 as movable bodies that can appear in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In the normal state, the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 and the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 wait in a standby position located at the top of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, but at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special pattern, each movable body can perform a performance operation between the standby position and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

First, we will explain the operation of the movable body when the special symbol does not transition to a stop state during the variable display. Figure 144 is a time chart showing the operation of the movable body when the special symbol does not transition to a stop state during the variable display.

When the main control board 1310 detects balls entering various starting holes and starts the variable display of special symbols based on the balls entering the various starting holes, it determines one of multiple variable patterns based on the lottery results, and executes the variable display of special symbols based on the variable pattern in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device in the function display unit 1400. In addition, when the variable pattern is determined, it is transmitted as a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 determines a performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern. The content of the variable performance to be executed during the variable display of the special symbols is set for the performance pattern, and the variable performance is executed by using the performance display device 1600 to display the variable decoration symbols, the performance such as a reach performance, the light emission using a lamp, the sound output from the speaker, etc. In addition, the variable performance can also be executed for the operation of movable bodies such as the back front rising and falling decoration body unit 3310 and the back rear rising and falling decoration body 3410, and the operation schedule in which the operation timing and operation content of the movable bodies are set is instructed to be executed. Regarding this operation schedule, when the operation timing of the movable body arrives, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the operation process to operate the movable body, and starts the specified operation content. As the operation schedule, an operation schedule X in which the operation timing and operation content of the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) are set, and an operation schedule Y in which the operation timing and operation content of the back rear lifting decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) are set are set. In addition, the change pattern, performance pattern, and operation schedule are determined at the start of the change display of the special pattern, and after the change display of the special pattern starts, they are executed according to the change pattern, performance pattern, and operation schedule. In addition, the rear front rising decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear rising decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are operable when the variation pattern (presentation pattern) that is selected when the lottery result for the special symbol is a hit and the variation pattern (presentation pattern) that is selected as part of the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss are determined, and this operation can give the player a sense of anticipation regarding a win.

As shown in FIG. 144, when the variable display of the special pattern is started, if the variable pattern 1 is determined, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on the variable pattern 1. Also, when the variable display of the special pattern is started, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the performance pattern 1 corresponding to the variable pattern 1, and executes the variable performance based on the performance pattern 1 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, when the performance pattern 1 is determined, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) is instructed to execute the operation schedule X1, and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is instructed to execute the operation schedule Y1, but these operation schedules are not set to operate the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), and during the variable display of the special pattern, the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are in standby for operation.

Then, at timing t1, the variable display of the special pattern ends, and if variable pattern 2 is determined at the start of the variable display of the next special pattern, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on variable pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variable pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2. Of these operation schedules, operation schedule X2 is set so that the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) executes a performance action at timing tx when a predetermined period (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable display, whereas operation schedule Y2 is set so that the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) executes a performance action at timing ty when a predetermined period (e.g., 25 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Note that timing ty is later than timing tx, and is set to arrive after the performance action of the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed. And, if the game does not transition to a dead-end state during the variable display of the special pattern, at timing tx, the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) executes a performance action, and at timing ty, the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) executes a performance action.

Next, we will explain the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. Figure 145 is a time chart showing the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is not operated thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 145, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special pattern begins, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

And, at timing t2 before the arrival of timing tx, if a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern, and the game moves to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special pattern being executed based on the variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 forcibly stops the variable performance being executed based on the performance pattern 2. At this time, the performance display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable performance to an image corresponding to the dead state. Also, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) are prohibited from operation. Therefore, even if timing tx arrives after the transition to the stop state at timing t2, the predetermined performance action will not be executed for the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and even if timing ty arrives, the predetermined performance action will not be executed for the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y).

In this way, at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the timing tx for executing the performance operation of the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the timing ty for executing the performance operation of the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are determined, but if the game transitions to a dead-end state at timing t2 before timing tx arrives, the performance operation that was predetermined for the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) will not be executed when timing tx arrives, and the performance operation that was predetermined for the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed when timing ty arrives. As a result, when the game enters a no-play state, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play Restrictions" as an image corresponding to the no-play state; however, the display content (the image corresponding to the no-play state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not obscured by the performance action of the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), preventing the player from becoming unaware that a play restriction has been implemented.

In the above embodiment, at the time t2 when the state is stopped, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back-rear ascent and descent decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped. As another example, the operation schedules themselves may be continued without being forcibly stopped, while the operation of the movable bodies X and Y may be stopped by control independent of the operation schedule. For example, at the time t2 when the state is stopped, in order to forcibly prohibit the operation of the back-front ascent and descent decoration body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear ascent and descent decoration body 3410 (movable body Y), a motion prohibition flag may be turned on, and it may be determined whether or not to operate the movable bodies X and Y depending on the state of the motion prohibition flag. In such a case, even if timing tx arrives in the operation schedule that continues even after the transition to the dead-end state, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a predetermined presentation action for the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) based on the operation prohibition flag being on, and even if timing ty arrives, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a predetermined presentation action for the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) based on the operation prohibition flag being on, eliminating the need to change the operation schedule when transitioning to the dead-end state and making it possible to avoid complicating the game design.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, at the time t2 when the state is changed to the stopped state, the image corresponding to the variable performance is forcibly changed to the image corresponding to the stopped state, but it is also possible to continue the image corresponding to the variable performance without forcibly stopping it, and display the image corresponding to the stopped state in a higher layer (a layer higher than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the variable performance) in the performance display device 1600, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state can be viewed in the performance display device 1600.

In the above embodiment, out of concern that the fact that the game restriction is being executed may not be understood, all of the variable effects being executed based on the presentation pattern 2 are forcibly stopped at the time t2 when the game is stopped, but as another example, it is possible to continue some of the variable effects being executed based on the presentation pattern 2 without forcibly stopping all of the variable effects being executed. In other words, it is possible to execute normal control for only some of the presentation elements that constitute the variable effects consisting of "sound, light, image, movable body". For example, in the case of forcibly stopping only "sound, light, image" out of the presentation elements "sound, light, image, movable body" that constitute the variable effects, at the time t2 when the game is stopped, the presentation of movable body X and Y in the variable effects based on the presentation pattern is continued, but the image corresponding to the variable effects is forcibly changed to an image corresponding to the stopped state, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state can be viewed on the presentation display device 1600. In this case, as described above, there is a possibility that the fact that a game restriction is being implemented may become unclear due to the performance action of the movable bodies X and Y, but in this example, a preliminary notification that a game restriction is being implemented is provided by performance elements such as "sound" or "light" that are not hindered by the performance action of the movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, at the time t2 when the game is stopped, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable performance to warn by "sound," or the control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable performance to warn by "light." This makes it possible to avoid not being able to know that a game restriction is being implemented even if all variable performances being implemented are not forcibly stopped.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a case is described in which the state transitions to a stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is not operated thereafter, but if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, when the first performance button 251 is made to vibrate by a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first performance button 251, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first performance button 251 (movable body) according to the performance pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern when the variation pattern is determined, and vibrates the first performance button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variation display of the special pattern ... This prevents the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) from activating while an image corresponding to the end of play state is being displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the game has been stopped, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game transitions to the stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special pattern and the movable body is not operated thereafter is described. However, even if the game transitions to the stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, etc., the movable body may not be operated thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the movable body is executed according to the performance pattern during the jackpot game, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during the jackpot game. In this configuration, if the game transitions to the stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, the movable body is not operated regardless of whether the performance pattern or operation schedule is continuously executed thereafter. This makes it possible to prevent the movable body from operating while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the game transitions to the stop state, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is shut off at timing t3 while the stalled state is occurring, and then turned back on at timing t4. Here, we will explain the case where, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on patterns, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state.

At timing t4, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls dispensed is cleared but the stop state is maintained. In addition, in a situation where the stop state is maintained, the forced stop is maintained for the variable display of the special pattern based on the variable pattern. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a situation where the stop state is maintained, the forced stop is maintained for the variable performance based on the performance pattern, and the forced stop is also maintained for the operation schedule for the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear lifting decoration body 3410 (movable body Y). However, when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the back front lifting decoration body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear lifting decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z that is not related to the fluctuation of the special pattern, and these movable bodies execute their initial operations at least at timing t4 when the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the initial operation of the back-front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear ascent and descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y), an operation is performed to determine whether each movable body moves normally from the standby position to the performance position and whether it returns normally to the standby position. Specifically, the operation schedule Z is set so that the back-front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) executes its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the power is turned back on, while the back-rear ascent and descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) executes its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the power is turned back on. Note that the initial operation of the back-rear ascent and descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is performed after the initial operation of the back-front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed.

In this way, even if the stop state is maintained when the power is re-applied and the forced stop of the rear front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear ascent and descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial operation of those movable bodies is permitted to be executed. As a result, even if a malfunction occurs in which the rear front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear ascent and descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are not in the standby position before and after the stop state before the power is re-applied, those movable bodies will return to the standby position by the initial operation, and the display content (image corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 will not remain hidden due to the occurrence of a malfunction in which those movable bodies are not in the standby position, and it is possible to prevent the fact that the game restriction is being executed from becoming unclear.

On the other hand, at timing t4, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls dispensed and the state of the balls being stopped are cleared. Even in such a case, when the power is turned back on, the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z, and these movable bodies execute their initial operations. After the initial operations of the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are completed, the forced stop is released for the variable display of the special pattern based on the variable pattern, and the display is made to wait for execution. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, the forced stop is released for the variable performance based on the performance pattern, and the display is made to wait for execution, and the forced stop is released for the operation schedule for the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) and the display is made to wait for operation.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the stop state is maintained when the power is re-applied and the forced stop of the back front rising and lowering decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear rising and lowering decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial operation of those movable bodies is executed. However, when the movable body is in the standby position, the control load may be emphasized and the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted not to be executed. In addition, even if the movable body is not in the standby position, the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted not to be executed for the following reason. That is, if the initial operation of the movable body is not executed even though the movable body is not in the standby position, when a malfunction occurs in which the back front rising and lowering decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back rear rising and lowering decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) is not in the standby position before the power is re-applied, the movable bodies can be maintained in a state where they are not in the standby position after the power is re-applied, and the hall manager can be made aware that a malfunction has occurred in those movable bodies. However, in this case, there is a concern that the display content (image corresponding to the dead-end state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 will remain hidden due to a malfunction in which the movable body is not in the standby position, so it is desirable to display the image corresponding to the dead-end state in a display area of the display area of the performance display device 1600 that is not obstructed by the movable body, or to use a device other than the performance display device 1600 to issue an alert corresponding to the dead-end state.

Next, we will explain the case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. Figure 146 is a time chart showing the case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the movable body is not operated thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 146, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special pattern begins, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

Also, when the timing tx arrives during the variable display of the special pattern, a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) based on the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X). Then, during the execution of the performance operation for the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), if a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern at timing t2 and the game transitions to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special pattern being executed based on the variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 forcibly stops the variable performance being executed based on the performance pattern 2. At this time, the performance display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable performance to an image corresponding to the dead state. In addition, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back-front ascent and descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are also forcibly stopped. However, the performance action being executed for the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not end in the middle of the predetermined performance action at timing t2, but continues to be executed until the predetermined performance action is completed. Then, the operation is prohibited until the predetermined performance action for the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed and the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is returned to the standby position.

On the other hand, at the time of the transition to the stop state at timing t2, the predetermined performance action has not been started for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), and the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is in a state of being prohibited from operating. Even if timing ty arrives thereafter, the predetermined performance action for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 145.

In this way, after starting a predetermined performance action for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at timing tx, if a transition to a play-stop state occurs at timing t2 during the execution of that performance action, the predetermined performance action does not end midway, but continues to be executed until the predetermined performance action is completed. As a result, when a transition to a play-stop state occurs, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play Restriction" as an image corresponding to the play-stop state, but the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not forcibly stopped at a position other than the standby position, and the display content (image corresponding to the play-stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not continuously hidden, which prevents the player from being unable to understand that a play restriction is being implemented. Furthermore, at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the timing ty for executing the performance operation of the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is determined, but if the timing ty has not arrived at the time t2 when the game transitions to the dead-end state, the performance operation that was previously determined for the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed when the timing ty arrives. This prevents the display content (image corresponding to the dead-end state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from being hidden by the performance operation of the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), preventing the player from not being able to understand that a game restriction is being implemented.

The behavior when the power is turned off at time t3 while the termination state is occurring and then turned back on at time t4 is as described above.

In the above embodiment, the performance operation being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not terminated midway at the time of the transition to the deadlock state t2, but is continued until the predetermined performance operation is completed, so that the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to the standby position, but the method of returning to the standby position is not limited to this. For example, as another example, at the time of the transition to the deadlock state t2, the performance operation being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not performed until it is completed, but is forcibly terminated midway through the operation being performed, and in a situation where the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not in the standby position after the forcible termination, a dedicated operation schedule for returning to the standby position is separately executed, so that the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to the standby position.

In the above embodiment, at the time t2 when the state is stopped, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back front ascent and descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back rear ascent and descent decoration body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped. As another example, the operation schedules themselves may be continued without being forcibly stopped, and the operation of the movable bodies X and Y may be stopped by control independent of the operation schedule. For example, at the time t2 when the state is stopped, in order to forcibly prohibit the operation of the back front ascent and descent decoration body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back rear ascent and descent decoration body 3410 (movable body Y), a motion prohibition flag may be turned on, and it may be determined whether or not to operate the movable bodies X and Y, except for the performance operation being executed for the movable body X, depending on the state of the motion prohibition flag. In such a case, even if timing ty arrives in the operation schedule that continues after the transition to the dead-end state, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) based on the fact that the operation prohibition flag is on, making it unnecessary to change the operation schedule in conjunction with the transition to the dead-end state and making it possible to avoid complicating the game design.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, at the time t2 when the state is changed to the stopped state, the image corresponding to the variable performance is forcibly changed to the image corresponding to the stopped state, but it is also possible to continue the image corresponding to the variable performance without forcibly stopping it, and display the image corresponding to the stopped state in a higher layer (a layer higher than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the variable performance) in the performance display device 1600, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state can be viewed in the performance display device 1600.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, out of concern that the fact that the game restriction is being executed will not be understood, at the time t2 when the game is stopped, the variable performance being executed based on the performance pattern 2 is forcibly stopped, except for the performance operation being executed on the movable body X. In other words, only "sound, light, and image" out of the performance elements "sound, light, image, and movable body" that constitute the variable performance are forcibly stopped. Therefore, at the time t2 when the game is stopped, the performance being executed on the movable body X among the variable performances based on the performance pattern is continued, but the image corresponding to the variable performance is forcibly changed to an image corresponding to the stopped state, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state can be seen on the performance display device 1600. In this case, as described above, there is a possibility that the fact that the game restriction is being executed will not be understood due to the performance operation being executed on the movable body X, but in this example, the fact that the game restriction is being executed is preliminarily notified by performance elements such as "sound" or "light" that are not hindered by the performance operation being executed on the movable body X. Specifically, at the time t2 when the game is stopped, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable performance, to warn with "sound," or the control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable performance, to warn with "light." This makes it possible to avoid not being able to grasp that a restriction on play is being imposed, even if the performance action being performed on the movable body X continues until completion.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a transition to a stop state occurs during the operation of the movable body during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body in operation continues to execute until its operation is completed, and thereafter the movable body is not operated. However, if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, when the first performance button 251 is made to vibrate by a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first performance button 251, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first performance button 251 (movable body) according to the performance pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern when the variation pattern is determined, and vibrates the first performance button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variation display of the special pattern at the time of winning and at the time of losing, giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the win. In this configuration, when the first performance button 251 is vibrating during the variation display of the special pattern, the first performance button 251 continues to be vibrated until the operation is completed, regardless of whether the variation pattern or the operation schedule is being continuously executed thereafter, and the first performance button 251 is not vibrated again. This prevents the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) from continuing to operate while an image corresponding to the end of play state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the game has entered the end of play state, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the above embodiment, the moving body is moved to the stop state during the operation of the moving body during the variable display of the special pattern, and the moving body continues to operate until the operation is completed, and the moving body is not operated thereafter. However, even if the moving body is moved to the stop state during the operation of the moving body during a jackpot game, the moving body may continue to operate until the operation is completed, and the moving body may not be operated thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the moving body is executed according to the performance pattern during the jackpot game, and the moving body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during the jackpot game. In this configuration, when the moving body is moved to the stop state during the operation of the moving body during the jackpot game, the moving body continues to operate until it continues to operate, regardless of whether the performance pattern or the operation schedule is continued thereafter, and the moving body is not operated again. This makes it possible to prevent the moving body from continuing to operate while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the stop state, giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, a case where the game goes to a stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special symbol, and the movable body is then operated will be described. In the above, when the game goes to a stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable performance based on the performance pattern is forcibly stopped, and the predetermined performance action for the movable body is not executed even if the operation timing of the movable body arrives. However, in such a case, there is a drawback that the variable performance being executed ends midway, which is very disappointing for players who have been looking forward to the performance action of the movable body. Figure 147 is a time chart showing a case where the game goes to a stop state before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special symbol, and the movable body is then operated.

As shown in FIG. 147, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special pattern begins, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

And, at timing t2 before the arrival of timing tx, if a game ball enters the general winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern, and the game moves to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special pattern being executed based on the variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. However, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 does not forcibly stop the variable performance being executed based on the performance pattern 2, and continues the execution until the variable performance is completed. In other words, the performance display device 1600 does not change to an image corresponding to the dead state, but continues the image corresponding to the variable performance. In addition, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are not forcibly stopped, and continue to be executed until those operation schedules are completed. Therefore, after transitioning to a stop state at timing t2, when timing tx arrives, a predetermined performance action is executed for the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and when timing ty arrives, a predetermined performance action is executed for the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y).

Then, at timing t2, after the transition to the stalled state, when the variable performance being executed based on performance pattern 2 is completed, a forced stop is performed and no new variable performance is executed. At this time, the performance display device 1600 starts displaying an image corresponding to the stalled state. Also, when the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, a forced stop is performed and the movable bodies are placed in an operation-prohibited state so that they cannot operate.

In this way, when the timing tx for executing the performance operation of the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the timing ty for executing the performance operation of the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, even if the game moves to a deadlock state at timing t2 before the arrival of timing tx, the predetermined performance operation is executed for the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) when timing tx arrives, and the predetermined performance operation is executed for the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) when timing ty arrives. As a result, for players who have been looking forward to the performance operation of the movable body after the start of the variable performance, even if the game moves to a deadlock state during the execution of the variable performance, they can at least enjoy the performance operation of the movable body to the end, and disappointment of the player can be suppressed.

The behavior when the power is turned off at time t3 while the termination state is occurring and then turned back on at time t4 is as described above.

In the above-described embodiment, after the transition to the stop state at timing t2, when the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, it is forcibly stopped and the movable body is placed in an operation prohibited state so that it does not operate. However, the operation schedule X2 may also be forcibly stopped and the movable body placed in an operation prohibited state so that it does not operate when the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed before the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed. Similarly, at timing t2, after transitioning to the stop state, when the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, it is forcibly stopped and the movable body is placed in a state of being prohibited from operating, but it is also possible to forcibly stop the operation schedule Y2 at the point where the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed before the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, and to place the movable body in a state of being prohibited from operating.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a transition to a stop state is made before the operation timing of the movable body during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated. However, if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, when the first performance button 251 is made to vibrate by a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first performance button 251, the peripheral control board 1510 executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first performance button 251 (movable body) according to the performance pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern when the variation pattern is determined, and vibrates the first performance button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variation display of the special pattern at the time of winning and at a time of losing, giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the win. In this configuration, if the game is stopped before the vibration timing of the first performance button 251 during the variation display of the special pattern, the performance pattern and operation schedule are continued thereafter, and the first performance button 251 is vibrated at a predetermined vibration timing. As a result, after the game has reached the end of its run state, the image corresponding to the end of the run state is displayed on the performance display device 1600, while the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) continues to operate, allowing the player to enjoy the game to the end, preventing disappointment for the player.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game is stopped before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special pattern is described, and the movable body is operated thereafter. However, even if the game is stopped before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, the movable body may be operated thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the movable body is executed according to the performance pattern during the jackpot game, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during the jackpot game. In this configuration, if the game is stopped before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, the performance pattern and operation schedule are continued thereafter, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing. As a result, while an image corresponding to the stopped state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the game is stopped, the player can enjoy the operation of the movable body to the end, and disappointment of the player can be suppressed.

Next, the case where a moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently moved, has been explained above. Here, the relationship between the display screen of the performance display device 1600 and the operation of the moving body in such a case will be explained. Figure 148 is a specific example of a performance where a moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently moved.

As shown in FIG. 148(A), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a variable display is executed based on the performance pattern, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 but the variable display of the special symbol is pending, and it is possible to change the state of the pending display that has a high probability of winning. Here, the game is in a "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, and the lower right area of the performance display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in the "consecutive win mode," and displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 provided in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during the "consecutive win mode." During the display of the decorative symbol variations, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of the performance display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time has passed since the display started.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern variation during the "consecutive mode", a pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed. The performance display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern variation display in the central area, the second decorative pattern variation display in the upper right area, the "consecutive mode" message and the "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, and the hold display in the lower left area. The pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays related to the variable game being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative pattern variation display", "second decorative pattern variation display", "'consecutive mode' message", "'hit right' arrow", "hold display", and "images corresponding to sound volume and light volume" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, as long as the information displays are not completely overlapped and invisible to the player, but the content of the information displays can be recognized, the advance notice display may be overlapped on at least a portion of the information displays. This allows the player to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information displays related to the variable play in progress.

As shown in FIG. 148(B), when a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) during the variable display of the special pattern, the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), effectively appealing that the movable body is performing a performance operation. In addition, the advance notice display of "+10 balls remaining until the game limit" and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), making it easy to see whether the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a stop state during the performance operation of the movable body. In addition, the advance warning display may be overlapped by the rear-front rising decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at least in part, so long as the advance warning display is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but the content of the advance warning display can be recognized.

As shown in FIG. 148(C), during the performance operation of the rear front ascending and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning port 2001, the state transitions to a stop state, and in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a pre-notification display of "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) as a pre-notification operation, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls", the display of the change in the decorative pattern and the display of the change in the second decorative pattern are displayed, but when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls", the display of the change in the decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern (in this example, "767"), and the display of the change in the second decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern (in this example, "x"). However, the display of the changing decorative pattern and the display of the changing second decorative pattern may not be forcibly stopped.

After the game has entered the limit state, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the player to shoot the game ball invisible to the player, so that the player does not accidentally shoot the game ball; in this example, this arrow is erased. Then, when a predetermined time (five seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notice display "+0 shots remaining until game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the limit state shown in FIG. 148 (D) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 148 (D), when the game is stopped, the performance operation being performed on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not end in the middle of the predetermined performance operation, but continues to be performed until the predetermined performance operation is completed. However, when the game is stopped, the light emitter provided on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is controlled to end in the middle of the light emission corresponding to the variable performance, and to either turn off the light or emit light corresponding to the stopped state. As a result, when the game is stopped, the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, so that only a part of the image corresponding to the stopped state can be seen, but the light emission of the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) changes, so that it is possible to avoid not being able to understand that the game is being restricted. In this example, when the game transitions to the dead-end state, the light emitter on the rear-front rising and lowering decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) stops emitting light corresponding to the variable performance in the middle of the process, but it is also possible to continue emitting light corresponding to the variable performance until the predetermined performance operation is completed. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the light emission pattern when the game transitions to the dead-end state, and it is possible to avoid complicating the game design.

As shown in FIG. 148(E), when the predetermined performance operation is completed, the movable body returns to the standby position and is not positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and the entire image corresponding to the stop state can be seen. Here, as the image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Playing limited" is displayed, along with messages such as "Playing is limited because the daily ball output limit of 80,000 balls has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is valid." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch 180 for executing the settlement process. In addition, when the amount of balls output reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern, the stopping pattern of the second decorative pattern, the reserved display, and the advance notice display, but such information regarding the game is not displayed (made invisible) at the point when the message "Playing limited" is displayed after the amount of balls output reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a certain value and that restrictions on play have been imposed, and that restrictions on play cannot be lifted without the operation of the hall manager. In addition, the player can know that the number of balls held by the player can be settled by operating the counting button switch 180.

In addition, after the transition to the no-play state, while the performance operation is being performed on the rear-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), so that the player can at least recognize that the transition to the no-play state has occurred while the performance operation is being performed on the movable body. Note that the message "Play Limit" may be overlapped by the rear-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at least in part, so long as the message is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but is sufficient to enable the player to recognize that the transition to the no-play state has occurred.

In addition, in the above, when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) before transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are displayed in the area of the performance display device 1600 that does not overlap with the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), but when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) after transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are not displayed in the area of the performance display device 1600 that does not overlap with the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X). As a result, even if an image corresponding to the dead-end state cannot be seen when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), it is possible to determine whether the performance operation is before transitioning to the dead-end state or after transitioning to the dead-end state based on whether an effect is displayed.

In the above, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204 during the display of the decorative pattern, but even after the special pattern is displayed in a variable state, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, the performance display device 1600 can display an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted. However, after the display is in a variable state, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted may not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the image corresponding to the variable state from becoming difficult to see after the display is in a variable state. Also, after the display is in a variable state, the volume and light intensity can be made unadjustable by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity may not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the image corresponding to the variable state from becoming difficult to see and the sound corresponding to the variable state from becoming difficult to recognize after the display is in a variable state without changing the volume and light intensity.

In addition, even if it has been decided to execute a performance operation on the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) before transitioning to the dead-end state, if the performance operation has not been started on the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) at the time of transition to the dead-end state, the performance operation that was previously determined for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed after transitioning to the dead-end state. This prevents the display content (image corresponding to the dead-end state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from being obscured by the performance operation of the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), preventing a situation in which it becomes impossible to know that a restriction on play is being implemented.

Next, the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated, has been explained above. Here, the relationship between the display screen of the performance display device 1600 and the operation of the movable body in such a case will be explained. Figure 149 is a specific performance example where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated.

As shown in FIG. 149(A), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a variable display is executed based on the performance pattern, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 but the variable display of the special symbol is waiting, and it is possible to change the state of the pending display that has a high possibility of winning. Here, the game is in a "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, and the lower right area of the performance display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in the "consecutive win mode," and displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 provided in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during the "consecutive win mode." During the display of the decorative symbol variations, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of the performance display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time has passed since the display started.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern variation during the "consecutive mode", a pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed. The performance display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern variation display in the central area, the second decorative pattern variation display in the upper right area, the "consecutive mode" message and the "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, and the hold display in the lower left area. The pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays related to the variable game being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative pattern variation display", "second decorative pattern variation display", "'consecutive mode' message", "'hit right' arrow", "hold display", and "images corresponding to sound volume and light volume" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, as long as the information displays are not completely overlapped and invisible to the player, but the content of the information displays can be recognized, the advance notice display may be overlapped on at least a portion of the information displays. This allows the player to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information displays related to the variable play in progress.

As shown in FIG. 149(B), during the display of the special pattern, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning port 2001, the state transitions to a stop state, and in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a pre-notification display of "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed as an operation at the time of pre-notification, which informs the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the decorative pattern and the display of the second decorative pattern are displayed, but when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the second decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern (in this example, "x"). On the other hand, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the decorative pattern is continued without being forcibly stopped. However, the display of the second decorative pattern may also continue without being forcibly stopped. In such a case, the display of the second decorative pattern is set to stop when the display of the decorative pattern stops.

After the game has reached the stop state, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow, which encourages the player to shoot the game ball, invisible to the player so that the player does not accidentally shoot the game ball; in this example, this arrow is erased.

As shown in FIG. 149(C), after the game has been stopped, when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), effectively appealing that the movable body is performing a performance action. In addition, the advance notice display of "+0 shots remaining until the game limit" and the change display of the second decorative pattern are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), so that the player can understand that the game has already been stopped. Note that the advance notice display may be overlapped with at least a part of the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) as long as the contents of the advance notice display can be recognized without being completely overlapped and becoming invisible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 149 (D), when a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) following the rear front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), effectively appealing that the movable body is performing a performance operation. In addition, the advance notice display of "+0 shots remaining until the game limit" and the change display of the second decorative pattern are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), allowing the player to understand that the game has already transitioned to the limit state. In addition, the advance warning display may be overlapped by the rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) at least in part, so long as the advance warning display is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but the content of the advance warning display can be recognized.

As shown in FIG. 149(E), when the execution of the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern is completed, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "767"). Then, when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern stopped, an image corresponding to the limit state shown in FIG. 149(F) is displayed. The image corresponding to the limit state is as described above. In this example, when the limit state is entered, the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern continues, and the image corresponding to the limit state is not displayed immediately. However, during this period, a pre-notification display of "+0 shots remaining until the game limit" and a variable display of the second decorative pattern that was forcibly stopped are displayed, so that it is possible to understand that the limit state has already been entered.

As described above, in this example, when the game is stopped, the variable performance based on the performance pattern is continued, and the performance display device 1600 does not display an image corresponding to the stopped state, and notifies the player that the game is being restricted by displaying a pre-notification display of "+0 shots remaining until the game is restricted" or a display of the variable second decorative pattern that has been forcibly stopped. In this case, since it may be impossible to know that the game is being restricted by the performance operation of the movable bodies X and Y, it is also possible to preliminarily notify the player that the game is being restricted by a performance element such as "sound" or "light" that is not hindered by the performance operation of the movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, when the game is stopped, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable performance, and a warning may be given by "sound", or the control may be changed to execute a warning light emission different from the light corresponding to the variable performance, and a warning may be given by "light". This makes it possible to avoid not being able to know that the game is being restricted, even if a performance operation that was previously determined for the movable bodies X and Y is executed after the game is stopped.

Next, in the above, when the game transitions to the dead state, the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern is continued, and when the execution of the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern is completed, an image corresponding to the dead state is displayed. However, as another example, when the game transitions to the dead state, the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern may be continued, but an image corresponding to the dead state may be displayed in a higher layer than the image corresponding to the variable presentation. Figure 150 is another example of a specific presentation when the game transitions to the dead state before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is operated thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 150(A), when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a variable display is executed based on the performance pattern, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the central area of the performance display device 1600. Also, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the upper right area of the performance display device 1600. Also, in the lower left area of the performance display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 but the variable display of the special symbol is pending, and it is possible to change the state of the pending display that has a high probability of winning. Here, the game is in a "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, and the lower right area of the performance display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in the "consecutive win mode," and displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 provided in the game area 5a to the right of the performance display device 1600 during the "consecutive win mode." During the display of the decorative symbol variations, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of the performance display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain time has passed since the display started.

In addition, during the display of the decorative pattern variation during the "consecutive mode", a pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed. The performance display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern variation display in the central area, the second decorative pattern variation display in the upper right area, the "consecutive mode" message and the "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, and the hold display in the lower left area. The pre-notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap with important information displays related to the variable game being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative pattern variation display", "second decorative pattern variation display", "'consecutive mode' message", "'hit right' arrow", "hold display", and "images corresponding to sound volume and light volume" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, as long as the information displays are not completely overlapped and invisible to the player, but the content of the information displays can be recognized, the advance notice display may be overlapped on at least a portion of the information displays. This allows the player to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information displays related to the variable play in progress.

As shown in FIG. 150(B), during the display of the special pattern, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning port 2001, the game is stopped, and in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, a pre-notification display of "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed as an operation at the time of pre-notification, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the decorative pattern and the display of the second decorative pattern are displayed, but when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the second decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern (in this example, "x"). On the other hand, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0", the display of the decorative pattern is continued without being forcibly stopped. However, the display of the second decorative pattern may also continue without being forcibly stopped. In such a case, the display of the second decorative pattern is set to stop when the display of the decorative pattern stops.

After the game has entered the dead-end state, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the player to launch the game ball invisible to the player, so that the player does not accidentally launch the game ball; in this example, this is made invisible. Then, when a predetermined time (five seconds in this example) has elapsed since the advance notice display of "+0 shots remaining until game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the dead-end state shown in Figure 150 (C) is displayed in a layer above the image corresponding to the variable presentation. The image corresponding to the dead-end state is as described above.

As shown in FIG. 150 (D), after the game has been stopped, when a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In addition, while the performance operation is being performed on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), so that the player can at least recognize that the game has been stopped while the performance operation is being performed on the movable body. Note that the message "Play Limit" may be overlapped by the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at least in part, as long as the message is not completely overlapped and the player cannot see it, but is sufficient to recognize that the game has been stopped.

As shown in FIG. 150 (E), when a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 (movable body Y) following the rear-front rising decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. In addition, during the performance operation on the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 (movable body Y), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 (movable body Y), so that the player can at least recognize that the game has stopped during the performance operation on the movable body. Note that the message "Play Limit" may be overlapped by the rear-rear rising decoration 3410 (movable body Y) at least in part, as long as the message is not completely overlapped and the player cannot see it, but is sufficient to recognize that the game has stopped.

After the game has been stopped, the light emitters provided on the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are controlled to end the light emission corresponding to the variable performance midway and either turn off or emit light corresponding to the stopped state. As a result, after the game has been stopped, when the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, only a part of the image corresponding to the stopped state can be seen, but the change in the light emission of the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) can be avoided from not being able to understand that a game restriction is being implemented. In this example, after the transition to the dead-end state, the light emitters on the rear-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) stop emitting light corresponding to the variable presentation midway, but the light emission corresponding to the variable presentation may be continued until the predetermined presentation operation is completed. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the light emission pattern when the transition to the dead-end state is made, and it is possible to avoid complicating the game design.

In this example, when the game is stopped, the variable performance based on the performance pattern continues, but the performance display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state in a layer higher than the image corresponding to the variable performance to notify the player that the game is being restricted. In this case, since the performance operation of the movable bodies X and Y may prevent the player from knowing that the game is being restricted, the player may be notified in advance that the game is being restricted by a performance element such as "sound" or "light" that is not hindered by the performance operation of the movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, when the game is stopped, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable performance, and a warning may be given by "sound," or the control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable performance, and a warning may be given by "light." This can be used to avoid the player being unable to know that the game is being restricted, even if a performance operation that was previously determined for the movable bodies X and Y is executed after the game is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 150 (F), when the execution of the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern is completed, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops at a specified stopping pattern (in this example, "767"). However, since an image corresponding to the dead end state is displayed in a layer above the image corresponding to the variable presentation, the player does not realize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped.

In addition, when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) before transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are displayed in areas of the performance display device 1600 that do not overlap with the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). However, when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) after transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are not displayed in areas of the performance display device 1600 that do not overlap with the back-front ascent and descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear ascent and descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). As a result, even if the image corresponding to the deadlock state cannot be seen when a performance action is being performed on the back-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), it is possible to determine whether the performance action is before the transition to the deadlock state or after the transition to the deadlock state by whether or not the effect is displayed.

(Energy saving mode after transition to the cutoff state)
In this example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was fixed without the start of the variable display of a new special symbol, a predetermined demonstration performance (e.g., display of a performance explanation or a promotional image, etc.) is started, but after a certain time has elapsed since the start of the demonstration performance (e.g., after the demonstration performance is repeated twice), it is possible to switch to an energy saving mode to save standby power. In such an energy saving mode, not only is the demonstration performance not executed, but also the sound output is stopped and some lamps are turned off, and the performance display device 1600 notifies the fact that the energy saving mode is being executed. However, if the energy saving mode is executed in the same manner not only in the normal standby state (a standby state that is not a capped state) but also after the amount of balls has reached a specific value and transitioned to a capped state, it becomes difficult to know whether the state in the energy saving mode is a capped state, and it becomes difficult to understand that a restriction on play is being executed. Therefore, in this example, a configuration is described below that makes it possible to transition to energy saving mode during normal standby state and during stopped state, while differing the behavior during energy saving mode depending on whether it is normal standby state or stopped state.

First, the energy saving mode will be described. In this example, whether or not to switch to the energy saving mode during the non-changing display of the special symbol (when no game is being played) can be set by the manager according to the business form of the game hall. Specifically, when the energy saving mode setting switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is turned ON, the energy saving mode can be started during the non-changing display of the special symbol, and when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned OFF, the energy saving mode cannot be started during the non-changing display of the special symbol. Note that in this example, as described later, the energy saving mode is switched to after the demonstration performance is performed with the energy saving mode setting switch turned ON, but this is not limited to this. As another example, the energy saving mode may be switched to without fail after the demonstration performance is performed without providing the energy saving mode setting switch.

Next, the relationship between the demonstration performance and the energy saving mode in this example will be explained. In this example, during the non-variable display of the special pattern with the energy saving mode setting switch ON, the energy saving mode is started after passing through the normal standby state. Here, the "normal standby state" in this example is a standby state that is not a stop state, and includes a period in which the performance display device 1600 displays a stopped decorative pattern, and a period in which the performance display device 1600 and other devices perform an operation corresponding to a specified demonstration performance (for example, displaying or emitting an image for performance explanation or advertising). Details of the demonstration performance will be described later. In this example, when the energy saving mode setting switch is ON, the energy saving mode is entered based on the end of a predetermined number of demonstration performances. In the energy saving mode, the demonstration performance is not executed, and the performance display device 1600 and other devices are controlled by an operation corresponding to the energy saving mode.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as the game progresses, the game is transitioned to a stop state in which the game cannot proceed. In such a stop state, the operation corresponding to the stop state is executed in priority over the operation corresponding to the demonstration performance, and the fact that the stop state is being executed is reliably notified. In addition, when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the energy saving mode can be started even in the stop state, but the energy saving mode is started at a timing different from the timing of starting the energy saving mode when the game is not in the stop state. In other words, when the energy saving mode is started during the stop state, the energy saving mode is switched to when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the notification mode of the stop state, which will be described later, has transitioned to notification mode B. And when the energy saving mode is entered during the stop state, the operation corresponding to the energy saving mode is executed for the performance display device 1600 and other devices in a manner different from the case of transitioning to the energy saving mode via the normal standby state.

Figure 151 is a table comparing the notification modes regarding light emission and sound in the normal standby state, the energy saving mode, and the stalled state. In this example, it is possible to switch to the energy saving mode during the stalled state, and before the switch to the energy saving mode, the energy saving mode does not occur during the stalled state, but after the switch to the energy saving mode, the energy saving mode occurs during the stalled state.

First, the normal standby state includes a time when the demonstration performance is not executed (when standby performance 1 is executed) and a time when the demonstration performance is executed (when standby performance 2 is executed). Specifically, in the normal standby state, standby performance 1 is executed in which the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is left displayed without executing the demonstration performance until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern is fixed and stopped, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern is fixed and stopped, the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is erased and the first demonstration performance (standby performance 2) is started. Then, after the first demonstration performance ends, standby performance 1 is executed in which the stopped pattern of the decorative pattern is left displayed without executing the demonstration performance until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed again, and when the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the second demonstration performance (standby performance 2) is started. Note that, when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device transitions to the energy saving mode after the second demonstration performance ends. In addition, when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned OFF, after the second demonstration performance ends, standby performance 1 is performed again, followed by the third demonstration performance, and thereafter standby performance 1 and the demonstration performance are repeated.

As described above, when the demonstration performance is not being executed, a stopped decorative pattern is displayed as standby display 1 (standby performance 1), and standby display 1 is displayed in a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, in this example, the performance display device 1600 is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, in an overlapping manner, and in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," the higher the layer display, the closer it is to the front, allowing it to be viewed with priority.

On the other hand, when the demonstration performance is being executed, the following demonstration image is displayed as standby display 2 (standby performance 2). Specifically, first, the performance explanation of the pachinko machine 1 and the display (movie) of promotional images are executed using the performance display device 1600, and at the end of the execution, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. After the logo of the model title is displayed, the performance display device 1600 executes the logo display of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, and then displays a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to prevent excessive addiction to the game (for example, a text display of "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted") to prevent the player from becoming excessively addicted to the game. By displaying such a warning message, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively addicted to the game in the subsequent game. Note that the standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, during the normal standby state, a specified sound is output from the speaker during the period when standby display 1 (standby performance 1) is being performed, but after standby display 1 (standby performance 1) ends, the sound is not output from the speaker and the sound is muted. In other words, during the period when standby display 1 (standby performance 1) is being performed, sound such as background music corresponding to standby display 1 (standby performance 1) is output, but when standby display 1 (standby performance 1) ends and standby display 2 (standby performance 2) is being performed, no sound is output.

In addition, in the normal standby state, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are lit or blink in the normal notification mode. Specifically, when the demonstration performance is not being performed, the LEDs blink or light in the notification mode corresponding to standby performance 1 as the normal notification mode, whereas when the demonstration performance is being performed, the LEDs blink or light in the notification mode corresponding to demonstration performance (standby performance 2) as the normal notification mode. In addition, the LED of lamp C is lit in a reference brightness confirmation mode in which the reference brightness can be confirmed by emitting light at a predetermined specific brightness in comparison with the brightness of lamps A and B. In other words, the brightness of lamps A and B changes depending on the setting status by operating the setting adjustment button 204, whereas the brightness of lamp C does not change regardless of the setting status by operating the setting adjustment button 204, making it easy to determine whether the brightness of lamps A and B has changed. Also, for lamp C, the LED may be configured to emit light in the reference brightness confirmation mode even when the demonstration performance is not being performed, but in consideration of the load caused by constantly emitting light, it may be possible to start emitting light in the reference brightness confirmation mode when a specific operation to start emitting light is performed. For example, when a specific condition to start emitting light is met (for example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated or other operations are accepted), the light emission in the reference brightness confirmation mode may be started and the light may be turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, by providing a plurality of LEDs constituting lamp C, even if one of the LEDs constituting lamp C breaks down, the other LEDs constituting lamp C may be able to ensure the role of determining whether the brightness of lamps A and B has changed.

Next, in the energy saving mode, an energy saving display is displayed as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode, but the energy saving display is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. At this time, sound is not output from the speaker and the sound is muted. Also, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. As for lamp C, the LED is enabled to emit light in a state for confirming the reference brightness, the same as in the normal standby state.

Next, if the energy saving mode does not occur during the stop state, an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed as an indication that progress is impossible, but the indication that progress is impossible is displayed in a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. Also, when the stop state is entered, the notification is performed in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (e.g., maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as notification mode A for the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, but when a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed, the notification is switched to a suppressed mode in which the light amount and volume are suppressed as notification mode B. Specifically, when a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed, the speaker is not outputting sound and is muted. As for lamp C, the LED may be made to emit light in a manner for confirming the reference brightness, as in the normal standby state; however, taking into consideration that the setting adjustment button 204 will not be operated due to the nature of the stop state, lamp C may be made to remain in an off state regardless of whether a specific emission start condition is met.

Next, when the energy saving mode occurs during the stop state, in addition to displaying a progress impossible display as an image corresponding to the stop state, an energy saving display is displayed as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode. Both the progress impossible display and the energy saving display are displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, and both displays are visible. At this time, the speaker is not outputting sound and is muted. Also, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. As for lamp C, the LED may be made to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode as in the normal standby state, but considering that the setting adjustment button 204 is not operated due to the nature of the stop state, lamp C may be made to remain turned off regardless of whether a specific light emission start condition is met.

Figure 152 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to energy saving mode during a play stop state. The following explanation is based on the assumption that the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON.

First, after the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value (e.g., 5,000 balls), a pre-notification display is displayed. The pre-notification display is displayed not only while the special symbols are changing, but also while the special symbols are not changing, until the number of balls to be dispensed reaches the specific value. The pre-notification display is also displayed not only during the normal standby state during the non-changing display of the special symbols, but also during the energy saving mode. As described above in detail, the performance display device 1600 displays a message such as "+xx balls remaining until game limit" in a specific display area 1 as a pre-notification display. This specific display area 1 is set as a part of the display area in the performance display device 1600, and is a display area used to display when the number of balls to be dispensed approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged under any game state so that the hall manager does not overlook it.

In addition, advance warning displays and progress impossibility displays are displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, in this example, the performance display device 1600 is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, in an overlapping manner, and in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," the higher the layer display, the closer it is to the front, so that it can be viewed with priority. As a result, the visibility of advance warning displays and progress impossibility displays displayed in the upper layer is not obstructed by displays displayed in the middle and lower layers.

In addition, the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are not subject to the image conversion process (mosaic processing, grayscale processing, enlargement/reduction processing, etc.) performed by the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the performance images other than the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are subject to the image conversion process performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance image is allowed to change as the performance progresses, but the advance notice display and the progress impossibility display are not subject to the image conversion process performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance image is not allowed to change even if the performance progresses. As a result, the visibility of the advance notice display or the progress impossibility display does not change while it is displayed, making it possible to avoid overlooking information on the amount of balls dispensed, etc.

Next, after the special symbol is fixed and stopped, the machine is in a normal standby state, but at the time t1, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without a new special symbol being displayed after the special symbol is fixed and stopped, a demonstration period (period during which a demonstration performance is executed) is started in which a demonstration image (e.g., a performance explanation or an image for advertising) is displayed as standby display 2 (standby performance 2). Regarding this demonstration period, when the display of the special symbol is started (when a winning is made in the first start port 2003, the second start port 2004, or the big winning port 2005), the demonstration period ends and a variable performance or a winning performance starts. On the other hand, the demonstration period ends and the machine transitions to standby display 1 (standby performance 1) when the player operates the operation unit (the handle 160, the performance operation unit 250, etc.). In addition, even after the transition to the demonstration period, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This prevents new players from starting play without being aware of information about the amount of balls dispensed, etc., before starting play.

In this example, the standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. For example, the specified area in which the warning message is displayed is outside the specific display area 1 in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is located in a position that does not overlap with the specific display area 1 in the front-to-back direction. This ensures the visibility of the warning message even while the advance notice display is displayed, and reliably prevents the player from becoming overly absorbed in the game. Note that the specified area in which the warning message is displayed may be located in a position where a part of the specified area overlaps with the specific display area 1 in the front-to-back direction. For example, even if the specified area overlaps with the specific display area 1, the warning message may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to an extent that the contents of the warning message can be confirmed.

During the demonstration period, no sound is output from the speaker and it is silent. During the demonstration period, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are set to light up or blink in a notification mode corresponding to standby display 2 (standby performance 2) as the normal notification mode. During the demonstration period, the LED of lamp C is set to emit light at a specific brightness as a mode for confirming the reference brightness, regardless of standby display 2 (standby performance 2).

Next, at the time t2, when the demonstration period (the second demonstration performance) ends, the device switches to an energy saving mode in which the power saving of the sound and the lamp is strengthened, and the performance display device 1600 displays an energy saving display as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode. As the energy saving display, a message "energy saving mode in progress" is displayed. In this energy saving mode, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the energy saving mode is terminated and the variable performance starts. On the other hand, the energy saving mode is terminated and the device switches to a normal standby state by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, performance operation unit 250, etc.). Note that, if a prize is won in the general winning port 2001, etc., where the variable display of the special symbol is not performed during the energy saving mode, the prize ball is awarded, but the device does not switch to the normal standby state. In addition, even after switching to the energy saving mode, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This makes it possible to avoid a new player starting a game without recognizing information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc., before starting the game.

In this example, the energy saving display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, just like the advance warning display. However, the specific area 2 in which the energy saving display is displayed is outside the specific display area 1 in which the advance warning display is displayed, and is provided in a different position from the specific display area 1. This ensures the visibility of the energy saving display even while the advance warning display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, and reliably notifies the user that the energy saving mode is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the standby display 2 that was executed during the demonstration period is terminated when the power saving mode is entered. Since the standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600, for example, even if it is continued to be displayed after the power saving mode is entered, the energy saving display displayed on the upper layer will not become invisible. However, by terminating the display when the power saving mode is entered, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

In addition, during the energy saving mode, the speaker is muted and no sound is output. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Also, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. This makes it possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that have not been played for a specified period of time. As for lamp C, the LED is enabled to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode, just like in the normal standby state. This makes it possible to know that the LED of lamp C is not turned off like lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In addition, in this example, if the player operates the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy saving mode is started (the period from timing t1 to t2), it is possible to restrict the execution of the energy saving mode. Specifically, the start condition of the energy saving mode is met when the second demonstration ends, and the energy saving mode is switched to, but if the player operates the operation unit during the demonstration period before the energy saving mode is started, the demonstration period is forcibly ended, so the start condition of the energy saving mode is not met and the energy saving mode is not switched to. As a result, if you do not want to switch to the energy saving mode in the normal standby state, you can simply operate the operation unit before the energy saving mode is started, and it is possible to prevent the energy saving mode from being undesirably executed.

Next, at timing t3 during the energy saving mode, when a winning combination is achieved at the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 and the variable display of the special symbol begins, the energy saving mode ends and a variable presentation (presentation based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In this variable presentation, a variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is displayed on a lower layer of the presentation display device 1600. In addition, even after the variable presentation begins, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This allows the player to know that play will be restricted in the near future.

In addition, while the special symbols are being displayed, the speaker outputs a sound corresponding to the changing presentation as a specified background music. Also, while the special symbols are being displayed, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are set to light up or blink in a notification mode corresponding to the changing presentation as a normal notification mode. Also, while the special symbols are being displayed, the LED of lamp C is set to emit light at a specific brightness as a mode for confirming the reference brightness, regardless of the changing presentation.

Next, at timing t4 during the variable display of the special symbol, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to winning balls entering a winning slot such as the first starting slot 2003 or the second starting slot 2004 and game play is restricted, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable presentation are terminated, and the game moves to a halted state in which game progress is disabled. As described above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value in a calculation based on the winning balls generated by winning balls entering each winning slot, the game is halted and game play is restricted, but in this example, such game restrictions are controlled while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress.

Then, when the game transitions to the stopped state at timing t4, the performance display device 1600 displays an indication that progress is not possible as an image corresponding to the stopped state. The indication that progress is not possible is the message "Play Restrictions", along with messages such as "Play is restricted as the daily ball output limit of XXX balls has been reached", "Please call an attendant", and "The settlement button is active". As described above, the indication that progress is not possible is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. This allows the player to know that the amount of balls output has reached a specific value and that restrictions on play are being implemented, without impeding the visibility of the indication that progress is not possible.

In addition, for the progress impossible display in this example, a message is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. This blackout display is performed on almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600. As a result, the screen displayed on the layer lower than the upper layer is made invisible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t4, a demonstration image as a waiting display 2 can be displayed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600, but the progress impossible display is displayed on almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600 in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, making the demonstration image invisible. As a result, after the transition to the play-stop state, the player does not realize that it is a demonstration period while the progress impossible display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is being restricted. In addition, after the transition to the dead state, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) of the normal waiting state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, a restriction may be imposed so that the demonstration image is not displayed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 in the first place.

After the game has been stopped, the performance display device 1600 displays an indication that the game is impossible using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600 as an image corresponding to the stopped state. At this time, as for the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, as the operation when the game is impossible is performed, the notification in the highlighted mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (for example, the maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (for example, the maximum volume) is forcibly performed as the notification mode A, regardless of the setting state by the operation of the setting adjustment button 204. Specifically, the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and the lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a single white light, and the LED flashes or lights up at a specific light amount (for example, the maximum light amount), and the speaker outputs a voice saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached" at a specific volume (for example, the maximum volume) from the speaker. This allows the hall manager to be clearly informed that a stop-play state has been entered. It is preferable that the highlighted notification related to the stop-play state be different from the notification given when other errors, such as abnormalities, occur.

After starting the notification in the highlighted mode as notification mode A, at the timing t5 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the performance display device 1600 maintains the progress impossible display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) transition to notification in a suppressed mode with suppressed light volume as notification mode B. Specifically, the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) continue to emit white monochromatic light, but do not flash or light up at a specific light volume (for example, maximum light volume) (they flash or light up at a light volume smaller than the specific light volume). In addition, the speaker does not output the voice itself saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," so that no sound can be heard, and it is in a silent state (inaudible state). This allows the highlighting notification to end even during a stoppage, preventing the notification from interfering with the play of surrounding players.

The suppression mode in this example only needs to suppress the amount of light more than the highlight mode. For example, for lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), the light emission color pattern may be changed from that of the highlight mode so that the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors. This allows the decorative effect to be maintained even on gaming machines that have reached a dead end and are no longer being played, and can play a role in livening up the entire gaming hall.

In addition, after transitioning to the stop state, for lamp C, regardless of whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, the LED can be made to emit light at a specific luminance as a mode for confirming the reference luminance. This makes it easier to determine whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, compared to lamp C, which has a specific luminance.

Next, at the time t6, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since the lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode as the notification mode B, an energy saving mode that strengthens the power saving of the sound and the lamps is simultaneously generated during the stop state, and the performance display device 1600 displays an energy saving display as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode. As the energy saving display, a message "energy saving mode in progress" is displayed. After the energy saving mode is simultaneously generated during the stop state, the special pattern variable display cannot be started because of the stop state, and the energy saving mode cannot be ended even if a start winning occurs, but the energy saving mode cannot be ended even by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, performance operation unit 250, etc.). However, by continuing to display the progress impossibility display even after the transition to the energy saving mode, it is possible to avoid a new player starting a game without recognizing that the game is stopped, even if the energy saving mode has occurred.

In this example, the energy saving display, like the progress impossibility display, is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. However, the specific area 2 in which the energy saving display is displayed is outside the specific display area 1 in which the progress impossibility display is displayed, and is provided in a different position from the specific display area 1. This ensures the visibility of the energy saving display even while the progress impossibility display is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600, and makes it possible to reliably inform the user that energy saving mode is being executed.

The energy saving display in this example is displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, just like the progress impossibility display, but it may also be displayed in the middle layer in a "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer" relationship. In such a case, the progress impossibility display in this example is displayed as a message on a screen consisting of an opaque darkened display (e.g., a black background image) in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, so that the energy saving display displayed in the middle layer cannot be seen due to the darkened display in the upper layer.

In addition, the energy saving display in this example is displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, just like the progress impossible display, but the energy saving display is displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, while the progress impossible display may be displayed in the middle layer in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer". This ensures the visibility of the energy saving display even while the progress impossible display is displayed in the middle layer of the performance display device 1600, and can reliably inform the player that the energy saving mode is being executed. Note that, with respect to the specific display area 1 in which the progress impossible display is displayed in the middle layer of the performance display device 1600, it is preferable to set it outside the specific display area 2 in which the energy saving display is displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, and in a position that does not overlap with the specific display area 2 in the front-to-back direction at all. This ensures the visibility of the progress impossible display even while the energy saving display is displayed in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, and can reliably inform the player that the game is restricted. Furthermore, the specific display area 1 in which the progress impossibility display is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600 may be positioned so that a portion of the specific display area 1 overlaps with the specific display area 2 in the front-to-back direction. For example, even if the specific display area 1 and the specific display area 2 overlap, the progress impossibility display may be shifted vertically or horizontally from the energy saving display to such an extent that the content of the progress impossibility display can be confirmed.

In addition, in this example, the standby display 2 that was executed during the demonstration period is terminated when the power saving mode is entered. Since the standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600, for example, even if it is continued to be displayed after the power saving mode is entered, the energy saving display displayed on the higher layer will not become invisible. However, by terminating the display when the power saving mode is entered, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the message is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. This blackout display is performed on almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600. As a result, the screen displayed on the layer lower than the upper layer is not visible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the stop state at timing t4, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 continues to display a demonstration image as a waiting display 2, but the upper layer of the performance display device 1600 displays the stop state display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, so that the demonstration image is not visible. As a result, after the transition to the stop state, the player does not realize that it is a demonstration period while the stop state display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and the game is being restricted. In addition, after the transition to the no-play state has occurred, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) of the normal standby state in which the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 may be forced to terminate so that the demonstration image does not continue to be displayed.

In addition, during the energy saving mode, the speaker is muted and no sound is output. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Also, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. This makes it possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in a dead-end state and cannot be played. As for lamp C, the LED is enabled to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode, just like in the normal standby state. This makes it possible to know that the LED of lamp C is not turned off like lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In this way, when the energy saving mode is entered during a deadlock state, the speaker is muted to not output sound, and the LEDs A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off to save power, just as when the energy saving mode is entered during a normal standby state. On the other hand, when the energy saving mode is entered during a normal standby state, an energy saving display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but when the energy saving mode is entered during a deadlock state, not only the energy saving display but also an indication that progress cannot be made is displayed in an area (specific display area 1) different from the energy saving display on the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to determine whether play can be started in a normal standby state during the energy saving mode, or whether play is restricted during a deadlock state, and it is possible to prevent a new player from starting play without recognizing that the game is deadlocked.

In addition, in this example, during the dead-end state, lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and lamps B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are switched from notification mode A (emphasis mode) to notification mode B (suppression mode), and the LEDs are turned off after the energy-saving mode is activated during the dead-end state. Also, during the dead-end state, the speaker is muted from notification mode A (emphasis mode), and the energy-saving mode is activated during the dead-end state, after which the muting continues. In this way, by gradually saving power for various performance members during the dead-end state, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the end of the dead-end state for power saving, while also avoiding excessive power consumption by the gaming machine that is in the dead-end state and cannot be played.

In addition, in this example, after the energy saving mode is triggered during a dead-end state, the display of special symbols cannot start due to the dead-end state, and the energy saving mode cannot be terminated even if a start win occurs, and the energy saving mode cannot be terminated by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, after the energy saving mode (power saving state) is triggered during a dead-end state to save power, it is not possible to return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode was triggered. This prevents the player from thinking that the dead-end state has ended by returning to a non-power saving state, and prevents the player from having difficulty in understanding whether or not the dead-end state is in progress.

In addition, in this example, even if the player operates the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy saving mode is started during the stalled state (period of timing t4 to t6), it is not possible to restrict the execution of the energy saving mode. Specifically, the start condition of the energy saving mode is established during the stalled state when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode as notification mode B, and the energy saving mode is entered during the stalled state. However, even if the player operates the operation unit before the energy saving mode is started during the stalled state, it has no relation to the establishment of the start condition of the energy saving mode during the stalled state, and the energy saving mode is entered during the stalled state. As described above in detail, in the normal standby state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the energy saving mode when the player operates the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy saving mode is started (period of timing t1 to t2). In this way, by always running the energy saving mode without restricting it during the game stall state, it is possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in the game stall state and cannot be played.

In the above example, after the energy saving mode is started during the stop state, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started because the game is in the stop state, and the energy saving mode cannot be ended even if a start winning occurs, and the energy saving mode cannot be ended even by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, performance operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, after the energy saving mode (power saving state) is started during the stop state and power saving is performed, it is impossible to return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode is started, but instead, it is possible to suppress the return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode is started as follows. In other words, after the energy saving mode is started during the stop state, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started because the game is in the stop state, and the energy saving mode cannot be ended even if a start winning occurs, but it is possible to end only the energy saving mode in response to the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, performance operation unit 250, etc.). Here, if the energy saving mode that occurred during the stalled state is ended in response to the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.), notification mode A for the stalled state may be executed again, thereby ensuring that new players are aware that the stalled state has been reached. In addition, even after the energy saving mode that occurred during the stalled state has been ended, the indication that progress is not possible continues to be displayed, so that it is possible to prevent new players from starting play without recognizing that the stalled state has been reached, even if the energy saving mode has ended.

In the above example, when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device transitions to the energy saving mode during the power limit state, thereby enhancing power saving in standby power. However, as another example, even if the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device may not transition to the energy saving mode during the power limit state, and instead, power saving in the sound and lamp may be enhanced by a different control, thereby achieving power saving in standby power. Such an example is described below.

Figure 153 is a table comparing the notification modes related to light emission and sound when transitioning to notification mode C during a stalled state. In another example, the energy saving mode does not occur at the same time during a stalled state, but the notification mode changes to a mode similar to the energy saving mode during the stalled state. Note that the normal standby state and energy saving mode are the same as when transitioning to the energy saving mode during a stalled state, so explanations are omitted.

In another example of a stalled state, an indication that progress is impossible is displayed as an image corresponding to the stalled state, but the indication that progress is impossible is displayed in a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. Also, when the stalled state is entered, the notification mode A is executed by the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, and the notification mode A is executed in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (e.g., maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume). However, when a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed, the notification mode B is switched to a suppressed mode in which the light amount and volume are suppressed. Specifically, when a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has passed, the speaker is not outputting sound and is muted.

For lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since the transition to notification mode B, the state transitions to notification mode C, which has even less light than notification mode B, and the LEDs are turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker, and the muted state continues. As for lamp C, the LED may be made to emit light in the standard brightness confirmation mode, as in the normal standby state, but considering that the setting adjustment button 204 will not be operated due to the nature of the stop state, lamp C may remain in the off state regardless of whether a specific light emission start condition is met.

Figure 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to notification mode C during a stalled state. The following explanation is based on the assumption that the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON. Note that the behavior until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t4 and play restrictions are implemented is the same as when transitioning to energy saving mode during a stalled state, so an explanation is omitted here.

First, at the time of timing t4, after the transition to the no-go state, regardless of whether or not a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the normal waiting state in which no special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 is restricted from displaying the demonstration image in the first place. Since the demonstration image (waiting display 1) is displayed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600, for example, even if it is made displayable after the transition to the no-go state, the no-progress display displayed on the upper layer will not become invisible. However, by restricting it at the time of transition to the no-go state, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

After the game has been stopped, the performance display device 1600 displays an indication that the game is impossible using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600 as an image corresponding to the stopped state. At this time, as for the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker, as the operation when the game is impossible is performed, the notification in the highlighted mode consisting of a predetermined specific light amount (for example, the maximum light amount) and a predetermined specific volume (for example, the maximum volume) is forcibly performed as the notification mode A, regardless of the setting state by the operation of the setting adjustment button 204. Specifically, the lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and the lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a single white light, and the LED flashes or lights up at a specific light amount (for example, the maximum light amount), and the speaker outputs a voice saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached" at a specific volume (for example, the maximum volume) from the speaker. This allows the hall manager to be clearly informed that a stop-play state has been entered. It is preferable that the highlighted notification related to the stop-play state be different from the notification given when other errors, such as abnormalities, occur.

After starting the notification in the highlighted mode as notification mode A, at the timing t5 when a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the performance display device 1600 maintains the progress impossible display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) transition to notification in a suppressed mode with suppressed light volume as notification mode B. Specifically, the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) continue to emit white monochromatic light, but do not flash or light up at a specific light volume (for example, maximum light volume) (they flash or light up at a light volume smaller than the specific light volume). In addition, the speaker does not output the voice itself saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," so that no sound can be heard, and it is in a silent state (inaudible state). This allows the highlighting notification to end even during a stoppage, preventing the notification from interfering with the play of surrounding players.

The suppression mode in this example only needs to suppress the amount of light more than the highlight mode. For example, for lamp A (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (the LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), the light emission color pattern may be changed from that of the highlight mode so that the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors. This allows the decorative effect to be maintained even on gaming machines that have reached a dead end and are no longer being played, and can play a role in livening up the entire gaming hall.

In addition, after transitioning to the stop state, for lamp C, regardless of whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, the LED can be made to emit light at a specific luminance as a mode for confirming the reference luminance. This makes it easier to determine whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, compared to lamp C, which has a specific luminance.

Next, at the time t6, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode as the notification mode B, the performance display device 1600 maintains the progress impossible display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but the light intensity of the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and the lamps B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) is further suppressed than in the notification mode B as notification mode C, and the LEDs are turned off. This makes it possible to avoid excessive power consumption by the gaming machine that is in the stop state and cannot be played. In addition, the speaker does not output the sound itself saying "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," so that a silent state (inaudible state) in which no sound can be heard continues. Note that, as with the normal standby state, the LED of the lamp C is made luminous at a specific brightness as a standard brightness confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to know that the LED of the lamp C is not turned off like the lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In this way, when the notification mode C is entered during the dead state, the speaker mutes the sound output, and the LEDs A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off to save power, just as when the energy saving mode is entered during the normal standby state. On the other hand, when the energy saving mode is entered during the normal standby state, an energy saving display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but when the notification mode C is entered during the dead state, an indication that progress cannot be made is displayed on the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to determine whether play can be started in the normal standby state or play is restricted in the dead state during the period when sound output is stopped and the lamps are turned off, and prevents new players from starting play without recognizing that the game is dead.

In addition, in this example, during the dead-end state, lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and lamps B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) transition from notification mode A (emphasis mode) to notification mode B (suppression mode), and then transition to notification mode C (off). During the dead-end state, the speaker is muted from notification mode A (emphasis mode). In this way, by gradually reducing the power consumption of various performance components during the dead-end state, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the end of the dead-end state for power saving, while also avoiding excessive power consumption by the gaming machine that is in the dead-end state and cannot be played.

In addition, in this example, after transitioning to notification mode C during a dead-end state, the display of special symbols cannot start due to the dead-end state, and notification mode C cannot be ended even if a starting win occurs. Notification mode C cannot be ended by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, after transitioning to notification mode C (power-saving state) during a dead-end state and saving power, it is not possible to return to a non-power-saving state (notification mode A or notification mode B) prior to transitioning to notification mode C. This prevents the player from thinking that the dead-end state has ended by returning to a non-power-saving state, and prevents the player from having difficulty in understanding whether or not the dead-end state is in progress.

In addition, in this example, even if the player operates the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the transition to notification mode C during the dead-end state (period of timing t4 to t6), it is not possible to restrict the transition to notification mode C. Specifically, the start condition of notification mode C is established during the dead-end state when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode as notification mode B, and the game is set to transition to notification mode C during the dead-end state. However, even if the player operates the operation unit before the transition to notification mode C during the dead-end state, it has no bearing on the establishment of the start condition of notification mode C during the dead-end state, and the game is set to transition to notification mode C during the dead-end state. As described above in detail, in the normal standby state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the energy-saving mode when the player operates the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy-saving mode is started (period of timing t1 to t2). In this way, by always executing the transition to notification mode C without restricting it during the stalled state, it is possible to prevent excessive power consumption by a gaming machine that is in a stalled state and cannot be played.

In the above example, after transitioning to the notification mode C during the stop state, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started because of the stop state, and notification mode C cannot be ended even if a start win occurs, and notification mode C cannot be ended even by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, after notification mode C (power saving state) occurs simultaneously during the stop state and power saving is performed, it is not possible to return to the non-power saving state (notification mode A or notification mode B) before transitioning to notification mode C, but instead, it is possible to suppress return to the non-power saving state before transitioning to notification mode C as follows. In other words, after transitioning to notification mode C during the stop state, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started because of the stop state, and notification mode C cannot be ended even if a start win occurs, but it is also possible to end only notification mode C in response to the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). Here, if the player ends notification mode C during the stopped state in response to operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.), notification mode A during the stopped state may be executed again, thereby ensuring that new players are aware that the game is stopped. In addition, even after notification mode C ends during the stopped state, the progress impossibility display continues to be displayed, so that even if notification mode C ends, it is possible to prevent new players from starting play without recognizing that the game is stopped.

(Regarding the forced transition to a halted state)
As mentioned above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value calculated based on the winning balls that enter each winning slot, the machine is put into a stop state and play is restricted, but for gaming machines that are just before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (for example, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value is less than the amount of balls dispensed in one game (1,500 balls, etc.)), there is a possibility that the machine will be put into a stop state soon when a new player starts playing. For this reason, it is possible to have the manager intentionally put a stop state on gaming machines that are just before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, in order to prevent new players from being put into a stop state soon after starting to play. However, in order for the manager to intentionally transition to the deadlock state, it is necessary to make the game ball enter the winning slot and make the amount of balls dispensed reach a specific value. However, if the balls enter each winning slot and a special pattern is displayed or a winning game is generated, various effects (such as a variable effect or an effect associated with a winning game during a winning game) may be noticeable to the surroundings and may cause other players to feel distrustful. In addition, such work places a heavy burden on the manager. Therefore, in this example, a configuration that makes it possible to easily cause a deadlock state in a manner that suppresses distrust among other players and reduces the burden on the manager when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value will be described below.

In this example, as described above, two types of administrator work are provided as administrator work that can easily cause a deadlock: a first administrator work of operating a prize ball addition switch provided on the game board 5, and a second administrator work of inserting game balls into a prize ball addition port provided on the game board 5. Both of these operations can be performed at any time as long as the game machine is powered on. Each operation is explained below.

First, the first administrator task will be described. In this example, a pressable prize ball addition switch (not shown) is implemented on the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and can be operated by opening the main body frame 4. When the prize ball addition switch is pressed and held for a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) with the main body frame 4 open, a predetermined number of prize balls are forcibly awarded by control on the main control board 1310 side without going through control on the frame control board 740 (or payout control board) side, and are reflected in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed. The number of prize balls is set to 100. In other words, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the number of prize balls is one, and when a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005 during a winning game, the number of prize balls is 10 or 13, whereas when the prize ball addition switch is operated, the number of prize balls is 100, which is set to a larger number of prize balls than the first start port 2003, the second start port 2004, and the large prize port 2005. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed is in a situation just before reaching a specific value, the administrator can increase the amount of balls dispensed all at once by operating the prize ball addition switch once, and the amount of balls dispensed can be quickly shifted to a stop state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value by operating the necessary number of times corresponding to the difference until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. The prize ball addition switch is not limited to being mounted on the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, but may also be mounted on the frame control board 740 (or the payout control board). In that case, operation information and information regarding the awarding of a predetermined number of prize balls can be transmitted from the frame control board 740 (or the payout control board) to the main control board 1310, and reflected in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed.

Next, the second manager's work will be described. The game board 5 described above is provided with various winning holes (such as the first start hole 2003, the second start hole 2004, and the large winning hole 2005) that can grant prize balls when they receive a game ball shot into the game area 5a. In this example, a prize ball addition hole (not shown) is provided in addition to these winning holes to facilitate the occurrence of a deadlock state. This prize ball addition hole is provided in the game area 5a like the other winning holes, and is not a variable type like the large winning hole 2005, but is always open, and is configured to allow balls to enter from the upper entrance (so-called pocket type). However, the entrance of the prize ball addition hole is closed by a predetermined member (for example, an obstacle nail or a resin wall is arranged to prevent balls from entering), and as a result, game balls shot into the game area 5a in a normal game involving a player's firing operation cannot or has difficulty being received by the prize ball addition hole. In other words, the prize ball addition port has a lower chance of winning compared to other winning ports, and in normal play involving the player's firing operation, the chances of a game ball winning in the prize ball addition port are extremely low, suppressing game balls from winning in the prize ball addition port during normal play. Also, as described above, the entrance to the prize ball addition port is closed by a specified member (such as an obstacle nail or a resin wall), but the specified member is arranged above the entrance to the prize ball addition port with a space for 1.5 game balls to be positioned, and is configured to prevent game balls from entering in the direction of flowing down, but not from entering from the front of the prize ball addition port. This makes it possible for a manager to enter balls into the prize ball addition port with the door frame 3 open.

As a second administrator task, when the door frame 3 is open and the administrator places one game ball into the prize ball addition port, a predetermined number (100 balls) of prize balls are awarded, as in the first administrator task. When a ball is placed into the prize ball addition port, information regarding the awarding of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted from the frame control board 740 (or payout control board) to the main control board 1310, as in normal prize ball processing, and is reflected in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed. Also, as in the first administrator's work described above, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the number of prize balls is one, and when a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005 during a winning game, the number of prize balls is 10 or 13, whereas when a game ball is received in the prize ball addition port, the number of prize balls is 100, which is set to a larger number of prize balls than the first start port 2003, the second start port 2004, and the large prize port 2005. As a result, when the amount of balls to be put out is in a situation just before reaching a specific value, the administrator can increase the amount of balls to be put out all at once by putting one game ball into the prize ball addition port, and by putting in the necessary number of balls corresponding to the difference until the amount of balls to be put out reaches the specific value, the amount of balls to be put out can be quickly shifted to a stop state when the amount of balls to be put out reaches the specific value.

In this example, the special prize balls granted in response to the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) and the second administrator operation (entering the prize ball addition port) are controlled as much as possible within the normal prize ball processing in order to avoid control complication such as program changes. In other words, in this example, since the special prize balls are controlled within the normal prize ball processing, they are also reflected directly in the calculation of the base value using the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740 described above. For this reason, the number of special prize balls granted in response to the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) and the second administrator operation (entering the prize ball addition port) (predetermined number) is not limited to the above-mentioned 100 balls, and may be 1000 balls or 10000 balls, but in consideration of the effect that the base value becomes an abnormal value due to the granting of more prize balls than the number required for the amount of balls to reach a specific value, the number is set to the above-mentioned "100 balls" in this example, and the effect of the base value becoming an abnormal value is suppressed as much as possible. Note that, if the effect of the base value becoming an abnormal value is to be suppressed, the number of special prize balls may be reduced to less than 100. However, taking into consideration the ease of operation (number of operations) when awarding the special prize balls, it is preferable to set the number at least greater than the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004.

In addition, the transition to the stop state using the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) or the second administrator operation (entering a ball into the prize ball addition port) is controlled not only during the display of the special symbol fluctuation or during a winning game, but also during a game standby state (normal standby state or energy saving mode) when the special symbol fluctuation is not being displayed. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed is in a situation just before reaching a specific value, the administrator can operate the prize ball addition switch or enter a game ball into the prize ball addition port during the normal standby state or energy saving mode, thereby increasing the amount of balls dispensed by the special prize balls and reaching the specific value. In such a case, it becomes possible to directly transition from the normal standby state or energy saving mode to the stop state and execute the game restriction without causing the display of the special symbol fluctuation or a winning game. In this way, by performing the first administrator operation (operating the prize ball addition switch) or the second administrator operation (putting a ball into the prize ball addition port) during normal standby mode or energy saving mode, it is possible to increase the amount of balls dispensed with special prize balls and transition to the limit state, so there is no need to display special symbols or generate a winning game when transitioning to the limit state, and the burden on the administrator can be reduced. Also, for gaming machines that are in a situation where the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, transitioning to the limit state by such an administrator operation can be used to prevent a situation in advance in which a new player plays and the machine transitions to the limit state too early.

In addition, when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, the winning is not notified. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 2003, the second starting port 2004, or the large winning port 2005, a ball entry sound is output from the speaker to notify the winning, but when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, the ball entry sound is not output from the speaker, and the winning is not notified. In addition, when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, no performance is performed other than the awarding of the prize ball. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, a variable performance related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc., and when a ball enters the large winning port 2005, a performance during the winning is performed using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc., but when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, no variable performance or winning performance is performed, and no performance is performed. This means that if the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, even if the manager places a game ball in the prize ball addition port, the manager can carry out the work required to trigger the end of the game without drawing attention to those around.

In this example, when the above-mentioned standby performance 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being executed, if a winning ball is entered into the first start port 2003, the second start port 2004, or the large winning port 2005, the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode is terminated and a variable performance or a winning performance is started. However, if a winning ball is entered into the prize ball addition port while the standby performance 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being executed, the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode is not terminated, and each control is continued without making an announcement associated with the winning ball entry into the prize ball addition port as described above. As a result, even if the administrator enters a game ball into the prize ball addition port while the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode is being executed, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode will not be terminated and the operation of the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode will continue, and in this respect, the administrator can perform work related to the occurrence of the stop state without being noticed by others.

As described above, both tasks can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine is powered on. However, assuming that the first or second administrator task is performed illegally, a predetermined state (task invalidation state) in which both the first and second administrator tasks are invalid may be generated. The task invalidation state can be generated when the power is turned on in a predetermined manner as the mode of the power-on operation. In this example, a task invalidation switch that can be pressed separately from the prize ball addition switch is implemented on the main control board 1310 of the above-mentioned gaming board 5, and the task invalidation state can be generated by setting the power-on in a state in which the task invalidation switch is pressed as the predetermined mode of power-on. Then, after the task invalidation state occurs, it is possible to invalidate the first or second administrator task without making it valid, unless a predetermined release operation (in this example, pressing the task invalidation switch again) is performed while the power is on, or the power is turned on again. By creating a work invalid state in this way, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being added even if the first or second administrator work action is performed fraudulently, and to suppress fraudulent actions that fraudulently increase the number of prize balls.

In addition, if illegal entry into the prize ball addition port is suspected, an error notification is made. Specifically, in this example, when a prize ball is entered into the prize ball addition port, no performance is made as described above, but under a specific situation where it is clearly suspected to be illegal (for example, when the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls reaches a specific value is 1500 or more), if it is detected that a large number of game balls (15 balls within one minute in this example) have entered into the prize ball addition port in a short period of time, it is considered abnormal that additional prize balls equivalent to the amount of balls dispensed in one winning game are made, and an error notification is made to notify of illegal increase in prize balls using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc. As described above, the prize ball addition port is made unable or difficult to accept game balls shot into the game area 5a, so in normal play, a large number of game balls should not enter the prize ball addition port in a short period of time. In this regard, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, if the administrator simply places 5 to 10 game balls in the prize ball addition port, no error notification is issued to notify of an illegal increase in prize balls. However, in normal play, when a large number of game balls are placed in the prize ball addition port in a short period of time, an error notification is issued to notify of an illegal increase in prize balls, thereby preventing attempts to gain profits through illegal entry. Note that if illegal operation of the prize ball addition switch is suspected, an error notification may be issued to notify of an illegal increase in prize balls, as described above.

In this example, the transition to the stop state is controlled not only when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is closed, but also when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open. For example, in a normal game, while the main frame 4 is closed, game balls can be entered into the first start opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, or the large prize opening 2005, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value by entering the game balls, whereas in the first administrator's work in this example, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the main frame 4 is opened, and the administrator can operate the prize ball addition switch, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value by adding prize balls related to this operation. In addition, in normal play, while the door frame 3 is closed, game balls can be entered into the first start opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value by the winning. In contrast, in the second administrator's work of this example, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the administrator can open the door frame 3 and allow game balls to enter the prize ball addition opening, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value by adding the prize balls related to the winning. In such a case, it is possible to transition to a stop state without closing the main frame 4 or the door frame 3, and to implement game restrictions. In this way, by transitioning to a stop state even while the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open, it is possible to make it easier for the administrator performing the first administrator work or the second administrator work to understand the transition to the stop state, and the burden on the administrator's work can be reduced.

Here, during normal play, when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is in an open state (specific state), a notification (specific notification in the normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is made using sound, light, and video, and communicated to the outside. However, as described above, in consideration of the manager performing the work related to the occurrence of the stop state (first manager work and second manager work) without being noticeable to the surroundings, in this example, at least when the above-mentioned standby performance 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being performed, a special process is performed to make the notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 more suppressed than during normal play. Specifically, even if the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is in an open state when the standby performance 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being performed, the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode is not terminated, and each control is continued without any notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 during normal play (all using sound, light, and video. Specific notification in the normal notification mode). As a result, even if the manager performs the first manager task or the second manager task while standby performance 2 or energy saving mode is being performed, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, standby performance 2 or energy saving mode will not end and the operation of standby performance 2 or energy saving mode will continue, allowing the manager to perform tasks related to the occurrence of a limit state without drawing attention to those around him. Also, even if the manager performs the first manager task or the second manager task during standby performance 2 or energy saving mode, no notification is given regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3, allowing the manager to perform tasks related to the occurrence of a limit state without drawing attention to those around him.

In addition, when a game is stopped during normal play, even if the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is in an open state (specific state) after the game is stopped, a special process is performed to suppress notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 compared to during normal play. Specifically, when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is in an open state during normal play and the game is stopped, the variable effects related to the normal game are terminated and a notification regarding the stopped state is made, but after the game is stopped, notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 during normal play (all notifications using sound, light, and video; specific notifications in the normal notification mode) are not made at all. As a result, even if the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is in an open state during normal play and the manager performs the first manager task or the second manager task, after the game is stopped, no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is made, and the manager can perform the tasks related to the occurrence of the stopped state without being noticed by others.

Similarly, when the game is switched from standby performance 2 or energy saving mode to the game limit state, even if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is in an open state (specific state) after the game limit state is switched to, a special process is performed during the game limit state to suppress notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 compared to normal play. Specifically, when the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is in an open state and the game limit state is switched to while standby performance 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being executed, the standby performance 2 or energy saving mode ends and a notification regarding the game limit state is issued, but during the period before and after the switch to the game limit state, notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 that are performed during normal play (all using sound, light, and video; specific notifications in normal notification mode) are not issued at all. As a result, even if the manager performs the first manager work or the second manager work during the process of switching from standby performance 2 or energy saving mode to the game limit state, no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is issued, and the manager can perform work related to the occurrence of the game limit state without being noticed by others.

In addition, after the game has been stopped while the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is closed, a notification (post-suppression notification) regarding the stopped state is executed using sound, light, and video. However, if the game has been stopped while the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open, or if the closed main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is opened during the stopped state, no notification (all using sound, light, and video; specific notification in the normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is executed during normal play, but a notification (post-suppression notification) regarding the stopped state is executed, just as when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is closed. In this way, when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open while the game is stopped, only the notification regarding the stopped state is executed, making it easier for the manager who is performing the first manager task or the second manager task while the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open to understand the transition to the stopped state, and reducing the burden on the manager's work.

In the above, an example was given in which no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is given during the standby performance 2 (demonstration period), the energy saving mode, or the stop state, but a notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 may be given in a manner that is not noticeable to the surroundings. For example, in another example, when the manager performs the first manager work or the second manager work, the operation related to the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 (notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3) may be executed while the operation related to the standby performance 2 (demonstration period), the energy saving mode, or the stop state is in progress. Also, during normal play, after the transition to the stop state, the operation related to the stop state is executed using sound, light, and video, but when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open while in the stop state, some of the above-mentioned performance elements may be used in parallel with the operation related to the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3. For example, when the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is open while the game is in a deadlock state, only the performance display device 1600 (image), which is a performance element that is less noticeable from the outside among the above-mentioned performance elements, may display an image (progress impossible display) corresponding to the deadlock state, while displaying an image (open notification display) corresponding to the open state of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 in an area different from the area in which the progress impossible display is displayed. Then, when the open main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is closed, the open notification display in the performance display device 1600 may be terminated so that only the operation related to the deadlock state (progress impossible display) is performed. In such a case, only the performance display device 1600 may execute image control corresponding to the open state of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 in parallel with the operation schedule related to the deadlock state, and at the point in time when the door frame 3 is closed, only the operation related to the deadlock state will be executed. In this way, even if a notification is issued regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3, the manager can perform work related to the occurrence of the deadlock state without being noticeable to those around.

In addition, the above example shows that no notification is given regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the end of the game state. However, from the perspective of preventing fraud, such as using magnets or applying vibrations to cause game balls to enter various winning ports, or preventing malfunctions, such as hitting the gaming machine to cause impact and causing malfunctions in certain components, notifications regarding the existence of a specific state in which unauthorized magnetism, vibration, etc. has been detected are given conspicuously to those around during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, and the end of the game state, just as with normal play. In this example, the priority of notifications is "notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 > notification regarding a specific state", so if the priority of notifications is followed, if there is no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3, then there is no notification regarding the specific state. However, during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or a stop state, control is performed that does not follow the priority of notifications, so that although there is no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3, there is a notification regarding the specific state as in normal play. By doing so, even during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or a stop state, it is possible to notify the outside of fraud or malfunction, and to suppress actions that cause fraud or malfunction.

In addition, in the above, an example was given in which no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or the door frame 3 is given during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopping state. However, in addition to notifications regarding opening, notifications that may occur due to the first manager's work or the second manager's work may be suppressed during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopping state in the same way as notifications regarding opening, in order to make them less noticeable to those around you. For example, in the case of a device that issues error notifications (such as a full tray error) related to the payout of game balls during normal play, error notifications (such as a full tray error) related to the payout of game balls that occur due to the addition of prize balls by the first manager's work or the second manager's work may be not executed or suppressed during standby performance 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopping state, in the same way as the above-mentioned notifications regarding opening.

Figure 155 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a first administrator operation or a second administrator operation is performed during energy saving mode and the machine transitions to a stop state. The following explanation is based on the assumption that the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON. Note that, except for the point at the time of timing t2 to t3 where the machine transitions to a stop state due to the operation of the prize ball addition switch or the entry of a prize ball into the prize ball addition port during energy saving mode, the situation is the same as when a prize is entered into each prize port during the variable display of special symbols as shown in Figure 152 and the machine transitions to a stop state, so the explanation is omitted here.

First, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is inserted into the prize ball addition port at timing t3 during energy saving mode, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, no effects are performed and operation related to the energy saving mode continues. In this way, by preventing any effects other than the awarding of prize balls from being performed when the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is inserted into the prize ball addition port, the amount of balls dispensed can be increased without attracting attention from those around.

Although not shown, the same applies if the energy saving mode has not occurred at time t3 and the machine is in normal standby mode. In other words, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is inserted into the prize ball addition port during normal standby mode, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, no special effects are performed and operation related to normal standby mode continues. In this way, by preventing any special effects other than the awarding of prize balls from being performed when the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is inserted into the prize ball addition port, the amount of balls dispensed can be increased without attracting attention from those around.

As described above in detail, in the energy saving mode, the performance display device 1600 displays an energy saving display in a specific area 2 of the upper layer, and displays a pre-notification display in a specific area 1 of the upper layer when the remaining amount of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value (for example, 5000 balls). Also, in the energy saving mode, the speaker is not outputting sound and is muted. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) in which no sound can be heard. Also, the LEDs of lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. As for lamp C, the LED is made to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode, as in the normal standby state. As a result, it is possible to know that the LED of lamp C is not turned off like lamps A and B, and that the game machine is operating normally.

Next, at the time t4 during the energy saving mode, if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize ball is entered into the prize ball addition port, and the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the game will be restricted. In this case, the operation related to the energy saving mode is terminated, and the game will be stopped and the game will be stopped. As described above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value based on the calculation based on the prize balls generated by the entry into each prize port, the game will be stopped and the game will be restricted. In this example, such game restrictions are controlled not only during the variable display of the special pattern or during a winning game, but also during the energy saving mode. As a result, for example, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the operation of the prize ball addition switch or the entry into the prize ball addition port, which is not a termination condition of the energy saving mode, occurs, and the amount of balls dispensed can be made to reach a specific value by adding prize balls due to these. In such a case, it is possible to directly execute the game restriction from the energy saving mode without causing the variable display of the special pattern. By directly transitioning from energy saving mode to the no-play state in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player plays a gaming machine that is on the verge of reaching a specific number of balls and the machine transitions to the no-play state too early.

Although not shown, the same applies even if the energy saving mode is not activated at the time t4 and the game is in a normal standby state. In other words, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or the ball is entered into the prize ball addition port during the normal standby state, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the game will be restricted. In this case, the operation related to the normal standby state is terminated and the game is stopped, making it impossible to proceed. As described above, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value in the calculation based on the prize balls generated by the entry into each winning port, the game is stopped and the game is restricted. In this example, such game restrictions are controlled not only during the variable display of the special pattern or during a winning game, but also during the normal standby state. As a result, for example, when the amount of balls dispensed is in a situation just before reaching a specific value, the operation of the prize ball addition switch or the entry into the prize ball addition port, which is not a condition for terminating the normal standby state, occurs, and the amount of balls dispensed can be made to reach a specific value by adding prize balls due to these. In such a case, it becomes possible to directly execute the game restriction from the normal standby state without generating various effects such as the variable display of the special pattern. By transitioning directly from the normal standby state to the deadlock state in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player plays a gaming machine that is on the verge of reaching a specific ball output value and the machine transitions to the deadlock state too early.

The description of what happens after the game has stopped is omitted since it is the same as when a ball is won at each winning slot during the changing display of the special symbols as shown in FIG. 152 and the game stops. It is also possible to increase power saving of the sound and lamps by a separate control rather than switching to energy saving mode during the stopping state, as in the case of a ball being won at each winning slot during the changing display of the special symbols as shown in FIG. 154. The description of what happens after the game has stopped is omitted since it is the same as when a ball is won at each winning slot during the changing display of the special symbols as shown in FIG. 152 and the game stops. The description of what happens after the game has stopped is omitted since it is the same as when a ball is won at each winning slot during the changing display of the special symbols as shown in FIG. 154 and the game stops. It is also possible to increase power saving of the sound and lamps by a separate control rather than switching to energy saving mode during the stopping state. In addition, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize is won at the prize ball addition slot after the game has stopped, prize balls will not be awarded.

In addition, the manager may be allowed to place game balls in the prize ball addition port while the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. Specifically, the door frame 3 is provided with an opening through which the prize ball addition port can be accessed, and the opening is normally closed in a state visible from the outside by a predetermined closing member (in this example, a transparent plate-shaped flat member), and during the second manager's work, the closing member is opened to open the opening, allowing the manager to place game balls in the prize ball addition port through the opening. In addition, when opening the opening by opening the closing member, a key owned by the manager is required, and the closing member can be removed from the opening by inserting the key into the keyhole and rotating it. This eliminates the need to open the door frame 3 during the second manager's work, and allows the manager to perform the work without being noticeable to those around.

In addition, considering that the prize ball addition port is the object of the administrator's work, it is preferable to place it in a position on the game board 5 that can be seen from the outside, but from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, it is preferable to place it in a position that is difficult to see from the outside. Therefore, for example, the prize ball addition port is preferably integrated with the member in which the other ball entrances are provided, and special notations such as predetermined symbols or markings (for example, characters indicating that balls can be entered, such as IN) are written only on the front side of the other ball entrances, while no special notations are written on the front side of the prize ball addition port. This makes it possible to place the prize ball addition port in a position that can be seen from the outside but is difficult to see, which can be effective in both administrator work and fraud prevention. In addition, when placing the prize ball addition port in a position that is difficult to see from the outside (especially the player), it is preferable to provide the member in which the prize ball addition port is placed as a non-luminous decorative member that does not have a light-emitting part such as an LED and is not subjected to luminous decoration.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration in which one prize ball addition port is provided on the game board 5 is exemplified, but in consideration of the fact that the administrator's work of inserting game balls can be performed more quickly (smoother), a configuration in which multiple prize ball addition ports are provided on the game board 5 may be used. In addition, when multiple prize ball addition ports are provided on the game board 5, the above-mentioned special notation may be omitted from each of the multiple prize ball addition ports. In addition, when multiple prize ball addition ports are provided on the game board 5, the convenience of the administrator's work can be further improved by arranging the multiple prize ball addition ports together in one component to form a unit and arranging them in a relatively close positional relationship, such as by arranging them adjacent to each other.

[Other Modifications of Side Unit]
Next, a side unit 2800H having yet another configuration different from the above will be described with reference mainly to Figs. 156 to 158. Fig. 156 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a side unit 2800H having yet another configuration. Fig. 157 is an enlarged side view showing the vicinity of the magnetic sensor 1030H shown in Fig. 156. Fig. 158 is an enlarged plan view showing the vicinity of the ball sensor 2815H shown in Fig. 156. Here, the same components as those of the above-mentioned side unit 2800 and side units 2800B to 2800G are given the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

The side unit 2800H extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a where the game ball B is shot in by the player operating the handle 160. The side unit 2800H also has multiple (in this embodiment, three) general winning holes 2001 that are open so that they can always receive the game ball B.

The side unit 2800H of this embodiment further comprises a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel board 1110 in which the obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810A, an LED board provided between the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, a magnetic sensor 1030H that detects unauthorized magnetism (magnetic lines of force) in the vicinity of the general winning opening 2001, and a ball sensor 2815H that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and discharged from the passage exit 2812b.

Between the unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, in addition to the LED board, a magnetic sensor 1030H and a ball sensor 2815H are provided (omitted in FIG. 156). The unit body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and for example, the LED board, the magnetic sensor 1030H, the ball sensor 2815H, etc. are visible from outside the unit.

The LED board of the side unit 2800H has multiple LEDs on the front mounting surface facing the player, and a connector socket is provided on the back mounting surface opposite the front mounting surface. A connector pin provided at one end of the sub-wiring 2805a is inserted into the connector socket, and the other end of the sub-wiring 2805a is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the LED board of the side unit 2800H is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub-wiring 2805a.

The sub-wires 2805a are, for example, electric wires covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the LED board and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected via three sub-wires 2805a. In detail, the three sub-wires 2805a extending from the LED board extend to the outside of the side unit 2800H through an opening (not shown) formed in the rear part of the unit cover 2820 and are connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the three sub-wires 2805a extending to the outside of the side unit 2800H are pulled out to the rear of the side unit 2800H so as to bypass the rear of the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H, and then are routed toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (to the left in the figure) toward the starting port unit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 77(f) above, the magnetic sensor 1030H includes a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1032 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, and a sensor case 1033 that covers the sensor board 1032 and the sensor body 1031. In addition to the sensor body 1031, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, a socket for a connection connector 1032H, and the like are mounted on the sensor board 1032. A pin of the connection connector 1032H provided at one end of the main wiring 2805b is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H, and the other end of the main wiring 2805b is connected to the main control board 1310. That is, the sensor board 1032 is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805b.

The main wiring 2805b is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805b. In detail, the pin of the connector 1032H provided at one end of the two main wirings 2805b extending from the main control board 1310 is inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H mounted on the sensor board 1032 through an opening (not shown) formed at the rear of the unit cover 2820. In addition, the two main wirings 2805b extending rearward from the magnetic sensor 1030H are folded back so as to bypass the magnetic sensor 1030H, extend forward along the side of the magnetic sensor 1030H, and are routed toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (to the left in the figure) toward the starting port unit 2100. In addition, a portion of the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H protrudes rearward beyond the rear surface of the unit cover 2820 through the opening in the unit cover 2820.

The ball sensor 2815H may be, for example, a photo sensor having a light emitting section and a light receiving section, a dielectric sensor that detects a change in induced current, a contact sensor that detects the contact of a game ball, a magnetic sensor that detects a change in magnetism, or a capacitance sensor that detects a change in electrostatic capacitance. The ball sensor 2815H also has a sensor board, on which a socket for a connection connector 2815Ha is mounted. A pin of the connection connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the main wiring 2805c is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha, and the other end of the main wiring 2805c is connected to the main control board 1310. That is, the ball sensor 2815H is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805c.

The main wiring 2805c is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805c. In detail, the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the two main wirings 2805b is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha provided on the ball sensor 2815. In addition, the two main wirings 2805c are pulled out to the side of the ball sensor 2815H (to the right in the figure) through an opening formed on the side of the unit cover 2820, and then folded back toward the starting port unit 2100 so as to bypass the rear of the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H, and are routed toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (to the left in the figure). Note that the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha are located inside the unit cover 2820, unlike the pins of the connection connector 1032H described above, and do not protrude outside the unit cover 2820 through the opening of the unit cover 2820.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel board 1110, and flows down along the surface of the panel board 1110 within the thickness of the panel board 1110 by the ball passage 2812a, and is discharged from the passage exit 2812b opening toward the rear, and is then detected by the ball sensor 2815H. Also, in the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, for example, when a magnet is brought close to the side unit 2800H for the purpose of committing fraud against the general winning opening 2001, the magnet is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030H.

In addition, each of the above-mentioned main wirings 2805b, 2805c and sub-wiring 2805a may be bundled together by a bundling member 2820g such as a cable tie after merging along the path along which the wiring extends, and may be fixed to the unit cover 2820 through an opening 2820f formed in the unit cover 2820, and for example, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector due to an external force acting directly on each wiring. In addition, each of the wirings is bundled together by the bundling member 2820g after extending on a plane along the back surface or side surface of the unit cover 2820, and it is possible to further prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector due to an external force acting directly on each wiring.

Here, electronic components such as the magnetic sensor 1030H and ball sensor 2815H described above may be replaced with normal electronic components when, for example, a malfunction such as damage occurs, and during such work, the pin of the connection connector attached to the wiring may be repeatedly inserted and removed from the socket of the connection connector attached to the electronic component. In such cases, the fit between the socket of the connection connector on the electronic component side and the pin of the connection connector on the wiring side may weaken, and external forces such as vibrations applied to the gaming machine may cause the pin of the connection connector for the wiring to come out of the socket of the connection connector for the electronic component. Furthermore, if the pin of the connection connector for the wiring comes out of the socket of the connection connector for the electronic component, it may cause malfunctions in the presentation or game, which may ultimately reduce the player's interest in the game.

[How the Wiring Abuts on the Pins of the Connector]
As shown mainly in Fig. 157, in the side unit 2800H, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged to abut against the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. In more detail, at least a part of the pins of the connector 1032H protrudes outside the unit cover 2820 that houses the magnetic sensor 1030H when the connector 1032H is inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H. On the other hand, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H and arranged outside the unit cover 2820 are arranged to abut against the outer apexes of the pins of the connector 1032H so as to sandwich the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H is arranged to abut against the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 1032H such that the pin of the connection connector 1032H is pulled out of the socket of the connection connector 1032H, the two main wirings 2805c abutting against the pin of the connection connector 1032H can prevent the pin of the connection connector 1032H from pulling out of the socket of the connection connector 1032H, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or gameplay and reducing a decline in interest in the game.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, there are two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H, and the number of main wirings 2805b on which the pins of the connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H are provided is shown as being the same as the number of main wirings 2805b on which the pins of the connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H are provided. However, it is preferable that the number of main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H is greater than the number of main wirings 2805b on which the pins of the connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H are provided. Since the many main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged to abut against the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H, it is possible to further prevent the pins of the connector 1032H from coming out of the socket of the connector 1032H.

In addition, in this embodiment, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged to sandwich the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H, but the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H may be arranged to abut the pins of the connection connector 1032H on either side of the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H, which can prevent the pins of the connection connector 1032H from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 1032H.

In addition, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800H has a socket for the connecting connector 1032 provided on the magnetic sensor 1030H and a pin for the connecting connector 1032 provided on the main wiring 2805b. However, the magnetic sensor 1030H may have a pin for the connecting connector 1032 provided on the magnetic sensor 1030H and a socket for the connecting connector 1032 provided on the main wiring 2805b. In this case, the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged to abut against the sockets of the connecting connector 1032H, thereby preventing the pins of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out of the sockets of the connecting connector 1032H.

In addition, it is desirable that the main wiring 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 has a different surface color from the main wiring 2805b connecting the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H has a light surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H has a dark surface color such as black, brown, or navy blue. Since the surface color of the main wiring 2805b and the surface color of the main wiring 2805c are different, it is easy to visually determine whether any main wiring is the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H or the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H, especially in a position where the main wiring 2805b and the main wiring 2805c are arranged side by side, and for example, the replacement work of the magnetic sensor 1030H and the ball sensor 2815H can be easily performed. In addition, the main wiring 2805c connected to the ball sensor 2815H may have a dark surface color, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H may have a light surface color.

In the present embodiment, the wiring that contacts the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H in the side unit 2800H is the main wiring 2805c that connects the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310. However, the wiring that contacts the pin of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H may be, for example, three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H. By arranging the three sub-wirings 2805a so as to contact the pin of the connection connector 1032H, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connection connector 1032H from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 1032H.

In addition, in this embodiment, an aspect has been shown in which in the side unit 2800H, the main wiring 2805c of the ball sensor 2815H abuts against the pin of the connection connector 1032H that is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H that is connected to the main control board 1310. However, instead of the magnetic sensor 1030H that is connected to the main control board 1310, an LED board of the side unit 2800 that is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub-wiring 2805a may also be used, and the main wiring 2805c abuts against the pin of the connection connector inserted into the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board, thereby preventing the pin of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board. In addition, other sub-wiring that connects other electronic components to the peripheral control board 1510 may abut against the pin of the connection connector inserted into the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board, and by the other sub-wiring abutting against the pin of the connection connector inserted into the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector provided on the LED board.

[Mode in which wiring extending from a pin of a connector comes into contact with another wiring]
As shown primarily in FIG. 158, in the side unit 2800H, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H are arranged so as to abut against the two main wirings 2805c extending from the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H, thereby preventing the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H.

In more detail, when the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha is inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha, it is located inside the unit cover 2820 that houses the ball sensor 2815H, and the two main wires 2805c extending from the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha extend from the opening of the unit cover 2820 to the outside of the side unit 2800H. These two main wires 2805c extend from the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha to the outside of the unit cover 2820 along the insertion/removal direction of the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha, and then are bent along the surface of the unit cover 2820 and extend in the direction of connection with the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the three sub-wirings 2805a are provided so as to abut the two main wirings 2805c that are bent along the surface of the unit cover 2820 outside the unit cover 2820 from the outside of the bent arc. Note that after the three sub-wirings 2805a abut the two main wirings 2805c, the three sub-wirings 2805a and the two main wirings 2805c may be bundled together by a bundling member 2820g such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit cover 2820 through an opening 2820f formed in the unit cover 2820. For example, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector due to an external force directly acting on each wiring.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the three sub-wires 2805a extending from the LED board are arranged to abut against the two main wires 2805c extending from the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha such that the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha is pulled out of the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha, the three sub-wires 2805a abutting against the two main wires 2805c extending from the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha can prevent the pin of the connection connector 2815Ha from being pulled out of the socket of the connection connector 2815Ha, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or gameplay and reducing a decline in interest in the game.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, three sub-wirings 2805a extend from the LED board of the side unit 2800H, which is greater than the number of main wirings 2805c provided with pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. However, the number of sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H may be equal to or less than the number of main wirings 2805c provided with pins of the connection connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H, and the pins of the connection connector 2805Ha can be prevented from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2805Ha.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, a socket for the connection connector 2805Ha is provided on the ball sensor 2815H, and a pin for the connection connector 2805Ha is provided on the main wiring 2805c. However, a pin for the connection connector 2805Ha may be provided on the ball sensor 2815H, and a socket for the connection connector 2805Ha may be provided on the main wiring 2805c, and the pin for the connection connector 2805Ha can be prevented from coming out of the socket for the connection connector 2805Ha.

In addition, it is desirable that the main wiring 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 has a different surface color from the sub-wiring 2805a connecting the LED board of the side unit 2800 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c has a light surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the sub-wiring 2805a has a dark surface color such as black, brown, or navy blue. Since the surface color of the main wiring 2805c and the surface color of the sub-wiring 2805a are different, it is easy to visually determine whether any main wiring is the main wiring 2805c or the sub-wiring 2805a, especially at a position where the main wiring 2805b and the sub-wiring 2805a are arranged side by side, and for example, replacement work of the LED board of the ball sensor 2815H and the side unit 2800 can be facilitated. In addition, the main wiring 2805c may have a dark surface color, and the sub-wiring 2805a may have a light surface color. In addition, the main wiring 2805c and the sub wiring 2805a may have different diameters, from the viewpoint of being able to easily visually determine whether any given main wiring is the main wiring 2805c or the sub wiring 2805a, and from the viewpoint of the importance of each wiring, it is desirable that the diameter of the main wiring 2805c is larger than the diameter of the sub wiring 2805a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800H has two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H and the sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H abutting against them. However, the wiring abutting against the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H may be, for example, two main wirings 2805b connecting the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310. By arranging the two main wirings 2805b to abut against the two main wirings 2805c, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector 2805Ha from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2805Ha.

In the present embodiment, the side unit 2800H has two main wirings 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310, and the sub-wiring 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H is in contact with the two main wirings 2805c. However, instead of the ball sensor 2815H, another LED board of the side unit 2800 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub-wiring may be used. By having the sub-wiring 2805a extending from the LED board in contact with the sub-wiring extending from the other LED board, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connector from coming out of the socket of the connector provided on the other LED board. In addition, the magnetic sensor 1030H and the two main wirings extending from the ball sensor 2815H may be in contact with the sub-wiring extending from the other LED board, and it is possible to prevent the pin of the connector from coming out of the socket of the connector provided on the other LED board.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the side unit 2800H is shown in which a wire abuts against a pin of the connector for connection, and in which another wire abuts against a wire extending from a pin of the connector for connection. However, these configurations can also be implemented in other units having multiple electronic components connected by wires, such as the starting unit 2100 having a ball sensor or a magnetic sensor. Note that in a unit having only one electronic component connected by wires, or in a unit having multiple electronic components where it is difficult to route the wires, for example, by using a wire extending from another unit, it is possible to implement a configuration in which a wire abuts against a pin of the connector for connection, and a configuration in which a wire abuts against a wire extending from a pin of the connector for connection.

In the above-mentioned manner in which a wire abuts against a pin of the connecting connector, and in the manner in which another wire abuts against a wire extending from a pin of the connecting connector, it is desirable that the type of signal transmitted through the wire extending from the pin of the connecting connector and the type of signal transmitted through the wire that prevents the pin of the connecting connector from coming loose are different types of signals.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged to abut against the pins of the connection connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. However, the signal generated when the ball sensor 2815H detects the game ball B changes instantly in accordance with the passage of the game ball B, whereas the signal generated when the magnetic sensor 1030H detects a magnetism maintains the changed state while the magnetism is being detected. In this way, when using wiring that transmits different types of signals, if the wiring is arranged in parallel and transmits a large current signal, it is necessary to consider the noise that affects each other. However, in the past, from the perspective of preventing fraud, the magnetic sensor 1030H was placed close to the ball sensor 2815H, and the wiring extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H and the wiring extending from the ball sensor 2815H were wiring that transmits relatively small current signals. Therefore, in the above-mentioned aspect in which the wiring abuts the pin of the connecting connector, for example, without using special wiring that takes into account the effects of noise, and without providing a new member for example to prevent the pin of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out and also to prevent a decrease in productivity.

Similarly, in the case where other wiring abuts against wiring extending from a pin of the connecting connector, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H from coming loose, without using special wiring that takes into account the effects of noise, and without providing a new member that prevents the pin of the connecting connector 1032H from coming loose, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in productivity.

In addition, in the above-mentioned manner in which the wiring abuts against the pin of the connecting connector, and in the manner in which other wiring abuts against the wiring extending from the pin of the connecting connector, examples have been given of the pin connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H, the wiring extending from the ball sensor 2815H, and the wiring extending from the LED board, but in the manner in which the wiring abuts against the pin of the connecting connector, and in the manner in which other wiring abuts against the wiring extending from the pin of the connecting connector, for example, as long as it does not transmit a high-current signal such as a pin connected to a drive motor that moves the movable decorative body or a wiring extending from the drive motor, it is also possible to use pins or wiring connected to a mechanical sensor (contact type) that detects the operation of the performance button of the performance operation unit 250, pins or wiring connected to a distance sensor (infrared sensor) that detects the movement of the player non-contact, or pins or wiring connected to a photosensor that detects the position of the origin of the movable decorative body.

[Modification of the starting port unit]
Next, a start port unit 2100A having a different form from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figs. 159 to 161. Fig. 159 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a start port unit 2100A having a different form. Fig. 160 is an enlarged rear view showing the vicinity of the second start port sensor 2401A shown in Fig. 159. Fig. 161 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of the main wiring. Here, the same reference numerals are used for the same configuration as the start port unit 2100 described above, and the description will be omitted.

The starting port unit 2100A is attached to the lower center of the play area 5a and to the right of the side unit 2800H within the play area 5a where the player shoots in the game ball B by operating the handle 160. The starting port unit 2100A has one starting port 2003A that is always open upward and wide enough to receive only one game ball B, a branching section 2111 that branches the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A in order to the left and right, and a unit body 2115 that houses the branching section 2111 and forms a passage for the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A.

The unit body 2115 houses the branching section 2111 as well as the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 2113, and the magnetic sensor 2114, which will be described later. The unit body 2115 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 2113, the magnetic sensor 2114, etc. are visible from the outside of the unit body 2115. Inside the unit body 2115, there is a passage that guides the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A to the branching section 2111, a passage on the left side (right side in the figure) that guides the game ball B branched off by the branching section 2111 to the left when viewed from the front (right side in the figure) to the first starting port sensor 2112 and then discharges it to the outside of the unit body 2115, and a passage on the right side (left side in the figure) that guides the game ball B branched off by the branching section 2111 to the right when viewed from the front (left side in the figure) to the second starting port sensor 2113 and then discharges it to the outside of the unit body 2115.

The start port unit 2100A further includes a first start port sensor 2112 that detects the game ball B branched off to the right by the branching section 2111, a second start port sensor 2113 that detects the game ball B branched off to the left by the branching section 2111, and a magnetic sensor 2114 that can detect the magnetism in the vicinity of the start port 2003A.

When the first start hole sensor 2112 detects game ball B, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a lottery is held for a first special symbol that allows the player to enjoy a favorable game state when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four). Similarly, when the second start hole sensor 2113 detects game ball B, a bonus is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a lottery is held for a second special symbol that allows the player to enjoy a favorable game state when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four). In addition, the magnetic sensor 2114 detects unauthorized magnetism (magnetic lines) near the start hole 2003A.

The start port unit 2100A has a connection means 2116 that connects each of the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 2113, and the magnetic sensor 2114 to the main control board 1310. The detection signals from the first start port sensor 2112 and the second start port sensor 2113 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through other boards such as relay boards, and are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

The connection means 2116 has two main wires 2116a arranged between the first start port sensor 2112 and the main control board 1310, a pin of a connection connector 2116b attached to the end of the main wire 2116a, and a socket of the connection connector 2116b attached to the first start port sensor 2112. The connection means 2116 also has two main wires 2116c arranged between the second start port sensor 2113 and the main control board 1310, a pin of a connection connector attached to the end of the main wire 2116c, a socket of a connection connector attached to the second start port sensor 2112, two main wires 2116d arranged between the magnetic sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, a pin of a connection connector 2116e attached to the end of the main wire 2116d, and a socket of a connection connector 2116e attached to the magnetic sensor 2114.

Each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and is routed along a wiring path 2115a having a groove shape formed on the back surface of the unit body 2115. After the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together with a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115. For example, an external force acting directly on each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d can prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the sockets of the connection connector.

The wiring path 2115a of the unit body 2115 is formed on the back surface of the passage unit body 2115 so as to bypass the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 2113, the magnetic sensor 2114, the passage that guides the game ball B to the branching portion 2111, the passage that guides the game ball B to the first start port sensor 2112, and the passage that guides the game ball B to the second start port sensor 2113. The wiring path 2115a is formed in a groove shape on the back surface of the unit body 2115, and each main wiring 2116a, 2116c, 2116d is routed along the wiring path 2115a inside the back surface of the unit body 2115. The unit body 2115 further has a wall-shaped contact member 2115b that forms a part of the side wall of the approximately groove-shaped wiring path 2115a in the vicinity of the first start port sensor 2112.

[Contact member acting on bent portion of wiring]
160, the main wiring 2116a extends from the pin of the connection connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2116e of the first start port sensor 2112 toward the main control board 1310 via the wiring path 2115a of the unit body 2115. In detail, the main wiring 2116a has a bent portion 2116a1 that is bent in a direction different from the insertion/removal direction of the connection connector 2116e near the first start port sensor 2112, and the bent portion 2116a1 is formed from the pin of the connection connector 2116e provided at the end of the main wiring 2116a toward the wiring path 2115a.

The contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, preventing the pin of the connection connector 2116e provided on the main wiring 2116a from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided on the first start port sensor 2112, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or gameplay and preventing a decline in interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 abuts against the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radial outside of the bent portion 22116a1. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e such that the pin of the connection connector 2116e falls out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e, the contact member 2115b abuts against the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e such that the pin of the connection connector 2116e falls out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e, the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e can be prevented from falling out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e.

Moreover, it is more preferable that the bent portion 21126a1 is pressed against the contact member 2115b, and the contact area with the contact member 2115b increases due to the deformation of the bent portion 2116a1, and the external force applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e is further absorbed by the bending of the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, thereby preventing the pin of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e.

In this embodiment, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 is in contact with the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radial outside of the bent portion 2116a1. However, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 may be in close proximity to the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radial outside of the bent portion 2116a1, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e may be in contact with the socket of the connection connector 2116e from the radial outside of the bent portion 2116a1. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e such that it would come loose from the socket, the contact member 2115b is close to the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, so that the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e causes the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a to come into contact with the contact member 2115b, and the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, preventing the pin of the connection connector 2116e from coming loose from the socket of the connection connector 2116e.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 is not positioned in the insertion/removal direction of the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, when inserting or removing the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a into or from the socket of the connection connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112, contact between the pin of the connection connector 2116e and the contact member 2115b can be prevented, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted or removed from the socket of the connection connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112.

In the present embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115. However, when a plurality of main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115 after at least a portion of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together, or each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115b is formed on the unit body 2115, but the contact member 2115b may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a when the starting port unit 2100A is attached to the game board 5 (more specifically, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5).

Specifically, a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2115b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a may be formed on the right end of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left of the starting port unit 2100A, a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2215b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, or a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2215b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and this can prevent the pin of the connection connector 2116e provided on the main wiring 2116a from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided on the first starting port sensor 2112, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or game and preventing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, in the case where the contact member 2115b is formed on the unit body 2115, the range in which the contact member 2115b can be formed is wider than in the case where the contact member 2115b is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A, and the ease of design when forming the contact member 2115b is superior. On the other hand, in the case where the contact member 2115b is formed on the outside of the starting port unit 2100A, there is no need to form a new contact member 2115b, and the ease of formation when forming the contact member 2115b is superior.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact member 211 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a of the starting port unit 2100A, but this may also be the case in other units, such as the side unit 2800H having an LED board, a magnetic sensor 1030H, and a ball sensor 2815H, in which the contact member acts on the bent portion of the main wiring or sub-wiring, and this can prevent the pin of the connection connector provided on the main wiring or sub-wiring from coming out of the socket of the connection connector provided on the electronic component, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or gameplay and reducing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Contact member acting on detour portion of wiring]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main wiring 2116a in this embodiment has a detour section 2116a2 in the vicinity of the pin of the connection connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided on the first starting port sensor 2112, which is detoured in a direction other than the direction toward the main control board 1310 (in this embodiment, the opposite direction) and then switched to the connection direction with the main control board 1310.

The contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 acts on the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, preventing the pin of the connection connector 2116e provided on the main wiring 2116a from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided on the first start port sensor 2112, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or gameplay and a decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 abuts against the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a from the radial outside of the bypass portion 22116a2. Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e such that the pin of the connection connector 2116e falls out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e, the contact member 2115c abuts against the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e can be prevented from falling out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e.

Moreover, it is more preferable that the bypass portion 21126a2 is pressed against the contact member 2115c, and the contact area with the contact member 2115c increases due to the deformation of the bypass portion 2116a2, and the external force applied to the pin of the connecting connector 2116e is further absorbed by the bending of the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, thereby preventing the pin of the connecting connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e.

In this embodiment, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 is in contact with the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radial outside of the detour portion 2116a2. However, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 may be in close proximity to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a from the radial outside of the detour portion 2116a2. In addition, when an external force is applied to the contact member 2115c such that the pin of the connector 2116e comes out of the socket of the connector 2116e, Even if an external force is applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e, the contact member 2115c is close to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, so that the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a and the contact member 2115c come into contact with each other due to the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e, and the external force applied to the pin of the connection connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e can be prevented from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 is not positioned in the insertion/removal direction of the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, when inserting or removing the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a into or from the socket of the connection connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112, contact between the pin of the connection connector 2116e and the contact member 2115c can be prevented, and the pin of the connection connector 2116e of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted or removed from the socket of the connection connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112.

In the present embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115. However, when a plurality of main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115 after at least a portion of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together, or each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled together by a bundling member such as a cable tie and fixed to the unit body 2115.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115c is formed on the unit body 2115, but the contact member 2115c may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the bypass portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a when the starting port unit 2100A is attached to the game board 5 (more specifically, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5).

Specifically, a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2215c acting on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a may be formed on the right end of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left of the starting port unit 2100A, a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2115c acting on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, or a contact portion equivalent to the contact member 2115c acting on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a may be provided on the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and this can prevent the pin of the connection connector 2116e provided on the main wiring 2116a from coming out of the socket of the connection connector 2116e provided on the first starting port sensor 2112, thereby preventing malfunctions in the presentation or game and preventing a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, in the case where the contact member 2115c is formed on the unit body 2115, the range in which the contact member 2115c can be formed is wider than in the case where the contact member 2115c is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A, and the ease of design when forming the contact member 2115c is superior. On the other hand, in the case where the contact member 2115c is formed on the outside of the starting port unit 2100A, there is no need to form a new contact member 2115c, and the ease of formation when forming the contact member 2115c is superior.

In the above-mentioned embodiment in which the wiring extending from the connection member inserted into the connected member of one electronic component acts on the connection member inserted into the connected member of the other electronic component or the wiring extending from the connection member, it is difficult to prevent the connection member inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring path from coming loose, for example, in a unit such as the starting port unit 2100A. However, in the embodiment in which the contact member acts on the bent or detoured portion of the wiring described above, even if the connection member is inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring path, it is possible to preferably prevent the connection member from coming loose.

[About handling of base values in base monitor]
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the other embodiments described above, the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) is described as being arranged on the main control board 1310, but the base monitor of the fifth embodiment is arranged on the frame control board 740. The basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is the same as the other embodiments.

In this example, the frame control board 740, not the main control board 1310, manages (calculates and stores) the base value displayed on the base monitor. First, the frame control board 740 counts the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry openings (winning openings, out openings) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 (number of entering balls), that is, the number of game balls B that are discharged from the game area 5a. Specifically, the number of game balls B that have entered the winning openings that are the subject of the payout of prize balls due to entry is the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and the number of game balls B that have entered the out openings that collect the game balls B that have not entered the winning openings is counted as the total number of game balls B. These safe ball sensors 606 and out ball sensors 605 are connected to the frame control board 740.

In addition, when a detection sensor corresponding to a winning hole that is the object of paying out (awarding) a prize ball due to a ball entering the hole is detected, the main control board 1310 transmits the number of game balls B as a prize ball command to the frame control board 740. For example, it is predetermined that when a game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 1 game ball B is paid out, when a game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, 3 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the first starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, 3 game balls B are paid out, and when a game ball B enters the large winning hole 2005 or the special winning hole 2006, 10 game balls B are paid out. Then, based on receiving the prize ball command, the frame control board 740 counts the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the payout number) that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls when the balls enter the winning slot. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since there is no payout of actual balls, based on receiving the prize ball command, the frame control board 740 adds the number of game balls B that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls to the number of balls held by the player.

The frame control board 740 then calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, and stores the result of this calculation as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, while displaying it on the base monitor arranged on the frame control board 740. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is: base value = (number of payouts / number of balls that enter) x 100. For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is too high, it is possible that the balls are only entering the winning holes that are the target of the payout of prize balls when the balls enter, and by monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to know whether the balls are being entered into the winning holes through fraudulent activities.

As for the base value, each time the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60,000, a new ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is calculated, and the calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls that have been outdated are stored as history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. Specifically, in addition to the current base value BL until the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60,000, three intervals, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3, are stored as history. As for the base value, each time the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 60,000, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, and the base value B2 from the previous time are shifted to the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the previous time, and the base value B3 from the previous time, and the original base value B3 is discarded. In addition, in the base monitor, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 from the previous time, and the base value B3 from the previous time are switched and displayed at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, in the base monitor, two of the four 7-segment LEDs are used to indicate which section the base value is for, and the other two 7-segment LEDs are used to display the base value (the calculated ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering) corresponding to the section being displayed. The base monitor is a seven-segment LED with a decimal point (so-called dot), and a dot is lit between the seven-segment LED indicating the section of the base value and the seven-segment LED indicating the base value corresponding to the section being displayed. For example, when displaying the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3, the four seven-segment LEDs are switched to display information such as "BL.21", "B1.19", "B2.17", and "B3.20" at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). In this way, in this embodiment, the control for managing the base value is provided on the main frame 4 side (frame control board 740) rather than on the game board 5 side (main control board 1310), so that the processing load of the main control board 1310 in the game board 5 can be reduced. In addition, by providing the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) on the main frame 4 side (frame control board 740) rather than on the game board 5 side (main control board 1310), the base monitor on the main frame 4 side can be reused when replacing the game board 5 with the main frame 4, which makes it possible to reduce the cost of the game board 5.

In the past, when a base monitor was provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the base value displayed on the base monitor was managed by the main control board 1310, when the game board 5 was replaced with respect to the main frame 4, the base value was managed anew from the initial state on the main control board 1310 side of the replaced game board 5. However, in the present embodiment, when a base monitor is provided on the frame control board 740 provided on the main frame 4 and the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the frame control board 740, even if the game board 5 is replaced with respect to the main frame 4, the frame control board 740 provided on the main frame 4 is not replaced, so that even if the game board 5 is replaced with respect to the main frame 4, some of the information on the base value of the game board 5 before the replacement may be reflected in the replaced game board 5, resulting in a problem of reduced reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5. For example, if the base values of the game board 5 before replacement, such as the past base values B1 to B3 managed by the frame control board 740, are transmitted to the replaced game board 5, the reliability of the contents of the base values of the replaced game board 5 will be lost. In this example, a method for avoiding a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 when the base values displayed on the base monitor are managed by the frame control board 740 will be described below.

In this example, a unique CPU number (unique information) is pre-stored in the main control board 1310 for the CPU (main control MPU). This CPU number is assigned to each main control board 1310 even for game boards 5 of the same series, and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. In addition, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 and stores it in a RAM built into the frame control board 740. The CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is not cleared (initialized) and is retained even if the power is turned on and off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. Similarly, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is not cleared (initialized) and is retained even if the power is turned on and off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. When the frame control board 740 receives a CPU number from the main control board 1310, it determines whether the CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, and based on the result of this determination, it decides whether to clear (initialize) the base value stored in the frame control board 740.

Specifically, when the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, it determines that the game board 5 has not been replaced with respect to the main frame 4, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared. More specifically, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3 stored as base values are all maintained. As a result, in a situation where the game board has not been replaced with another game board between the previous power-on and the current power-on, such as when the power is turned on with the same game board 5 attached, or when the game board A attached to the main frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed while the power is off and then the game board A is reattached and the power is turned on, the base value is counted continuously from the state where the base value is maintained, and the base value is not unintentionally cleared, and the base value can be continuously transmitted.

On the other hand, when the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, it determines that the game board 5 has been replaced with respect to the main frame 4, and clears the base value stored in the frame control board 740 (resets it to the initial state). For example, when the game board A attached to the main frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed and then a game board B having a different CPU number is attached, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. More specifically, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3 stored as base values are all cleared. As a result, after the game board 5 is replaced, the base value of the game board 5 before the replacement is not transmitted, and the base value is newly counted from the initialized state, so that the base value of the replaced game board 5 can be correctly transmitted. In other words, even if the game board 5 is replaced, there is no possibility that part of the base value information of the game board 5 before replacement will be reflected in the replaced game board 5, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5.

When replacing the game board 5, whether it is for a game board 5 corresponding to the same model series or a game board 5 corresponding to a different model series, the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 is changed, and therefore the frame control board 740 will determine that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740.

In addition, if the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, in addition to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740, the received CPU number is newly stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740. In this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is set to "1", and if it is determined that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, in addition to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740, the received CPU number is newly stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740 by overwriting it. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a process to clear the CPU number, and simplifies control. As an alternative to this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 may be "multiple (for example, two)". In such a case, even if a game board 5 removed for maintenance or the like is mistakenly attached to another main body frame 4, it is possible to ensure that the base value is not cleared, improving convenience. However, if the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is "multiple (for example, two)", it is desirable to separately provide a process that can voluntarily clear some or all of the multiple stored CPU numbers when a RAM clear or the like is triggered.

In addition, in this example, the following control is performed in the case where the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 is removed while the power is on. That is, when the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 is removed while the power is on, the frame control board 740 does not receive the CPU number, and at this timing, the determination of whether or not it matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is not performed, and the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. For this reason, for example, even when the game board A attached to the main frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 while the power is on for some reason (such as when the power to the game board 5 is cut off while the power to the main frame 4 is still being applied), the frame control board 740 does not receive the CPU number, and the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 can be maintained without being cleared. As a result, even if the game board 5 is unintentionally removed, the base value can be continuously counted from the state in which the base value is maintained.

In addition, when the game board A mounted on the main frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4 while the power is on for some reason and then the game board A is attached to the main frame 4 again (when the power supply to the game board 5 is resumed while the power supply to the main frame 4 is still on, etc.), the CPU number will be transmitted again from the main control board 1310. However, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (when the frame control board 740 receives the second CPU number after the power is turned on), the frame control board 740 does not re-execute the determination of whether the CPU number received by the frame control board 740 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. As a result, if the game board 5 is unintentionally removed and then the same game board 5 is reattached, the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 can be maintained without being cleared, and the base value can be continuously counted from the state in which the base value is maintained. As another example, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number for the second time after power is turned on), the frame control board 740 may re-determine whether the CPU number received by the frame control board 740 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Even when the determination is re-determined in this way, if the re-determination result is "match," the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared, so that the base value can be counted continuously from the state in which the base value is maintained.

In this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is set to "1". For example, if the game board A attached to the main frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed while the power is on, and then the game board B is attached and removed, and then the game board A is attached again, it will be determined that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 at the time game board B is attached, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 will be cleared. In other words, if the frame control board 740 receives multiple different CPU numbers while the power is on, an obvious abnormality or fraud can be foreseen, so even if game board A is removed and then attached again, if game board A was not attached immediately before, the base value at the time game board A was first attached will not be maintained.

(When changing from game board A1 to game board A2)
FIG. 162 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. Here, the game board A1 is attached to the main frame 4 before the power is cut off at timing t1, and after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2, and when the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Note that in this example, the case where the game board 5 is replaced with the game board A2 corresponding to the same model series as the game board A1 is described, but even when the game board A is replaced with the game board B corresponding to a different model series from the game board A1, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, and the same behavior is shown.

As shown in FIG. 162, before the power is shut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is attached to the main frame 4, and this is the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, with the game board A1 attached to the main frame 4, when a starting win occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, allowing normal gameplay to be played.

The detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are activated, making it possible to pay out (award) prize balls when the balls enter the ports. When a game ball B that has entered one of the winning ports is collected, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when a game ball B that has not entered one of the winning ports but has entered the out port is collected, it is detected by the out ball sensor 605. These safe ball sensor 606 and out ball sensor 605 are activated. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, as for the performance display device 1600, when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, as a normal operation, it executes an operation corresponding to a standby performance (e.g., a demo performance) in a state of waiting for the variable display of the special pattern to start, and when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, it executes an operation corresponding to a variable performance (performance based on a variable pattern) based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (e.g., a reach performance) including the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the external terminal board (game ball lending device connection terminal board 765) can output a specified signal to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals the hall computer can understand the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 on the hall side. For example, when a starting winning occurs, when the special symbol changing display stops at a winning symbol and a jackpot game is being played, when an abnormality is detected, etc., a corresponding signal is output.

In addition, before timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a.

Before timing t1, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the game board A1 and stores it in the RAM built into the frame control board 740. The CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is retained without being cleared by a specified backup power source (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and is retained without being cleared even when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 and the power is turned on at timing t2 described below.

Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor provided on the frame control board 740. In other words, before the power is cut off at timing t1, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are counted, making it possible to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, and to reflect this in the base value displayed on the base monitor. This base value is not cleared and is retained even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and is retained even when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 and the power is turned on at timing t2 described later.

Prior to timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning slot, and to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the player's number of balls held or number of balls held X. The number of balls held or number of balls held X is maintained without being cleared by a predetermined backup power source (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and is maintained without being cleared even when the game board A1 is replaced by the game board A2 and the power is turned on at timing t2 described below. After the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with game board A2. Then, with game board A2 attached to the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at time t2 when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 transmits a CPU number to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 determines whether the received CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Here, because the game board A1 was replaced with the game board A2 before the power was turned on at time t2, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 does not match the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, and based on this determination result, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared.

Here, the timing for transmitting the CPU number from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 is a predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after power-on. In other words, when the specific timing t2 immediately after power-on arrives, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number and determines whether the CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. In addition, the specific timing t2 is the same regardless of the power-on pattern described below. For example, when RAM clear is performed by operating the RAM clear switch 741 at power-on accompanied by RAM clear, the specific timing t2 is set before the start of RAM clear; when the number of balls held is cleared by operating the ball count storage/display clear switch 743 at power-on, the specific timing t2 is set before the start of the ball removal mode when the ball removal mode is started by operating the ball removal switch 742 at power-on; and when the state in which settings can be changed (change permitted state) is started by operating the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch at power-on, the specific timing t2 is set before the start of the change permitted state, thereby preventing the control from becoming complicated.

As another example, the timing for transmitting the CPU number from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 may be a predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after power-on, or after the specific timing t2 for confirmation of the CPU number on the frame control board 740 side. Then, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (when the frame control board 740 receives the second CPU number after power-on from the frame control board 740 side), the frame control board 740 may re-execute a determination as to whether the CPU number received by the frame control board 740 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Even when the determination is re-executed in this way, if the re-executed determination result is "match", the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. On the other hand, if the re-run judgment result is "mismatch," this indicates that there is an obvious abnormality or fraud, so the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are cleared.

In addition, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game board A2 is attached to the main frame 4, and this is the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, with the game board A2 attached to the main frame 4, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, so that normal gameplay can be played.

The detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are activated, making it possible to pay out (award) prize balls when the balls enter the ports. When a game ball B that has entered one of the winning ports is collected, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when a game ball B that has not entered one of the winning ports but has entered the out port is collected, it is detected by the out ball sensor 605. These safe ball sensor 606 and out ball sensor 605 are activated. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

The performance display device 1600 is also configured to execute a display corresponding to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is configured to be executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a normal operation such as a performance display including a display of a changing decorative pattern (e.g., a reach performance) is executed when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a changing pattern command. However, until the predetermined period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 and a normal operation such as a performance display including a display of a changing decorative pattern (e.g., a reach performance) may be executed simultaneously.

In addition, at timing t2, the external terminal board outputs a security signal in response to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, the setting value is changed, or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and the same security signal is also output when the base value is cleared. In other words, when the base value is cleared, a forced output state is entered in which a security signal is forcibly output, even if no abnormality is detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, when the base value is cleared, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall is aware that the base value has been cleared. In addition, the security signal is stopped when the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3 described later. As another example, the output may be stopped at a predetermined time before or after timing t3, regardless of whether the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300. If the security signal is stopped before the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300, the security signal may be output again based on the establishment of other conditions (detection of an abnormality, etc.) that require the security signal to be output after the stop. In this way, the accuracy of monitoring new fraudulent acts (for example, fraudulent acts of illegally entering balls within a period before the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300) can be improved.

In this example, in addition to the security signal, the external terminal board outputs various signals to the hall computer to inform the game status, balls entering the winning slot, and the payout of prize balls, and it is possible to output these signals not only after the output of the security signal has stopped at timing t3, but also during the period from timing t2 to t3.

In addition, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195.

In addition, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and upon determining that the received CPU number of the game board A2 does not match the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740, the frame control board 740 newly stores the received CPU number of the game board A2 in the RAM built into the frame control board 740.

At timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and by determining that the received CPU number of the game board A2 does not match the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. More specifically, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3 stored as base values are all cleared. As a result, after the game board A2 is replaced, the base value of the game board A1 before the replacement is not transmitted, and the base value is counted anew from the initialized state, so that the base value of the replaced game board A2 can be correctly transmitted.

At the time of timing t2, the frame control board 740 clears the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 counts at least the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) and monitors whether the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3, the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of balls paid out) are counted, but are not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering, and are not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. More details on this will be provided later.

Then, after the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) at timing t3 reaches 300, the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are counted, making it possible to calculate the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and to reflect this in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t2, the game board A1 is replaced with game board A2, but at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls held X are not cleared but are maintained. After the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning hole, and makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held X. After the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180.

(When removing and installing the game board A1)
Fig. 163 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board A1 is detached when the power is cut off. Here, the game board A1 is attached to the main frame 4 before the power is cut off at timing t1, and after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection, etc., and then the game board A1 is attached again, and when the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. In this example, the behavior before the power is cut off at timing t1 is the same as that in Fig. 162, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 163, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection, etc., and then the game board A1 is reattached. Then, with the game board A1 attached to the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at time t2 when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 transmits a CPU number to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 determines whether the received CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Here, because the game board A1 is attached again before the power is turned on at time t2, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740, and maintains the base value stored in the frame control board 740 based on the result of this determination.

In addition, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game board A1 is attached to the main frame 4, and this is the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, with the game board A1 attached to the main frame 4, when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays as a winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, allowing normal gameplay to be played.

The detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are activated, making it possible to pay out (award) prize balls when the balls enter the ports. When a game ball B that has entered one of the winning ports is collected, it is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and when a game ball B that has not entered one of the winning ports but has entered the out port is collected, it is detected by the out ball sensor 605. These safe ball sensor 606 and out ball sensor 605 are activated. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured to execute a display corresponding to the maintenance of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as normal operation, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, a performance display including a variation display of the decorative pattern (e.g., a reach performance) is executed. However, until the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the maintenance of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 and a normal operation such as a performance display including a variation display of the decorative pattern (e.g., a reach performance) may be executed simultaneously.

In addition, at the time of timing t2, the external terminal board does not output a security signal because the base value stored in the frame control board 740 has not been cleared. After the power is turned on at timing t2, it is possible to output various signals that convey the game status, balls entering the winning slot, and the payout of prize balls.

As another example, the external terminal board may output a security signal in response to the maintenance of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, the setting value is changed, or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and the same security signal is output even when the base value is maintained. In other words, when the base value is maintained, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even when an abnormality is not detected, the setting value is not changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, when the base value is maintained, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall can understand that the base value has been maintained. In addition, the security signal may be stopped when the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3 described later, or may be stopped before timing t3.

In addition, after the power is turned on at timing t2, the game ball can be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the reinstalled game board A1, and by determining that the received CPU number of the game board A1 matches the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740, the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained.

Furthermore, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the reinstalled game board A1, and by determining that the received CPU number of the game board A1 matches the CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained. More specifically, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value before last B2, and the base value before last B3 stored as base values are all maintained. As a result, for the reinstalled game board A1, the base value continues to be counted from the state in which the base value was maintained, and the base value can be transmitted correctly.

At the time of timing t2, the frame control board 740 maintains the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 counts at least the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) and monitors whether the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3, the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of balls paid out) are counted, but are not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering, and are not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Then, after the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) at timing t3 reaches 300, the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, outgoing ball) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are counted, making it possible to calculate the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and to reflect this in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t2, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection, and then reinstalled, but at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls held X are not cleared and are maintained. After the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning hole, and makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held X. After the power is turned on at timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180.

[Permitted time for refilling enclosed balls]
In this example, the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) from the time the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3 is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor, the reason for which is explained below.

As described above in detail, in this example, a large number of game balls B (for example, 40 to 60 balls) are stored in a line in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, and are circulated inside. The three seals in the gauge section 620 and the enclosed ball amount detection process make it possible to check whether the amount (number of balls) of enclosed game balls B is appropriate. Specifically, when the rear end of the lined-up game balls B in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600 is located between the under-circulating ball sensor 621 and the over-circulating ball sensor 622, the under-circulating ball sensor 621 is ON and the over-circulating ball sensor 622 is OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is appropriate. In addition, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the under-circulating ball sensor 621, the under-circulating ball sensor 621 is OFF and the over-circulating ball sensor 622 is OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is too small. In addition, if the rear end of the game balls B lined up in a row in the ball storage passage 604 is located upstream of the under-circulating ball sensor 621 and the over-circulating ball sensor 622, the under-circulating ball sensor 621 is ON and the over-circulating ball sensor 622 is ON, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive.

If there are no game balls B or the amount of game balls B is too small within the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, it becomes necessary to replenish game balls B. In this example, game balls B can be replenished via the out port 1008 or the winning ports (general winning port 2001, first starting port 2003, second starting port 2004, large winning port 2005). When the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b are exposed, and game balls B can be replenished via the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b.

On the other hand, if there is an excessive amount of game balls B in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, and it is desired to discharge the game balls B to the outside, the ball removal shutter 615 can be pulled forward to open the ball removal opening 613p, and the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 can be turned ON when the power is turned on, allowing the game balls B to be removed into the ball receiving tray 720.

The frame control board 740 counts the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, winning ball exit) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out balls). However, when the hall manager replenishes game balls B via the exit 1008 or winning ball exit, if this is reflected in the base value as a subject for calculating the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, the base value will include ball entrance information that is not related to the game.

In this example, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 in FIG. 162 or FIG. 163 until the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) at timing t3 reaches 300, the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and is not reflected in the base value. In other words, even if game balls B are replenished via the out entrance 1008 or the winning ball entrance at timing t3 until the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 300, they are not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and are not reflected in the base value. This prevents ball entry information that is not related to the game from being included in the calculation of the base value even when game balls B are replenished through the out hole 1008 or the winning hole, and maintains an appropriate base value that does not include ball entry information that is not related to the game. The above-mentioned "300 balls" are managed by the frame control board 740, and game balls B replenished through the out hole 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main frame 4 side, and game balls B replenished through winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 are detected (counted) by the safe ball sensor 606 provided on the main frame 4 side.

In the above, the period during which the base value is not reflected is set to the period from when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that enter the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3, but the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) is set to be greater than the number of balls (40 to 60) that can be stored in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, that is, the number of balls that can be replenished with game balls B via the out entrance 1008 or winning ball entrance. This makes it possible to prevent the base value from including ball entry information that is not related to the game, even if game balls B are replenished via the out entrance 1008 or winning ball entrance when there are no game balls B in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4.

In this example, out of the outlet 1008 and the winning hole, the outlet 1008 has a larger opening, making it easier to insert the game ball B. Also, from the time the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (entry balls) that have entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3, this is the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side, and when the game ball B enters the winning hole, the display of the special pattern begins to change and the prize balls are paid out (awarded). For this reason, when the hall manager replenishes game balls B, it is preferable to replenish game balls B via the outlet 1008 out of the outlet 1008 and the winning hole.

In this example, the period during which the base value is not reflected is the period from when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3, and game balls B are replenished via the out entrance 1008 and the winning entrance immediately after the hall manager turns on the power. However, as another example, a refill permission switch may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as an operation unit (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player, and when the refill permission switch is operated after power is turned on, even if game balls B are refilled via the out port 1008 or the winning port until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entrance (winning port, out port) reaches 300, the refill may not be subject to the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, and may not be reflected in the base value. This allows the hall manager to refill game balls B via the out port 1008 or the winning port as needed, even if the power is not turned on.

In this example, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (entry balls) entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3, the base monitor does not display the base value, and displays a special display in response to the base value stored in the frame control board 740 being cleared. As described above in detail, during the period from timing t2 to t3, for example, when game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605 or the safe ball sensor 606, one of the four 7-segment LEDs on the base monitor may display "8." for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). This allows the hall manager to monitor from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 whether game balls B are being illegally entered into the out entrance 1008 or winning entrance by the display on the base monitor during the period from timing t2 to t3.

In this example, the game balls B collected in the out hole 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main frame 4 side, and the game balls B that enter the winning holes such as the general winning hole 2001, the normal winning hole 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the large winning hole 2005, and the special winning hole 2006 are detected (counted) by the safe ball sensor 606 provided on the main frame 4 side, but these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. Also, a passage may be formed so that the game balls B collected in the out hole 1008 and the game balls B that enter the various winning holes join together, and a sensor may be provided on the passage, and the number of game balls B that enter the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls that enter) may be counted by the detection of the single sensor.

In this example, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B (number of balls entering) that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) reaches 300 at timing t3. In addition to this, in detail, as described above, "Each time the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60,000 balls, a new ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is calculated, and for example, from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated until at least the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 1,000 balls, the execution of the display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of entering balls may be restricted." However, during such a period, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, but the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is used as the subject of the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. For this reason, if game balls B are replenished through the out hole 1008 or the winning hole during such a period, the base value will include entry information that is not related to the game, and it is not suitable as a period for replenishing game balls B. For this reason, a notification may be issued to inform the manager that it is an inappropriate period for refilling game balls B from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated until the number of game balls B (entering balls) that have entered at least the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 1000. For example, the base monitor may not display the base value, and a special display may be displayed in response to the fact that it is an inappropriate period for refilling game balls B.

In the above, when the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared at the time of powering on, calculation of a new base value for every 60,000 balls is started, but from the time the power is turned on until the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 300, the number is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and from the time the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 300, the number is included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. Specifically, from the time the power is turned on until the number of game balls B (entry ball number) entering the ball entrance (winning ball entrance, out entrance) reaches 300, the state is "not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor," and from the time the number of balls exceeds 300 and reaches 1,000, the state is "included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor." By changing the display format on the base monitor depending on these conditions, the hall manager can determine which condition is occurring.

In addition, in this example, a pachinko machine 1 is used in which game balls B circulate within a circulation path R in the main frame 4, but in the case of a pachinko machine in which game balls B are supplied from an external source such as an amusement island, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) from the time the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 at timing t3 (number of entering balls) may be used to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, and may be reflected in the base value.

[About the ball count memory/display clear switch operation]
Next, we will explain how to handle the number of balls held by operating the ball count storage/display clear switch 743. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. As described above in detail, when there are balls held (number of balls held > 0), pressing the counting button switch 180 sends information about the number of balls held to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. The number of balls held is stored in the RAM built into the frame control board 740.

When, for example, the hall manager inserts game ball B into the winning hole to check whether the game is proceeding normally as a check of the operation of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is paid out (granted) and added to the number of balls held. However, since such number of balls held is not given to the player, it is desirable to allow the hall manager to clear it in a way other than settling the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. In this regard, in this example, the frame control board 740 is provided with a ball number storage/display clear switch 743 that can be operated by the hall manager. By operating such ball number storage/display clear switch 743 when the power is turned on, the number of balls held stored in the frame control board 740 can be cleared. In other words, by making it possible to select whether to maintain or clear the number of balls held stored in the frame control board 740 depending on whether or not the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 is operated when the power is turned on after being turned off, convenience can be improved.

Figure 164 is an enlarged view of the frame control board.

As shown in FIG. 164, the frame control board 740 is provided with, from the left, a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM (RAM clear), a ball count memory/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM etc. and clearing the display on the ball count display section 140 of the door frame 3, and a ball removal switch 742 used to remove the enclosed game ball B from the ball removal opening 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

The RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are located close enough together that multiple switches can be operated with one hand. The power switch 751 is located on the power supply board 750, but this power switch 751 is also located close to the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742, which are located on the frame control board 740. This makes it easy to operate the desired switch among the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on.

Figure 165 is a table showing the conditions for clearing the number of balls held. In this example, the manner of operation when the power is turned on can be changed by changing the combination of the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 that are turned on, and the following eight power-on patterns are provided. Of these, if the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on when the power is turned on, the number of balls held is cleared.

Here, the frame control board 740 stores the number of balls held in RAM, but maintains (backs up) the number of balls held when the power is cut off. Also, when the frame control board 740 detects a RAM error, such as an abnormal value in the RAM, it stores it in the RAM as error information A, and when it detects an error other than a RAM error, such as "out of balls fired," "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "lifting ball jam error," "too few game balls," or "too many game balls," it stores it in the RAM as error information B. Of these, error information A is maintained (backed up) when the power is cut off, but error information B is not maintained (backed up). Also, when the frame control board 740 detects various errors, it stores error signals related to error information A and error information B in RAM. Of these, error signals related to error information A are maintained (backed up) when the power is cut off, but error signals related to error information B are not maintained (backed up). The error signal stored in the frame control board 740 is output to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 765, and is further output to an external device such as the hall computer of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8.

Power-on pattern A is when the RAM clear switch 741, ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are not turned on when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated), and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained. Also, while error information A and error signals related to error information A are maintained, error information B and error signals related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned on after being cut off, so that it is possible to know that the RAM error continues, and an error signal related to error information A is output to an external device. Also, as a notification mode for notifying the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, a sound saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, which corresponds to normal power-on when no switches are turned on.

Power-on pattern B is when the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned ON, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is eliminated and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared by turning the RAM clear switch 741 ON after turning the power ON after the power is turned OFF. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light from the time the power is turned ON, a sound saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit yellow light, which is the color of light that corresponds to turning on the RAM clear switch 741.

Power-on pattern C is when the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Also, while error information A and the error signal related to error information A are maintained, error information B and the error signal related to error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned on after being cut off, so that it is possible to know that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to error information A is output to an external device. Also, as a notification mode to notify the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light, a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit red light, which is the light color that corresponds to turning on the ball count memory/display clear switch 743. If the power is cut off when the number of balls held is not stored in the frame control board 740, and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on the next time the power is turned on, the same processing as when the number of balls held is stored is performed, to avoid complicating the control.

Power-on pattern D is when the RAM clear switch 741 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned ON, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is eliminated and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared by turning the RAM clear switch 741 ON after turning the power ON after the power is turned OFF. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to flash alternately in red and yellow from the time the power is turned ON, a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and the message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 can be made to flash alternately in red and yellow to notify the player that the RAM clear switch 741 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 have been turned ON.

Power-on pattern E is when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, whereas the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned on after being cut off, so that it is possible to know that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is output to an external device. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the time the power is turned on, a sound saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit green light as the light color corresponding to the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742. When the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed, and the enclosed game ball B can be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Note that the ball removal process performed by turning the ball removal switch 742 ON is not executed when the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, but is executed only when the number of balls held is not stored in the frame control board 740 (number of balls held is 0). For this reason, the above-mentioned notification of "number of balls held is maintained" is a notification that indicates that the number of balls held is substantially 0 when the ball removal process is executed, and is a notification that indicates that the number of balls held is substantially 1 or more when the ball removal process is not executed. In such a case, as a notification method to notify the outside, a sound saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may be output from the speaker, and a message image saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Power-on pattern F is when the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 are turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned ON, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is eliminated and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared by turning the RAM clear switch 741 ON after turning the power ON after the power is turned OFF. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to flash alternately in green and yellow from the time the power is turned ON, a sound saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls held is maintained" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be alternately flashed in green and yellow to notify the fact that the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 have been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 are turned on, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed after RAM clearing is executed, and the enclosed game ball B can be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). The ball removal process may be executed at the same time as the RAM clearing. As described above, the ball removal process performed by turning on the ball removal switch 742 is not executed when the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, but is executed only when the number of balls held is not stored in the frame control board 740 (number of balls held is 0). For this reason, in the case of power-on pattern F, when the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, the ball removal process is not executed (the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is disabled), and only RAM clearing is executed by turning the RAM clear switch 741 ON. In such a case, as a notification method to notify the outside, a sound saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may be output from the speaker, and a message image saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Power-on pattern G is when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Also, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, whereas the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned on after being cut off, so that it is possible to know that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is output to an external device. Also, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light from the time the power is turned on, a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit red light as the light color corresponding to turning on the ball count memory/display clear switch 743. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, regardless of whether there are balls in the player's possession, priority is given to clearing the number of balls held, and the above-mentioned ball removal process is not executed. In other words, when the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated, and the LEDs do not emit green light as the light color corresponding to turning on the ball removal switch 742. In such a case, as a notification mode to notify the outside, a sound "ball removal has been invalidated" may be output from the speaker, and a message image "ball removal has been invalidated" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Power-on pattern H is when the RAM clear switch 741, ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are all turned ON when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In addition, error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared, and error information B and error signals related to error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is eliminated and error information A and error signals related to error information A are cleared by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning on the power after cutting off the power. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to flash alternately in red and yellow from the time the power is turned on, a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can be alternately flashed in red and yellow to notify the user that the RAM clear switch 741 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 have been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the number of balls held is cleared with priority, regardless of whether there are balls held or not, and the above-mentioned ball removal process is not executed. In other words, when the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned on, the ball removal switch 742 is disabled, and the ball removal switch 742 does not emit green light as the light color corresponding to the ball removal switch 742 being turned on. In such a case, as a notification mode to notify the outside, a sound saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may be output from the speaker, and a message image saying "Ball removal has been disabled" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

For the power-on patterns G and H described above, the ball removal switch 742 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, but regardless of whether there are balls in the player's possession, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in the player's possession, and the ball removal process described above is not executed. This is because, if the ball removal process is executed and the enclosed game ball B is removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), it will not be possible to launch the game ball B and play the game, even if there are balls in the player's possession, so priority is given to clearing the number of balls in the player's possession.

In the above example, when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the number of balls held is cleared with priority regardless of whether there are balls held or not, and the ball removal process described above is not executed, but the ball removal process may be executed. Such alternative examples are described below as power-on patterns G' and H'.

Power-on pattern G' is when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned ON among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, while the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. In other words, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned on after being cut off, so that it is possible to know that the RAM error continues, and the error signal related to the error information A is output to the external device. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, from the time the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to flash alternately in green and red, and a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and the message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 can be alternately illuminated in green and red to notify the user that the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 have been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the number of balls held is cleared regardless of whether there are balls in the player's possession, and the ball removal process described above is then executed, allowing the enclosed game ball B to be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

Power-on pattern H' is when the RAM clear switch 741, ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 are all turned ON when the power is turned on, and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In addition, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is eliminated and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 after turning on the power after the power is cut off. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to flash alternately in red, green, and yellow from the time the power is turned on, a sound saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and the message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3 can be alternately illuminated in red and yellow to indicate that the RAM clear switch 741, ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 have all been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned on, the number of balls held is cleared regardless of whether there are balls in the player's possession, and the ball removal process described above is then executed, allowing the enclosed game ball B to be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

For the above-mentioned power-on patterns G' and H', when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, the number of balls held is cleared regardless of whether there are balls in the player's possession, and then the ball removal process described above is executed. As a result, when the ball removal process is executed and the enclosed game ball B is removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), there are already no balls in the player's possession, making it impossible to forcibly release the game ball B.

[About the operation of the counting button switch]
Next, the settlement of the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180 will be explained. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. Then, by pressing the counting button switch 180 when there are balls held (number of balls held > 0), information regarding the number of balls held can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 and settlement can be made. The number of balls held is stored in a RAM built into the frame control board 740.

In this example of the pachinko machine 1, the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact with the handle 160, and when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact and the handle 160 is rotated, the detection is received from the handle rotation sensor 163, and the drive of the launch solenoid 553 is controlled with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160, allowing the game ball B to be shot in. Then, when the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one. However, if the counting button switch 180 is operated and all balls held are calculated between the time when the drive of the launch solenoid 553 is controlled and the time when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the number of balls held will become zero, and at the time when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects it, the number of balls held cannot be subtracted by one, resulting in a malfunction.

In addition, game ball B that was launched from ball launching unit 550 (ball launching pad 552b) but was not hit into game area 5a of game board 5 is detected by foul ball sensor 607 after being collected by foul unit 570 as a foul ball, and the number of balls held by the player is increased by one. However, if counting button switch 180 is operated and all of the balls held are settled between the time game ball B is launched from ball launching pad 552b and the time it is detected by foul ball sensor 607 as a foul ball, the number of balls held will be set to 1 after the settlement, making the settlement operation for the player cumbersome. In this embodiment, the counting prohibition state is set to prohibit the settlement of the number of balls held, not only while the handle touch sensor 162 detects the contact with the handle 160, but also during the period from when the contact with the handle 160 is not detected until a predetermined time (e.g., 1200 ms) has elapsed, and during the period from when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launching pad 552b until a predetermined time (e.g., 1200 ms) has elapsed. After the counting prohibition state is released, the counting permission state is set to allow the number of balls held to be settled. As a result, the counting prohibition state is set from when the drive of the launch solenoid 553 is controlled until the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launching pad 552b, so that even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be settled, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions in the counting of the number of balls held. Also, in this example, the above-mentioned predetermined time (1200 ms) is set to be longer than the "longest time from ball launch pad 552b to detection by foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball occurs after game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b. Therefore, even if a foul ball occurs after game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b, the counting is prohibited at the time the foul ball occurs, so even if counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be settled, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing by one after the settlement of the number of balls held. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the settlement of the number of balls held.

Figure 166 is a time chart showing the establishment of the conditions for the occurrence of a counting permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. First, with reference to Figure 166 (A), a case will be described in which the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect contact with the handle 160, and then a predetermined time (e.g., 1200 ms) has passed, thereby establishing the conditions for the occurrence of the counting permission state.

First, the handle touch sensor 162 turns ON when it detects the player's contact (touch) with the handle 160. Then, when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact and the handle 160 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the launch solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t1 so that the game ball B is shot in with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160. Then, when the launch solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t1, the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched, and when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t2. At timing t2 when this launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one. Then, when the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t2, game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns ON again.

The frame control board 740 controls the state to a counting prohibited state in which the number of balls held is prohibited from being calculated while the handle touch sensor 162 is ON and during the time from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed while the handle touch sensor 162 remains OFF. On the other hand, when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed, the frame control board 740 controls the state to a counting permitted state in which the number of balls held can be calculated. In other words, if the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF and then turns ON within 1200 ms, the counting prohibited state is to continue. However, in order to start the counting permitted state, the condition is that the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not change from ON to OFF (the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not detect that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b) during the time from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed while the handle touch sensor 162 remains OFF.

The frame control board 740 also controls the counting state to a counting prohibited state, which prohibits the adjustment of the number of balls held, until 1200 ms have passed since the launch subtraction sensor 554 turned OFF. On the other hand, when 1200 ms have passed since the launch subtraction sensor 554 turned OFF, the frame control board 740 controls the counting state to a counting permitted state, which allows the adjustment of the number of balls held. In other words, if the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns from ON to OFF again within 1200 ms of turning OFF, the counting prohibited state will continue. However, in order to start the counting permitted state, the condition is that the handle touch sensor 162 does not turn ON (does not detect contact with the handle 160) until 1200 ms have passed since the launch subtraction sensor 554 turned OFF.

In addition, if the handle 160 continues to be turned while the handle touch sensor 162 detects the touch of the player, the game ball B will be launched at intervals of 600 ms. In contrast, in this example, the counting is prohibited during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed while it remains OFF, and during the period from when the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed, and this 1200 ms is set to be longer than the 600 ms which is the launch interval of the game ball B. In other words, during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed while it remains OFF, and during the period from when the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed, the system monitors whether the launch of the game ball B has completely stopped, and waits until it is determined that the launch of the game ball B has completely stopped before transitioning to the counting permitted state.

Then, when launch solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t3, game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b, but when launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that game ball B has been launched from ball launch pad 552b, launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4. At timing t4 when this launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, one ball is subtracted from the number of balls the player has. Then, when launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4, game ball B is supplied to ball launch pad 552b, and launch subtraction sensor 554 turns ON again, but after launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4, contact with handle 160 is stopped, and handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF at timing t5. Then, when 1200 ms have elapsed since the handle touch sensor 162 turned OFF at timing t5 and remained OFF, the count permission flag is turned ON at timing t6, and the count permission state is set so that the number of balls held can be calculated. However, after the handle touch sensor 162 turned OFF at timing t5, the launch subtraction sensor 554 has not turned from ON to OFF (the launch subtraction sensor 554 has not detected that game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b).

When the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON upon detecting contact with the handle 160 in the counting permitted state, the counting permitted flag is turned OFF and the counting prohibited state is resumed.

In the above, the counting is prohibited from the time when the driving of the launch solenoid 553 is controlled until the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b. Therefore, even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be settled, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction in the counting of the number of balls held. In addition, in this example, the above-mentioned predetermined time is set to 1200 ms so as to be longer than the "maximum time from the ball launch pad 552b to the foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b. Therefore, even if a foul ball occurs after the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the counting is prohibited at the time the foul ball occurs. Even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of balls held will not be settled, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing by one after the settlement of the number of balls held.

As mentioned above, the handle 160 is provided with a firing stop switch 161 that stops the drive of the firing solenoid 553 by pressing it by the player, but in this example, even if the firing stop switch 161 is operated when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the touch of the player, the ON detection of the handle touch sensor 162 continues, and the period is processed as the period when the handle touch sensor 162 is ON. This makes it possible to control the above-mentioned counting prohibited state including the period when the firing stop switch 161 is operated during a series of firing operations, and the same effect as above can be achieved. Also, if only the firing stop switch 161 is operated when the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the touch of the player, it is considered that the player has no intention of firing (the firing stop switch 161 was touched unintentionally), and the period is processed as the period when the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF. This makes it possible to control the above-mentioned counting permitted state including the period when only the firing stop switch 161 is operated without a series of firing operations, and the same effect as above can be achieved. As another example, if the firing stop switch 161 is operated while the handle touch sensor 162 detects contact by the player, the handle touch sensor 162 may be turned from ON to OFF, and the period during which the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF may be treated as such. This allows the player to transition to the counting permission state described above even when the player wishes to temporarily settle the number of balls held while continuing to operate the handle 160 (without changing the amount of rotation of the handle 160), thereby improving convenience to meet the needs of the player.

In this example, the counting prohibition state prohibits the settlement of the number of balls held while the handle touch sensor 162 is ON and while the handle touch sensor 162 remains OFF for 1200 ms after it has turned OFF. However, instead of the handle touch sensor 162, the counting prohibition state may be controlled while the handle rotation sensor 163 that detects the rotation of the handle 160 is ON and while the handle rotation sensor 163 remains OFF for 1200 ms after it has turned OFF. In such a case, the same effect can be achieved.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 166 (B) where the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect contact with the handle 160 before the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and a predetermined time (e.g., 1200 ms) has elapsed after the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects it, thereby establishing the condition for the counting permission state to occur.

First, the handle touch sensor 162 turns ON when it detects the player's contact (touch) with the handle 160. Then, when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact and the handle 160 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the launch solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t1 so that the game ball B is shot with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 160. Then, when the launch solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t1, the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched, and when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3. At timing t3 when this launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one.

Then, by ceasing contact with the handle 160 between the time when the firing solenoid 553 turns ON at timing t1 and the time when the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF at timing t2. Then, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, if 1200 ms pass without the firing subtraction sensor 554 turning from ON to OFF again, the count permission flag is turned ON at timing t4, and the balls held are controlled to a count permission state in which they can be calculated. However, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is not ON (contact with the handle 160 is not detected).

Note that after the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is not ON. However, if the handle touch sensor 162 turns ON before 1200 ms have elapsed at timing t4, the counting of the 1200 ms is terminated. At this time, at timing t4, the counting is not controlled to the counting permitted state. However, if the touch to the handle 160 is less than 4 ms and the ON state of the handle touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, the counting of 1200 ms is continued, and the counting permitted state is controlled at timing t4. Also, even if the handle touch sensor 162 turns ON upon detecting the touch to the handle 160 in the counting permitted state, if the ON state of the handle touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, the counting permission flag remains ON and the counting permitted state continues. In this way, there is a possibility that the player has unintentionally touched the handle 160 in the short-term contact with the handle 160, and such short-term contact is excluded.

In this example, the counting prohibition state is set to prohibit the adjustment of the number of balls held from the time the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF until 1200 ms has elapsed, but it may also be set to a measurement prohibition state after the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF, when game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and then from the time the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns ON again until 1200 ms has elapsed. In such a case, the same effect can be achieved.

Next, regarding the number of balls in possession, in the counting permitted state, when there are balls in possession (number of balls in possession > 0), the counting button switch 180 can be pressed to send information about the number of balls in possession to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. At this time, the number of balls to be settled varies depending on whether the counting button switch 180 is pressed short or long. Specifically, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for less than 500 ms, it is determined to be a short press, and one of the balls in possession is settled. On the other hand, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined to be a long press, and 250 of the balls in possession are settled. However, if the number of balls in possession is less than 250 and the button is pressed for 500 ms or more, all of the balls in possession are settled. This allows the settlement to be completed as quickly as possible when settling the number of balls in possession, improving convenience.

Figure 167 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the counting button switch is operated. First, the case where the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly will be explained with reference to Figure 167 (A).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting permission state, the counting button switch 180 turns ON. Then, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for less than 500 ms, it is determined to be a short press, and after the pressing of the counting button switch 180 is stopped, one of the number of balls held is settled. Also, from the start of pressing the counting button switch 180 to the completion of settling one of the number of balls held, the launch of game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled. In this way, by disabling the launch of game ball B during the settlement of the number of balls held, the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not detect that game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b and does not subtract the number of balls held, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions in the count of the number of balls held.

In addition, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed twice in succession for less than 500 ms, the system is controlled so that two of the player's balls are settled after the first press is stopped. In this case, the second press occurs after the first press is stopped and before the settlement of one of the player's balls is completed, and the settlement of the second ball is carried out continuing from the settlement of the first ball. In addition, the launch of game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled from the start of the first press of the counting button switch 180 until the settlement of two of the player's balls is completed.

Next, we will explain what happens when the counting button switch 180 is pressed and held down, with reference to Figure 167 (B).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting permission state, the counting button switch 180 turns ON. Then, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined that the counting button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time at the 500 ms point, and 250 of the balls held at that point are controlled to be settled. Also, from the time the counting button switch 180 is pressed until the settlement of the 250 balls is completed, the launch of game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled. In this way, by disabling the launch of game ball B during the settlement of the balls held, the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not detect that game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b and does not subtract from the balls held, and it is possible to prevent malfunctions in the count of the balls held.

In addition, if the counting button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined to be a long press at 500 ms, and 250 of the balls held at that time are settled. After that, it is determined to be a long press for every 300 ms of pressing, and the settlement of the first 250 balls is continued, and the settlement of 250 balls is carried out sequentially. In this way, by determining the second and subsequent long presses at 300 ms, which is shorter than the first long press, the settlement can be carried out so that the number of balls held approaches zero in a short time. In addition, it is disabled to launch game balls B by operating the handle 160 from the start of pressing the counting button switch 180 until the settlement of the 250 balls held is completed for the number of long presses.

In this example, the launch of game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled from the start of pressing the counting button switch 180 until the settlement of the number of balls held corresponding to the time the counting button switch 180 was pressed is completed, but the launch of game ball B by operating the handle 160 may be disabled only during the period from the start of settlement of the number of balls held corresponding to the time the counting button switch 180 was pressed until it is completed. In such a case, the same effect can be achieved.

If the counting button switch 180 is pressed for less than 500 ms, it is determined to be a short press, and after the pressing of the counting button switch 180 is stopped, a "beep" sound is output from the speaker. If the counting button switch 180 is pressed for 500 ms or more, it is determined to be a long press at 500 ms, and the speaker outputs a sound saying "Reserved balls are being settled." If the button is continued to be pressed after determining that it is a long press at 500 ms, the speaker repeats the sound "Reserved balls are being settled" until the settlement of the number of retained balls is completed. In this way, by making the output sound from the speaker different depending on whether the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a short press or a long press, it is possible to clearly know whether the number of retained balls is being settled by 1 or 250.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in this example, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, it is possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. On the other hand, the output of sound when the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly or for a long time is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the transmission of operation information from the frame control board 740 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, the peripheral control board 1510 is in an inoperative state, and sound cannot be output when the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly or for a long time. Therefore, in this example, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed briefly or for a long time, a notification is also given on the frame control board 740 side in addition to the notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

That is, the counting button switch 180 in this example has a built-in LED, and the frame control board 740 controls the illumination of the LED of the counting button switch 180. The color of the light emitted by the counting button switch 180 indicates whether the number of balls held can be settled and the settlement status. Specifically, the counting button switch 180 emits blue light when the number of balls held is zero, emits red light when the counting button switch 180 is turned ON while there are balls held (number of balls held > 0), and emits green light when the counting button switch 180 is not turned ON while there are balls held (number of balls held > 0). This allows you to intuitively grasp whether there are balls held that can be settled or whether the number of balls held is being settled. In addition, when the counting button switch 180 is not turned on while there are balls in hand (number of balls in hand > 0), a short press of the counting button switch 180 causes a single green light to be emitted (for example, a light-emitting mode in which the light turns on and off in one second), and a long press of the counting button switch 180 causes multiple green light emissions (for example, a light-emitting mode in which the light turns on and off in one second repeatedly). Therefore, even if the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, it is possible to clearly determine whether the number of balls in hand will be settled by using the counting button switch 180 itself. As described above in detail, even if the counting button switch 180 is turned on during the counting prohibition state, the number of balls in hand will not be settled, but even in such a case, it is determined that the counting button switch 180 has been turned on, and the counting button switch 180 is made to emit red light.

The light emitted by the counting button switch 180 is configured so that the color of the light reflected by the surrounding materials. Specifically, the wall behind the counting button switch 180 is configured in white so that the color of the light reflected is reflected. This allows the hall manager to check the color of the light emitted by the counting button switch 180 even from a distance, and to monitor whether or not there is any fraudulent activity regarding the settlement of balls. In this example, an LED is built into the counting button switch 180, but an LED may be provided near the counting button switch 180, and the color of the light emitted by the LED may indicate whether or not the number of balls can be settled.

The door frame 3 is also provided with a ball count display unit 140 that displays the number of balls owned. When the number of balls owned is settled by pressing the counting button switch 180, the number of balls owned displayed on the ball count display unit 140 is subtracted and displayed. This ball count display unit 140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. In other words, the ball count display unit 140 is capable of displaying up to 6 digits for the number of balls owned.

In addition, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed and the enclosed game ball B can be removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). During the ball removal process, the number of balls held is not displayed on the ball number display unit 140, and a special display of "-" is executed. Note that, although the release of the game ball B is not stopped during the ball removal process, the game is stopped, and, for example, even if a start winning occurs, the game balls are not paid out, and no lottery or variable display regarding special patterns is not performed, making it impossible to play normal games. In addition, the ball removal process is started on the condition that the number of balls held is zero at the time the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON to turn on the power. For this reason, during the ball removal process, the number of balls held is zero, and no adverse effects occur due to the number of balls not being displayed on the ball number display unit 140.

In addition, when an error occurs, the ball count display unit 140 continues to display the number of balls held, and does not display the error. This allows the number of balls held to be checked even during an error. However, when an error occurs that stops play, the ball count display unit 140 may not display the number of balls held, and may instead display an error. When such an error occurs, not only is play stopped, but the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated, making it impossible to settle the number of balls held. In other words, when an error occurs that stops play, because the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated, there is no need to check the number of balls held, and no adverse effects are caused by not displaying the number of balls held on the ball count display unit 140.

Specifically, when fraudulent activity is detected by a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc., or when a RAM error such as the RAM containing an abnormal value is detected, it is determined that an error that stops play has occurred, an error display is executed on the ball count display unit 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. However, when fraudulent activity is detected, the ball count display unit 140 does not display an error and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled, whereas when a RAM error is detected, an error display is executed on the ball count display unit 140 and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. In this way, when an error display is executed on the ball count display unit 140, it is possible to know that a RAM error has been detected. Also, when a RAM error is detected, the ball count display unit 140 does not display an error and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled, whereas when fraudulent activity is detected, the ball count display unit 140 may display an error and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 may be disabled. In this way, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is possible to prevent the settlement of the ball count that may have been awarded as a result of the fraudulent activity.

When the counting button switch 180 is turned on, the frame control board 740 sends information about the number of balls held to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement, but when the connection with the game ball lending device 8 is not connected, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated. When such a non-connection error with the game ball lending device 8 occurs, the frame control board 740 sends error information to the main control board 1310 to stop the game. When such a non-connection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the frame control board 740 disables the ON operation of the counting button switch 180. When such a non-connection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the game is stopped and an error display is performed on the base monitor. The base monitor is also composed of four 7-segment LEDs, and when a non-connection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the displayed base value is switched to an error display. In addition, the number of 7-segment LEDs in the base monitor may be increased so that when a disconnection error occurs with the main control board 1310, the currently displayed base value and the error display can be displayed simultaneously. For example, when the number of 7-segment LEDs in the base monitor is increased, it is possible to use the same number of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs as the number of balls held display unit 140, and this makes it possible for the frame control board 740 to display the same information (for example, the number of balls held, an error display, or a display indicating the ball removal process) on the base monitor and the number of balls held display unit 140, and the same display can be confirmed from both the front and back sides of the pachinko machine 1, and can be used as an alternative when either one fails.

[About the operation of the ball removal switch]
Next, the discharge of the game ball B to the outside by operating the ball removal switch 742 will be described. First, the ball removal switch 742 is provided on the frame control board 740. When the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed, but the ball removal process is started on the condition that the number of balls held is zero at the time when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON to turn on the power. During this ball removal process, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 can be removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720) from the ball removal port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600. Also, during the ball removal process, the launch of the game ball B is not stopped, but the game is stopped, and for example, even if there is a start winning, the game ball is not paid out, and the lottery and variable display regarding the special pattern are not performed, and normal play cannot be performed.

Specifically, during the ball removal process, the system is controlled to a special mode in which game ball B can be launched even if the number of balls held is zero. In this special mode, game ball B can be launched from ball launch pad 552b, and game ball B launched from ball launch pad 552b is not shot out from foul unit 570 but is sent to circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball because door frame 3 is open and foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. This makes it possible to have no game ball B on ball launch pad 552b even if the number of balls held is zero. Also, while game ball B can be launched during the ball removal process, the fact that play is stopped does not impede the ball removal work of the hall manager during the ball removal process, improving convenience.

Figure 168 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to the ball removal state when the power is turned on. Here, we explain the case where the power is cut off at timing t1, and then the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t2 without turning ON the RAM clear switch 743, and the machine transitions to the ball removal state.

The frame control board 740 is also capable of detecting errors in the circulation system and errors other than circulation. Circulation system errors include error A, which includes lifting-related errors such as a "lifting ball jam error" and door opening errors, and error B, which includes errors related to the amount of balls included, such as "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "out of balls fired," "too few game balls," and "too many game balls." Furthermore, as errors other than circulation, error C, which includes a communication error with the main control board 1310, can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 168, before the power is cut off at timing t1, there is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in a normal state, when a start winning occurs, the variable display of the special pattern can be started, and when the variable display of the special pattern stops and displays the winning pattern, the jackpot game can be started, so that normal gameplay can be played.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, making it possible to start the display of changing special patterns and pay out (award) prize balls when a ball enters the hole.

Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 is capable of determining whether or not errors A and B in the circulation system, or error C other than circulation, have been detected. If it is determined that errors A and B in the circulation system, or error C other than circulation, have been detected, an abnormality is reported using the performance display device 1600, lamps A and B, a speaker, etc. Among these, if it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, information on error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is cut off at timing t1, or when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that error B in the circulation system or error C other than circulation has been detected, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and is retained without being cleared even after the power is cut off at timing t1, but when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, it is determined whether to retain or clear the information depending on whether the RAM clear switch 743 has been operated.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (LED mounted on the light-emitting board of the function display unit 1400), speaker, and movable body are configured to execute normal operations before timing t1. Note that lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Here, for lamp C, multiple LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are made to light up or blink as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed, an operation corresponding to a standby performance (for example, a demo performance) in a state waiting for the start of the variable display of the special pattern is executed, and when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, an operation corresponding to a variable performance (a performance based on a variable pattern) is executed based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving a variable pattern command. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (e.g., a reach performance) including a variation display of the decorative pattern, the LEDs of lamps A and B light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the movable body performs a predetermined operation in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600.

The external terminal board can also output specific signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals the hall computer can understand the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 on the hall side. For example, it outputs signals corresponding to the following events: when a starting win occurs, when the special symbol changing display stops at a winning symbol and a jackpot game is being played, when an abnormality is detected, etc.

In addition, before timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, it is possible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a.

The base monitor also counts the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out), calculates the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and displays the calculation result as a base value, but it is possible to perform such calculations before timing t1. This base value is retained without being cleared even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and is retained without being cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2 described below.

Furthermore, prior to timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it detects a ball entering the winning slot, and to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the player's number of balls held or number of balls held X. These number of balls held or number of balls held X are retained without being cleared even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and are retained without being cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later. Furthermore, prior to timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t2, turning the ball removal flag ON and transitioning to the ball removal state. Here, at timing t2 when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON to turn on the power, it is determined whether the number of balls held is zero, and only if the number of balls held is zero does the state transition to the ball removal state. Then, in the ball removal state, the ball removal process described above is executed, making it possible to remove the game ball B sealed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 from the ball removal port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Also, at timing t2, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, and the RAM clear flag is OFF.

First, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, a game restriction period is entered during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed, although game ball B can be released. In other words, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the display of special symbols does not change and no jackpot game is played, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special symbols does not change again.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (award) prize balls when a ball enters the slot. As a result, in the ball removal state, game play is stopped, and even if there is an initial winning, no game balls are paid out, and no lottery or variable display for special symbols is performed, making it impossible to play as normal, and preventing any increase or decrease in the number of balls held.

After the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the frame control board 740 is enabled to determine whether or not it has detected a circulation system error A, among the errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation, among the errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation, and is disabled to determine whether or not it has detected an error A in the circulation system. Meanwhile, it is disabled to determine whether or not it has detected an error B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation. Here, for errors A in the circulation system related to lifting, such as a "lifted ball jamming error," the lift motor 664 operates when the ball removal state occurs, but if the lift motor 664 operates while an abnormality related to the operation of the lift motor 664 remains, the lift motor 664 and the like may be damaged, and by enabling such a determination, it is possible to prevent the lift motor 664 and the like from being damaged. For errors A in the circulation system, the door open error, when the ball removal occurs, the door frame 3 may be opened, and fraud may be committed against the game board 5 and the like, and by enabling such a determination, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed. In addition, for errors B in the circulation system, such as "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "out of balls fired," "too few game balls," and "too many game balls," errors related to the amount of game balls enclosed will decrease if game balls B are removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720) when a ball removal state occurs, and by disabling such judgments, game balls B can be removed smoothly. In addition, for errors C other than circulation, such as communication errors with the main control board 1310, by disabling such judgments, it is possible for a ball removal state to occur even if the game board 5 is not connected to the main control board 1310.

If it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, an abnormality alert is issued using the performance display device 1600, lamps A and B, a speaker, etc. Here, if it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, information regarding error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is cut off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later.

If it is determined that an error A in the circulation system has been detected prior to timing t1, information about error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is shut off at timing t1 or when the power is turned on at timing t2. However, if error A in the circulation system has not been resolved at timing t2, it is determined again that error A in the circulation system has been detected, and an abnormality notification is issued. If it is determined that an error B in the circulation system or an error C other than circulation has been detected prior to timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and if the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at timing t2, information about error B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation is retained without being cleared. However, in the ball removal state, an abnormality notification is not issued based on the storage of such a determination result.

The performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (LED mounted on the light-emitting board of the function display unit 1400), speaker, and movable body are configured to perform the operation for the ball removal state at timing t2. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display the message "Ball removal state is occurring" as the ball removal state display. Lamp A and lamp B are configured to emit green light as the light emission for the ball removal state (see power-on pattern F in FIG. 164). In addition, for lamp C, all LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are lit, including the pattern LEDs that show the special pattern variation display and variation results, and the status LED that shows the game status. In addition, the speaker is configured to output the sound "Ball removal state is occurring" as the sound for the ball removal state.

In the above, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are set to constant volume and light intensity at maximum output during operation for the ball-pulling state, and the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, by setting the volume and light intensity to maximum output, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of the ball-pulling state, and it is possible to prevent acts of illegally trying to cause the ball-pulling state. In addition, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation can be accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but it is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when the operation is returned to normal. In addition, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during operation for the ball-pulling state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Additionally, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball removal state at timing t2, the movable body is prevented from operating. Normally, when the power is turned on, an initial operation is performed on the movable body to check whether it operates normally and to align it to its initial position. However, in this example, since the movable body does not operate while the ball removal state is occurring, no initial operation of the movable body is performed when transitioning to the ball removal state. In other words, if the movable body is not in its initial position when transitioning to the ball removal state, it is kept stopped in that position while the ball removal state is occurring.

In addition, after the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the external terminal board is forced to output a security signal. As a result, in the ball removal state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the ball removal state has occurred.

After the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the hall manager operates the handle 195 to enable the launch of game ball B. In the ball removal state, the game ball B can be launched, but the door frame 3 is open, so the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, and when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, it is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being shot out from the foul unit 570. This makes it possible to make it so that there are no game balls B on the ball launch pad 552b. In this example, in order to make it so that there are no game balls B on the ball launch pad 552b in the ball removal state, the hall manager must operate the handle 195 to launch game ball B, but it may also be possible to make it so that game ball B is launched automatically without operating the handle 195.

In addition, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value. However, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is not cleared but is maintained. In addition, while the ball removal state is occurring, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball removal state.

After the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the ball entry into the winning slot is not detected, so the specified number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held X are not added. However, after the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls held X before timing t1 are not cleared but are retained. Also, while the ball removal state is occurring, the number of balls held is not displayed on the number of balls held display unit 140, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball removal state. Also, while the ball removal state is occurring, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. Therefore, while the ball removal state is occurring, the number of balls held does not increase or decrease, and no adverse effects are caused by not displaying the number of balls held on the number of balls held display unit 140.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t3, the ball removal switch 742 is not turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t4, so the ball removal flag is turned OFF, and the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, so the RAM clear flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the device is in a normal state, just like before the power was cut off at timing t1.

In the ball removal state, game balls B are removed from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. If there are no game balls B or only a few game balls B in the circulation path R, it is necessary to replenish game balls B via the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b after the power is turned on at timing t4.

In addition, if it is determined that an error A in the circulation system has been detected before timing t3, the information on the error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is shut off at timing t3 or when the power is turned on at timing t4. However, if the error A in the circulation system has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined again that an error A in the circulation system has been detected, and an abnormality notification is executed. In addition, if it is determined that an error B in the circulation system or an error C other than circulation has been detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and if the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at timing t2, the information on the error B in the circulation system and the error C other than circulation is retained without being cleared. Such information on the error B in the circulation system and the error C other than circulation is retained without being cleared when the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at timing t4 after the power is shut off at timing t3. Then, after the power is turned on at timing t4, an abnormality notification is executed based on the memory of such a determination result.

After the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body is subjected to an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align it to its initial position.

Figure 169 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to the ball removal state when the power is turned on. Here, the case is explained where the power is cut off at timing t1, and then the RAM clear switch 743 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t2, and the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON, transitioning to the ball removal state. Note that the situation before the power is turned off at timing t1 is the same as in Figure 168, so the explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 169, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t2, turning the ball removal flag ON and transitioning to the ball removal state. In this ball removal state, the ball removal process described above is executed, making it possible to remove the game ball B sealed within the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 from the ball removal port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Also, at timing t2, the RAM clear switch 743 is turned ON, turning the RAM clear flag ON.

First, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, a game restriction period is entered during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed, although game ball B can be released. In other words, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the display of special symbols does not change and no jackpot game is played, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special symbols does not change again.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are disabled, making it impossible to start the variable display of special symbols or pay out (award) prize balls in response to a winning ball. As a result, in the ball removal state, game play is stopped, and even if there is an initial winning, no game balls are paid out, and no lottery or variable display for special symbols is performed, making it impossible to play as normal, and preventing any increase or decrease in the number of balls held.

After the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the frame control board 740 is enabled to determine whether or not it has detected a circulation system error A, among the errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation, among the errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation, and is disabled to determine whether or not it has detected an error A in the circulation system. Meanwhile, it is disabled to determine whether or not it has detected an error B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation. Here, for errors A in the circulation system related to lifting, such as a "lifted ball jamming error," the lift motor 664 operates when the ball removal state occurs, but if the lift motor 664 operates while an abnormality related to the operation of the lift motor 664 remains, the lift motor 664 and the like may be damaged, and by enabling such a determination, it is possible to prevent the lift motor 664 and the like from being damaged. For errors A in the circulation system, the door open error, when the ball removal occurs, the door frame 3 may be opened, and fraud may be committed against the game board 5 and the like, and by enabling such a determination, it is possible to prevent fraud from being committed. In addition, for errors B in the circulation system, such as "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "out of balls fired," "too few game balls," and "too many game balls," errors related to the amount of game balls enclosed will decrease if game balls B are removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720) when a ball removal state occurs, and by disabling such judgments, game balls B can be removed smoothly. In addition, for errors C other than circulation, such as communication errors with the main control board 1310, by disabling such judgments, it is possible for a ball removal state to occur even if the game board 5 is not connected to the main control board 1310.

If it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, an abnormality alert is issued using the performance display device 1600, lamps A and B, a speaker, etc. Here, if it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected, information regarding error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is cut off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later.

If it is determined that error A in the circulation system has been detected prior to timing t1, information about error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is shut off at timing t1, or when the power is turned on at timing t2. However, if error A in the circulation system has not been resolved at timing t2, it is determined again that error A in the circulation system has been detected, and an abnormality alert is issued. If it is determined that error B in the circulation system or error C other than circulation has been detected prior to timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, but if the RAM clear switch 743 is operated when the power is turned on at timing t2, information about error B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation is cleared.

In addition, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), lamp C (LED mounted on the light-emitting board of the function display unit 1400), speaker, and movable body are configured to perform operations for the ball removal state and the RAM clear state at timing t2. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the messages "Ball removal state occurring" and "RAM cleared" as ball removal state and RAM clear indications. In addition, lamp A and lamp B are configured to alternately flash green and yellow as illumination for the ball removal state and the RAM clear state (see power-on pattern G in FIG. 164). In addition, in regard to lamp C, all LEDs of the function display unit 1400 are lit, including the pattern LEDs that indicate the change display and change results of the special pattern, and the status LED that indicates the game status. Additionally, the speaker outputs sounds for the ball removal state and the RAM clear state, such as "Ball removal state occurring" and "RAM cleared."

In the above, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are set to constant volume and light intensity at maximum output during operation for the ball removal state and operation in the RAM clear state, and the volume and light intensity do not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. In this way, by setting the volume and light intensity to maximum output, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of the ball removal state or RAM clear, and it is possible to prevent acts of illegally trying to cause the ball removal state or RAM clear. In addition, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation can be accepted and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted internally, but it is not reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the volume and light intensity during execution based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when the operation is returned to normal. In addition, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during operation for the ball removal state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Additionally, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after transitioning to the ball removal state at timing t2, the movable body is prevented from operating. Normally, when the power is turned on, an initial operation is performed on the movable body to check whether it operates normally and to align it to its initial position. However, in this example, since the movable body does not operate while the ball removal state is occurring, no initial operation of the movable body is performed when transitioning to the ball removal state. In other words, if the movable body is not in its initial position when transitioning to the ball removal state, it is kept stopped in that position while the ball removal state is occurring.

In addition, after the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the external terminal board is forced to output a security signal. As a result, in the ball removal state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the ball removal state has occurred.

After the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the hall manager operates the handle 195 to enable the launch of game ball B. In the ball removal state, the game ball B can be launched, but the door frame 3 is open, so the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, and when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, it is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being shot out from the foul unit 570. This makes it possible to make it so that there are no game balls B on the ball launch pad 552b. In this example, in order to make it so that there are no game balls B on the ball launch pad 552b in the ball removal state, the hall manager must operate the handle 195 to launch the game ball B, but it may also be possible to make it so that the game ball B is launched automatically without operating the handle 195.

In addition, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value. However, after the transition to the ball removal state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is not cleared but is maintained. In addition, while the ball removal state is occurring, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball removal state.

After the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the balls entering the winning slot are not detected, so the specified number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held X are not added. However, after the ball removal state is entered at timing t2, the number of balls held and the number of balls held X before timing t1 are not cleared but are retained. Also, while the ball removal state is occurring, the number of balls held is not displayed on the number of balls held display unit 140, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball removal state. Also, while the ball removal state is occurring, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. Therefore, while the ball removal state is occurring, the number of balls held does not increase or decrease, and no adverse effects are caused by not displaying the number of balls held on the number of balls held display unit 140.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t3, the ball removal switch 742 is not turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t4, so the ball removal flag is turned OFF, and the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, so the RAM clear flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at timing 4, the device is in a normal state, just like before the power was cut off at timing t1.

In the ball removal state, game balls B are removed from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. If there are no game balls B or only a few game balls B in the circulation path R, it is necessary to replenish game balls B via the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b after the power is turned on at timing t4.

In addition, if it is determined that an error A in the circulation system has been detected before timing t3, information about the error A in the circulation system is cleared when the power is shut off at timing t3 or when the power is turned on at timing t4. However, if the error A in the circulation system has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined again that an error A in the circulation system has been detected, and an abnormality notification is executed. In addition, if it is determined that an error B in the circulation system or an error C other than circulation has been detected before timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, but if the RAM clear switch 743 is operated when the power is turned on at timing t2, information about the error B in the circulation system and the error C other than circulation is cleared. Therefore, after the power is turned on at timing t4, information about the error B in the circulation system and the error C other than circulation before timing t1 is not retained.

After the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body is subjected to an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align it to its initial position.

In this example, the ball removal state is entered if the number of balls held is zero when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON to turn on the power. While the ball removal state is occurring, it is not possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. However, since the number of balls held is set to zero before entering the ball removal state, problems caused by not being able to settle the number of balls held while the ball removal state is occurring can be prevented.

In this example, the above-mentioned ball removal process is executed from when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on until the power is cut off, and the lift motor 664 remains in an operating state to remove the game balls B from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. In this regard, the operation of the lift motor 664 may be stopped and the ball removal state ended when, for example, 300 game balls B (a specific number) have circulated or when 10 minutes (a specific time) have passed after the ball removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on. For this specific number and specific time, it is set so that all of the game balls B (40 to 60) stored in the circulation path R can be removed from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. This prevents the lift motor 664 from remaining in an operating state after the start of the ball removal state, and prevents malfunctions due to long-term operation. In addition, even after the operation of the lift motor 664 is stopped, the game cannot be started, just like in the ball removal state, and in order to start playing, it is necessary to turn the power off and then on again. This makes it possible to know that the ball removal state has occurred even after the operation of the lift motor 664 is stopped. However, after the operation of the lift motor 664 is stopped, the game may be started without turning the power off and then on again.

In this example, the ball removal state is entered by turning on the ball removal switch 742 when the power is turned on, but when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on during normal operation, the number of balls held is displayed on the base monitor. This allows the number of balls held to be checked from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by the number of balls displayed on the base monitor, without checking the number of balls held displayed on the ball number display unit 140. Note that while the base monitor in this example is made up of four 7-segment LEDs, it is preferable that, like the ball number display unit 140, it is made up of a 6-digit 7-segment LED, so that the number of balls held can all be displayed with the same number of digits (6 digits).

In addition, in this example, in addition to displaying the base value on the base monitor, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON during normal operation, the number of balls held is displayed on the base monitor. In addition, when a ball removal state occurs, the base monitor does not display the base value, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball removal state. In addition, when an error A or B in the circulation system or an error C other than circulation is detected in the abnormality judgment by the frame control board 740, the base monitor does not display the base value, and an error code indicating the type of abnormality is displayed. The priority of such displays is as follows: display during the occurrence of the ball removal state > display of the number of balls held > display of the error code > base value. For this reason, in this example, for example, while a ball removal state occurs, it is possible to determine whether or not an error A in the circulation system has been detected, but even if such an abnormality occurs, the error code is not displayed on the base monitor, and a display is executed that a ball removal state is occurring. As another example, when an error A in the circulation system occurs during a ball removal state, an error code may be displayed on the base monitor, and a notification may be given that an error A in the circulation system has occurred during the ball removal state. In this case, for example, the display can alternate between a display indicating that a ball has been removed and a display of an error code. Even if the ball removal switch 742 is turned on while a ball removal state is occurring, the number of balls held is not displayed on the base monitor, and a display indicating that a ball removal state is occurring is executed. This makes it possible to reliably inform the player that a ball removal state is occurring.

[Magnetic sensor covering the foul ball sensor]
In the above embodiment, the game ball B used in the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to a stainless steel ball made of stainless steel, and it is described that an iron ball SB may be used as the game ball B as in the past. In this way, when an iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, since a fraudulent act using a magnet M (so-called magnet goto) becomes possible, a conventional magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 1030)/radio wave sensor is required to detect fraud on the game board 5 side. In addition, since a fraudulent act may be performed on the circulation path of the game ball B on the main body frame 4 side, a magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) that covers the periphery of the circulation path and especially the periphery of the sensors related to the addition/subtraction of the number of balls held by the player (launch subtraction sensor 554, foul ball sensor 607, launch front sensor 704, etc.) is required.

In this example, a pachinko machine 1 is provided with multiple magnetic sensors 1030, and the magnetic sensors 1030 are described as including a magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side and a magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side. Here, the magnetic sensors 1030a and 1030b have the same configuration as the magnetic sensor 1030 described above. For example, the magnetic sensors 1030a and 1030b are formed in a rectangular shape in a plan view with a height that is shorter than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and have a gourd-shaped detection area DA that combines two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm, which is the same as the configuration of the magnetic sensor 1030 described above.

First, the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the gaming board 5 side is provided to cover various winning holes, and for example, by providing it near the first starting hole 2003, it is possible to detect unauthorized magnetic fields directed at the first starting hole 2003. Such a magnetic sensor 1030a is connected to the main control board 1310 on the gaming board 5 side, and the main control board 1310 judges whether or not a magnetic field has been detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a.

Figure 170 shows a magnetic sensor installed around the foul ball sensor. As shown in Figure 170, the magnetic sensor 1030b installed on the main body frame 4 side is installed to cover at least the periphery of the foul ball sensor 607, making it possible to detect unauthorized magnetic fields applied to the foul ball sensor 607. Such a magnetic sensor 1030b is connected to the frame control board 740 on the main body frame 4 side, and the frame control board 740 judges whether or not a magnetic field has been detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b.

In the case of a pachinko machine 1 having a circulation path R in the main frame 4 (game machine frame), the area that is particularly likely to be the target of fraud is the area around the foul ball sensor 607 in the circulation ball path unit 600. First, when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that a game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, one ball is subtracted from the number of balls held by the player, whereas when the foul ball sensor 607 detects that the ball has been sent to the circulation ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being launched from the foul unit 570 to the outside, one ball is added to the number of balls held by the player. For this reason, for example, a fraudulent act may be performed in which the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b is attracted by a magnet M, guided to the foul ball sensor 607, and detected multiple times to add multiple balls to the number of balls held. Furthermore, if the game ball B dropped (supplied) from the ball sending unit 700 is attracted to a magnet M before being detected by the launch subtraction sensor 554 and is then poured into the foul ball sensor 607, it is possible to commit fraud by adding to the number of balls held without subtracting from them. In this regard, in this example, the magnetic sensor 1030b is arranged to cover the periphery of the foul ball sensor 607, so that it is possible to detect fraudulent magnetism directed at the foul ball sensor 607 and prevent fraudulent attempts to add to the number of balls held. This improves the reliability of the number of balls held.

Figure 171 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a magnetic field is detected by a magnetic sensor. First, the case where a magnetic field is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side will be explained with reference to Figure 171 (A).

As shown in FIG. 171(A), when the magnetic sensor 1030a installed on the game board 5 detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 allows the game to be played, while executing a magnetic anomaly notification A to inform the player that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism. It also allows the frame control board 740 to add to the number of balls held and to settle the number of balls held.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 determines that this is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed. In other words, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs at the winning slot, normal play can be played, in which the variable display of special symbols can be started when there is a starting winning, and the jackpot game can be started when the variable display of special symbols stops and displays a winning symbol. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning slots are enabled, making it possible to start the variable display of special symbols and pay out (award) prize balls when a ball enters.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a magnetic anomaly notification A using the performance display device 1600, a lamp, a speaker, etc. to inform the user that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism. This allows the user to know that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism and to check whether any fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects a magnetism at timing t1, a security signal is output from the external terminal board. As a result, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects a magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall can know that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected a magnetism.

When the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 enables game balls to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. When the frame control board 740 detects a ball entering a winning hole, it also enables a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, and makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the player's owned ball count or owned ball count X. The frame control board 740 also makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180.

In this example, the magnetic anomaly notification A is terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed since the magnetic sensor 1030a detected a magnetic field at timing t1. However, as another example, the magnetic anomaly notification A may be terminated by turning the power back on after it has been cut off. This allows the user to be sure that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected a magnetic field.

In addition, in this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 determines that this is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed, but it may also be a period during which the game (main game) cannot proceed. At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are disabled, and it is not possible to start the display of changing special patterns or to pay out (award) prize balls in response to a winning ball. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent play from being performed after the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism until it is confirmed whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring.

Next, the case where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main body frame 4 side will be described with reference to Figure 171 (B).

As shown in FIG. 171(B), when the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the main frame 4 detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 allows the game to be played, while executing a magnetic anomaly notification B to inform the player that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism. On the other hand, the frame control board 740 allows the launch of game ball B and the addition of balls to the number of balls held, but does not allow the settlement of the number of balls held.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 determines that this is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed. In other words, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs with the foul ball sensor 607, normal play can be played in which the display of the special symbols can start when a starting winning occurs, and the jackpot game can start when the display of the special symbols stops and displays a winning symbol. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are enabled, making it possible to start the display of the special symbols and pay out (award) prize balls when a ball enters.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects a magnetism at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a magnetic anomaly notification B using the performance display device 1600, a lamp, a speaker, etc. to communicate that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected a magnetism. This allows the fact that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected a magnetism to be known, and makes it possible to check whether any fraudulent activity is occurring. In addition, by making the magnetic anomaly notification different depending on whether the magnetic sensor 1030a or the magnetic sensor 1030b detected a magnetism, it is possible to know in which area the magnetism was detected.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects a magnetism at timing t1, a security signal is output from the external terminal board. As a result, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects a magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall can know that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected a magnetism.

When the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 enables game balls to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. When the frame control board 740 detects a ball entering a prize hole, it also enables a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, and makes it possible to add the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the player's ball possession or ball possession number X.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it impossible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. In this way, when magnetism is detected from the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls held can be increased or decreased, but since the number of balls held cannot be settled, it is possible to prevent attempts to improperly settle the number of balls held until it is confirmed whether the number of balls held has been improperly added.

In this example, magnetic anomaly notification B is terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 minutes) has elapsed since magnetic sensor 1030b detected a magnetism at timing t1. However, as another example, magnetic anomaly notification B may be terminated by turning the power back on after it has been cut off. This allows the user to be sure that magnetic sensor 1030b has detected a magnetism. In addition, different materials may be used for the notification when magnetic anomaly notification A is executed and when magnetic anomaly notification B is executed, and different conditions may be used to terminate the notification.

In addition, in this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 determines that this is a period during which the game (main game) can proceed, but it may also be a period during which the game (main game) cannot proceed. At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning ports are disabled, and it is not possible to start the display of changing special patterns or to pay out (award) prize balls in response to a winning ball. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent play from occurring after the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism until it is confirmed whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 detects a magnetism, the magnetic anomaly notification A is executed. During the execution of the magnetic anomaly notification A, it is possible to execute a restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5, such as generating a period during which the game (main game) cannot be progressed as in another example. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 detects a magnetism, the magnetic anomaly notification B is executed. During the execution of the magnetic anomaly notification B, it is possible to execute a restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4, such as making it impossible to settle the number of balls held. Then, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 detects a magnetism during the execution of the magnetic anomaly notification A, in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 is executed. On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 detects a magnetism while the magnetic anomaly notification B is being executed, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 is executed in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4. In this way, even if one magnetic sensor detects a magnetism after the other magnetic sensor detects a magnetism, the restriction already being executed is not relaxed, which can provide a deterrent against fraud.

The restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 side may be configured to be executed in priority over the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side. That is, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 side detects a magnetism during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification A, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side is terminated and switched to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 side. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side detects a magnetism during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification B, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 side is continued, and the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side is not newly executed. In this way, even if one magnetic sensor detects a magnetism after the other magnetic sensor detects a magnetism, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main frame 4 side is prioritized, so that it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as using a magnet M around the foul ball sensor 607.

[About the behavior of various switches when the game board is not installed]
Next, a case where the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 of the main frame 4 are operated when the game board 5 is not attached to the main frame 4 will be described. As described above in detail, the frame control board 740 is provided with a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM (RAM clear), a ball count storage/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM etc. and clearing the display on the ball count display unit 140 of the door frame 3, and a ball removal switch 742 used when removing the enclosed game ball B from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

The RAM clear switch 741, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 must be turned on when the power is turned on, and it is assumed that the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 when the power is turned on. However, when the game board 5 is attached, it may be difficult to perform maintenance on the main body frame 4, and if the ON operation of these switches is disabled when the game board 5 is not attached, maintenance on the main body frame 4 cannot be performed sufficiently, and there is a risk that the reliability and convenience of the pachinko machine 1 will decrease. For example, if the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is disabled when the game board 5 is not attached, the game balls B sealed in the circulation path R cannot be removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and inspection of the circulation path R may be difficult. In addition, when the power supply to the game board 5 is cut off while the power supply to the main body frame 4 continues due to some factor, the situation is the same as when the game board 5 is not installed, and if the ON operation of these switches is disabled under such a situation, the maintenance of the main body frame 4 side cannot be performed sufficiently, and the reliability and convenience of the pachinko machine 1 may be reduced. In this respect, in this example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or the power supply to the game board 5 is cut off while the power supply to the main body frame 4 continues, the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 is enabled, so that the maintenance of the main body frame 4 side can be performed sufficiently, and the reliability and convenience can be improved. For example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, if the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R can be removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and the inspection of the circulation path R can be easily performed.

Figure 172 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on with no game board installed.

Figure 172 (A) shows a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON at timing t1 when the game board 5 is not installed. When the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 is enabled, and the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is cleared. In other words, the RAM clear switch 741 enables the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 regardless of whether the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on. This makes it possible to clear the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 even in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on or when no current is applied to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, and makes it possible to prevent unauthorized play based on information before the game board 5 is installed after the game board 5 is installed.

In addition, among the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, the number of balls held is retained and not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t1. This number of balls held can be displayed on the number of balls held display unit 140 regardless of whether the game board 5 is attached or not when the power is turned on. Note that the number of balls held can be cleared by turning ON the number of balls memory/display clear switch 743 at the same time as the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on at timing t1.

Figure 172 (B) shows a case where the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t1 in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed. When the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t1, the ON operation of the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 is enabled, and the number of balls stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is cleared. In other words, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 enables the ON operation of the ball count memory/display clear switch 743 regardless of whether the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on. This allows the administrator to clear the number of balls even when the game board 5 is not installed or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, and prevents the number of balls from being illegally settled when the game board 5 is not installed or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, and clears balls whose owners are unknown (for example, only one ball remaining).

Figure 172 (C) shows a case where the ball removal switch 742 is turned on at timing t1 when the game board 5 is not installed. When the ball removal switch 742 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ball removal switch 742 is turned on, the ball removal state is activated, and the game ball B sealed in the circulation path R can be removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720) from the ball removal port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600. In other words, the ball removal switch 742 is turned on regardless of whether the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the ball removal state is activated and the game ball B sealed in the circulation path R can be removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), making it easy to inspect the circulation path R.

In addition, during the ball removal state, when the game board 5 is installed, it is possible to launch the game ball B, but it is also possible to launch the game ball B even when the game board 5 is not installed or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. Specifically, during the ball removal state, the door frame 3 is open, so the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, and when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, it is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being shot out from the foul unit 570. This makes it possible to ensure that there are no game balls B on the ball launch pad 552b even when the game board 5 is not installed.

In this example, the configuration of the handle 160 includes a launch control unit that detects the handle touch sensor 162 and the handle rotation sensor 163 and controls the drive of the launch solenoid 553, and the launch control unit is connected to the frame control board 740. When the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact (touch) with the handle 160, the launch control unit outputs a detection signal to the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740. When the detection signal is input, the main control board 1310 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control unit, and similarly, when the detection signal is input, the frame control board 740 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control unit. When the handle rotation sensor 163 detects the rotation of the handle 160 during the period when both the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 and the launch permission signal from the frame control board 740 are input, the launch control unit controls the drive of the launch solenoid 553 to launch the game ball B. If an error such as stopping play occurs in the main control board 1310, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit, and the launch of game ball B is not permitted. Similarly, if an error related to frame control occurs in the frame control board 740, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit, and the launch of game ball B is not permitted.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is not connected and the launch permission signal cannot be output from the main control board 1310. However, since the launch permission signal can be output from the frame control board 740, in this example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed and the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the launch of the game ball B is permitted only by the output of the launch permission signal from the frame control board 740. This makes it possible to launch the game ball B and to create a state where there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b even in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. As an alternative example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, instead of the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, a launch permission signal for the ball removal state may be output from the frame control board 740. In this alternative example, when the handle rotation sensor 163 detects the rotation of the handle 160 during a period when both the launch permission signal from the frame control board 740 and the launch permission signal for the ball removal state from the frame control board 740 are being input, the launch control unit controls the drive of the launch solenoid 553 to launch the game ball B. As a result, as with the above, even when the game board 5 is not installed or when electricity is not applied to the game board 5 when the power is turned on, it is possible to make it possible to have no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b.

Also, FIG. 172 (D) shows a case where the counting button switch 180 is operated ON at timing t1 in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or where no power is being applied to the game board 5 after the power is turned on. When the counting button switch 180 is operated ON at timing t1, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled, and the counting is permitted so that the number of balls held can be settled. In other words, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or where no power is being applied to the game board 5 after the power is turned on. This allows the number of balls held to be settled even in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed or where no power is being applied to the game board 5 after the power is turned on, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

As an alternative example, the counting button switch 180 may be configured as follows, depending on the situation when performing maintenance on the main body frame 4.

In other words, FIG. 172 (D') shows a case where the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on at timing t1 when the game board 5 is not installed. When the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on at timing t1, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated, and the counting is prohibited, prohibiting the settlement of the number of balls held. In other words, if the game board 5 is installed when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is valid, whereas if the game board 5 is not installed when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the number of balls held from being fraudulently settled while the hall manager is inspecting the game when the game board 5 is not installed.

Also, Figure 172 (E) shows a case where, with the game board 5 attached, the power is turned on at timing t1, the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, and the counting button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t2 with the game board 5 not attached. When the counting button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t2, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled, and the counting is permitted so that the number of balls held can be calculated. In other words, if the game board 5 is not attached when the power is turned on, subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled, whereas if the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on but then removed, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is enabled in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached. This allows the hall manager to settle the number of balls held by a player even if the game board 5 is installed and the player is playing and the hall manager removes the game board 5 for inspection, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

When the game board 5 is installed, if the RAM clear switch 741, ball count storage/display clear switch 743, or ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, or if the count button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 uses a component that is instructed to operate to notify the player that the RAM has been cleared, that the number of balls held has been cleared, that a ball removal state has occurred, or that the number of balls held has been settled. Here, the components that are instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 include the performance display device 1600, and LEDs and speakers mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and door frame 3. However, when the game board 5 is not installed, even if various switches are turned ON, it is not possible to execute the notification using the component that is instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, and there is a problem that it is not possible to know which state has occurred.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on, or when the counting button switch 180 is turned on after the power is turned on, a notification is made that the RAM has been cleared, that the number of balls held has been cleared, that a ball removal state has occurred, and that the number of balls held has been settled, using a member that is instructed to operate by the frame control board 740 on the main frame 4 side, in addition to a member that is instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 side. Here, the members that are instructed to operate by the frame control board 740 include the base monitor, the ball count display unit 140, and the LEDs built into the counting button switch 180. For example, when the RAM clear switch 741, the ball count memory/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned on when the power is turned on, the corresponding display is executed in the ball count display unit 140. Also, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the base monitor also displays that a ball removal state is occurring. Additionally, the LED of the counting button switch 180 indicates whether the number of balls held can be settled and the settlement status according to the operation of the counting button switch 180. Therefore, even when the game board 5 is not installed, when various switches are turned ON, a notification can be issued using the components that the frame control board 740 instructs to operate, making it clear which state has occurred and preventing confusion for the hall manager.

[Example of modification of the center prop]
In the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the center role 2500 is attached to the panel board 1110 as one component member has been described, but in the past, when a new game board 5 is created, a new center role 2500 corresponding to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110 must also be created, which makes the game machine design complicated. In addition, if the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110 is made the same as the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the previous panel board 1110 when creating a new game board 5, the previous center role 2500 can be reused for the new game board 5, but the game area 5a where the game balls flow down is not different, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the players in the game. Below, an embodiment in which the center role 2500 is modified in order to solve these problems will be described.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment except for the center device 2550, so below, the configuration of the center device 2500 will be explained in detail, and the explanation of the other components of the pachinko machine 1 will be omitted.

Figure 173 is a front view showing the center role 2500. As shown in Figure 173, the center role 2500 of this embodiment includes a first center role 2500a constituting the upper part of the center role 2500, a second center role 2500b constituting the right part of the center role 2500, a third center role 2500c constituting the left part of the center role 2500, and a fourth center role 2500d constituting the lower part of the center role 2500 in a front view. That is, the center role 2500 of this embodiment is formed from the first center role 2500a to the fourth center role 2500d divided into four parts. The center role 2500 is arranged in a frame shape so that the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned along the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the panel plate 1110, and the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are attached to the panel plate 1110 to correspond to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110.

Figure 174 is a perspective view showing a part of the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c. As shown in Figure 173 or Figure 174, the first center role 2500a is formed in a roughly arc shape with the right end located higher than the left end when viewed from the front, and can be attached along the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 to form the upper part of the center role 2500. The first center role 2500a branches the route along which the game ball shot into the play area 5a flows down into a route that passes through the left side of the center role 2500 and a route that passes through the right side of the center role 2500.

The first center role 2500a has a first peripheral wall 2501a extending in a vertical wall shape along the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, a first flange 2502a protruding from the outer periphery of the first peripheral wall 2501a and extending in a flat plate shape along the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a first support part 2503a protruding from the inner periphery of the first peripheral wall 2501a. The first center role 2500a may further have a decorative wall part extending in a vertical wall shape along the upper edge of the opening 1112 from the rear end of the first peripheral wall 2501a or the rear surface of the first flange 2502a into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the decorative wall part makes it difficult for the player to visually see inside the back unit 3000 from between the first center role 2500a and the performance display device 1600, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The first peripheral wall 2501a constitutes a part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500. In detail, the first peripheral wall 2501a extends along the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and is formed in a vertical wall shape having a width that protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110, and constitutes a part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500. The first peripheral wall 2501a collides with the game ball flowing down the play area 5a, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall 2501 through the first center role 2500a, and thus preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

The first peripheral wall portion 2500a has a first adjustment wall portion 2504a extending in a vertical wall shape at each of both ends of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a. The first adjustment wall portion 2504a extends from each end of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a toward the second center role 2500b or the third center role 2500c. The first adjustment wall portion 2504a is formed with a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width in the front-to-rear direction of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a. Note that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a may be in any form that extends from the end of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a toward the second center role 2500b or the third center role 2500c, and specifically, the first adjustment wall portion 2504a on the left side in front view may be configured to extend, for example, from below toward the second center role 2500b in a clockwise direction to the left. Additionally, the first adjustment wall portion 2504a on the right side when viewed from the front may be configured to extend downward in a clockwise direction from the right toward the third center role piece 2500c, for example.

The first flange portion 2502a has a positioning pin protruding from its back surface toward the panel plate 1110. The first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by fitting the positioning pin of the first flange portion 2502a into the mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. The first flange portion 2502a may be in a form in which a mounting hole is formed instead of a positioning pin, or in which both a positioning pin and a mounting hole are formed. In either case, the first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the positioning pin or mounting hole of the first flange portion 2502a and the positioning pin or mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the positioning pin and mounting hole may be formed on the back surface of the first center part 2500a, for example, on the back surface of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a.

After the first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel board 1110, the first flange portion 2502a is fixed to the panel board 1110 by a fixing member such as a screw. As a result, the first center role 2500a is attached to the game board 5. Note that the first flange portion 2502a may be fixed to a specified member by a fixing member such as a screw so that the panel board 1110 is sandwiched between the first center role 2500a and a specified member that abuts against the rear surface of the panel board 1110 after the first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel board 1110, and the first center role 2500a is attached to the game board 5.

The first flange portion 2502a has a plate-like portion parallel to the panel plate 1110 and an obstacle device formed to protrude forward from the plate-like portion. When a game ball collides with such an obstacle device flowing down the play area 5a, the obstacle device can change the direction of travel of the game ball, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The plate-like portion of the first flange portion 2502a and the first support portion 2503a are desirably formed to be thinner than the panel plate 1110, for example, from the viewpoint of reducing the weight of the first center part 2500a. Specifically, the plate-like portion of the first flange portion 2502a and the first support portion 2503a are desirably 1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110, which can sufficiently increase the strength of the first center part 2500a while preventing the first center part 2500a from becoming excessively heavy.

The first support portion 2503a is partially provided on the inner circumference of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a, and increases the strength of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a. In addition, the shape of the first support portion 2503a protruding from the first peripheral wall portion 2501a in a front view is formed in a shape that imitates the front shape of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a or in a straight line, so that the first support portion 2503a is configured to be less noticeable to players, and a decrease in the interest of players who see the first support portion 2503a can be suppressed. It is preferable that the amount by which the first support portion 2503a protrudes from the first peripheral wall portion 2501a is in the range from the thickness of the first support portion 2503a to the thickness of the panel board 1110, specifically within the range of 1.0 mm to 10.0 mm, so that the first support portion 2503a is configured to be less noticeable to players while still fully exerting the effect of increasing the strength of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a.

The first center role 2500a of this embodiment further has a first linear member 2505a that can be connected to the back side of the first center role 2500a. One end of the first linear member 2505a is detachably connected to the back side of the first center role 2500a, and the other end is detachably connected to the game board 5. The first linear member 2505a is, for example, a metal wire, and the other end is detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position on the game board 5 that is difficult to see from the player, and one end is detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position on the first center role 2500a that is difficult to see from the player. Specifically, the first center role 2500a has a first connecting part (not shown) provided at the rear of the first flange part 2502a, and one end of the first linear member 2505a is detachably connected to the first connecting part. In addition, the game board 5 has a second connection part (not shown) provided on the rear unit 3000, for example, and the other end of the first linear member 2505a is connected to the second connection part, avoiding the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the first linear member 2505a is placed in a position that is difficult for the player to see after the first center role device 2500a is attached to the game board 5. Note that if the first center role device 2500a is transparent, the first linear member 2505a can also be placed so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the first center role device 2500a.

The first connecting part of the first center role 2500a and the second connecting part of the game board 5 may have a locking mechanism that locks one end or the other end of the first linear member 2505a. The locking mechanism can prevent the first linear member 2505a from easily detaching from the first connecting part of the first center role 2500a and the second connecting part of the game board 5, and can be operated by, for example, a worker who assembles the game board 5 or an administrator of the game hall who manages the pachinko machine 1, to easily remove the first linear member 2505a from the first connecting part of the first center role 2500a and the second connecting part of the game board 5. Note that, from the viewpoint of workability when separating the game board 5, it is preferable that the first linear member 2505a is removed from the first connecting part of the first center role 2500a before the second connecting part of the game board 5.

The first linear member 2505a is connected to the first connecting portion of the first center role 2500a and the second connecting portion of the game board 5 before the first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the first center role 2500a falls from the hand of an operator when positioning the first center role 2500a relative to the panel board 1110, the first center role 2500a and the game board 5 are connected by the first linear member 2505a, so that the first center role 2500a can be prevented from colliding with the floor surface, etc.

From the viewpoint of preventing the first center role 2500a from colliding with the floor surface or the like, the first linear member 2505a is formed to be shorter than the length from the lower end of the pachinko machine 1 to the position where the first center role 2500a is positioned relative to the panel board 1110. Note that, from the viewpoint of increasing the strength against the impact of the first linear member 2505a being dropped, the first center role 2500a may be provided with a first linear member 2505a having a large wire diameter, or with a plurality of first linear members 2505a bundled together. In addition, the first center role 2500a does not have any components that may be damaged by the impact of a fall, compared to the second center role 2500b to the fourth center role 2500d, and protection from the impact of a fall is less important. For example, from the viewpoint of improving the workability when positioning the first center role 2500a relative to the panel board 1110 and attaching the first center role 2500a to the game board 5, the first center role 2500a may not have the first linear member 2505a.

The second center device 2500b is equipped with a second starting hole 2005 and a second large winning hole 2007 that opens and closes to receive game balls depending on the result of the lottery for the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting hole 2005. The second center device 2500b is formed in a roughly arc shape such that the lower end is located to the left of the upper end when viewed from the front, and can be attached along the right edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 to form the right part of the center device 2500. The second center device 2500b forms a route for game balls that are shot into the play area 5a and flow down the right side of the center device 2500.

The second center gimmick 2500b has a second peripheral wall portion 2501b extending like a vertical wall along the right edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, a flat second flange portion 2502b protruding from the outer periphery of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b and abutting the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a second support portion 2503b protruding from the inner periphery of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b, and a second linear member 2505b that can be connected to the back side of the second center gimmick 2500b. The second center gimmick 2500b may further have a decorative wall extending from the rear end of the second peripheral wall 2501b or the rear surface of the second flange 2502b into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 along the right edge of the opening 1112 in the form of a vertical wall. The decorative wall, for example, makes it difficult for the player to see inside the back unit 3000 from between the second center gimmick 2500b and the performance display device 1600, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

The second peripheral wall 2501b constitutes a part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500. In detail, the second peripheral wall 2501b extends along the right edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and is formed in a vertical wall shape having a width that protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110, and constitutes a part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500. The second peripheral wall 2501b collides with the game ball flowing down the play area 5a, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall 2501 through the second center role 2500b, and thus preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

The second flange portion 2502b has a positioning pin formed on its back surface that protrudes toward the panel plate 1110. The second center role 2500b is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by fitting the positioning pin of the second flange portion 2502b into the mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. The second flange portion 2502b may be formed with a mounting hole instead of a positioning pin, or may be formed with both a positioning pin and a mounting hole. In either case, the second center role 2500b is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the positioning pin or mounting hole of the second flange portion 2502b and the positioning pin or mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the positioning pin and mounting hole may be formed on the back surface of the second center part 2500b, for example, on the back surface of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b.

The second flange portion 2502b is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by a fixing member such as a screw after the second center role 2500b is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110. As a result, the second center role 2500b is attached to the game board 5. Note that the second flange portion 2502b may be fixed to a specified member by a fixing member such as a screw so as to sandwich the panel plate 1110 between the panel plate 1110 and a specified member abutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 after the second center role 2500b is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110, and the second center role 2500b is attached to the game board 5.

The second flange portion 2502b has a plate-like portion extending parallel to the panel plate 1110, and a storage portion for storing multiple obstacle nails provided on the panel plate 1110 between the plate-like portion. The multiple obstacle nails can change the direction of travel of a game ball when it collides with a game ball flowing down the route on the right side of the center device 2500, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The plate-like portion of the second flange portion 2502b and the second support portion 2503b are desirably formed to be thinner than the panel plate 1110, for example, from the viewpoint of reducing the weight of the second center part 2500b. Specifically, the plate-like portion of the second flange portion 2502b and the second support portion 2503b are desirably 1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110, which can sufficiently increase the strength of the second center part 2500b while preventing the second center part 2500b from becoming excessively heavy.

The second support portion 2503b is partially provided on the inner circumference of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b, and increases the strength of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b. In addition, the shape of the second support portion 2503b protruding from the second peripheral wall portion 2501b in a front view is formed in a shape that imitates the front shape of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b or in a straight line, so that the second support portion 2503b is configured to be less noticeable to players, and a decrease in the interest of players who see the second support portion 2503b can be suppressed. It is preferable that the amount by which the second support portion 2503b protrudes from the second peripheral wall portion 2501b is in the range from the thickness of the second support portion 2503b to the thickness of the panel board 1110, specifically, in the range of 1.0 mm to 10.0 mm, so that the second support portion 2503b is configured to be less noticeable to players while still fully exerting the effect of increasing the strength of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b.

The second linear member 2505b has one end detachably connected to the back side of the second center role 2500b, and the other end detachably connected to the game board 5. The second linear member 2505b is, for example, a metal wire, and has one end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position on the game board 5 that is difficult to see from the player, and the other end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position on the second center role 2500b that is difficult to see from the player. Specifically, the second center role 2500b has a first connecting part (not shown) provided at the rear of the second flange part 2502b, and one end of the second linear member 2505b is detachably connected to the first connecting part. In addition, the game board 5 has, for example, a second connecting part (not shown) provided on the back unit 3000, and the other end of the second linear member 2505b is connected to the second connecting part, avoiding the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the first linear member 2505a is placed in a position that is difficult for the player to see after the first center device 2500a is attached to the game board 5. If the second center device 2500b is transparent, the second linear member 2505b can also be placed so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the second center device 2500b.

The first connecting portion of the second center device 2500b and the second connecting portion of the game board 5 may have a locking mechanism that locks one end or the other end of the second linear member 2505b. The locking mechanism can prevent the second linear member 2505b from easily detaching from the first connecting portion of the second center device 2500b and the second connecting portion of the game board 5, and can be operated by, for example, a worker who assembles the game board 5 or an administrator of the game hall who manages the pachinko machine 1, to easily remove the second linear member 2505b from the first connecting portion of the second center device 2500b and the second connecting portion of the game board 5. Note that, from the viewpoint of workability when separating the game board 5, it is preferable that the second linear member 2505b is removed from the first connecting portion of the second center device 2500b before the second connecting portion of the game board 5.

The second linear member 2505b is connected to the first connecting portion of the second center device 2500b and the second connecting portion of the game board 5 before the second center device 2500b is positioned relative to the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the second center device 2500b falls from the hand of an operator when positioning the second center device 2500b relative to the panel board 1110, the second center device 2500b is connected to the game board 5 by the second linear member 2505b, and therefore the second center device 2500b can be prevented from colliding with the floor surface, etc.

The second linear member 2505b is formed to be shorter than the length from the bottom end of the pachinko machine 1 to the position where the second central role 2500b is positioned relative to the panel board 1110, from the viewpoint of preventing the second central role 2500b from colliding with the floor surface, etc. Note that the second central role 2500b may be provided with a second linear member 2505b having a large wire diameter, or with multiple second linear members 2505b bundled together, from the viewpoint of increasing the strength against the impact of the second linear member 2505b being dropped.

In addition, if the second linear member 2505b is not removed from the game board 5 and the second center device 2500b after the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it may be determined whether or not the second linear member 2505b is connected to the game board 5 and the second center device 2500b, and if it is determined that the second linear member 2505b is not connected to the game board 5 and the second center device 2500b, an error notification may be given to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 indicating that the second linear member 2505b is not connected. As described above, the first center device 2500a does not have any components that may be damaged by the impact of a fall, compared to the second center device 2500b. Therefore, in the case where the first linear member 2505a is not removed from the game board 5 and the first center device 2500a after the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, for example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is desirable that even if it is determined that the first linear member 2505a is not connected to the game board 5 and the first center device 2500a, an error notification that the first linear member 2505a is not connected to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is not issued. From a similar perspective, it is desirable that the second center feature 2500b be better protected from the impact of a fall than the first center feature 2500a; for example, it is desirable that the second linear member 2505b be larger in wire diameter than the first linear member 2505a, and it is also desirable that the number of second linear members 2505b bundled together be greater than the number of first linear members 2505a bundled together.

In the following, we will explain how the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b of the same shape can be reused even if the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 is modified when creating a new game board 5. Figures 175(a) to (c) are schematic front views showing the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b. Figures 175(a) to (c) are diagrams showing the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b attached to respective panel boards having different openings. In detail, Figure 175(a) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b attached to the panel board 1110 having the opening 1112 of the same shape as the panel board 1110 of the above-mentioned embodiment of Figure 173. Also, FIG. 175(b) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b attached to a panel board having a different shape (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is shortened) from the panel board 1110 of FIG. 173 described above. Also, FIG. 175(c) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b attached to a panel board having a different shape (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is lengthened) from the panel board 1110 of FIG. 173 described above.

As shown in FIG. 175(a), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are positioned relative to the panel board 1110 so that they are adjacent to each other, the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are attached to the panel board 1110 so that the tip of the first adjustment wall portion 2504a on the right side of the first center role 2500a and the upper end portion of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b of the second center role 2500b abut without any gaps. As a result, in the configuration of the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b shown in FIG. 175(a), game balls flowing down the play area 5a can be prevented from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b, and thus game balls flowing down the play area 5a can be prevented from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

Also, as shown in FIG. 175(b), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are positioned relative to a panel plate having a different shape from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is shortened), even if the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b overlap in the left-right direction, the first adjustment wall portion 2504a does not have a portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery like the first flange portion 2502a, so the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b can be attached to the panel plate so that the upper end of the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the upper end of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b overlap in the left-right direction. Even with the configuration of the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b shown in FIG. 175(b), it is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b, and thus to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening of the panel board.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 175(c), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are positioned relative to a panel board having a shape different from the above-mentioned panel board 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is longer), even if the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are separated, the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b can be attached to the panel board so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the upper end portion of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b are separated within a predetermined distance range. In the configuration of the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b shown in FIG. 175(c), the maximum value of the predetermined distance between the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the upper end of the second peripheral wall portion 2501b only needs to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, which is 11.0 mm, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the first center device 2500a and the second center device 2500b, and thus the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening of the panel board.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b overlap, or so that the first adjustment portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are spaced apart within a predetermined range according to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Even if the shape of the opening of the second center part 2500 changes, the center part 2500 can be reused, and therefore there is no need to create a new center part that corresponds to the shape of the opening formed in the new panel board, making it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improving convenience, and since the first center part 2500a and the second center part 2500b are positioned to correspond to the new panel board with a different shape of the opening, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that even if a new first center part is created without reusing the first center part 2500a, the second center part 2500b can be reused if at least the first adjustment wall part of the new first center part is made to have a common shape corresponding to the upper end part of the second peripheral wall part 2501b of the second center part 2500b. In addition, even if a new second center part is created without reusing the second center part 2500b, the first center part 2500a can be reused if at least the upper end of the second peripheral wall of the new second center part is a common aspect corresponding to the first adjustment wall part 2504a of the first center part 2500a. Even in these aspects, the gaming machine design of the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier and the convenience can be improved, and since the gaming area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes depending on whether the first center part 2500a or the second center part 2500b is different, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

The third center role 2500c is provided with a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to receive the game ball B according to the result of the lottery for the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, and a first large winning opening 2006 that opens and closes to receive the game ball B according to the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004. The third center role 2500c is formed in a substantially arc shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and can be attached along the left edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 to form the left part of the center role 2500. The third center role 2500c forms a route for the game ball that is shot into the play area 5a and flows down the left side of the center role 2500.

The third center role 2500c has a third peripheral wall portion 2501c extending in a vertical wall shape along the left edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, a third flange portion 2502c protruding from the outer periphery of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c and extending in a flat plate shape along the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a third linear member 2505c that can be connected to the back side of the third center role 2500c. The third center role 2500c may further have a decorative wall portion extending in a vertical wall shape from the rear end portion of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c or the rear surface of the third flange portion 2502c into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 along the left edge of the opening 1112, and the decorative wall portion, for example, makes it difficult for the player to visually view the inside of the back unit 3000 from between the third center role 2500c and the performance display device 1600, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The third peripheral wall portion 2501c constitutes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. In detail, the third peripheral wall portion 2501c extends along the left edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and is formed in the shape of a vertical wall having a width that protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110, and constitutes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. The third peripheral wall portion 2501c collides with the game ball flowing down the play area 5a, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the third center role 2500c, and thus preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

The third peripheral wall portion 2500c has a third adjustment wall portion 2504c extending in a vertical wall shape at each of both ends of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c. The third adjustment wall portion 2504c extends from each end of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c toward the first center role 2500a or the fourth center role 2500d. The third adjustment wall portion 2504c is formed with a width in the front-to-back direction that is approximately the same as the width in the front-to-back direction of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c. Note that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c may be in any form that extends from the end of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c toward the first center role 2500a or the fourth center role 2500d, and specifically, the upper third adjustment wall portion 2504c in front view may be configured to extend, for example, from above toward the first center role 2500a in a clockwise direction to the right. In addition, when viewed from the front, the third adjustment wall portion 2504c on the lower side may be configured to extend, for example, from the right toward the fourth center role piece 2500d in a clockwise direction downward.

The third flange portion 2502c has a positioning pin formed on its back surface that protrudes toward the panel plate 1110. The third center role 2500c is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by fitting the positioning pin of the third flange portion 2502c into the mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. The third flange portion 2502c may be formed with a mounting hole instead of a positioning pin, or may be formed with both a positioning pin and a mounting hole. In either case, the third center role 2500c is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the positioning pin or mounting hole of the third flange portion 2502c and the positioning pin or mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the positioning pin and mounting hole may be formed on the back surface of the third center part 2500c, for example, on the back surface of the third peripheral wall portion 2501c.

The third flange portion 2502c is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by a fixing member such as a screw after the third center role 2500c is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110. As a result, the third center role 2500c is attached to the game board 5. Note that the third flange portion 2502c may be fixed to a specified member by a fixing member such as a screw so as to sandwich the panel plate 1110 between the panel plate 1110 and a specified member abutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 after the third center role 2500c is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110, and the third center role 2500c is attached to the game board 5.

From the viewpoint of reducing the weight of the third center part 2500c, for example, it is desirable that the third flange part 2502c is formed to have a thickness thinner than the panel plate 1110. Specifically, it is desirable that the third flange part 2502c has a thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 that of the panel plate 1110, which can sufficiently increase the strength of the third center part 2500c and prevent the third center part 2500c from becoming excessively heavy.

The third linear member 2505c has one end detachably connected to the third center role 2500c, and the other end detachably connected to the game board 5. The third linear member 2505c is, for example, a metal wire, and has one end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position of the third center role 2500c that is difficult to see from the player, and the other end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position of the game board 5 that is difficult to see from the player. Specifically, the third center role 2500c has a first connecting part (not shown) provided at the rear of the third flange part 2502c, and one end of the third linear member 2505c is detachably connected to the first connecting part. In addition, the game board 5 has, for example, a second connecting part (not shown) provided on the back unit 3000, and the other end of the third linear member 2505c is connected to the second connecting part, avoiding the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the third linear member 2505c is placed in a position that is difficult for the player to see after the third center device 2500c is attached to the game board 5. If the third center device 2500c is transparent, the third linear member 2505c can also be placed so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the third center device 2500c.

The first connecting part of the third center role 2500c and the second connecting part of the game board 5 may have a locking mechanism that locks one end or the other end of the third linear member 2505c. The locking mechanism can prevent the third linear member 2505c from easily detaching from the first connecting part of the third center role 2500c and the second connecting part of the game board 5, and can be operated by, for example, a worker who assembles the game board 5 or an administrator of the game hall who manages the pachinko machine 1, to easily remove the third linear member 2505c from the first connecting part of the third center role 2500c and the second connecting part of the game board 5. Note that, from the viewpoint of workability when separating the game board 5, it is preferable that the third linear member 2505c is removed from the first connecting part of the third center role 2500c before the second connecting part of the game board 5.

The third linear member 2505c is connected to the first connecting portion of the third center role 2500c and the second connecting portion of the game board 5 before the third center role 2500c is positioned relative to the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the third center role 2500c falls from the hand of an operator when positioning the third center role 2500c relative to the panel board 1110, the third center role 2500c is connected to the game board 5 by the third linear member 2505c, and therefore the third center role 2500c can be prevented from colliding with the floor surface, etc.

The third linear member 2505c is formed to be shorter than the length from the bottom end of the pachinko machine 1 to the position where the third central feature 2500c is attached to the panel board 1110, for example, in order to prevent the third central feature 2500c from colliding with the floor surface, etc. Note that the third central feature 2500c may be provided with a third linear member 2505c having a large wire diameter, or with multiple third linear members 2505c bundled together, in order to increase the strength of the third central feature 2500c against the impact of being dropped.

In addition, if the third linear member 2505c is not removed from the game board 5 and the third center device 2500c after the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it may be determined whether or not the third linear member 2505c is connected to the game board 5 and the third center device 2500c, and if it is determined that the third linear member 2505c is not connected to the game board 5 and the third center device 2500c, an error notification may be given to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 indicating that the third linear member 2505c is not connected. Also, as mentioned above, the third center feature 2500c has a component that is more likely to be damaged by the impact of a fall than the first center feature 2500a, so it is desirable that the third center feature 2500c be protected from the impact of a fall more than the first center feature 2500a. For example, it is desirable that the third linear member 2505c has a larger wire diameter than the first linear member 2505a, and it is also desirable that the number of third linear members 2505c bundled together is greater than the number of first linear members 2505a bundled together.

In the following, we will explain how the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c of the same shape can be reused even if the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 is modified when creating a new game board 5. Figures 176 (a) to (c) are schematic front views showing the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c. Figures 176 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c attached to respective panel boards having different openings. In detail, Figure 176 (a) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c attached to the panel board 1110 having the opening 1112 of the same shape as the panel board 1110 of the above-mentioned embodiment of Figure 173. Also, FIG. 176(b) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c attached to a panel board having a different shape (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the vertical direction is shortened) from the panel board 1110 of FIG. 173 described above. Also, FIG. 176(c) is a diagram showing the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c attached to a panel board having a different shape (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the vertical direction is lengthened) from the panel board 1110 of FIG. 173 described above.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that they are adjacent to each other, the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c can be attached to the panel board 1110 so that the tip of the first adjustment wall portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the tip of the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c abut without any gaps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c, and thus it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176(b), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned relative to a panel plate having a different shape from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the vertical width of the opening is shortened), even if the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c overlap in the left-right direction, since the first adjustment wall portion 2504a does not have a portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c does not have a portion that protrudes toward the inner periphery, the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c overlap in the left-right direction. Even in the configuration of the first center device 2500a and the third center device 2500c shown in Figure 176 (b), it is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the first center device 2500a and the third center device 2500c, and ultimately to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. In addition, when the first adjustment wall portion 2504a extends leftward from the first center role 2500a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c extends rightward from the third center role 2500c, and the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned relative to a panel plate having a different shape from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is shortened), even if the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c overlap in the vertical direction, as long as the first adjustment wall portion 2504a does not have a portion protruding toward the inner circumference and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c does not have a portion protruding toward the outer circumference, the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b can be attached to the panel plate so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c overlap in the vertical direction.

Also, as shown in FIG. 176(c), in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned relative to a panel plate having a different shape from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the opening is longer in the vertical width), even if the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are separated, the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c are separated within a predetermined distance range. In the configuration of the first center device 2500a and the third center device 2500c shown in FIG. 176(c), the maximum value of the predetermined distance between the first adjustment wall portion 2504a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c only needs to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, which is 11.0 mm, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the first center device 2500a and the third center device 2500c, and thus the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that the first adjustment wall portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c overlap, or so that the first adjustment portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c are spaced apart within a predetermined range, according to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Even if the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel 1110 changes, the center role 2500 can be reused, and therefore there is no need to create a new center role corresponding to the shape of the opening formed in the new panel, making it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improving convenience, and since the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned to correspond to the new panel with a different opening shape, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that even if a new first center role is created without reusing the first center role 2500a, the third center role 2500c can be reused if at least the first adjustment wall part of the new first center role is made to have a common aspect corresponding to the third adjustment wall part 2504c of the third center role 2500c. In addition, even if a new third center part is created without reusing the third center part 2500c, the first center part 2500a can be reused if the third adjustment wall part of the new third center part is a common aspect corresponding to the first adjustment wall part 2504a of the first center part 2500a. Even in these aspects, the gaming machine design of the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier and the convenience can be improved, and since the gaming area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes depending on whether the first center part 2500a or the third center part 2500c is different, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

The fourth center role 2500d is formed in a generally arc shape with the left end positioned higher than the right end when viewed from the front, and is attached along the lower edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 to form the lower part of the center role 2500. The fourth center role 2500d has a warp entrance that opens to allow the entry of a game ball that is shot into the play area 5a and flows down a route that passes through the left side of the center role 2500, a warp exit that can release game ball B that has entered the warp entrance, a stage that can release the game ball released from the warp exit into the play area 5a after rolling it in the left-right direction, and a stage cover provided to cover the top of the stage. The stage of the fourth center role 2500d is curved with a recessed center in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape such that the position corresponding to the position directly above the first starting hole 2004 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the fourth center role 2500d is positioned on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is slightly higher than both the left and right sides. In addition, the stage is inclined so that the part that is slightly higher than both the left and right sides in the left-right center and the lowest part on both the left and right sides become lower toward the front, and game balls can be released into the game area 5a from these parts. Therefore, when a game ball is released from the center of the stage, the released game ball is received by the first starting hole 2004 with an extremely high probability.

The fourth center role 2500d has a fourth peripheral wall 2501d extending in a vertical wall shape along the lower edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, a fourth flange 2502d protruding from the outer periphery of the fourth peripheral wall 2501d and extending in a flat plate shape along the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a fourth support part 2503d protruding from the inner periphery of the fourth peripheral wall 2501d. The fourth center role 2500d may further have a decorative wall part extending in a vertical wall shape along the lower edge of the opening 1112 from the rear end of the fourth peripheral wall 2501d or the rear surface of the fourth flange 2502d into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the decorative wall part makes it difficult for the player to visually view the inside of the back unit 3000 from between the fourth center role 2500ad performance display device 1600, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

The fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d constitutes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. In detail, the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d extends along the lower edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 and is formed in a vertical wall shape having a width that protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel board 1110, and constitutes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. The fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d collides with the game ball flowing down the play area 5a, thereby preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the fourth center role 2500d, and thus preventing the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

The fourth peripheral wall portion 2500a has a fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d extending in a vertical wall shape at each of both ends of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d. The fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d extends from each end of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d toward the second center role 2500b or the third center role 2500c. The fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d is formed with a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width in the front-to-rear direction of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d. Note that the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d may be in any form that extends from the end of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501a toward the second center role 2500b or the third center role 2500c, and specifically, the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d on the left side in front view may be configured to extend, for example, from above to the right in a clockwise direction toward the third center role 2500c. Also, the fourth adjustment wall 2504d on the right side in front view may be configured to extend, for example, from above toward the second center role 2500c in a clockwise direction to the right. Here, the stage cover of the fourth center role 2500d constitutes part of the fourth circumferential wall 2501d, and can bounce game balls that bounce on the stage of the fourth center role 2500d toward the stage side, and can prevent game balls from flowing into the frame of the fourth center role 2500d from outside the frame.

The fourth flange portion 2502d has a positioning pin protruding from its back surface toward the panel plate 1110. The fourth center role 2500d is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by fitting the positioning pin of the fourth flange portion 2502d into the mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. The fourth flange portion 2502d may be formed with a mounting hole instead of a positioning pin, or may be formed with both a positioning pin and a mounting hole. In either case, the fourth center role 2500d is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the positioning pin or mounting hole of the fourth flange portion 2502d and the positioning pin or mounting hole of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the positioning pin and mounting hole may be formed on the back surface of the fourth center part 2500d, for example, on the back surface of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d.

The fourth flange portion 2502d is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by a fixing member such as a screw after the fourth center role 2500d is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110. As a result, the fourth center role 2500d is attached to the game board 5. Note that the fourth flange portion 2502d may be fixed to a specified member by a fixing member such as a screw so as to sandwich the panel plate 1110 between the panel plate 1110 and a specified member abutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 after the fourth center role 2500d is positioned relative to the panel plate 1110, and the fourth center role 2500d is attached to the game board 5.

From the viewpoint of reducing the weight of the fourth center role piece 2500d, it is desirable that the fourth flange portion 2502d and the fourth support portion 2503d are formed to have a thickness thinner than the panel plate 1110. Specifically, it is desirable that the fourth flange portion 2502d and the fourth support portion 2503d have a thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 that of the panel plate 1110, which can sufficiently increase the strength of the fourth center role piece 2500d and prevent the fourth center role piece 2500d from becoming excessively heavy.

The fourth support portion 2503d is partially provided on the inner circumference of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d, and increases the strength of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d. In addition, the shape of the fourth support portion 2503d protruding from the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d in a front view is formed in a shape that imitates the front shape of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d or in a straight line, so that the fourth support portion 2503d is configured to be less noticeable to players, and a decrease in the interest of players who see the fourth support portion 2503d can be suppressed. It is preferable that the amount by which the fourth support portion 2503d protrudes from the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d is in the range from the thickness of the fourth support portion 2503a to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, specifically, in the range of 1.0 mm to 10.0 mm, so that the fourth support portion 2503d is configured to be less noticeable to players while still fully exerting the effect of increasing the strength of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d.

The fourth linear member 2505d has one end detachably connected to the fourth center role 2500d, and the other end detachably connected to the game board 5. The fourth linear member 2505d is, for example, a metal wire, and has one end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position of the fourth center role 2500d that is difficult to see from the player, and the other end detachably connected to a connecting part provided at a predetermined position of the game board 5 that is difficult to see from the player. Specifically, the fourth center role 2500d has a first connecting part (not shown) provided at the rear of the fourth flange part 2502d, and one end of the fourth linear member 2505d is detachably connected to the first connecting part. In addition, the game board 5 has, for example, a second connecting part (not shown) provided on the back unit 3000, and the other end of the fourth linear member 2505d is connected to the second connecting part, avoiding the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the fourth linear member 2505d is placed in a position that is difficult for the player to see after the fourth center device 2500d is attached to the game board 5. If the fourth center device 2500d is transparent, the fourth linear member 2505d can also be placed so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the fourth center device 2500d.

The first connecting part of the fourth center role 2500d and the second connecting part of the game board 5 may have a locking mechanism that locks one end or the other end of the fourth linear member 2505d. The locking mechanism can prevent the fourth linear member 2505d from easily detaching from the first connecting part of the fourth center role 2500d and the second connecting part of the game board 5, and can be operated by, for example, a worker who assembles the game board 5 or an administrator of the game hall who manages the pachinko machine 1, to easily remove the fourth linear member 2505d from the first connecting part of the fourth center role 2500d and the second connecting part of the game board 5. Note that, from the viewpoint of workability when separating the game board 5, it is preferable that the fourth linear member 2505d is removed from the first connecting part of the fourth center role 2500d before the second connecting part of the game board 5.

The fourth linear member 2505d is connected to the first connecting portion of the fourth center role 2500d and the second connecting portion of the game board 5 before the fourth center role 2500d is positioned relative to the panel board 1110. As a result, even if the fourth center role 2500d falls from the hand of an operator when positioning the fourth center role 2500d relative to the panel board 1110, the fourth center role 2500d is connected to the game board 5 by the fourth linear member 2505d, and therefore the fourth center role 2500d can be prevented from colliding with the floor surface, etc.

The fourth linear member 2505d is formed to be shorter than the length from the bottom end of the pachinko machine 1 to the position where the fourth central feature 2500d is attached to the panel board 1110, for example, in order to prevent the fourth central feature 2500d from colliding with the floor surface, etc. Note that the fourth central feature 2500d may be provided with a fourth linear member 2505d having a large wire diameter, or with multiple fourth linear members 2505d bundled together, in order to increase the strength of the fourth central feature 2500d against the impact of a fall.

In addition, if the fourth linear member 2505d is not removed from the game board 5 and the fourth center device 2500d after the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it may be determined whether or not the fourth linear member 2505d is connected to the game board 5 and the fourth center device 2500d, and if it is determined that the fourth linear member 2505d is not connected to the game board 5 and the fourth center device 2500d, an error notification may be given to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 indicating that the fourth linear member 2505d is not connected. Also, as mentioned above, the fourth center feature 2500d has components that are more likely to be damaged by the impact of a fall than the first center feature 2500a, so it is desirable that the fourth center feature 2500d be better protected from the impact of a fall than the first center feature 2500a. For example, it is desirable that the fourth linear member 2505d has a larger wire diameter than the first linear member 2505a, and it is also desirable that the number of fourth linear members 2505d bundled together is greater than the number of first linear members 2505a bundled together.

The following describes how, when creating a new game board 5, even if the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 is modified, the second center device 2500b, the third center device 2500c, and the fourth center device 2500d of the same shape can be reused.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned on the panel board 1110 having the same shape as the panel board 1110 of the above-mentioned embodiment of FIG. 173, so that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c and the fourth adjustment wall 2504c of the fourth center role 2500d are adjacent to each other, the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel board 1110 so that they face each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d, and thus it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 having a shape different from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is shortened), even if the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d overlap in the vertical direction, since the third adjustment wall portion 2504c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d do not have a portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery, the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d overlap in the vertical direction. Even with this configuration of the third center device 2500c and the fourth center device 2500d, it is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the third center device 2500c and the fourth center device 2500d, and ultimately to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. In addition, when the third adjustment wall portion 2504a extends downward from the third center role 2500c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d extends upward from the fourth center role 2500d, and the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to a panel plate having a different shape from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is shortened), even if the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d overlap in the left-right direction, as long as the third adjustment wall portion 2504c does not have a portion protruding toward the inner circumference and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d does not have a portion protruding toward the outer circumference, the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate so that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d overlap in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to a panel plate 1110 having a shape different from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the width of the opening in the left-right direction is longer), even if the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are separated, the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d are separated within a predetermined distance range. In this configuration of the third center device 2500c and the fourth center device 2500d, the maximum value of the predetermined distance between the third adjustment wall portion 2504c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d only needs to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, which is 11.0 mm, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the third center device 2500c and the fourth center device 2500d, and thus the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d of the fourth center role 2500d overlap, or so that the third adjustment portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d of the fourth center role 2500d are separated within a predetermined range according to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Even if the shape of the opening of the opening 1112 of the board 1110 changes, the center role 2500 can be reused, and therefore there is no need to create a new center role corresponding to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, making it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improving convenience, and since the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned to correspond to the new panel board 1110, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes, and therefore a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Note that even if a new third center role is created without reusing the third center role 2500c, the fourth center role 2500d can be reused if at least the third adjustment wall part of the new third center role is made to have a common aspect corresponding to the fourth adjustment wall part 2504d of the fourth center role 2500c. In addition, even if a new fourth center role is created without reusing the fourth center role 2500d, the third center role 2500c can be reused if the fourth adjustment wall of the new fourth center role is a common aspect corresponding to the third adjustment wall 2504c of the third center role 2500c. Even in these aspects, the gaming machine design of the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier and the convenience can be improved, and since the gaming area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes depending on whether the third center role 2500c or the fourth center role 2500d is different, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500c are positioned adjacent to each other on a panel plate 1110 having an opening 1112 of the same shape as the panel plate 1110 of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 173, the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the second peripheral wall portion 2501b of the second center role 2500b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d of the fourth center role 2500d face each other. In this configuration of the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, game balls flowing down the play area 5a can be prevented from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, and thus game balls flowing down the play area 5a can be prevented from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to the panel plate 1110 having a shape different from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the vertical width of the opening is shortened), even if the second center role 2500a and the fourth center role 2500d overlap, since the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d does not have a portion that protrudes toward the outer periphery, the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the second peripheral wall portion 2501b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d overlap in the left-right direction. Even with this configuration of the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, it is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, and thus to prevent game balls flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to a panel plate 1110 having a shape different from the above-mentioned panel plate 1110 (for example, a shape in which the vertical width of the opening is longer), even if the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d are separated, the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel plate 1110 so that the second peripheral wall portion 2501b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d are separated within a predetermined distance range. In this configuration of the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, the maximum value of the predetermined distance between the second peripheral wall portion 2501b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d only needs to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, which is 11.0 mm, and the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 via the second center device 2500b and the fourth center device 2500d, and thus the game ball flowing down the game area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that the second center role 2500b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d of the fourth center role 2500c overlap, or so that the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d are spaced apart within a predetermined range, according to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Even if the shape of the opening of the second center part 2500 is changed, the center part 2500 can be reused, and therefore there is no need to create a new center part corresponding to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, which makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience, and also suppresses a decrease in interest in the game because the second center part 2500b and the fourth center part 2500d are positioned to correspond to the new panel board 1110, changing the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down. Note that even if a new second center part is created without reusing the second center part 2500b, the fourth center part 2500d can be reused if at least the lower end of the second peripheral wall part of the new second center part is made to have a common form corresponding to the fourth adjustment wall part 2504d of the fourth center part 2500c. In addition, even if a new fourth center feature is created without reusing the fourth center feature 2500d, the second center feature 2500b can be reused if the fourth adjustment wall of the new fourth center feature is a common aspect corresponding to the lower end of the second peripheral wall 2501b of the second center feature 2500b. Even in these aspects, the design of the pachinko machine 1 can be made easier and the convenience can be improved, and since the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes depending on whether the second center feature 2500b or the fourth center feature 2500d is different, a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, when creating a new game board 5, even if the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 is modified, the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d of the same shape can be reused. However, even if there is a design change in the first center role 2500a other than the first adjustment wall portion 2504a, a design change in the second center role 2500b other than the second adjustment wall portion 2504b, or a design change in the fourth center role 2500d other than the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d, the center role 2500 can be reused. Therefore, there is no need to create a new center role that corresponds to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, which makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience.

Figure 177 is a front view showing another aspect of the center feature 2500. In this embodiment, the embodiment of the center role 2500 divided into four parts, the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d, has been described. However, the center role 2500 may be divided into two, three, five or more parts, as shown in FIG. 177. As in the embodiment of the center role 2500 divided into four parts, the center role 2500 can be reused when creating a new game board 5. Therefore, there is no need to create a new center role corresponding to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110. This makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience. In addition, by positioning each of the center roles 2500a to 2500d to correspond to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow changes, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the embodiment of the center role 2500 having a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 along the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 has been described, but the center role 2500 may be, for example, a fifth center role that has a ball inlet through which game balls can enter formed in a part of the first peripheral wall portion 2501a of the first center role 2500a, a ball outlet through which game balls can exit formed in a part of the fourth peripheral wall portion 2501d of the fourth center role 2500d, and connects these ball inlet and outlet, forming a route for game balls that enter through the ball inlet and exit through the outlet, and by forming an adjustment wall portion at the end of the peripheral wall portion of the fifth center role, the adjustment wall portion of the fifth center role and other center roles are overlapped according to the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Thus, the fifth center role and the other center role 2500 are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that the adjustment part of the fifth center role and the other center role are separated within a predetermined range. Therefore, when creating a new game board 5, even if the shape of the opening of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 changes, the center role 2500 can be reused. Therefore, there is no need to create a new center role that corresponds to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, which makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience. In addition, by positioning the fifth center role and the other center role to correspond to the new panel board 1110, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow changes, which can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the end portions including the adjustment wall portions of the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are described as overlapping in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. However, the end portions including the adjustment wall portions of the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d may be overlapped in the front-to-back direction by reducing the width in the front-to-back direction. Depending on the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, the end portions of the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d may be overlapped in the front-to-back direction. Since the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned on the panel board 1110 so that they are spaced apart in the front-to-back direction within the range, when creating a new game board 5, even if the shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 changes, the center role 2500 can be reused. Therefore, there is no need to create a new center role corresponding to the shape of the opening 1112 formed in the new panel board 1110, which makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience. In addition, since the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned to correspond to the new panel board 1110, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the embodiment has been described in which the center gimmick 2500 having the peripheral wall portion 2501 as an inflow restriction portion is divided into multiple portions. However, for example, the above-mentioned adjustment wall portion may be provided at the ends of the peripheral wall portions of the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide portion 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005, etc., which constitute an outflow restriction portion that restricts game balls from flowing out to the outside of the game area 5a at the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and depending on the design change of the panel board 1110, the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide portion 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005, etc. may be overlapped, or part of the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide portion 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005, etc. may be adjusted so that they are overlapped, or so that the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide portion 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005, etc. are separated within a predetermined range. Since the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide section 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005 are positioned on the panel board 1110, when creating a new game board 5, even if the design of the panel board 1110 is changed, the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide section 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005 can be reused. Therefore, there is no need to create a new outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide section 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005 to correspond to the new panel board 1110, which makes it easier to design the pachinko machine 1 and improves convenience. In addition, since the outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002, out guide section 1003, part of the lower right rail 1004, and right rail 1005 are positioned to correspond to the new panel board 1110, the game area 5a into which the game balls flow down changes, which can also suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[Center accessory installation process]
For example, the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned relative to the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game board 5, and then the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are attached to the panel plate 1110 in any order. Also, the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are all attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110. In addition, if at least one set of the first center role piece 2500a, the second center role piece 2500b, the third center role piece 2500c, and the fourth center role piece 2500d has an overlap in the front-to-rear direction, they are attached to the panel board 1110 in order from the center role piece located further rearward.

The process of attaching the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d to the panel board 1110 in this order will be described below. First, one end of the first linear member 2505a is connected to the connecting portion of the game board 5, and the other end of this first linear member 2505a is connected to the connecting portion of the first center role 2500a. As a result, even if the first center role 2500a falls from the hand of the worker before being positioned relative to the game board 1110 and attached to the game board 1110, the first center role 2500a is prevented from falling to the floor surface, etc.

Then, the positioning pin formed on the back surface of the first flange portion 2502a is fitted into the mounting hole formed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the first center role 2500a is positioned to correspond to the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, the first flange portion 2502a of the first center role 2500a is fixed to the panel plate 1110 via a fixing member such as a screw, so that the first center role 2500a is attached to the panel plate 1110. In addition, the first linear member 2505a may be disconnected from the connecting portion of the first center role 2500a after the first center role 2500a is attached to the panel plate 1110, and after this connection is released, the connection with the connecting portion of the game board 5 may also be released and removed from the game board 5. In addition, in an embodiment in which the first center feature 2500a does not have the first linear member 2505a, when positioning the first center feature 2500a relative to the panel board 1110, for example, the operator's hand may come into contact with the first linear member 2505a, and the first center feature 2500a may become misaligned relative to the panel board 1110. This can reduce the occurrence of such problems, improve the work efficiency when installing the first center feature 2500, and improve the convenience of the pachinko machine 1 when replacing the game board 5 with a new game board.

Next, one end of the second linear member 2505b is connected to the connecting portion of the game board 5, and the other end of the second linear member 2505b is connected to the connecting portion of the second center device 2500b. As a result, even if the second center device 2500b falls from the operator's hand before the second center device 2500b is positioned relative to the game board 1110 and attached to the game board 1110, the second center device 2500b is prevented from falling to the floor or the like.

Then, the positioning pin formed on the back surface of the second flange portion 2502a is fitted into the mounting hole formed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the second center role 2500b is positioned so as to correspond to the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, the second flange portion 2502b of the second center role 2500b is fixed to the panel plate 1110 via a fixing member such as a screw, so that the second center role 2500b is attached to the panel plate 1110. Note that the second linear member 2505b may be disconnected from the connecting portion of the second center role 2500b after the second center role 2500b is attached to the panel plate 1110, and after this connection is released, the connection with the connecting portion of the game board 5 may also be released and removed from the game board 5.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b are positioned adjacent to each other with respect to the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, the first adjustment wall portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the second peripheral wall portion 2501b of the second center role 2500b can be attached to the panel board 1110 in a manner in which they are separated within a predetermined distance from the manner in which they overlap, and the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the first center role 2500a and the second center role 2500b, and thus the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

Next, one end of the third linear member 2505c is connected to the connecting portion of the game board 5, and the other end of this third linear member 2505c is connected to the connecting portion of the third center device 2500c. As a result, even if the third center device 2500c falls from the hand of the operator before the third center device 2500c is positioned relative to the game board 1110 and attached to the game board 1110, the third center device 2500c is prevented from falling to the floor or the like.

Then, the positioning pin formed on the back surface of the third flange portion 2502c is fitted into the mounting hole formed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the third center role 2500c is positioned so as to correspond to the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, the third flange portion 2502c of the third center role 2500c is fixed to the panel plate 1110 via a fixing member such as a screw, so that the third center role 2500c is attached to the panel plate 1110. In addition, the third linear member 2505c may be disconnected from the connecting portion of the third center role 2500c after the third center role 2500c is attached to the panel plate 1110, and after this connection is released, the connection with the connecting portion of the game board 5 may also be released and removed from the game board 5.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c are positioned with respect to the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 so that they are adjacent to each other, the first adjustment wall portion 2504a of the first center role 2500a and the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c can be attached to the panel board 1110 in a manner in which they are separated within a predetermined distance from the manner in which they overlap, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the first center role 2500a and the third center role 2500c, and thus it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the play area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

Next, one end of the fourth linear member 2505d is connected to the connecting portion of the game board 5, and the other end of this fourth linear member 2505d is connected to the connecting portion of the fourth center device 2500d. As a result, even if the fourth center device 2500d falls from the operator's hand before the fourth center device 2500d is positioned relative to the game board 1110 and attached to the game board 1110, the fourth center device 2500d is prevented from falling to the floor or the like.

Then, the positioning pin formed on the back surface of the fourth flange portion 2502a is fitted into the mounting hole formed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the fourth center role 2500d is positioned so as to correspond to the upper edge of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Then, the fourth flange portion 2502d of the fourth center role 2500d is fixed to the panel plate 1110 via a fixing member such as a screw, so that the fourth center role 2500d is attached to the panel plate 1110. Note that the fourth linear member 2505d may be disconnected from the connecting portion of the fourth center role 2500d after the fourth center role 2500d is attached to the panel plate 1110, and after this connection is released, the connection with the connecting portion of the game board 5 may also be released and removed from the game board 5.

In the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d are positioned with respect to the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 so that they are adjacent to each other, the third adjustment wall portion 2504c of the third center role 2500c and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504c of the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel board 1110 in a manner in which they are separated within a predetermined range from a manner in which they overlap, and the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the third center role 2500c and the fourth center role 2500d, and thus the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, in the center role 2500 of this embodiment, when the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500c are positioned with respect to the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 so that they are adjacent to each other, the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d can be attached to the panel board 1110 in a manner in which the second peripheral wall portion 2501b of the second center role 2500b and the fourth adjustment wall portion 2504d of the fourth center role 2500d are separated within a predetermined range from an overlapping state, and the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 through the second center role 2500b and the fourth center role 2500d, and thus the game ball flowing down the play area 5a can be restricted from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d are attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front side of the panel plate 1110. However, each of the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d may have a rear fixing member that fixes the first center role 2500a, the second center role 2500b, the third center role 2500c, and the fourth center role 2500d to the panel plate 1110 by sandwiching the panel plate 1110 between the first flange portion 2502a, the second flange portion 2502b, the third flange portion 2502c, or the fourth flange portion 2502d.

In this embodiment, as an example of a modification of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is divided into multiple parts, and the multiple center roles work together to prevent game balls from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. However, the configuration of the center role 2500 divided into multiple parts can be implemented in combination with each of the configurations of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, and the pachinko machine 1 in that case can also achieve the action and effect of the center role 2500 divided into multiple parts described above.

[Example 1 of modified game board]
In the above embodiment, the basic configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but conventionally, the edge of the game board 5 is formed in a sharp corner shape, and when the game board 5 is transported, the hand of the worker holding the game board 5 comes into contact with the edge of the game board 5, which may cause discomfort to the worker (the hand may be hurt by contact with the sharp corner edge, or the hand may be injured by contact with the sharp corner edge). In addition, when a worker who does not know the grip position of the game board 5 transports the game board 5, the hand of the worker may come into contact with the obstacle nails N and the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, which may cause the obstacle nails N to deform (bend to the extent that the game is hindered), cause rust on the obstacle nails N (sebum adheres to the obstacle nails N, making them prone to rust, etc.), or cause damage to the center role 2500. Below, a game board modification mode 1 in which the game board 5 is modified to solve these problems will be described.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the game board 5, so below we will explain the configuration of the game board 5 in detail and will omit explanations of the other components of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Figures 137 to 147, for example, the game board 5 includes a game area 5a through which game balls can flow, a front component 1000 that is roughly rectangular in front view and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

In the game area 5a, there are a number of obstacle nails N planted on the front of the game panel 1100, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 of the front unit 2000, and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 that prevents the game balls flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

178 is a schematic perspective view of the game board 5 as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 179 is a schematic perspective view of the game board 5 as viewed from the right rear. In FIG. 178, the rear unit 3000 in the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is omitted from the view point of making it easier to understand the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 178 or FIG. 179, when the game area 5a is formed and the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 has a front surface 5x facing the player, a rear surface 5z facing the opposite side to the player, a side surface 5y extending between the front surface 5x and the rear surface 5z, an edge portion 5b continuing from the front surface 5x through the side surface 5y to the rear surface 5z, and a specific portion 5c formed on at least a part of the edge portion 5b.

The edge 5b of the game board 5 includes, for example, an outer edge 5b1 formed at the outer end of the game board 5 and an inner edge 5b2 formed at the inner end of the game board 5. The outer edge 5b1 is formed by the front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 (more specifically, the front surface of the front component 1000, the side surface of the game panel 1100, the side surface of the back unit 3000, and the back surface of the back unit 3000), and the inner edge 5b2 is formed by the front unit 2000 (for example, the center gimmick 2500, etc.) and the game panel 1100 (more specifically, the front surface of the front unit 2000, the side surface of the front unit 2000, the back surface of the front unit 2000, the side surface of the game panel 1100, and the back surface of the game panel 1100).

[Configuration 1 of the specific unit]
The specific portion 5c is formed on the edge 5b of the game board 5, and can guide the hand of a worker who is about to grasp the game board 5 so that the hand of the worker comes into contact with the specific portion 5c when the worker carries the game board 5. In detail, the specific portion 5c has a visual guidance effect that suggests to the worker the gripping position of the game board 5 by making the edge 5b of the game board 5 resemble a human handprint when the edge 5b of the game board 5 is visually observed, and a tactile guidance effect that suggests to the worker the gripping position of the game board 5 by the difference in tactile sensation of whether or not the hand of the worker who holds the game board 5 feels uncomfortable, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

Specifically, the specific portion 5c has a surface gentle portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, a back recessed portion 5c3, and an outer sharp portion 5c4 formed at a predetermined position on the outer edge portion 5b1, and an inner sharp portion 5c5 and a back gentle portion 5c6 formed at a predetermined position on the inner edge portion 5b2, and the visual and tactile guidance effects provided by these components contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

Figure 180(a) is an end view showing the A-A' end face of Figure 178, and Figure 180(b) is an end view showing another aspect of the game board 5 shown in Figure 180(a). As shown in Figures 178 to 180(a), the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 is formed in an inclined surface shape such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside at the outer edge portion 5b1 of the game board 5, and linearly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y. In this way, the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 that smoothly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y in a chamfered shape can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y from a part of the outer edge portion 5b1. That is, by forming the surface gentle portion 5c1 between the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y, instead of the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y, two obtuse corners are formed by the intersection of the front surface 5x and the surface gentle portion 5c1 and the side surface 5y and the surface gentle portion 5c1.

Here, a worker attempting to grasp the game board 5 will tend to avoid contact with the sharp corners formed by the intersection of the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y, for example, so as to avoid causing discomfort such as pain in the hand grasping the game board 5. The gentle surface portion 5c1 can be seen by the worker attempting to grasp the game board 5, thereby visually guiding the worker so that his or her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that his or her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game board 5. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the discomfort felt by the operator when the operator's hands come into contact with the outer edge 5b1 can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be suggested to an operator who does not know where to grip the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, causing deformation of the obstacle nails N, rusting of the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

In this embodiment, the gentle surface portion 5c1 is formed in a pair on the left and right outer edge portions 5b1 of the outer edge portion 5b1 of the game board 5, and faces each other at the top of the game board 5. When an operator grasps the game board 5, such gentle surface portion 5c1 can guide both hands of the operator to the gentle surface portion 5c1 of the left and right outer edge portions 5b1, making it safer to transport the game board 5. The left gentle surface portion 5c1 formed on the left side of the game panel 1100 has a greater vertical length than the right gentle surface portion 5c1 formed on the right side of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, the surface smooth portion 5c1 is not limited to being formed on the left and right outer edge portions 5b1, but may be formed, for example, on either the left or right outer edge portion 5b1, either the top or bottom outer edge portion 5b1, or on the top and bottom outer edge portions 5b1, and even if multiple surface smooth portions 5c1 are formed, they do not have to be opposed to each other (for example, formed on adjacent sides).

The surface smooth portion 5c1 may be formed only on the component 1000 so as to smoothly connect the front surface and the side surface of the component 1000, or may be formed so as to be continuous with the component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 so as to smoothly connect the front surface of the component 1000 and the side surface of the gaming panel 1100. The surface smooth portion 5c1 may be formed on the component 1000 so as to smoothly connect the front surface of the component 1000 and the front end of the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100 when the component 1000 is assembled to the gaming panel 1100.

When the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, the smooth surface portion 5c1 is located behind the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3, so it is difficult for the player to see through the door window 101a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player seeing the smooth surface portion 5c1 that is unrelated to the game. Note that the smooth surface portion 5c1 may be configured such that a part of it protrudes from the rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 and can be seen by the player through the door window 101a when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, and even if only a part of the smooth surface portion 5c1 is seen, the player will not be able to recognize that the smooth surface portion 5c1 suggests a handprint, in other words, that it is unrelated to the game and is related to the transportation of the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In terms of, for example, allowing the operator's hand to come into contact with the surface gentle portion 5c1 at the outer edge 5b1 without coming into contact with a sharp corner, and preventing the surface gentle portion 5c1 from protruding from the door frame 3 and being visible to the player after the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the width in the left-right direction is preferably, for example, 1.0 cm to 5.0 cm, and the width in the up-down direction is preferably, for example, 3.0 cm or more, when viewed from the front, from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the surface gentle portion 5c1 protruding from the door frame 3 and being visible to the player. In addition, the depth in the front-rear direction of the surface gentle portion 5c1 is preferably, for example, 0.5 cm or more at its widest point, so that the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y can be effectively removed from a part of the outer edge 5b1. The vertical width of the surface roughness portion 5c1 may be, for example, the entire area of the outer edge portion 5b1 on which the surface roughness portion 5c1 is formed, that is, the entire vertical width of the outer edge portion 5b1.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the surface gentle part 5c1 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y has been described, but the surface gentle part 5c1 may be formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y, as shown in FIG. 180(b). The surface gentle part 5c1 formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y has the same effect as the surface gentle part 5c1 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the front surface 5x and the side surface 5y described above. In addition, since the surface gentle part 5c1 formed by a curved surface does not have corners, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing discomfort caused to the worker whose hand comes into contact with the outer edge part 5b1, and the transportation of the game board 5 can be performed even more safely.

The surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the game board 5 even safer to transport.

The surface recess 5c2 is formed in a concave shape in the front component 1000 that forms the outer edge 5b1 on the front surface 5x side of the game board 5. The surface recess 5c2 is modeled after the thumb of a human hand, so that when the game board 5 is transported, the thumb of the worker is placed on the surface recess 5c2 due to a visual guidance effect. Therefore, when the game board 5 is transported by the worker, the grip position of the game board 5 can be suggested to the worker who does not know the grip position of the game board 5, and the risk of the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, causing deformation of the obstacle nails N, rusting of the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center role 2500 can be suppressed, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

In this embodiment, the surface recess 5c2 is formed adjacent to the surface gentle portion 5c1. Such surface recess 5c2, together with the surface gentle portion 5c1, forms a schematic hand shape including the thumb and part of the palm of a human hand on the front surface 5x of the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the edge 5b of the game board 5 is visually observed, suggesting a gripping position reminiscent of a human hand shape on the outer edge 5b1 of the game board 5, thereby exerting a visual guidance effect, guiding the palm of the operator's hand to the surface gentle portion 5c1 and guiding the operator's thumb to the surface recess 5c2. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the discomfort caused to the operator when the outer edge 5b1 comes into contact with the operator's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to an operator who does not know where to grip the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform, rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, etc., and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

The surface recess 5c2 is formed by recessing the component 1000 so that, when viewed from the front, it has, for example, a polygonal shape such as a triangle or a rectangle, an ellipse, or a vertically elongated shape resembling a human thumb. The surface recess 5c2 of this shape, together with the gentle surface portion 5c1 that continues in the vertical direction, can show the worker, for example, a hand shape on the front surface 5x of the game board 5 as if it were a gripping position when gripping the game board 5, and can suggest the gripping position of the game board 5 to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, the surface recesses 5c2 are formed in pairs on the left and right outer edges 5b1 of the game board 5, and face each other at the top of the game board 5. When an operator grasps the game board 5, the surface recesses 5c2 can guide both hands of the operator to the surface recesses 5c2 of the left and right outer edges 5b1, making it safer to transport the game board 5. Note that the surface recesses 5c2 are not limited to being formed on the left and right outer edges 5b1, and may be formed on, for example, either the left or right outer edge 5b1, either the top or bottom outer edge 5b1, or the top and bottom outer edges 5b1, and even if multiple surface recesses 5c2 are formed, they do not have to face each other (for example, formed on adjacent sides).

When the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, the surface recessed portion 5c2 is located behind the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3, so it is difficult for the player to see through the door window 101a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player seeing the surface recessed portion 5c2 that is unrelated to the game. Note that the surface recessed portion 5c2 may be configured such that a part of it protrudes from the rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 and can be seen by the player through the door window 101a when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, and even if only a part of the surface recessed portion 5c2 is seen, the player will not recognize that the surface recessed portion 5c2 suggests a handprint, in other words, that it is unrelated to the game and related to the transportation of the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

From the viewpoint of, for example, exerting a visual guiding effect so that the worker's hand is placed on the surface recessed portion 5c2, and from the viewpoint of preventing the surface recessed portion 5c2 from protruding from the door frame 3 and being visible to the player after the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the width in the left-right direction is preferably, for example, 1.0 cm to 5.0 cm, and the width in the up-down direction is preferably, for example, 2.0 cm to 10.0 cm, when viewed from the front. In addition, the depth in the front-rear direction of the surface recessed portion 5c2 is preferably, for example, 1.0 cm or less, so that, after the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 can be visually seen by the player, preventing a decrease in the interest in the game. The edges of the surface recess 5c2 may be chamfered with a straight plane or an arc-shaped curved surface, which can reduce the discomfort caused by the hand of a worker who places his or her hand on the surface recess 5c2 coming into contact with the corners formed on the edges of the surface recess 5c2.

The surface of the opening of the surface recess 5c2 may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the surface recess 5c2 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the game board 5 even safer to transport.

The back recess 5c3 is formed in a flange portion extending outward from the front end of the back unit 3000, which is formed in a box shape with a front opening. The back recess 5c3 is formed in the flange portion of the back unit 3000, for example, in a circular concave shape when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, four back recesses 5c3 arranged in parallel in the vertical direction are formed in the flange portion of the back unit 3000. Such back recesses 5c3 form a recess showing a schematic hand shape including four fingers from the index finger to the little finger of a human hand on the outer edge portion 5b1 of the game board 5, and when the game board 5 is transported, the index finger to the little finger of the operator are placed on the corresponding back recess 5c3. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the discomfort caused to the operator when the outer edge 5b1 comes into contact with the operator's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to an operator who does not know where to grip the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform, rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, etc., and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

In this embodiment, the back recess 5c3 is formed in the flange of the back unit 3000 so as to correspond to the front gentle surface portion 5c1 or the front gentle surface portion 5c2, and so as to correspond to the four fingers of the index finger to the little finger of the operator who grips the game board 5. Such a back recess 5c3, together with the front gentle surface portion 5c1 and the front gentle surface portion 5c2, forms a recess in the outer edge portion 5b1 of the game board 5 that shows a schematic hand shape including a part of a human palm and five fingers from the thumb to the little finger, and when the game board 5 is transported, the palm of the operator's hand is guided to the front gentle surface portion 5c1 and the thumb of the operator is guided to the front gentle surface portion 5c2, and, for example, the index finger to the little finger of the operator are placed on the corresponding back recess 5c3. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the discomfort caused to the operator when the outer edge 5b1 comes into contact with the operator's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to an operator who does not know where to grip the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform, rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, etc., and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

In this embodiment, the specific portion 5c has four back recesses 5c3 arranged in a vertical direction on the flange portion of the rear unit 3000, and is described as guiding the index finger through the little finger of the operator to the back recesses 5c3. However, the specific portion 5c may have at least one back recess 5c3, and can guide at least one of the index finger through the little finger of the operator holding the game board 5 to the flange portion side of the rear unit 3000.

The shape of the back recess 5c3 in front view is not limited to a circular shape, and may be any shape that can guide the worker's fingers to the back recess 5c3, such as a triangular, rectangular, or polygonal shape, and can achieve the same effect as the circular shape. The back recess 5c3 may be elongated in the vertical direction so that two, three, or four of the worker's fingers can be placed on one back recess 5c3. The back recess 5c3 may be formed so that the worker's fingers can be engaged with the outer end of the panel plate 1110 by recessing the back surface of the panel plate 1110 while leaving the outer end (peripheral portion) of the panel plate 1110 (for example, by recessing all or part of the inner side while leaving about 1 cm of the peripheral portion of the panel plate 1110).

The edge of the back recess 5c3 may be chamfered with a straight plane or an arc-shaped curved surface, which can reduce the discomfort caused by the fingers of the worker who places them on the back recess 5c3 coming into contact with the corners formed on the edge of the back recess 5c3.

In this embodiment, the back recesses 5c3 are formed in pairs on the left and right outer edges 5b1 of the game board 5, and face each other at the top of the game board 5. When an operator holds the game board 5, the back recesses 5c3 can guide both hands of the operator to the back recesses 5c3 on the left and right outer edges 5b1, making it safer to transport the game board 5. Note that the back recesses 5c3 are not limited to being formed on the left and right outer edges 5b1, and may be formed on, for example, either the left or right outer edge 5b1, either the top or bottom outer edge 5b1, or the top and bottom outer edges 5b1, and even if multiple back recesses 5c3 are formed, they do not have to face each other (for example, formed on adjacent sides).

The outer diameter of the back recess 5c3 is preferably, for example, 2.0 cm or less, and the back recess 5c3 can be formed in the flange of the back unit 3000 without excessively increasing the width of the flange of the back unit 3000 in the left-right direction. The back recess 5c3 is not used in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, and has an outer diameter larger than the thickness of the screws, etc. used in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1. The depth of the back recess 5c3 in the front-rear direction is preferably, for example, 1.0 mm or more, as shown in FIG. 180(a), and the index finger to little finger of the worker can be guided to the back recess 5c3. The back recess 5c3 may have a depth that penetrates the flange of the back unit 3000 and reaches the game panel 1100, as shown in FIG. 180(b), and the worker can engage the index finger to little finger in the back recess 5c3, allowing the worker to more reliably hold the game board 5.

The surface of the opening of the back recess 5c3 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back recess 5c3 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the game board 5 even safer to transport.

The outer sharp portion 5c4 is formed on the inner edge of the component 1000 that forms the outer periphery of the play area 5a where the game balls can flow down. In detail, the outer sharp portion 5c4 is formed, for example, at the inner end and front end of the main body that supports the metal rail arranged in an arc shape in the outer rail 1001, and is formed in a sharp corner shape with an angle between the surface and the side of the outer rail 1001 being, for example, 90 degrees or less. Such an outer sharp portion 5c4 may be formed on the entire inner end of the component 1000 or on a part of the inner end of the component 1000, but the outer sharp portion 5c4 in this embodiment is formed on a part of the inner end of the component 1000, specifically, in a front view of the game board 5, at a position that is continuous with the inside of the surface gentle surface portion 5c1.

When a worker carrying the game board 5 tries to grip the game board 5 from the outside of the game board 5, that is, when the worker tries to grip the outer edge 5b1 of the game board 5, the outer sharp portion 5c4 comes into contact with the worker's hand before the worker's hand comes into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, thereby informing the worker that the hand is in contact with the sharp portion of the game board 5 and preventing the worker from advancing his/her hand into the game area 5a beyond the outer sharp portion 5c4. In addition, since the outer sharp portion 5c4 in this embodiment is formed at a position connected to the inside of the gentle surface portion 5c1, it is also possible to prevent the hand of the worker guided by the gentle surface portion 5c1 from advancing into the game area 5a beyond the outer sharp portion 5c4. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N and the center role 2500 in the play area 5a can be reduced, and the grip position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to a worker who does not know the grip position of the game board 5. It is also possible to reduce the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N and the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, or the center role 2500 being damaged, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

As shown in FIG. 180(a), the angle of the outer sharp portion 5c4 formed by the front surface 5x of the game board 5 (the front surface of the previous component 1000) and the side surface of the previous component 1000 supporting the rail may be a right angle, and the outer sharp portion 5c4 comes into contact with the hand of the worker before the hand of the worker comes into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, and the worker can be notified that the hand is in contact with the sharp portion of the game board 5. This can reduce the discomfort caused to the worker by the hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, and can more clearly indicate the grip position of the game board 5 to a worker who does not know the grip position of the game board 5. This can also reduce the risk of the obstacle nail N being deformed, rusting of the obstacle nail N, or damage to the center role 2500, etc., due to the hand of the worker coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), a recess is formed on the front surface 5x of the game board 5 (front surface of the previous component 1000), and the angle of the outer sharp portion 5c4 formed by the front surface 5x of the game board 5 (front surface of the previous component 1000) and the side surface of the previous component 1000 supporting the rail may be an acute angle, and the hand of the worker comes into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a before the hand of the worker comes into contact with the sharp portion of the game board 5, thereby notifying the worker that the hand is in contact with the sharp portion of the game board 5. This reduces the discomfort felt by the worker when their hands come into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, and also more clearly indicates the gripping position of the game board 5 to a worker who is unaware of the gripping position of the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, or the center gimmick 2500 being damaged, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

The inner sharp portion 5c5 is part of the edge of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1110 within the game area 5a where game balls can flow down, and is formed on part of the inner edge 5b2 on the front surface 5x side of the game board 5. In detail, the inner sharp portion 5c5 is formed on part of the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 provided along the edge of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, and is formed into a sharp corner with an angle of 90 degrees or less between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the side surface continuing to the front end surface. Such an inner sharp portion 5c5 may be formed on the entire front end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 or on a part of the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, but in this embodiment, the inner sharp portion 5c5 is formed on a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, and specifically, is formed at a position that is continuous with the inside of the gentle surface portion 5c1 when viewed from the front of the game board 5.

When a worker transporting the game board 5 inserts his/her hand into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1110 to grasp the game board 5, i.e., when the worker attempts to grasp the inner edge 5b2 of the game board 5, the inner sharp portion 5c5 comes into contact with the worker's hand before the worker's hand comes into contact with the obstructing nails N or the center device 2500 in the game area 5a, thereby notifying the worker that his/her hand is in contact with a sharp portion of the game board 5 and preventing the worker from advancing his/her hand into the game area 5a beyond the inner sharp portion 5c5. Therefore, with the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N etc. in the play area 5a can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to a worker who is unfamiliar with the gripping position of the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N etc. in the play area 5a, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

As shown in FIG. 180(a), the front end of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500, which is the inner sharp portion 5c5, may be a right-angled corner, and the hand of the operator may come into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a before the operator's hand comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and the operator may be notified that the hand is in contact with the sharp portion of the play board 5. This reduces the discomfort caused to the operator by the hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and more clearly indicates the gripping position of the play board 5 to an operator who does not know the gripping position of the play board 5. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting due to the operator's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), the front end of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500, which is the inner sharp portion 5c5, may be an acute-angled corner, which comes into contact with the worker's hand before the worker's hand comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and notifies the worker that his/her hand is in contact with the sharp portion of the play board 5. This reduces the discomfort caused to the worker when the hand comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and more clearly indicates the gripping position of the play board 5 to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the play board 5. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting due to the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N, etc. in the play area 5a, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

As shown in FIG. 180(a), the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 is formed in an inclined surface shape that smoothly connects the side and backside of the stage cover 2515 of the center role 2500, which is arranged to cover the right-angled corner where the side and backside of the game panel 1110 are connected, at the inner edge portion 5b2 on the rear surface 5z side of the game board 5. In this way, the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 that smoothly connects the side and backside of the center role 2500 can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side and backside of the center role 2500 from a part of the inner edge portion 5b2. In other words, by forming the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 between the side and backside of the center role 2500, two obtuse corners are formed where the side of the center role 2500 and the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 of the center role 2500 and the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 of the center role 2500 intersect, instead of the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side and backside of the center role 2500.

As described above, a worker attempting to grasp the game board 5 tends to avoid contact with the sharp corners formed where the side and back surfaces of the center device 2500 intersect, for example, so as to avoid causing pain to the hand grasping the game board 5. The back surface gentle surface portion 5c6, at the inner edge portion 5b2, is visible to the worker attempting to grasp the game board 5, thereby visually guiding the worker so that his/her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game board 5, it can also tactilely guide the worker so that his/her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner. Therefore, with the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by a worker, the discomfort felt by the worker when the inner edge 5b2 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be suggested to a worker who is unfamiliar with the gripping position of the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N in the play area 5a, causing the obstacle nails N to deform or rust, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

The backside gentle surface portion 5c6 may be formed on the entire rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 or on a part of the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, but in this embodiment, the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 is formed in opposing positions on the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, and specifically, when viewed from the front of the game board 5, is formed in a pair at a position connected to the inside of the front side gentle surface portion 5c1.

From the viewpoint of enabling the operator's hand to come into contact with the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 at the inner edge portion 5b2 without coming into contact with a sharp corner, and from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 being visible to the player after the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the width in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is, for example, 0.5 cm to 2.0 cm, and the width formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is, for example, 3.0 cm or more. Note that the width of the backside gentle surface portion 5c6 formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501 may be, for example, formed over the entire peripheral wall portion 2501 or in multiple places along the peripheral wall portion 2501.

In this embodiment, the back surface portion 5c6 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the center role 2500 has been described. However, the back surface portion 5c6 may be formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. 180(b). The back surface portion 5c6 formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the center role 2500 has the same effect as the back surface portion 5c6 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the center role 2500 described above. In addition, since the back surface portion 5c6 formed by the curved surface does not have corners, the effect of suppressing the discomfort caused to the worker whose hand comes into contact with the inner edge portion 5b2 can be enhanced, and the transportation of the game board 5 can be performed even more safely.

In this embodiment, the inner sharp portion 5c5 and the back surface gentle portion 5c6 are formed on the center role 2500. However, the inner sharp portion 5c5 and the back surface gentle portion 5c6 may be formed on a removable cover body provided on the center role 2500 that covers at least a part of the inner edge portion 5b2 of the game board 5, and the inner sharp portion 5c5 and the back surface gentle portion 5c6 may be formed on the cover body, and the same action and effect as the inner sharp portion 5c5 and the back surface gentle portion 5c6 described above can be achieved. The cover body is detachably attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the rear with screws or the like, and may be removed when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, or may remain attached if there is no problem with the game. Since the cover body is attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the rear with screws or the like, even if the screws or the like are loosened, it does not affect the game balls flowing down in the game area 5a, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the surface gentle portion 5c1 and the surface recessed portion 5c2 are formed on the surface of the component 1000. However, if the game board 5 does not have the component 1000, the surface gentle portion 5c1 and the surface recessed portion 5c2 may be formed on the surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, if the game panel 1100 does not have the panel holder 1120, the surface gentle portion 5c1 and the surface recessed portion 5c2 may be formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The same action and effect as the surface gentle portion 5c1 and the surface recessed portion 5c2 described above can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific portion 5c has been described as having a surface gentle portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, a back surface recessed portion 5c3, an outer sharp portion 5c4, an inner sharp portion 5c5, and a back surface gentle portion 5c6. However, the specific portion 5c may have at least one of the surface gentle portion 5c1, the surface recessed portion 5c2, the back surface recessed portion 5c3, an outer sharp portion 5c4, an inner sharp portion 5c5, and a back surface gentle portion 5c6, and can achieve the above-mentioned functions and effects corresponding to each configuration of the specific portion 5c.

In the present embodiment, the specific portion 5c has a surface gentle portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, a back recessed portion 5c3, an outer sharp portion 5c4, an inner sharp portion 5c5, and a back gentle portion 5c6. The surface gentle portion 5c1, the surface recessed portion 5c2, the back recessed portion 5c3, the outer sharp portion 5c4, the inner sharp portion 5c5, and the back gentle portion 5c6 are formed in a linear manner close to each other between the inside and outside of the game board 5 so as to form a shape that resembles a human hand. However, the surface gentle portion 5c1, the surface recessed portion 5c2, the back recessed portion 5c3, the outer sharp portion 5c4, the inner sharp portion 5c5, and the back gentle portion 5c6 may be formed at a predetermined position on the game board 5 with a distance between them. When the game board 5 is transported, the visual guiding effect is reduced, but the tactile guiding effect allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific portion 5c may have a surface opening in addition to the surface recessed portion 5c2 or instead of the surface recessed portion 5c2. The surface opening is an opening formed in the previous component 1000 that forms the outer edge portion 5b1 on the front 5x side of the game board 5. The surface opening is a schematic representation of the thumb of a human hand, so that when the game board 5 is transported, the thumb of the operator is engaged with the surface opening by a visual induction effect. Therefore, when the game board 5 is transported by the operator, the gripping position of the game board 5 can be suggested to the operator who does not know the gripping position of the game board 5, and the risk of the operator's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, causing the obstacle nail N to deform, rust on the obstacle nail N, or damage to the center role 2500, etc., can be suppressed, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. The surface opening may also be configured to penetrate the component 1000 and the game panel 1100, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

The surface opening is formed adjacent to the surface smooth portion 5c1. Such a surface opening, together with the surface smooth portion 5c1, forms a schematic hand shape including the thumb and part of the palm of a human hand on the front surface 5x of the game board 5. When the game board 5 is transported, the edge portion 5b of the game board 5 is visually observed, suggesting a gripping position reminiscent of a human hand shape on the outer edge portion 5b1 of the game board 5, thereby exerting a visual guidance effect, guiding the palm of the operator's hand to the surface smooth portion 5c1 and allowing the operator's thumb to engage with the surface opening. Therefore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the discomfort caused to the operator when the outer edge 5b1 comes into contact with the operator's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game board 5 can be more clearly indicated to an operator who does not know where to grip the game board 5. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform, rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, etc., and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

When viewed from the front, the surface opening has, for example, a polygonal shape such as a triangle or a rectangle, an ellipse, or an opening that is elongated in the vertical direction imitating a human thumb. A surface opening of such a shape, together with the gentle surface portion 5c1 that continues in the vertical direction, can show the operator, for example, a hand shape on the front surface 5x of the game board 5 as if it were a gripping position when gripping the game board 5, and can suggest the gripping position of the game board 5 to an operator who does not know the gripping position of the game board 5.

The above surface openings are formed in pairs on the left and right outer edges 5b1 of the game board 5, and face each other at the top of the game board 5. Such surface openings allow the worker to guide both hands to the surface openings of the left and right outer edges 5b1 when gripping the game board 5, making it safer to transport the game board 5. The surface openings are not limited to being formed on the left and right outer edges 5b1, but may be formed on either the left or right outer edge 5b1, either the top or bottom outer edge 5b1, or the top and bottom outer edges 5b1, and even if multiple surface openings are formed, they do not have to face each other (for example, they may be formed on adjacent sides).

When the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, the above-mentioned surface opening is located behind the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3, so it is difficult for the player to see through the door window 101a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player seeing the surface opening that is unrelated to the game. Note that the surface opening may be configured such that when the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, a part of it protrudes from the rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 and can be seen by the player through the door window 101a, and even if only a part of the surface opening is seen, the player will not recognize that the surface opening suggests a handprint, in other words, that it is unrelated to the game and related to the transportation of the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

From the viewpoint of, for example, exerting a visual guiding effect to place the worker's hand on the surface opening, and from the viewpoint of preventing the surface opening from protruding from the door frame 3 and being visible to the player after the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, decreasing the interest in the game, it is desirable that the width in the left-right direction is, for example, 1.0 cm to 5.0 cm, and the width in the up-down direction is, for example, 2.0 cm to 10.0 cm, when viewed from the front. Note that the edge of the surface opening may be chamfered with a straight plane or a circular arc-shaped curved surface, and the discomfort caused by the hand of the worker placed on the surface opening coming into contact with the corner formed on the edge of the surface opening can be suppressed.

The surface of the surface opening may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the surface opening acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the transport of the game board 5 even safer.

[Modification example 1 of the game board]
In the above embodiment, the basic configuration of the game panel 1100 of the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but conventionally, the edge of the game panel 1100 is formed in a sharp corner shape, and when the game panel 1100 is transported, the hand of the worker holding the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the edge of the game panel 1100, which may cause discomfort to the worker (pain in the hand due to contact with the sharp corner edge, anxiety that the hand may be injured, etc.). In addition, when a worker who does not know the grip position of the game panel 1100 transports the game panel 1100, the hand of the worker may come into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, which may cause the obstacle nails N to deform, cause rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage the center role 2500, etc. Below, a game panel modification mode 1 in which the game panel 1100 is modified to solve these problems will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the game panel 1100. Therefore, the following will explain the configuration of the game panel 1100 in detail, and will omit explanations of the other components of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Figures 137 to 147, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a through which game balls can flow, a number of obstacle nails N planted on the front side, and a center device 2500 provided along the edge of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110.

181 is a schematic perspective view of the game panel 1100 seen from the right front, and FIG. 182 is a schematic perspective view of the game panel 1100 seen from the right rear. As shown in FIG. 181 or FIG. 182, the game panel 1100 of this embodiment further includes a cover body 2516 that covers at least a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. In detail, the game panel 1100 includes a cover body 2516 that is provided so as to cover the stage cover 2515 of the center role 2500 from above and behind. The cover body 2516 can be attached and detached from the stage cover 2515 from the rear with screws or the like, and may be removed when the game panel 1100 is assembled to the game board 5, or if there is no problem with the game, even if the screws or the like are loosened, there is no effect on the game balls flowing down in the game area 5a, and it does not need to be removed from the stage cover 2515.

The gaming panel 1100 has a front surface 1100x on the side where the gaming area 5a is formed, a rear surface 1100z on the opposite side to the side where the gaming area 5a is formed, a side surface 1100y extending between the front surface 1100x and the rear surface 1100z, an edge portion 1100b extending from the front surface 1100x via the side surface 1100y to the rear surface 1100z, and a specific portion 1100c formed on at least a part of the edge portion 1100b.

The edge 1100b of the gaming panel 1100 includes, for example, an outer edge 1100b1 on the outside of the gaming panel 1100 and an inner edge 1100b2 on the inside of the gaming panel 1100. The outer edge 1100b1 is formed from the outer end of the front surface 1100x through the side surface 1100y to the outer edge of the rear surface 1100z. The inner edge 1100b2 is formed from the inner end of the front surface 1100x through the side surface 1100y to the inner end of the rear surface 1100z.

The center device 2500 has a peripheral wall 2501 protruding forward from the front surface 1100x of the gaming panel 1100 so as to prevent the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100, a first attacker 2520 capable of receiving gaming balls according to the result of the lottery for the normal symbol, and a second attacker 2560 capable of receiving gaming balls according to the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first attacker 2520 and the second attacker 2560 have a plurality of rear protrusions 2510 protruding rearward from the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100, such as a cover body containing a board on which light-emitting elements are arranged and wiring, and a socket to which wiring used for power supply and information transmission is connected. When the game panel 1100 is attached to the game board 5, the rear protrusion 2510 is stored inside a front-open box-shaped rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100.

[Configuration 2 of the specific unit]
The specific portion 1100c is formed on the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100, and can guide a worker who is trying to grasp the game panel 1100 so that the hand of the worker touches the specific portion 1100c when the worker transports the game panel 1100. In detail, the specific portion 1100c has a visual guidance effect that suggests a gripping position of the game panel 1100 to the worker by making the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100 resemble a human handprint when the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100 is visually observed, and a tactile guidance effect that suggests a gripping position of the game panel 1100 to the worker by the difference in tactile sensation of whether or not the hand of the worker who grasps the game panel 1100 feels uncomfortable, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game panel 1100.

Specifically, the specific portion 1100c has a front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, and a back surface recessed portion 1100c3 formed at a predetermined position on the outer edge portion 1100b1, and an inner surface gentle surface portion 1100c4 and an outer surface gentle surface portion 1100c5 formed at a predetermined position on the inner edge portion 1100b2.

Figure 183 is a cross-sectional view showing the A-A' cross section of Figure 181. As shown in Figures 181 to 183, the surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 is formed on the front surface 1100x of the game panel 1100, more specifically, on the surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 is formed in an inclined surface shape such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside in the vertical direction on the front 1100x side of the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, and linearly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y. In this way, the surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 that smoothly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y in a chamfered shape can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y from a part of the outer edge portion 1100b1. That is, by forming the surface roughness portion 1100c1 between the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y, instead of the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y, two obtuse corners are formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the surface roughness portion 1100c1 and the side surface 1100y and the surface roughness portion 1100c1.

Here, a worker attempting to grasp the gaming panel 1100 tends to avoid contact between the worker's hand and the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y, for example, so as not to cause discomfort such as pain in the hand grasping the gaming panel 1100. The gentle surface portion 1100c1 can be visually seen by the worker attempting to grasp the gaming panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the gaming panel 1100. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the outer edge 1100b1 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. It is also possible to reduce the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 being damaged by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the game area 5a, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

In this embodiment, the surface roughness portion 1100c1 is formed in a pair on the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1 of the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, and faces each other in the center of the game panel 1100. When an operator grasps the game panel 1100, the surface roughness portion 1100c1 can guide both hands of the operator to the surface roughness portion 1100c1 of the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1, making it possible to transport the game panel 1100 more safely. The upper surface roughness portion 1100c1 is formed on the entire left-right direction of the topmost edge of the game panel 1100, and the lower surface roughness portion 1100c1 is formed on a part of the left-right direction of the bottommost edge. Furthermore, the surface gentle portion 1100c1 is not limited to being formed on the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1, but may be formed on either the upper or lower outer edge portion 1100b1, either the left or right outer edge portion 1100b1, or both the left and right outer edge portions 1100b1, and even if multiple surface gentle portions 1100c1 are formed, they do not have to be opposed to each other (for example, formed on adjacent sides).

When the game panel 1100 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, the smooth surface portion 1100c1 is located behind the front component 1000 and the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3, making it difficult for the player to see it through the door window 101a, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being able to see the smooth surface portion 5c1 that is unrelated to the game. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed, part of the smooth surface portion 1100c1 may protrude from the rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 and be visible to the player through the door window 101a. Even if only part of the smooth surface portion 1100c1 is visible, the player will not be able to recognize that the smooth surface portion 1100c1 represents a handprint, in other words, that it is unrelated to the game and related to the transportation of the game panel 1100, and this can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In terms of, for example, allowing the hand of a worker to contact the surface gentle portion 1100c1 at the outer edge portion 1100b1 without touching a sharp corner, and preventing the surface gentle portion 1100c1 from protruding from the door frame 3 and being visible to the player when the component 1000 is transparent after the game panel 1100 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and thus reducing the interest in the game, the vertical width is preferably, for example, 0.5 cm to 2.0 cm, and the horizontal width is preferably, for example, 3.0 cm or more, when viewed from the front. In addition, the front-rear depth of the surface gentle portion 1100c1 is preferably, for example, 0.5 cm or more at its widest point, so that the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y can be effectively removed from a part of the outer edge portion 1100b1. The width of the surface roughness 1100c1 in the left-right direction may be, for example, the entire area of the outer edge 5b1 on which the surface roughness 1100c1 is formed, that is, the entire width of the outer edge 5b1 in the left-right direction.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the surface roughness portion 1100c1 formed by a linear plane that smoothly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y has been described, but the surface roughness portion 1100c1 may be formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y. The surface roughness portion 1100c1 formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y has the same effect as the surface roughness portion 1100c1 formed by a linear plane that smoothly connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y described above. In addition, since the surface roughness portion 1100c1 formed by a curved surface does not have corners, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing discomfort caused to workers whose hands come into contact with the outer edge portion 1100b1, and the transportation of the game panel 1100 can be performed even more safely.

The surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the transportation of the gaming panel 1100 even safer.

The backside gentle surface portion 1100c2 is formed on the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100, more specifically, on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The backside gentle surface portion 1100c2 is formed in an inclined surface shape such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside in the vertical direction at the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the rear surface 1100z side of the game panel 1100, and linearly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y. In this way, the backside gentle surface portion 1100c2 that smoothly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y in a chamfered shape can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y from a part of the outer edge portion 1100b1. That is, by forming the back surface gentle portion 1100c2 between the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y, instead of the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y, two obtuse corners are formed by the intersection of the rear surface 1100z and the back surface gentle portion 1100c2 and the side surface 1100y and the back surface gentle portion 1100c2.

Therefore, the back surface gentle portion 1100c2, at the outer edge portion 1100b1, can be visually seen by a worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the worker so that his/her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that his/her hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100. In addition, with the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the outer edge 1100b1 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the game area 5a, or the center gimmick 2500 being damaged, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

The back surface smooth portion 1100c2 is formed so as to be connected to the front surface smooth portion 1100c1 at the outer edge portion 1100b1, and is visible to the worker who is trying to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby providing visual guidance to the worker. In addition, by contacting the hand of the worker who is trying to grasp the game panel 1100, the worker can be further guided tactilely. When the game panel 1100 is transported by the worker, the discomfort caused by the hand coming into contact with the outer edge portion 1100b1 can be reduced, and the grip position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to the worker who does not know the grip position of the game panel 1100. The risk of the obstacle nail N being deformed or rusting of the obstacle nail N due to the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, or the center role 2500 being damaged, can be reduced, and the game panel 1100 can be transported more safely.

In this embodiment, the backside gentle surface portions 1100c2 are formed in pairs on the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1 of the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, and face each other in the center of the game panel 1100. When an operator grasps the game panel 1100, such backside gentle surface portions 1100c2 can guide both hands of the operator to the backside gentle surface portions 1100c2 of the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1, making it possible to transport the game panel 1100 more safely. In addition, the backside gentle surface portion 1100c2 is not limited to being formed on the upper and lower outer edge portions 1100b1, but may be formed on either the upper or lower outer edge portion 1100b1, either the left or right outer edge portion 1100b1, or both the left and right outer edge portions 1100b1, and even if multiple backside gentle surface portions 1100c2 are formed, they do not have to be opposed to each other (for example, formed on adjacent sides).

In terms of, for example, allowing the hand of the worker to contact the back surface portion 1100c2 without touching a sharp corner at the outer edge portion 1100b1, and preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the back surface portion 1100c2 being visible to the player when the component 1000 is transparent after the game panel 1100 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the vertical width is preferably, for example, 0.5 cm to 2.0 cm, and the horizontal width is preferably, for example, 3.0 cm or more, when viewed from the front. In addition, the depth of the back surface portion 1100c2 in the front-rear direction is preferably, for example, 0.5 cm or more at its largest part, so that the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the back surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y can be effectively removed from a part of the outer edge portion 1100b1. The width of the back surface portion 1100c2 in the left-right direction may be, for example, the entire area of the outer edge portion 5b1 on which the back surface portion 1100c2 is formed, that is, the entire width of the outer edge portion 5b1 in the left-right direction.

In this embodiment, the back surface portion 1100c2 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y has been described, but the back surface portion 1100c2 may be formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y. The back surface portion 1100c2 formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y has the same effect as the back surface portion 1100c2 formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y described above. In addition, since the back surface portion 1100c2 formed by a curved surface does not have corners, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing discomfort caused to workers whose hands come into contact with the outer edge portion 1100b1, and the transportation of the game panel 1100 can be performed even more safely.

The surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine bumps) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the transportation of the gaming panel 1100 even safer.

The back recess 1100c3 is formed on the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100, more specifically, on the back surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back recess 1100c3 is formed on the outer edge 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, and is formed, for example, in a circular concave shape when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the back recess 1100c3 is arranged in four in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the front gentle surface portion 1100c1 or the back gentle surface portion 1100c2, and to correspond to the four fingers of the operator gripping the game panel 1100, from the index finger to the little finger. Such back surface recess 1100c3, together with front surface gentle portion 1100c1 and back surface gentle portion 1100c2, forms a recess in the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the gaming panel 1100 that represents a schematic hand shape including part of a human palm and four fingers from the index finger to the little finger, and when the gaming panel 1100 is transported, the palm of the operator's hand is guided to front surface gentle portion 1100c1 and back surface gentle portion 1100c2, and the operator's index finger to little finger are placed in the corresponding back surface recess 1100c3. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the outer edge 1100b1 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be more clearly indicated to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. It is also possible to reduce the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the game area 5a, or the center gimmick 2500 being damaged, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

In this embodiment, four back recesses 1100c3 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the outer edge 1100b1 of the gaming panel 1100 to correspond to the four fingers of the operator, from the index finger to the little finger. However, at least one back recess 1100c3 may be formed on the outer edge 1100b1 of the gaming panel 1100, and any one of the index finger to the little finger of the operator who is holding the gaming panel 1100 can be guided to the outer edge 1100b1 of the gaming panel 1100.

The shape of the back recess 1100c3 in front view is not limited to a circular shape, and may be any shape that can guide the worker's fingers to the back recess 1100c3, such as a triangular, rectangular, or polygonal shape, and can achieve the same effect as the circular shape. The back recess 1100c3 may be elongated in the vertical direction so that two, three, or four of the worker's fingers can be placed on one back recess 1100c3. The back recess 5c3 may be formed so that the worker's fingers can be engaged with the outer end of the panel plate 1110 by recessing the back surface of the panel plate 1110 while leaving the outer end of the panel plate 1110. In addition, the edge of the back surface recess 1100c3 may be chamfered with a straight plane or an arc-shaped curved surface, which can reduce the discomfort caused by the fingers of the worker who places them on the back surface recess 1100c3 coming into contact with the corners formed on the edge of the back surface recess 1100c3.

In this embodiment, the back recess 1100c3 is formed in the lower outer edge 1100b1 of the outer edge 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, but the back recess 1100c3 is not limited to being formed in the lower outer edge 1100b1, and may be formed in, for example, either the left or right outer edge 1100b1, the left or right outer edge 1100b1, either the upper or lower outer edge 1100b1, or the upper or lower outer edge 1100b1, or when multiple back recesses 1100c3 are formed, they may be opposed to each other. When a worker grasps the game panel 1100, such a back recess 1100c3 can guide both hands of the worker to a pair of back recesses 1100c3 of the outer edge 1100b1, making it safer to transport the game panel 1100.

The outer diameter of the back recess 1100c3 is preferably, for example, 2.0 cm or less, and can be formed on the outer edge 1100b1 of the game panel 1100 without excessively increasing the vertical width of the back recess 1100c3. The back recess 5c3 is not used in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, and has an outer diameter larger than the thickness of a screw or the like used in the assembly of the pachinko machine 1. The depth of the back recess 1100c3 in the front-rear direction is preferably, for example, 1.0 mm or more, and the index finger to the little finger of the worker can be guided into the back recess 1100c3. The back recess 1100c3 may be, for example, in a form that penetrates the game panel 1100, and the worker can engage the index finger to the little finger in the back recess 1100c3, allowing the worker to more reliably hold the game panel 1100.

In addition, a wrinkle pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine bumps) may be formed on the surface of the opening of the back recess 1100c3 by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkle pattern formed on the surface of the back recess 1100c3 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the transportation of the gaming panel 1100 even safer.

In this embodiment, the aspect in which the front surface gentle portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle portion 1100c2, and the back surface recessed portion 1100c3 are formed on the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has been described. However, if the gaming panel 1100 does not have a panel holder 1120, the front surface gentle portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle portion 1100c2, and the back surface recessed portion 1100c3 may be formed on the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and the same action and effect as the above-mentioned front surface gentle portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle portion 1100c2, and the back surface recessed portion 1100c3 can be achieved.

The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 is formed on the inner edge portion 1100b2 of the game panel 1100, more specifically, on the rear end portion of the cover body 2516. The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 is formed on the inner edge portion 1100b2 on the rear surface 1100z side of the game panel 1100 as an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100. In this way, the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 that smoothly connects the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100 can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100 from a part of the inner edge portion 1100b2. That is, by forming the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 between the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100, the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100 is removed.

A worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 may, for example, place his/her hand on the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. In such a case, the worker tends to avoid contacting the hand with the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100, so as to avoid causing pain to the hand grasping the game panel 1100. The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4, at the inner edge portion 1100b2, is visible to the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, and can visually guide the worker so that the hand comes into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a sharp corner. Also, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 can tactilely guide the worker so that the hand comes into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a single sharp corner. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the inner edge portion 1100b2 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform or rust, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

From the viewpoint that the operator's hand can contact the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 without coming into contact with a sharp corner at the inner edge portion 1100b2, the width in the vertical direction in a front view is desirably 0.5 cm or more, for example, and the width formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is desirably 3.0 cm or more, for example. Note that the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 may be formed over the entire area of the cover body 2516 formed over the entire area of the peripheral wall portion 2501 along the peripheral wall portion 2501, or the cover body 2516 may be provided at multiple locations along the peripheral wall portion 2501 and formed into multiple cover bodies 2516.

In this embodiment, the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 is formed of an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the center gadget 2500. However, the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 may be formed of a straight plane that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the cover body 2516. The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 formed of a straight plane that smoothly connects the side and back surface of the cover body 2516 forms two obtuse angles instead of one sharp corner, which reduces the discomfort felt by the worker whose hand comes into contact with the inner edge portion 5b2, and allows the game panel 1100 to be transported even more safely.

In this embodiment, the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 is formed on the cover body 2516, but the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 may be formed on the stage cover 2515 of the center role piece 2500, and can achieve the same effect and function as the inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 described above.

The outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 is formed at the rear end of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500. The outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 is formed in an inclined surface shape that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500. In this way, the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 can remove the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the inner side surface and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500. That is, by forming the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 between the inner side surface and the back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, instead of the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the inner side surface and the back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, two obtuse corners are formed by the intersection of the inner side surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 and the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 and the back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 and the outer gentle surface portion 1100c6.

As described above, a worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 may, for example, place his/her hand from the side surface 1100y to the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100. In such a case, in order to avoid causing pain to the hand grasping the game panel 1100, there is a tendency to avoid contacting the hand with the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the inner side surface and the rear surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center device 2500. The outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 can be visually seen by the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by an operator, the discomfort caused to the operator when the operator's hands come into contact with the rear protrusion 2510 of the center device 2500 can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to an operator who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N in the play area 5a, which may cause the obstacle nails N to deform or rust, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

From the viewpoint that, for example, the operator's hand can contact the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 without coming into contact with sharp corners, it is desirable that the vertical width of the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 is, for example, 2.0 cm or more when viewed from the front, and the horizontal width is, for example, 0.5 cm or more and 3.0 cm or less. The vertical width of the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 may be, for example, formed over the entire inner side surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, or in multiple places on the inner side surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500.

In this embodiment, the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 is formed by a straight plane that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, but the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 may also be formed by an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500. The outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 formed of an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 has the same effect as the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 formed of a straight plane that smoothly connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 described above. In addition, since the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 formed of a curved surface does not have corners, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing discomfort caused to workers whose hands come into contact with the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, and the transportation of the game panel 1100 can be performed even more safely.

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 that connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 has been described, but the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 may be a form that connects the outer side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, and can achieve the same effect as the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 that connects the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 described above. In addition, the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 may be a form that is formed on both the inner side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500, and the outer side and back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500.

In addition, in this embodiment, the aspect of the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 that connects the inner side and the back surface of the rear protrusion 2510 of the center role 2500 has been described, but the outer gentle surface portion 1100c5 may be formed on the rear protrusion 2510 of the first attacker portion 2520, on the rear protrusion 2510 of the second attacker portion 2560, on the rear protrusions 2510 of both the first attacker portion 2520 and the second attacker portion 2560, or on the rear protrusion 2510 of another configuration other than the first attacker portion 2520 and the second attacker portion 2560 of the center role 2500.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific portion 1100c has the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, and the back surface recessed portion 1100c3 formed at a predetermined position of the outer edge portion 1100b1, the inner surface gentle surface portion 1100c4 formed at a predetermined position of the inner edge portion 1100b2, and the outer surface gentle surface portion 1100c5. However, the specific portion 1100c may have at least one of the configurations of the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, the back surface recessed portion 1100c3, the inner surface gentle surface portion 1100c4, and the outer surface gentle surface portion 1100c5, and can achieve the above-mentioned functions and effects of each configuration of the specific portion 1100c.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific portion 1100c has a front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, and a back surface recessed portion 1100c3 formed at a predetermined position of the outer edge portion 1100b1, an inner surface gentle surface portion 1100c4 formed at a predetermined position of the inner edge portion 1100b2, and an outer surface gentle surface portion 1100c5, and these front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, and back surface recessed portion 1100c3, inner surface portion 1100c4, and outer surface portion 1100c5 are arranged to have a shape that imitates the shape of a human hand. Although the embodiment has been described in which the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1, the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, and the back surface recessed portion 1100c3, and the inner surface gentle surface portion 1100c4 and the outer surface gentle surface portion 1100c5 are formed close to each other on the gaming panel 1100, they may be formed at a distance from each other at a predetermined position on the gaming panel 1100, and although the visual guiding effect is reduced when the gaming panel 1100 is transported, the tactile guiding effect allows the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely.

In the above examples, the specific portion 5c is formed on a part of the edge 5b of the game board 5, and the specific portion 1100c is formed on at least a part of the edge 1100b of the game panel 1100. However, at least the gentle surface portion 5c1 of the specific portion 5c may be formed on the entire edge 5b of the game board 5, and at least the gentle surface portion 1100c1 of the specific portion 1100c may be formed on the entire edge 1100b of the game panel 1100. In addition, when the gentle surface portion 5c1 is formed on a part of the edge 5b of the game board 5, the part or all of the edge 5b on which the gentle surface portion 5c1 is not formed may have an inclined surface shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside so that the inclination angle is steeper (close to 90°) than the gentle surface portion 5c1, or the edge 5b on which the gentle surface portion 5c1 is not formed may be configured not to have an inclined surface shape. Similarly, when the gentle surface portion 1100c1 is formed on a part of the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100, the part or all of the edge portion 1100b on which the gentle surface portion 1100c1 is not formed may have an inclined surface shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside so that the inclination angle is steeper (close to 90°) than that of the gentle surface portion 1100c1, or the edge portion 1100b on which the gentle surface portion 1100c1 is not formed may be configured not to have an inclined surface shape. In this case, if the player's hand accidentally touches the edge portion 5b, 1100b on which the specific portion 5c, 1100c is not formed, it will feel strange, but it is possible to prevent injury and to safely guide the player to the specific portion 5c, 1100c.

[Modification example 2 of the game board]
In the above-described embodiment, the basic configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 and modified example 1 of the game board have been described. However, conventionally, the edges of the game board 5 have been formed into sharp corners, and when the game board 5 is transported, the hand of an operator holding the game board 5 may come into contact with the edge of the game board 5, which may cause discomfort to the operator (e.g., the hand may be hurt by contact with the sharp corner-shaped edge, or the hand may be injured by contact with the sharp corner-shaped edge). Furthermore, when an operator who is unaware of where to hold the game board 5 transports the game board 5, the operator's hands may come into contact with the obstructing nails N or the center device 2500 in the play area 5a, which may cause the obstructing nails N to deform (e.g., bend to the extent that it interferes with play), cause rust on the obstructing nails N (e.g., skin oils may adhere to the obstructing nails N, making them more susceptible to rust), or cause damage to the center device 2500. Below, we will explain modified example 2 of the game board, in which modifications have been made to the game board 5 in order to further solve these problems.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 described above, except for the game board 5. Therefore, the following will explain the configuration of the game board 5 in detail, and will omit explanations of the other components of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, explanations of the configuration of the game board 5 that is the same as that of the modified example 1 of the game board described above will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 137 to 147, for example, the game board 5 includes a game area 5a through which game balls can flow, a front component 1000 that is roughly rectangular in front view and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a front unit 2000 having a center gimmick 2500 attached to the front side of the game panel 1100, and a box-shaped rear unit 3000 that is open at the front and attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the game area 5a, there are a number of obstacle nails N planted on the front of the game panel 1100, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 of the front unit 2000, and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 that prevents the game balls flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

184 is a schematic perspective view of the game board 5 seen from the right front, FIG. 185 is a schematic perspective view of the game board 5 seen from the right rear, and FIG. 186 is a schematic end view showing the A-A' cross section of FIG. 184. In FIG. 184, the rear unit 3000 in the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is omitted from the view point of making it easier to understand the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 184 to FIG. 186, when the game area 5a is formed and the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 has a front surface 5x on the front side facing the player, a side surface 5y extending rearward from the front surface 5x, a rear surface 5z extending parallel to the front surface 5x from the side surface 5y, an edge portion 5b continuing from the front surface 5x to the rear surface 5z via the side surface 5y, and a specific portion 5c formed on at least a part of the edge portion 5b.

The edge 5b of the game board 5 includes, for example, an outer edge 5b1 formed at the outer end of the game board 5, and an inner edge 5b2 formed at the inner end of the game board 5. The outer edge 5b1 is formed by the front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the rear unit 3000, which are arranged from front to rear, and the inner edge 5b2 is formed by the center gimmick 2500 and the game panel 1100.

[Configuration 3 of the specific unit]
The specific portion 5c is formed on the edge 5b of the game board 5, and can guide the hand of a worker who is about to grasp the game board 5 when the worker transports the game board 5. In detail, the specific portion 5c has a visual guidance effect that suggests to the worker the position to grasp the game board 5, for example, by making the edge 5b of the game board 5 resemble a human handprint when the edge 5b of the game board 5 is visually inspected, and a tactile guidance effect that suggests to the worker the position to grasp the game board 5 by the difference in touch, for example, whether or not the hand of the worker who grasps the game board 5 feels uncomfortable, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

Specifically, the specific portion 5c includes a surface gentle surface portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, a back recessed portion 5c3, and an outer sharp portion 5c4 formed at a predetermined position of the outer edge portion 5b1, an inner sharp portion 5c5 and a back gentle surface portion 5c6 formed at a predetermined position of the inner edge portion 5b2, an uneven surface 5p1 having a plurality of continuous unevenness formed on the surface of the previous component 1000, a front step portion 5p2 formed on the front surface of the previous component 1100, and a front step portion 5p3 formed on the front surface of the previous component 1100 when the previous component 1000 is not arranged and the gaming panel 1100 is not played. The game board 5 has a front exposed portion 5p3 exposed on the front surface 5x of the game board 5, a side metal plate 5p4 provided along the side surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear step portion 5p5 formed in a stepped shape from front to rear and from outside to inside on the side surface of the box-shaped rear unit 3000. The visual and tactile guidance effect provided by these components can reduce contact between the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 and the obstructing nails N or the center gimmick 2500, thereby contributing to safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, the configurations of the surface gentle portion 5c1, the surface recessed portion 5c2, the back recessed portion 5c3, the outer sharp portion 5c4, the inner sharp portion 5c5, and the back gentle portion 5c6 of the specific portion 5c are the same as those of the modified example 1 of the game board described above, so below, the other configurations of the specific portion 5c will be described in detail, and the configurations of the surface gentle portion 5c1, the surface recessed portion 5c2, the back recessed portion 5c3, the outer sharp portion 5c4, the inner sharp portion 5c5, and the back gentle portion 5c6 will be omitted.

The uneven surface 5p1 is formed on the surface of the surface smooth portion 5c1. The uneven surface 5p1 is a surface in which a wrinkled pattern shape is formed by a series of fine unevenness that can scatter light, for example, by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern shape is formed by a number of short linear protrusions extending in random directions, and is, for example, a rough pear-skin pattern shape (pear-skin pattern) or a fine geometric pattern shape. When such an uneven surface 5p1 comes into contact with the operator's hand, it also acts as a slip prevention agent to prevent the operator's hand from slipping off the surface smooth portion 5c1 without causing discomfort such as pain to the operator, and the game board 5 is prevented from slipping off the operator's hand, so that damage caused by the game board 5 falling can be prevented, and the game board 5 is prevented from slipping off the operator's hand, so that the operator's hand comes into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500 or falls on the operator's foot, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

In addition, the uneven surface 5p1 can visually guide the hands of the worker who carries the game board 5 to the surface smooth portion 5c1 due to its wrinkled pattern shape, thereby suppressing contact between the worker's hands and the obstacle nails N or the center role 2500, and also suppresses the player's loss of interest in the game due to the dirt, scratches, etc. being less noticeable after the worker's hands come into contact with the game board 5 compared to a flat surface without the uneven surface 5p1. Furthermore, the uneven surface 5p1 diffuses light irradiated from multiple points on the game board 5 on the surface smooth portion 5c1 to create a matte state, so that the light reflected on the surface smooth portion 5c1 is prevented from being too noticeable and the player's attention is diverted from the main performance to the surface smooth portion 5c1, further suppressing the loss of interest in the game. The uneven surface 5p1 only needs to have multiple continuous fine unevenness (not limited to those formed so that all are connected, but may be formed so that only some are connected, or may be formed by dividing into predetermined units (which may be one unit)), and the shapes of the unevenness (size (surface area), degree of unevenness (amount of protrusion), surface shape, etc.) may all be the same, or multiple different shapes may be mixed.

In addition, the component 1000 has a front surface 1000x facing the player and a side surface 1000y extending rearward perpendicular to the front surface 1000x. The surface smooth surface portion 5c1 may be formed to connect the front surface 1000x and the side surface 1000y of the component 1000, or the surface smooth surface portion 5c1 may be formed so that the side surface 1000y is not formed on the component 1000 due to the formation of the surface smooth surface portion 5c1, and the surface smooth surface portion 5c1 may be formed to connect the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 and the back surface of the component 1000. Even if the uneven surface 5p1 is formed so as to be continuous with the previous component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 so as to connect the front surface 1000x of the material 1000 and the side surface 1100y of the gaming panel 1100, it is preferable that the uneven surface 5p1 is formed on the gentle surface portion 5c1, which can prevent damage caused by the gaming board 5 falling when transporting the gaming board 5, and can prevent the gaming board 5 from slipping off the worker's hands and coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center device 2500, or falling on the worker's feet, so that the gaming board 5 can be transported safely.

The uneven surface 5p1 may be formed over the entire surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1, or may be formed only on a portion of the gentle surface portion 5c1, or may be formed partially at multiple locations on the gentle surface portion 5c1. This can prevent damage to the game board 5 caused by it falling when the game board 5 is transported, and can prevent the game board 5 from slipping out of the worker's hands and coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center device 2500, or falling onto the worker's feet, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

The uneven surface 5p1 may be formed not only on the gentle surface portion 5c1, but also on the front surface 1000x (flat surface portion without inclination) of the component 1000 that is continuous with the gentle surface portion 5c1. The uneven surface 5p1 formed on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, like the gentle surface portion 5c1, acts as an anti-slip agent to prevent the worker's hands from slipping off the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, and prevents the worker from accidentally touching the guide nail N or the center role 2500, making the transportation of the game board 5 even safer.

In addition, when the uneven surface 5p1 is formed on the side 5y of the game board 5 (the side 1000y of the component 1000 and the side of the game panel 1100), the uneven surface 5p1 acts as a slip prevention between the hand of the worker holding the game board 5 and the side 5y of the game board 5. For example, when the worker holding the game board 5 moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the worker's hand may get caught on the side 5y of the game board 5, and a force may be applied that causes the component 1000 to be removed forward from the game panel 1100, damaging the outer edge of the component 1000. From this perspective, it is desirable that the side 5y of the game board 5 (the side 1000y of the component 1000 and the side of the game panel 1100) be flat and free of fine unevenness such as the uneven surface 5p1. Here, in the case where the surface smooth portion 5c1 is formed so as to connect the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 to the side surface 1000y, the side surface 5y of the game board 5 is composed of the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 and the side surface of the game panel 1100, and in the case where the side surface 1000y is not formed in the component 1000 by forming the surface smooth portion 5c1 (when the surface smooth portion 5c1 is formed so as to connect the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 to the back surface of the component 1000, and when the surface smooth portion 5c1 is formed so as to be continuous with the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 so as to connect the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 to the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100), it is composed of the side surface of the game panel 1100.

In this embodiment, the component 1000 is desirably formed in an opaque dark color such as black, navy blue, or gray. The component 1000 may be formed, for example, from a dark resin, or may have a dark sticker, sheet, or film attached to its surface, or may be colored with a dark paint. The dark component 1000 has a lower reflectance than light-colored components such as white or yellow, and therefore can suppress the reflection of light irradiated from multiple points on the game board 5 on the surface of the component 1000, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game, and can increase the visibility of the uneven surface 5p1 formed on the gentle surface portion 5c1 to the worker transporting the game board 5. Therefore, when transporting the game board 5, the possibility of guiding the hand of the worker to the surface smooth portion 5c1 of the previous component 1000 on which the uneven surface 5p1 is formed is increased, and the worker's hand can be further prevented from accidentally contacting the guide nail N or the center role 2500, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. Note that the surface of the previous component 1000 is not limited to the uneven surface 5p1 formed thereon, and it may be a sticker, sheet, film, etc. that has multiple fine unevenness formed on the surface like the uneven surface 5p1. In this case, the dark color of the previous component 1000 may be visible through the sticker, sheet, film, etc., or the sticker, sheet, film, etc. may be formed in a dark color.

The front surface 1000x of the component 1000 is further formed with a stamp attachment section 1012 to which a stamp is attached, a function display forming section 1013 in which an opening is formed to expose the light-emitting section of the function display unit 1400 and on which a status label indicating the light-emitting state of the light-emitting section of the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a label attachment section 1014 on which a display label indicating the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot probability and the probability of a special bonus is attached. The display label is formed by printing the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot probability and the probability of a special bonus on a sticker, sheet, film, etc.

The stamp attachment section 1012 is formed on the lower left of the component 1000, and more specifically, the outer periphery of the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 is partitioned by a step 1012a, and is formed in a concave shape with a degree of unevenness greater than that of the uneven surface 5p1. In addition, the angular shape of the step 1012a of the stamp attachment section 1012 notifies the worker that the stamp attachment section 1012 is a place that should not be touched when it comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, and damage to the stamp can be suppressed. Furthermore, the surface of the stamp pasting section 1012 is formed in a flat shape without surface treatment like the uneven surface 5p1, and even if the worker does not notice the step 1012a of the stamp pasting section 1012, the difference in feel between the surface-treated front surface 1000x of the component 1000 and the flat surface of the stamp pasting section 1012 can inform the worker that the stamp pasting section 1012 is a place that should not be touched when transporting the game board 5, and damage to the stamp can be suppressed. Also, because the stamp pasting section 1012 has a flat surface, it is easy to paste the stamp and the pasted stamp is less likely to peel off.

The stamp attachment portion 1012 may be formed in a protruding shape on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, with the outer periphery partitioned by a step portion 1012a and greater than the degree of unevenness of the uneven surface 5p1. When the protruding stamp attachment portion 1012 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the stamp attachment portion 1012 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the stamp can be suppressed. When the surface of the stamp attachment portion 1012 is formed flat, the stamp attachment portion 1012 may be formed in a shape that has no degree of unevenness, that is, is formed flush with the front surface 1000x of the component 1000. When the flat stamp attachment portion 1012 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the stamp attachment portion 1012 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the stamp can be suppressed. Furthermore, the stamp attachment portion 1012 may be formed in a color different from the front surface 1000x of the previous component 1000 (for example, a light color such as white, yellow, or pink when the previous component 1000 is dark) (including a mode in which only the step portion 1012a is colored, a mode in which the stamp is covered with a translucent light-colored sticker or sheet that allows the stamp to be seen, and a mode in which the stamp is formed in a light color), and when transporting the game board 5, a worker can visually confirm that the stamp attachment portion 1012 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the stamp can be suppressed.

The function display forming portion 1013 is formed in the upper left of the component 1000, and like the stamp attachment portion 1012, the outer periphery of the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 is partitioned by a step portion 1013a and is formed in a concave shape with a degree of unevenness greater than that of the uneven surface 5p1. In addition, due to the angular shape of the step portion 1013a of the function display forming portion 1013, when it comes into contact with the hand of an operator carrying the game board 5, the operator can be notified that the function display forming portion 1013 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed. Furthermore, the surface of the function display forming portion 1013 is formed in a flat shape without surface treatment such as the uneven surface 5p1, and even if the worker does not notice the step portion 1013a of the function display forming portion 1013, the difference in tactile sensation between the surface-treated front surface 1000x of the previous component 1000 and the flat surface of the function display forming portion 1013 can inform the worker when transporting the game board 5 that the function display forming portion 1013 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed. In addition, the function display forming portion 1013 can easily attach the status label and can also have the effect of making the attached status label less likely to peel off. The status label is attached so as to cover the opening where the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 is exposed, and at least the portion corresponding to the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 is formed transparent.

In addition, the function display forming portion 1013 may be formed in a protruding shape on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, with its outer periphery partitioned by a step portion 1013a and greater than the degree of unevenness of the uneven surface 5p1, and when the protruding function display forming portion 1013 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the function display forming portion 1013 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed. In addition, when the surface of the function display forming portion 1013 is formed flat, the function display forming portion 1013 may be formed in a manner that has no degree of unevenness, that is, is formed flush with the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, and when the flat function display forming portion 1013 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the function display forming portion 1013 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed. In addition, the function display forming portion 1013 may be formed in a color different from the front surface 1000x of the previous component 1000 (for example, a light color such as white, yellow, or pink when the previous component 1000 is a dark color) (including a mode in which only the step portion 1013a is colored, a mode in which the status label and the light-emitting portion are covered with a translucent light-colored sticker or sheet that allows them to be seen, and a mode in which the status label is formed in a light color, etc.), so that when transporting the game board 5, a worker can visually confirm that the function display forming portion 1013 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed.

The label attachment section 1014 is formed in the upper right of the component 1000, and like the stamp attachment section 1012 and the function display forming section 1013, the outer periphery of the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 is partitioned by a step section 1014a, and is formed in a concave shape with a larger degree of unevenness than the uneven surface 5p1. Furthermore, when the step section 1014a of the label attachment section 1014 comes into contact with the hand of an operator carrying the game board 5, it can notify the operator that the label attachment section 1014 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the display label can be suppressed. Furthermore, the surface of the label attachment portion 1014 is formed in a flat shape without surface treatment like the uneven surface 5p1, and even if the worker does not notice the step portion 1014a of the label attachment portion 1014, the difference in feel between the surface-treated front surface 1000x of the component 1000 and the flat surface of the label attachment portion 1014 can inform the worker when transporting the game board 5 that the label attachment portion 1014 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the display label can be suppressed. In addition, the label attachment portion 1014 can easily attach the display label and can also have the effect of making the attached display label less likely to peel off.

The label attachment portion 1014 may be formed in a protruding shape on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 such that the outer periphery of the label attachment portion 1014 is partitioned by a step portion 1014a and the degree of protrusion is greater than the degree of protrusion of the uneven surface 5p1. When the protruding label attachment portion 1014 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the label attachment portion 1014 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the display label can be suppressed. When the surface of the label attachment portion 1014 is formed flat, the label attachment portion 1014 may be formed in a shape that has no degree of protrusion or recess, that is, is formed flush with the front surface 1000x of the component 1000. When the flat label attachment portion 1014 comes into contact with the hand of a worker carrying the game board 5, the worker can be notified that the label attachment portion 1014 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the display label can be suppressed. The label attachment portion 1014 may be formed in a color different from the front surface 1000x of the previous component 1000 (for example, a light color such as white, yellow, or pink when the previous component 1000 is dark) (including a color in which only the step portion 1014a is colored, a color in which the display label is covered with a translucent light-colored sticker or sheet that allows the display label to be seen, and a color in which the display label is formed in a light color), so that when transporting the game board 5, a worker can visually confirm that the label attachment portion 1014 is a place that should not be touched, and damage to the display label can be suppressed.

The component 1000 has a protruding protrusion 1015 protruding forward from the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 at a position close to the play area 5a in the area outside the play area 5a on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000. The protrusion 1015 is adapted to come into contact with the hand of an operator moving the hand along the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 when transporting the game board 5, and notifies the operator that there is a play area 5a that should not be touched inside the protrusion 1015, thereby preventing the operator's hand from coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, the center role 2500, etc. Note that the protrusion 1015 of the component 1000 may be formed at a position close to the play area 5a in the area outside the play area 5a, for example, in the shape of a long wall along the outer periphery of the play area 5a, or in a form partially formed in a plurality of parts along the outer periphery of the play area 5a.

The front step 5p2 is a step formed on the front surface 1000x (flat surface portion without inclination) of the component 1000, and in this embodiment, is composed of a stamp attachment section 1012, a function display forming section 1013, a label attachment section 1014, and a protrusion 1015 adjacent to the play area 5a. In the front step 5p2, the stamp attachment section 1012, the function display forming section 1013, and the label attachment section 1014 are located on the outside of a part of the uneven surface 5p1 with a small protrusion amount (degree of unevenness) from the front surface 1000x of the component 1000, and on the inside of the part, a protrusion 1015 with a large protrusion amount (degree of unevenness) is located. Since the protrusion amount (degree of unevenness) increases from the outside to the inside of the play board 5 on the front surface 1000x (flat surface portion without inclination) of the component 1000, When the worker moves his/her hand along the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 when carrying the game board 5, the uneven surface 5p1, the stamp attachment portion 1012, the function display forming portion 1013, the label attachment portion 1014, and the protrusion 1015 come into contact in that order, further restricting movement, and informing the worker that there are areas on the inside of the game board 5 that should not be touched. This prevents the worker's hand from coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center gimmick 2500, allowing the game board 5 to be carried safely. Note that it is preferable that the protrusion 1015 is formed on the inside of the surface gentle portion 5c1 so as to correspond to the surface gentle portion 5c1.

The front exposed portion 5p3 is a portion of the front surface 5x of the game board 5 where the component 1000 is not arranged and the game panel 1100 is exposed on the front surface 5x, and in this embodiment, is formed on the outer edge portion at the lower right of the game board 5. By forming the front exposed portion 5p3, the thickness of the outer edge portion of the game board 5 in the front-to-rear direction is reduced by the thickness of the component 1000 in the front-to-rear direction, making it easier for an operator to grip the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5. This prevents the operator's hand from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center gimmick 2500, making it even safer to transport the game board 5. In addition, in this example, the front exposed portion 5p3 is provided on the edge 5b of the side of the game board 5 where the specific portion 5c is formed (in FIG. 185, the front exposed portion 5p3 is formed on the bottom side adjacent to the side where the specific portion 5c is formed, but the front exposed portion 5p3 may be formed on the side opposite to the side where the specific portion 5c is formed), making it possible to hold the specific portion 5c with one hand and hold the front exposed portion 5p3 with the other hand. This makes it possible to hold the game board 5 firmly, suppress the game board 5 from slipping off, and allow it to be transported safely. Note that the front exposed portion 5p3 is not limited to being formed on the outer edge of the lower right of the game board 5, but may be formed on at least a part of the game board 5 (for example, at least one outer edge of the top, bottom, left, and right of the game board 5), making it easy for the worker to hold the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5. In addition, it is preferable that the front exposed portions 5p3 are formed in pairs at opposing positions on the top, bottom, left, and right of the game board 5, so that when transporting the game board 5, the worker can easily hold the game board 5 with both hands, making the game board 5 even safer to transport. The above-mentioned protrusions 1015 may be formed on the inside of the front exposed portion 5p3 so as to correspond to the front exposed portion 5p3, and the hand of the worker holding the front exposed portion 5p3 is prevented from coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, making it safer to transport the game board 5.

The side metal plate 5p4 is formed in a long plate shape and is provided along the side of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the side metal plate 5p4 is provided on the left-right side of the game panel 1100 so that its longitudinal direction is along the up-down direction of the game panel 1100. Such a side metal plate 5p4 can increase the strength of the left-right outer edge of the game board 5, and when the left-right outer edge of the game board 5 is gripped by an operator to transport the game board 5, the left-right outer edge of the game board 5 can be prevented from being damaged by the weight of the game board 5 or the force with which the operator grips the game board 5, making the transportation of the game board 5 even safer. The side metal plate P4 may be provided on the vertical side of the game panel 1100 so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the left-right direction of the game panel 1100, which increases the strength of the vertical outer edge of the game board 5 and prevents the vertical outer edge of the game board 5 from being damaged, making it even safer to transport the game board 5. The side metal plate 5p4 may also have the function of de-electrifying the game board 5 (electronic components, etc. provided on the game board 5) by connecting an earth wire to it.

The side metal plate 5p4 is not limited to a long plate-like shape as long as it can increase the strength of the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100, and may be, for example, a plurality of metal plates arranged side by side at a predetermined interval on the side of the gaming panel 1100. When a plurality of side metal plates 5p4 are partially provided, the side metal plate 5p4 is not provided on the outside of the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 and the front exposed portion 5p3, and a predetermined interval portion formed by the plurality of side metal plates 5p4 is preferably located on the outside corresponding to the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 and the front exposed portion 5p3, so that the contact between the hand of the worker guided to the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 and the front exposed portion 5p3 and the side metal plate 5p4 can be suppressed, and the hand of the worker who contacts the edge of the side metal plate 5p4 can be prevented from being injured, and the side metal plate 5p4 can also be prevented from rusting due to the adhesion of sebum or the like to the side metal plate 5p4. The side metal plate 5p4 may be attached to the side of the game panel 1100 by adhesive, fixed to the side of the game panel 1100 by a fixing member such as a screw, or embedded in the side of the game panel 1100. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of parts when assembling the game board 5, for example, it is preferable that the side metal plate 5p4 is embedded in the side of the game panel 1100.

The back step portion 5p5 is formed in a stepped shape from the outside to the inside from the front to the rear on the side of the box-shaped back unit 3000. When a worker transporting the game board 5 grasps the outer edge of the game board 5, the worker's fingers can be hooked on the back step portion 5p5, and the worker's hands can be prevented from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, making the transportation of the game board 5 even safer. In addition, by forming the back step portion 5p5, the thickness of the outer edge of the game board 5 in the front-to-rear direction is reduced by the thickness in the front-to-rear direction from the back step portion 5p5 to the rearmost surface of the back unit 3000, making it easier for the worker to grasp the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5. This prevents the worker's hands from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, making the transportation of the game board 5 even safer. In addition, from the viewpoint of making it easy for the worker to grip the game board 5 with both hands when transporting the game board 5, it is preferable that the back step portion 5p5 is formed in pairs on the top, bottom, left and right side surfaces of the back unit 3000, but it may be formed on at least one of the top, bottom, left and right sides. In addition, from the viewpoint of making it easy for the worker to hook the fingers on the back step portion 5p5, it is preferable that the side surface of the back unit 3000 is inclined so that the outer diameter becomes smaller toward the rear. In addition, the back step portion 5p5 may be partially formed in a plurality of portions on the side surface of the back unit 3000, and in this case, it is preferable that at least one of the back step portions 5p5 is formed so as to correspond to the front exposed portion 5p3 in the front-rear direction. Such a back step portion 5p5, together with the front exposed portion 5p3, further reduces the thickness of the outer edge portion of the game board 5 in the front-rear direction, making it even easier for the worker to grip the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5.

Figure 187 is a schematic perspective view of a portion of the game board 5 seen from the front right, and Figure 188 is a schematic perspective view of a portion of the game board 5 seen from the rear right. In detail, Figure 187 shows a portion of the game board 5 from which the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 have been removed, and Figure 188 shows a portion of the game board 5 from which the front component 1000, the center gimmick 2500, and the back unit 3000 have been removed. As shown in Figures 186 to 188, in addition to the uneven surface 5p1, the front step portion 5p2, the front exposed portion 5p3, the side metal plate 5p4, and the back step portion 5p5, the specific portion 5c further has an outer edge wall portion 5p6 protruding rearward from the outer end portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, a rear slope portion 5p7 formed so as to be continuous with the top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6, and a back step portion 5p8 formed inward of the rear slope portion 5p7 so as to protrude from the back surface 1100z of the game panel 1100.The visual or tactile guidance effect provided by these components can further reduce contact between the hands of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500, thereby contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, because the thickness of the game board 5 in the front-to-rear direction decreases when the rear unit 3000 is removed, the strength of the game board 5 against external forces acting on the game board 5 when it is transported tends to decrease. For example, when the game board 5 is transported, if the opposing outer edges of the game panel 1100 are grasped by an operator and a force is applied to the game panel 1100 in a direction that twists the game panel 1100, the game panel 1100 may bend, and the obstacle nails N, the center gimmick 2500, etc. may be damaged.

The outer edge wall portion 5p6 is formed in a wall shape along the outer edge end 1100b1 of the game panel 1100 so as to protrude rearward from the outer edge end 1100b1. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 makes it easy for an operator to hook his/her fingers around the rear side of the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5, which contributes to safe transportation of the game board 5, and also allows an operator to hook his/her fingers on the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the rear unit 3000 has been removed, which allows the operator to firmly hold the game board 5 and further contributes to safe transportation of the game board 5.

The outer edge wall portion 5p6 is not limited to a wall-like form along the entire circumference of the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, but may be formed in a part of the outer edge portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5 in the same way as the wall-like form along the entire circumference of the outer edge portion 1100b1. In addition, by providing the outer edge wall portion 5p6, the thickness of the outer edge portion 1100b1 is increased, and the strength of the game panel 1100 can be increased. Even if a force is applied to the game panel 1100 in a direction that twists the game panel 1100 when the game board 5 is transported, the deflection generated in the game panel 1100 is suppressed, and the obstacle nail N, the center role 2500, etc. are prevented from falling off the game panel 1110, or the obstacle nail N, the center role 2500, etc. are prevented from being damaged by the force applied thereto. In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming panel 1100 is described as being formed by assembling the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120, but the gaming panel 1100 may be formed in such a manner that the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 are integrally formed (the gaming panel 1100 is formed only by the panel plate 1110), and the same action and effect can be achieved.

The width (from the outside to the inside of the gaming panel 1100) of the rearmost apex of the outer edge wall 5p6 is preferably 3.0 mm or more from the viewpoint of making it easier for the worker to hook the fingers that are turned to the rear side of the gaming board 5, and is preferably 10.0 mm or less from the viewpoint of preventing the shape of the gaming board 5 from becoming excessively large. Also, the protrusion amount (the distance from the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 to the rearmost apex of the outer edge wall 5p6) of the outer edge wall 5p6 is preferably 5.0 mm or more and 20.0 mm or less from the viewpoint of making it easier for the worker to hook the fingers that are turned to the rear side of the gaming board 5, and from the viewpoint of preventing the shape of the gaming board 5 from becoming excessively large.

In addition, when the outer edge wall portion 5p6 is partially formed on the outer edge end portion 1100b1 of the game panel 1100, it is preferable that the outer edge wall portion 5p6 is formed at a position corresponding to the surface smooth surface portion 5c1 in the front-rear direction, so that the worker can firmly hold the surface smooth surface portion 5c1 and the outer edge wall portion 5p6, and the worker's hands are prevented from coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center role 2500, and the game board 5 can be safely transported. The top of the rear end of the outer edge wall portion 5p6 may be formed in a flat shape parallel to the front surface 5x of the game board 5, inclined with respect to the front surface 5x of the game board 5, or curved with an arc extending inside and outside the game board 5, but it is preferable that the outer edge wall portion 5p6 is formed in a flat shape or curved shape without sharp parts from the viewpoint of reducing discomfort such as pain when the worker hooks his/her finger on the outer edge wall portion 5p6.

The rear slope 5p7 is formed so as to be continuous with the top of the rear end of the outer edge wall 5p6, and the rear slope 5p7 in this embodiment is formed so as to be connected to the inside of the outer edge wall 5p6. When the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed is transported, the rear slope 5p7 is supported by the fingers of the worker hooked on the outer edge wall 5p6, and can reduce discomfort such as pain acting on the fingers of the worker hooked on the outer edge wall 5p6, so that the worker can hold the game board 5 more reliably and can further contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, the rear slope 5p7 can increase the strength of the game panel 1100, and even if a force in a direction that twists the game panel 1100 is applied to the game panel 1100 when the game board 5 is transported, it can suppress the deflection generated in the game panel 1100 and suppress damage to the obstacle nails N, the center role 2500, etc.

The rear slope 5p7 is inclined from the rear to the front from the outside to the inside of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the rear slope 5p7 makes it easy for the operator's fingers to be placed on the rear side of the game board 5 without colliding with the rear slope. In addition, the rear slope 5p7 may be formed so as to be continuous with the top of the rear end of the outer edge wall 5p6 or to be connected to the rear side of the outer edge wall 5p6 (so as to protrude rearward from the top of the outer edge wall 5p6) when the width of the top of the outer edge wall 5p6 is sufficiently large, which can further contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, the rear slope 5p7 may be formed along the entire circumference of the outer edge wall 5p6 or may be formed on a part of the outer edge wall 5p6.

From the viewpoint of making it easy for the operator's fingers to be placed on the rear side of the game board 5 and from the viewpoint of ensuring space for forming the rear slope portion 5p7, it is desirable that the width along the outer edge wall portion 5p6 is 30.0 mm or more and 100.0 mm or less. Also, from the viewpoint of making it easy for the operator's fingers to be placed on the rear side of the game board 5, it is desirable that the rear slope portion 5p7 is formed with an incline so that its height in the front-to-rear direction decreases from the outside to the inside of the game board 5.

The rear slope portion 5p7 may be formed as a straight plane so as to connect the inner end of the top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6 to the back surface of the game panel 1100, or may be formed as a curved surface in an arc shape so as to connect the inner end of the top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6 to the back surface of the game panel 1100. The curved rear slope portion 5p7 does not have corners, so that the effect of suppressing discomfort to the worker whose hand comes into contact with the rear slope portion 5p7 can be enhanced, and the transportation of the game board 5 can be performed more safely. The rear slope portion 5p7 may be formed as a single surface, or may be formed as a plurality of surfaces, such as a first rear slope extending from the inner end of the top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6 toward the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second rear slope connecting the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the first rear slope. When the rear slope portion 5p7 is formed by multiple surfaces, if the surface extending from the inner end of the top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6 is inclined toward the back surface of the gaming panel 1100, the surface extending from the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 may be in a state in which it extends along a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 (front-to-back direction).

The back step portion 5p8 is formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100, at a position inside the rear slope portion 5p7 and outside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, so as to protrude from the back surface 1100z of the game panel 1100. When the back step portion 5p8 comes into contact with the hand of a worker who is trying to engage the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, the back step portion 5p8 can notify the worker through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 that there are areas that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500, inside the back step portion 5p8, and contact between the hand of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500 can be further suppressed, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. In addition, the back step 5p8 can increase the strength of the game panel 1100, and even if a force is applied to the game panel 1100 in a direction that twists the game panel 1100 when the game board 5 is transported, it can suppress the bending that occurs in the game panel 1100 and suppress damage to the obstacle nails N, the center role 2500, etc.

From the viewpoint of enhancing the tactile induction effect, the back surface step portion 5p8 is preferably formed continuously along the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, but from the viewpoint of design considering the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, it may be formed partially along the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. In addition, it is preferable that at least a part of the back surface step portion 5p8 is formed along the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the back surface step portion 5p8 of the present embodiment is formed in a part along the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 inside at least one rear slope portion 5p7 where the operator's hand is likely to be guided, and the tactile induction effect of the back surface step portion 5p8 can be enhanced as well as the ease of designing the game panel 1100. In addition, the height of the back surface step portion 5p8 from the back surface of the game panel 1100 is preferably 1.0 mm or more and 15.0 mm or less from the viewpoint of the tactile induction effect and the ease of designing.

The back step portion 5p8 may be formed in a concave shape on the back surface 1100z of the game panel 1100 at a position inside the rear slope portion 5p7 and outside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, so long as it comes into contact with the worker's hand when the game board 5 is transported and informs the worker that there are areas inside the back step portion 5p8 that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nails N and the center role 2500, through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The back step portion 5p8 may be colored in a color different from the game panel 1100, in which case the worker can be visually informed through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 that there are areas inside the back step portion 5p8 that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nails N and the center role 2500. In addition, when the back step 5p8 is formed partially as described above, it is desirable to form it at a position inside and outside the game board 5 that corresponds to the outer edge wall 5p6, so that when it comes into contact with the hand of an operator attempting to engage the outer edge wall 5p6, the operator can be notified through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 that there are areas inside the back step 5p8 that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nail N and the center gimmick 2500.

The configuration of the specific portion 5c formed on the edge portion 5b of the game board 5 described above can also be applied to the specific portion 1100c formed on the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100. That is, the uneven surface 5p1 may be formed on the gentle surface portion 1100c1 of the game panel 1100 and the front surface of the game panel 1100, or the front step portion 5p2 may be formed on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[Game board modification example 3]
In the above-mentioned embodiment, the basic configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 and modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the game board have been described. However, conventionally, when an operator who does not know where to hold the game board 5 carries the game board 5, the operator's hands may come into contact with the obstacle nails N and the center device 2500 in the play area 5a, which may cause the obstacle nails N to deform (e.g., bend to the extent that it interferes with play), cause rust on the obstacle nails N (e.g., skin oils may adhere to the obstacle nails N, making them more susceptible to rust), or cause damage to the center device 2500. Below, modified example 3 of the game board, in which modifications have been made to the game board 5, will be described in order to further solve these problems.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 described above, except for the game board 5, so below, the configuration of the game board 5 will be described in detail, and explanations of the other configurations of the pachinko machine 1 will be omitted. In addition, explanations of the configuration of the game board 5 that is the same as that of the game board modification example 1 and the game board modification example 2 described above will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 137 to 147, for example, the game board 5 includes a game area 5a through which game balls can flow, a front component 1000 that is roughly rectangular in front view and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a front unit 2000 having a center gimmick 2500 attached to the front side of the game panel 1100, and a box-shaped rear unit 3000 that is open at the front and attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the game area 5a, there are a number of obstacle nails N planted on the front of the game panel 1100, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2006 of the front unit 2000, and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center device 2500 that prevents the game balls flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

Figure 189 is a schematic perspective view of the game board 5 seen from the right front, and Figure 190 is a schematic end view showing the A-A' cross section of Figure 189. In Figure 189, the depiction of the rear unit 3000 in the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is omitted from the perspective of making it easier to understand the game board 5. As shown in Figures 189 and 190, when the game area 5a is formed and the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the game board 5 has a front surface 5x on the front side facing the player, a side surface 5y extending rearward from the front surface 5x, a rear surface 5z extending parallel to the front surface 5x from the side surface 5y, an edge portion 5b continuing from the front surface 5x through the side surface 5y to the rear surface 5z, and a specific portion 5c formed on at least a part of the edge portion 5b.

The edge 5b of the game board 5 includes, for example, an outer edge 5b1 formed at the outer end of the game board 5, and an inner edge 5b2 formed at the inner end of the game board 5. The outer edge 5b1 is formed by the front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the rear unit 3000, which are arranged from front to rear, and the inner edge 5b2 is formed by the center gimmick 2500 and the game panel 1100.

[Configuration 4 of the identification unit]
The specific portion 5c is formed on the edge 5b of the game board 5, and can guide the hand of a worker who is about to grasp the game board 5 when the worker transports the game board 5. In detail, the specific portion 5c has a visual guidance effect that suggests to the worker the position to grasp the game board 5, for example, by making the edge 5b of the game board 5 resemble a human handprint when the edge 5b of the game board 5 is visually inspected, and a tactile guidance effect that suggests to the worker the position to grasp the game board 5 by the difference in touch, for example, whether or not the hand of the worker who grasps the game board 5 feels uncomfortable, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

Specifically, the specific portion 5c has a surface gentle portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, a back recessed portion 5c3, and an outer sharp portion 5c4, an inner sharp portion 5c5 formed at a predetermined position on the inner edge portion 5b2, a back gentle portion 5c6, an uneven surface 5p1, a front step portion 5p2, a front exposed portion 5p3, a side metal plate 5p4, a back step portion 5p5, an outer edge wall portion 5p6, a rear slope portion 5p7, and a back step portion 5p8, and the visual and tactile guidance effect provided by these components can reduce contact between the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500, contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, since the configuration other than the front step portion 5p2 is the same as the configuration of the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the game board and the modified example 2 of the game board, the configuration of the front step portion 5p2 of the specific portion 5c will be described in detail below, and the description of the configuration other than the front step portion 5p2 will be omitted.

In this example, the component 1000 has a convex protrusion 1013b protruding from the front surface 1000x around the functional display forming portion 1013. The protrusion 1013b of the component 1000 is adapted to come into contact with the functional display forming portion 1013 when the worker moves his/her hand along the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 when transporting the game board 5, and notifies the worker that there is a functional display forming portion 1013 inside the protrusion 1013b that should not be touched, thereby preventing the worker's hand from coming into contact with the functional display forming portion 1013. Note that the stamp attachment portion 1012 and the label attachment portion 1014 may also have a convex protrusion protruding from the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 around them. Also, as with modified example 2 of the gaming board, even if protrusions are not formed around the stamp attachment section 1012, the function display forming section 1013, and the label attachment section 1014, the presence of the stamp attachment section 1012, the function display forming section 1013, and the label attachment section 1014 may be notified.

The front step portion 5p2 is a step formed on the front surface 1000x (flat surface portion with no inclination) of the component 1000, and in this embodiment, is composed of a step portion 1012a of the stamp attachment portion 1012, a step portion 1013a of the function display forming portion 1013, and a step portion 1014a of the label attachment portion 1014, as well as a protrusion 1015 located inside the game board 5 relative to the function display forming portion 1013 and outside the game board 5 relative to the play area 5a.

The protrusion 1015 is formed in a long protrusion extending along the outer periphery of the play area 5a between the function display forming portion 1013 and the play area 5a. When the worker moves his/her hand along the front surface 1000x of the previous component 1000 when transporting the play board 5, the protrusion 1015 abuts against the protrusion 1015 to restrict the movement. This notifies the worker that there is a part (play area 5a) on the inside of the play board 5 that should not be touched, and prevents the worker's hand from coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, so that the game board 5 can be transported safely. The protrusion 1015 may be formed along the outer end (inner end of the previous component 1000) of the play area 5a (formed integrally with the outer sharp portion 5c4), and the worker can be notified that there is a part (play area 5a) on the inside of the protrusion 1015 that should not be touched. In addition, it is preferable that the protrusions 1015 are formed on the inside of the game board 5 relative to the gentle surface portion 5c1, so that when the game board 5 is transported, the protrusions 1015 come into contact with the hand of the worker who is guided by the gentle surface portion 5c1 and moves along the front surface 5x of the game board 5, thereby informing the worker that there are areas on the inside of the game board 5 that should not be touched, and the worker's hand is prevented from coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center device 2500, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

In the front component 1000 of this embodiment, the amount of protrusion (degree of unevenness) of the protrusion 1015 from the front surface 1000x of the front component 1000 is greater than the amount of protrusion (degree of unevenness) of the uneven surface 5p1, and at least a part of the uneven surface 5p1 is formed on the outside of the protrusion 1015. In other words, at a predetermined location on the front surface 5x of the game board 5 (for example, the area from the front surface 5x where the specific part 5c is formed to the game area 5), the amount of protrusion (degree of unevenness) increases from the outside to the inside of the game board 5, so that a worker who is transporting the game board 5 can be notified that there are parts on the inside of the game board 5 that should not be touched, and the worker's hands can be prevented from coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center role 2500, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

The configuration of the specific portion 5c formed on the edge portion 5b of the game board 5 described above can also be applied to the specific portion 1100c formed on the edge portion 1100b of the game panel 1100. That is, the uneven surface 5p1 may be formed on the gentle surface portion 1100c1 of the game panel 1100 and the front surface of the game panel 1100, or the front step portion 5p2 may be formed on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[Summary A]
A1: The gaming machine comprises an outer frame, a main frame which is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board which is attached to and detachable from the main frame, and the gaming board has a plate-shaped gaming board on the front side of which is formed a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a box-shaped rear component attached to the rear surface of the gaming board, and a gaming board outer edge wall which protrudes rearward from the outer edge of the gaming board, and the rear component is attached to the inside of the gaming board outer edge wall.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1, which is an amusement machine, comprises an outer frame 2 formed in a rectangular shape, a main frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so as to be detachable. The game board 5 has a game panel 1100, which is a plate-shaped game board with a game area 5a on the front side where game balls can flow down, a rear unit 3000, which is a box-shaped rear component attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and an outer edge wall portion 5p6, which is a game board outer edge wall portion that protrudes rearward from the outer edge of the game panel 1100. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 is located on the outside of the rear unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1100, so when a worker transports the game board 5, the fingers wrapped around the rear side of the game board 5 can easily hook onto the outer edge wall portion 5p6, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. In addition, even if the rear unit 3000 is removed, the worker can hook his fingers on the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5, so the worker can firmly hold the game board 5, which further contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

A2: The game board further has a sloped portion continuing to the rear top of the outer edge wall portion of the game board. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a rear sloped portion 5p7 which is a sloped portion continuing to the rear top of the outer edge wall portion 5p6. Therefore, when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, the fingers of the worker hooked on the outer edge wall portion 5p6 are placed on the rear sloped portion 5p7, reducing discomfort such as pain felt by the fingers of the worker hooked on the outer edge wall portion 5p6. This allows the worker to hold the game board 5 more reliably, further contributing to the safe transport of the game board 5. In addition, the rear slope 5p7 can increase the strength of the game panel 1100, and even if a force is applied to the game panel 1100 in a direction that twists the game panel 1100 when the game board 5 is transported, it can suppress the bending of the game panel 1100 and prevent damage to the obstacle nails N, the center gimmick 2500, etc.

A3: The inclined surface portion has a slope that slopes from the rear to the front from the outside to the inside of the game board. Specifically, the rear inclined surface portion 5p7 slopes from the rear to the front from the outside to the inside of the game board, making it easier for the operator's fingers to be placed on the rear side of the game board 5 without colliding with the fingers when they are placed on the game board.

A4: The game board further has a protrusion protruding from the back surface of the game board inside the inclined portion. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a back surface step portion 5p8, which is a protrusion protruding from the back surface of the game panel 1100 inside the rear inclined portion. Therefore, when the hand of a worker who is trying to engage the outer edge wall portion 5p6 during transportation of the game board 5 from which the rear unit 3000 has been removed comes into contact with the back surface step portion 5p8, the worker can be notified through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 that there are areas inside the back surface step portion 5p8 that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500. This further prevents contact between the hand of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely.

A5: The game board further has an exposed portion that is not covered by the previous component and where a part of the game board is exposed to the front of the game board. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a front exposed portion 5p3 that is not covered by the previous component 1000 and where a part of the game panel 1100 is exposed to the front 5x of the game board 5. This reduces the front-to-rear thickness of the outer edge of the game board 5 by the front-to-rear thickness of the previous component 1000, making it easier for an operator to grip the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5. This prevents the operator's hand from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center gimmick 2500, making it even safer to transport the game board 5.

A6: The exposed portions are formed in pairs on either the top, bottom, left or right opposing edges of the game board. Specifically, the front exposed portions 5p3 are formed in pairs on, for example, opposing outer edges on the top and bottom of the game board 5, making it easy for an operator to hold the game board 5 with both hands when transporting the game board 5. This prevents the operator's hands from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center gimmick 2500, making it even safer to transport the game board 5.

A7: The game board further has a metal member provided along the side of the game board. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a side metal plate 5p4, which is a metal member provided along the side of the game panel 1100, so that the strength of the outer edge of the left and right direction of the game board 5 can be increased, and when the outer edge of the left and right direction of the game board 5 is gripped by an operator to transport the game board 5, the outer edge of the left and right direction of the game board 5 can be prevented from being damaged by the weight of the game board 5 or the force with which the operator grips the game board 5, and the game board 5 can be transported even more safely.

A8: The game board further has a gentle surface that smoothly connects the front and side of the game board. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a gentle surface portion 1100c1 that smoothly connects the front and side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, when transporting the game board 5 from which the previous component 1000 has been removed, the worker can be visually guided so that the hand comes into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 comes into contact with the two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, thereby guiding the worker to carry the game board 5. It can also guide the user tactilely, reducing discomfort to the worker caused by the contact of the outer edge of the game panel 1100 with the hands, and can suggest the gripping position to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game board 5 from which the previous component 1000 has been removed. It can also reduce the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the play area 5a, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, and can safely transport the game board 5.

A9: The game board 5 is formed on the side of the rear component, and further has a stepped portion from the outside to the inside from the front to the rear of the game board. Specifically, the game board 5 is formed on the side of the rear unit 3000, and further has a rear stepped portion 5p5 which is a stepped portion from the outside to the inside from the front to the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, when a worker transporting the game board 5 grasps the outer edge of the game board 5, the worker's fingers can be hooked on the rear stepped portion 5p5, and the worker's hands can be prevented from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, making the game board 5 even safer to transport. In addition, by forming the rear step portion 5p5, the front-to-rear thickness of the outer edge of the game board 5 is reduced by the front-to-rear thickness from the rear step portion 5p5 to the rearmost surface of the rear unit 3000, making it easier for workers to grasp the game board 5 when transporting it, and preventing the worker's hands from accidentally coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center gimmick 2500, making it even safer to transport the game board 5.

[Summary B]
B1: The gaming machine comprises an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be able to open and close, and a gaming board attached to the main frame so as to be able to be attached and detached, the gaming board having a plate-shaped gaming board on the front side of which is formed a gaming area through which gaming balls can flow down, a front component attached to the front of the gaming board and defining the outer periphery of the gaming area, and a plurality of uneven portions formed on the front surface of the front component, the plurality of uneven portions having a specific uneven portion formed with a predetermined degree of unevenness, and a special uneven portion located on the front surface of the front component more inward than the specific uneven portion and formed with a greater degree of unevenness than the specific uneven portion.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1, which is a gaming machine, comprises an outer frame 2 formed in a rectangular frame shape, a main frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, and a gaming board 5 attached to and detachable from the main frame 4. The gaming board 5 has a gaming panel 1100, which is a plate-shaped gaming board on whose front side a gaming area 5a into which gaming balls can flow is formed, a front component 1000 which is a front component attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 and which defines the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of uneven parts formed on the front surface 1000x of the front component 1000. The multiple uneven parts have an uneven surface 5p1, which is a specific uneven part formed with a predetermined degree of unevenness, and a front step part 5p2, which is located on the front surface of the front component and is located inside the uneven surface 5p1 and is formed with a greater degree of unevenness than the uneven surface 5p1. This notifies the worker when transporting the game board 5 that there are parts on the inside of the game board 5 that should not be touched, and prevents the worker's hands from coming into contact with the guide nails N or the center role 2500, allowing the game board 5 to be transported safely.

B2: The game board further has a gentle surface that smoothly connects the front and side of the game board, and the specific uneven portion is also formed on the gentle surface. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a gentle surface portion 5c1 that smoothly connects the front 5x and side 5y of the game board 5, and the uneven surface 5p1 is also formed on the gentle surface portion 5c1. Therefore, when the hand of the worker guided to the gentle surface portion 5c1 comes into contact with the uneven surface 5p1, the worker does not feel any discomfort such as pain, and the gentle surface portion 5c1 also acts as a slip prevention so that the hand of the worker does not slip from the gentle surface portion 5c1. The game board 5 is prevented from slipping off the hand of the worker, and damage caused by the game board 5 falling can be prevented. The game board 5 is prevented from slipping off the hand of the worker, and the hand of the worker comes into contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500 or falls on the foot of the worker, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

The gentle surface is formed on one of the edges of the game board, either above, below, left, or right. Specifically, the gentle surface portion 5c1 is formed on one of the outer edge portions 5b1 of the game board 5, either above, below, left, or right, which reduces the space in which the gentle surface portion 5c1 is formed, thereby making it easier to design the game board 5.

B3: The front component is an opaque dark color. Specifically, the front component 1000 may be formed of, for example, a dark resin, or may have a dark sticker, sheet, or film attached to its surface, or may be colored with a dark paint. The dark-colored front component 1000 has a lower reflectance than light-colored components such as white or yellow, and therefore can suppress the reflection of light irradiated from multiple points on the game board 5 on the surface of the front component 1000, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game, and can increase the visibility of the uneven surface 5p1 to the worker transporting the game board 5. When transporting the game board 5, it is possible to increase the possibility that the worker's hand can be guided to the surface smooth surface portion 5c1 of the front component 1000 on which the uneven surface 5p1 is formed, and it is possible to further suppress the worker's mistaken contact with the guide nail N or the center role 2500, and the game board 5 can be transported safely.

B4: The game board further has a recess on the surface of the preceding component part, the recess having a surface area larger than the specified unevenness of the specific unevenness part, and the recess has at least one label attached to the front surface of the recess. The game board also has a light-emitting part that irradiates light through an opening formed in the recess. Specifically, the game board 5 further has a function display forming part 1013, which is a recess having a surface area larger than the specified unevenness of the uneven surface 5p1, on the front surface 1000x of the preceding component part 1000, and the function display forming part 1013 has at least one label, a status label, attached to the front surface of the function display forming part 1013. The game board 5 also has a light-emitting part that irradiates light through an opening formed in the function display forming part 1013. Therefore, due to the angular shape of the step portion 1013a of the function display forming portion 1013, when it comes into contact with the hand of an operator carrying the game board 5, it is possible to notify the operator that the function display forming portion 1013 is an area that should not be touched, and damage to the status label and the light-emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 can be suppressed.

B5: The side of the game board is formed flat with no specific unevenness. Specifically, the side of the game board 5 is formed flat with no uneven surface 5p1, and when the uneven surface 5p1 is formed on the side 5y of the game board 5 (side 1000y of the component 1000 and the side of the game panel 1100), the uneven surface 5p1 acts as a slip prevention between the hand of the worker holding the game board 5 and the side 5y of the game board 5. For example, when the worker holding the game board 5 removes his/her hand from the outer edge of the game board 5, the worker's hand gets caught on the side 5y of the game board 5, and a force acts to remove the component 1000 forward from the game panel 1100, eliminating the risk of damage to the outer edge of the component 1000.

[Modification 1 of the above constituent member]
In the above embodiment, the basic configuration of the component 1000 of the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the component 1000 is a component that is assembled (hereinafter may be described as attached) to the game panel 1100, and a plurality of positioning pins are formed on the rear surface of the component 1000 for positioning the component 1000 relative to the game panel. Conventionally, during the assembly work (hereinafter may be described as mounting work) of the component 1000, the hand of the worker holding the component 1000 may come into contact with the positioning pins, causing discomfort to the worker. In addition, the component 1000 before being assembled to the game panel 1100 may be placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, and the rear surface of the component 1000 may come into contact with the workbench or floor and be damaged. Below, an embodiment in which the component 1000 has been modified in order to solve such a problem will be described.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so the following will describe the configuration of the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100 in detail, and will omit a description of the other components of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 191 is a front perspective view showing a part of the game board 5, specifically a front perspective view showing the game panel 1100 and a part of the preceding component 1000 before it is assembled to the game panel 1100. Figure 192 is a rear perspective view showing a part of the game board 5, specifically a rear perspective view showing the game panel 1100 and a part of the preceding component 1000 before it is assembled to the game panel 1100.

As shown in Figures 191 and 192, the game board 5 includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 having a game area 5a formed on the front side thereof and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and a plate-shaped front component 1000 that is attached to the front portion of the game panel 1100 and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 each have an external shape that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front.

As described above, the front component 1000 has an outer rail 1001 which, when viewed from the front, extends in an arc shape from the lower left end in a clockwise circumferential direction, passing through the upper central end and extending diagonally to the upper right; a lower right rail 1004 which slopes linearly from the right end of the out-guiding section 1003 to near the right edge of the front component 1000 so that the right end is slightly higher; and a right rail 1005 which extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the front component 1000. The front component 1000 further has a plate-shaped panel decoration section 1020 provided on the outside of the outer rail 1001, the right rail 1005, and the lower right rail 1004. The panel decoration section 1020 is composed of a lower left panel decoration section 1021 located at the lower left when viewed from the front, an upper left panel decoration section 1022 located at the upper left when viewed from the front, an upper right panel decoration section 1023 located at the upper right when viewed from the front, and a lower right panel decoration section 1024 located at the lower right when viewed from the front.

The lower left panel decorative portion 1021 is formed in a roughly triangular shape in front view by the bottom and left sides of the previous component 1000 and the arc of the outer rail 1001. The lower left panel decorative portion 1021 is formed with a stamp attachment portion 1012 that has a flat surface and makes it easy to attach stamps, and a protrusion 1015 that comes into contact when an operator moves their hand along the previous component 1000 when transporting the game board 5, thereby notifying the operator that there is a game area 5a on the inside that should not be touched.

The upper left panel decorative portion 1022 is formed in a generally triangular shape in front view by the left and top edges of the previous component 1000 and the arc of the outer rail 1001. The upper left panel decorative portion 1022 is formed with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, a function display forming portion 1013 to which a status label indicating the light emission status of the light emitting portion of the function display unit 1400 is attached, and the like.

The upper right panel decorative portion 1023 is formed in a generally triangular shape in front view by the upper and right sides of the previous component 1000 and the arcs of the outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005. The upper right panel decorative portion 1023 is formed with a label attachment portion 1014 to which a display label showing the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot probability and the probability of a special bonus is attached. The display label is formed by printing the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot probability and the probability of a special bonus on a sticker, sheet, film, etc.

The lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in front view by the right side of the previous component 1000, the bottom side of the previous component 1000, the straight line of the lower right rail 1004, and a straight line connecting the straight line of the lower right rail 1004 and the bottom side of the previous component 1000. The lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is formed with, for example, an inspection-completed label attachment portion 1014a to which an inspection-completed label indicating that the pachinko machine 1 has been inspected can be affixed.

The panel decoration part 1020 of the previous component 1000 is formed with a plurality of positioning pins 1017, 1018 that protrude from the back surface toward the gaming panel 1100. The previous component 1000 is positioned relative to the gaming panel 1100 so as to correspond to a preset position by fitting the plurality of positioning pins 1017, 1018 of the panel decoration part 1020 into a plurality of mounting holes 1127, 1128 of the gaming panel 1100. The panel decoration part 1020 may be in a form in which mounting holes are formed in place of some of the plurality of positioning pins 1017, 1018, and the previous component 1000 may be positioned relative to the gaming panel 1100 so as to correspond to a preset position by the positioning pins or mounting holes of the panel decoration part 1020 and the positioning pins or mounting holes of the gaming panel 1100.

Figure 193 is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the front component 1000 shown in Figure 192. Figure 194 is a side view showing a portion of the front component placed on a flat surface. As shown in Figures 193 and 194, the multiple positioning pins 1017, 1018 formed on the rear surface of the panel decorative portion 1020 are composed of multiple first positioning pins 1017 and at least one second positioning pin 1018 that is shorter than the first positioning pin 1017.

Even if the panel decorative part 1020 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor before being assembled to the game panel 1100, the multiple first positioning pins 1017 extending rearward from the rear surface of the panel decorative part 1020 abut against the flat surface, preventing the rear of the component 1000 from coming into contact with the flat surface. In other words, the component 1000 can be placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor using the first positioning pins 1017 as a fulcrum, preventing the rear surface of the component 1000 from coming into contact with the flat surface and being damaged, improving the ease of assembly of the component 1000.

In this embodiment, the first positioning pin 1017 is formed on the rear surface of each of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper left panel decorative portion 1022, the upper right panel decorative portion 1023, and the lower right panel decorative portion 1024, and is formed so that the length from the rear surface to the tip of the previous component 1000 is equal. With such a first positioning pin 1017, when the previous component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, the first positioning pin 1017 can support the previous component 1000 in a balanced manner, further preventing the rear surface of the previous component 1000 from contacting the flat surface and being damaged, and improving the ease of assembly of the previous component 1000.

The position of the first positioning pin 1017 formed on the panel decoration part 1020 may be such that the first positioning pin 1017 can support the previous component 1000 in a balanced manner when the previous component 1000 is placed on a flat surface. It is preferable that the first positioning pin 1017 is formed on at least two or more panel decoration parts among the lower left panel decoration part 1021, the upper left panel decoration part 1022, the upper right panel decoration part 1023, and the lower right panel decoration part 1024, and it is more preferable that the first positioning pin 1017 is formed on each end part of the panel decoration part 1020, which is generally rectangular in front view. The number of first positioning pins 1017 formed on the panel decoration part 1020 may be such that the first positioning pin 1017 can support the previous component 1000 in a balanced manner when the previous component 1000 is placed on a flat surface, and it is preferable that at least two first positioning pins 1017 are formed.

195(a) is a perspective view showing the first positioning pin 1017. As shown in FIG. 195(a), the first positioning pin 1017 has a cylindrical axial core extending rearward from the rear surface of the panel decoration part 1020, a tip end on the tip side of the axial core, and a plate-shaped rib extending radially outward from the axial core. The first positioning pin 1017 of this embodiment has four ribs so that the cross section of the base of the first positioning pin 1017 is approximately cross-shaped. Such ribs can increase the strength of the axial core, and when the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, even if an external force acts on the first positioning pin 1017 in the bending direction, the first positioning pin 1017 can be prevented from being damaged.

The tip of the first positioning pin 1017 is formed in a flat shape parallel to the rear surface of the panel decoration part 1020. When the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, the first positioning pin 1017 increases the installation area of the first positioning pin 1017 relative to the flat surface such as a workbench or floor, and can support the component 1000 in a balanced manner, thereby further preventing the rear surface of the component 1000 from contacting the flat surface and being damaged. In addition, the first positioning pin 1017 having a flat tip can reduce the discomfort caused to the worker when the worker's hand comes into contact with the first positioning pin 1017 when the component 1000 is held by the worker, compared to a sharp positioning pin, and can further improve the ease of assembly of the component 1000. The tip of the first positioning pin 1017 may be formed into a rounded hemispherical shape, which can further reduce the discomfort felt by the worker when the worker's hand comes into contact with the first positioning pin 1017.

Figure 195 (b) is a perspective view showing a modified first positioning pin 1017a. As shown in Figure 195 (b), the tip of the first positioning pin 1017a, which is a modified example of the first positioning pin 1017, is formed into a substantially cross-shaped plane by a cylindrical shaft portion and a rib extending from the shaft portion. When the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, such a first positioning pin 1017a can further increase the installation area of the first positioning pin 1017a relative to the flat surface such as a workbench or floor, and can support the component 1000 in a balanced manner. In this embodiment, the first positioning pin 1017 has four ribs and at least the cross section of the base is approximately cross-shaped, but the first positioning pin 1017 may have at least one rib. For example, if there is one rib, the ease of forming the first positioning pin 1017 is improved, whereas if there are six ribs, the installation area of the first positioning pin 1017 on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor can be further increased.

The first positioning pin 1017 may be formed in a so-called boss shape. Such a first positioning pin 1017 passes through a mounting hole in the gaming panel 1100 when the component 1000 is positioned on the gaming panel 1100, and can be used as a mounting hole for a member to be attached to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100. In more detail, the component to be attached to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 is fixed to the first positioning pin 1017 by a fixing member such as a screw so that the component 1000 and the member attached to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 sandwich the gaming panel 1100 from the front and rear directions.

The length of the first positioning pin 1017 is longer than the length of the second positioning pin 1018 described later, and when the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface, the second positioning pin 1018 can be prevented from contacting the flat surface, and the second positioning pin 1018 can be prevented from contacting the flat surface and being damaged. In addition, the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018 can be reduced, and the ease of forming the second positioning pin 1018 can be improved. Specifically, the length of the first positioning pin 1017 is preferably about 10.0 mm, and is within a range not exceeding 10.0 mm, which is the thickness of the game panel 1100, so that the worker can easily grasp the component 1000 placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface, that is, the worker's fingertips can easily enter between the component 1000 placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface and the flat surface, and is formed to the same length as the thickness of the game panel 1100.

The diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017 is larger than the diameter of the base of the second positioning pin 1018 described later, so that even if an external force in the bending direction acts on the first positioning pin 1017 when the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor, the first positioning pin 1017 can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018 can be reduced, and the ease of forming the second positioning pin 1018 can be improved. Specifically, the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017 is preferably about 6.0 mm, so that the stability of the component 1000 placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor can be ensured, and even if an external force in the bending direction acts on the first positioning pin 1017, the first positioning pin 1017 can be prevented from being damaged. The first positioning pin 1017 may be formed, for example, in a tapered shape in which the diameter of the tip is smaller than the diameter of the base, or in a column shape in which the diameter of the base and the diameter of the tip are approximately the same.

In addition, when the component 1000 is attached to the game panel 1100 and then transported as the game board 5, the upper side of the component 1000 tends to be easily grasped by the worker. Therefore, it is preferable that the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017 formed on the upper left panel decorative part 1022 and the upper right panel decorative part 1023 is larger than the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017 formed on the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024. This increases the strength of the first positioning pin 1017 formed on the upper left panel decorative part 1022 and the upper right panel decorative part 1023, and prevents the component 1000 from being damaged when the game board 5 is transported.

In this embodiment, the second positioning pins 1018 are formed one on the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and two on the lower right panel decorative portion 1024, and are formed so that the lengths from the rear surface to the tip of the panel decorative portion 1020 are equal. With such second positioning pins 1018, when the front component 1000 is positioned on the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent the position of the panel decorative portion 1020 relative to the game panel 1100 from shifting due to, for example, bending caused by the weight of the front component 1000. The position of the second positioning pin 1018 formed in the panel decoration portion 1020 only needs to be such that it is possible to prevent the position of the previous component 1000 from shifting relative to the gaming panel 1100 when the previous component 1000 is positioned on the gaming panel 1100. It is preferable that the second positioning pin 1018 is formed in at least one or more panel decoration portions among the lower left panel decoration portion 1021, the upper left panel decoration portion 1022, the upper right panel decoration portion 1023, and the lower right panel decoration portion 1024, and it is even more preferable that it is formed at each end of the panel decoration portion 1020, which is generally rectangular in front view.

The second positioning pin 1018 may be formed near the first positioning pin 1017, and the positioning accuracy of the first positioning pin 1017 can be improved. The second positioning pin 1018 may be formed at approximately equal intervals between the two first positioning pins 1017 formed in the panel decoration part 1020, and when the previous component 1000 is positioned on the game panel 1100, the position of the previous component 1000 relative to the game panel 1100 can be prevented from shifting in a balanced manner. The second positioning pins 1018 may be formed at approximately equal intervals between the two first positioning pins 1017 formed in the panel decoration part 1020, and when the previous component 1000 is positioned on the game panel 1100, the position of the previous component 1000 relative to the game panel 1100 can be prevented from shifting in a balanced manner.

The second positioning pin 1018 has a cylindrical axial core portion extending rearward from the rear surface portion of the panel decorative portion 1020, and a tip portion on the tip side of the axial core portion. Since the second positioning pin 1018 does not have a rib like the first positioning pin 1017, when the component 1000 is positioned on the gaming panel 1100, it can be easily fitted into the mounting hole of the gaming panel 1100, improving the ease of assembly of the component 1000 to the gaming panel 1100.

The tip of the second positioning pin 1018 is formed in a rounded hemispherical shape, which can reduce the discomfort felt by the worker when the worker's hand comes into contact with the second positioning pin 1018. The tip of the second positioning pin 1018 may be formed in a sharp or flat shape, which can be easily fitted into the mounting hole of the gaming panel 1100 when the component 1000 is positioned on the gaming panel 1100, further improving the ease of assembly of the component 1000 to the gaming panel 1100.

The length of the second positioning pin 1018 is formed shorter than the length of the first positioning pin 1017, and when the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or a floor surface, the second positioning pin 1018 can be prevented from contacting the flat surface, and the second positioning pin 1018 can be prevented from contacting the flat surface and being damaged. In addition, the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018 can be reduced, and the ease of forming the second positioning pin 1018 can be improved. Specifically, the length of the second positioning pin 1018 is preferably 1/2 or less of the length of the first positioning pin 1017, and more preferably 1/3 or less of the length of the first positioning pin 1017. Such a second positioning pin 1018 can further prevent the second positioning pin 1018 from contacting the flat surface when the component 1000 is placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or a floor surface, and can further reduce the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018. More specifically, the length of the second positioning pin 1017 is preferably about 5.0 mm.

The diameter of the base of the second positioning pin 1018 is smaller than the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017, and the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018 can be reduced, and the ease of forming the second positioning pin 1018 can be improved. Specifically, the diameter of the base of the second positioning pin 1018 is preferably 1/2 or less than the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017, and more preferably 1/3 or less than the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017. When positioning the component 1000 relative to the gaming panel 1100, such a second positioning pin 1018 can be easily fitted into the mounting hole of the gaming panel 1100, and the amount of resin material used to form the second positioning pin 1018 can be reduced. More specifically, the diameter of the base of the second positioning pin 1017 is preferably about 2.0 mm.

The gaming panel 1100 has a number of mounting holes formed therein corresponding to the first positioning pin 1017 and the second positioning pin 1018 of the previous component 1000. The mounting hole corresponding to the first positioning pin 1017 may be, for example, a cylindrical hole corresponding to the diameter of the base of the first positioning pin 1017, or may have a cross section corresponding to the shape of the rib. In more detail, the mounting hole of the gaming panel 1100 corresponding to the first positioning pin 1017 may be a hole having a cross section corresponding to the shape of the rib of the first positioning pin 1017 when the rib of the first positioning pin 1017 has a cross section, and this can strengthen the fit with the first positioning pin 1017 and improve the positioning accuracy of the previous component 1000 relative to the gaming panel 1100.

As described above, the gaming panel 1100 has a panel plate 1110 and a panel holder 1120 attached to the periphery of the panel plate 1110, but the gaming panel 1100 may be an embodiment in which the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 are integrally formed as a plate-like member. In an embodiment in which the gaming panel 1100 is a plate-like member, the strength of the gaming panel 1100 is increased, whereas in an embodiment in which the gaming panel 1100 is configured by attaching the panel holder 1120 to the panel plate 1110, the resin material used to form the gaming panel 1100 can be reduced.

[Modification 2 of the above component]
In the above-described embodiment, an aspect of the component 1000 has been described in which the lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper left panel decorative portion 1022, the upper right panel decorative portion 1023, and the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 are integrally formed. However, the component 1000 may also have a panel decorative portion 1020 that is formed in multiple divided pieces and assembled to the game panel 1100 to be integrated together, and such an aspect of the component 1000 will be described in detail below.

The panel decoration part 1020 in the above-mentioned embodiment has a lower left panel decoration part 1021, an upper left panel decoration part 1022, an upper right panel decoration part 1023, and a lower right panel decoration part 1024 that are integrally formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, whereas the panel decoration part 1020 in this embodiment has a decoration part divided into at least two parts at any position, and each decoration part is integrated into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front after being assembled to the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the panel decoration part 1020 is divided between the lower left panel decoration part 1021 and the upper left panel decoration part 1022, and between the upper right panel decoration part 1023 and the lower right panel decoration part 1024, and the configuration of the panel decoration part 1020 divided into three parts, the lower left panel decoration part 1021, the lower right panel decoration part 1024, the upper left panel decoration part 1022, and the upper right panel decoration part 1023 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the upper panel decoration part), will be described in detail.

At least one first positioning pin 1017 is formed on each of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024. When one first positioning pin 1017 is formed, it is desirable to form the first positioning pin 1017 near the center of gravity of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 or the lower right panel decorative part 1024, and the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 can be placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface with the first positioning pin 1017 as a fulcrum, and the rear surface of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 can be prevented from coming into contact with the flat surface and damaging the rear surface of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024.

Furthermore, when two first positioning pins 1017 are formed, it is desirable that the first positioning pins 1017 are formed on a line passing through the center of gravity of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 or the lower right panel decorative part 1024, with the center of gravity on either side, so that the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 can be stably placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface using the two first positioning pins 1017 as fulcrums, and damage to the rear surfaces of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 due to contact with the flat surface can be further prevented. Furthermore, when three or more first positioning pins 1017 are formed, it is desirable that the first positioning pins 1017 are formed at approximately equal intervals around the center of gravity of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 or the lower right panel decorative part 1024, so that the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 can be placed more stably on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface, with the three or more first positioning pins 1017 as fulcrums, and damage to the rear surfaces of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the lower right panel decorative part 1024 can be prevented by the rear surfaces coming into contact with the flat surface.

At least one second positioning pin 1018 is formed on each of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1024. It is desirable that at least one second positioning pin 1018 is formed in the vicinity of the first positioning pin 1017, so that when the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 or the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is positioned on the game panel 1100, the positioning accuracy by the first positioning pin 1027 can be improved.

At least one first positioning pin 1017 is formed on the upper panel decorative part of the panel decorative part 1020. When one first positioning pin 1017 is formed, it is desirable that the first positioning pin 1017 is formed near the center of gravity of the upper panel decorative part, and the upper panel decorative part can be placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface using the first positioning pin 1017 as a fulcrum, and damage to the rear surface of the upper panel decorative part due to contact with the flat surface can be prevented.

In addition, when two first positioning pins 1017 are formed, it is preferable that the first positioning pins 1017 are formed on a line passing through the center of gravity of the upper panel decorative part, sandwiching the center of gravity, so that the upper panel decorative part can be stably placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface with the two first positioning pins 1017 as fulcrums, and damage to the rear surface of the upper panel decorative part due to contact with the flat surface can be further suppressed. In addition, when three or more first positioning pins 1017 are formed, it is preferable that the first positioning pins 1017 are formed at approximately equal intervals around the center of gravity of the upper panel decorative part, so that the upper panel decorative part can be stably placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor surface with the three or more first positioning pins 1017 as fulcrums, and damage to the rear surface of the upper panel decorative part due to contact with the flat surface can be further suppressed.

At least one second positioning pin 1018 is formed on the upper panel decorative portion of the panel decorative portion 1020. It is desirable that at least one second positioning pin 1018 is formed near the first positioning pin 1017, and when the upper panel decorative portion is positioned on the gaming panel 1100, the positioning accuracy by the first positioning pin 1017 can be improved. The second positioning pin 1018 may be formed between two first positioning pins 1017, or two second positioning pins 1018 may be formed so as to sandwich the first positioning pin 1017, and when the upper panel decorative portion is positioned on the gaming panel 1100, the positioning accuracy can be improved in a well-balanced manner.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of the first positioning pin 1017 and the second positioning pin 1018 formed on the panel decorative portion 1020 in the component 1000 having the panel decorative portion 1020 integrally formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the component 1000 having the panel decorative portion 1020 divided into multiple parts, was described. Below, the configuration of the front portion of the component 1000 having the panel decorative portion 1020 in which the first positioning pin 1017 is formed will be described in detail.

Conventionally, in the assembly process of a pachinko machine 1, multiple panel decoration parts 1020 may be stacked vertically on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor before being assembled to the game panel 1100. When one panel decoration part 1020 is stacked on top of the other panel decoration part 1020, the front part of one panel decoration part 1020 comes into contact with the rear part of the other panel decoration part 1020, and there is a risk of damaging both the one and the other panel decoration parts 1020. In particular, when multiple positioning pins 1017, 1018 formed on the other panel decoration part 1020 slide on the front part of one panel decoration part 1020, there is a risk of the front part of one panel decoration part 1020 being damaged.

In addition to the surface gentle surface portion 5c1 and surface recess portion 5c2 described above, a fitting recess portion 1019 into which the first positioning pin 1017 can be fitted is formed on the front surface of the front component 1000 (panel decoration portion 1020) of this embodiment. The fitting recess portion 1019 is formed at a position facing the first positioning pin 1017 on the front surface of the panel decoration portion 1020 (a position where the axis of the first positioning pin 1017 and the center of the fitting recess portion 1019 coincide), and may be a cylindrical recess corresponding to the diameter of the tip of the first positioning pin 1017, or may be a recess having a cross section corresponding to the shape of the rib of the first positioning pin 1017.

When multiple panel decoration parts 1020 are stacked on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor before being assembled to the game panel 1100, the fitting recess 1019 of the panel decoration part 1020 allows the other panel decoration part 1020 to be stacked on top of the first panel decoration part 1020 supported on a flat surface by the first positioning pin 1017 so that the first positioning pin 1017 of the other panel decoration part 1020 fits into the fitting recess 1019 of the first panel decoration part 1020. This prevents the first positioning pin 1017 of the other panel decoration part 1020 from sliding on the front part of the first panel decoration part 1020, preventing damage to the front part of the first panel decoration part 1020 and allowing the other panel decoration part 1020 to be stably placed on the first panel decoration part 1020.

The diameter of the fitting recess 1019 of the panel decoration part 1020 is preferably larger than the diameter of the tip of the first positioning pin 1027 from the viewpoint of facilitating fitting the first positioning pin 1017 and suppressing sliding of the fitted first positioning pin 1017. In addition, the depth of the fitting recess 1019 of the panel decoration part 1020 is preferably formed shallower than the length of the first positioning pin 1017 from the viewpoint of suppressing contact between the front and rear surfaces of the stacked front component 1000.

It is preferable that the fitting recesses 1019 of the panel decorative portion 1020 are formed to correspond to all of the first positioning pins 1017 formed on the panel decorative portion 1020, regardless of whether the panel decorative portion 1020 is divided or not, and this can prevent damage to the front portion of the panel decorative portion 1020 when multiple panel decorative portions 1020 are stacked and placed on a flat surface such as a workbench or floor.

[Modification 3 of the above component]
In the above embodiment, the configuration of the component 1000 having the panel decoration portion 1020 on which the multiple positioning pins 1017 and 1018 are formed has been described, but in the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100, the component 1000 is a member that is lifted by an operator from a state in which it is placed in a storage location such as a workbench or a storage box, positioned relative to the game panel 1100, or held by the operator, and conventionally, from the viewpoint of suppressing damage to the component 1000, it has been difficult for an operator to easily hold the component 1000, and there has been a risk of reducing the workability of the installation work, such as lifting the component 1000 placed in a storage location such as a workbench or a storage box, and positioning the component 1000 relative to the game panel 1100. Below, an embodiment in which the component 1000 has been modified in order to solve such a problem will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the configuration of the component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Therefore, the configuration of the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 will be described in detail below, and the other configurations of the pachinko machine 1 will not be described. Figure 196 is a perspective view showing a part of the game panel 1100 to which the component 1000 is attached.

The game board 5 includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that has a game area 5a formed on the front side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a plate-shaped front component 1000 that is attached to the front part of the game panel 1100 and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 each have an outer shape that is roughly rectangular when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 196, the front component 1000 has an outer wall portion that forms a space partially open to the outside between the front component 1000 and the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the outer wall portion has at least a plate-like portion that is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100. Below, this configuration will be described in detail with respect to the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 of the front component 1000.

The lower right panel decorative portion 1024 of the previous component 1000 has an outer wall portion 1024a that forms a space 1024b between the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the outer wall portion 1024a, with a portion of the space being open to the outside, and the outer wall portion 1024a has at least a plate-like portion 1024c that is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the outer wall portion 1024a has an arc portion that is arc-shaped when viewed from the front and is formed to stand upright from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a plate-like portion 1024c that extends from the front end of the arc portion parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

According to the lower right panel decoration portion 1024 of the front component 1000 of this embodiment, in the installation work of attaching the front component 1000 to the game panel 1100, for example, when a worker lifts the front component 1000 placed in a storage location such as a workbench or a storage box, the worker can hook his/her fingers on the plate-shaped portion 1024c through the space 1024b, and the worker can easily lift the front component 1000. Also, in the installation work of attaching the front component 1000 to the game panel 1100, for example, when positioning the front component 1000 on the game panel 1100, the worker can hook his/her fingers on the plate-shaped portion 1024c through the space 1024b, and the front component 1000 can be easily attached/detached to/from the game panel 1100. Therefore, the workability of the installation work of attaching the front component 1000 to the game panel 1100 can be improved.

In the gaming panel 1100 to which the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is attached, a space 1024b is formed by the outer wall portion 1024a having an arc portion and a plate-shaped portion 1024c and the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, with the side of the corner portion from the bottom edge to the right edge of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 being open. When an operator grasps the previous component 1000, such space 1024b allows the operator to hook his/her fingers onto the plate-shaped portion 1024c from below or from the right through the space 1024b, and the operator can lift the previous component 1000 even more easily. In addition, the space 1024b may be, for example, a space in which the outer wall portion 1024a has a plate-shaped portion 1024c and a U-shaped portion that is formed to stand forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and has an open side on the right side of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024, or a space in which the side of the lower side of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is open, which can increase the strength of the outer wall portion 1024a and allows an operator to hook his or her fingers on the plate-shaped portion 1024c from below or the right through the space 1024b, allowing the operator to easily lift the previous component 1000.

In this embodiment, the space 1024b is formed in the lower right corner of the lower right panel decorative part 1024, but it may also be formed in the center of the lower end of the lower right panel decorative part 1024 or the center of the right end of the lower right panel decorative part 1024 when viewed from the front. An operator can hook his/her fingers onto the plate-shaped part 1024c from below or from the right through each space 1024b, allowing the operator to easily lift the front component 1000.

The lower right panel decoration portion 1024 of the front component 1000 further has a mounting hole 1024d formed near the plate-shaped portion 1024c. The mounting hole 1024d is a hole into which a fixing member such as a screw is attached to fix the positioned front component 1000 to the game panel 1100, and has a tubular portion into which the fixing member is inserted and a bottom portion formed on the rear end side of the tubular portion into which the head of the fixing member engages, and a hole is formed in the center of the bottom portion through which the shaft portion of the fixing member is inserted. In this embodiment, the front component 1000 positioned relative to the game panel 1100 is fixed to the front portion of the game panel 1100 by a fixing member such as a screw inserted into the mounting hole 1024d.

The component 1000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 by being positioned on the gaming panel 1100 and then fixed with a fixing member or the like. However, when the component 1000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, for example, if a forward external force acts on the component 1000 at a position away from the fixing member, the component 1000 may be significantly deflected, which may cause the component 1000 to become misaligned with respect to the gaming panel 1100. Since the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 of the component 1000 has a plate-shaped portion 1024c, for example, when opening and closing the main frame 4, an operator's fingers or the like may get caught on the plate-shaped portion 1024c, and a forward external force may act on the component 1000 via the plate-shaped portion 1024c. In the front component 1000 of this embodiment, the mounting hole 1024d of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is formed near the plate-shaped portion 1024c, so even if an external force acts on the front component 1000 through the plate-shaped portion 1024c, the deflection of the front component 1000 due to the external force can be suppressed, and the front component 1000 can be prevented from shifting out of position relative to the game panel 1100.

The plate-like portion 1024c of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 may be formed in a box shape with an open back. The plate-like portion 1024c formed in a box shape with an open back allows, for example, a worker to firmly hook his/her fingers on the plate-like portion 1024c through the space 1024b and the space within the plate-like portion 1024c when lifting the component 1000 during the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the gaming panel 1100, allowing the worker to lift the component 1000 even more easily, improving the workability of the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the gaming panel 1100.

The plate-shaped portion 1024c formed in a box shape with an open rear surface may have at least one rib connecting opposing surfaces. The strength of such a plate-shaped portion 1024c is improved by the rib, so that even if, for example, a worker's finger is firmly hooked on the plate-shaped portion 1024c through a space within the plate-shaped portion 1024c, damage to the plate-shaped portion 1024c can be suppressed.

In addition, the component 1000 may have an uneven surface with multiple continuous fine unevenness formed at least on the front part of the plate-shaped part 1024c of the lower right panel decoration part 1024. The uneven surface is a surface on which a wrinkled pattern shape with multiple continuous fine unevenness capable of disturbing light is formed by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern shape is formed by multiple short linear protrusions extending in random directions, and is, for example, a rough pear-skin pattern shape (pear-skin pattern) or a fine geometric pattern shape. When such an uneven surface comes into contact with the worker's hand, it also acts as a slip-proofing to prevent the worker's hand from slipping off the front part of the plate-shaped part 1024c without causing discomfort such as pain to the worker, and the component 1000 is prevented from slipping off the worker's hand, thereby improving the workability of the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100. In addition, the uneven surface formed on the front portion of the component 1000, which has a series of multiple fine projections and recesses, can make the dirt on the front portion of the component 1000 less noticeable even if dirt such as oil and grease adheres to the front portion of the component 1000 when an operator touches the front portion of the component 1000 with bare hands, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game even if the dirt is visually observed by the player.

Although the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 of the previous component 1000 has been described as having an outer wall portion 1024a, a space 1024b, a plate-shaped portion 1024c, and a mounting hole 1024d, for example, the upper right panel decorative portion 1023 may have an outer wall portion 1023a, a space 1023b, a plate-shaped portion 1023c, and a mounting hole 1023d similar to the outer wall portion 1024a, a space 1024b, a plate-shaped portion 1024c, and a mounting hole 1024d, or the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the upper left panel decorative portion 1022 may have an outer wall portion, a space, a plate-shaped portion, and a mounting hole similar to the outer wall portion 1024a, a space 1024b, a plate-shaped portion 1024c, and a mounting hole 1024d.

In addition, in the former component 1000 of this embodiment, the plate-shaped portion 1023c of the upper right panel decorative portion 1023 is formed so as to cover the upper right end of the gaming panel 1100, and the upper right end of the gaming panel 1100 is not visible when viewed from the front, whereas the plate-shaped portion 1024c of the lower right panel decorative portion 1024 is formed so as to expose the lower right end of the gaming panel 1100, and the lower right end of the gaming panel 1100 is visible when viewed from the front. The plate-shaped portion formed so as to cover the gaming panel 1100 makes the gaming panel 1100 not visible when viewed from the front, and for example, makes it possible to make the gripping position when removing the former component 1000 unclear to a person committing fraud against the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the plate-shaped portion formed to expose the gaming panel 1100 allows the gaming panel 1100 to be seen from the front, and for example, can inform an operator removing the component 1000 from the gaming panel 1100 of the gripping position when removing the component 1000. In addition, when the above-mentioned stamp attachment portion 1012 is formed, the stamp attachment portion 1012 becomes visible to the operator, which can prevent the stamp attached to the stamp attachment portion 1012 from being soiled by the operator.

[Modification 4 of the above component]
In the above embodiment, the configuration of the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 of the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the component 1000 is a component that is assembled to the game panel 1100 (hereinafter, may be described as being attached). Conventionally, when an operator transports a game board 5 configured by attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100, the operator's hand may slip on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 and come into contact with obstacle nails and accessories in the game area 5a, causing the obstacle nails to deform, rust on the obstacle nails, and damage to the accessories. In addition, when an operator who holds the game board 5 removes his/her hand from the game board 5 during transportation, the operator's hand may get caught on the side surface 1000y of the component 1000, and a force that causes the component 1000 to be removed forward from the game panel 1100 may act on the component 1000, causing damage such as cracks to the component 1000. In the following, an embodiment in which the component 1000 is further modified to solve these problems will be described.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Therefore, the configuration of the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100 will be described in detail below, and the description of the other components of the pachinko machine 1 will be omitted. Figure 197 is a front perspective view showing the game board 5, specifically, a front perspective view showing the game panel 1100 and the preceding component 1000 attached to the game panel 1100. Figure 198 is an exploded front perspective view showing the game board 5, specifically, a front perspective view showing the game panel 1100 and the preceding component 1000 before it is attached to the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 197 and FIG. 198, the game board 5 has a game panel 1100 in which a game area 5a is formed in which game balls can flow down, and a front component 1000 provided on the front side of the game panel 1100. As described above, the game panel 1100 has a panel plate 1110 and a panel holder 1120 attached to the periphery of the panel plate 1110, and is formed into a plate shape with an approximately rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. In this manner, in a mode in which the game panel 1100 is configured by attaching the panel holder 1120 to the panel plate 1110, the resin material used to form the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Note that the game panel 1100 may be a plate-shaped member in which the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 are integrally formed, and the strength of the game panel 1100 can be increased.

The gaming panel 1100 may also have a front surface gentle portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle portion 1100c2, a back surface recessed portion 1100c3, and an inner surface gentle portion 1100c4 as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 181 to 183. Below, the configuration of a gaming panel 1100 having a front surface gentle portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle portion 1100c2, a back surface recessed portion 1100c3, and an inner surface gentle portion 1100c4 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 181 to 183.

The gentle surface portion 1100c1 may be formed on the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100, and for example, on the front surface 1100x of the gaming panel 1100, it is formed as an inclined surface whose depth in the front-to-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside, and connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y. A worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 tends to avoid contact between the worker's hand and the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y, for example, so as not to feel pain or other discomfort in the hand grasping the game panel 1100. The gentle surface portion 1100c1 can be visually seen by the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100. This reduces discomfort to the worker when the gaming panel 1100 is transported by the worker, and also allows the worker who is unfamiliar with the position of the gaming panel 1100 to be informed of the position of the gaming panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the gaming area 5a, causing deformation of the obstacle nails N, rusting of the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, and allows the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely.

In addition, the surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (for example, a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100, without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely. In addition, if a wrinkle pattern is formed on the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, the wrinkle pattern acts as an anti-slip between the hand of an operator holding the game board 5 and the side surface 5y of the game board 5, and for example, when an operator holding the game board 5 moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the operator's hand may get caught on the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, causing a force to be applied that removes the component 1000 forward from the game panel 1100, which may damage the outer edge of the component 1000. From this viewpoint, it is desirable that the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100 be flat without forming a wrinkle pattern. On the other hand, a wrinkled pattern (for example, a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine bumps) is formed on the surface of the smooth surface portion 1100c1 by surface treatment such as embossing, while the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100 is made flat without any wrinkles. This means that when a worker holds the game panel, the feeling felt by the palm of the hand is different from the feeling felt by the fingertips, and the worker can firmly re-grip the game panel in a position and manner that feels most comfortable to the worker, thereby enabling the worker to transport the game board 5 safely. In addition, although the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 depends on the positional relationship with the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, due to the shape of the step (specific step portion) formed by the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 (the side surface of the partition member) and the front surface 1100x (front surface of the game board) of the game panel 1100, if the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 is close to or flush with the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, the feeling felt by the palm of the hand when the worker grasps it will be different from the feeling felt by the fingertips, so it is desirable that the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 is also flat without forming a wrinkle pattern. Note that, as described above, in an embodiment in which the game panel 1100 is configured by assembling the panel holder 1120 to the panel board 1110, it can be said that it is desirable that the side surface of the panel holder 1120 (the portion covering the side surface of the panel board 1110) is flat without forming a wrinkle pattern.

The back surface 1100c2 may be formed on the outer edge of the game panel 1100, and is formed, for example, on the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100 in an inclined plane such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside, and connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y. The back surface 1100c2 can be visually seen by an operator attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the operator's hand, and can also tactilely guide the operator by contacting the hand of the operator attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 so that the hand comes into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner. In addition, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused by the contact between the outer edge portion 1100b1 and the hand of the worker can be suppressed, and the grip position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the grip position of the game panel 1100. The risk of the obstacle nail N being deformed or rusting on the obstacle nail N, or the center device 2500 being damaged due to the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center device 2500 in the game area 5a can be suppressed, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely. In addition, it is preferable that the back surface portion 1100c2 is formed in a continuous manner so as to correspond to the front surface portion 1100c1 in the front-rear direction, which increases the guidance effect on the worker, and therefore the game panel 1100 can be transported even more safely.

The surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine bumps) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely.

The back recess 1100c3 may be formed on the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100, for example, in a circular concave shape on the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100. The back recess 1100c3 is formed to correspond to the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2 in the front-rear direction, and corresponds to the four fingers of the operator, from the index finger to the little finger, who grasps the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2. Such a back recess 1100c3, together with the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, can contribute to the safe transportation of the gaming panel 1100. The surface of the opening of the back recess 1100c3 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back recess 1100c3 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, thereby contributing to even safer transportation of the game panel 1100.

The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 may be formed on the inner portion of the gaming panel 1100, and is formed, for example, on the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100 as an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z. A worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, for example, may place his/her hand on the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, and in order to avoid causing pain to the hand grasping the game panel 1100, the worker tends to avoid contacting the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z with the hand. The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4, when visible to the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, can visually guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a sharp corner, and by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a single sharp corner. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the inner edge portion 1100b2 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform or rust, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

The gaming panel 1100 may further have an outer edge wall portion 5p6, a rear slope portion 5p7, and a back step portion 5p8, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 187 and 188, which can further reduce contact between the hands of the worker transporting the gaming board 5 and the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500, thereby contributing to safe transportation of the gaming board 5. Below, with reference to Figures 187 and 188, a gaming panel 1100 further having an outer edge wall portion 5p6, a rear slope portion 5p7, and a back step portion 5p8 will be described in detail.

The outer edge wall portion 5p6 may be formed on the outer edge of the game panel 1100, and may be formed, for example, in the shape of a wall that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the game panel 1100 and extends along the outer edge. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 makes it easy for an operator to hook his/her fingers around the rear side of the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5, which contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5, and also allows an operator to hook his/her fingers on the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, which allows the operator to firmly hold the game board 5 and further contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 may be formed in the shape of a wall that extends along the entire circumference of the outer edge of the game panel 1100, or may be formed on a part of the outer edge of the game panel 1100. In addition, it is desirable for the outer edge wall portion 5p6 to be formed in a position corresponding to the gentle surface portion 5c1, etc. in the front-rear direction, which can further contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The rear slope 5p7 may be formed so as to be continuous with the apex of the rear end of the outer edge wall 5p6, for example, formed so as to be connected to the inside of the outer edge wall 5p6. When transporting the game board 5 from which the rear unit 3000 has been removed, the rear slope 5p7 supports the fingers of the worker hooked onto the outer edge wall 5p6, reducing discomfort such as pain felt by the worker's fingers hooked onto the outer edge wall 5p6, allowing the worker to hold the game board 5 more securely and further contributing to the safe transport of the game board 5.

The back step portion 5p8 is formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 at a position inside the rear slope portion 5p7 and outside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so as to protrude from the back surface 1100z of the game panel 1100. When the back step portion 5p8 comes into contact with the hand of a worker who is trying to engage the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, the back step portion 5p8 can inform the worker that there are areas that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500, inside the back step portion 5p8 through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, and the contact between the hand of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500 can be further suppressed, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. From the viewpoint of enhancing the tactile induction effect, it is preferable that the back step portion 5p8 is formed continuously along the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 197 or 198, the component 1000 is provided so as to be located outside the outer periphery of the play area 5a, and divides the outer periphery of the play area 5a. As described above, the component 1000 has a panel decoration part 1020, which is divided into multiple parts outside the outer periphery of the play area 5a. In this embodiment, the panel decoration part 1020 is composed of a lower left panel decoration part 1021 located at the lower left, an upper panel decoration part 1022 located at the upper part, and a lower right panel decoration part 1023 located at the lower right when viewed from the front of the play board 5. Note that the panel decoration part 1020 is not limited to being divided into three parts, the lower left panel decoration part 1021, the upper panel decoration part 1022, and the lower right panel decoration part 1023, but may be divided into two or more parts.

The lower left panel decorative part 1021 is formed by the lower and left sides of the previous component 1000 and the playing area 5a in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front. The lower left panel decorative part 1021 is formed with, for example, a stamp attachment part 1012 that has a flat surface and allows easy attachment of stamps, and a protrusion 1015 that abuts when a worker moves his/her hand along the previous component 1000 when transporting the game board 5, thereby notifying the user that there is a playing area 5a that should not be touched inside. In addition, a joint is formed at the upper end of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 to be butted against the lower end of the left side of the upper panel decorative part 1022, allowing the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the upper panel decorative part 1022 to be easily attached to the game panel 1100.

The upper panel decorative part 1022 is formed in a generally U-shape in front view by the left, right and top sides of the previous component 1000 and the game area 5a. The upper panel decorative part 1022 is formed with, for example, a functional display unit mounting part 1011 to which the above-mentioned functional display unit 1400 is attached, a functional display forming part 1013 to which a status label indicating the light emission state of the light-emitting part of the functional display unit 1400 is attached, and a label attachment part 1014 to which a display label indicating the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot probability and a probability rate is attached. The display label is formed by printing the model information of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot probability and a probability rate on a sticker, sheet, film, etc. In addition, a joint part that is butted against the upper end part of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 is formed at the lower end part on the left side of the upper panel decorative part 1022, so that the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the upper panel decorative part 1022 can be easily attached to the game panel 1100. In addition, an engagement portion is formed at the lower end of the right side of the upper panel decorative portion 1022 to engage with the upper end of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023, allowing the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 to be easily attached to the game panel 1100.

The lower right panel decorative portion 1023 is formed in a generally rectangular shape in front view by the right and bottom edges of the previous component 1000 and the play area 5a. The lower right panel decorative portion 1023 is formed with, for example, an inspection-completed label attachment portion 1014a to which an inspection-completed label indicating that the pachinko machine 1 has been inspected is attached. An engagement portion is formed at the upper end of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 to engage with the lower end of the right side of the upper panel decorative portion 1022, allowing the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 and the upper panel decorative portion 1022 to be easily attached to the play panel 1100.

The lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper panel decorative portion 1022, and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 are positioned relative to the gaming panel 1100 by positioning pins or the like formed on each of them, and then are attached to the gaming panel 1100 by fastening members 1020a such as screws or bolts.

At least one of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper panel decorative portion 1022, and the lower right panel decorative portion 102 (in this embodiment, the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023) has a wrinkled pattern (for example, a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) formed on the front surface 1021x, 1023x by surface treatment such as embossing. Furthermore, no wrinkled pattern is formed on the side surface 1021y of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the side surface 1023y of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023.

In this embodiment, a wrinkled pattern is formed on the front surface 1021x of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the front surface 1023x of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023, which can be visually seen by an operator attempting to grasp the game board 5, thereby visually guiding the operator's hand to the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023. When the wrinkled pattern comes into contact with the operator's hand while transporting the game board 5, the wrinkled pattern acts as an anti-slip surface without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator. This also reduces the risk of the operator's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails or center gimmicks in the game area 5a, which could result in deformation of the obstacle nails, rust on the obstacle nails, or damage to the center gimmicks, and allows the game board 5 to be transported safely. In addition, since there are no wrinkle patterns on the side 1021y of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the side 1023y of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023, when an operator holding the game board 5 moves his or her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the operator's hand is prevented from getting caught on the side 1000y of the previous component 1000 (the side 1021y of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the side 1023y of the lower right panel decorative portion 1023), and damage such as cracks can be prevented from occurring to the previous component 1000 (the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023).

In addition, in this embodiment, even if damage such as cracks occurs in the panel decoration portion 1020 (lower left panel decoration portion 1021 and lower right panel decoration portion 1023) of the previous component 1000 that is held by the worker when the game board 5 is transported to the worker, it is only necessary to replace the damaged parts of the lower left panel decoration portion 1021 and the lower right panel decoration portion 1023 without replacing the entire panel decoration portion 1020 of the previous component 1000, which makes it easy to repair the game board 5 and contributes to safe transportation of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, the wrinkle pattern is formed on the front surface 1021x of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the front surface 1023x of the lower right panel decorative part 1023 of the panel decorative part 1020 of the previous component 1000. However, the wrinkle pattern may also be formed on the front surface 1022x of the upper panel decorative part 1022, or the wrinkle pattern may be formed only on the front surface 1022x of the upper panel decorative part 1022 instead of the front surface 1021x of the lower left panel decorative part 1021 and the front surface 1023x of the lower right panel decorative part 1023. The upper panel decorative portion 1022 is visible to a worker who is about to grasp the game board 5, and thus the hand of the worker can be visually guided to the upper panel decorative portion 1022. When the hand of the worker comes into contact with the hand of the worker who is transporting the game board 5, the upper panel decorative portion 1022 acts as a slip-proofing material without causing discomfort such as pain to the worker. The risk of the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails or the center role in the game area 5a causing deformation of the obstacle nails, rusting of the obstacle nails, or damage to the center role can be suppressed, and the game board 5 can be safely transported. In this embodiment, it is preferable that the side surface 1022y of the upper panel decorative portion 1022 does not have a wrinkle pattern, and when a worker who is gripping the game board 5 moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the hand of the worker is prevented from getting caught on the side surface 1000y of the previous component 1000 (side surface 1022y of the upper panel decorative portion 1022), and damage such as cracks can be suppressed from occurring in the previous component 1000 (upper panel decorative portion 1022). In addition, even if damage such as cracks occurs in the panel decoration portion 1020 (upper panel decoration portion 1022) of the component 1000 that is held by the worker when the game board 5 is transported to the worker, only the upper panel decoration portion 1022 can be replaced without replacing the entire panel decoration portion 1020 of the component 1000, which makes it easy to repair the game board 5 and contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

In addition, the upper panel decorative part 1022 is formed with a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed to penetrate the main body part of the upper panel decorative part 1022 in the front-rear direction on the opening/closing axis side when the game board 5 is opened and closed in the pachinko machine 1, and the main body 1401 of the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit attachment part 1011 from the rear of the upper panel decorative part 1022 so that it fits in before the upper panel decorative part 1022 is attached to the game panel 1100. Note that, for example, a fixing member such as a screw or bolt may be used to attach the function display unit 1400 to the upper panel decorative part 1022. In such an upper panel decorative part 1022, the wiring 1402 extends rearward from the function display unit 1400, and when carrying the upper panel decorative part 1022 or the game panel 1100 to which the upper panel decorative part 1022 is attached, the worker's hands may come into contact with the front surface of the function display unit 1400 or the wiring 1402, which may damage the function display unit 1400 or the wiring 1402. However, in the upper panel decorative part 1022 of this embodiment, as described above, a wrinkled pattern is formed on the front surface of the upper panel decorative part 1022, so that the worker can easily carry the upper panel decorative part 1022 without any trouble. This prevents a user's hand from slipping on the front of the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and coming into contact with the front of the functional display unit 1400, and even if the functional display unit 1400 is damaged, since the component 1000 is made up of multiple pieces, it is possible to replace only the upper panel decorative portion 1022 or remove only the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and replace the functional display unit 1400 without removing the entire component 1000 from the gaming panel 1100, which contributes to the safe transportation of the gaming board 5.

Figure 199 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the lower right panel decoration part 1023. As shown in Figure 199, the function display unit 1400 may be attached to the lower right panel decoration part 1023. In this embodiment of the lower right panel decoration part 1023, the function display unit attachment part 1011 is formed on the rotating side opposite to the opening and closing axis side when the game board 5 is opened and closed in the pachinko machine 1, and for example, the function display unit attachment part 1011 is formed instead of the above-mentioned inspected label attachment part 1014a. In addition, an LED board on which a connector is mounted to which wiring 1402 that electrically connects between the LED and the panel relay board can be connected is provided in the main body 1401 of the function display unit 1400, and the LED and the panel relay board can be easily electrically disconnected by removing this connector. Therefore, the lower right panel decoration part 1023 can be easily removed from the game board together with the function display unit 1400 while it is in a screwed state. In this embodiment of the lower right panel decorative part 1023, a wrinkled pattern is formed on the front surface of the lower right panel decorative part 1023, so that the hand of the worker can be prevented from slipping on the front surface of the lower right panel decorative part 1023 and coming into contact with the front surface of the functional display unit 1400. Even if the functional display unit 1400 is damaged, since the component 1000 is composed of multiple pieces of material, it is possible to replace only the lower right panel decorative part 1023 or remove only the upper panel decorative part 1022 and replace the functional display unit 1400 without removing the entire component 1000 from the game panel 1100, which contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5. The functional display unit 1400 may be provided on the lower left panel decorative part 1021 in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper panel decorative part 1023 and lower right panel decorative part 1023.

In addition, since the component 1000 is divided so that each panel decoration part can be easily removed, an information area for recording manufacturer information (for example, lot number) may be provided at the position where the two parts are attached to the game panel 1100 and overlap. When providing such an information area, it is preferable that at least the panel decoration part covering the part where the information area is provided is formed from black resin, so that the manufacturer information written in the information area is not visible to the player. When the player wants to see the manufacturer information written in the information area that is not known to the player, the corresponding panel decoration part can be removed and easily viewed, and for example, in the event of a malfunction, it is possible to perform a follow-up investigation using the example lot number. In addition, when the panel decoration part is formed from a transparent resin, a wrinkled pattern may be formed on the panel decoration part by surface treatment such as embossing, and in addition to the anti-slip effect of the wrinkled pattern, the wrinkled pattern can make the manufacturer information written in the information area difficult to see. The panel decoration may be made of a dark, translucent resin such as black. In this case, it is preferable that the information written in the information area be a dark color such as black or gray, from the viewpoint of making the information difficult to see. It is even more effective to form a wrinkled pattern on the front of the panel decoration by surface treatment such as embossing.

The lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper panel decorative portion 1022, or the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 constituting the component 1000 may be formed with a gentle surface portion 5c1, a surface recessed portion 5c2, or an outer sharp portion 5c4 as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 178 to 180, and the visual or tactile guidance effect provided by these components can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The surface smooth part 5c1 is formed in an inclined surface shape at the outer edge of the lower left panel decorative part 1021, the upper panel decorative part 1022, or the lower right panel decorative part 1023, so that the depth in the front-to-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside, and linearly connects the front and side. The surface smooth part 5c1 can be visually and tactilely guided to the surface smooth part 5c1 by the worker who is trying to grasp the game board 5, and can suppress the discomfort given to the worker when the game board 5 is transported to the worker and can suggest the gripping position. It can also suppress the risk of the obstacle nail N being deformed or rusting of the obstacle nail N or damage to the center role 2500, etc., due to the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, and can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the game board 5 even safer to transport.

The surface recess 5c2 is formed in a concave or hole shape on the front surface of the lower left panel decoration 1021, the upper panel decoration 1022, or the lower right panel decoration 1023. The surface recess 5c2 is modeled after the thumb of a human hand, so that when the game board 5 is transported, the thumb of the operator is placed on the surface recess 5c2 due to a visual guiding effect. Therefore, when the game board 5 is transported by an operator, the grip position of the game board 5 can be suggested to an operator who does not know the grip position of the game board 5, and the risk of the operator's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, causing deformation of the obstacle nails N, rusting of the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center role 2500 can be suppressed, which contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, it is preferable that the surface recess 5c2 is formed adjacent to the surface gentle surface portion 5c1.

The surface of the opening of the surface recess 5c2 may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the surface recess 5c2 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, making the game board 5 even safer to transport.

The outer sharp tip 5c4 is formed on the inner edge of the lower left panel decorative part 1021, the upper panel decorative part 1022, or the lower right panel decorative part 1023. In detail, the outer sharp tip 5c4 is formed, for example, on the inner end and front end of the main body part that supports the metal rail arranged in an arc shape on the outer rail 1001, and is formed in a sharp corner shape with an angle between the surface and the side of the outer rail 1001 of, for example, 90 degrees or less. Such outer sharp portion 5c4 may be formed on the entire inner end of the component 1000 or on a part of the inner end of the component 1000, and when the game board 5 is transported, it comes into contact with the worker's hand before the worker's hand comes into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the game area 5a, preventing the worker from moving his/her hand into the game area 5a beyond the outer sharp portion 5c4. This also reduces the risk of the obstacle nails N being deformed or rusting caused by the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the game area 5a, or the center gimmick 2500 being damaged, thereby contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

200 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the lower right panel decorative part 1023. As shown in FIG. 200, the lower right panel decorative part 1023 may have an outer wall part 1023a that forms a space 1023b, part of which is open to the outside, between the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the outer wall part 1023a. The outer wall part 1023a has at least a plate-like part 1023c that is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100. According to such a lower right panel decorative part 1023, when a worker lifts the component 1000 placed in a storage location such as a workbench or a storage box during the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100, the worker can hook his/her fingers on the plate-like part 1023c through the space 1023b, and the worker can easily lift the component 1000. In addition, in the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100, for example, when positioning the component 1000 on the game panel 1100, an operator can hook his/her fingers on the plate-shaped portion 1023c through the space 1023b, and the component 1000 can be easily attached/detached to/from the game panel 1100. Therefore, the workability of the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100 can be improved. The plate-shaped portion 1023c is also an important member in the installation/detachment work of the game board 5 to/from the main frame 4, and in particular, in the work of removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4, a turn-up (an L-shaped edge from the rear surface of the lower right panel decoration portion 1023 toward the front side of the game panel 1100) may be provided on the edge so that the hooked fingers are less likely to come off the plate-shaped portion 1023c, and the fingertips can be easily applied with force, and the game board 5 can be safely removed from the main frame 4. Also, the lower right panel decorative part 1023, which abuts against the game panel 1100 instead of the plate-like part 1023c, may have a notch (not shown) cut out to the extent that the fingertips can enter at least a part of the end of the side wall that is the bottom when viewed from the front. The notch is formed in a shape similar to that of a protruding part, making it easier to apply force with the fingertips, and the game board 5 can be safely removed from the main frame 4. Since stress is applied to the plate-like part 1023c and the notch during the attachment and removal work, at least the lower right panel decorative part 1023 is fixed to the game panel 1100 with mounting screws near the plate-like part 1023c and the notch. If more stress than necessary is applied and a situation occurs in which it is damaged, even if an electrical component such as the functional display unit 1400 is attached to the previous component 1000 as described above, the functional display unit 1400 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 and replaced with a new one.

Furthermore, the front part of the plate-shaped part 1023c of the lower right panel decorative part 1023 may have an uneven surface with a plurality of continuous fine unevennesses. The uneven surface is, for example, a surface formed with a wrinkled pattern shape with a plurality of continuous fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern shape is formed by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions, and is, for example, a rough pear-skin pattern shape (pear-skin pattern) or a fine geometric pattern shape. Such an uneven surface also acts as a slip-proofing to prevent the worker's hand from slipping off the front part of the plate-shaped part 1024c when it comes into contact with the worker's hand without causing discomfort such as pain to the worker, and the former component 1000 is prevented from slipping off the worker's hand, thereby improving the workability of the installation work of attaching the former component 1000 to the game panel 1100. In addition, the uneven surface formed on the front part of the component 1000, which has a continuous series of multiple fine irregularities, can make the dirt on the front part of the component 1000 less noticeable even if dirt such as oil and grease adheres to the front part of the component 1000 when an operator touches the front part of the component 1000 with bare hands, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game even if the dirt is visually observed by the player. The same effect is also achieved when attaching and detaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4.

[Modification 5 of the above component]
In the above embodiment, the configuration of the component 1000 and the game panel 1100 of the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the component 1000 is a component that is assembled (hereinafter, may be described as attached) to the game panel 1100, and conventionally, when an operator transports a game board 5 with the component 1000 attached to the game panel 1100, the operator's hand slips on the front surface 1000x of the component 1000 and comes into contact with obstacle nails and accessories in the game area 5a, which may cause the obstacle nails to deform, rust on the obstacle nails, or damage to the accessories. In addition, when an operator who holds the game board 5 removes his/her hand from the outer edge of the game board 5 during transportation, the operator's hand gets caught on the side surface 1000y of the component 1000, and a force that causes the hand to be removed forward from the game panel 1100 acts on the component 1000, which may cause damage such as cracks to the component 1000. In the following, an embodiment in which the component 1000 is further modified to solve these problems will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 described above except for the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so below, the configuration of the preceding component 1000 and the game panel 1100 will be described in detail, and the description of the other components of the pachinko machine 1 will be omitted. Figure 201 is a front perspective view showing the opening and closing axis side of the game board 5, and more specifically, a front perspective view showing the opening and closing axis side of the game panel 1100 and the opening and closing axis side of the preceding component 1000 attached to the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 5 has a game panel 1100 in which a game area 5a is formed in which game balls can flow down, and a front component 1000 provided on the front side of the game panel 1100. As described above, the game panel 1100 has a panel plate 1110 and a panel holder 1120 attached to the periphery of the panel plate 1110, and is formed into a plate shape with an approximately rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. In this manner, in a mode in which the game panel 1100 is configured by attaching the panel holder 1120 to the panel plate 1110, the resin material used to form the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Note that the game panel 1100 may be a plate-shaped member in which the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 are integrally formed, and the strength of the game panel 1100 can be increased.

The gaming panel 1100 may also have a front surface gentle portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle portion 1100c2, a back surface recessed portion 1100c3, and an inner surface gentle portion 1100c4 as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 181 to 183. Below, the configuration of a gaming panel 1100 having a front surface gentle portion 1100c1, a back surface gentle portion 1100c2, a back surface recessed portion 1100c3, and an inner surface gentle portion 1100c4 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 181 to 183.

The gentle surface portion 1100c1 may be formed on the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100, and for example, on the front surface 1100x of the gaming panel 1100, it is formed as an inclined surface whose depth in the front-to-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside, and connects the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y. A worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 tends to avoid contact between the worker's hand and the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the front surface 1100x and the side surface 1100y, for example, so as not to feel pain or other discomfort in the hand grasping the game panel 1100. The gentle surface portion 1100c1 can be visually seen by the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, and can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner, by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100. This reduces discomfort to the worker when the gaming panel 1100 is transported by the worker, and also allows the worker who is unfamiliar with the position of the gaming panel 1100 to be informed of the position of the gaming panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500 in the gaming area 5a, causing deformation of the obstacle nails N, rusting of the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center gimmick 2500, and allows the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely.

In addition, a wrinkle pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine irregularities) may be formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkle pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 1100c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100, without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely. In addition, if a wrinkle pattern is formed on the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, the wrinkle pattern acts as an anti-slip between the hand of an operator holding the game board 5 and the side surface 5y of the game board 5, and for example, when an operator holding the game board 5 moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the operator's hand may get caught on the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, causing a force to be applied that removes the component 1000 forward from the game panel 1100, which may damage the outer edge of the component 1000. From this viewpoint, it is desirable that the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100 be flat without forming a wrinkle pattern. On the other hand, a wrinkled pattern (for example, a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern consisting of fine bumps) is formed on the surface of the smooth surface portion 1100c1 by surface treatment such as embossing, while the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100 is made flat without any wrinkles. This means that when a worker holds the game panel, the feeling felt by the palm of the hand is different from the feeling felt by the fingertips, and the worker can firmly re-grip the game panel in a position and manner that feels most comfortable to the worker, thereby enabling the worker to transport the game board 5 safely. In addition, although the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 depends on the positional relationship with the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, due to the shape of the step (specific step portion) formed by the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 (the side surface of the partition member) and the front surface 1100x (front surface of the game board) of the game panel 1100, if the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 is close to or flush with the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100, the feeling felt by the palm of the hand when the worker grasps it will be different from the feeling felt by the fingertips, so it is desirable that the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 is also flat without forming a wrinkle pattern. Note that, as described above, in an embodiment in which the game panel 1100 is configured by assembling the panel holder 1120 to the panel board 1110, it can be said that it is desirable that the side surface of the panel holder 1120 (the portion covering the side surface of the panel board 1110) is flat without forming a wrinkle pattern.

The back surface 1100c2 may be formed on the outer edge of the game panel 1100, and is formed, for example, on the rear surface 1100z of the game panel 1100 in an inclined plane such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside, and connects the rear surface 1100z and the side surface 1100y. The back surface 1100c2 can be visually seen by an operator attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, thereby visually guiding the operator's hand, and can also tactilely guide the operator by contacting the hand of the operator attempting to grasp the game panel 1100 so that the hand comes into contact with two obtuse corners rather than one sharp corner. In addition, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused by the contact between the outer edge portion 1100b1 and the hand of the worker can be suppressed, and the grip position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the grip position of the game panel 1100. The risk of the obstacle nail N being deformed or rusting on the obstacle nail N, or the center device 2500 being damaged due to the worker's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nail N or the center device 2500 in the game area 5a can be suppressed, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely. In addition, it is preferable that the back surface portion 1100c2 is formed in a continuous manner so as to correspond to the front surface portion 1100c1 in the front-rear direction, which increases the guidance effect on the worker, and therefore the game panel 1100 can be transported even more safely.

The surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine bumps) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back surface portion 1100c2 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the gaming panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be transported safely.

The back recess 1100c3 may be formed on the outer edge of the gaming panel 1100, for example, in a circular concave shape on the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100. The back recess 1100c3 is formed to correspond to the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2 in the front-rear direction, and corresponds to the four fingers of the operator, from the index finger to the little finger, who grasps the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2. Such a back recess 1100c3, together with the front surface gentle surface portion 1100c1 and the back surface gentle surface portion 1100c2, can contribute to the safe transportation of the gaming panel 1100. The surface of the opening of the back recess 1100c3 may be formed with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the back recess 1100c3 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game panel 1100 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, thereby contributing to even safer transportation of the game panel 1100.

The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4 may be formed on the inner portion of the gaming panel 1100, and is formed, for example, on the rear surface 1100z of the gaming panel 1100 as an arc-shaped curved surface that smoothly connects the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z. A worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, for example, may place his/her hand on the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, and in order to avoid causing pain to the hand grasping the game panel 1100, the worker tends to avoid contacting the sharp corner formed by the intersection of the side surface 1100y and the rear surface 1100z with the hand. The inner gentle surface portion 1100c4, when visible to the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, can visually guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a sharp corner, and by coming into contact with the hand of the worker attempting to grasp the game panel 1100, can also tactilely guide the worker so that the hand will come into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface rather than a single sharp corner. Therefore, in the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, when the game panel 1100 is transported by a worker, the discomfort caused to the worker when the inner edge portion 1100b2 comes into contact with the worker's hands can be reduced, and the gripping position of the game panel 1100 can be suggested to a worker who does not know the gripping position of the game panel 1100. This also reduces the risk of the worker's hands coming into contact with the obstacle nails N in the play area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails N to deform or rust, and the game panel 1100 can be transported safely.

As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 187 and 188, the game panel 1100 may further have an outer edge wall portion 5p6, a rear slope portion 5p7, and a back step portion 5p8, which can further reduce contact between the hands of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nails N or the center gimmick 2500, thereby contributing to safe transportation of the game board 5. Below, with reference to Figures 187 and 188, the configuration of the game panel 1100 in an embodiment further having an outer edge wall portion 5p6, a rear slope portion 5p7, and a back step portion 5p8 will be described in detail.

The outer edge wall portion 5p6 may be formed on the outer edge of the game panel 1100, and may be formed, for example, in the shape of a wall that protrudes rearward from the rear end of the game panel 1100 and extends along the outer edge. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 makes it easy for an operator to hook his/her fingers around the rear side of the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5, which contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5, and also allows an operator to hook his/her fingers on the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, which allows the operator to firmly hold the game board 5 and further contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5. The outer edge wall portion 5p6 may be formed in the shape of a wall that extends along the entire circumference of the outer edge of the game panel 1100, or may be formed on a part of the outer edge of the game panel 1100. In addition, it is desirable for the outer edge wall portion 5p6 to be formed in a position corresponding to the gentle surface portion 5c1, etc. in the front-rear direction, which can further contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The rear slope 5p7 may be formed so as to be continuous with the apex of the rear end of the outer edge wall 5p6, for example, formed so as to be connected to the inside of the outer edge wall 5p6. When transporting the game board 5 from which the rear unit 3000 has been removed, the rear slope 5p7 supports the fingers of the worker hooked onto the outer edge wall 5p6, reducing discomfort such as pain felt by the worker's fingers hooked onto the outer edge wall 5p6, allowing the worker to hold the game board 5 more securely and further contributing to the safe transport of the game board 5.

The back step portion 5p8 is formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 at a position inside the rear slope portion 5p7 and outside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so as to protrude from the back surface 1100z of the game panel 1100. When the back step portion 5p8 comes into contact with the hand of a worker who is trying to engage the outer edge wall portion 5p6 when transporting the game board 5 from which the back unit 3000 has been removed, the back step portion 5p8 can inform the worker that there are areas that should not be touched, such as the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500, inside the back step portion 5p8 through the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, and the contact between the hand of the worker transporting the game board 5 and the obstacle nail N and the center role 2500 can be further suppressed, and the game board 5 can be transported safely. From the viewpoint of enhancing the tactile induction effect, it is preferable that the back step portion 5p8 is formed continuously along the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

As shown in FIG. 201, the component 1000 is provided so as to be located outside the outer periphery of the play area 5a, and defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The component 1000 has a gentle surface portion 5c1 formed in an inclined surface shape such that the depth in the front-rear direction gradually increases from the inside to the outside at the outer edge of the component 1000. The gentle surface portion 5c1 can be visually seen by an operator who is trying to grasp the game board 5, and can visually and tactilely guide the operator's hand to the gentle surface portion 5c1, thereby suppressing discomfort to the operator when the game board 5 is transported to the operator and suggesting the gripping position. It can also suppress the risk of the operator's hand coming into contact with the obstacle nails N or the center role 2500 in the play area 5a, causing the obstacle nails N to deform, rust on the obstacle nails N, or damage to the center role 2500, thereby contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 may be provided with a wrinkled pattern (e.g., a rough pear-skin pattern (pear-skin pattern) or a geometric pattern with fine irregularities) by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern formed on the surface of the gentle surface portion 5c1 acts as an anti-slip surface when it comes into contact with the hands of an operator transporting the game board 5 without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator, further contributing to the safe transport of the game board 5.

If a wrinkle pattern is formed on the side 1000y of the component 1000, the wrinkle pattern acts as an anti-slip between the hand of an operator holding the game board 5 and the side 5y of the game board 5. For example, when an operator holding the game board 5 moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5, the operator's hand may get caught on the side 1000y of the component 1000, causing a force to be applied that causes the component 1000 to be removed forward from the game panel 1100, which may damage the outer edge of the component 1000. From this perspective, it is desirable that the side 1000y of the component 1000 be flat and not have a wrinkle pattern.

In addition, a step portion 5c7 is formed on the side surface 5y of the game board 5 (side surface 1000y of the component 1000 and side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100) where the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 and the front surface 1100x of the game panel 1100 are connected. Such a step portion 5c7 can prevent the hand of the worker holding the game board 5 from coming into strong contact with the component 1000 even if the worker's hand gets caught on the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 when the worker moves his/her hand away from the outer edge of the game board 5 during transportation of the game board 5, and can prevent the force acting on the component 1000 that would cause it to be removed forward from the game panel 1100, and can prevent damage such as cracks from occurring to the component 1000, thereby contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5. The step portion 5c7 may be formed on at least a portion of the side surface 5y of the game board 5 (the side surface 1000y of the component 1000 and the side surface 1100y of the game panel 1100), for example, in a range corresponding to the gentle surface portion 5c1 in the front-rear direction, which can contribute to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

The step portion 5c7 may be formed on at least one of the opening/closing axis side where the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 opens and closes together with the main frame 4, or the rotating side opposite the opening/closing axis side. In particular, when it is formed on the opening/closing axis side, when attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, the worker can easily remove his/her hands without getting caught on the side surface 5y of the game board 5 through the small gap between the main frame 4 and the game board 5, which also contributes to the safe installation work of the game board 5.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the above-mentioned wrinkle pattern is not formed on the side 5y of the game board 5 (side 1000y of the previous component 1000 and side 1100y of the game panel 1100), and that the front surface 1100x of the game panel 1100 constituting the step portion 5c7 is also not formed with a wrinkle pattern. This prevents the hand of an operator from getting caught on the side surface 5 of the game board 5 when transporting the game board 5, and prevents the previous component 1000 from being detached from the game panel 1100, thereby further contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 197 to 199, the component 1000 has a panel decoration portion 1020, and the panel decoration portion 1020 may be divided into a plurality of portions outside the outer periphery of the play area 5a. In this embodiment, the panel decoration portion 1020 may be composed of a lower left panel decoration portion 1021 located at the lower left, an upper panel decoration portion 1022 located at the upper portion, and a lower right panel decoration portion 1023 located at the lower right when viewed from the front of the game board 5. In this embodiment, even if damage such as cracks occurs in the panel decoration portion 1020 of the component 1000 held by the worker when the game board 5 is transported to the worker, it is only necessary to replace the damaged members among the lower left panel decoration portion 1021, the upper panel decoration portion 1022, and the lower right panel decoration portion 1023 without replacing the entire panel decoration portion 1020 of the component 1000, which makes it easy to repair the game board 5 and contributes to safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, the panel decoration section 1020 is not limited to being divided into three parts: the lower left panel decoration section 1021, the upper panel decoration section 1022, and the lower right panel decoration section 1023, but may be divided into two or four or more parts.

At least one of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and the lower right panel decorative portion 102 has a wrinkled pattern (for example, a rough pear-skin pattern or a geometric pattern made up of fine bumps) formed on the front surface by surface treatment such as embossing, which is visible to an operator attempting to grasp the game board 5 and visually guides the operator's hand to the lower left panel decorative portion 1021 and the lower right panel decorative portion 1023. When the pattern comes into contact with the operator's hand while transporting the game board 5, it acts as an anti-slip surface without causing pain or other discomfort to the operator. It also prevents the operator's hand from coming into contact with the obstacle nails or center gimmicks in the game area 5a, which could cause the obstacle nails to deform, rust the obstacle nails or damage the center gimmicks, thereby contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5. In addition, the sides of the lower left panel decorative portion 1021, the upper panel decorative portion 1022, and the lower right panel decorative portion 102 are free of wrinkles, which prevents the worker's hand from getting caught on the side 1000y of the previous component 1000 when the worker holding the game board 5 removes his or her hand from the outer edge of the game board 5, thereby preventing damage such as cracks from occurring to the previous component 1000 and contributing to the safe transportation of the game board 5.

In addition, the upper panel decorative part 1022 is formed with a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed to penetrate the main body part of the upper panel decorative part 1022 in the front-rear direction on the opening/closing axis side when the game board 5 is opened and closed in the pachinko machine 1, and the main body 1401 of the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit attachment part 1011 from the rear of the upper panel decorative part 1022 so that it fits in before the upper panel decorative part 1022 is attached to the game panel 1100. Note that, for example, a fixing member such as a screw or bolt may be used to attach the function display unit 1400 to the upper panel decorative part 1022. In such an upper panel decorative part 1022, the wiring 1402 extends rearward from the function display unit 1400, and when carrying the upper panel decorative part 1022 or the game panel 1100 to which the upper panel decorative part 1022 is attached, the worker's hands may come into contact with the front surface of the function display unit 1400 or the wiring 1402, which may damage the function display unit 1400 or the wiring 1402. However, in the upper panel decorative part 1022 of this embodiment, a wrinkled pattern is formed on the front surface of the upper panel decorative part 1022 as described above, so that the worker can easily carry the upper panel decorative part 1022 without any trouble. This prevents a user's hand from slipping on the front of the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and coming into contact with the front of the functional display unit 1400, and even if the functional display unit 1400 is damaged, since the component 1000 is made up of multiple pieces, it is possible to replace only the upper panel decorative portion 1022 or remove only the upper panel decorative portion 1022 and replace the functional display unit 1400 without removing the entire component 1000 from the gaming panel 1100, which contributes to the safe transportation of the gaming board 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 199, the function display unit 1400 may be attached to the lower right panel decoration part 1023. In this embodiment, the lower right panel decoration part 1023 has a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed on the rotating side opposite to the opening/closing axis side when the game board 5 is opened and closed in the pachinko machine 1, and for example, the function display unit attachment part 1011 is formed instead of the above-mentioned inspected label attachment part 1014a. In addition, an LED board on which a connector is mounted to which wiring 1402 that electrically connects between the LED and the panel relay board can be connected is provided in the main body 1401 of the function display unit 1400, and the function display unit 1400 can be easily electrically disconnected by removing this connector. Therefore, the lower right panel decoration part 1023 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 together with the function display unit 1400 while still being screwed. In this embodiment of the lower right panel decorative part 1023, a wrinkled pattern is formed on the front surface of the lower right panel decorative part 1023, so that the hand of the worker can be prevented from slipping on the front surface of the lower right panel decorative part 1023 and coming into contact with the front surface of the functional display unit 1400. Even if the functional display unit 1400 is damaged, since the component 1000 is composed of multiple pieces of material, it is possible to replace only the lower right panel decorative part 1023 or remove only the upper panel decorative part 1022 and replace the functional display unit 1400 without removing the entire component 1000 from the game panel 1100, which contributes to the safe transportation of the game board 5. The functional display unit 1400 may be provided on the lower left panel decorative part 1021 in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper panel decorative part 1023 and lower right panel decorative part 1023.

In addition, since the component 1000 is divided so that each panel decoration part can be easily removed, an information area for recording manufacturer information (for example, lot number) may be provided at the position where the two parts are attached to the game panel 1100 and overlap. When providing such an information area, it is preferable that at least the panel decoration part covering the part where the information area is provided is formed from black resin, so that the manufacturer information written in the information area is not visible to the player. When the player wants to see the manufacturer information written in the information area that is not known to the player, the corresponding panel decoration part can be removed and easily viewed, and for example, in the event of a malfunction, it is possible to perform a follow-up investigation using the example lot number. In addition, when the panel decoration part is formed from a transparent resin, a wrinkled pattern may be formed on the panel decoration part by surface treatment such as embossing, and in addition to the anti-slip effect of the wrinkled pattern, the wrinkled pattern can make the manufacturer information written in the information area difficult to see. The panel decoration may be made of a dark, translucent resin such as black. In this case, from the viewpoint of making the information written in the information area difficult to see, it is desirable for the color of the information written in the information area to be a dark color such as black or gray, and it is more effective to form a wrinkled pattern on the front surface of the panel decoration by surface treatment such as embossing.

As shown in FIG. 200 above, the lower right panel decorative portion 1023 may have an outer wall portion 1023a that forms a space 1023b, part of which is open to the outside, between the outer wall portion 1023a and the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The outer wall portion 1023a has at least a plate-like portion 1023c that is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. With such a lower right panel decorative portion 1023, when a worker lifts the component member 1000 placed in a storage location such as a workbench or storage box during the installation work of attaching the component member 1000 to the gaming panel 1100, the worker can hook his/her fingers on the plate-like portion 1023c through the space 1023b, and the worker can easily lift the component member 1000. In addition, in the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100, for example, when positioning the component 1000 on the game panel 1100, an operator can hook his/her fingers on the plate-shaped portion 1023c through the space 1023b, and the component 1000 can be easily attached/detached to/from the game panel 1100. Therefore, the workability of the installation work of attaching the component 1000 to the game panel 1100 can be improved. The plate-shaped portion 1023c is also an important member in the installation/detachment work of the game board 5 to/from the main frame 4, and in particular, in the work of removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4, a turn-up (an L-shaped edge from the rear surface of the lower right panel decoration portion 1023 toward the front side of the game panel 1100) may be provided on the edge so that the hooked fingers are less likely to come off the plate-shaped portion 1023c, and the fingertips can be easily applied with force, and the game board 5 can be safely removed from the main frame 4. Also, the lower right panel decorative part 1023, which abuts against the game panel 1100 instead of the plate-like part 1023c, may have a notch (not shown) cut out to the extent that the fingertips can enter at least a part of the end of the side wall that is the bottom when viewed from the front. The notch is formed in a shape similar to that of a protruding part, making it easier to apply force with the fingertips, and the game board 5 can be safely removed from the main frame 4. Since stress is applied to the plate-like part 1023c and the notch during the attachment and removal work, at least the lower right panel decorative part 1023 is fixed to the game panel 1100 with mounting screws near the plate-like part 1023c and the notch. If more stress than necessary is applied and a situation occurs in which it is damaged, even if an electrical component such as the functional display unit 1400 is attached to the previous component 1000 as described above, the functional display unit 1400 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 and replaced with a new one.

Furthermore, the front part of the plate-shaped part 1023c of the lower right panel decorative part 1023 may have an uneven surface with a plurality of continuous fine unevennesses. The uneven surface is, for example, a surface formed with a wrinkled pattern shape with a plurality of continuous fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light by surface treatment such as embossing. The wrinkled pattern shape is formed by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions, and is, for example, a rough pear-skin pattern shape (pear-skin pattern) or a fine geometric pattern shape. Such an uneven surface also acts as a slip-proofing to prevent the worker's hand from slipping off the front part of the plate-shaped part 1024c when it comes into contact with the worker's hand without causing discomfort such as pain to the worker, and the former component 1000 is prevented from slipping off the worker's hand, thereby improving the workability of the installation work of attaching the former component 1000 to the game panel 1100. In addition, the uneven surface formed on the front part of the component 1000, which has a continuous series of multiple fine irregularities, can make the dirt on the front part of the component 1000 less noticeable even if dirt such as oil and grease adheres to the front part of the component 1000 when an operator touches the front part of the component 1000 with bare hands, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game even if the dirt is visually observed by the player. The same effect is also achieved when attaching and detaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4.

[Examples of various notation modifications]
Next, as a further embodiment different from the above, a configuration that makes it easy to assemble various members to the game board will be described. Below, a side unit 2200A, which is a modified version of the side unit 2200 described in Figures 78 to 80 and 84, will be described with reference to Figure 202(a) and the like. Note that, for members other than the side unit 2200A, the same reference numerals will be used to denote the same configurations as in the above embodiment having the side unit 2200.

202(a) is a front view showing the front of the side unit 2200A, FIG. 202(b) is a rear view showing the rear of the side unit 2200A, and FIG. 203 is an exploded view in which the film member 2203A described later is removed from the side unit 2200A. As shown in FIG. 202(a) or FIG. 202(b), the side unit 2200A includes a side unit main body 2202A extending along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, three general winning ports 2001A formed in the side unit main body 2202A and open so as to be able to receive the game ball B at all times, and one sub-out port 2021A formed in the side unit main body 2202A and open so as to be able to receive the game ball B at all times. In addition, a predetermined film member 2203A is attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202A as shown in FIG. 203. The side unit 2200A can guide the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001A or the sub-out port 2021A down to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

The side unit body 2202A is formed using a transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin, and in the side unit body 2202A, from the left when viewed from the front, the sub-out port 2021A, three general winning ports 2001A, and a shelf section 2201A are formed in that order, and in front of the sub-out port 2021A, three general winning ports 2001A, and shelf section 2201A, a flat front section 2204A is formed to which a sticker-like film member 2203A can be affixed.

The film member 2203A is made of a sheet material made of a translucent synthetic resin. On the front surface of the film member 2203A, as shown in FIG. 203, for example, there are printed a background pattern 2207A (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern) decorating almost the entire front surface of the side unit 2200A, a prize opening notation 2205A (in this example, the alphabetic notation of the string "IN" in a single black color) formed at a position corresponding to the general prize opening 2001A (near the general prize opening 2001A, preferably at a position at which at least a portion overlaps with the general prize opening 2001A in the front-to-back direction) to indicate that it is the general prize opening 2001A, and an out opening notation 2206A (in this example, the alphabetic notation of the string "OUT" in a single black color) formed at a position corresponding to the sub-out opening 2021A (near the sub-out opening 2021A, preferably at a position at which at least a portion overlaps with the sub-out opening 2021A in the front-to-back direction) to indicate that it is the sub-out opening 2021A. In addition, the winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A may be placed in a position that does not overlap the general winning hole 2001A or the sub-outlet 2021A in the front-to-back direction, so long as the player can see that they correspond to the general winning hole 2001A and the sub-outlet 2021A.

Figure 204 shows the structural details of the film member 2203A of this example, and is an exploded view of the film member 2203A exploded into a plurality of film layers. As shown in Figure 204, the film member 2203A of this example has at least three layers consisting of the first film layer 2203Aa on the front side, the second film layer 2203Ab located on the lower side of the first film layer 2203Aa, and the third film layer 2203Ac located on the lower side of the second film layer 2203Ab, and is configured so that each film layer is stacked and integrated to become a seal-like member. Of these, the first film layer 2203Aa is a sheet material made of synthetic resin having translucency on which the winning port notation 2205A and the out port notation 2206A are printed. In addition, the second film layer 2203Ab is a sheet material made of synthetic resin having translucency on which the above-mentioned background pattern 2207A (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern) is printed. In addition, the third film layer 2203Ac is a sheet material made of a synthetic resin having translucency, on which a white background for making the above-mentioned background pattern 2207A clear is printed on the entire surface, and a glue that can be attached to the front part 2204A of the side unit main body 2202A is glued on the back side. In other words, the film member 2203A in this example is configured so that the background pattern 2207A of the second film layer 2203Ab, the winning hole notation 2205A of the first film layer 2203Aa, and the out hole notation 2206A of the first film layer 2203Aa are overlapped on the front surface of the white background of the third film layer 2203Ac, and since all of them are made into a film layer having translucency, it is possible to provide a decorative substrate having an illuminant such as an LED at the rear to illuminate and decorate the side unit 2200A. Note that the film member 2203A is not limited to the configuration having the three film layers described above, and may be three or more film layers, or may be composed of only two film layers or one film layer. If it is made up of two film layers or only one film layer, the winning slot notation 2205A and the winning slot notation 2206A may also be printed on the film layer on which the background image 2207A is printed.

Figure 205 is a diagram showing modified examples of the display mode of the winning port display 2205A and the out port display 2206A in Figures 202 and 203. In the examples shown in Figures 202 and 203, the winning port display 2205A is formed in the alphabetic display of the character string "IN" in a single black color, and the out port display 2206A is formed in the alphabetic display of the character string "OUT" in a single black color. Each modified example shown in Figure 205 is similar to the examples shown in Figures 202 and 203 in that it is an alphabetic display, but in particular, the examples shown in Figures 205(a) to 205(f) of each modified example shown in Figure 205 differ in that they have an inner display portion 2206Aa and an outer display portion 2206Ab. Specifically, in the example shown in Figures 205(a) and 205(b), the winning slot notation 2205A and the out slot notation 2206A are made up of a black inner notation portion 2206Aa imitating the target alphabet notation ("IN" or "OUT") and a white outer notation portion 2206Ab imitating the target alphabet notation ("IN" or "OUT"), with the outer notation portion 2206Ab being formed to surround the entire outer edge of the inner notation portion 2206Aa.

Here, the details of the winning hole notation 2205A, the out hole notation 2206A, and the background pattern 2207A will be described with reference to Figures 205(a) and 205(b). The winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A are located on the front side of the above-mentioned background pattern 2207A (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern), specifically, on the upper side of the film layer on which the background pattern 2207A is provided, so that depending on the color of each notation, the notation may blend into the background pattern 2207A, hindering visibility from the outside. In this respect, in this example, the inner notation portion 2206Aa and the outer notation portion 2206Ab are formed in different colors from each other, and at least the outer notation portion 2206Ab is formed in a color different from the color used for the background pattern 2207A (white in this example). This allows the outer marking portion 2206Ab (white in this example) to completely surround the inner marking portion 2206Aa (black in this example) and creates a buffer area where the background pattern 2207A and the inner marking portion 2206Aa are not continuous, making the boundary between the background pattern 2207A and the inner marking portion 2206Aa clear and ensuring sufficient visibility of the winning slot marking 2205A and the out slot marking 2206A, which are located in front of the background pattern 2207A.

The colors of the background pattern 2207A, the inner marking portion 2206Aa, and the outer marking portion 2206Ab are not limited to the above color combinations, and other color combinations may be used as long as the visibility of the winning opening marking 2205A and the outgoing opening marking 2206A located on the front side of the background pattern 2207A can be ensured. Specifically, when the background pattern 2207A is a red or pink cherry blossom pattern, the outer marking portion 2206Ab may be black and the inner marking portion 2206Aa may be white, as shown in FIG. 205(c), or the outer marking portion 2206Ab may be black and the inner marking portion 2206Aa may be the same color as the background, as shown in FIG. 205(d). In addition, the winning hole representation 2205A and the out hole representation 2206A may be composed of multiple representations in addition to the inner representation 2206Aa and the outer representation 2206Ab, as long as the visibility of the winning hole representation 2205A and the out hole representation 2206A can be ensured. For example, at least one intermediate representation 2206Ac may be further provided between the inner representation 2206Aa and the outer representation 2206Ab. Specifically, when the background pattern 2207A is a red or pink cherry blossom pattern, as shown in FIG. 205(e), the outer representation 2206Ab may be black, the inner representation 2206Aa may be blue, and the intermediate representation 2206Ac may be white, or as shown in FIG. 205(f), the outer representation 2206Ab may be white, the inner representation 2206Aa may be blue, and the intermediate representation 2206Ac may be black.

In addition, the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A may be configured without the inner notation 2206Aa and the outer notation 2206Ab as shown in Fig. 205(g)(h) as long as the visibility of the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A can be ensured, and may be an italic "OUT" as shown in Fig. 205(g), or may be a string of characters "OUT" arranged diagonally as shown in Fig. 205(h). In addition, although not shown, the winning hole notation 2205A may be written in katakana as "in", in hiragana as "in", in kanji as "toku", or in a figure such as "o" as long as it can show the player that the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001A. Additionally, the out port notation 2206A only needs to indicate to the player that the out port is the sub-out port 2021A, and may be written in katakana as "out," in hiragana as "out," in kanji as "loss," or in a graphic notation such as "x."

In a pachinko machine 1 in which the above-mentioned side unit 2200A is attached to the game board 5, a player can easily grasp the position of the general winning hole 2001A and the position of the sub-out hole 2021A in the game area 5a by visually checking the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A. However, in conventional gaming machines, the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A were only visible when the side unit 2200A was viewed from the front side. For this reason, for example, during the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine, when inspecting and checking whether there is an abnormality in the structure of the ball flow path (inside the general winning opening 2001A or inside the sub-out opening 2021A) on the back side of the side unit 2200A before assembling it to the gaming board 5, there is a problem that it takes time to identify which flow path leads to the general winning opening 2001A or the sub-out opening 2021A from the back side of the side unit 2200A (for example, the time it takes to turn it over and check the markings each time), which reduces the work efficiency of the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine and is insufficient in terms of convenience. Below, we will explain the aspects in which the side unit 2200A has been modified in order to solve such problems.

Conventionally, when the above-mentioned film member 2203A has the third film layer 2203Ac etc., a base is provided on its entire surface, and the background pattern 2207A of the second film layer 2203Ab and the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A of the first film layer 2203Aa are configured to overlap the front side of the base. Therefore, when the third film layer 2203Ac is viewed from the backside, even if the third film layer 2203Ac is translucent, the visibility of the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A from the backside is hindered by the color of the base, making them impossible or difficult to see. In contrast to this, in the side unit 2200A of the present example, in order to improve the work efficiency when inspecting and checking the back side of the side unit 2200A to which the above-mentioned film member 2203A is attached, and thereby to increase convenience, a "rear winning opening notation 2205Aa" and a "rear exit notation 2206Aa" are provided on the back side of the third film layer 2203Ac of the above-mentioned film member 2203A. Specifically, the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are printed lower than the white base of the third film layer 2203Ac (for example, on the rear side of the white base), and are visible from the rear side of the film member 2203A (the rear side of the third film layer 2203Ac) without visibility being hindered by the white base. Even when the film member 2203A is attached to the side unit 2200A, the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are visible from the rear side of the side unit 2200A through the transparent side unit 2200A. The rear prize winning port notation 2205Aa is located at a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 2001A (near the general prize winning port 2001A, preferably at a position where at least a part overlaps with the general prize winning port 2001A in the front-to-back direction), making it possible to indicate from the rear side of the film member 2203A that the general prize winning port 2001A is located and that the prize winning port notation 2205A is located on the front side. The rear outlet notation 2206Aa is located at a position corresponding to the sub-outlet 2021A (near the sub-outlet 2021A, preferably at a position where at least a part overlaps with the sub-outlet 2021A in the front-to-back direction), making it possible to indicate from the rear side of the film member 2203A that the sub-outlet 2021A is located and that the outlet notation 22056A is located on the front side.

In addition, the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa in this example are formed with the alphabetical characters "IN" and "OUT" in a single black color as shown in FIG. 202. The "IN" and "OUT" constituting the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are formed as characters that can be recognized normally when the above-mentioned film member 2203A (or side unit 2200A) is viewed from the back side, and when viewed from the front side of the film member 2203A (or side unit 2200A), the characters constituting the prize winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A are inverted in the same font and color as those constituting the prize winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A, making it possible to easily convey to the operator that the prize winning hole notation 2205A and the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Aa, and the outlet notation 2206A and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa correspond to each other.

As another example, the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A may be modified to any of the modified examples shown in Figs. 205(a) to (f), and in that case, the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa may be modified as follows. For example, when modifying the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A to any of the modified examples shown in Figs. 205(a) to (f), the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa may be configured to have no relationship with the inner notation portion 2206Aa and the outer notation portion 2206Ab that constitute the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206A, and may be configured to be a single color (for example, only one color, black) instead of multiple colors. Specifically, referring to the above example, the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are surrounded by only the background, so it is possible to dare not provide an outer notation portion 2206Ab and to construct them only in a color different from the background color. In this way, it is possible to avoid the printing method becoming more complicated than if the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa were provided with an inner notation portion 2206Aa and an outer notation portion 2206Ab. In addition, by making the visual appearance of the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outgoing opening notation 2206Aa (visual appearance in only one color) different from the visual appearance of the winning opening notation 2205A and the outgoing opening notation 2206A (visual appearance in two colors), it is possible to clearly distinguish between the front and back of the film member 2203A, and to easily check the front and back when attaching the film member 2203A to the side unit 2200A, thereby achieving an effect unique to this example.

In this example, the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are printed below the white base of the third film layer 2203Ac, but the form in which the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are provided is not limited to this, and may be in the following form. For example, the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206a may be printed on a layer above the white background of the third film layer 2203Ac, and only the areas where the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206a are located may be left transparent without printing the white background, or the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206a may be printed on the rear surface of the first film layer 2203Aa on which the winning hole notation 2205A and the out hole notation 2206 are printed, and only the areas where the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa are located may be left transparent without printing the white background of the third film layer 2203Ac. The color of the background is not limited to white, and may be another color.

In addition, in the above, the rear winning port notation 2205Aa and the rear out port notation 2206Aa are exemplified as being formed in the same notation form (alphabetical notation) as the winning port notation 2205A and the out port notation 2206A, but are not limited to this, and may be formed in a different notation form from the winning port notation 2205A and the out port notation 2206A. For example, while the winning port notation 2205A and the out port notation 2206A are formed in alphabetic notation, the rear winning port notation 2205Aa and the rear out port notation 2206Aa may be written in katakana (such as "in" and "out"), hiragana (such as "in" and "out"), kanji (such as "gain" and "loss"), or figures (such as "o" and "x"). In this way, the difference between the front and back of the film member 2203A can be clarified, and it is also possible to easily check the front and back when attaching the film member 2203A to the side unit 2200A. When expressing the symbols graphically, in order to communicate that there is a correspondence between the winning entry notation 2205A and the back winning entry notation 2205Aa, and that there is a correspondence between the out entry notation 2206A and the back out entry notation 2206Aa, it is preferable to at least make the notation style of the back winning entry notation 2205Aa and the back out entry notation 2206Aa different; for example, a "☆" could be used for the back winning entry notation 2205Aa and a "★" could be used for the back out entry notation 2206Aa.

The display style of the rear winning gate notation 2205Aa and the rear outgoing gate notation 2206Aa is not limited to the above, and may be the same as the winning gate notation 2205A and the outgoing gate notation 2206A, but may be a different font. For example, even if the same character string is used to display "OUT", the size, shape, boldness, etc. of the character string may be different from the winning gate notation 2205A and the outgoing gate notation 2206A, and the rear winning gate notation 2205Aa and the rear outgoing gate notation 2206Aa may be different.

In addition, since the rear winning hole notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are intended for use by developers, manufacturers, or administrators, rather than by players, it is preferable to make them as difficult to see as possible from the player's side, taking into consideration the aesthetics of the side unit 2200A. Therefore, in this example, the side unit 2200A is designed so that, when the film member 2203A is attached, the rear winning hole notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa are invisible or difficult to see when the side unit 2200A is viewed from the player's line of sight (for example, looking down from above). This point will be explained below.

Specifically, the side unit 2200A in this example is formed with a plate-shaped protruding wall 2208A extending in the left-right direction on the back side of the side unit 2200A so as to protrude rearward, and this protruding wall 2208A is configured to be located above the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa. It is preferable that the protruding wall 2208A is provided so that it cannot be contacted by game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2001A or the sub-out opening 2021A, but if it is provided so that it can be contacted, it is preferable that the protruding amount is set to a level that does not hinder the flow of game balls, and that an inclined portion is formed so that game balls that come into contact do not stop. By providing a protruding wall 2208A on the back side of the side unit 2200A in this way, even if a player peers into the inside of the general winning opening 2001A or the sub-out opening 2021A from the entrance, the protruding wall 2208A obstructs visibility of the inside, making the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa invisible or difficult to see, thereby preventing the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa from deteriorating the aesthetics of the side unit 2200A and the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine.

In addition, instead of providing the protruding wall 2208A so as to be positioned above the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa, the protruding wall 2208A may be provided so as to overlap the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa in the front-to-back direction. Even in such a case, the protruding wall 2208A can prevent the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa from being impeded from being visible inward, making the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa invisible or difficult to see, and preventing the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa from reducing the aesthetic quality of the side unit 2200A and the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine. However, when the protruding wall 2208A is made to overlap the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa in the front-to-rear direction, it is desirable to make sure that the protruding wall 2208A does not overlap at least a portion of the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa in the front-to-rear direction in order to avoid the rear winning opening notation 2205Aa and the rear outlet notation 2206Aa becoming invisible from the back side of the side unit 2200A.

In addition, the side unit 2200A of this example also adopts the following configuration to avoid the rear winning port notation 2205Aa and the rear out port notation 2206Aa from reducing the aesthetics of the side unit 2200A and the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine. That is, a side unit decorative board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted is provided behind the side unit 2200A, and the multiple LEDs mounted on this side unit decorative board can irradiate light from behind onto the background pattern 2207A and the winning port notation 2205A printed on the film member 2203A attached to the front surface of the side unit main body 2202A, while not irradiating light from behind onto the out port notation 2206A printed on the film member 2203. This makes the background pattern 2207A and the winning port notation 2205A stand out relative to the out port notation 2206A in the game area 5a, and prevents the player from paying attention to the sub-out port 2021A, which is not desirable for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in playing games.

As another example, the LEDs mounted on the side unit decorative board may be able to irradiate the entire film member 2203A attached to the front surface of the side unit body 2202A from behind, but in that case, the back outlet marking 2206Aa may be used to prevent the outlet marking 2206A from being illuminating and decorated. For example, at least the back outlet marking 2206Aa may be printed with a non-translucent paint (e.g., non-translucent plating, etc.), and the back outlet marking 2206Aa and the outlet marking 2206A may be arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-to-back direction. By configuring in this way, even if the LEDs mounted on the side unit decorative board irradiate the entire film member 2203A from behind, the non-translucent back outlet marking 2206Aa itself can block the light transmission to the front, making it possible to prevent the outlet marking 2206A from being illuminating and decorated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A can be seen from the front side of the side unit 2200A, and the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back outlet notation 2206Aa can be seen from the rear side of the side unit 2200A. Therefore, during the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine, when inspecting and checking for abnormalities in the structure of the ball flow path (inside the general winning hole 2001A and inside the sub-out hole 2021A) on the back side of the side unit 2200A before assembling it to the gaming board 5, it is easy to identify which flow path leads to the general winning hole 2001A or the sub-out hole 2021A from the back side of the side unit 2200A, improving the work efficiency and convenience of the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the side unit 2200A is provided with the general winning opening 2001A and the sub-out opening 2021A, and the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa are provided, but this is not limited to this. The side unit 2200A may be provided with the general winning opening 2001A and the sub-out opening 2021A, but may be configured to provide only the back winning opening notation 2205Aa without providing the back out opening notation 2206Aa, or to provide only the back out opening notation 2206Aa without providing the back winning opening notation 2205Aa. In addition, when multiple general winning openings 2001A are provided or multiple sub-out openings 2021A are provided, the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa are not provided for all of them, and the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back out opening notation 2206Aa may be provided only for some of the winning openings. In other words, among the areas where the structure of the ball flow path on the back side of the side unit 2200A is inspected and checked for abnormalities before installation on the game board 5, by providing the back winning port notation 2205Aa and the back winning port notation 2206Aa only on the flow path parts that are of particular importance, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the development and manufacturing processes of the game machine while preventing the structure of the film member 2203A from becoming complicated.

In the above embodiment, the side unit 2200A is exemplified as an object in which the general winning opening 2001A and the sub-outlet 2021A are provided, but this is not limited thereto. The winning opening and the outlet may be provided in another member, and a film member having a notation corresponding to the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back outlet notation 2206Aa may be attached to the target member, while the notation corresponding to the back winning opening notation 2205Aa and the back outlet notation 2206Aa may be visible from the back side of the target member. In addition, such a target member may be one in which both the winning opening and the sub-outlet are formed, or one in which only the winning opening and the sub-outlet are formed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa may spoil the aesthetics of the gaming machine if seen by the player, and may, for example, reduce the player's interest in playing, so it is desirable that they are not visible from the front side of the side unit 2200A. In this embodiment, the back side of the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa, the back side of the base at the position corresponding to the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back out hole notation 2206Aa, the back side of the background pattern 2207A, and the back side of the winning hole notation 2205A or the out hole notation 2206A are made invisible from the front side of the side unit 2200A by using a paint that does not have translucency (for example, a plating that does not have translucency). At least a part of the winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A may be visible from the rear side of the side unit 2200A. For example, by printing the base, background pattern 2207A, back winning hole notation 2205Aa, and back outlet notation 2206A located behind the winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A with a translucent paint, at least a part of the winning hole notation 2205A and the outlet notation 2206A can be seen from the rear side of the side unit 2200A, and the positions of the general winning hole 2001A and the sub-outlet 2021A can be shown to the operator together with the back winning hole notation 2205Aa and the back outlet notation 2206Aa.

[Example 2 of modified notations]
In the above example, a mode has been described that can improve the workability of inspecting and confirming whether there is an abnormality in the structure of the ball passage on the back side of the side unit 2200A before assembling it to the game board 5. On the other hand, in the development process and manufacturing process of a gaming machine, in order to inspect and confirm whether there is a defect in the gaming machine to be introduced to the game hall, there are cases where the gaming machine is actually operated on a trial basis, and in such cases, in consideration of cost and the like, the gaming machine may be operated without the film member 2203A attached to the side unit 2200A. In such a case, even if the side unit 2200A is provided with the general winning opening 2001A and the sub-outlet 2021A, the position of the general winning opening 2001A and the sub-outlet 2021A cannot be grasped by using the winning opening notation 2205A and the out-outlet notation 2206A as a guide, so that when a ball enters the general winning opening 2001A or the sub-outlet 2021A during a test operation of the gaming machine, there is a risk of causing a problem in confirming whether the accompanying operation is appropriate (for example, whether the ball enters with a payout, etc.). Therefore, in the following, a description will be given of a side unit 2200A described above that has been further modified to solve such problems and to improve convenience. The side unit 2200B described below is a modified version of the side unit 2200A described above, and the description of the same configuration as the side unit 2200A will be omitted below.

Figure 206(a) is a front view showing the front of the side unit 2200B of this example, and Figure 206(b) is a rear view showing the rear of the side unit 2200B of another embodiment. In detail, Figures 206(a) and 206(b) show the side unit 2200B before the film member 2203B is attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202B (side unit 2200B in a state where the film member 2203B is not attached). Note that the film member 2203B before it is attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202B is shown below the side unit main body 2202B.

As shown in Fig. 206(a) and Fig. 206(b), the side unit 2200B, like the side unit 2200A described above, is capable of affixing a film member 2203B having a winning hole notation 2205B, an out hole notation 2206B, a back winning hole notation 2205Bb, and a back out hole notation 2206Bb. However, in the side unit 2200B, these notations are not formed in alphabetic notation, but are formed in notation using the figures "●" or "★". Specifically, the winning hole notation 2205B is formed in notation using the figure "●" with a black inner notation part and a white outer notation part as described above, and the back winning hole notation 2205Bb is formed in notation using the figure "●" made of only one color, black. Additionally, the outlet marking 2205B is formed by a "★" graphic with a black inner marking and a white outer marking as described above, and the back outlet marking 2205Bb is formed by a "★" graphic made of only black.

Here, the side unit 2200B of this example will be described. The side unit 2200B of this example can have a film member 2203B attached to the front part 2204B, and has a back winning opening identification part 2205Bb and a back out opening identification part 2206Bb, and the back winning opening identification part 2205Bb and the back out opening identification part 2206Bb are formed so as to be visible from the front side and the rear side of the side unit 2200B when the film member 2203B is not attached. The back winning opening identification part 2205Bb and the back out opening identification part 2206Bb of this embodiment are formed by extending in a manner that protrudes backward from the back side of the side unit main body 2202B, and their shapes are intended to correspond to the winning opening notation 2205B, the out opening notation 2206B, the back winning opening notation 2205Bb, and the back out opening notation 2206Bb. Specifically, the rear prize winning hole identification portion 2205Bb is a protruding portion having a cross section in the shape of "●", and corresponds to the prize winning hole notation 2205B and the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Bb. The rear outlet notation portion 2206Bb is a protruding portion having a cross section in the shape of "★", and corresponds to the outlet notation 2206B and the rear outlet notation 2206Bb. Such rear prize winning hole identification portion 2205Bb and rear outlet notation portion 2206Bb are formed by extending from the rear side of the side unit main body 2202B, and are easily visible from the rear side of the side unit 2200B, but since the entire side unit 2200B including the side unit main body 2202B is formed of transparent resin, even when the side unit 2200B is viewed from the front side, the portion shaped like "●" or "★" can be seen through the transparent side unit main body 2202B. In other words, the rear winning hole identification portion 2205Bb and the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb are visible not only from the rear side of the side unit 2200B but also from the front side before the film member 2203B is attached to the front side of the side unit main body 2202B, and can function as a substitute for the winning hole notation 2205B and the outlet notation 2206B of the film member 2203B, the rear winning hole notation 2205Bb, and the rear outlet notation 2206Bb. It is preferable that the rear winning hole identification portion 2205Bb and the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb are provided so that they cannot be contacted by game balls that have entered the general winning hole 2001B or the sub-outlet 2021B, but even if they do come into contact, it is desirable to form an inclined portion so that the amount of protrusion is not obstructed by the flow of the game balls and that the game balls that come into contact do not stop.

As described above, the side unit 2200B of this example is provided with the rear entry opening identification section 2205Bb and the rear exit opening identification section 2206Bb, which correspond to the entry opening notation 2205B, the exit notation 2206B, the rear entry opening notation 2205Bb, and the rear exit opening notation 2206Bb. Even when the gaming machine is operated on a trial basis without the film member 2203B attached to the side unit 2200B, the rear entry opening identification section 2205Bb and the rear exit opening identification section 2206Bb can identify the positions of the general entry opening 2001B and the sub-outlet 2021B. This makes it easier to check whether the actions associated with various balls entering the game machine during the trial operation are appropriate, thereby improving convenience.

In this embodiment, the back winning hole identification portion 2205Bb is formed on the side unit body 2202B so as to overlap the background pattern 2207B or the winning hole notation 2205A in the front-rear direction after the film member 2203B is attached to the front surface portion 2204B of the side unit body 2202B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko game machine 1 from being damaged by the formation of the back winning hole identification portion 2205Bb, and it is also possible to prevent the back winning hole identification portion 2205Bb from being visually recognized by the player, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. In addition, the back out hole identification portion 2206Bb in this embodiment is formed on the side unit body 2202B so as to overlap the background pattern 2207B or the winning hole notation 2205A in the front-rear direction after the film member 2203B is attached to the front surface portion 2204B of the side unit body 2202B. This prevents the rear outlet identification section 2206Bb from damaging the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and also prevents the rear outlet identification section 2206Bb from being visible to the player, reducing the player's interest in the game.

In the above example, the winning hole notation 2205B and the back winning hole notation 2205Ba are represented by a figure of "O", and the back winning hole identification part 2205Bb has a cross section of "O" and protrudes backward from the side unit main body 2202B in the above example, and has the same form, but they may have different shapes while corresponding to each other. Specifically, the winning hole notation 2205B and the back winning hole notation 2205Ba may be represented by English letters such as "IN", katakana notation such as "In", hiragana notation such as "In", kanji notation such as "Toku", or may be represented by figures other than "O", such as "☆" or "△". In addition, the back winning hole identification part 2205Bb may be formed to have a cross section other than "O", such as "☆" or "△", and protrude backward from the side unit main body 2202B. In addition, the outlet notation portion 2206B and the rear outlet notation portion 2206Ba are represented by a figure of "☆" in the above example, and the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb has a cross section of "☆" and protrudes rearward from the side unit main body 2202B in the above example, and has the same form, but they may have different shapes while corresponding to each other. Specifically, the outlet notation portion 2206B and the rear outlet notation portion 2206Ba may be represented by English letters such as "IN", katakana notation such as "in", hiragana notation such as "in", kanji notation such as "toku", or may be represented by figures other than "☆", such as "o" or "△". In addition, the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb may be formed to have a cross section other than "☆", such as "o" or "△", and protrude rearward from the side unit main body 2202B.

In this embodiment, the rear prize winning opening identification section 2205Bb is formed so as to protrude rearward from the side unit main body 2202B, but the rear prize winning opening identification section 2205B is formed at a position corresponding to the general prize winning opening 2001B of the side unit 2200B (near the general prize winning opening 2001B, and preferably at a position where at least a portion overlaps with the general prize winning opening 2001B in the front-to-rear direction) so as to be visible from the front and rear sides of the side unit 2200B before the film member 2203B is attached, and it is sufficient that the rear prize winning opening identification section 2205Bb indicates the general prize winning opening 2001B when viewed, and for example, it may be formed as a hole penetrating the side unit main body 2202B, or may be formed as a concave shape by depressing the rear portion of the side unit main body 2202, or may be formed as a concave shape by depressing the front portion 2204B of the side unit main body 2202. In addition, the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb in this embodiment is formed to protrude rearward from the side unit main body 2202B, but the rear outlet identification portion 2206B is formed at a position corresponding to the sub-outlet 2021B of the side unit 2200B (near the sub-outlet 2021B, and preferably at a position where at least a portion overlaps with the sub-outlet 2021B in the front-to-rear direction) so as to be visible from the front and rear sides of the side unit 2200B before the film member 2203B is attached, and it is sufficient that the rear outlet identification portion 2206Bb indicates the sub-outlet 2021B when viewed, and for example, it may be formed as a hole that penetrates the side unit main body 2202B, or may be formed in a concave shape by recessing the rear portion of the side unit main body 2202, or may be formed in a concave shape by recessing the front portion 2204B of the side unit main body 2202. Furthermore, even if the rear prize entry opening identification section 2205Bb and the rear exit opening identification section 2206Bb have different shapes, it is preferable to make the shapes of the rear prize entry opening identification section 2205Bb and the rear exit opening identification section 2206Bb different to avoid confusion between them.

In addition, regardless of whether the rear winning opening identification portion 2205Bb and the rear outlet opening identification portion 2206Bb are in the form of a hole penetrating the above-mentioned side unit main body 2202B, in the form of a concave recess in the rear surface portion of the side unit main body 2202, or in the form of a concave recess in the front surface portion 2204B of the side unit main body 2202, when the film member 2203B is attached to the front surface portion 2204B of the side unit main body 2202B, it is preferable that the rear winning opening identification portion 2205Bb and the rear outlet opening identification portion 2206Bb in each form overlap in the front-to-rear direction with the background pattern 2207B or the winning opening notation 2205A. In this way, regardless of which alternative form is adopted, it is possible to prevent the rear prize winning hole identification section 2205Bb from spoiling the aesthetics of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is also possible to prevent the rear prize winning hole identification section 2205Bb from being visible to the player, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when adopting a different form in which the rear winning hole identification portion 2205Bb and the rear winning hole identification portion 2206Bb are holes penetrating the side unit main body 2202B, it is preferable to do as follows. That is, as a detailed example of the different form in which the holes are penetrating the side unit main body 2202B, a specific example can be given in which a through hole is provided in the front part 2204B of the side unit main body 2202 that penetrates from front to back in a predetermined shape (such as a "●" or "★" shape), but since the front part 2204B serves as a base to which the film member 2203B is attached, it is preferable to form the opening area of the through hole of the predetermined shape to be smaller than the adhesion area of the film member 2203B so as not to significantly reduce the adhesion strength of the film member 2203B to the front part 2204B. In addition, it is desirable to form the through-hole of a predetermined shape in the front portion 2204B with a shape (e.g., a distorted shape such as a circle, a square, or a star that is smaller than the size of the game ball) and opening area (e.g., an opening area smaller than the diameter of the game ball, which is 11 mm) that the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001B or the sub-out opening 2021B cannot enter, so as to prevent the game ball from adhering to the film member 2203B through the through-hole.

Furthermore, like the above-mentioned rear prize winning hole notation 2205Ba and rear outlet notation 2206Ba, the rear prize winning hole identification section 2205Bb and the rear outlet notation 2206Bb are intended for use by developers, manufacturers or administrators, not by players, and therefore, in consideration of the aesthetics of the side unit 2200B, it is preferable to make them as difficult to see as possible from the player's side. Therefore, in the side unit 2200B of this example, with the film member 2203B attached, when the side unit 2200B is viewed from the player's line of sight, the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Ba, the rear outlet notation 2206Ba, the rear prize winning hole identification section 2205Bb and the rear outlet notation 2206Bb are made invisible or difficult to see. This point will be explained below.

Specifically, in the side unit 2200B of this example, a plate-shaped protruding wall 2208B extending in the left-right direction is formed on the back side of the side unit 2200B so as to protrude rearward, and the protruding wall 2208B is provided so as to be located above at least a part of the back winning entrance notation 2205Ba, the back out entrance notation 2206Ba, the back winning entrance identification section 2205Bb, and the back out entrance identification section 2206Bb. It is preferable that the protruding wall 2208B is provided so that it cannot be contacted by game balls that have entered the general winning entrance 2001B or the sub-out entrance 2021B, but if it is provided so that it can be contacted, it is preferable to provide a protruding amount that does not hinder the flow of game balls and to form an inclined portion so that game balls that come into contact do not stop. By providing a protruding wall 2208B on the back side of the side unit 2200B in this way, even if a player peers into the inside of the general winning opening 2001B or the sub-outlet 2021B from the entrance, the protruding wall 2208B obstructs visibility of the inside, making the back winning opening notation 2205Ba, the back out opening notation 2206Ba, the back winning opening identification section 2205Bb, and the back out opening identification section 2206Bb invisible or difficult to see, and the back winning opening notation 2205Ba, the back out opening notation 2206Ba, the back winning opening identification section 2205Bb, and the back out opening identification section 2206Bb prevent a decrease in the aesthetics of the side unit 2200A and the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine.

In addition, the side unit 2200B of this example also adopts the following configuration to avoid the aesthetics of the side unit 2200B and the decorativeness of the entire gaming machine being reduced by the rear winning hole notation 2205Ba, rear outlet notation 2206Ba, rear winning hole identification unit 2205Bb, and rear outlet identification unit 2206Bb. That is, a side unit decorative board (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted is provided at the rear of the side unit 2200B, and the multiple LEDs mounted on this side unit decorative board can irradiate light from behind onto the background pattern 2207B and winning hole notation 2205B printed on the film member 2203B attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202B, while not irradiating light from behind onto the outlet notation 2206B printed on the film member 2203B. This makes the background image 2207B and the winning hole notation 2205A stand out against the out hole notation 2206B in the game area 5a, and prevents the player from paying attention to the sub-out hole 2021B, which is undesirable to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

As another example, the LEDs mounted on the side unit decorative board may be able to irradiate the entire film member 2203B attached to the front surface of the side unit body 2202B from behind, in which case the rear outlet notation 2206Ba may be used to prevent the outlet notation 2206B from being illuminating and decorated. For example, at least the rear outlet notation 2206Ba may be printed with a non-translucent paint (e.g., non-translucent plating, etc.), and the rear outlet notation 2206Ba and the outlet notation 2206B may be arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-to-back direction. By configuring in this way, even if the LEDs mounted on the side unit decorative board irradiate the entire film member 2203B from behind, the rear outlet notation 2206Ba itself, which does not have translucency, can block the transmission of light forward, making it possible to prevent the outlet notation 2206B from being illuminating and decorated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the rear prize winning hole identification unit 2205Bb and the rear outlet identification unit 2206Bb, which correspond to the prize winning hole notation 2205B, the outlet notation 2206B, the rear prize winning hole notation 2205Bb, and the rear outlet notation 2206Bb, are provided in the side unit 2200B. Even in cases where the gaming machine is operated on a trial basis without the film member 2203B attached to the side unit 2200B, the rear prize winning hole identification unit 2205Bb and the rear outlet identification unit 2206Bb can be used to determine the positions of the general prize winning hole 2001B and the sub-outlet 2021B. This makes it easy to check whether the actions associated with various ball entries that occur during the trial operation of the gaming machine are appropriate, thereby improving the work efficiency of the gaming machine testing process. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning hole notation 2205B and the outlet notation 2206B can be seen from the front side of the side unit 2200B, and the back winning hole notation 2205Ba and the back outlet notation 2206Ba can be seen from the rear side of the side unit 2200B. Therefore, during the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine, when inspecting and checking for abnormalities in the structure of the ball flow path (inside the general winning hole 2001B and inside the sub-out hole 2021B) on the back side of the side unit 2200B before assembling it to the gaming board 5, it is easy to identify which flow path leads to the general winning hole 2001B or the sub-out hole 2021B from the back side of the side unit 2200B, improving the work efficiency and convenience of the development and manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the side unit 2200B is provided with a general winning opening 2001B and a sub-out opening 2021B, and a winning opening notation 2205B, an out opening notation 2206B, a rear winning opening notation 2205Ba, a rear out opening notation 2206Ba, a rear winning opening identification section 2205Bb, and a rear out opening identification section 2206Bb are provided, but this is not limited to this. While providing an outlet 2021B, it is also possible to provide only a rear prize winning outlet notation 2205Ba and a rear prize winning outlet identification unit 2205Bb without providing a rear prize winning outlet notation 2206Ba or a rear prize winning outlet identification unit 2206Bb, or to provide only an outlet notation 2206B, a rear prize winning outlet notation 2206Ba and a rear prize winning outlet identification unit 2206Ba without providing a prize winning outlet notation 2205B, a rear prize winning outlet notation 2205Ba or a rear prize winning outlet identification unit 2205Bb. In addition, when multiple general winning openings 2001B are provided or multiple sub-out openings 2021B are provided, it is not necessary to provide all of them with winning opening notation 2205B, rear winning opening notation 2205Ba, rear winning opening identification unit 2205Bb, rear out opening notation 2206Ba, and rear out opening identification unit 2206Bb. It is also possible to provide winning opening notation 2205B, rear winning opening notation 2205Ba, rear winning opening identification unit 2205Bb, rear out opening notation 2206Ba, and rear out opening identification unit 2206Bb only at some of the entry openings. That is, among the locations where the structure of the ball flow path on the back side of the side unit 2200B is inspected and confirmed for abnormalities before assembly to the game board 5, the back winning port notation 2205Ba and the back outlet notation 2206Ba are provided only in the flow path portions that are considered particularly important, thereby improving the work efficiency of the development and manufacturing processes of the game machine while preventing the structure of the film member 2203B from becoming complicated. Also, when the game machine is operated on a trial basis without the film member 2203B attached to the side unit 2200B, the back winning port identification unit 2205Bb and the back outlet identification unit 2206Bb are provided only in the flow path portions that are considered particularly important, thereby further improving the work efficiency of the test process of the game machine and increasing convenience.

In the above embodiment, the side unit 2200B is exemplified as an object on which the general winning opening 2001B and the sub-outlet 2021B are provided, but this is not limited thereto. The winning opening and the outlet may be provided on another member, and a film member having a notation corresponding to the back winning opening notation 2205Ba and the back outlet notation 2206Ba may be attached to the target member, while the notation corresponding to the back winning opening notation 2205Ba and the back outlet notation 2206Ba may be visible from the back side of the target member, and further, the back winning opening identification part 2205Bb and the back outlet identification part 2206Bb may be formed on the target member, and the back winning opening identification part 2205Bb and the back outlet identification part 2206Bb may be visible from the front side and the rear side of the target member before the film member is attached. In addition, such a target member may be one in which both the winning opening and the sub-outlet are formed, or one in which only one of the winning opening and the sub-outlet is formed. This configuration can achieve the same effect as above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the rear winning opening notation 2205Ba, the rear winning opening notation 2206Ba, the rear winning opening identification unit 2205Bb, and the rear opening identification unit 2206Bb are detrimental to the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine if they are visible to the player, and may, for example, reduce the player's interest in playing the game, so it is desirable that they are not visible from the front side of the side unit 2200B. In this embodiment, the back of the back winning hole notation 2205Ba and the back out hole notation 2206Ba, the back of the base at the position corresponding to the back winning hole notation 2205Ba, the back out hole notation 2206Ba, the back of the back winning hole identification part 2205Bb and the back out hole identification part 2206Bb, the back of the background picture 2207B, and the back of the winning hole notation 2205B or the out hole notation 2206B are made invisible from the front side of the side unit 2200B by using a paint that does not have translucency (for example, a plating that does not have translucency). Note that at least a part of the winning hole notation 2205B and the out hole notation 2206B may be visible from the rear side of the side unit 2200B. For example, by printing the base, background pattern 2207B, rear prize winning port notation 2205Ba, and rear outlet notation 2206Ba located behind the prize winning port notation 2205B and outlet notation 2206B with a translucent paint, at least a portion of the prize winning port notation 2205B and outlet notation 2206B can be seen from the rear side of the side unit 2200B, and the positions of the general prize winning port 2001B and sub-outlet 2021B can be shown to the operator together with the rear prize winning port notation 2205Ba, rear outlet notation 2206Ba, rear prize winning port identification section 2205Bb, and rear outlet identification section 2206Bb.

In the above embodiment, the side units 2200A and 2200B in which the general winning openings 2001A and 2001B and the sub-outlets 2021A and 2021B are formed have been described in detail, but the front unit 2000 of this embodiment has an attacca unit 2400 in which the large winning opening 2005 and one sub-outlet 2021 are formed, and the attacca unit 2400 is provided with an out opening indication, a back out opening indication and a back out opening identification section (all not shown) for the sub-outlet 2021, just like the side units 2200A and 2200B. In addition, the general winning opening and the sub-outlet may be formed in other members constituting the front unit 2000, and the general winning opening and the sub-outlet may be provided with a winning opening indication, a back winning opening indication and a back winning opening identification section, an out opening indication, a back out opening indication and a back out opening identification section for the general winning opening and the sub-outlet on the other members.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the positions at which the winning opening notation, rear winning opening notation, rear winning opening identification unit, out opening notation, rear out opening notation, and rear out opening identification unit are provided have been described as being near the general winning opening 2001 or sub-out opening 2021, and preferably at positions where at least a portion of the winning opening notation, rear winning opening notation, rear winning opening identification unit, out opening notation, rear out opening notation, and rear out opening identification unit are provided in any position that corresponds to the general winning opening 2001 or sub-out opening 2021. For example, in the game area 5a, a guide path that reliably guides the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001 or the sub-out opening 2021 may be formed using multiple guide nails N, a part of the previous component 1000, or a part of the front unit 2000, and a winning opening notation, a back winning opening notation, a back winning opening identification section, an out opening notation, a back out opening notation, or a back out opening identification section may be provided near the guide path (particularly near the beginning of the guide path, preferably at a position where at least a part of the guide path overlaps with the beginning of the guide path in the front-to-rear direction).

The winning hole notation or the out hole notation formed near the above-mentioned guide path can inform the player that the game ball B passing the beginning of the guide path (for example, between a pair of guide nails N) will or will not benefit the player when the game ball B passes the beginning of the guide path. In addition, the back winning hole notation or the back out hole notation formed near the guide path can show the worker the position of the component corresponding to the guide path (the beginning of the guide path) when assembling the component on which the back winning hole notation or the back out hole notation is formed to the game board 5, thereby improving the work efficiency of the assembly work. In addition, the rear entry opening identification section and rear exit opening identification section formed near the guideway can identify the position of the guideway (the beginning of the guideway) even when the gaming machine is operated on a trial basis without a film member attached to the member on which the rear entry opening identification section and rear exit opening identification section are formed, making it easy to check whether the actions associated with various balls entering the game during the trial operation of the gaming machine are appropriate.

[Example 3 of modified notations]
Next, as a further different embodiment from the above, a configuration that suppresses the multiple winning opening notations and the multiple out opening notations from impairing the uniformity and aesthetics peculiar to the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Below, a front unit 2000C having multiple out opening notations that are modified from the out opening notations 2206A and 2206B described in Figures 202 to 205 etc. will be described with reference to Figure 206 etc. Note that the components other than the front unit 2000C will be described with the same reference numerals as those in the above embodiment having the front unit 2000 described above.

Figure 207 is a front view showing a game board 5 having a front unit 2000C. As shown in Figure 207, it has a side unit 2200C in which three general winning holes 2001C and one sub-out hole 2021C are formed, and an attacca unit 2400C in which a large winning hole 2005C and one sub-out hole 2021C are formed.

The side unit 2200C has a film member 2203C attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202C, and the film member 2203C is formed in a sheet shape using a synthetic resin having translucency. On the film member 2203C, a background pattern 2207C that decorates almost the entire front of the side unit 2200C and an outlet notation 2206C that is formed in a position corresponding to the sub-outlet 2021C (near the sub-outlet 2021C, preferably at a position where at least a part overlaps with the sub-outlet 2021C in the front-rear direction) and indicates that it is the sub-outlet 2021C are printed. In addition, on the film member 2203C, a prize winning port notation that is formed in a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 2001C (near the general prize winning port 2001C, preferably at a position where at least a part overlaps with the general prize winning port 2001C in the front-rear direction) and indicates that it is the general prize winning port 2001C may be further printed.

The film member 2203C, like the above-mentioned film member 2203A, has at least three layers, for example, a first film layer on the front side, a second film layer located below the first film layer, and a third film layer located below the second film layer, and is configured to be integrated into a seal-like member by stacking each film layer. The first film layer is printed with the winning hole notation and the out hole notation 2206C on a translucent synthetic resin sheet material, the second film layer is printed with the above-mentioned background pattern 2207C (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern) on a translucent synthetic resin sheet material, the third film layer is printed with a white base to make the above-mentioned background pattern 2207C clear on the entire surface of the translucent synthetic resin sheet material, and the back side of the third film layer is pasted with a glue that can be attached to the front of the side unit main body 2202C. That is, the film member 2203C in this example is configured so that the background pattern 2207C of the second film layer and the outlet marking 2206C of the first film layer are overlapped on the front surface of the white base of the third film layer, and since both are made into translucent film layers, it is possible to provide a decorative substrate having an illuminant such as an LED on the rear side to illuminate and decorate the side unit 2200C. Note that the film member 2203C is not limited to the configuration having the three film layers described above, and may be three or more film layers, or may be composed of only two film layers or only one film layer. When composed of only two film layers or only one film layer, the outlet marking 2206C may be printed together with the film layer on which the background pattern 2207C is printed.

The attacca unit 2400C has a film member 2403C attached to the front of the attacca unit main body 2402C, and the film member 2403C is formed in a sheet shape using a translucent synthetic resin, similar to the above-mentioned film member 2203C. On the film member 2403C, a background pattern 2407C that decorates almost the entire front of the attacca unit 2400C and an outlet notation 2406C that is formed in a position corresponding to the sub-outlet 2021C (near the sub-outlet 2021C, preferably at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the sub-outlet 2021C in the front-rear direction) and indicates that it is the sub-outlet 2021C are printed.

The film member 2403C, like the above-mentioned film member 2203C, has at least three layers, for example, a first film layer on the front side, a second film layer located below the first film layer, and a third film layer located below the second film layer, and is configured to be integrated into a seal-like member by stacking each film layer. The first film layer is printed with the winning hole notation and the out hole notation 2406C on a translucent synthetic resin sheet material, the second film layer is printed with the above-mentioned background pattern 2407C (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern) on a translucent synthetic resin sheet material, the third film layer is printed with a white base to make the above-mentioned background pattern 2407C clear on the translucent synthetic resin sheet material, and the back side of the third film layer is pasted with a glue that can be attached to the front of the attacca unit main body 2402C. In other words, the film member 2403C in this example is configured so that the background pattern 2407C of the second film layer and the outlet marking 2406C of the first film layer are overlapped on the front surface of the white base of the third film layer, and since both are made into film layers with translucency, it is possible to provide a decorative substrate having an illuminant such as an LED at the rear to illuminate and decorate the attacca unit 2400C. Note that the film member 2403C is not limited to the configuration having the three film layers described above, and may be three or more film layers, or may be composed of only two film layers or only one film layer. When composed of only two film layers or only one film layer, the outlet marking 2406C may be printed together with the film layer on which the background pattern 2407C is printed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the normal state of the pachinko machine 1, the player is made to perform a shooting operation of game ball B aimed at the left side of the play area 5a so that the game ball B can be accepted by the first starting port 2003C (hereinafter, may be referred to simply as "left hit"), whereas in a favorable play state in which the player is at an advantage, which occurs as a result of game ball B being accepted by the first starting port 2003C and a "hit" (for example, a "small hit", "medium hit", "big hit", "gimmick hit", etc.) being selected as the result of the drawing of the first special pattern, the player is made to perform a shooting operation of game ball B aimed at the right side of the play area 5a (so-called "right hit") so that the game ball B can be accepted by the large prize opening 2005C or the like. In conventional gaming machines, the player can easily grasp the position of the sub-outlet 2021C in the gaming area 5a by visually checking the outlet markings 2206C and 2406C. However, if the visual aspects (character shape, character color, character size, character arrangement, etc.) of the outlet markings 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C and the outlet markings 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C are the same, the aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 may be marred by the outlet markings 2206C even if various decorations are applied to each part of the gaming area, and there is a risk of reducing interest in the game. Furthermore, in a favorable gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 where the decorative lamps and other effects are large, if the player is not fully aware of the existence of the sub-out port 2021C when he or she is concentrating on "hitting to the right" to get the game ball to land in the attack unit 2400C on the right side of the gaming area 5a, there is a risk that the ball may land in the sub-out port 2021C that is not recognized by the player, which may undermine the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the difference between the predicted amount of balls dispensed at the time of a jackpot and the actual amount of balls dispensed may become excessive), and the interest in the game may decrease. Below, we will explain an embodiment in which further modifications have been made to the front unit 2000C in order to solve these problems.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 202, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out-out notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C located on the left side of the play area 5a and the out-out notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C located on the right side of the play area 5a are made to have different visibility. The out-out notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C is configured to have a less noticeable notation mode and lower visibility than the out-out notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C, for example. Specifically, the out-out notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C is written as "OUT" in hollow letters hollowed out by the base or background pattern 2207C and is formed so as to blend into the base or background pattern 2207C. In contrast, the outlet notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C is configured to be more visible than the outlet notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C in a more noticeable manner; specifically, the outlet notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C is written as "OUT" in bold letters in a different color than the base and background pattern 2407C, and is formed so as not to blend in with the base and background pattern 2407C.

In addition, the out-port notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C may be configured to be less noticeable and less visible than the out-port notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C. For example, "OUT" may be written in bold letters in a color that is less noticeable, such as the same color as the base or background pattern 2207C or a dark color, or "OUT" may be written in thin letters in a color that is more noticeable, such as a color different from the base or background pattern 2207C or a light color. In addition, even if both the out-port notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C and the out-port notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C are formed to blend into the background pattern 2207C, the out-port notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C may be written in a form (thin letters, etc.) that is less noticeable than the out-port notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C. Additionally, the outlet marking 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C is written in English as "OUT," but it may be written in symbols such as "x" or "☆" instead of letters, making it less noticeable intuitively.

In addition, the outlet notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C may be configured to be more noticeable and highly visible than the outlet notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C. For example, "OUT" may be written in bold letters in a color different from the base or background pattern 2207C, such as a bright color that is easy to notice, or a metallic color that reflects light easily, or "OUT" may be written in hollow letters in a color different from the base or background pattern 2407C, or "OUT" may be written in bold letters that are further outlined in another color, and it is desirable for the notation to be formed in such a way that it does not blend in with the base or background pattern 2207C of the film member 2203C. Additionally, the outlet marking 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C is written in English as "OUT", but it may also be written in katakana as "out" or in hiragana as "out", for example, and it is desirable to make it intuitively noticeable.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out exit notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C located on the left side of the playing area 5a and the out exit notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C located on the right side of the playing area 5a have different visual appearances, so that even when the out exit notation 2206C and the out exit notation 2406C are visually observed by a player, the player can be given the illusion that the out exit notation 2206C and the out exit notation 2406C are not the same notation, and the notation appropriate for each unit and playing area can prevent the decoration within the playing area from being damaged and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is in its normal state, the out port notation 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C located on the left side of the play area 5a where the player's attention is focused when the player makes a "left hit" and when the pachinko machine 1 is in its favorable play state, the out port notation 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C located on the right side of the play area 5a where the player's attention is focused when the player makes a "right hit" are different in visual appearance, so that when the state of the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the normal state to the favorable play state, or when the state of the pachinko machine 1 transitions from the favorable play state to the normal state, the player is given the impression that the board has changed, which further prevents a decline in interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has an outlet marking 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C located on the left side of the play area 5a and an outlet marking 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C located on the right side of the play area 5a, and the outlet marking 2206C is written so as to blend into the base of the film member 2203C and the background pattern 2207C, and is formed so as to be less noticeable than the outlet marking 2406C. Therefore, in the normal state of the pachinko machine 1 where the performance effect of the decorative lamp etc. is small, even if the player performs "left hit" and focuses his attention on the left side of the play area 5a, the outlet marking 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C is difficult to focus on, and the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 are prevented from being damaged, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented. Furthermore, in a favorable playing state of the pachinko machine 1 where the decorative lamps and other effects are large, even if the player "hits to the right" and focuses his or her attention on the right side of the playing area 5a, the out hole marking 2406C formed on the attacca unit 2400C is easily visible, and the game ball is prevented from entering the sub-out hole 2021C that is not recognized by the player, which would damage the player's trust in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the difference between the predicted amount of balls dispensed at the time of a jackpot and the actual amount of balls dispensed becomes excessive), and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which a film member 2203C having an outlet notation 2206C printed thereon is attached to the front surface of the side unit 2200C, but the film member 2203C having an outlet notation 2206C printed thereon may also be configured to be attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 that is visible through at least a transparent portion of the side unit 2200C, or the film member having an outlet notation 2206C printed thereon may be attached to the rear end surface that forms the rear end of the gaming area 5a. With these configurations, the outlet marking 2206C of the side unit 2200C is located behind the outlet marking 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C, so that in the normal state of the pachinko machine 1 where the effects of decorative lamps and the like are small, even if the player "hits left" and focuses his or her attention on the left side of the playing area 5a, the outlet marking 2206C formed on the side unit 2200C is difficult to focus on, preventing the player from damaging the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C may be less noticeable than the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C. For example, the character size of the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C may be larger than the character size of the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C, the font of the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C may be written in a font that is more noticeable than the font of the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C, or the character string of the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C may be written vertically or diagonally.

In addition, the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C and the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C are not limited to being in different fonts, and the layout of each notation may be changed so that the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C is less noticeable than the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C. For example, the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C may be provided in a specified recess formed in the side unit 2200C, and the outlet notation 2206C of the side unit 2200C may be positioned so that it is further back in the front-to-back direction than the location of the outlet notation 2406C of the attacca unit 2400C, and by moving it away from the player, it may be made less noticeable.

In addition, the side unit 2200C and the attacca unit 2400C of this embodiment may be further provided with a back-out port notation or a back-out port identification section (both not shown) for the sub-out port 2021, similar to the side units 2200A and 2200B described above, and the position of the sub-out port 2021C can be indicated to the person assembling the front unit 2000C and the person testing the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side unit 2200C and the attacca unit 2400C of this embodiment may be further provided with a winning port notation, a back winning port notation, or a back winning port identification section (all not shown) for the general winning port 2001, and the position of the general winning port 2001C can be indicated to the person assembling the front unit 2000C and the person testing the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the side unit 2200C is exemplified as an object for which the sub-outlet 2021C located on the left side of the play area 5a is provided, and the attacca unit 2400C is exemplified as an object for which the sub-outlet 2021C located on the right side of the play area 5a is provided, but this is not limited to this. If the sub-outlet 2021C is provided on another member of the front unit 2000C, and a film member having an outlet notation corresponding to the left or right position of the play area 5a can be attached to the target member, or if one of the multiple outlet notations is configured to be less or more visible than the other, it is possible to achieve the same effect as above.

[Example of door frame modification]
Next, as a further different embodiment from the above, a configuration that suppresses the multiple winning hole notations and the multiple out hole notations from impairing the uniformity and aesthetics peculiar to the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Below, a front unit 2000D having multiple out hole notations similar to the out hole notations 2206A, 2206B, and 2206C described in Figs. 202 to 207, etc., and a door frame 3D supported so as to be openable and closable by a main body frame 4 to which a game board 5 to which the front unit 2000D is assembled is attached will be described with reference to Fig. 208, etc. Note that the components other than the door frame 3D and the front unit 2000D will be described with the same reference numerals as those in the above embodiment having the door frame 3 and the front unit 2000 described above.

Figure 208 is a front view showing a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 5 to which a front unit 2000D is assembled. As shown in Figure 208, the front unit 2000D has an attacca upper right unit 2600D provided above the right end of an attacca unit 2400D similar to the attacca unit 2400 described above. The attacca upper right unit 2600D has one sub-out port 2021D and a film member 2603D on which an out port notation 2606D is printed to indicate that it is a sub-out port 2021D.

In more detail, the attacca upper right unit 2600D has a film member 2603D attached to the front portion 2604D of the attacca upper right unit main body 2602D, and the film member 2603D is formed in a sheet shape using a synthetic resin having translucency. On the film member 2603D, a background pattern 2607D that decorates almost the entire front area of the attacca upper right unit 2600D and an outlet notation 2606D that is formed in a position corresponding to the sub-outlet 2021D (near the sub-outlet 2021D, preferably at a position that at least partially overlaps with the sub-outlet 2021D in the front-to-rear direction) and indicates that it is the sub-outlet 2021D are printed.

The film member 2603D, like the above-mentioned film member 2203A, has at least three layers, for example, a first film layer on the front side, a second film layer located below the first film layer, and a third film layer located below the second film layer, and is configured to be integrated into a seal-like member by stacking the film layers. The first film layer is a sheet material made of a synthetic resin having translucency, on which an outlet notation 2606D is printed, the second film layer is a sheet material made of a synthetic resin having translucency, on which the above-mentioned background pattern 2607D (in this example, a red and pink cherry blossom pattern) is printed, the third film layer is a sheet material made of a synthetic resin having translucency, on which a white base is printed over the entire surface to make the above-mentioned background pattern 2607D clear, and the back side of the third film layer is pasted with a glue that can be attached to the front of the attacker upper right unit body 2602D. That is, the film member 2603D in this example is configured so that the background pattern 2607D of the second film layer and the outlet marking 2606D of the first film layer are superimposed on the front surface of the white base of the third film layer, and since both are made into translucent film layers, it is possible to provide a decorative substrate having an illuminant such as an LED at the rear to illuminate and decorate the upper right unit 2600D of the attacca. Note that the film member 2603D is not limited to the above-mentioned three film layers, and may be three or more film layers, or may be composed of only two film layers or only one film layer. When composed of only two film layers or only one film layer, the outlet marking 2606D may be printed on the film layer on which the background pattern 2607D is printed.

The out-port notation 2606D formed on the attacca upper right unit 2600D is written as "OUT" in bold letters in a color different from the background and background pattern 2607D, and is formed so as not to blend in with the background and background pattern 2607D. The out-port notation 2606D formed on the attacca upper right unit 2600D may be written as "OUT" in bold letters in a color different from the background and background pattern 2607D, such as a bright color that is easy to notice, or a metallic color that is easy to reflect light, or may be written as "OUT" in hollow letters with a color different from the background and background pattern 2607D, or may be written as "OUT" in bold letters with a border of another color, and is formed so as not to blend in with the background and background pattern 2607D of the film member 2603D. Additionally, the out port marking 2606D formed on the attacker upper right unit 2600D is written in English as "OUT", but it may also be written in katakana as "out", in hiragana as "out", or with symbols such as "x" or "★".

The door frame 3D of this embodiment includes the above-mentioned door frame main body 100, a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame main body 100, a door frame left side unit 320 provided to the left of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame main body 100, a door frame right side unit 340D provided to the right of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame main body 100, a door frame fascia 190 extending from the lower end at a certain height across the entire width in the left-right direction on the front side of the door frame main body 100, a shelf unit 200 protruding forward at a portion between the game window 101 and the door frame fascia 190 on the front side of the door frame main body 100, and a performance operation unit 250 provided in the left-right center of the shelf unit 200 and operable by the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of sub-outlets 2021D are provided in the play area 5a, and, for example, an outlet notation 2606D indicating that it is a sub-outlet 2021 is printed on a film member 2603D attached to the front part 2604D of the attacca upper right unit 2600D. Therefore, a player playing the pachinko machine 1 can visually check the outlet notation 2606D and understand that the ball inlet near the outlet notation 2606D is a sub-outlet 2021 with no winning balls. However, in conventional gaming machines, the outlet markings 2606D formed on the front of the gaming board are visible to players who view the front of the gaming board from a distance, such as a player viewing an image of a gaming machine published in a pamphlet or magazine, or a player viewing a gaming machine from an island passage to select a gaming machine to play from among a number of different models. Therefore, the letters and symbols of the outlet markings 2606D may impair the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1, and may reduce the player's interest in the game before the game begins. Below, we will explain an embodiment in which the door frame 3D has been further modified to solve this problem.

The door frame 3D of this embodiment is configured so that the door frame right side unit 340D can be attached and detached when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall, and a predetermined game board 5 and the door frame right side unit 340D can be installed as a set for each model as one group. Specifically, the door frame right side unit 340D can be fitted from the front into a predetermined installation space (right side area) formed on the front side of the door frame 3D, and is configured to be fixed to the installation space from the back side of the door frame 3D by tightening a plurality of hand screws provided on the back side of the door frame 3D with the door frame right side unit 340D fitted into the installation space (not shown). In other words, when changing to a new model of game board, with the pachinko machine 1 attached to the game island in the hall, the game board and the door frame right side unit 340D corresponding to the model before the change are removed by tool-less work (loosening the hand screws), and then the game board and the door frame right side unit 340D corresponding to the new model are installed. This configuration allows you to reduce costs when changing models and want to completely renew not only the gameplay but also the appearance of the gaming machine, making it possible to efficiently renew both the gameplay and the appearance of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the door frame 3D has an extension 344D of the door frame right side unit 340D that is arranged to overlap at least a part of the outlet marking 2606D of the attacca upper right unit 2600D in the front-to-rear direction. The door frame right side unit 340D is detachable from the door frame 3D as described above, and the outlet marking 2606D of the attacca upper right unit 2600D is made difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 1 by the extension 344D described later when the door frame right side unit 340D is attached to the door frame 3D, and is made easily visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when the door frame right side unit 340D is detached from the door frame 3D. This makes it possible to make the out port markings 2606D formed on the front of the game board 5 difficult to see for players viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, such as a player viewing an image of the pachinko machine 1 published in a pamphlet or magazine, or a player viewing the pachinko machine 1 from an island passage to select a pachinko machine 1 to play on from among a number of pachinko machines of different models. This prevents the letters and symbols of the out port markings 2606D from impairing the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 for players viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game before they start playing.

The extension 344D of the door frame right side unit 340D is, in detail, an arc extending from the front to the inside of the pachinko machine 1 at the bottom of the translucent semi-tubular door frame right side decoration 341D, and is arranged to overlap at least a part (in this embodiment, the whole) of the outlet marking 2606D of the attacca upper right unit 2600D in the front-to-rear direction. Although the extension 344D is translucent, the surface is decorated with a predetermined color or pattern, making it difficult to see the rear side through the extension 344D. Therefore, the out-port marking 2606D formed on the front of the game board 5 can be made difficult to see by players who view the front of the game board 5 from a distance, such as a player who views an image of the pachinko machine 1 published in a pamphlet or magazine, or a player who views the pachinko machine 1 from an island passage to select a pachinko machine 1 to play on from among a plurality of pachinko machines of different models, and the letters and symbols of the out-port marking 2606D do not impair the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 for a player who views the front of the game board 5 from a distance, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game before starting to play can be suppressed. Also, the back surface of the extension portion 344D is formed so as to provide a predetermined gap (space) between the game window 101 and the out-port marking 2606D without contacting the game window 101. This allows a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to see the outlet marking 2606D of the attacca upper right unit 2600D through the gap (space) provided between the back surface of the extension 344D and the game window 101, preventing a game ball from entering the sub-outlet 2021D that is not recognized by the player, which could damage the player's trust in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the difference between the predicted amount of balls dispensed at the time of a jackpot and the actual amount of balls dispensed becoming too large), and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the attacca upper right unit 2600D is formed with a sub-out outlet 2021D and an outlet notation 2606D indicating that it is a sub-out outlet 2021, but the attacca upper right unit 2600D may be formed with a general winning outlet (not shown) and a winning outlet notation (not shown) indicating that it is a general winning outlet in addition to or instead of the sub-out outlet 2021D, and the door frame 3D may have an extension portion 344D of the door frame right side unit 340D arranged to overlap at least a portion of the winning outlet notation of the attacca upper right unit 2600D in the front-to-back direction. In this type of pachinko machine 1, the winning port markings formed on the front of the game board 5 can be made difficult to see by players viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, such as a player viewing an image of the pachinko machine 1 published in a pamphlet or magazine, or a player viewing the pachinko machine 1 from an island passage to select a pachinko machine 1 to play on from among a number of different pachinko machines of different models. This prevents the letters and symbols of the winning port markings from impairing the uniformity and aesthetics of the pachinko machine 1 for players viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game before they start playing.

In addition, the outgoing notation 2606D is made difficult to see by the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D, but in order to make the outgoing notation 2606D difficult to see by the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D, the notation form of the outgoing notation 2606D may be made different from the other outgoing notations to match the shape of the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D. For example, if it is desired to keep the extension of the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D toward the play area to a relatively small amount, the notation form of the outgoing notation 2606D can be made vertical or diagonal rather than horizontal, so that the extension of the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D toward the play area can be made relatively small. In addition, the font of the outlet marking 2606D at the rear of the door frame right side unit 340D may be made smaller than the other outlet markings, so that the extension of the door frame right side unit 340D makes it difficult to see.

In this embodiment, the attacca upper right unit 2600D is exemplified as an object on which the sub-out port 2021D and the out port notation 206D located on the right side of the game area 5a are provided, but this is not limited thereto, and the above-mentioned general winning port 2001D, sub-out port 2021D, winning port notation, and out port notation may be provided on other members of the front unit 2000D, and the above-mentioned extension portion may be provided on other members of the door frame 3D. For example, when the general winning port 2001D, sub-out port 2021D, winning port notation, and out port notation are provided on the upper part of the attacca upper right unit 2600D, an arc-shaped extension portion extending downward from the front of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided on the door frame top unit 300, or an extension portion extending inward from the front of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided on the upper part of the door frame right side unit 340D. In addition, when the general winning opening 2001D and the sub-out opening 2021D and the winning opening notation and the out opening notation are provided at the upper part of the upper left side unit, the door frame top unit 300 may be provided with an arc-shaped extension extending downward from the front of the pachinko machine 1, or an extension extending inward from the front of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided at the upper part of the door frame left side unit 320. In addition, when the general winning opening 2001D and the sub-out opening 2021D and the winning opening notation and the out opening notation are provided at the side unit, an extension extending inward from the front of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided at the lower part of the door frame left side unit 320, or the winning opening notation and the out opening notation may be provided so that at least a part of them overlaps with the performance operation unit 250D in the front-to-rear direction. Even if the winning hole markings and the winning hole markings are provided so that they overlap at least partially in the front-to-rear direction with the door frame left side unit 320 and the performance operation unit 250D, it is preferable to configure the door frame left side unit 320 and the performance operation unit 250D to be removable in a configuration similar to that of the door frame right side unit 340D described above.

Here, an example is described in which the winning hole notation and the outlet notation are provided so that at least a portion of them overlap in the front-to-rear direction with the performance operation unit 250D. Specifically, the upper portion (including the first performance button 251D and the second performance button 252D) of the detachably provided performance operation unit 250D is provided so that it overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with at least a portion of the lower portion of the game board 5 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is located in front of the outlet notation of the side unit of the front unit 2000D. In other words, the upper part of the performance operation unit 250D overlaps with at least a portion of the out exit markings in the front-to-back direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to make the out exit markings formed on the front of the game board 5 difficult to see for players viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, such as a player viewing an image of the pachinko machine 1 published in a booklet or magazine, or a player viewing the pachinko machine 1 from an island passage to select a pachinko machine 1 to play on from among a number of pachinko machines of different models, and this prevents the letters and symbols of the out exit markings from impairing the uniformity and aesthetic appearance of the pachinko machine 1 to a player viewing the front of the game board 5 from a distance, and suppresses a decline in the player's interest in the game before they start playing. In addition, a predetermined distance (space) is provided in the front-to-rear direction between the upper back surface of the performance operation unit 250D and the game window 101, and a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the outlet markings on the side unit through the gap (space) provided between the performance operation unit 250D and the game window 101. This prevents a game ball from entering the sub-outlet 2021D that is not recognized by the player, which can damage the player's trust in the pachinko machine 1 and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The upper part of the effect operation unit 250D may be configured such that when the second operation button 252D is activated and protrudes, the protruding second operation button 252D overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with at least a portion of the outlet marking when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. This prevents the outlet marking from coming into the player's field of view during certain effects of the pachinko machine 1, prevents the unique uniformity and aesthetic appearance of the pachinko machine 1 due to the decoration and effects of the pachinko machine 1 from being ruined, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, other components of the attacca upper right unit 2600D and the front unit 2000D of this embodiment may be further provided with a back-out port notation or a back-out port identification section (both not shown) for the sub-out port 2021D, similar to the side units 2200A and 2200B described above, so that the position of the sub-out port 2021D can be indicated to the person assembling the front unit 2000D and the person testing the pachinko machine 1. In addition, other components of the attacca upper right unit 2600D and the front unit 2000D of this embodiment may be further provided with a back-out port notation or a back-out port identification section (both not shown) for the general winning port 2001, so that the position of the general winning port 2001D can be indicated to the person assembling the front unit 2000D and the person testing the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, since the above-mentioned door frame right side unit 340D and the performance operation unit 250D are configured to be detachable, management problems such as forgetting to install or misalignment due to work errors may occur. Therefore, a sensor unit capable of detecting whether the door frame right side unit 340D or the performance operation unit 250D is properly installed may be provided, and the door frame right side unit 340D or the performance operation unit 250D may be configured to detect forgetting to install or misalignment, and if the door frame right side unit 340D or the performance operation unit 250D is detected to be forgotten to install or misalignment, a special notification may be issued to the outside using sound or light. However, if a special notification is issued when a misalignment occurs due to an unintentional impact during play (for example, an operation on the performance operation unit 250D), it may cause concern to the player, so the timing for detecting forgetting to install or misalignment may be within a certain time (for example, 5 minutes) from the time the power is turned on, and after the certain time has passed, even if forgetting to install or misalignment is detected, a special notification may not be issued.

[Spot the difference production]
In this example, a spot the difference performance is executed as one of the performances using the game board 5 and the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5. The performance display device 1600 displays the change of decorative symbols and performs the change performance associated with the change, so the player pays attention to the performance display device 1600. However, for example, when the change performance is executed, the performance is completed only by the performance display device 1600, except for the members that operate in conjunction with the change performance such as the movable body, and it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the area outside the performance display device 1600 on the game board 5. In this respect, in this example, when the spot the difference performance is executed, the performance display device 1600 displays a board surface image A that imitates the game board 5, and the board surface image A is displayed so that it is almost the same as the game board 5 but has some differences, and a performance is executed to find the differences from the game board 5. As a result, when the spot the difference performance is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the performance display device 1600 but also to the area outside the performance display device 1600 on the game board 5.

First, an overview of the spot the difference presentation will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a specific presentation example for explaining the overview of the spot the difference presentation. Note that the game board 5 in FIG. 209 has the same configuration as the game board 5 previously described in FIG. 78 etc., and the reference numerals and other symbols will be omitted for the parts described using FIG. 78 etc.

As shown in FIG. 209, when the spot the difference performance is being performed, board image A, which is a copy of game board 5, is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and board image A is displayed so that it is almost the same as game board 5 but has some differences. In general, "spot the difference" is a game in which a player compares a model picture with a picture that is very similar to the model and finds the differences. In this example, "spot the difference" is adopted as one of the performances, and when the spot the difference performance is being performed, the player compares the model "game board 5 (pachinko machine 1)" with the "board image A displayed on performance display device 1600" that is very similar to the model and finds the differences.

Specifically, the board image A displayed on the performance display device 1600 displays a live-action image of the game board 5, but it may be displayed in an illustrated style or CG as long as it can be recognized as the game board 5. And, with respect to the board image A, except for "parts different from the game board 5", "the aspect of the specified member (color, shape, light emission aspect, etc.)", "the position of the specified member (installation location)", "the pattern attached to the game board 5", etc. are consistent with the game board 5. In addition, the specified member may be a member provided on the game board 5, and for example, a plurality of obstacle nails, a windmill, a movable decoration, a light-emitting decoration, a gate 2010, a first start gate 2003 (start gate unit 2100), a second start gate 2004 (second start gate unit 2720), a large prize gate 2005 (attacca unit 2730), a general prize gate 2001, an out gate 2020, a sub-out gate 2021, etc., which are planted in the game area 5a, can be exemplified. Furthermore, while in this example board image A is displayed as a still image, it may also be displayed as a moving image that moves around the screen. Furthermore, when board image A is displayed as a moving image, it may be displayed so that part of board image A is off-screen while it is moving, and may also involve enlarging or reducing board image A. In this way, by displaying board image A as a moving image while the spot the difference performance is being performed, it is possible to draw attention to every part of board image A.

In addition, the "part different from the game board 5" that is the "answer" to the spot the difference presentation can be anything that is provided on the game board 5. Specifically, for the board image A displayed on the presentation display device 1600, the "part different from the game board 5" can be "one in which a specific component has been added, one in which a specific component has been removed," "one in which a specific component has been replaced with another component," "one in which the aspect of a specific component (color, shape, light emission aspect, etc.) has been changed," "one in which the position (installation location) of a specific component has been changed," "one in which the pattern on the game board 5 has been changed," etc. The specified components may be any components provided on the game board 5, and examples of such components include multiple obstacle nails, windmills, movable decorations, luminous decorations, gates 2010, first starting gate 2003 (starting gate unit 2100), second starting gate 2004 (second starting gate unit 2720), big prize gate 2005 (attacca unit 2730), general prize gate 2001, out gate 2020, and sub-out gate 2021 that are planted in the game area 5a.

The spot the difference effect can be executed as one of the specified demonstration effects (customer-attracting effects, such as displaying effect explanations or promotional images) while the special symbols are not being displayed in a changing state. In this way, by executing the mistake effect while the special symbols are not being displayed in a changing state, the player can enjoy "spot the difference" during the time when the special symbols are not being displayed in a changing state. It may also be possible to execute the spot the difference effect not only while the special symbols are not being displayed in a changing state, but also while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state. For example, if the spot the difference effect is executed while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, the waiting time until the results of the changing display are derived can be effectively utilized.

In addition, the "part different from the game board 5" that is the "answer" of the spot the difference effect may be anything that is provided on the game board 5, but it is desirable not to use components that are provided in positions that the player cannot see as the "answer" of the spot the difference effect. For example, the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 provided at the rear of the game board 5 are components that are provided in positions that the player cannot see from the front of the pachinko machine 1 (positions that cannot be seen unless the administrator opens the main body frame 4), so if they were used as the "answer" of the spot the difference effect, it would be difficult for the player to reach the "answer". For this reason, components that are provided in positions that the player cannot see are not used as the "answer" of the spot the difference effect.

In this example, the game board 5 is used as an example, but it is desirable not to set the part of the game board 5 covered with semi-transparent black as the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance. For example, when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the game area 5a is a part that is visible (easy to see) to the player, whereas the area outside the game area 5a is a clamped part that is clamped between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 and is a part that is difficult for the player to see. Therefore, if it is set as the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance, it is difficult for the player to reach the "answer". For this reason, the part that is the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance is set within the game area 5a, which is a part that is visible (easy to see) to the player, and is not set in the area outside the game area 5a, which is a part that is difficult for the player to see, such as the part covered with semi-transparent black. However, since the areas outside the play area 5a, such as the parts covered in semi-transparent black, are located at the front of the play board 5, rather than at the rear of the play board 5, it is possible for the player to see them through the gap between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and so they may be set as the "answer" to the spot the difference presentation if the purpose is to increase the difficulty of the spot the difference presentation.

In this example, the part of the game board 5 covered with semi-transparent black is displayed in a diagonal line pattern in the game board image A. The part other than the diagonal lines in the game board image A corresponds to the game area 5a of the game board 5 and is a part that is visible (easy to see) when the player sees the game board 5, whereas the diagonal lines in the game board image A correspond to an area outside the game area 5a of the game board 5 and are a clamped part that is clamped between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, making it a part that is difficult to see when the player sees the game board 5. During the execution of the spot the difference performance, the player can compare the diagonal lines and the parts other than the diagonal lines in the game board image A to inform the player that the diagonal lines are not the "answer" of the spot the difference performance. In this way, if it is possible to inform the player that there is a part that is not the "answer" in the spot the difference performance, the part that is not the "answer" may be displayed. In addition, when displaying parts that are not the answer in the spot the difference presentation, in addition to "displaying a diagonal line pattern on board image A" as described above, it is desirable to display a message stating that "diagonal lines are not the answer."

Next, the sequence of steps in the spot the difference performance will be described with reference to Figs. 210 to 215. Figs. 210 to 215 are specific performance examples for explaining the sequence of steps in the spot the difference performance. In this example, the spot the difference performance is generated as a customer-attracting performance during the non-changing display of the special symbol, but as described above, it can be executed in any state, such as during the changing or non-changing display of the special symbol. In addition, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the special symbol was fixed and stopped without the start of the changing display of a new special symbol, a predetermined demonstration performance (customer-attracting performance, such as displaying a performance explanation or a promotional image) is executed, and in this example, the spot the difference performance is executed as one of the demonstration performances (customer-attracting performances).

As shown in FIG. 210, before the start of the spot the difference performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a standby screen in which the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, in the performance display device 1600, the decorative symbol is displayed in a stationary manner near the center of the screen, the fourth symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message "Press the button to display the menu screen" is displayed in the lower part of the screen to inform the player that the menu screen will be displayed by operating the performance operation unit 250. Note that both the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol can be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and are displayed in a stationary manner when the special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner. In addition, the standby screen may display necessary information as appropriate, such as a level gauge for indicating the set level of the volume or light amount, a character related to the decorative symbol, or a stage or mode for indicating the current game state. In addition, during the display of the standby screen, the speaker is configured not to output sounds such as voices corresponding to messages or background music. However, even if the standby screen is being displayed, if the display of decorative patterns (display of special patterns) has just ended, it is possible to continue outputting the background music during the display until the end, and if a player operation is performed, it is possible to output sound effects (such as volume adjustment sounds or light adjustment sounds) caused by that operation, just as in normal times.

As shown in FIG. 211, when the spot the difference performance starts, the performance display device 1600 displays a start screen that notifies the player that the spot the difference performance is about to start. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays a message saying "The spot the difference performance is about to start! Pay attention to the screen!" to inform the player that the spot the difference performance is about to start. In this way, by notifying the player that the spot the difference performance is about to start and executing a performance that encourages the player to pay attention to the screen, the player can prepare for the spot the difference performance that will be executed later. In addition, while the start screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed, the speaker outputs a sound corresponding to the message: "The spot the difference performance is about to start! Pay attention to the screen!". Other sounds that are output from the speaker include background music corresponding to the spot the difference performance and sound effects to attract the player's attention.

In this example, the start of the spot the difference performance is notified at the start of the spot the difference performance, and the performance display device 1600 does not display board image A immediately after the start of the spot the difference performance. However, at the start of the spot the difference performance, the start of the spot the difference performance may not be notified, and the spot the difference performance may suddenly occur, and the performance display device 1600 may display board image A. This allows the spot the difference performance to suddenly start when the player is not prepared for the occurrence of the spot the difference performance, making it possible to dramatically increase the difficulty of the spot the difference performance. Also, multiple patterns may be provided, including a case where the start of the spot the difference performance is notified, and a case where the spot the difference performance suddenly occurs without being notified of the start of the spot the difference performance. This prevents the player from knowing whether the occurrence of the spot the difference performance will be announced or will occur suddenly, and allows the player to always be on standby for the occurrence of the spot the difference performance.

After the start of the spot the difference performance, the performance display device 1600 hides the decorative pattern that was displayed near the center of the screen, while the fourth pattern that was displayed in the upper right corner of the screen is not hidden and continues to be displayed as it is. Also, since the fourth pattern remains displayed in a stationary state, the player can understand that the spot the difference performance is being performed as a customer-attracting performance. Note that in this example, the fourth pattern is displayed in a stationary state because the spot the difference performance is being performed as a customer-attracting performance while the special pattern is not being displayed in a variable state, but when the spot the difference performance is performed while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable state, the fourth pattern is displayed in a variable state so that the player can understand that the special pattern is being displayed in a variable state. As another example, in a configuration without a fourth pattern, the decorative pattern is not hidden, but may be changed from near the center of the screen to a predetermined position (for example, the upper right part of the screen) so as not to interfere with the visibility of messages, etc., near the center of the screen.

In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change at the same time (for example, the change display of the first special symbol is restricted so that the change display of the second special symbol is not performed during the change display of the second special symbol), but the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be allowed to change at the same time. In such a case, for example, if the first special symbol is not being displayed, it is possible to execute a customer-attracting performance even during the change display of the second special symbol, and a spot-the-difference performance may be executed as such a customer-attracting performance. In other words, when a spot-the-difference performance is executed as a customer-attracting performance, it is sufficient that the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the performance display device 1600, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol may be displayed in a changing state. Also, in this example, it is possible to simultaneously execute a change display of the normal symbol during the change display of the special symbol, but for example, if the special symbol is not being displayed, it is possible to execute a customer-attracting performance even during the change display of the normal symbol, and a spot-the-difference performance is executed as such a customer-attracting performance. In other words, when a spot the difference presentation is executed as a customer attraction presentation, the presentation display device 1600 only needs to display the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern in a stationary manner, and the pattern corresponding to the normal pattern (the normal corresponding pattern) may be displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 212, after announcing the start of the spot the difference performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a problem screen for the spot the difference performance. Board image A is displayed as the problem screen, and board image A is almost the same as game board 5, but is displayed with some differences. Additionally, the performance display device 1600 displays a message at the top of the screen saying "Something has changed on the board! Can you find it?" as a "problem text display indicating that the spot the difference performance is in progress." Additionally, while the problem screen for the spot the difference performance is being displayed, the speaker outputs a sound corresponding to the message saying "Something has changed on the board! Can you find it?". Other sounds output from the speaker include background music corresponding to the spot the difference performance, and sound effects to attract the player's attention.

In this example, as the "area where a part is displayed differently", all of the multiple obstacle nails on the game board 5 are not displayed in the board image A. Then, when the player finds that "the game board 5 has multiple obstacle nails, but the board image A has no obstacle nails", the player can understand that this area is the answer to the spot the difference effect. As described above, the "area where a part is displayed differently" can be any part or component on the game board 5. However, if the "area where a part is displayed differently" is a part or component that is difficult for the player to see, the original effect of the "spot the difference to distinguish something different from the real thing" cannot be achieved, so it is preferable to target a part or component that is easily visible to the player. Specifically, the following can be exemplified as "parts or components that are difficult for the player to see". First, the components provided at the rear of the game board 5, such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, cannot be seen when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. Also, the components provided at the front of the game board 5 but outside the play area 5a, such as the components (clamping members) and seal members at the clamping portion clamped between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, cannot be seen when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. Also, among the components provided on the game board 5, movable members that can be changed between a state visible to the player and a state invisible to the player cannot be seen in the normal state. These components are "parts and components provided in a place that is difficult for the player to see", and therefore are not included in the "places where some parts are displayed differently".

In this example, in the spot the difference presentation, the part that is incorrect (a part that is displayed in a different way) is one of the points where multiple obstacle nails are missing, but it may be multiple. In such a case, the fact that there are multiple incorrect parts may be notified in advance, or the fact that there are multiple incorrect parts may not be notified in advance. For example, if the fact that there are multiple incorrect parts is not notified in advance, the player can know in advance the number of incorrect parts, which can be used as a "hint in the spot the difference presentation." On the other hand, if the fact that there are multiple incorrect parts is not notified in advance, the player cannot know how many mistakes there are in the spot the difference presentation, and even if the player finds one incorrect part, he or she may think that there may be another incorrect part, which may cause the player to look at the screen further to look for new mistakes.

In this example, the display device 1600 displays board image A, but other than board image A, the top of the screen displays a message saying "Something has changed on the board! Can you find it?" as a "question message indicating that the spot the difference performance is in progress", the bottom of the screen displays a "meter indicating the remaining time for the spot the difference performance", and the top right of the screen displays a "fourth symbol stop pattern". Such displays other than board image A are displayed in a higher layer than board image A and cover part of board image A, and also serve to indicate that the "answer (the part that will be the mistake)" in the spot the difference performance is not present in the covered back part. In other words, displays other than board image A allow the player to understand that the "answer (the part that will be the mistake)" in the spot the difference performance is not present in the covered back part, and can be used as a "hint in the spot the difference performance".

In addition, in this example, board image A does not display all of the multiple obstacle nails on the game board 5, but board image A may be configured to display some parts differently from the game board 5. For example, board image A may be configured to "not display some of the components on the game board 5" or "display parts that are not on the game board 5," or it may be configured to "display some of the components on the game board 5, but the state where they are on the game board 5 differs from the state displayed in board image A," such as by displaying the positions at which the multiple obstacle nails are planted in the play area 5a.

As shown in FIG. 213, after the display of the problem screen for the spot the difference performance has finished, the performance display device 1600 displays a preview display announcing the answer to the spot the difference performance. Specifically, when the remaining time for the spot the difference performance reaches 0, the performance display device 1600 hides board image A and displays a message saying "Spot the difference performance is over! The answer will be announced" to announce the answer to the spot the difference performance. Note that in this example, the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed before the answer announcement for the spot the difference performance is displayed, but the answer announcement may be displayed without displaying the preview display of the answer announcement. Also, as will be described later, it is also possible to display something that allows access to a website where the answer can be entered (for example, a URL or QR code) without announcing the answer to the spot the difference performance.

In this example, when the remaining time of the spot the difference performance becomes 0, the board image A is hidden and the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed, but the preview display of the answer announcement may not be displayed immediately. Specifically, when the remaining time of the spot the difference performance becomes 0, a message such as "End!" may be displayed large on the screen, and the preview display of the answer announcement may be displayed after that. Also, when the remaining time of the spot the difference performance becomes 0, the preview display of the answer announcement may not be displayed, and the preview display of the answer announcement may be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed. For example, while the board image A is displayed (while the problem screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed), the player may be so focused on finding the difference that he or she neglects to check the remaining time and may not notice that the remaining time has become 0. However, if the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed without the player noticing that the remaining time has become 0, there is a risk of the player's interest decreasing. In this regard, in this example, when the remaining time of the spot the difference performance becomes 0, the preview display of the answer announcement is not displayed immediately, so that the player can notice that the remaining time has become 0 before the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed, and the player can be prevented from decreasing in interest. In addition, in the above configuration, the meter indicating the remaining time may continue to be displayed at 0 from the time the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0 until the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed, or the display of the meter indicating the remaining time may be erased. Also, from the time the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0 until the preview display of the answer announcement is displayed, it is possible to continue displaying board image A and to make it invisible at the start of the preview display of the answer announcement.

As described above, while the board image A is displayed (while the problem screen for the spot the difference performance is displayed), the speaker outputs the BGM corresponding to the spot the difference performance. However, when the preview of the answer announcement is displayed after the remaining time reaches 0, the speaker does not output the BGM that was being output. At this time, while the preview of the answer announcement is displayed, a different BGM from the BGM corresponding to the spot the difference performance may be output, or the BGM may be made inaudible without being output. For example, when the BGM is made inaudible, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension before the answer announcement is displayed. Even when the BGM is made inaudible, if a player operation is performed, it is possible to output sound effects (such as a volume adjustment sound or a light adjustment sound) that are generated by the player operation, as in normal times. Also, when the BGM is made inaudible, it is possible to output sound effects that are not generated by the player operation (such as a buzzer sound that notifies the player that the spot the difference performance has ended, or a heartbeat that gives the player a sense of tension).

In this example, when the remaining time for the spot the difference presentation reaches 0, the presentation display device 1600 hides board image A and displays a preview of the announcement of the answer to the spot the difference presentation; however, the preview of the announcement of the answer to the spot the difference presentation may be displayed in a higher layer than board image A while leaving board image A displayed, so as to cover part of board image A. For example, if board image A is hidden, it is possible to prevent the player from finding mistakes after the remaining time for the spot the difference presentation reaches 0. On the other hand, if board image A continues to be displayed, the display can be smoothly switched to the preview of the announcement of the answer to the spot the difference presentation after the display of the question screen for the spot the difference presentation has ended.

In the above, when displaying a preview display of the answer to the spot the difference performance while keeping board image A displayed, it is desirable that the part that is the answer to the spot the difference is covered by the preview display. For example, if the part that is the answer to the spot the difference is not covered by the preview display of the answer, the player can continue to look for the mistake even after the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0, but if it is covered by the preview display of the answer, the player can be prevented from looking for the mistake after the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0. Also, if the part that is the answer to the spot the difference is covered by the preview display of the answer, it is not necessary to notify the player of this. In this way, by not notifying the player that the part that is the answer to the spot the difference is covered by the preview display of the answer, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that "even though the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0, since board image A is still being displayed, it may still be possible to continue looking for the difference."

As shown in FIG. 214, after displaying a preview display of the answer announcement of the spot the difference performance, the performance display device 1600 displays an answer announcement display that announces the answer of the spot the difference performance. Specifically, in the performance display device 1600, the right side of the screen displays a board image A that was displayed on the problem screen of the spot the difference performance, which does not have multiple obstacle nails, and the left side of the screen displays a board image B that imitates the game board 5, which has multiple obstacle nails. In other words, the board image B is the same as the board image A in that it imitates the game board 5, but it is different in that the board image A does not display the game board 5 in a manner that makes it different from the game board 5, and there is no part that is a mistake in the board image A. In this way, the performance display device 1600 displays the board image A with the mistake and the board image B with the mistake side by side, so that the player can compare which part is the "answer" to the spot the difference performance at a glance. Regarding board image B, it is sufficient if the incorrect parts of board image A can be identified; details will be described later, but other parts can be partially simplified in the same way as board image A.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 displays a message on the upper side of the screen saying "The answer is 'the nails are gone'" and a message on the lower side of the screen saying "Did you get it? Try again." In this way, the performance display device 1600 notifies the "answer" of the spot the difference performance by a message, so that the "answer" of the spot the difference performance can be known without comparing board image A, which is displayed partially differently from the game board 5, and board image B, which is displayed the same as the game board 5. In addition, while the answer announcement display of the spot the difference performance is being displayed, the speaker outputs sounds corresponding to the message, such as "The answer is 'the nails are gone'" and "Did you get it? Try again." As other sounds, the speaker also outputs background music corresponding to the answer announcement display and sound effects to attract the player's attention.

In this example, the display device 1600 displays both the board image A (board image A displayed so that a part of it is different from the game board 5) that was displayed on the problem screen of the spot the difference performance, and the board image B displayed so that it is the same as the game board 5, but it is sufficient if it notifies the part that is the answer to the spot the difference performance. For example, the display positions of the board images A and B may be the same, and the respective board images may be displayed alternately, and further, the part that is the answer to the spot the difference performance may be displayed so that it flashes. This allows the display area of the board image to be set wide, and makes it easier for the player to confirm the part that is the answer to the spot the difference performance. Also, only the board image A that was displayed on the problem screen of the spot the difference performance (or only the board image B displayed so that it is the same as the game board 5) may be displayed, and the part that is the answer to the spot the difference performance may be notified by text (message) or sound. In this way, when only one of board image A and board image B is displayed, the player can grasp the answer to the spot the difference effect through text (message) or sound, but since it becomes difficult for the player to compare the two with their own eyes, this creates an incentive for the player to check again the next time the spot the difference effect occurs, and this can attract the player's attention to the next spot the difference effect as well.

In this example, the performance display device 1600 displays board image B, which is displayed to be the same as the game board 5, and this board image B is necessary to announce which part is the answer by comparing it with board image A, which is displayed partially differently from the game board 5, in the answer announcement display. However, if board image B is drawn too intricately, it can be used as a blueprint for the game board 5, and there is a risk that board image B will be used illegally. For example, inside a specific component provided on the game board 5, components related to ball output and performance control, such as circuit boards, electronic components, harnesses, and cables, are provided in positions that are visible to the player, but if these components are depicted in board image B, the player will be focusing on board image B in the answer announcement display, making it easier for the player to confirm the positions of the circuit boards, electronic components, etc., and there is a possibility that they will be used as examples for illegal modifications and operations. In this example, in the parts that do not provide the answer to the spot the difference presentation, circuit boards, electronic components, etc. are partially omitted so that they are not visible to the player, or are partially simplified so that they are difficult for the player to see.

Specifically, the answer to the spot the difference performance is the "multiple obstacle nails" provided on the game board 5, but in the answer presentation display, it is sufficient to clearly state that the answer to the spot the difference performance is the "multiple obstacle nails," and other components (parts that are not the answer to the spot the difference performance) do not need to be depicted in detail. For example, components such as the illuminating decorative body that can emit light in accordance with a specified performance, the gate 2010, the first start gate 2003 (start gate unit 2100), the second start gate 2004 (second start gate unit 2720), the big prize gate 2005 (attacca unit 2730), the general prize gate 2001, the out gate 2020, and the sub-out gate 2021 have boards and electronic components provided inside, but the boards and electronic components are provided in positions that are not touched by the game ball, so that the player does not pay attention to them during normal play. Then, when displaying board image B in the answer presentation display, circuit boards and electronic components that are installed inside components that are not the answer to the spot the difference presentation are omitted. This means that even if the player focuses their attention on board image B in the answer presentation display, the player cannot see the location of the circuit boards and electronic components, preventing unauthorized modifications and manipulation.

In this example, when board image B is displayed in the answer presentation display, circuit boards and electronic components that are installed inside components that are not the answer to the spot the difference performance are omitted, but they may be displayed in a simplified manner. For example, product numbers are written on circuit boards and electronic components, but when board image B is displayed, it may be simplified so that the shapes of the circuit boards and electronic components are depicted but the product numbers are not. In this way, when a player focuses on board image B in the answer presentation display, the player can confirm the position of the circuit boards and electronic components, but cannot confirm the product numbers, which prevents unauthorized modifications and operations.

In this example, when displaying board image B in the answer presentation display, circuit boards, electronic components, etc. that are installed inside components that are not the answer to the spot the difference performance are omitted, but it is sufficient if they are not clearly visible. For example, components that contain circuit boards, electronic components, etc. may be erased so that they are not displayed, or components that contain circuit boards, electronic components, etc. may be displayed with a mosaic or blur. Also, components that contain circuit boards, electronic components, etc. may be displayed with other circuit boards, electronic components, etc. that are not originally installed. Also, for example, another display object such as a message display may be displayed on the screen, and components that contain circuit boards, electronic components, etc. may be displayed so that they are covered and hidden by the other display object. These methods also prevent the player from checking the location of the circuit boards, electronic components, etc.

In the above, when board image B is displayed in the answer presentation display, the boards and electronic components that are installed inside the components that are not the answer to the spot the difference performance are omitted, but the boards and electronic components may be omitted or simplified for board image A as well as board image B. In this way, in the answer presentation display, the player also focuses on board image A to compare which part is the "answer" to the spot the difference performance, but even if the player focuses on board image A, the player cannot confirm the position of the boards and electronic components, etc., and it is possible to prevent illegal modifications and operations. In addition, as described above, in the answer presentation display, when only board image B is displayed and the part that is the answer to the spot the difference performance is notified by text (message) or sound, board image A depicting boards and electronic components is not displayed, so the player cannot confirm the position of the boards and electronic components, and it is possible to prevent illegal modifications and operations.

If a circuit board, electronic component, etc. is provided inside the component that is the answer to the spot the difference effect, board image A may be set to "there are no circuit boards or electronic components inside the component" so that the circuit board or electronic component itself is the answer to the spot the difference effect. In such a case, as described above, it is preferable to display only board image B in the answer announcement display and notify the player of the part that is the answer to the spot the difference effect by text (message) or sound. In this way, since board image A depicting a circuit board or electronic component is not displayed, the player cannot confirm the location of the circuit board or electronic component, and this makes it possible to prevent unauthorized modifications or operations.

As shown in FIG. 215, after the answer announcement display that announces the answer to the spot the difference performance is displayed, a standby screen during the non-changing display of the special symbol is displayed. This standby screen during the non-changing display of the special symbol is the same as the standby screen that was displayed before the start of the spot the difference performance. After the standby screen during the non-changing display of the special symbol is displayed, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed without the start of a new variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to start the spot the difference performance again as a demonstration performance (customer attraction performance). Note that after the answer announcement display of the spot the difference performance is displayed, the standby screen during the non-changing display of the special symbol is returned to when the spot the difference performance is completed. However, even if the spot the difference performance is in progress, if a predetermined operation unit (e.g., the performance operation unit 250) is operated or a predetermined detection (e.g., detection by a ball detection (passing game ball) sensor, a door opening sensor, a magnetic sensor, etc.) is performed, it is possible to stop the spot the difference performance and return to the standby screen during the non-changing display of the special symbol.

In this example, since the spot the difference performance is executed as one of the demonstration performances (customer-attracting performances) during the non-changing display of the special symbols, if the ball enters one of the various starting holes during the execution of the spot the difference performance and the changing display of the special symbols begins, the spot the difference performance is immediately stopped and the changing performance related to the changing display of the special symbols begins.

Also, in the above, it is described that "the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed at the same time (for example, the display of the first special symbol is restricted so that it is not displayed while the second special symbol is displayed), but the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed at the same time. In such a case, for example, if the first special symbol is not displayed, it is possible to execute a customer-attracting performance even when the second special symbol is displayed, and a spot-the-difference performance may be executed as such a customer-attracting performance." In such a configuration, if the first special symbol is not displayed while the spot-the-difference performance is being executed, even if a game ball enters the starting hole corresponding to the second special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is started, the spot-the-difference performance will continue. Note that it is preferable that the display of the second special symbol's change and the reserved status are displayed at a predetermined position on the performance display device 1600 or on a display device other than the performance display device 1600 so that the player can check them even while the spot-the-difference performance is being executed. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the spot the difference performance, the spot the difference performance will continue even if the game ball passes through the gate 2010 corresponding to the normal symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol begins. It is preferable that the variable display and the pending status of the normal symbol be displayed at a specified position on the performance display device 1600 or on a display device other than the performance display device 1600 so that the player can check them even while the spot the difference performance is being executed.

In this example, when the ball enters one of the various starting holes during the execution of the spot the difference performance, the display of the special symbols begins, but it may be configured not to begin the display of the special symbols even if the ball enters one of the various starting holes. Also, when the game ball enters the starting hole corresponding to the first special symbol during the execution of the spot the difference performance, the display of the first special symbol does not begin, and when the game ball enters the starting hole corresponding to the second special symbol, the display of the second special symbol begins, but the spot the difference performance continues. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 2010 corresponding to the normal symbol during the execution of the spot the difference performance, the display of the normal symbol begins, but the spot the difference performance continues. In this configuration, even if the ball enters one of the various starting holes (passes through the gate 2010) during the execution of the spot the difference performance, the spot the difference performance is not stopped, so the player can enjoy the spot the difference performance even while firing the game ball.

If the game is configured so that the display of special symbols does not start even if the ball lands in one of the various starting holes during the execution of the spot-the-difference performance, the display of special symbols will not start and the spot-the-difference performance will continue even if the player has made the ball land in the starting hole, which may reduce the interest of players who do not want the spot-the-difference performance to unfold. For this reason, if the game is configured so that the display of special symbols does not start even if the ball lands in one of the various starting holes during the execution of the spot-the-difference performance, it is desirable to execute a display or sound to notify players that the spot-the-difference performance will end after a certain period of time has passed and that the display of special symbols will start. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the player can forcibly end the spot-the-difference performance and start the display of special symbols according to the reserved balls that have been stored.

In addition, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry port or ball entry area (e.g., the out port 1008, the general winning port 2001, the through gate, etc.) that is easy for the game ball to enter, which is different from the various starting ports, the spot the difference performance may be forcibly terminated, and the variable display of the special pattern may be started according to the reserved balls stored. In addition, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry port or ball entry area, if the spot the difference performance is forcibly terminated, a standby screen during the non-variable display of the special pattern may be displayed, or an end display screen other than the standby screen may be displayed. Here, as the end display screen other than the standby screen, for example, a screen with contents notifying (attention) that the spot the difference performance has been forcibly terminated, or a screen with contents notifying that the spot the difference performance has been successfully forcibly terminated (such as "skip function activated!") may be displayed. In addition, when such an end display screen other than the standby screen is displayed, it is preferable to transition to the standby screen after displaying the end display screen. In addition, it is preferable to configure the display not to start the variable display of the special pattern while the end display screen is being displayed. In such a configuration, the fact that the variable display of the special symbol will not start during the end display screen may be notified by displaying a predetermined message on the screen, or may be notified by the fact that the fourth symbol displayed on the screen is in a stopped state. In addition, it is preferable that the spot-the-difference presentation ends sooner when the game ball is inserted into the various starting holes than when the game ball is inserted into a predetermined ball entry hole or ball entry area where the game ball is easy to enter. This is because if the various starting holes are made of materials that end the spot-the-difference presentation sooner, the various starting holes are more difficult to insert than the predetermined ball entry holes or ball entry areas, and it takes time for the player to insert the ball, and the original purpose of "ending the spot-the-difference presentation sooner" cannot be achieved. However, this does not apply if a specific starting hole (for example, a variable winning hole such as the second starting hole 2004) is located in a location where it is easier to insert the ball than the predetermined ball entry hole or ball entry area.

In addition, in this example, when a ball enters one of the various starting holes during the execution of the spot-the-difference performance and the variable display of the special symbols begins, the spot-the-difference performance is stopped. However, when a specific operation unit (e.g., the performance operation unit 250) is operated or a specific detection (e.g., detection by a ball entry detection (game ball passing) sensor, door opening sensor, magnetic sensor, etc.) is performed, the spot-the-difference performance is stopped and the screen can be returned to the standby screen during the non-variable display of the special symbols. This allows players who do not need the spot-the-difference performance to enjoy a performance that meets their needs by, for example, operating a specific operation unit (e.g., the performance operation unit 250). In addition, when a specific operation unit is operated or a specific detection is performed, a specific display screen may be displayed when the spot-the-difference performance is stopped. Here, the specific display screen may be, for example, a screen corresponding to the occurrence of a specific operation or a specific detection, or a screen that suppresses actions such as the occurrence of a specific operation or a specific detection because the pachinko machine 1 is performing the spot-the-difference performance.

In this example, after the display of the problem screen for the spot the difference performance has finished, the performance display device 1600 announces the answer after announcing the answer, and announces the answer to the spot the difference performance. However, as a modified example, the answer to the spot the difference performance may not be announced, and instead something that allows access to a website where the answer can be entered (such as a URL or QR code) may be displayed. Such a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a specific example of a performance to explain a modified example in which the answer to the spot the difference performance is not announced.

As shown in FIG. 216, after the display of the problem screen for the spot the difference performance has finished, the performance display device 1600 does not announce the answer to the spot the difference performance, but instead displays a QR code that can be read to access a specified site, along with a message saying "Spot the difference performance is over! If you know the answer, access below!" to encourage the player to access the code. This QR code is set up so that it can be transferred to a promotional web page for the pachinko machine 1 or a data site that can store game information. Then, when the player reads the QR code, he or she is transferred to such an external site, where the player can input the answer to the spot the difference performance.

Furthermore, when the player inputs the answer to the spot the difference performance at the external site to which the player is transferred, the player can acquire a predetermined benefit. The predetermined benefit may be, for example, the acquisition of points that can be used at the external site to which the player is transferred, or the ability to check the ball payout tendency and setting status (setting values, etc.) of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, the possibility of acquiring something that will be beneficial to the player after the spot the difference performance is performed creates an incentive for the player to try to find the answer while the spot the difference performance is being performed, thereby increasing the interest of the spot the difference performance itself.

In addition, while the problem screen for the spot the difference performance is being displayed, multiple options that may be the answer to the spot the difference performance may be displayed, and the player may operate an operation means such as the performance operation unit 250 within the time limit for the spot the difference to select the option that he or she thinks is the answer from among the options. If the answer selected from the options is correct, a QR code may be displayed. On the other hand, a QR code may be displayed for each option selected, and the answer may be checked at the external site to which the player is transferred to see if the answer selected from the options is correct. In this way, if the answer selected from the options is correct at the external site to which the player is transferred, a predetermined benefit (such as points) can be earned, and if the answer is incorrect, it is possible to notify the player that the answer is incorrect or to display a hint for the answer. This allows the player to not only enjoy the spot the difference performance as a way to kill time, but also to work on it for benefits such as earning points or understanding the settings of the pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing the interest of the spot the difference performance.

In the above, the operation means is required to select from among the options, but it may be configured so that the player can select the answer from among the options by having the game ball enter the ball entry port corresponding to the option (e.g., option A = general entry port A, option B = general entry port B) within the time limit for finding the difference. In such a configuration, while multiple options are displayed, it is desirable to enable the player to smoothly hit the game ball by displaying a message such as "If you think it's option A, aim here, if you think it's option B, aim here!" or outputting a sound. This allows the player to fire as many game balls as possible, and the hall manager can efficiently earn out balls (by having the player hit a wasted ball).

In the above, a QR code is displayed if the answer selected from the options is correct, but it may be configured to display a special image (for example, a character related to the pachinko machine 1, or a rare image that cannot normally be seen) instead of a QR code.

In addition, as described above, in the case where the QR code is displayed when the answer selected from the options is correct, the QR code may be displayed within the time limit for finding the difference, or may be displayed beyond the time limit for finding the difference. For example, in the case where the QR code is displayed within the time limit for finding the difference, the presentation time does not change regardless of which option the player selects, so the storage capacity of the peripheral control board 1510 can be compressed. On the other hand, in the case where the QR code is displayed beyond the time limit for finding the difference, the time for which the QR code and special images are displayed is extended, so that the player can have sufficient time to view and photograph them, thereby improving the interest. In addition, in the case where the QR code is displayed beyond the time limit for finding the difference, it is preferable to set a separate display time for displaying the QR code (for example, 10 seconds) and display the QR code from the time the player selects an option until the set display time has elapsed. In addition, while the QR code is displayed, it is preferable to make the problem screen for finding the difference (board image A) invisible and end the finding the difference presentation so that the player can easily read the QR code.

In addition, as a modified example of the configuration in which the player selects an option, if option A is a part that is the answer to the spot the difference presentation (a part that differs from the game board 5) and option B is a part that is not the answer to the spot the difference presentation (a part that does not differ from the game board 5), when option B that is not the answer is selected, the display of the spot the difference problem screen (board image A) may be continued, while when option A that is the answer is selected, the display of the spot the difference problem screen (board image A) may be terminated and a predetermined benefit (display of a special image such as a QR code or a rare image) may be executed. In this case, when option B that is not the answer is selected, it is desirable to inform the player that the selection of the player is incorrect by display and sound effects such as "That's not it!" or "That's wrong!". This dramatically increases the probability that the player can select option A that is the correct answer, and therefore increases the probability that the player can win a benefit. Even in a configuration in which a predetermined benefit is awarded only if the player selects the correct answer option, it is desirable to have the spot-the-difference presentation end when the time limit reaches zero. However, since this configuration increases the chances that the player will arrive at the correct answer compared to other spot-the-difference presentations, the time limit may be shorter than in other spot-the-difference presentations.

In this example, the incorrect part of the spot the difference performance (parts that are displayed differently) is the absence of multiple obstacle nails on the game board 5 in the game board image A, but as described above, the incorrect part (parts that are displayed differently) can be anything on the game board 5 as the "answer". As described above, the game board image A displayed on the performance display device 1600 can display, as "parts different from the game board 5", "parts with a specified component added, parts with a specified component removed", "parts with a specified component replaced with another component", "parts with a specified component with a different appearance (e.g., light emission appearance)", "parts with a specified component with a different position", "parts with a different pattern on the game board 5", and the like. Such modified examples will be described with reference to Figs. 217 to 219.

Figure 217 is a specific example of a presentation to explain a modified example in which the form of the luminous decoration is different. As shown in Figure 217, on the right side of the presentation display device 1600 on the game board 5, a luminous decoration 2510A that can emit light in accordance with a specified presentation is provided. Then, when the presentation display device 1600 displays the problem screen for the spot the difference presentation, the luminous decoration 2510A on the game board 5 is not lit, while the part depicting the luminous decoration displayed on the board image A is lit as a "part that is displayed differently." In this way, when the player finds that "the luminous decoration 2510A on the game board 5 is not lit, but the part depicting the luminous decoration displayed on the board image A is lit" by comparing the game board 5 with the board image A in the spot the difference presentation, the player can understand that this part is the answer to the spot the difference presentation.

In this modified example, the luminous decorative body 2510A on the game board 5 is not lit, while the area depicting the luminous decorative body displayed on the board image A is lit. However, the luminous decorative body 2510A on the game board 5 may be lit, while the area depicting the luminous decorative body displayed on the board image A may not be lit. In addition, both the luminous decorative body 2510A on the game board 5 and the area depicting the luminous decorative body displayed on the board image A may be lit, but the luminous colors may be different. As mentioned above, the luminous decorative body 2510A on the game board 5 has a circuit board or electronic components inside, so in the spot the difference performance, the board image A may be set to "there is no circuit board or electronic component inside the luminous decorative body," so that the circuit board or electronic component itself is the answer to the spot the difference performance.

Figure 218 is a specific example of a presentation to explain a modified example in which the pattern on the game board is different. As shown in Figure 218, the first start hole 2003 (start hole unit 2100) is provided on the lower side of the presentation display device 1600 on the game board 5, and the first start hole 2003 is marked with a "GO" mark. When the presentation display device 1600 displays a problem screen for the spot the difference presentation, the first start hole 2003 on the game board 5 is marked with a "GO" mark, whereas the board image A does not have a "GO" mark at the location depicting the first start hole 2003. In this way, when the player finds that "the first start hole 2003 on the game board 5 is marked with a "GO" mark, whereas the board image A does not have a "GO" mark at the location depicting the first start hole 2003," by comparing the game board 5 and the board image A in the spot the difference presentation, the player can understand that this location is the answer to the spot the difference presentation.

In this modified example, a mark (pattern) is applied to a specific component on the game board 5, while no mark (pattern) is applied to the location depicting the specific component in the game board image A; however, it is also possible that a mark (pattern) is not applied to a specific component on the game board 5, while a mark (pattern) is applied to the location depicting the specific component in the game board image A. Also, both the specific component provided on the game board 5 and the location depicting the specific component displayed in the game board image A may be marked (patterned), but painted in different colors.

Figure 219 is a specific example of a presentation to explain a modified example in which a specific component is present or absent. As shown in Figure 219, a first start hole 2003 (start hole unit 2100) is provided on the underside of the presentation display device 1600 on the game board 5. When the presentation display device 1600 displays a problem screen for a spot the difference presentation, the first start hole 2003 is provided on the game board 5, but the first start hole 2003 is absent from the board image A. In this way, when a player finds that "the game board 5 has the first start hole 2003, but the board image A does not have the first start hole 2003" by comparing the game board 5 with the board image A in the spot the difference presentation, the player can understand that this location is the answer to the spot the difference presentation.

In this modified example, the game board 5 has a first starting hole 2003 at a predetermined position, whereas the game board image A has the first starting hole 2003 missing from the predetermined position. However, the game board image A may depict the first starting hole 2003 at a position other than the predetermined position. Also, the game board image A may depict a part of the first starting hole 2003 that is partially deformed at a predetermined position, or a member other than the first starting hole 2003 (for example, the second starting hole 2004). Also, the game board 5 does not have any member at a predetermined position, whereas the game board image A may depict some member at a predetermined position.

In this example, the find-the-difference performance is executed as one of the predetermined demonstration performances (customer-attracting performances, such as display of performance explanations and promotional images) during the non-changing display of the special symbol, but it is possible to execute the find-the-difference performance not only during the non-changing display of the special symbol but also during the changing display of the special symbol. When the find-the-difference performance is executed during the non-changing display of the special symbol, if the ball enters the various starting holes, the find-the-difference performance is immediately stopped and the changing display of the special symbol is started, but when the find-the-difference performance is executed during the changing display of the special symbol, even if the ball enters the various starting holes, the special symbol is already being changed, so the find-the-difference performance is continued. Also, when the find-the-difference performance is executed during the changing display of the special symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a changing state so that the player can understand that the special symbol is being changed. Also, when the find-the-difference performance is executed during the changing display of the special symbol, multiple options that can be the answer to the find-the-difference performance are displayed, and the player can select the option that he thinks is the answer by operating the operation means such as the performance operation unit 250 within the time limit for the difference search. Then, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the answer selected from the options is correct, the player may be notified of the jackpot. This makes it appear as if the jackpot was won as a result of the answer selected from the options being correct, and allows the player to actively participate in the spot-the-difference presentation that is executed while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In this example, the find-the-difference performance is executed as one of the predetermined demonstration performances (customer-attracting performances, such as displaying performance explanations and promotional images) during the non-variable display of the special symbols. However, it is sufficient to execute the find-the-difference performance during the non-variable display of the special symbols. For example, it is possible to execute the find-the-difference performance during a big win game or a small win game, before the start of a big win game or before the start of a small win game, after the end of a big win game or after the end of a small win game, or during a favorable game state (probability change or time reduction) after a big win game. In this way, by executing the find-the-difference performance when a profit is awarded during a big win game, it is possible to award the player with a bonus when a profit is awarded. Note that when the find-the-difference performance is executed during a demonstration performance, if the ball enters one of the various starting holes, the find-the-difference performance is immediately stopped and the variable display of the special symbols is started. However, for example, when the find-the-difference performance is executed during a big win game, the variable display of the special symbols cannot be started even if the ball enters one of the various starting holes, so the find-the-difference performance is continued. Also, for example, when a spot the difference presentation is being performed during a jackpot game, multiple options that could be the answer to the spot the difference presentation may be displayed, and the player may operate an operation means such as the presentation operation unit 250 within the time limit for the spot the difference to select the option that he or she believes to be the answer from among the options. Then, if it has been decided that the game state will be controlled to an advantageous state after the jackpot game, and the answer selected from the options is correct, the game state may be controlled to an advantageous state after the jackpot game. This makes it appear as if the advantageous state after the jackpot game has been obtained as a result of the answer selected from the options being correct, and allows the player to actively participate in the spot the difference presentation that is performed during the jackpot game.

In addition, if the power is cut off while the find-the-difference presentation is being performed and then restored, the find-the-difference presentation is not resumed. In addition, if the find-the-difference presentation is being performed while the special symbols are changing or while a benefit is being awarded during a jackpot game, if the power is cut off while the find-the-difference presentation is being performed and then restored, the display of the special symbols changing or the awarding of benefits during a jackpot game is resumed, but the find-the-difference presentation is not resumed. For example, if the find-the-difference presentation is resumed when the power is restored and the remaining time of the find-the-difference presentation is short, it may be difficult to find the answer to the find-the-difference presentation, which may decrease interest. In this regard, in this example, by not resuming the find-the-difference presentation when the power is restored, it is not difficult to find the answer to the find-the-difference presentation against the player's will, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In this example, after the answer display of the spot the difference performance is displayed, the screen is returned to the standby screen during the non-variable display of the special symbol when the spot the difference performance is completed. However, even if a specific operation unit (e.g., the performance operation unit 250) is operated or a specific detection (e.g., detection by a ball entry detection (game ball passing) sensor, door opening sensor, magnetic sensor, etc.) is performed while the spot the difference performance is in progress, the spot the difference performance can be stopped and the screen can be returned to the standby screen during the non-variable display of the special symbol. However, during the period when the start screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed before the problem screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed (before the board image A is displayed), the spot the difference performance is not stopped even if a specific operation unit is operated or a specific detection is performed. For example, if the spot the difference performance is stopped when a specific operation unit is operated during the period when the start screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed, the spot the difference performance will not be executed for a player who has been operating (hitting repeatedly) a specific operation unit before the start screen of the spot the difference performance is displayed, which may reduce the interest of the player. In this regard, in this example, by not stopping the spot the difference presentation when a specific operation unit is operated while the start screen for the spot the difference presentation is displayed, the spot the difference presentation will not be stopped against the player's will, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

In addition, the board image A, which is a copy of the game board 5, depicts a portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600, and a predetermined image or video may be displayed in that portion. However, if the board image A is also displayed inside the board image A (the portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600), another board image A is displayed inside the board image A, and the visual effect of repeating like a double mirror may tire the player. For this reason, it is preferable not to display another board image A in the portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600 in the board image A. In addition, as for what is displayed in the portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600 in the board image A, it is preferable to display a message that the portion is not the target of the spot-the-difference performance, the model name, logo, character, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, in order to inform the player that the portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600 in the board image A is not the target of the spot-the-difference performance. On the other hand, the portion corresponding to the performance display device 1600 in the board image A may not display anything or may be painted black.

(About the hint function in the spot the difference game)
In the above, when the find-the-difference performance is executed, the board image A displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed so that some parts are different from the game board 5, but since it is almost the same as the game board 5, it may be difficult to find which part is different from the game board 5 just by looking at the board image A. In this respect, in this example, it is possible to execute a hint performance during the execution of the find-the-difference performance, and depending on the execution of the hint performance, it is possible to easily find which part is different from the game board 5 by narrowing the area to be found for the board image A to find the difference. The hint performance during the execution of such a find-the-difference performance will be described with reference to Figs. 220 to 227. Figs. 220 to 227 are specific performance examples for explaining the hint performance.

As shown in FIG. 220, before the hint performance starts (when the spot the difference performance starts), first, board image A is displayed on the performance display device 1600 so that the entire game board 5 that is the subject of the spot the difference is depicted. At this stage, the "question message indicating that the spot the difference performance is in progress" and the "meter indicating the remaining time for the spot the difference performance" are not displayed, and no other text or effects are displayed. However, it is possible to display the minimum necessary information, such as the "stopping patterns of the decorative patterns." In this way, the view of board image A is not obstructed, and the entire board image A can be confirmed at first.

As shown in FIG. 221(A), after displaying the board image A on the performance display device 1600, a problem screen for the spot the difference performance is displayed. Specifically, as a display other than the board image A, a message "Something has changed on the board! Can you find it?" is displayed at the top of the screen as a "problem text display indicating that the spot the difference performance is in progress", and a "meter indicating the remaining time for the spot the difference performance" is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Such displays other than the board image A are displayed in a layer higher than the board image A and are displayed so as to cover a part of the board image A, and also have the role of indicating that the "answer (the part that is the mistake)" in the spot the difference performance is not present in the covered back part. And, the board image A is partially covered and the visible area is narrowed, making it easy to find the part that is the "answer" in the spot the difference performance. In this way, of the hint performance A that can cover a part of the board image A, the question text display is executed as the hint performance A1, and the meter indicating the remaining time is executed as the hint performance A2, and both can be used as "hints in the spot the difference performance".

The hint effect A1 may be set to ON/OFF by the player. For example, when the hint effect A1 is turned OFF, the visible area of the board image A on the problem screen of the spot-the-difference effect is not narrowed, so that the player can enjoy finding the difference in a state where the difficulty of the spot-the-difference effect is increased. However, even when the hint effect A1 is turned OFF, it is desirable to at least display the problem statement display, since it is unclear whether the spot-the-difference effect is in progress unless the problem statement display indicating that the spot-the-difference effect is in progress is displayed on the problem screen of the spot-the-difference effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 221(B), when the hint effect A1 is turned OFF, the problem statement display is displayed on a higher layer than the board image A, but is made semi-transparent, for example, so that the board image A on the back side can be seen. As a result, even if the problem statement display is displayed, the visible area of the board image A is not narrowed, and the difficulty of the spot-the-difference effect can be maintained at a higher level.

Furthermore, with regard to hint effect A1, regardless of the player's operation, a pattern in which a problem screen for a spot-the-difference effect is displayed with hint effect A1 ON, and a pattern in which a problem screen for a spot-the-difference effect is displayed with hint effect A1 OFF may be executed randomly. In such a case, even if the location that is the "answer" for the spot-the-difference effect is the same location, the difficulty level of the spot-the-difference effect can be made different between when hint effect A1 is ON and when hint effect A1 is OFF, and it is possible to create spot-the-difference effect problems with multiple difficulty levels from a single "answer."

In addition, when hint performance A starts, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker, making it easier for the player to understand that "hint performance A has started." However, when hint performance A starts, a restriction may be imposed so that sound effects related to hint performance A are not output from the speaker. In this way, if sound effects related to hint performance A are not output, the player cannot tell when hint performance A will start unless he or she pays close attention to the performance display device 1600, allowing the player to participate in the spot the difference performance with a sense of tension.

Next, in addition to hint effect A, there are several other types of hint effects B to D that make it easier to find the "answer" to the spot the difference effect by, for example, covering part of board image A. We will explain these hint effects B to D in order.

First, the hint effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 222. The hint effect B is an effect that displays a predetermined display object capable of pointing to a predetermined area of the board image A that contains the "answer" of the spot-the-difference effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the spot-the-difference effect (in this example, when the remaining time meter is halfway). As shown in FIG. 222(A), when the hint effect B is executed, the effect display device 1600 displays, in addition to the above-mentioned question display and the meter indicating the remaining time, a right-facing arrow with the words "Pay attention to the right" written inside it in the center of the screen. This right-facing arrow is displayed in a layer higher than the board image A and is displayed opaquely so as to cover part of the board image A, and as with the hint effect A, it indicates that the "answer (the part that is the mistake)" in the spot-the-difference effect does not exist in the covered back part. In addition, the arrow is directed to the right, indicating that the "answer" of the spot-the-difference effect is on the right side of the board image A.

As with hint effect A, hint effect B may be able to be turned ON/OFF by the player. For example, the right-pointing arrow can be hidden by setting hint effect B to OFF. Also, for the right-pointing arrow, a pattern of displaying a right-pointing arrow with hint effect B turned ON, and a pattern of displaying a right-pointing arrow with hint effect B turned OFF may be randomly executed regardless of the player's operation.

In this example, in the spot the difference presentation, a question message and a meter showing the remaining time are displayed as hint presentation A, and then a right-pointing arrow is displayed as hint presentation B; however, these may be displayed simultaneously, or the question message and the meter showing the remaining time may be displayed as hint presentation A after the right-pointing arrow is displayed as hint presentation B. In this way, if the right-pointing arrow is displayed as hint presentation B before the question message and the meter showing the remaining time are displayed as hint presentation A, the player will know that the "answer" to the spot the difference presentation is already to the right of board image A when the question message is displayed and the player begins to search for the difference, allowing the player to search for the difference efficiently.

In this example, a right-pointing arrow is displayed in hint performance B, but the direction of the arrow need only point to a specific area of board image A that contains the location that is the "answer" to the spot the difference performance. In this case, the arrow pointing to the specific area of board image A is displayed in a position that does not cover the location that is the "answer" to the spot the difference performance. However, in the spot the difference performance, only arrows of a specific direction, such as a right-pointing arrow, may be displayed each time, and the arrows may be displayed so that their direction is the same. Also, only the arrow of the direction input by the player's operation, for example, by operating the setting adjustment button 204, which is made up of four push buttons aligned front to back and left to right, may be displayed.

In this example, the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B is displayed without rotation, but it may be displayed to rotate at a predetermined cycle, and the position covered by the board image A may be changed by the periodic operation. For example, if the right-pointing arrow is configured to rotate clockwise once every four seconds for one second, the board image A will be displayed so that a predetermined position is not covered for four seconds, while the predetermined position is covered for one second of periodic operation (clockwise rotation). This has the effect of making it easier to adjust the difficulty of the spot-the-difference performance, since the difficulty level of the spot-the-difference performance can be slightly increased compared to the non-periodic hint effect B. Also, as described above, if the arrow is configured to rotate clockwise, the arrow will point to the right for four seconds, but the arrow will point in a direction other than the right for the one second of periodic operation, and during the one second of periodic operation, the hint effect B will not point to the part that is the answer to the spot-the-difference performance, so the difficulty level of the spot-the-difference performance can be increased compared to the non-periodic hint effect B.

In this example, a right-pointing arrow is displayed in hint performance B, but it does not have to be an arrow, and can be anything that points to a specific area of board image A that contains the location that is the "answer" to the spot the difference performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 222(B), a pictogram (pictorial symbol) pointing in the desired direction can be displayed, or as shown in FIG. 222(C), a triangle or home base-shaped figure with its apex pointing in the desired direction can be displayed.

Next, hint effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 223. Hint effect C is an effect that displays a predetermined display object that can cover part of the board image A when the player operates an operation means such as the effect operation unit 250 at any timing (in this example, when the meter showing the remaining time is halfway). As shown in FIG. 223(A), when hint effect C is executed, in addition to the above-mentioned question display and the meter showing the remaining time, a star-shaped figure is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This star-shaped figure is displayed on a layer higher than the board image A and is displayed opaquely so as to cover part of the board image A, and like hint effect A, it indicates that the "answer (the part that is the mistake)" in the spot the difference effect does not exist in the covered back part.

Meanwhile, hint effect A and hint effect B are usually executed at a predetermined timing, and cannot be executed by the player at a timing of their choice. For this reason, for example, even if the player is enjoying the spot the difference effect without using hint effect A or hint effect B until the remaining time is almost gone, the player may not know where the "answer" is to the spot the difference effect, and even if the player wants to use hint effect A or hint effect B, he or she may not be able to start it halfway through, and may not know where the "answer" is until the end. In this respect, in this example, hint effect C can be executed at a timing of the player's choice, and can be started halfway through depending on whether or not the player wants to use hint effect C.

Furthermore, for hint effect C, a star-shaped figure is displayed from the time the player operates until the remaining time reaches 0. However, the display time of hint effect C (star-shaped figure) may be changed; for example, the display time of hint effect C may be the time from the player's operation until a certain amount of time has passed since the player operates, rather than the time from the player's operation until the end of the spot-the-difference presentation. This makes it possible to make the display time of hint effect C longer or shorter than the time during which board image A is displayed as the spot-the-difference presentation, allowing the player to select according to their preference whether to operate the operating means immediately after the start of the spot-the-difference presentation and use hint effect C to get an idea of where the "answer" of the spot-the-difference presentation is, or to enjoy the spot-the-difference presentation without using hint effect C until the remaining time of the spot-the-difference presentation is low.

In addition, the display time of the hint effect C is preferably a predetermined time, but the display time of the hint effect C may be configured so that the player can change it. For example, even if the display time of the hint effect C is set to 3 seconds, the player may operate the operation means to extend it to 5 seconds. This allows the player to change the display time of the hint effect C at will, making it possible to provide hint effects according to the player's skill level. The operation means for extending the display time of the hint effect C may be the same as the operation means used to display the hint effect C, or it may be a different operation means. If the operation means is the same as the operation means used to display the hint effect C, it becomes easier for the player to intuitively decide whether to extend the display time of the hint effect C or not. On the other hand, if the display time of the hint effect C is extended by an operation means different from the operation means for displaying the hint effect C, the player will not mistakenly operate the operation means even though he does not want to extend the display time of the hint effect C, and the display time of the hint effect C will not be extended. Furthermore, if it were possible to shorten the display time of hint effect C, it would only be displayed for a moment, allowing the player to enjoy the spot the difference effect as if hint effect C was not being used. Therefore, while it is possible to extend the display time of hint effect C, it is preferable not to be able to shorten it.

The star-shaped figure as the hint effect C may also be displayed immediately before the start of the spot-the-difference performance (before the board image A is displayed, for example, when the start screen of the spot-the-difference performance is displayed). This allows the player to operate to display the hint effect C in advance when it is confirmed that the spot-the-difference performance will start, allowing the player to enjoy spot-the-difference performance in an advantageous situation (a situation in which it is easy to find the mistake) from the start of the spot-the-difference performance. It is preferable not to change the display time of the hint effect C, whether the hint effect C is displayed after the spot-the-difference performance has started or just before the start of the spot-the-difference performance. This means that if the hint effect C is displayed before the start of the spot-the-difference performance, the time during which the hint effect C is displayed during the spot-the-difference performance will be shorter than if the hint effect C is displayed after the start of the spot-the-difference performance, which is a disadvantage for the player, and allows for a wider range of choices regarding when to display the hint effect C.

In addition, in this example, a star-shaped figure is displayed in hint effect C, but it does not have to be a star-shaped figure; as explained in hint effect B, an arrow, a pictogram (pictorial symbol), a triangle, or a home base-shaped figure may be displayed. However, if what is displayed in hint effect C closely resembles a component installed in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible that the player will mistakenly believe that what is displayed in hint effect C is the "answer" to the spot the difference effect, so it is desirable for the display to make it clear that it is "what is displayed as hint effect C."

Furthermore, for hint performance C, the position where the star-shaped figure is displayed on the screen is not fixed, and the position can be displayed randomly. Such star-shaped figures are displayed in a position that does not cover the "answer" point of the spot the difference performance or its vicinity, but may be displayed in a position that covers part of the board image A or a position that does not cover part of the board image A. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 223(B), the star-shaped figure may be displayed in a position on the screen that is not intended by the player. Specifically, when hint performance C is executed, the star-shaped figure is displayed at a distant position to the left of the board image A, and does not cover part of the board image A. In this way, even if hint performance C is executed, if the star-shaped figure does not cover part of the board image A, it cannot be used as a hint for the spot the difference performance, and the player can also pay attention to where the star-shaped figure is displayed.

In addition, the star-shaped figure as hint performance C is displayed in a position that covers part of the board image A but does not cover the images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B). However, as a modified example of hint performance C', it may be possible to display it in a position that covers not only part of the board image A but also part of the images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B). Specifically, the star-shaped figure as hint performance C' can be displayed in a higher layer than the question display and the meter showing the remaining time in hint performance A, and can be displayed in a position that covers the question display and the meter showing the remaining time. As shown in FIG. 223(C), when the star-shaped figure covers the question display in hint performance A at (1), it can be made difficult to read the specific content of the question display. On the other hand, when the star-shaped figure covers the meter showing the remaining time in hint performance A at (2), it can be made difficult to grasp the detailed remaining time. In this way, the star-shaped figure as hint effect C' can be displayed in a position that covers part of the image related to the other hint effects (hint effect A and hint effect B), thereby increasing the difficulty of the spot the difference effect.

However, for players who are skilled at spot the difference performances, it is easy to find the "answer" to the spot the difference performance, which can reduce interest. In this example, by making it possible to execute not only hint performance C, which lowers the difficulty of the spot the difference performance, but also hint performance C', which increases the difficulty of the spot the difference performance, even players who are skilled at spot the difference performance can challenge the spot the difference performance at an increased difficulty level, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, since hint performance C and hint performance C' are executed by the player operating the operating means, a player who does not want to increase the difficulty level of the spot the difference performance can enjoy the spot the difference performance without increasing the difficulty level of the spot the difference performance by not operating the operating means.

Whether hint performance C or hint performance C' is executed, that is, whether to cover a part of the image related to the other hint performance (hint performance A or hint performance B), may be selected according to the operation unit operated by the player. For example, when a first operation unit (e.g., the up-down button of the setting adjustment button 204 consisting of four push buttons arranged in a front-back and left-right direction) is operated among the multiple operation units, hint performance C is executed and a star-shaped figure is displayed so as not to cover a part of the image related to the other hint performance (hint performance A or hint performance B), making the difficulty level of the spot-the-difference performance easier, while when a second operation unit (e.g., the left-right button of the setting adjustment button 204) is operated, hint performance C' is executed and a star-shaped figure is displayed so as to cover a part of the image related to the other hint performance (hint performance A or hint performance B), making the difficulty level of the spot-the-difference performance higher. This can increase the interest of both players who want to execute hint performance C to make the difficulty level lower and players who want to execute hint performance C' to make the difficulty level higher.

In addition, it is desirable that the manager or player be able to set the position where the star-shaped figure is displayed in hint effect C and hint effect C'. For example, it is desirable that the manager or player be able to set appropriately whether or not the star-shaped figure is allowed to be displayed in a position that does not cover part of the board image A in hint effect C, or whether or not the star-shaped figure is allowed to be displayed so as to cover part of the image related to other hint effects (hint effect A or hint effect B) by executing hint effect C'. Even if hint effect C' is set to be able to be displayed so as to cover part of the image related to other hint effects (hint effect A or hint effect B), this does not restrict the execution of hint effect C, and it is possible for the star-shaped figure to be displayed in a position that does not cover part of the board image A, or for the star-shaped figure to be displayed so as to cover part of the image related to other hint effects (hint effect A or hint effect B).

In addition, the star-shaped figures in hint performance C and hint performance C' are displayed in a higher layer than the images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B), so that it is possible to inform the player that the star-shaped figures displayed in the higher layer are displayed by the player's operation. Even if images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B) are displayed after the star-shaped figures in hint performance C and hint performance C' are displayed, it is desirable to display the star-shaped figures displayed by the player's operation in the higher layer. For example, if the images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B) are displayed in the higher layer in the order in which the hint performances are displayed, even though the star-shaped figure in hint performance C' is displayed in order to increase the difficulty level, the star-shaped figure will be covered by the images related to other hint performances (hint performance A and hint performance B) displayed in the higher layer, and the difficulty level will not be increased sufficiently. In this example, regardless of the order in which the hint effects are displayed, the star-shaped figure that is displayed by the player's operation is displayed on a higher layer, making it possible for hint effect C' to cover part of the image related to other hint effects (hint effect A and hint effect B), thereby sufficiently increasing the difficulty level.

At the start of hint performance A and hint performance B, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker, but at the start of hint performance C and hint performance C', a predetermined sound effect is also output from the speaker, making it easier for the player to understand that "hint performance C (hint performance C') has started" by his own operation. At the start of hint performance C and hint performance C', a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker, but at the end of hint performance C and hint performance C', a restriction is made so that sound effects related to the end of hint performance C and hint performance C' are not output. However, at the end of hint performance C and hint performance C', sound effects related to the end of hint performance C and hint performance C' may be output, and in such a configuration, it is desirable to output a sound effect different from the sound effect output at the start of hint performance C and hint performance C'. This makes it possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that hint performance C and hint performance C' will start at the end of hint performance C and hint performance C'. Furthermore, as described above, if the display time of hint effect C is extended by the player operating the operating means, a sound effect related to the extension of the display time of hint effect C (such as "Extended!") is output from the speaker when the operating means is operated, making it easier for the player to understand that "the display time of hint effect C has been extended" by his or her own operation.

Next, hint effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 224. Hint effect D is an effect in which, as the spot-the-difference effect progresses, the area around the "answer" of the spot-the-difference effect in board image A is enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 224(A), before hint effect D starts, substantially the entirety of board image A is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, a meter indicating the remaining time for hint effect A is displayed at the bottom of the screen in a layer higher than board image A. In this example, before the enlarged display of hint effect D starts, other hint effects such as a meter indicating the remaining time are displayed, but other hint effects such as a meter indicating the remaining time may be displayed after the enlarged display of hint effect D is completed. In this way, when the enlarged display of hint effect D is executed first, the player can know from the beginning that the "answer" to the spot the difference effect is in the enlarged area, allowing the player to efficiently find the difference.

As shown in FIG. 224(B), when hint performance D starts, the vicinity of the location of the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance in the board image A is enlarged and displayed. In this enlarged display, the board image A is gradually enlarged as time passes. In addition, by enlarging and displaying the vicinity of the location of the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance, the other part of the board image A is outside the screen of the performance display device 1600 and is not displayed on the screen. At this point, the lower area of the board image A, for example, the area corresponding to the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 on the game board 5, is not displayed on the screen. In this way, by executing the enlarged display in hint performance D, it is possible to know that the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance is in the enlarged area, and that the "answer" of the spot-the-difference performance is not in the area that is no longer displayed on the screen.

As shown in FIG. 224(C), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of hint effect D, the enlarged display is stopped. At this point, the lower area of board image A as well as the left area, for example the areas corresponding to the obstacle pegs located in the left area of the game board 5, are not displayed on the screen. In this way, with hint effect D, the area of board image A displayed on the screen narrows as time passes, allowing the player to efficiently find the mistake.

In this example, the enlarged display in hint performance D gradually enlarges board image A as time passes, but it may also be configured to display the enlarged version of board image A in stages each time a predetermined time passes. Also, in this example, the enlarged display in hint performance D is executed after the spot the difference performance is started and the remaining time is subtracted, but it may also be configured to start the spot the difference performance and start subtracting the remaining time after the enlarged display in hint performance D is completed. In this way, if the enlarged display in hint performance D is executed first, the player can know from the beginning that the "answer" to the spot the difference performance is in the enlarged area, allowing the player to efficiently find the difference.

Furthermore, hint performance D can be executed simultaneously with other hint performances, and the case where it is executed simultaneously with other hint performances will be explained with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225(A) shows a case where hint performances A to C are executed before the start of the enlarged display in hint performance D, and FIG. 225(B) shows a case where hint performances A to C are executed after the enlarged display in hint performance D has been completed.

As shown in FIG. 225(A), before the enlarged display of hint effect D begins, the effect display device 1600 displays in predetermined positions the question text display and a meter indicating the remaining time as hint effect A, a right-facing arrow as hint effect B, and a star-shaped figure as hint effect C. At this time, the displays of hint effects A to C cover a portion of board image A.

As shown in FIG. 225(B), when the enlarged display in hint performance D is completed, the display display device 1600 displays the question display as hint performance A, the meter showing the remaining time, the right-pointing arrow as hint performance B, and the star-shaped figure as hint performance C in the same positions as before the enlarged display started. At this time, the objects of hint performances A to C cover part of the board image A, but they cover different parts than before the enlarged display started. In other words, the positions where the objects of hint performances A to C are displayed are the same before and after the enlarged display in hint performance D, but when the board image A in the background is enlarged, the parts of the board image A covered by the objects of hint performances A to C change. In this way, the enlarged display in hint performance D enlarges the board image A in the background, but it shows that there is no "answer (the part that is incorrect)" in the spot the difference display not only at the time the enlarged display is completed, but also in the parts of the board image A covered before the enlarged display is completed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 225(A), before the enlarged display in hint effect D begins, the area in board image A that corresponds to the launch rails (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) of the game board 5 is covered by the question statement displayed as hint effect A, whereas as shown in FIG. 225(B), when the enlarged display in hint effect D is completed, that area is not covered by the question statement displayed as hint effect A. In this way, although the area in board image A that corresponds to the launch rails (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) of the game board 5 is not covered when the enlarged display is completed, it is possible to inform the player that it will not be the "answer" in the spot the difference display because it was covered before the enlarged display was completed.

In addition, in the enlarged display in hint effect D, board image A is gradually enlarged as time passes, so that the parts of board image A covered by the objects in hint effects A to C gradually change. This makes it possible to keep the player's attention on the enlarged display from start to finish, since the parts of board image A covered during the enlarged display in hint effect D also indicate that they do not contain the "answer (the incorrect part)" in the spot the difference effect.

In the above, in addition to hint effect D, hint effects A to C are executed simultaneously, but the question statement and the meter showing the remaining time as hint effect A, the right-facing arrow as hint effect B, and the star-shaped figure as hint effect C (hint effect C') are displayed so that they do not cover each other. This does not impair the original purpose of each display; for example, because the question statement display as hint effect A is not covered, the specific content of the question statement display can be read, and because the meter showing the remaining time as hint effect A is not covered, the exact remaining time can be grasped.

On the other hand, when hint effects A to C are executed simultaneously, the display of the question statement as hint effect A, the meter showing the remaining time, the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B, and the star-shaped figure as hint effect C (hint effect C') may be displayed so that one display object covers the other display object. For example, as shown in FIG. 225(C), when the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B covers part of the question statement display as hint effect A, the area of the board image A covered by the question statement display and the right-pointing arrow becomes narrower than when they are not covered, so the difficulty of the spot the difference display can be increased. Note that the right-pointing arrow is displayed in a position that does not cover the characters in the question statement display, but it may be displayed in a position that covers the characters in the question statement display. Also, when the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B covers the meter showing the remaining time as hint effect A, the right-pointing arrow may be displayed in a position where the remaining time cannot be grasped.

Even if the question display as hint effect A, the meter showing the remaining time, the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B, and the star-shaped figure as hint effect C (hint effect C') are displayed so as to cover each other, it is desirable to display the star-shaped figure displayed by the player's operation on a higher layer. Also, even if the question display as hint effect A, the meter showing the remaining time, and the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B are displayed so as not to cover each other, the star-shaped figure as hint effect C (hint effect C') can cover images related to other hint effects (hint effect A and hint effect B), and is displayed on a higher layer than images related to other hint effects (hint effect A and hint effect B). This makes it possible to inform the player that the star-shaped figure displayed on the higher layer is displayed by the player's operation.

Next, for the above-mentioned hint effects A to C, the positions at which the display objects of hint effects A to C are displayed are fixed, but in this example, a case where the positions at which the display objects of hint effects A to C are displayed move will be described with reference to FIG. 226. In this example, the position at which board image A is displayed is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 226(A), when hint effects A to C are executed, the effect display device 1600 displays the following display objects that can cover part of the board image A: a question display as hint effect A, a right-facing arrow as hint effect B, and a star-shaped figure as hint effect C, and these display objects are displayed in their initial positions. The display objects of hint effects A to C can each be moved from their initial positions to a predetermined position. The movement path may be a straight path or a path that changes direction randomly.

As shown in FIG. 226(B), the objects in hint effects A to C each move from their initial positions to a position to the right, but this movement stops before the remaining time in the spot the difference effect reaches 0. At this time, the objects in hint effects A to C cover part of the board image A, but they cover different parts than when they were in their initial positions. In other words, the parts of the board image A covered by the objects in hint effects A to C change before and after the objects in hint effects A to C move. In this way, when the objects in hint effects A to C move, it is indicated that there is no "answer (the part that is incorrect)" in the spot the difference effect not only at the point when the movement is completed, but also in the parts of the board image A that they cover before the movement is completed.

In addition, as the displayed objects of hint effects A to C move along a predetermined path, the areas of the board image A covered by the displayed objects of hint effects A to C gradually change. For example, as shown in FIG. 226(C), when the displayed objects of hint effects A to C move linearly to the right, the areas of the board image A covered by the displayed objects of hint effects A to C gradually change to the right. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the moving display from start to finish, since the areas of the board image A covered by the displayed objects of hint effects A to C while they are moving indicate that there is no "answer (the incorrect part)" in the spot the difference effect.

In this example, the displayed objects of hint effects A to C are all moved in the same direction, to the right, but the moving direction and moving path of each may be different. For example, among the displayed objects of hint effects A to C, the question display as hint effect A can be moved downward, the right-pointing arrow as hint effect B can be moved to the right, and the star-shaped figure as hint effect C can be fixed without moving from its initial position. If the moving directions of the displayed objects of hint effects A to C are made different, even if the displayed objects of hint effects A to C are displayed so that they do not cover each other when they are in their initial positions, it is possible for one displayed object to be displayed so as to cover the other displayed object after the movement. Also, if the moving directions of the displayed objects of hint effects A to C are made different, even if the displayed objects of hint effects A to C are displayed so that they do not cover each other when they are in their initial positions, it is possible for them to be displayed so that they do not cover each other after the movement. This allows the area showing that there is no "answer (the incorrect part)" in the spot the difference presentation to change depending on the direction and path that the displayed objects in hint presentations A to C move, so the player can focus on the moving display from start to finish.

In this example, the displayed objects in hint effects A to C are displayed so that their orientation is fixed and does not change from the initial position, but the displayed objects may be displayed so that their orientation changes from the initial position. For example, the star-shaped figure in hint effect C is displayed with one apex pointing up in the initial position, but it is possible to rotate the star-shaped figure and display it so that one apex points down and its orientation changes to a downward direction. In this way, even though it is a star-shaped figure, a circle can be drawn with the star-shaped figure at the center, and it can be shown that there is no "answer (the incorrect part)" in the spot the difference effect anywhere in the circle.

In the above, for example, when the star-shaped figure as hint effect C is displayed facing upward, it is possible to display it so as not to cover the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A, and when it is displayed facing downward, it is possible to display it so as to cover the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A. In this way, for hint effects A to C, depending on the orientation of the displayed object, it is possible to change between a state in which the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A is covered and a state in which the part is not covered, depending on the orientation of one displayed object displayed on a higher layer. Also, for hint effects A to C, depending on the orientation of one displayed object displayed on a higher layer, it is possible to change between a state in which the other displayed object displayed on a lower layer is covered and a state in which the other displayed object displayed on a higher layer is not covered, depending on the orientation of one displayed object displayed on a lower layer. This allows attention to be drawn to the orientation of the displayed object when hint effects A to C are executed.

The displayed objects of hint effects A to C may be displayed so that their size changes from the initial position by enlarging or shrinking. For example, when the right-facing arrow as hint effect B is enlarged, it can be displayed so that it covers the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A, and when it is reduced, it can be displayed so that it does not cover the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A. In this way, hint effects A to C can be changed to a state in which the part corresponding to the specified member in the board image A is covered or not covered by the displayed object by enlarging or shrinking the displayed object. Also, hint effects A to C can be changed to a state in which the other displayed object displayed in the lower layer is covered or not covered by the displayed object displayed in the upper layer by enlarging or shrinking one of the displayed objects displayed in the upper layer. Similarly, hint effects A to C can be changed to a state in which the other displayed object displayed in the upper layer is covered or not covered by the displayed object displayed in the lower layer by enlarging or shrinking one of the displayed objects displayed in the lower layer. This allows attention to be drawn to the enlargement or shrinkage of the displayed object when hint effects A to C are executed.

Next, the end display after the spot the difference performance is completed will be described with reference to FIG. 227. In this example, when the remaining time of the spot the difference performance reaches 0 and the display of board image A is completed, the performance display device 1600 displays an end display to inform the player that the spot the difference performance has ended. However, regarding the hint performance that was being performed during the spot the difference performance, the hint performance may be hidden during the end display, or the hint performance may be continued to be displayed even during the end display.

First, the case where the hint effect is hidden during the end display will be described below. As shown in FIG. 227(A), when the remaining time for the spot the difference effect reaches 0 and the display of board image A ends, the effect display device 1600 hides the hint effect that was running during the spot the difference effect, and displays only the end display to inform the player that the spot the difference effect has ended. Specifically, as the end display, a message saying "Spot the difference finished! The answer will be announced" is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, by hiding the hint effect that was running during the spot the difference effect at the same time as ending the display of board image A, it is possible to know at a glance that the spot the difference effect has ended.

Next, the case where the hint effect is continued to be displayed during the end display will be explained below. As shown in FIG. 227(B), when the remaining time of the find the difference effect reaches 0 and the display of board image A ends, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the hint effect that was being executed during the find the difference effect, and displays an end display in a layer higher than these hint effects to inform the player that the find the difference effect has ended. At this time, the hint effect that was being executed during the find the difference effect continues to be displayed, but the hint effect that was not being executed during the find the difference effect is not displayed.

However, as mentioned above, when the hint effect is forcibly hidden during the end display, the history of whether or not the hint effect was executed during the spot the difference effect is not retained. In the gaming machine industry today, players may take and save photos of the ball payout results they have achieved or effects that are difficult to appear, or share them with other players. If there is a player who wants to take and save the results of such a spot the difference effect, if the hint effect is hidden during the end display, even if the player finds the "answer" of the spot the difference effect in a high difficulty state without executing the hint effect, the execution status of the hint effect cannot be saved, and the player cannot feel a sense of superiority because there is no difference from the player who executed the hint effect. In this regard, during the end display, the hint effect that was executed during the spot the difference effect is continuously displayed, making it possible to show the execution status of the hint effect during the spot the difference effect. Therefore, players who are not executing the hint effect can take and save photos including the fact that the hint effect is not executed, and the display format can be differentiated from that of players who executed the hint effect.

In this example, all hint effects that were being executed during the spot the difference performance are displayed during the end display, but there may be hint effects that are hidden as soon as the spot the difference performance ends, and hint effects that continue to be displayed even after the spot the difference performance ends. In this case, it is preferable that the hint performance C, in which a star-shaped figure is displayed by the player's operation, continues to be displayed even after the spot the difference performance ends. As mentioned above, in addition to the hint performance C that makes the difficulty level easier, if it is possible to execute a hint performance C' that increases the difficulty level, whether or not the hint performance C' has been executed can be a barometer that indicates the difficulty level of the spot the difference performance. For this reason, if the hint performance C' is being executed during the spot the difference performance, it is preferable that it continues to be displayed during the end display after the spot the difference performance ends, and in that case, it is preferable that it be displayed in a higher layer than other performances such as the end display, so that it is noticeable that the hint performance C' was being executed during the spot the difference performance. Furthermore, as mentioned above, with regard to the hint effects that continue to be displayed after the spot the difference effect has ended, if the displayed objects of hint effects A to C move significantly, they may cover a large portion of the end display after the spot the difference effect has ended, and the player may not be properly informed that the end display has been displayed. For this reason, it is desirable that the displayed objects of hint effects A to C do not move significantly (are in roughly their initial positions). It is desirable that the displayed objects of hint effects that continue to be displayed after the spot the difference effect has ended do not move, but it is possible for the direction of the hint effects and their enlargement or reduction on the spot to change as long as they do not cover a large portion of the end display.

In this example, when hint effects A to C are being performed during the spot the difference performance, it is possible to cover a part of the board image A with the display objects of hint effects A to C. However, any part of the board image A may be covered as long as it does not contain the "answer (the part that is the mistake)" in the spot the difference performance. The part of the board image A to be covered can be set to cover a part or all of the part of the board image A that the player does not want to focus on. For example, the display objects of hint effects A to C may be displayed to cover the parts of the board image A that correspond to the various starting holes. As mentioned above, when the spot the difference performance is being performed during the non-variable display of the special symbols, the spot the difference performance is stopped when the ball enters the various starting holes, and the variable display of the special symbols is started. In this regard, if the parts of the board image A that correspond to the various starting holes are covered, it becomes difficult to focus on the covered parts, so it is possible to prevent the game ball from accidentally entering the starting hole during the spot the difference performance, even if the player does not want to end the spot the difference performance.

The covered portion of the board image A may be set so as not to cover the portion of the board image A that the player should pay attention to. For example, the game board 5 may be provided with a first ball entry port (e.g., a start port corresponding to a first special symbol) that stops the spot-the-difference presentation when a ball enters it, and a second ball entry port (e.g., a start port corresponding to a second special symbol) that continues the spot-the-difference presentation even if a ball enters it, and the display objects of the hint presentations A to C displayed during the spot-the-difference presentation may be displayed so as not to cover part or all of the portion corresponding to the first ball entry port in the board image A. This allows a player who wishes to end the spot-the-difference presentation to easily find the portion corresponding to the first ball entry port by visually checking the board image A, and to allow the game ball to enter the first ball entry port during the spot-the-difference presentation. On the other hand, the display objects of the hint presentations A to C displayed during the spot-the-difference presentation may be displayed so as to cover part or all of the portion corresponding to the second ball entry port in the board image A. This allows a player who wishes to end the spot-the-difference presentation to not need to visually check board image A to find the location that corresponds to the second ball entry port, and to understand that such a second ball entry port is an entry port that cannot end the spot-the-difference presentation.

The present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine as a gaming machine, but it is not limited to this and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case, the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which the player does not touch the gaming ball B, and gaming machines called managed gaming machines.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but this is not limited to this, and the performance display device 1600 may be attached to an eccentric position relative to the center of the set plate 1650. Also, in this embodiment, one performance display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, but this is not limited to this, and multiple performance display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 5c7 Step portion 1000 Front component 1020 Panel decoration portion 1021 Lower left panel decoration portion 1022 Upper panel decoration portion 1023 Lower right panel decoration portion 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1400 Function display unit 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit N Obstacle nail

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a main body frame and a game board attached to the main body frame,
A display device provided on the game board and capable of performing a predetermined display;
A performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance using at least the display device;
Equipped with
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect of displaying a board image imitating the game board on the display device based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition,
When the board image is displayed during the special effect, a specific effect of narrowing a visible area of the board image can be executed.

Images